VOL. 107, PARTS 1 & 2

31 MAY, 1983

Transactions of the

Royal Society of South

Australia

Incorporated

Contents

Milnes, A. R., Ludbrook, N. H., Lindsay, J. M. & Cooper, B. J. The succession

of Cainozoic marine sediments on Kangaroo Island, South Aus-

tralia - - - - - - - - - - - 1

Ludbrook, N. H. Moiluscan faunas on the Early Pleistocene Point Ellen Forma-

tion and Burnham Limestone, South Australia - - - 37

Lansbury, I. Notes on the Australasian species of Cymatia Flor s.i, (Insecta,

Heteroptera: Corixidae) - ~ - - - - - 51

Skinner, S. & Womersley, H. B. 8. New records (possibly introductions) of

Siriaria, Stictyosiphon and Arthrocladia (Phaeophyta) for

southern Australia - - - - - - - - 59

Shepherd, S. A. Benthic communities of upper Spencer Gulf, South Australia - 69

Davies, M., Martin, A. A. & Watson, G. F. Redefinition of the Hare lato-

palmata species group {(Anura: Hylidae) - - - - 87

Koste, W. & Shiel, R, J. Morphology, systematics and ecology of new mono-

gonont Rotifera (Rotatoria) from the Alligator Rivers region,

Northern Territory - - - - - - - - 109

Jell, P. A. A larger bivalve arthropod from Sake BLcOwiss 1 ia of

probable Cambrian Age - - 123

Brief communications:

Lindsay, J. M: Late Eocene to Late Oligocene age of the Kingscote Limestone,

Kangaroo Island, S.A. - ~ - - = - - - 127

Tyler, M. J. Neobatrachus sutor Main: a frog new to the fauna of South

Australia = - - - - - - - - - - 129

Tyler, M. J. & Anstis, M. Replacement name for Liroria glandulosa ayist &

Anstis, 1975 (Anura: Hylidae) — - - - - - 130

Jago, J, B. & Hilyard, D. B. Comment: Late Precambrian-Cambrian stratigraphic

nomenclature in the Adelaide Geosyncline — - - - - 131

Preiss, W. V. Reply: Late Precambrian-Cambrian stratigraphic nomenclature

in the Adelaide Geosyncline - - - - . - -- 133

Glover, C. J. M. Additions to the marine-fish fauna of South Australia — - - 134

Lange, R. T. Estimation of sheep stocking intensity at any location in arid

zone paddocks = : - - - - - - See isis

Hutton, J. T. Soluble ions in rainwater collected near Alice Springs, N.T.,

and their relation to locally derived atmospheric dust - - 138

PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS

STATE LIBRARY BUILDING, NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE, S.A. 5000

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

VOL. 107, PART 1

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INC.

CONTENTS, VOL. 107, 1983

PARTS 1 & 2, 31 MAY

Milnes, A. R., Ludbrook, N. H., Lindsay, J. M. & Cooper, B. J. The succession

of Cainozoic marine sediments on Kangaroo Island, South Aus-

tralia - = = 5 3 = = = = = =

Ludbrook, N. H. Molluscan faunas of the Early Pleistocene Point Ellen Forma-

tion and Burnham Limestone, South Australia - - -

Lansbury, I. Notes on the Australasian species of Cymatia Flor s.l. (Insecta,

Heteroptera: Corixidae) - - - - - - -

Skinner, S. & Womersley, H. B. S. New records (possibly introductions) of

Striaria, Stictyosiphon and Arthrocladia (iba? for

southern Australia - - 3 4 2

Shepherd, S. A. Benthic communities of upper Spencer Gulf, South Australia -

Davies, M., Martin, A. A. & Watson, G. F. Redefinition of the Litoria lato-

palmata species group (Anura: Hylidae) - - - - -

Koste, W. & Shiel, R. J. Morphology, systematics and ecology of new mono-

gonont Rotifera (Rotatoria) from the ee Rivers ian

Northern Territory -

Jell, P. A. A larger bivalve arthropod er SADME Edeowie- 1 well af

probable Cambrian Age - - - - : ; 7

Brief communications:

Lindsay, J. M. Late Eocene to Late Oligocene age of the Kingscote Limestone,

Kangaroo Island, S.A. - - - - - - - -

Tyler, M. J. Neobatrachus sutor Main: a frog new to the fauna of South

Australia - - - - - > =

Tyler, M. J. & Anstis, M. Rawincament: name for Litoria glandulosa Tyler &

Anstis, 1975 (Anura: Hylidae) - - - - -

Jago, J. B. & Hilyard, D. B. Comment: Late Precambrian-Cambrian stratigraphic

nomenclature in the Adelaide Geosyncline - - - -

Preiss, W, V. Reply: Late Precambrian-Cambrian stratigraphic nomenclature

in the Adelaide Geosyncline - - - - - - -

Glover, C. J. M. Additions to the marine fish fauna of South Australia - -

Lange, R. T. Estimation of sheep stocking intensity at any location in arid

zone paddocks - - - - - - - - -

Hutton, J. T. Soluble ions in rainwater collected near Alice Springs, N.T.,

and their relation to locally derived atmospheric dust - -

137

138

PARTS 3 & 4, 30 NOVEMBER

Barker, S. New synonyms and new species of Stigmodera (Castiarina)

(Coleoptera: Buprestidae) - - - - - - -

Plummer, P.S. Correlation of the uppermost Late Precambrian Succession

across the Torrens Hinge Zone in the Port Augusta region of

South Australia - - - - - - - - -

Slansky, E. Halloysite in a weathered profile at Port Macquarie, New

South Wales - - - = 5 a Z je 2

Kailola, P. J. Arius graeffei and Arius armiger: valid names for two com-

mon species of Australo-Papuan fork-tailed catfishes (Pisces,

Ariidae) - - - - - - - - - -

Banks, C. B., Birkett, J. R., Dunn, R. W. & Martin, A. A. Development of

Litoria infrafrenata (Anura: Hylidae) - - - - -

Shepley, E. A. & Womersley, H. B. S. The Dumontiaceae ee

Rhodophyta) of southern Australia - - -

Dulhunty, J. A. Lunettes of Lake Eyre North, South Australia - - -

Skinner, S. Some freshwater Chlorophyta from the Bool Lagoon system

in south-eastern South Australia - - - - - -

Harvey, C. A new species of Nephrurus Cepeiia: Gekkonidae) from South

Australia - - - - - - - - -

Tyler, M. J., Davies, M. & Martin, A. A. The frog fauna of this Barkly Table-

land, Northern Territory - - - S 4 ie

Tyler, M. J., Watson, G. F. & Davies, M. Additions to the frog fauna of the

Northern Territory - - - - - = c

Brief communications:

Mawson, P. M. On the status of some nematode species from Australian

birds - - - - - - - - - - -

Riley, G. G., Milnes, A. R. & Bourman, R. P. Landscape models for earth

science research - - - - - - - - -

Wright, M. J. Red-brown hardpans and associated soils in Australia - -

139

171

177

187

197

201

219

223

231

237

243

247

249

252.

Insert to Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia, Vol. 107, Parts 3 & 4, 30 November, 1983

THE SUCCESSION OF CAINOZOIC MARINE SEDIMENTS ON

KANGAROO ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY A. R. MILNES, N. H. LUDBROOK, J. M. LINDSAY & B. J. COOPER

Summary

Kangaroo Island has a more complete, although discontinuous, sequence of Cainozoic marine

sediments than has been formerly recognised. Upper units of the predominantly Late Eocene

bryozoal limestones at Kingscote are shown to be of Oligocene age. The wide occurrence of

Miocene limestones is indicated by isolated outcrop remnants and by the inclusion of Miocene

clasts in aeolian calcarenite and calcrete. The presence of Early Plicene as well as Late Pliocene

sandy limestones and calcareous sandstones is recognised for the first time. Richly fossilferous

limestones at Port Ellen, near Point Reynolds, and at Cape Willoughby are shown to be of Early

Pleistocene age. Late Pleistocene and Holocene sediments with abundant Mollusca are confined to

lowland areas adjacent to the present coastline.

THE SUCCESSION OF CAINOZOTC MARINE SEDIMENTS ON

KANGAROO ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by A. R, Micnes*, N. H. Lupprook’, J, M. Linvsayt & B, J. Coorert

Summary

Mirpnus, A, R.. Lupprook, N, H.. Lanpsay. J, M. & Cooper, B,J, (1983) The succession of

Cainozore murine sediments on Kangaroo Island, South Australia. Trans, Ro Sue, do Aust

7019. 1-35, 31 May. 1983,

Kangaroo Estland has a more complete, although discontinuous, sequence of Cyinazaic

nrarine sediments than hes been formerly recognised, Upper units of the predominantly Late

Pocene bryozoal limestones at Kingscote ore shown to be of Oligocene uge, The wide occur

rence of Miocene limestones ix indicated by isolated outcrop remnants and by rhe imelusion

of Miocene clasts in aeolian calearenite and culerete. The presence of Early Pliocene as well

as Late Pliocene sandy limestones and calcareous sandstones is recognised for the first time.

Richly fossiliferous limestones at Point Ellen, near Point Reynolds, and ut Cape Willoughby

are shown to be of Early Pleistocene age. Late Pleistocene und Holocene sediments with

abundant Mollusca are confined to lowland areas adjacent to the present coastline,

Two new formations are numed and described: the Focene-Oligucene Kingseote Vime-

stone, and the Early Pleistocene Point Ellen Formation.

The vecurrence of the Cainozoic limestones at various elevations and their ages ay derer-

mined trom palacontological data provide the framework for an interpretation of the geological

history of the Iskind, and a basis for understanding landscape development and soil formation.

Evidetiee for encroachment of jhe Late Eocene to Middle Oligocene seas is not found far

beyond the modern coasts of Kangaroo Island. At that time, the Jurassic Wisunger Basult

was exposed to erosion in adjacent lands and shed clasts into the marine enviyonment. A

major transgression in the Early Miocene resulted in widespread deposition of shiullaw marine

limestones, even on parts of the pluteau province presently at clevations in excess of LOU m-

Following regression of the seas in the Middle Miocene, extensive weathering, erosion, und

reworking of these limestones was initiated. Much of the carbanale in the calcretes that occur

at high levels in the present landscape as duricrusts on relict Jandsuifaces as well as accumuli-

tion horizons within sail profiles may have bee released to the regolith from the Miocene

sediments il this time,

The seas again advanced onto the margins ef Kangaroo Island in the Early Pliocene and

bad extended into low inland areas by the Lule Pliocene, depositing shallaw-water sbelly lime-

stones. Furly Pleistocene marine sediments along the southern coust are overlain by thick

avolian carbunale sediments referred to the Bridgewater Formation. Complex calcrete profiles

on these deposits signify un important hiatus and erosional break probably corresponding with

uplift along the Cygnet Fault in the Middle Pleistocene.

Late Pleistocene beach deposits ure recognised widely, and suffered reworking und imprez-

nulion by secondary carbonate following uo lowering of sea-level prior to advance of dhe Holo-

cene sens.

Key Worps: Kangaroo (sland, Camozolc, Eocene. Oligocene, Miovene, Plivcene, Pleisto-

cene, Holocene, Kingscote Limestone. Pout Ellen Formation, landscape development, caleretes,

Introduction

Research on the origin and development of

surficial terrestrial carbonate sceumulalions

(caleéretes) has concentrated on broad areas in

southern Australia where their widespread djs-

tribution can be explained broadly in terms of

(a) climatic regime, since carbonates are most

likely to survive in semi-arid landscupes where

leaching i Ael a dominant factor; und (bh)

V CSIRO Division of Soils, Private Bag No, 2.

Glen Osmond, S. Aust. 3064,

| Department of Mines & Energy, P.O. Box [51,

Ensatwood, S. Aust. 5063.

the proximity and availubility of long-lterns

sources of carhonate (Milnes & Hulton 1983).

Iu fact, the main saurees of secondary vateiium

carbonate jn southern Australia huve been

fossiliferous Cainozore marine limestanes, and

extensive strundlines of Late Cainozore bio-

clasitg bench and dune sunds, both of which

flank the modern coast,

On Kanguroo tslind, caleretes ar istri-

buted throughout the landscape ul elevations

ranging from present sea-level to the heh

plateau. more than 120 m above sea-level.

Careful examination of many outcrops has re-

2 Aok. MIENES. NH, LUDRRDOK, J, M, LINDSAY & RB. J, COOPER

vented! fossiliferous Cainozuic manne lime-

stones Which eanstitate the parent material,

These provided (he source for the valeium

curbunale whieh. during exposure, weather

and erosin oof the limestone, was mobilised

ind reprecipitaled as secondary carhonate

litilings, intimated crusts -and sinds on clusts

thot ure characteristig of culerete deposits. In

many cases, the caleretes display evidence of 2

comtples histary involving many phises of

cansiruiction and degradation, Nevertheless, it

18 parcnt limestone which provides clues to the

chronology of lundseape development and the

furmaron of the culerctes.

Little is Known in any detail of the Cuino-

zoie geology al Warigaran Island, ulthough

parts of the fosstliferaus succession were brielly

desertbed as early as 1816 by Peron and 1883

by Tate. This is largely due to the sporadic

and obscure fatuce of the outcrops and the

almost complete #hsence of sequential sections.

The Istand is essentially a southwestward ex-

Iensiag of Fleurieu Peninsula m the southern

path of the Delamerian (Early Palacozvic)

fold belt forming the Mount Lofty Ranges

The region has also heen referred to ax the

Kangeroo Istand—Pleurieu Peninsula elevated

vone (Gluessaer & Wade 1958). The nature af

ihe basement west and south of the Tslind

is not yet filly known (Ludbrook 1980. Fig.

1) Gerdes 1982). During the Cainnzoie, up-

Nit) of the Maunt Lofty Ranges by block-fault

ing and tiltine positioned the [sland medially

between three mujer marine basins: the Si

Vineent Basin. rhe Murray Basin and the

Duntmon Ambayment of the Creat Australian

Bight Basin, As a consequence. Kangaroo

Isimd received 4 suecession of marine sedi-

iments (rom the Late Eocene onwards. Frosion

(Mroushouwt the Calnozoje removed much of the

reverd, whieh has to be deduced from thin

remnants. floaters in fields, jnelusions in

younger sediments or even calcrete, and to

some extent fram herecholes.

Theuech sparse gnc nowhere stratigruphically

contimaus. the sediments are significuntly

more esiensive and together represent 2 more

complete Canazeic succession than has been

reenuinised, They occur mastly as onteroy

reirinnls wt varinus levels in the landscape and

visa tn he subsurface.

In This paper. the field rekwtionships, dis-

reiburion, lithdlogy and pataeontology of many

olllerops pie considered, lovether with datu for

Material avatlahte frou borehales. Although

it as clear from field and laboratory studies

that our knowledge of the Cainozoic geolopy

of the Islund is still incomplete, we have

assembled sufligient data on the fossil content

aid ages of the sediments to euable us to

oulline a sueeession of both ‘Tertiary and

Quutemary marine sediments which can be

correlated with sequences in adjacent basins it

stithern Australia. Moreover, our data provide

the framework for an interpretation of the

geological history of Kangaroo Island through

the Cainozaie, and 4 basis for examinin the

development af the contemporary fandscupe

anal soils,

Palaeontologieal data ure based principally

on studies of the Foraminifera and Mollusca,

Foraminifera have been relied upon almost

entirely to date Palacogene strata, Foramini-

fera and Molluscs the Miocene and Farly

Pliocene, and Mollusea the Late Pliocene and

Quaternary. The foraminiferal sequence is set

out in Table i, and that of the Mollusea. in

Table 2.

Apart from thin sections, all material used

in the study is held in either the Geological

Survey of South Australia (GSSA) Palacon-

tological Collection, or the CSIRO Division of

Suils. Thin sections prefixed M are held by

CSIRO Division of Soils, and those prefixed P

by Australian Mineral Development lahora-

tories.

Previous studies

The establishment of a Cainozoic succession

on Kungaroo Esland has proceeded sporadically

in three principal stages, the first two of which

Were concerned largely with observations on

the bryozou! limestanes exposed in the coastal

clits at Kingseote. Contributors to the first

stage were Tale (IS83), Howchin (1899,

1903), ond Chapman (1915) who relied

mainly on echinoids to determine the age and

correlation of the limestones. In the second

stage, a significant step forward was made with

the publication of a seties of papers between

1935 yncd 14S9 hy Glaessmner, Wade, and

Carter, using foraminitera as a means of cor-

rchaling the limestones with similar murine

sediments in the St Vineeur Basin. During the

third stage from 1959 to the present, aided by

more extensive collecting over much of the

eastern part of the [sland, u Neogene and

Quaternary succession has emerged. Untor-

fumately, the work af Bauer (1959) was not

published: the material referred to in his thesis

has been recolleeted and reassessed,

CAINOZOIC KANGAROO ISLAND

TABLE 1. Stratigraplic ranges of selected foraminifera, Kangaroo Island.

FORAMINIFERA

= 7

LATE |but not

latest] EOCENE

Latest EOCENE to

MIDDLE OLIGOCENE

Early LATE

OLIGOCENE

Late EARLY to

MIDDLE MIOCENE

EARLY PLIOCENE

Chiloguembelina cubensis (Palmer)

Globigerinatheka index (Finlay)

Subbotina angiporoides (Hornibrook)

Subbotina linaperta (Finlay)

Subhotina sp. ex gr.S, angiporoides — 8, linaperta

Tenuitella gemma (Jenkins)

Tenuitella insolita (Jenkins)

Turborolalia opima nana (Bolh)

Asterigerinu adelaidensis (Howchin)

Asterigerina sp. ef, A. cyclops Dorreen

Asterigerina ap. ef A, waiareka inlay

Crespinina kingseotensis Wade

Qloborosalina westraliensts Quilty

Halkyardia bartrumi Parr

Linderina gloessner’ Quilty

Muslinella chapmani Glaessner & Wade

Planolinderina johunnae (Carter)

Pseudopalymorphina sp. ef, P. varteri Quilty

Quasibolivinella taylort: Quilty

Reussella finlayi Dorreen

Sherbornina atkinsoni Chapman

Wadella hamiltonensis (Glaessner & Wade)

Dimorphina janjukensis Crespin

Massilina torquayensis (Chapman)

Textularia sp. cf. 1. cuspis Winlay

Textularia sp. cf. T. marsdeni Finlay

Guembelitria samwelli Jenkins

Tenuitella munda (Jenkins)

Amphistegina sp.

Crespinella umbonifera (Howehin & Parr)

Elphidium chapman. Cushman

Klphidium rrassatum Cushman

Marginopora vertehralis Blainville

Porarotalia hamiltonensis (Parr)

Ammonia bevcaril (Lite)

(UVbieides oygnorum Carter

KMiphilium rotatim Howehin & Parr

Fabularia howchinié Schlumberger

Notoratalia clathrata (Brady)

Polymorphina sp. ef Po myrae Parr & Collins

Klphidium sp, ef. B. erispum (Linné)

Elphidiam sp, ef 1. adelaidense Howchin & Parr

—— = =

i mcf

LATE PLIOCENE

QUATERNARY

Baa

SADME

TABLE 2. Distribution of Late Cainozoic fossil molluscs.

Early

Pliocene

Late

Pliocene

Early

Pleisto-

cene

A. R. MILNES, N. H. LUDBROOK, J. M. LINDSAY & B. J. COOPER

Late

Pleisto-

cene

Holocene

BIVALVIA

ARCIDAE

Anadara trapezia Deshayes

Barbatia pistachia Lamarck

Barbutia sp.

CUCULLAEIDAE

Cucullaea praelonga Singleton

GLYCY MERIDIDAE

Glyeymeris sp.

Glycymeris (Tucetilla) radians (Lamarck )

G, (Tucetona) convexa (Tate)

G. (Veletuceta) pseudaustralis Singleton

MYTILIDAE

Brachidontes erosus (Lamarck )

B. (Austromytilus) rostratus (Dunker)

ISOGNOMONIDAE

Isognomon sp.

PECTINIDAE

Pecten benedictus albus Tate

Chlamys (Chlamys) antiaustralis (Tate)

C. (C.) asperrima (Lamarck)

C. (C.) asperrima dennanti Gatliff & Singleton

C. (Equichlamys) bifrons (Lamarck)

C. (E.) consobrina (Tate)

C. (E.) palmipes (Tate)

SPONDYLIDAE

Spondylus spondyloides (Tate)

OSTREIDAE

Ostrea angasi Sowerby

Ostrea sp.

LUCINIDAE

Wallucina assimilis (Angas)

Callucina lacteola (Tate)

Loripes sp.

Gibbolucina (Gibbolucina) salebrosa (Woods)

Anodontia sphericula (Basedaw)

Linga (Bellucina) sp. nov.

Divalucina cumingi (Adams & Angas)

Miltha hamptonensis Ludbrook

ERYCINIDAE

Melliteryx acupunctum (Hedley & May)

TRIGONIIDAE

Neotrigonia trua Cotton

CARDITIDAE

Pleuromeris sp. ef. P. subpecten Ludbrook

Cardita subdeceptiva Ludbrook

CRASSATELLIDAE

Eucrassatella kingicoloides (Pritchard)

CARDIIDAE

Acrosterigma praecygnorum (Ludbrook)

Fulvia tennicostata (Lamarck)

MACTRIDAE

Mactra sp. cf. M. pura Deshayes

Mactra australis Lamarck

Zenatia (Zenatiopsis) sp.

Anapella cycladea (Lamarck)

Spisula (Notospisula) trigenella (Lamarck)

MESODESMATIDAE

Amesodesma unzusta (Reeve)

A. cuneata (Lamarck)

TELLINIDAE

Tellina sp,

x *~ KK XK mx KM ~*~

patted padatad

x eK KK

«x

~*~

CAINOZOIC KANGAROO ISLAND

TABLE 2—continued.

Early

Pliocene

Late

Pliocene

Early

Pleisto-

cene

Late

Pleisto-

cene

Holocene

Tellina (Psendarcopagia) basedowi (Tate)

T. (Macomona) deltoidalis Lamarck

PSAMMOBIIDAE

Sanguinolaria (Psammotellina) biradiata (Wood)

S. (P.) donacioides (Reeve)

VENERIDAE

Katelysia peronii (Lamarck)

Katelysia rhytiphora (Lamy)

Katelysia scalarina (Lamarck)

Circe weedingi Cotton

Eumarcia fumigata (Sowerby)

Timoclea (Veremalpa) kendricki Ludbrook

Gafrarium perornatum Woods

CORBULIDAE

Corbula (Notocorhula) flindersi Cotton

CLEIDOTHAERIDAE

Cleidothaerus albidus (Lamarck)

MYOCHAMIDAE

Myadora corrugata Tate

SCAPHOPODA

DENTALIIDA

Dentalium latesulcatum Tate

GASTROPODA

HALIOTIDAE

Haliotis (Exohaliotis) cyclobates Peron &

Lesueur

Haliotis (Padollus) scalaris Leach

FISSURELLIDAE

Clypidina (Montfortula) rugosa (Quoy &

Gaimard)

PATELLIDAE

Patella (Scutellastra) laticostata Blainville

Patella (Scutellastra) peronii Blainyille

ACM AEIDAE

Patelloida nigrosulcata (Reeve)

TROCHIDAE

Thalotia conica (Gray)

Cantharidus (Phasianotrochus) eximius (Perry)

C.(P.) irisodontes (Quoy & Gaimard)

Claneulus (Isoclanculus) dunkeri (Koch)

Monodonta (Austrocochlea) constricta Lamarck

Calliostoma (Fautor) legrandi (Venison Woods)

Calliostoma (Salsipotens) armillatum Wood

Diloma (Chlorodiloma) adelaidae (Philippi)

Diloma (Fractarmilla) concamerata (Wood)

D.(F.) rudis (Gray)

Monilea euclensis Ludbrook

TURBINIDAE

Liotina (Munditia) hedleyi (Pritchard & Gatliff)

L.(M.) subquadrata (Tenison Woods)

Asiraea (Micrastraea) aurea (Jonas)

Astraea (Micrastraeca) rutidoloma (Tate)

Turbo (Ninella) torquatus Gmelin

Turbo (Subninella) undulatus Solander

NERITIDAE

Nerita sp. nov.

Nerita (Melanerita) atramentosa Reeve

PHASIANELLIDAE

Phasianella australis (Gmelin)

Phasianella angasi Crosse

*x-~

*x*x

“xx

KKKK MK OK

xx KKK KKMK KM OM x

~ KKK MK

6 A. R. MILNES, N. H. LUDBROOK, J. M. LINDSAY & BR. J. COOPER

TABLE 2—continued.

i ee

Early Late

Early Late Pleisto- Pleisto-

Pliocene Pliocene cene cene Holocene

LITTORINIDAE

Littorina (Austrolittorina) unifasciata Gray

Bembicium melanostoma (Gmelin) xX

Bembicium nanum (Lamarck) x

POM ATIOPSIDAE

Coxiella striata (Reeve) x

TURRITELLIDAE

Gazameda adelaidensis Cotton & Woods x

Gazameda iredalei Finlay xX

POTAMIDIDAE

Batillaria (Batillariella) estuarina (Tate)

Batillaria (Zeacumantus) diemenensis

(Quoy & Gaimard) x

Eubittium lawleyanum (Crosse)

DIASTOMATIDAE

Diastoma adelaidense Ludbrook x

Diastoma melanioides (Reeve) x

CERITHIIDAE

Diala lauta A, Adams x x

Bittium (Semibittium) granarium Kiener x

Campanile symbolicum Tredale x

Campanile triseriale Basedow 4

Hy potrochus monachus (Crosse & Fischer) x x

TANTHINIDAE

Hartungia dennanti chavani Ludbrook x

Hartungia dennanti dennanti (Tate) x

CAPULIDAE

Capulus sp. x

HIPPONICIDAE

Hipponix (Sabia) conicus (Schumacher)

Hipponix (Antisabia) erma (Cotton)

NATICIDAE

Polinices (Conuber) conicus (Lamarck) x

Sinum (Ectosinum) zonale (Quoy & Gaimard)

CYMATIIDAE

Cymatiella gaimardi lredale

Cymatiella verrucosa (Reeve) x x

MURICIDAE

Bedeva paivae (Crosse)

Lepsiella flindersi (Adams & Angas)

Thais orbita (Gmelin)

COLUMBELLIDAE

Mitrella acuminata (Menke)

Mitrella (Dentimitrella) lincolnensis (Reeve)

Mitrella (Dentimitrella) sp.

Euplica bidentata (Sowerby)

BUCCINIDAE

Cominella eburnea (Reeve) x

Cominella lineolata (Lamarck)

NASSARIIDAE

Niotha pauperata (Lamarck)

Niotha pyrrhus (Menke) x

FASCIOLARIIDAE

Propefusus undulatus (Perry)

Fusinus australis (Quoy & Gaimard)

OLIVIDAE

Amalda (Gracilispira) manilifera (Reeve)

VOLUTIDAE

Amoria (Amoaria) grayi Ludbrook x xX

Ericusa sp, ef. FE. ancilloides (Tate) x

CANCELLARITIDAE

Sydaphera undulata (Sowerby) x

~*~

xx ~ OK

Ete’

~*~

x Kx

KmKKK KKM

xx KK

CAINGZOIC KANGAROO ISLAND 7

TABLE 2—conlinned.

Early Late

Early Late Pleisto- Pleisto-

Pliocene Pliocene cene cene Holocene

CONIDAR

Conus (Flaraconus) aiiemone Lamarck x

Conny sp. xX

BULLIDAE

Bulla botanica tledley x

SIPHONARLIIDAE

Siphonurta (Hubendickuly) hacett Reeve x x

AMPHIBOLIDAE

Salinator fragiliy (Lamarck) x x

FLLOBUDAE

Marinula xanthostomea HW, & A. Adams x

{in the earliest reference to the geology of

Kangaroo Island, Tate (/883) deseribed a

bryovoul Limestone in clift sections al Kings-

cole. tle considered this to be of Miocene age

from his identification of the echinoid Echiny-

lumpos gambierensix (a Miocene species) and

hy comparison With sediments of similar titho-

logy at Stansbury on Yorke Peninsula.

From two visits to the Island, Howchin

(1899, 1903) also deserthed the limestones in

the Kingscote cliffs and referred them to the

Eocene based on the presence of several echi-

noid species including Ausrrelantias longianty

(then placed ln Cassidyfus), Lchinelampeas

posterverussa and Pibularia wregata, He noted

in 1903 that the limestone filled “eroded

hollows ji Permian eluciverie clays’. A con-

glomerate wbout | m thick of rounded basalt

clasts in a carbonate mauix containing fossil

molluscs was seen to overlie the limestone at

three to lour metres above present sea level,

Howehin regarded this as a stranded Recent

cousiline deposit,

In addition, Howehin diseovered m 1899

an “inconspicuous, oulerop of Eocene linie-

stone” in section 317 hundred of Menzies,

ubowt 3,2 km southwest of Smith Bay, where

frayments of the fossiliferous rock were scal-

tered over the land surface, He also reported

“Focene limestone” cropping out in a clifl

section south of the lighthouse at Cape

Willoughby, and deseribed this materin! as

“sparingly fossiliferous’, “greatly leached”,

und containing many granite houlders of yary-

ing sizes. Howchin considered that the wide-

spread ecalercte crust on the headland near the

Cape was formed by teprecipitation of ihe

carbouste dissolved [rom the limestone.

Arthur Wade (1915) made collections from

the Himestones at Kingscore. from a fossiliferous

limestohe section Up to dour metres thick at

Point Ellen on the southwestern side of

Vivonne Bay, and from a focality near (he

mouth of the Eleanor River in Vivonne Bay.

From a palaeontological examination of these

samples, Chapman (1915) concurred with

Tate's dating of the Kingscote material us

Miocene, and identified, together with some

minor elements, a number of echinoid species

including Echinolampas xambierensis. Subse-

quent to his original paper, Tate (1891) re-

corded Australantias lengianus bul did) not

confirm the occurrence of #. gamhierensiy at

Kinuscote, and, in fact, indircetly implied that

he hud misidentified the species, However,

Chopman identified the species as oceurring

wilh E. posteracrassa at Kingscote, Chapman's

reference and material were both overlooked

by MeNamara & Philip (1980) in. revising

ihe genus Echinolampas in southern Australia,

Chapman's specimen labelled Eehinulanpas

evainbierensly is in the GSSA_ collection.

Although the aboral surface is obscured by

hard limestone matrix, the specimen can be

confidently identified as a large example of

Kehinolanipas pasterecrassa posleracrassa, E.

cantblerensis should therefore be removed from

lists of the echinoids occurring at Kingscote.

Chapman compared the limestones at Kings-

cote with those al Mannum ji the Murray

Busin, und correlated the deposits at Point

Ellen with rucks northwest of Yorketown on

Yorke Peninsula, and ar Hallett Cove. As

beachrock sumpled ear the mouth of the

Fleavor River contained niostly living mollusc

species, it was regarded as Lale Pleistocene or

Holocene in age, similar to raised beaches in

Victoria,

A paper on Tertivry sedimentution in

southern Australia (Glagssner 1953) heralded

a seeand generation of reports largely con-

b AJR. MILNES, N, A. LIIDBROOK, J. M. LINDSAY & HJ, COOPER

cerned with foraminifera. Glaessner referrect

ta Australanthus longiahus as an important

species in the fatina of the Late Eocene Torta-

chilla Limestone of the Adeluide region, und

because of its cammun occurrence ip the line-

stoucs at Kingscote, assigned these limestones

to the Late Rocene,

Sprige (1954) produced the first compre-

hensive ecological map of Kangaroo Island, on

which severyl outcrops of Tertiary limestones

at Kingseote and in the tributaries of the

Cygnet River and Gum Creek, on Cape Wil-

loughby, and at Porky Flat. were assizned to

the “Barly Tertiary”.

A distinctive new foraminiferal genus and

species of the Chapmanininae (Crespinina

kingscatensis) wax described from Kingscote

hy Mary Wade (1955) who reported its wide

eeayruphies! distribyuian and restricted strati-

traphic range (Late Eocene in South Austra-

lio, Late Eocene to Early Oligocene in western

Victoria), The species has not been found

subsequently above the Eocene in South Aus-

iralia, and on the basis, for example. of the

distribulron of Globleerinarheka index, at is

wWhko probable that the Victerian occurrences

(up to basal Glen Aire Clay) are all Eocene.

Mary Wade deseribed the limestones at Kings-

cote as shillow water depasits composed

mainly of Bryovoa ond almost (ree of terri-

genous material. Later, Wade & Carter (1957)

deserihed the foraminifer Sherbornina crassara

Present “with an Lipper Eocene fauna” includ-

ing Crespinina kingseotensis in the Kingscote

section. A fist of planktonic and benthonic

foraminitera in the “Eocene of Kingscore™ was

published by Wade in 1964,

Gluessner & Wade (1958) discussed the

Tertiary sediments on Kangaroo Island ip rela-

lion to the Cainozoie St Vincent Basi. They

suggested that the Kungyroo (sland counter-

part of the “Willunga Basin” was a seul

basin. referred lo as the “Kingseote-Cygnet

Basin”, in which Tertiary sediments rested on

Permian glacigene sediments The outcrops al

Kingscote were reported to represent a more

culcarcous and bryozoal facies than the equiva-

lent Eovene Tortachilla Limestone in the Ade-

laide region. Bryozowl limestones of Olizocene-

Miocene age were stated t occur if the

Kingscote-Cypnet Basin “in small outcrops

above pre-Tertiary strata’, as well as at "Cape

Willoughby wad in a tew other places south of

the Cygnet Scurp”, Glaessuer & Wade corres

luted these sediments with the Manuiny For.

Melon and the Morgan Litnestone of the

Murray Basin, and the Crambier Limestone of

the Otway Basin,

It 4) Comprehensive thesis on the seouraphy

of Rangurdo Island, Bauer (1959) examined

and collected samples front many outerons of

both Tertiary and Quateriary sediments,

Although he regarded the limestones at Kings-

cote us Miocene in the tex! of his thesis. in-

formation given jn appendices indicates that

Mary Wade identified as Eoceue the fauna

of the samples which she examined Additional

studics wtiributed to Wade and Glaessner (in

Byuer 1959) identified the limestones mapped

hy Sprige (1954) along the Cvgnet River anu

Gum Creek us Tertiary and Migcene—Pliocenc

respectively, Bauer, however preferret a

Pliocene age for these limestones, and cited

similar sediments ¢roppine out in the hanks of

an intermittent lagaon (“Kent Lagoon) in

sechon 172 hundred of Haines, bused on a

palacuntological report by Cotton (fr Bauer

1959). Bauer could pot find Wowchin’s

“Eocene limestone” at Cape Willoughby, but

Suggested that at might be Pliocene in Keeping

with the supposed age of the majority of

Tertiary fimestone outcrops on the Island

Glaessner (/4 Bauer 1959) identified the fauna

in a Sample of limestone from Porky Flat as

indicalive of a Miocene—Pliavene ge, but

Bauer referred to the material ay Pliocene in

the text of bis thesis. Sariples of caleareous

sandstone from Kelly Hill Caves und Mount

Taylor, alony the South Coast Road, were

cxunined by Chinner and Glaessner (fn Bater

1959) and identified as “shallow water murine

limestones of Late Tertiary (probably late

Pliocene) aye”,

Based on the mollusean fauna. Ludhraok

(1959) referred the limestones cropping out

in Gum Creck to the Pliocene, Subsequently,

Ludhrook (1963) used foraminiferal correta-

tions to establish equivalence with the Tarts-

chilla Limestone of the Adelaide resion spd

hence an Upper Bocene age for the limestones

“at Kingscote and Cygnet River um! al depth

in the Hundred of Menges on Kangaroo

Island". The limestones located in curerop in

Gum Creek and al Point Reynolds were shown

in the correlation cable in her paper as Hallett

Cove Sandstone equivalents of Upper Pliocene

age. Later, Ludbraok (1969) assigned to ihe

Focene, ag Torlachilla Limestone er its equiva.

lent, subsurlvece sedimenis ubaur TS my thick

CAINOZOIC KANGAROO ISLAND

and resting on bedrock at about 52 m depth

near Flour Cask Bay.

Bleys (1962) described the subsurface

occurrence of fossiliferous Tertiary sediments

from holes drilled between Pelican Lagoon and

Flour Cask Bay during groundwater investi-

gations on Kangaroo Island. He interpreted

these deposits as evidence of an ancient strait

separating Dudley Peninsula from the rest of

the Island.

Cooper & Lindsay (1978) assumed that

Kangaroo Island was largely emergent during

the Cainozoic. They recognised the passage

postulated by Bleys, and suggested that it faci-

litated marine entry into the St Vincent Basin

during the Eocene, Pliocene and Quaternary.

They based their discussion on the reported

distribution of Late Eocene limestones and

Pliocene sandstones in boreholes near Flour

Cask Bay in close proximity to the low-lying

neck of land between Dudley Peninsula and

the main mass of the Island to the west, and in

the nearby “Kingscote-Cygnet Embayment”.

However, their contention that the Late Eocene

limestones in the “Kingscote-Cygnet Embay-

ment” were “known to extend over the Cygnet

Fault as far south as the southeast corner of

section 1 hundred of Macgillivray” is not

confirmed.

In a recent review, Daily et al. (1979) sum-

marised much of the published data on the

KANGAROO

Ravine des Casoars

Mt TaVlOr My, Me Stockdale

® Kelly Hill Caves

® Rocky River

e ”

“Willandra”

VvONNe

i ——~ Kirkpatrick Point

du Couedic

Point Ellen

geological history of Kangaroo Island. They

referred to shallow, warm-water marine lime-

stone sedimentation during the Eocene at

Kingscote and in the Cygnet River area, and

near Flour Cask Bay, with further marine

deposition in the Oligocene—Miocene based on

the occurrence of isolated exposure of lime-

stones of this age reported by Glaessner & Wade

(1958). They considered that, consistent with

other parts of the St Vincent Basin, elevation

and tilting of the southern part of the Island

relative to the Nepean lowland along the

Cygnet and Snelling Faults had taken place

during the Middle Miocene. Subsequent marine

deposition in the region was delayed until the

Late Pliocene, when a widespread transgres-

sion deposited fossiliferous sediments, includ-

ing Hallett Cove Sandstone equivalents, in

warm, shallow seas that they believed inundated

a large part of the Island. They suggested,

further, that Kangaroo Island might have

been uplifted as a whole during the Pleistocene

when major uplift took place along the bound-

ing faults of the Mount Lofty Ranges in the

Adelaide region.

The Cainozoic Succession

Early Tertiary (Palaeogene) Period

Palaeocene to Middle Eocene

There are no known Palaeocene to Middle

Eocene deposits on Kangaroo Island.

ISLAND

BAY OF SHOALS Cape Jervis

Gap Hills

Gum CK— K INGSCOTE fy

“Table Rock’.

Kent

Lagoon

PENNINGTON

BAY

Point Reynolds

FLOUR CASK BAY

10) Point Tinline

Willoughby

Cannon Hill

Cape Hart

Kilometres

Fig. 1. Locality map. Key to Hundreds: 1—McDONALD, 2—GOSSE, 3—RITCHIE, 4—DUNCAN,

5—-NEWLAND, 6-—CASSINI, 7—SEDDON, 8--MENZIES, 9—MACGILLIVRAY, 10—HAINES,

11—DUDLEY.

Late Eocene to Oligocene

Fossiliferous marine sediments of Late

Eocene age crop out in several localities. Their

main distribution (Fig, 1) appears to be in

the Nepean lowlands* at Kingscote and along

the Cygnet River, and borehole data indicate

that they also have a significant subsurface

expression in this area. However, sediments of

similar lithology and faunal composition crop

out near Point Reynolds and are known from

boreholes inland from Flour Cask Bay. Late

Eocene bryozoal limestone is poorly exposed

along Freestone Creek, south of Smith Bay.

On present knowledge, the Late Eocene sedi-

ments occupy only low levels in the landscape

and parts of the subsurface, but their widely

scattered occurrence suggests a formerly exten-

sive distribution and, accordingly, a high

potential for the location of additional expo-

sures as further work proceeds.

Foraminiferal faunas dated latest Eocene to

Middle Oligocene, and Late Oligocene, have

been found recently by one of us (Lindsay

1983) in the upper part of the Kingscote

coastal section.

* Term used in the sense of Milnes er al. (1982).

FORMATION

LITHOLOGY

FORAMINIFERA

Chiloguembelina cubensis

Pseudohastigerina micra

Globigerinatheka index

Globorotaloides suteri

Calcrete, stream sands

and gravel; soit

QUATERNARY

Basalt conglomerate wii

very while carbonate

matrix, common fagsil molluscs

PLEISTOCENE

Bjociastic

grained;

and

yell

with Bryazna

echinoids

io}

LIMESTONE

Bisclastic |

recrystallised,

mestone | ulerive

thiek- bedded

KINGSCOTE

LATE (but not latest)

EOCENE

Subbotina angiporoides

A. R. MILNES, N. H. LUDBROOK, J. M. LINDSAY & B. J. COOPER

1. Kingscote

a. Kingscote Limestone. New

unit.

The richly fossiliferous yellow to buff lime-

stones exposed at Kingscote between the jetty

at Beare Point and Brownlow Beach (Figs 2,

3) have never been formally designated as

a stratigraphic unit distinct from the more

stratigraphic

.. :

SPOR bah

: ide

Fig. 2. Coastal cliffs southwest of swimming pool

encompassing type section of Kingscote Lime-

stone southwest of swimming pool. Late Eocene

(beach level) and overlying Oligocene limestones

dipping at shallow angle seawards.

- S.linaperta

cf. A.cyclops

cf. A,Wwaiareka

T.cuspis

T.marsdeni

Subbotina sp. ex gr. 5.angiporoides

cf.

Asterigerina adelaidensis

Cassigerinella chipolensis

Crespinina kingscotensis

Karreria pseudoconvexa

Planolinderina johannae

Quasibolivinella taylori

Massilina terquayensis

Parrellina crespinae

Cassigerinella winniana

Turborotalia opima nana

Linderina glaessneri

Maslinella chapmani

Sherbornina atkinsoni

Dimorphina janjukensis

Guembelitria samwelli

Tenuitella munda

Reussella finlayi

Asterigerina sp.

Asterigerina sp

Textularia sp. cf.

Textularia sp.

Tenuitella insolita

Halkyardia bartrumi

Subbotina linaperta

Tenuitella gemma

J.M.Lindsay & B.J.Cooper

Fig. 3. Schematic composite columnar section and foraminiferal log of Kingscote Limestone out-

crop between Beare Point and Brownlow Beach, Kingscote.

CALINOZOIC

of. A.wajareka

FORMATION

DEPTH (metres)

FORAMINIFERA

Quasibelivinelia taylori

LITHOLOGY

Asterigerina adelaidensis

Crespinina kingscotensis

Asterigerina sp-

? GLANVILLE

FORMATION

equivalent

Hichiy lwasiliTwrusie

Bicei@pne lites teers

yellow qt Cowen ov

KINGSCOTE LIMESTONE

Fbvel (hes Hiqroogs, eArnanacectiy

Quaricese, owelly greene

mt |

Hire sandy lay

asi! gr}

is]

s ——<—-

?CAPE JERVIS BEDS

KANGAROO ISLAND

S_linaperta -

nov

ex er

Pseudopolymerphina sp,cf-P.carterd

S,angiporoides

Testacarinata inconspicua

Gyroidincides octocamerata

Subbotina sp-

Globigerinatheka index

Globorosalina westraliensis

Halkyardia bartrumi

Karreria pseudoconyeta

Lindering glaessner2

Maslinella chapmani

Planolinderina johanrae

Reussella finilayi

Sherbornina atkinsoni

Wadella hamiltonensis

Vernonina dorreeni

Chiloguembelina cubensia

Subbotina angiporoides

Hofkerina sp.

+ were se eee

JMLindsay & B.J-Cooper, 1982

Fig. 4. Composite columnar section and foraminiferal log. E, & W.S. Pumphouse bore, Kingscote,

1962. (SADME Bore Unit No. 6426004WW0O0177).

continuous but partly time-correlative units

exposed jn Aldinga and Maslin Bays.

Reference sections; Typical Kingscote Lime-

stone i exposed in the coastal cliffs and

associated shore plalforms at Kingscote, sec-

tions 406 and 407 hundred of Menzies; a

measured type section is designated 150 m

southwest of the swimming pool,

Another important section oecurs at the

base of cliffs at “Table Rock” near Point

Reynolds, section H hundred of Haines, but

it is difficult of access except at low tide,

Important subsurface sections of Kingscote

Limestone were penetrated by the E. & WS,

Dept Pumphouse bore (Fig. 4), drilled in 1962

6 km southwest of Kingscote (section 46 hiun-

Jred of Menzies); and by the Engineer-in-

Chef's Kingseole bere, drilled in) 1909-10

| km north of Beare Point (section J1 hundred

of Menzies).

Lithelagy: Bioclastic limestone, with a thin

basal bed of pebbly quartzose greensand (not

exposed but penetrated in the Pumphouse

bore).

Thickness: tn the coastal exposures in the

type section, 4.5 m; in the Kingscote bore,

25-30 m; in the Pumphouse bore, approxi-

mately 50m,

Ave: Late Eocene to Late Oligocene.

Diytribution: On Kangaroo Island at Kingscote,

Cygnet River, Freestone Creek and Point

Reynolds. In addition, a succession comparable

with the Eocene part of the Kingscote Lime-

stone has been recognised in Beach Petroleum

Troubridge Shoal No. 1 borehole between

229m and 259m (Ludbrook 1963; Stuart

1970).

The Kingscote section comprises three litha-

logically distinguishable units: the lowest con-

12 A.R. MILNES, N H, LUDBROOK, 1, M, LINDSAY 28, J. COOPER

Sisling of echinoid-rich limestones capped hy

a rubbly mollise-rich conglomerate of Late

hocene age: ay intermediate bioelastic line-

stone of latest Eocene ta Middle Oligocene

age, and an upper unit of well-bedded io flaggy

and cross-hedded hioelastic limestones of Late

Oligocene age. For prictical purposes all are

best included fur the time being in the Kings-

cote Limestone, However, they have litha-

logical and chronological counterparts in the

Port Willunga Formation on the eastern side

of Gull St Vincent. The lowest unit of the

Kingscote Limestone. of Lite Eocene age, is

on faunal evidence, a correlalive of the Torta-

chilla Limestone ond at least part of the

Blanche Point Formation in the eastern Se

Vincent Basia; while in terms of units an

castern Yorke Peninsula (Stuart 1970) it

correlates faunally with Muloowurtie Porma-

tion, Throoka Silts, and perhaps the basal part

of Rogie Formation, A summary of contribue

tions to carrelations within the St Vincent

Basin was provided by Cooper (1979).

On the northern side of Beare Point, Per-

mian (Perto-Carboniferous auct.. Cooper

1981) glacigene sediments are exposed ip

shoreline cliffs that extend nerthwards to

Beutrive Point where the sediments are over-

lain by the Jurassic Wisanger Basalt. However,

the Kingscote bore, which was drilled close to

the coast 1 km porth of Beare Point, entered

the Eocene unit of the Kingscote Timestone

ata depth of 61 fo atid continued through

it to a depth of of least 31.1 m before enter-

ing Permian blue-grey sandy clay, The contact

between the glacigene sediments and the Ter-

tiary limestones on Beare Point or in’ the

Vicinity of the Kingscote hore is not exposed,

hut the general relationships suueest thai the

limestones cropping out in the coastal zone be-

tween Beare Point add Brownlow Beach and

dipping shallowly seawards were deposited on

an eroded surface in the glacigene sediments,

as Hawehin (1903) proposed.

The Kingscote Limestone jn the coastal

cliffs comprises yrain-supported — hioclustiv

rocks (erainstones und packstones) containing

abundant echinoids. bryazwans, foraminifera

and, tess commonly. malluses. Brachiopods,

ostracods, barnacle plates, vod algal pellets

occur more rurely. Bilrupa worm-ubhes are

common in the lowest Late Hocene unit. For

several hundred metres southwest of Beare

Point, the sequence appears to face southwest

such that the lowest unit crops oul northeast

of the swimming pool and the upper heds

southwest of this locality. However, in the

vicinity af Rolls Point and at Brownlow Beach,

the Jowest beds crop out again. Thus, the

Oligocene units appear to be confined to the

cliff seetion roughly between the swimming

pool and Rolls Point, Overall. only a restricted

stratigraphic section ws exposed due to broad

warping and the generally shallow and seaward

dip of the beds. The Oligocene units fend te

he thinly hedded ta Aagey, and cross-heddine

is common! thick-bedded intervals aveur in

the Late Evcene unit, The composition of the

faunal debris. the general lack of terreemous

material, and the presence of crass-beddine

suggest a shallow water marine environment

distant From Huvial influence,

Beiween Beare Point and the swimming

pool, the basal beds of the formation include

poorly to moderately cemented. thick-hedded

ind usually coarse-grained, echinoid-tich pack-

stones with some thinly bedded ajid laminated

units. Ahout 50m northeast of the swimming

pool, an brange-brown bed ahout 30 em thick,

usually well cemented though weathering to a

rubbly character. und strongly Ferruginised in

parts. is sisible in the cliffs. The overlying

interval Comprises thinly bedded packstones

wilh a thick limestone bed evident in the clitt

section. Coarse-scale cross-hedding and chan-

neling is evident in places. Thick-ledded pack

stones containing ahundant large echinoids,

or layers rich in echinold debris, underlie the

rubbly bed, Partings separating units 1m or

so thick appear to correspond to thin layers

uf grainstone composed uf closely packed biv-

clasts without significant matrix. At beach

Jevel. the upper part of the tuhbly bed con-

tains ahtindant rounded clasts, up te 2em dia-

meter, of weathered basalt, brown algal

muterial, quartz, rewarked limestone, and other

material which is not easily identified, In con-

trast with the echinoid-rich limestones below,

the bee contains abundant bivalves and brvo-

zoans. many corals and small sponges, and

raré gastropods, [ts conzlomeratic character

records an interruption of the shallow marine

shelf enviroment by the influa of much coarse

terreamous debris of fluvial origin, and this

us accompanied by a marked faunal change.

The Concentration of fran oxide pnd the

Urumatic change in lithological and faunal

chariicters signifies an appreciable lime hreak

in the section prier to Ww return to the marine

environment essentuilly free of terreginous

CAINOZOIC KANGAROO ISLAND 13

material in which the overlying limestones

were deposited.

The basal echinoid-rich limestones contain

a distinctive Late (but not latest) Eocene

foraminiferal fauna which includes benthonic

forms Asterigerina adelaidensis, Crespinina

kingycotensis, Halkyardia sp. cl. H. bartrumi,

Linderina glaessneri, Maslinella chapmani,

Quasibolivinella taylori, and Wadella hamil-

tonensis, together with occasional examples of

the planktonic species Globigerinatheka index

and Turhborotalia opima nana, the latter pro-

bably no older than Late Eocene (Blow

1979; McGowran 1978). The beds imme-

diately above the hiatus have a microfaunal

composition consistent with the intermediate

unit of the Kingscote Limestone. Thus, the

lithological hiatus in this part of the section

corresponds to the Late Eocene—Early Oligo-

cene disconformity determined southwest of

the swimming pool.

150m southwest of the swimming pool, a

dense, thick-bedded, buff packstone (Fig. 5)

Fig. 5. Thin section of packstone (Late Eocene)

exposed at base of type section through Kings-

cote Limestone. Note abundant micritic car-

bonate matrix. Bar scale 1 mm.

which represents the Late Eocene unit described

above occurs at the base of the cliff section

nominated as the type section for the Kings-

cote Limestone. An eroded upper surface on

this bed displays hollows and fissures infilled

by dense, white packstone, thus marking a

disconformity (Fig. 6). This intermediate white

packstone of Kingscote Limestone is here

approximately 0.9 m thick and contains the

following more stratigraphically significant

foraminifera (Lindsay 1983): small Subbo-

tina sp. from the S. linaperta—S, angiporoides

group, Textularia cf. cuspis, T. cf. marsdeni,

Massilina torquayensis, Reussella finlayi, and

Gyroidinoides cf. allani. Just northeast of Rolls

Point, this unit has a similar thickness and

contains Subbotina angiporoides, Massilina

torquayensis, Gyroidinoides cf. allani, and a

population of Asterigerina, some A. cf.

waiareka and a few A. cf. cyclops. An age of

latest Eocene to Middle Oligocene is possible

for these faunas, but an Early to Middle Oli-

gocene age is considered most likely.

Fig. 6. Type section of Kingscote Limestone show-

ing two disconformable surfaces (arrows) with

hollows or channels infilled by overlying sedi-

ments. Late Eocene unit below lower surface;

latest Eocene to Middle Oligocene unit between

disconformities; Late Oligocene limestones

above. Hammer 33 cm long.

14 A. R. MILNES, N. H, LUDBROOK, J. M. LINDSAY & B, J. COOPER

Fig. 7. Type section of Kingscote Limestone show-

ing thinly bedded Late Oligocene limestones

above intermediate unit, with Late Eocene beds

at base. Disconformities marked in ink. Hammer

(encircled) 28 cm long.

At the type section, the upper surface of the

intermediate white packstone also represents a

disconformity, with hollows and irregularities

infilled by a less consolidated, thinly bedded

and cross-bedded packstone unit in which the

harder bands have been accentuated by a

preferential weathering of the softer layers

(Fig. 7). This uppermost unit of the Kingscote

Limestone is here about 2.8-3 m thick and

continues to the top of the section where im-

pregnation by secondary calcium carbonate

has produced a calcrete crust. Five samples

of this unit, collected between the swimming

pool and Rolls Point have yielded stratigraphi-

cally useful microfaunas (Lindsay 1983). All

contain Guembelitria samwelli, Tenuitella

munda, and Bolivinopsis cubensis, with Chilo-

guembelina cubensis in all but the stratigraphi-

cally highest (2m above the disconformable

base). Subbotina angiporoides occurs in three

of the samples but not in the uppermost.

Tenuitella gemma is present in two samples,

including the uppermost. These foraminifera

date the unit Zone P.21, Middle to Late

Oligocene.

The beds immediately below both discon-

formities weather to a distinct rubbly

character, similar to that exhibited by the

ferruginised conglomerate northeast of the

swimming pool. In the type section, the lower-

most disconformity forms the roof of a small

sea-cave connecting with a large solution pipe

that has developed through the limestones and

extends to below present sea-level. Bedding in

this locality dips approximately 15° to the

southeast.

About 50m to the southwest of the section.

where the younger disconformity is just visible

at beach level, the uppermost packstone unit

(Middle to Late Oligocene) displays locally

hardened thin beds and lenses, some of which

have a red colour due to iron oxide impreg-

nation. Conspicuous cross-bedding and chan-

neling occur in the same unit approximately

20m further southwest (Fig. 8). Large solu-

tion pipe and sinkhole structures lined with

secondary calcium carbonate, and containing

ferruginous pisolites in the mottled clay infill,

are evident in the cliffs in this part of the

section.

At Rolls Point in the vicinity of the Kings-

cote Yacht Club, an erosion surface marking a

disconformity in the sequence appears as a

rubbly-weathering, dense, pebbly limestone

containing abundant molluscs including Eotri-

gonia and turritellids, and echinoids. With

respect to its lithological and faunal composi-

tion, this bed is to be correlated with a similar

bed marking the top of the Late Eocene unit

northeast of the swimming pool and near the

Parts of the

base of the reference section.

Fig. 8. Cross-bedding and channeling in Late Oli-

gocene thinly bedded limestones west of type

section. Note thick-bedded and thin-bedded in-

tervals. Hammer (encircled) 28 cm long.

CAINGZOIC KANGAROO ISLAND Is

heds below the rubbly limestone: are rich in

Ditrupa tubes and » vatlety of cehinoids, but

elements of the Bacene benthonie foraminiferal

assembluge such as Masline/la ehaprtan’ and

Ouasiholvinella tayloré are only sparsely pre-

sent, Bull-coloured packstones ubuve the dis-

conformity are wellehedded and form part of

the intermediate antl of latest Eocene-Mid

Olivocene age.

A lithe southwest of the Yacht Club, low

outerops of the Eocene unit of the Kingscole

Limestone oecur behind the beavh and are

niiersectal hy thundant solution pipes filled

with mottled brown clay, The beds are tich

in small echinotds (#ibuluria greveta), and

gontyin less frequent larger echinoids including

Austratanthiy longidnus, The loracniniterd

faunu includes the Late Eocene planktonic

assemblage Globiverinatheka Jndex, Tenuitella

asolita, and Subbetina liniperta. together with

the Eocene benthonic species listed earlier. It

is noteworthy that Pseadopolymerphing carteri

has nol yet been found either here or in other

sampled expasures of this unit,

Outerops of the Kingseole Limestone at

Brownlow Beach comprise the type locality

for Crespinind kingseatensis Wade 1955_ The

southwesternmost exposures consist vd

cemented, dense. white to bull packstones with

fluted and smoethed surfaces at beach level,

belt ragged nd pitted surfaces above the water

fine. “The limestones are generally rich in mol-

fuses, Some cootiin abundant clasts of quartz

and feldspar of grit to small pebble size, and

many folinded orange-brown algal pellets,

which protrude from weathered surfaces. ‘These

beds comprise part of the lowest Late Eocene

Unit of the Kingscore Limestone. The numbers

of rountied clasts of metasandstone and quariz

scattered ahourt the beach were probably de-

tived from nearby Permian glacigene sedi

menis, and may signify that the limestone heds

are close io the base of the Tertiary sequence,

Further to the wortheast, however, outeraps of

richly fossiliferous puckstones and oxainstanes

representing the same wnit contain conspicuous

small echinoids, echinoid spines, molluscs. and

bryozoans. Te cliff section here 1s 3-4 m high,

and bedding tends to be tndistinct and tubbly

in places,

2, Cygne: River

Late Foeene Kinuscote Limestone 15 ex.

posed beneath a thick calerete crust in shallow

yuarrics adjucent to the roadway between sec-

tions 47 and 62 hundred of Menzies iv the

locality mapped by Sprige (1954), but its field

relationships are not evident, Mary Wade (re-

ported by Bauer 1959) also recorded the lime-

stone in section 44W, but this has not been

confirmed by our field studies. The limestone

is # coarse-grained, yellow-bull packstane can-

tuining abundant hryozoal, echinoid and fora-

miniferal debris. Algal pellets are common, but

there are few quartz clasts aud molluse re-

mains. Poorly preserved foraminifera have

been recovered, including Crespinina kings-

PATEHSIN.

3. Freestone Creek

Just north of Smith Bay in section 317

hundred of Menzies, a coarse-grained reerystal-

lised fossiliferaus limestone craps out poorly

on Freestone Creck. The limestone, discovered

by Howchin (1899), is an eroded remnant

exposed for abou! 200 m cas! of Freestone

Creek os seattered “floors” on a low, culerete-

covered rise, and as surface floaters on another

rise about 200 m lurther east. No field relution-

ships are exposed, and the limestone was pot

interseetéd jn hores drilled in adjacent sections

318 and 126. The anly other record of the

uecucrence is contained in wnopublished student

field notes mide in 1946 by W. R_ Riedel and

R. WK. Johns. They deseribed the limestane at

the two localities along Freestone Creek, In

plaves the limestone contains abundant prit-

size clasts, as well as pebbles and cobbles up to

Sem diameter, of quartz and bedrock. Mol-

luscs are present, a$ reported by Riedel and

Johns, and inchide large bivalves, oot iden-

tified, Chlaniy flindersi, and a cast of YWulsella

laevigata. The microfauna 1s identifiable from

thin sections as of Eocene age, as Mowehin

determined. te ineludes abundant Bryozoa, with

echinoid spines. algal pellets, and a lew small

molluscs and scattered foraminifera. The faru-

minitera are poorly preserved, but include

Malkvardia, Linderina, and Wadella hamil-

tonensis, The lithology and tawnal content

permit correlation with the Late Boeene algal

limestone with grit to pebble quariz clasts i

Brownlaw Beach.

4) Paine Revyelils

Very littl information has heen published

on this tocaliy, und very little material has

heen systematically collected, The GSSA Col-

leefion contains (wo samples lrom a “Table

Rock’ locality in section H hundred of Haines,

In an unpublished pulacontalogical report

(F21/455), Ludbrook described one of the

16 A. R. MILNES, N. H. LUDBROOK, J. M. LINDSAY & B. J. COOPER

samples as a “worn boulder of yellow bryozoal

limestone with an echinoid fragment” of

similar lithology to the Late Eocene limestones

at Kingscote. The sample was reported to be

typical of a lower horizon present at “Table

Rock”. The second sample was collected as

typical of an upper horizon at the same

locality, and was described by Ludbrook

(F20/55) as “a worn boulder of white dense

fossiliferous sandy algal limestone” of possible

Pliocene age. On re-examination, this boulder

has proved to have been derived from the

Point Ellen Formation, of Early Pleistocene

age.

The “Table Rock” locality is an embayment

in the outcrops of Kanmantoo Group (Tapa-

nappa Formation) bedrock forming the base

of bold cliffs between Flour Cask Bay and

Pennington Bay on the southeast coast of the

Island. Point Reynolds is the southernmost

part of the cliff-line. The locality is aptly

named, for the Late Eocene and Pliocene lime-

stones are horizontally bedded and form

narrow platforms jutting out from the base of

the cliffs into the sea (Figs 9, 10).

At the southwestern end of the embayment,

thick-bedded, buff to yellow limestones con-

taining abundant echinoids occur at sea-level

near the base of the section (Fig. 11). The

disaggregated,

limestones can be yielding

Fig. 10. View looking southwest at

abundant Crespinina kingscotensis, with Hal-

kyardia bartrumi, Linderina glaessneri and

Maslinella chapmani. Chlamys aldingensis and

large oysters are present, and bryozoal remains

and algal pellets are common. Contiguous

outcrops of metasandstones striking ENE and

dipping steeply southwards indicate that the

Eocene sediments overlie an irregular ero-

sional surface developed on the Kanmantoo

Group, but the unconformity is not accessible

for examination. The thickness of the Eocene

limestones here is 3—3.5 m, but the local thick-

ness will vary considerably depending on the

relief on the unconformity.

The extent of the Tertiary sequence has not

been investigated, but reconnaissance field

observations and the presence of Eocene sub-

surface sections adjacent to Flour Cask Bay

suggest that further outcrops may occur at

sea-level along this comparatively little-known

part of the coast.

5. Subsurface distribution

a. Nepean lowland

In the Nepean lowland immediately north

of the Cygnet Fault, Eocene sediments similar

to those that crop out at Kingscote and near

Cygnet River have been intersected during

drilling for groundwater and were described

by Ludbrook (1969) as equivalents of the

“Table Rock” to section composed of Late Eocene limestones

(E) overlain disconformably by Early and Late Pliocene (P) and Early Pleistocene (P1) sediments.

Base of conglomerate marking disconformity highlighted. Early: Pleistocene Point Ellen Formation

forms flaggy beds underlying thick sequence of cross-bedded calcarenites of Bridgewater Formation.

CAINOZOIC KANGAROO ISLAND 17

Fig. 11. Thin section of Late Eocene limestone

(M443) at base “Table Rock” section, Shows

much biogenic debris (including Crespinina

kingscotensis near centre) and dark algal

material, with rare quartz clasts. Bar scale 1

mm.

Tortachilla Limestone. Although approximately

fifty boreholes have been drilled in the region,

samples and/or geological notes have been

retained from only a small number of holes,

and currently Eocene strata haye been deter-

mined from foraminifera recovered from only

four of these. Nevertheless, the data suggest

that a succession of fossiliferous sediments

referred to the Kingscote Limestone underlies

most of the region, and thickens eastwards

towards Nepean Bay. Glaessner & Wade

(1958) reported the presence of Oligocene—

Miocene limestones us well as Late Eocene

limestones here. However, only Late Eocene

sediments were recognised by Ludbrook

(1963, 1969), and with the notable exception

of the newly-discovered Oligocene limestones

in the Kingscote coastal cliffs, we have not so

far been able to confirm the presence of Oli-

gocene—Miocene deposits.

Yellow-brown quartz sands and grits in

Cygnet Park Ltd bore (section 34 hundred of

Menzies) suggest littoral deposition in this

area. Similar lithologies appear in bores from

section 288 hundred of Menzies, and section

38 hundred of Macgillivray. However, the

thickest section of Kingscote Limestone (52 m

of Late Eocene sediments) is that intersected

in E, & W.S. Pumphouse bore No, 1 (Fig. 4),

drilled on section 46 hundred of Menzies and

completed in 1962. The Late Eocene section

is approximately 50m thick in this bore. Be-

neath 6 m of brown ferruginous silty and sandy

clay with an occasional Eocene foraminifer

(?reworked) and of doubtful correlation, most

of the Eocene section consists of a bioclastic

calcarenite almost identical with, but less

cemented and weathered than, the coastal

exposures. These carbonates are oxidised to a

yellow-white colour in the top 31m of the

section, but are pale grey in the underlying

17m. Rare sand-size quartz and more or less

oxidised glauconite occur throughout. A thin

interval of highly glauconitic, ferruginous,

carbonaceous, quartzose greensand with an

Eocene microfauna occurs immediately below

the limestone. In this bore, the Kingscote Lime-

stone unconformably overlies dark-grey sandy

clays of presumably Permian age, and is over-

lain by Late Cainozoic deposits.

A rich fauna of well-preserved and diverse

Late Eocene foraminifera occurs in the Pump-

house bore. The foraminifera are dominated

by benthonic species and diagnostic Eocene

species occur throughout the limestone interval

Fig. 4). These include: Asterigerina ade-

laidensis, Crespinina kingscotensis, Globigeri-

natheka index, Halkyardia bartrumi, Linderina

glauessneri, Maslinella chapmani, Quasibolivi-

nella taylori and Wadella hamiltonensis.

Wadella hamiltonensis is not known to range

higher than the Gull Rock Member of the

Blanche Point Formation in the eastern St

Vincent Basin, and Asterigerina adelaidensis

does not range quite to the top of the Blanche

Point Formation, but the other species continue

into basal Port Willunga Formation. Pseudo-

polymorphina cf. carteri does not occur

throughout the limestone interval in the Pump-

house bore. One fragment was found in the

sample from 54.3—56.4 m; apart from that

isolated occurrence it is present consistently

but rarely between 70.1-73.2 m, i.e. near the

base of the limestone section. Elsewhere in the

St Vincent Basin, this form is found only in

Tortachilla Limestone and basal Blanche Point

Formation.

Thus, the foraminifera suggest that the King-

cote Limestone in the Pumphouse bore corre-

18 “AOR. MILNES. N, Th LDUDHKODK., LM LINDSAY & 8, fF, OOOPER

lates with the stratigraphic laterval from

‘Tortachilly Limestone ar hasal Blanebe Point

Formation up to abut ihe top af the Gull

Rock Member of Blanche Point Pormation

h. Mlour Cask Bay

Sulisarface 'Pertiuy sediments in the lowland

trea between Dudley Peninsula aud the ny

mass Of Kangaroo Islind are best knows to the

west and north of Point Reynolds and adjaccat

to Flour Cask Bay (Liwbmok 1969) where

drilling was carried “ul te assess local eypsuiy)

deposits, and to search for groundwater for

washing gypsum. As at "Tuble Ruck", the Late

Eocene limestones are overlain by Pliocene

sediments.

Bore records at the S.A. Deporte af

Mines & Energy indicate the oceufrence of

Cuinozolc limestones in twenty boreholes in

sechons 22, 25, 26, 42, 46, 47, 237, 262 and

268 hundred of Haines, and in sections 52, 58.

56, 312 and 378 hundred of Dudley, However.

samples were available for study [rom only

three holes in sections 22, 47 and 262 hundred

of Haines. bale Pocene foraminifera are pre-

sent in all three boles, but most ovcur together

with Pliocene species and are therefore inter-

preted asx reworked faunas, C.S.R. bore 19,

drilled on section 22, hundred of Haines, less

than 300m from the coast adjacent to Figur

Cask Bay, does include a distinguishable Late

Locene limestone. Tt underlies 9 sandy Pliocene

sequence (of possible Early Phocene age)

Which contains much reworked Eocene

material. The borehole was eertuinly in Eocene

limestone below a depth of 43.6m, and the

limestone rests with clear oneorfarmity on

Palaeozoic metasundstune at 53m. Reworked

Eocene foraminifera were fonnd upbole to a

depth of 19m. The limestone is rverystilliseet,

quartzose and sandy ia part. and rich in

Bryozoa and echinolds, A regressive, hard,

calearcous, quartz sanidstone is jptercalatect

between 46.3.@47.2 om. Glauconile occurs

sparsely through mest of the limestone, but

is more abundant in the basal metre witieh js

also ferrnginous and quartzose, The linestane

contains clements of tbe usual assemblage of

Rocene benthanic foraminifera, viz. Cregetredine,

Flalkyvardia, Linderina, Maslinella, awd Qivasi-

bolivinella, Pseudopolymarphita cf. carteri

oceurs only at the very base, supresting a

correlation of at least that horizon with Torts

chillt Limestane avd basal Blanche Point

Formation, ‘Vertuiry sediments are not exposed

On the coyst at Flour Cask Bay, adjacent to

the gypsum lake, bul senlianiles al the Bridge.

witer Formation crop out here,

fh Reenarks

‘The Eocene metafauiias ate dominated hy

echinoids, principally Fibularie yregata, Avy-

fralanthius longianus and Fehinolanipas pas-

ferocvassa. Small brachiopods are not un-

common, incliding Murravie lenticuliris. Whe

serpulid Dinrupe is abundant in places, and

the bivalve Chlamyy aldingensix is present,

Microfaunas include abundant bryozoal ynd

echinoid fragments and the diagnostic fora

minifera, mostly benthonic, noted above.

The Bryozod have nov been studied, but the

assemblage contained in the Brownlow Reach

futrna und revealed in thin sections of lime

stone from Freestone Creck and “Table Rock"

inchides some forins which appear to be diag-

Hostic and in need of specialist examination.

Lithologically, the sediments represent de-

position in shallow seas where there was

cenerally a limited influx of terregimous

material. However. discrete disconformities

within the Kingscote Limestone section record

marked crosional inttuences with the introduc:

tion of satds and gravels, und ale accom-

panied by faunal changes, The Late Eocene

sequence wis deposited widely around the

present margins of the Fsland by seas which

gradually encroached onto the Mesozoie ta

Middle Focene landscape following the drift-

ing apart of the Australian and Antarctic frag-

ments of Gondwana. Late Eocene sediments

equivalent fo the Kingscote Limestone also

occur in the Waitpinga Drainage Basin on the

southern coastline of Fleurieu Peninsula

(Hourman & Lindsay 1973). fn the Murray

and St Vineent Basins, and clsewhere in

somthery Seauth Australia, non-marne sedi-

Ments were deposited in lowland areas prior

lo encrowehment of the seas (Ludhrook 1980),

hut these have not heen recognised on Kan-

eurag Islan

Oligocene

As discussed above, the upper unit of the

type sectiin of Kingseote Limestone in the

Kinuscote cliffs contains av Late Oligocene

foraminiferal fauna in the thinly bedded puck-

stone unit Forming the top of the secdons, This

unit is separated from the latest Eocene to

Mrdidle Oligocene packstone immediately below

by a disconfarmily, the uppermost of two uo-

contonablé surfaces recognised in the section.

CADNOZOIL

The second disconformily separates the inter

mediate packstone wali front the uneleelyinat

Lite Pocene limestones, Eehinoids are vot un

common in the Oligocene beds and include

Weaposvehla anstraliy, Previous records of

echinoid species in the Kingscote Limestone

should be viewed with caution as it is possible

that some were collected from the Oligowene

unis, At this stige. the only Oligocene sedi-

ments known on Kangaroo Island are those

deseribed in the Kingseote chills section, They

Jo nol erop out pear Point Reynolds where

there is a major unconformity between the

Lile Mevene und Early Pliocene sediments.

Of the two ¢lisconformitics noted above, the

upper is dated by foraminifera as occurring

Within Zone P.21, Middle to Late Olivocene,

which appears to correlute with a remarkable

lowering of global sea-level al this time posiu-

lated by Vail et af. (Vail & Mitchum 19879;

Vail & Hardenbo! 1979), The lower discon

formity is less firmly dated, bul may corre

spond fo the lesser fall in global sealevel

postulated for the end of the Eocene by the

sume authors,

The geological history of the Istund hetween

deposition of the Late Oligocene phase of the

Kingscote Limestone anil various younger

sediments ascribed generally tu the Miocene is

presently unknown. Sedimentation in the

Adelaide region of the St Vincen’ Basin al

this time is recorded within dhe Mart Willanga

Formation, which spans an interval from lite

in the Late Focene to the Mille Mincene,

Neovene

Miuvene

Limestones which tre dated Miocene: with

varying degrees of comidence occur widely at

high levels throughout the landscape on Kai.

garoo Island, ranging from isolated walerop

remnants 120m above present sea-level sovwth-

cast of Parndarna and in the southwestern

dd of the Island encompassed by Mounts

Taylor and Stockdale and the region of Kelly

Hill Caves, to broad terrains nhout 50m above

sea-level in the southeastern part of Dudley

Peninsula. An even more exiensive former

distribution of these sediments is indicated hy

the oecurrence of clasts of Miocene limestones

reworked into the younger widespread Veneers

of acolian calcarenite and calerete that occupy

much of the southery coastal regions of the

Island,

KANGAROO ISLAND i.)

1, Porky Flat

Porky Flat is a broad, closed depression in

an extensive limestone terrain forming the

southeastern part of Divtley Peninsula, This

landseape 1% buttressed to the south around

Cape Hart by cliffs of bedrock Kanmantoo

Group Middleton Sandstone, but is open 10 the

northeast into the lowlands around Lashmar

Lagoon nd Antechamber Bay. The Porky

Flat fossil locality, recorded initially by Sprigg

(1954) and later sampled by Bauer (1959), is

a small dam excavation (originally a sink-

hole) ulong the Cape Hart road in scetion 358

hundred of Dudley. Rocks cropping out here

comprise fine-grained, consolidated, pink lo

white calearenites containing bioclasts of fora-

minifera, small gastropods, bivalve, bryozoal

and cchinoid fragments, together with abun-

dant Well-sorted quartz clasts (Fig. 12). The

neal geology is dominated by humps and

ridges of similar calearenites, though much

secondary calerete is evident in places. Samples

from the general region of the dam exeava-

fon, as well ws approximately 2km to the

west near J.T, Howard's homestead and south-

cast along Ihe Cape Hart road, also proved to

he fine-grained calcarenites of Miocene age

(Pi. 13), These rocks were mupped by

Sprigg as consolidated dune limestone (acolia-

nile), and were referred to the Quaternary.

Seen in both random thin section and dis-

Avercgated residues, the limestones contain

algal, echinaid, bryozoal and molluse frag-

ments, tagether with conimon henthonic fora-

minifera which are poorly preserved but in-

chide the species of Pareroralia from the

Mannum Formation figured as Roralia eb.

Thin seetou of calearenite (M253) fron

Wig. 12,

Porky Flat showing packstone fabric with well-

surted = quarty clasts (white) and biogenic

remains (maiily mouse fragments) in dark

micritte catbongate matrix, Bar scale | mm.

20 A. R. MILNES, N. H. LUDBROOK, J. M, LINDSAY & B, J. COOPER

Fig. 13. Thin section of limestone M338B approaching wackestone fabric collected near Howard home-

stead west of Porky Flat dam excavation, Quartz clasts (white) and remains of bivalves, foramini-

fera and echinoid spines are set in dark carbonate matrix. Bar scale | mm,

Fig. 14. Thin section of “Willandra” limestone M336A showing abundant biogenic remains including

dark algal fragments and echinoid spines. Some quartz clasts (white) and large calcite crystals

(grey; ?echinoid plates). Recrystallised calcite matrix. Bar scale 1 mm,

calcar (Ludbrook 1961, pl. 3, Figs 5, 6) which

appears to be close to Pararotalia hamil-

tonesis, Crespinella umbonifera, Discorbis cf.

cycloclypeus, D, cf. baleombensis, D. cf. dimi-

diatus, and Elphidium crassatum. In addition,

Glaessner (Jn Bauer 1959) recorded Margino-

pora and Amphistegina from Porky Flat,

although neither was seen in material collected

from there for the present study, and the

original samples are not available now for

checking. Taken together, the most likely age

is late Early Miocene to Middle Miocene,

although Pararotalia hamiltonensis described

from the Early Pliocene has not been recorded

previously from strata older than possibly latest

Miocene (Cheltenhamian Stage; Parr 1939).

Stratigraphic overlap in the ranges of Margino-

pora and Amphistegina is known elsewhere

in South Australia from subsurface upper

Port Willunga Formation (Lindsay 1969),

upper Melton Limestone (Lindsay 1970), and

Morgan Limestone (Ludbrook 1961; Lindsay &

Giles 1973).

2. “Willandra”’

Fossiliferous limestones capped by calcrete

occur about 10 km southeast of Parndarna on

three small, low bedrock knolls, approximately

120 m above sea-level, south of Timber Creek

on the properties “Willandra” and “Graydon”.

The outcrops appear to be within the dissected

part of the laterite plateau, according to maps

prepared by Bauer (1959). The bedrock knolls,

composed of laminated and slump-bedded

Kanmantoo Group metasandstones, are un-

altered residuals within the zone of deep

weathering which is exposed in adjacent dam

excavations. The limestones crop out poorly,

but material collected by breaking up the

calcrete crust includes recrystallised limestones

and calcarenites. Recrystallised limestones

near the eastern end of the middle knoll dis-

play karst features including fluted surfaces.

Although fossils are not always conspicuous

in hand specimens, the limestones are seen in

random thin section to contain abundant

biogenic material including foraminifera and

algal fragments (Fig. 14). The foraminifera

include abundant Pararotalia sp. together with

fragments of Elphidium, Textularia, miliolids

and others, doubtfully identified, of general

Miocene aspect. Silt-size quartz and clasts of

metasandstone that occur in some samples

record minor terriginous influences in what

were probably shallow seas in close proximity

to a shoreline.

The ages of the limestones relative to deep

weathering are not clear from the field rela-

tionships because of poor outcrop. However,

it is possible that deep weathering pre-dated

deposition of the limestones in the Miocene,

and that Miocene seas were at least partly

responsible for dissection of the main plateau,

or that deep weathering post-dated deposition

of the limestones, remnants of which were

encased by calcrete and thus protected islands

of bedrock from the major effects of weather-

ing processes. The latter possibility is favoured

because the limestones lack ferruginous detritus

CAINOZOIC KANGAROO ISLAND 21

or clays that could have been obtained from

erosion of a lateritic terrain.

3. Southwestern Kangaroo Island

Mounts Stockdale and Taylor (section 31

hundred of Newland) are prominent outcrops

of cemented calcarenite projecting above ex-

tensive sand plains. Mount Stockdale exhibits

distinct weathering features including solution

pipes, tafoni, gnammas and flared slopes (Fig.

15). In thin section, the grainstone contains

abundant quartz fine-sand and biogenic re-

mains in a much-recrystallised granular

carbonate matrix (Fig. 16). Foraminifera,

mollusc fragments and algal structures are

common.

Similar calcarenites were collected from

Kelly Hill Caves by Major & Vitols (1973),

These are well-sorted, fine-grained rocks with

some subangular-subrounded quartz clasts

(Fig. 17) and abundant foraminifera includ-

ing Pararotalia sp., Elphidium chapmani and

Crespinella umbonifera, indicating a Miocene

i, ue

Fig. 15. View of Mount Stockdale looking south-

wards. Limestone is cliff- and bluff-forming, with

conspicuous solution features (for example

along shallow-dipping joint plane), and flared

slopes. Height of bluff left of centre approx. 12

Fig. 16. Thin section of Mount Stockdale sandy

limestone (M442) showing well-sorted quartz

clasts (white), calcite grains (grey), and bio-

clasts of dark algal material and foraminifera.

Bar scale 1 mm.

Fig. 17. Thin section of limestone P192/71 (Major

& Vitols 1973) from Kelly Hill Caves. Much

uniformly-sized bioclastic material (including

foraminifera, mollusc fragments and sponge spi-

cules), with some quartz clasts (white). Dark

micritic carbonate in places probably of secon-

dary origin.

22 4. KR MILNES, N. H, LUDBROOK, J, M, LINDSAY & B, 7, COOPER

age. Iu keeping with the conclusions of Bauer

(1959), the outtrops at Kelly Hill Caves,

Mount ‘Taylor, and Mount Stockdale are to be

regarded as primary marine sediments father

than Pleistocene aeolian deposits us mapped

by Spriga.

Murther west al Kirkpatrick Point at the site

wf spectacularly weathered granite boulders

Jocally named “Remarkable Rocks", clasts of

dark-coloured, cemented grainsione containing

Miveene foraminifera are present in palacosols

Within a cylereted acolianite complex yneon-

formably overlying the Early Palueozote

peaniie inselherg. Foraminifera in the clasts

include Crespinella wnbonifera, Paratatalia sp,

Cihicides refulgens, and species of Liphidinur

related to A. umeceliim and &. ehapinant C.

uyibonifera indicates an age no older than late

Early Miocene. In conjunction with obserya-

(iuns (rom areas on Dudley Peninsula, a signi

ficant former extent of Miocene sediments in

soulhwestern Kangaroo Island js indicuted by

the distribution of these rock clasis and of

individiial bieclasts of Miocene fossils in the

acohan deposits and caleretes we have

exainined jt Kirkpatrick Point and Cape du

Couedic,

4. Subsurface deposiis

No Miocene sediments have been dereeted

in any borings.

4. Remurks

With one exception, Miocene faunas have

heen nlentified from thin sections either of

primary, mostly veerystallised limestones and

calearenites, or of clasts in younger acoliun

complexes of caleretes, ma similar manner

lo thot described from the Nullarbor Plain

by Ludbrook (1970), Foraminifera re

daminated by elphiciids, rotallics (mostly

Parararalia), and miliolids. They include

Pararetalia sp, Elphidiunr “ntacellum’, &,

chepmani, KE. crassatum, Cibicides reJulgens.

Creyploelia wethontfera, and Disewrhis spp.

Alval fragments are common to abundant, and

echinod spines amt bryovoal MWaganients are

present.

The oliterops of fossiliferaus sediments at

“Willandra” and “Graydon” within the plutcau

province of Ihe Island ure regarded as rem-

nants of mere extensive deposition dunng

mujer murine transgression in the Late Oligo-

cene and Early Miecene, when mid-Tertiury

seas entered nearby Myponga Valley and

Hindmarsh Tiers (Ludbrook 1969, Lindsay Jy

Daily et al. 87H).

All other materials assigned to the Miocene

On faunal evidence on Kangaroo Islund are of

culearenite uspecl, cousinfing of well-sorted!

silt- to sand-sive sediments voulsining both

hlogenic Femains and quartz chists. ‘They erop

oul at Tower levels in the landscape than the

limestones af “Wilkandra™ and until ocddi tiaras

data are provided by further investigalions they

ure hesitalingly regarded as a widespread

blanket of neareshore or beach sediments de-

posited during regression of the Miovene seus.

Following regression of the seas during the

Middle Miovene, there was an apparent hiatus

in sedimentation throughout the St Vincent

and Murray Basins, and this ts generally re-

garded as the time during which weathering

of the then exposed earlier Tertivry marine

carbonate deposits produwed extensive karst

terrains (Ludbrovk 1980). Reworking of the

Miocene limestones on Kangaroo Island and

the initial development of protective calerete

erusts by impregnation of oulcrop remnants

with secondary carbonate probably commenced

wt rhis time.

Pliocene

Marine sediments of Pliocene ave are

dominantly fossiliferous limestones widely

distributed at low levels in the landscape cam-

parcd with Miocene sediments. While Late

Pliocene limestones and their faunas have been

known on Kangaroo Island fer some years

(Ludbrook 1959), Karly Pliocene sediments

are here recorded for the first time.

(i) Early Pliocene

|. Paint Reynolds

At “Tuble Rack", near Point Reynolds

(section H hundred of Haies), the Kingscote

Limestone is diseanformably overlain by #

white, conglomerutic sandy limestone contains

ing ubundant foraminifera, molluses, and

vehinoid fragments including spines. Clasis of

quartz and metasandstone up to cobble size

ure evident, The sandy limestone has a con-

spicuous ribhly weathering expression (Fig,

(8) which facilitates its identification. 1 forins

the basal bed of a sequence of thinly bedded,

white sandy limestones und caleureous sand-

stanes (Fin. 10) which appear to merge tp:

wards inte calcuresite dunes with distinetive

large-scale cposs-bedding, These sediments,

corvered by a complex c#lerete crust, form the

cliff tops. The tower part of this interval, he-

winning with the conglomerate. ts datecl Party

Pliocene by foraminifera (M.-L) aed mol

juincs (N.HAL,).

CAINOZOIC KANGAROO ISLAND 23

Foraminifera (all benthonic) include E/phi-

dium rotatum (Early Pliocene), Crespinella

umbonifera (late Early Miocene-Early Plio-

cene), Fabularia howchini, Pararotalia hamil-

tonensis, Cibicides cygnorum, and Polymor-

phina myrae, which together indicate a

Kalimnan (Grange Burn, Jemmy’s Point)

Early Pliocene age. Other species present in-

clude Elphidium crassatum, Epistomaroides

polystomelloides, Ammonia beccarii, and

occasional reworked Eocene Linderina

vlaessneri and Crespinina kingscotensis. This

microfauna has elements such as C. wmbonifera

and F. howchini in common with Early

Pliocene sands recognised subsurface west of

Naracoorte in southeastern South Australia

(Lindsay In Cook et al. 1977).

The molluscs, which include Chlamys anti-

australis, Tellina (Pseudarcopagia) basedowi,

Myadora corrugata, and what may be Hartungia

dennanti dennanti, are poorly preserved but

packstone P188/71

section of

(Majors & Vitols 1973) from Ravine des Cas-

Fig. 19. Thin

oars showing quartz, feldspar and biogenic

clasts coated by dark micritic carbonate to form

rounded sand- and _ silt-sized pellets. Fabric

typical of reworked deposits. Bar scale | mm.

Fig. 18. Near centre of embayment at “Table

Rock”, Early Pliocene conglomeratic limestone

with typical rubbly weathering character discon-

formably overlies Late Eocene echinoid lime-

stone. Hammer (28 cm long) rests on contact.

Fig. 20. Thin section of “York Farm” Late Plio-

cene white limestone M440, showing foramini-

fera and other biogenic remains, with some fine

quartz clasts (white) and dark pelletal struc-

tures of possible algal origin, in fine carbonate

matrix, Bar scale 1 mm.

24 A. R. MILNES, N. H, LUDBROOK, J, M. LINDSAY & BJ, COOPER

also permit correlation with the Kalimnan of

Grange Burn or Jemmy's. Point in Victoria.

Collections of echinoids from the unil are at

present limited to fragments of what are doubt-

filly identified jis Avachneides incixa ancl

Peronella platymodes, The Barly Plioeene beds

here are overlain, apparently conformably, by

white bioclastic packstones and calcareous

sandstones of Lafe Pliocene age correlated

with the Hallett Cove Sandstone, and by the

Early Pleistocene Point Ellen Formation.

Younger calearenites with distinctive luree

scale cross-hedding are probubly equivalent to

the beach or hack-shore duje deposits of the

Pleistovene Bridgewater Formation.

2 Ravine dey Casoars

Consolidated white and pink-red packstones

that crop out adjacent to Ravine dus Casoars

soulh of Cape Borda, snd similar maternal

intersected in a water bore at Rocky River

(section | hundred of MeDonaldl, eontain

foraminifera which suggest an Early Pliocene

age. Thin sections from Ravine des Casoars

contiin algal fragments. echinoid spines, and

the foraminifera Elphidivm ehapmani, Para-

ratalia hamiltonensis, and Unidentifiahle species

of £lphidium, Pararetalia. aud « rotaliid, The

rocks are composed of quyrtz clasts snl

hidclasts thar ane rounded and have a coating

of micntic carbonate, and are comparatively

well-sorted (Fig. 19). Those of pink to red

colour commonly contain black lmestone

clasts and fesemble palacosols thar qveur

Within coastal weolian culearenite complexes.

The textures of the rocks are consistent with

reworking and transpart of primary clasts,

possibly in a heach or baek-shore dune en-

vironment, and it is possible that the Barly

Pliocene foraminifery Were inherited from a

Pre-existing sediment. Alternatively, the pack-

stanes may he Early Pliovene littoral deposits.

3, Pink Bay

North of Cape Willoughby, bioclastic arain-

stove 1s cxposed ina cliff section about 50m

above sea-level at (he back of Pink Bay. Bio-

genie Waterial includes echinoid and molluse

fragments, foraminifera. and abundant dark

eoloured algal fragments: quartz clasts are rare

to abundant, Round carbonate structures that

ure passibly reerystallised ooliths alsa aver.

This sandy limestone disaggregates to yield

henthonic foraminifera which, although re

crystallised, include common Elphidium rota

non and Pardreralia hamiltonensis, together

with less feequent Notorotalia clathrate,

Ammonia beecert. and Elphidium crasyatun,

and the oecasian) fragment of Mearelnopers

verrebraliv. The assemblage is most tkely of

Early Pliocene age,

At both Cape Willoughby and Cape St

Albans, there are thick calereles capping

Prominent benches on the headlinds shour

50m ubove sea-level, The valeretes wre com-

plex rocks of secondaty orgm, anu they

contain elasts and irregular relict zones of bie-

clastic packstonc, Some of the clasts are dark-

coloured due ta a high content of carbona

ceous material, In many samples of culereto,

there are zones in which quartz grains and

hielasts are coated with carbonate to form

round pelletal structures which ure cemented

io q fine-grained sevondgry ecarhonate matrix.

The pellet structures typify physteal rewark-

ing of the primary sediment. probably in a

subgerial pecogenic environment, impregnation

of the rewor,ed sediments by secondary car

bonate can fom very dense and dough cal-

cretes which resemble fine-grained crystalline

limestones,

Three fandom thin sections of the fussill-

ferous elasts from Cape St Albins, and one

from Cannon Hill, Cape Willoughby, above

the Point Ellen Formation. all contain similue

fragmentary wuerofaunas which include algal

fragments, a species ol Fl/phidium close io

Eo macellum. Pararotalia sp. miliolids. rota-

litds, and hryozaal fragments, The pssembliee

miy be conipared with that in the fossiliferous

Ilmestones al Porky Flat and from the Nullar-

bor Plain, and 4 Miocene age presumed Ne

direet comparison with any material of Focene

or Pliocene age could be made. although cor-

relation with Barly Phoeene clasts from Pink

Bay is not excluded.

ly the outerop at Pink Bay, there is cow

siderable evidence of alteration by secondary

carbonate, Moreover. the top of the section

appears to be contiguous with the ealerete

cupping of the main headland, Thus, it is pos-

sible that the present surface distribution of

calerete refiects the former extent of the Mio-

cene-Plincene sediments, or may even he re-

lated in part to the distribution of the Early

Pletstocene Point Ellen Formation, a reronant

of which oceurs south of Cannon Hill. Even

the prominent ridge about 100m above sea-

level extending from Cape St Athans towards

Cape Hart contains a veneer of culerete over

weathered bedrock in plies. In the property

CAINOZOIC KANGAROO ISLAND pa)

oppeasite the Cape St Albans turnoff from the

Cape Willoughby road (section 386 hundred

of Dudley), calerete boulders containing [erru-

gINDUS piNolites are heaped along the fences

and were presumably vathered From adjacent

middecks Here, the formation of calerete post-

dated the erusional reworking of the deeply

weathered literilic landscape, bul the carbonate

is sall likely to have had an ullimate source

in maring sediments which occupied the highest

levels of the landscape.

4, Sirhsyrface wecurrences

a. Hundred of Hines

Pliocene sediments have heen recognised in

bores fi) the lowland area between Dudley

Peninsula, and the remainder of Kangarao

Island. The lower part ef the section, at

least, is of Early Pliocene age. Three bores

from which anly cable-tool sludye samples

were available for exannnanan were located

on sections 22, 47 and 262 hundred of Haines.

The Pliscene sediments are iypically weakly

cemented, erey- or White-coleured, fossili-

ferous sandy limestones and calcareous sand-

stones. They reach s maximum thickness of

at Jeast 26.8 m between 16,8-43.6 m in

(\S.R, bere 19 (section 22 hundred of Haines),

Crespinella umthantfera, sugeesting Early

Pliocene age at the top of its range, is present

rarely ws tngh in the bore as 16,8 m, Pararo-

talia haméiltouensis oveurs commanty as high

as 18,3 m. The association of P, hamiltonensis,

C. wabonifera, and Elphidium ratahan, al

183-198 m, is considered Farly Pliovenc,

Although the top af the Eocene section is put

tentatively ar oa sundy limestone/sand Jitho-

logical heundary at a depth of 43.6 m, much

Rocene bioelastic material is present in samples

above this depth, presumably reworked, Re-

eyeled Eocene Quyayibolivinella taylori cecurs

as tiph as T836T8 om, while at a depth of

WHR-IS,1 mM, commen OG. my/ori, frequen!

Linderina glaessneri, and oceasional fHalk-

vardin baricami and Crespintina kKingscotensis

are present,

Ir Rocky River (section | hundred of

McDonald)

Between ut least 5.5 m and 7.0 m depth,

Rocky River Department of Lands bore T.H.2

intersected Oolitic limestone, sometintes with a

very fine groundmass, The material 1s similar

jo that from Ravine dey Casoars, and cor-

jains g similar Early Phovene Forumiunterul

association of Pararetaliq Daml[ranerivix, Cres-

pintella tnbonifera, and Li phidium rotarin

The packstones are overlain by Late Plcisto-

cene sediments.

5. Reimarks

Although Barly Pliseeie sediments are here

recorded from Kangaroo Island for the first

time, they are still very imperfectly knows.

Outcrops are poor and dificult of access, Fur-

ther collecting wand study of the echinoids and

other faunal clements at the base of the Plio-

cene outcrop ul “Tyble Rock” is required,

The beds appear ta correlate with ao un-

named, probably Early Pliocene subsurface

unit of liinwted distribution in the Adelaide

Plains Sub-Basin (“Croydon facies” of Lindsay

1969), and with the Bookpurnong Beds or

basal Loxton Sands of the Murray Basin,

(ii) Late Pliocene

Remnants of deposits from Late Pliocene

seas occur more widely in the lowland areas.

These are equivalent to the Hallett Cove Sand-

stone of the Adelaide region and, together with

the Dry Creck Sands, are regarded as deposits

from a Widespread transgression,

At “Vable Rock” near Pomt Reynolds, Late

Pliocene packstones and calcareous sandstones

containing Mareinopora overtic the Barly Plio-

ecne sediments with apparent conformity.

Elsewhere there are isolated outcrops of Late

Pliocene shelly limestones widely scattered

across Kangaroo Island about 30m above sea-

level.

1. Gun Creek (sections 265, 266, 268, 269,

273, 281, 308 hundred of Menzies)

Within the Nepean lowland, dense red to

grey cemented limestones crop oul rather

poorly on low bush-covered rises about 30m

above sea-level adjacent to Gum Creek. They

were regarded by Glaessner & Wade (1958)

as Oligocenc—Miocene, although Bauer (1959)

preferred a Pliocene age. Vudbrook (1959,

1963) subsequently idecutied the molluscan

faunn including Chlaniys species ip associa-

tion with Oyirva as Pliocene, and correlated the

limestones with the Halletc Cove Sandstone of

the Adelaide region, There are no field rela-

tionships exposed, although im section 308

hundred of Menzies bedrock metasandstones

crop out on the flanks of the rise. suggesting

that the limestone was deposited directly onto

bedrock. Tn this locality, white fossiliferous

limestone similar to the white crystalline lime-

stone at “York Panm” is well exposed. Mol-

fusca in the form mainly of casts and moulds

26 4. R. MILNES, N.HL LUDBROOK, |, M, LINDSAY & B.S, COOPER

we ubundant, and include Glveynrerty sp.,

Chlainys (Cllanrys) aanaustentis, Chlamysy

(Equichlanys) palinipes, Glbbolucina (GlAbe-

lneing| salehrasa, Nentrinponia insta, Acras-

serio preceyyrtoriie and Dentalinin lace.

Culler.

The limestones are course-yraincti and

poorly-sarted packstones with abundant bio

genie debris inchiding bivalve fragiments, fora-

minifera. probable bryozoans, corals and gas-

tropods, und subanyular to subrounded quartz

clasts. Some samples contain mud lenses with

silt-size clasts of biogenic material and quartz.

The red limestones are characterised hy matrix

carbonate stalmed With iron oxide.

There jis an oubtodan! molluscean fauna,

mainly in the foe af nyuelds jimel cysts,

donated by Chlaniyy (CMlaivr) antionstralts,

logether with Chlanys (Rauichlaniyes) conse-

tering. Spencdylus spanivieides, Oxeren sp,

Catdita sibdevepilya, Zenatha (Zenallapsly) sp,

Barhatin sp, Gazumeda adtelaitensts and

Diastane adelaidenve-

2, “Ret Lagoon’ {section 172 hundred of

Haines)

Soult of the Cygnet Scarp, grey to brows

lussiliferaus sandstones and deiise micritic

limestones crop oul, albed poorly, beneath a

velerele cupping ino a shallow chil section

6-7 m bith on the southern murgin of aq inter-

mitten! lawoon (“Kent Lagoon). The oulerop

is beiween J0-S01n above sea-level. Baner

regarded the sediments a8 Plineene on the basis

of faunal ilentifieutions by Cotten, Chlamys

Minaistralis is the conspicuous bivalve in the

culcatcouys sandstones wear the base of the

section tnd fron its preservation and abtine

dance. immediately inmviles comparison with

the sediments at Guin Creek.

Units neor the top of the section include

a dense, hrown mivritie limestone contyiniig

quartz clasts wp to pebble size, and some fossits

Including gastropods. Mets complexty laminated

in thin section, with spherules and vughs fled

with crystalline calcite. The micritic carbongte

appears fo he of secendary origin, and may be

related to the development of the overlying

ealorere crust, As at Ciiny Creek, (he field rela-

Wonships of the lintestones are not exposed.

A sample af pebbly quartaese sandy limestone

was disazgrezuted with difficulty ta yield a

few heavily reerystullised foraminifera includ-

ing dtHmionta becoanll, Elphidium retatum, E,

ef, crisp, and Iraementary Mureliepere

verehraliy This assemblage is consistent with

a Late Pliocene age. Foraminilera in the one

random section examitied are poor and linited

to species of Ll phidinm, Ammoitia beccarit and

rotaliids, sections through bivalve shells and

4n échinoid spine are also present.

The sediments in this locality contain con-

spicuous black carbonaceous mutter, ind emil

i distinet petroliferous odour when freshly

broken, In places, hrecciated zones cowtuinting

carbonaceous mutter in patches, veins and tis

horders round clasts. occur within the sedi-

ments. In thin section, the organic material is

Lenerally interstitial pnd occurs in stringers,

wisps and pockets aligned parallel to hedding

laminations, Additionally, clear calcite-lined

vughs ure in some cases filled with the organic

maticr, Through the courtesy of D. M.

MeKirdy, the organic matter was extracted

from some samples and identified by capillury

gus chromitography to be predominantly of

algal origin with a minor higher plant com-

ponent. The presence of such organi¢e matter in

the “Kent Lagoon“ sediments poifits to a

restricted marine environment;

3, "York Farm” 154 hundred of

Haines)

Sainples of white, finely crystalline limestone

present in the GSSA Palaeontology Collection

were collected by R. FV. Herris on the property

“York Farm” south of Western Cove on the

Kingscote—Penneshaw road, Outcrops of the

limestiine (Fig. 20) containing internal moulds

of bivalves and gastropods were located near

the summit of a low hill southwest of the farm

buildings. Many huulders of calerete are seat-

tered over (he hillslope and adjacent areas,

probably indicaling a wider subsurface extent

of the limestone. Seattered boulders of bedrock

Kaumuntoa Group metasedients are com:

mon and reflect the local development of

Perminy glacigene sediments, us well as the

probable existence of bedrock at shallow depth

beneath the limestnne.

Pactway duwn the northeastern slope of the

hill, houlders of ferruginised sand packed with

inferfal and external moulds of molluses are

found, The Ferruginised sandstone contains an

abundant, although poorly preserved Late

Pliocene molluscan fauna of which fourteen

species have heen identified. They inchite

Chlamyy (Chlamys) antiaustralis, Glyevmeris

(Peletuceta) pseudaustralis, Anoduntia splieri-

evla, Cucnilaea praiclonga. Myadora corrugata.

Kuerassatella kingicaloides, Campanile wiserlale

and Dentelinm lateslearem,

(section

CAINOZOIC KANGAROO ISLAND 27

The field relationships between the fossili-

ferous limestone and the ferruginised sandstone

are not exposed, but their distribution and

association with an abundance of calcrete is

encouragement for further mapping.

4. Cape Borda

Fossiliferous sandy limestone which crops

out 0.5 km ESE of Cape Borda Lighthouse,

appears, from a single random thin section.

to be comparable with a similar section from

white miliolid limestone at “York Farm”. The

rock is a pink-cream, fine-grained micro-

breccia with angular fragments set in a very

fine groundmass. Foraminifera are difficult to

identify with certainty but include miliolids,

rotaliids, Elphidium sp. cf. E. “macellum’,

Elphidium sp. cf. E. adelaidense, Cibides

refulgens, Pararotalia sp. and Textularia sp.

Algal fragments, echinoid spines and spicules

are also present. The limestone was described

by Major & Vitols (1973) Amdel Report

P187/71. From its resemblance to the lime-

stone at “York Farm”, that at Cape Borda is

tentatively regarded as of Late Pliocene age.

5. Remarks

Although poorly preserved as casts and

moulds, the molluscs that occur in abundance

at Gum Creek and “York Farm” in limestones

and ferruginised sandstone are similar to those

occurring in the Dry Creek Sands and the Hal-

lett Cove Sandstone. Important species are

Cucullaea praelonga, Eucrassatella _ kingi-

coloides, Acrosterigma praecygnorum, Cam-

panile triseriale and Gazameda adelaidensis.

Foraminifera in disaggregated samples and thin

sections of the limestones lack Crespinella

umbonifera or restricted Kalimnan species, and

mainly comprise rotaliids, elphidiids, and

miliolids which range through to the present

day. Elphidium sp. cf. E. adelaidense may be

common.

Quaternary

Pleistocene

Pleistocene marine sediments occur at low

levels in the landscape, Early Pleistocene sedi-

ments are known from outcrop remnants at

only four localities on the modern coastline,

where they have survived erosion partly

through the protective influence of bedrock

outcrop, but also through the development of

calcrete carapaces. Late Pleistocene sediments

are occasionally cemented by secondary car-

bonate in areas where there has been evapora-

tion of carbonate-charged percolating waters,

In the main, they are confined to lowland

areas adjacent to the modern coastline where

they may occupy the floors of contemporary

carbonate and saline ephemerai lakes.

Fig. 21. View of cliff section through Early Pleis-

tocene Point Ellen Formation (approx, 2.5 m

thick) unconformably overlying steeply-dipping

Kanmantoo Group bedrock at Point Ellen. Bot-

tom part of Point Ellen Formation comprises

coquinite with abundant large and thick-shelled

molluscs. Overlying beds contain many angular

bedrock clasts in matrix of coquinite, Upper-

most part of section is calcreted. Hammer (en-

circled) 28 cm long,

Fig. 22. Facies of Point Ellen Formation coquina

rich in Nerifa sp. nov. near western limit of out-

crop. Pen 14 cm long.

Fig. 23. Basalt conglomerate overlying Kingscote

Limestone in Kingscote cliffs. Note discoidal

shape of clasts (some of which are quartz and

limestone) and fine carbonate matrix. Upper

part of profile heavily impregnated and

cemented by secondary carbonate, though basalt

clasts can still be discerned. Thin calcareous soil

on top, Hammer 28 cm long.

28 A.R. MILNES. N, KH. LUDBROOK, J, M, LINDSAY & B, 1. COOPER

(i) Barly Pleistocene

Aw Early Pleistocene fauna is recognised on

Kangaroo [sland for the first time. It ocetirs

at three localities, Point Ellen, “Table Rock”,

and Cape Willoughby, and also as a remnant

al Cape Jervis on Fleuricu Peninsula on the

adjacent mainland.

|, Paint Ellen

Point Ellen Formation New stratigraphic unit,

Tyre section, The type section is exposed in

the sea-cliffs at Point Ellen at the south-

wesfern entrance (0 Vivonne Bay, in the

Marine Board Reserve adjacent in section 106

hundred of Newland.

Lithology: Richly tossiliferous limestone and

coquinite composed predominantly of fossil

gastropods,

Thickness; Variable, but up ta 2m,

Disirihution: Limited to a small area at Point

Fllen, overlying Late Pliocene sediments in the

“Table Rock” cliff section, a small outerop at

Cape Willoughby and a thin remnant overlying

the Cape Jervis Beds at Cape Jervis.

Avge; Early Pleistocene,

On the ocean coastline of Pomt Ellen, just

south of the ear park, the bedrock Kanmantoo

Group metasediments are averibin with

Marked unconformity by richly fossiltferous

coquinite (Mig. 21). These sediments infill a

highly irregular surfaee eroded in the bedrock,

and clearly represent deposition in jp restricted

bay or inlet on a rocky coast. Abundant cob-

hles and boulders of bedrock metasediments

oceue within the Fossiliferous sediments. Io

some places, there are beds crowded wilh gus-

tropods including w new species of Nerira (Fig.

22) The section is of highly variable thickness

toy maximunt of 2m because of the frregular

lapooraphy of the bedrack uncenlonmity, and

is capped by a complex eealercte profile. To-

wards the eastern end of the ouierop. cone

spicuous large solution pipes extend through

the calercte capping and the fossiliferous sand-

stones, and bottom on bedrock at the uacon-

formity.

The rich molluscan fauna ean he direetly

correlated with that of the Roe Culcarenite in

the Eucla Basin described by Ludbrook

(1978), [ts most important constiluent is the

pelagic janthinid gastropod Marrungia dennann

ehaveni which is conspicuous among the mass

of Nerifa shells in the clif face. This mol-

luscin fauna, so far unrecognised in South

Australia, is reported in a separate paper

(Ludbrook 1983) which includes a description

of the new species of Nerita and w new lucinid,

Specimens first collected from this locality

in 1914 by Arthur Wade were identified by b.

Chapman, Most of Wade's material ie in the

Palucontologicul Collection of the Cicological

Survey of South Australia, but some was pe-

idined in Ihe National Museum of Victoria, in

cluding the holotype of Glyoyinerty cisrredis

var. wivdntea Chapman, which is a specimen of

Anodontia sphericula (Baselow), common in

both the Hallett Cove Sandstone and the Roe

Calearenite, and having & tange of Middle

Miocene to Farly Pleistocene,

Chapman correctly determined the fossils

from Point Ellen as “equivalent to the Werri-

koon of Victoria or Upper Pliceene’. The

Werrikoo Limestone in Vietoria is tow con-

sidered to straddle the Pliccene-Pleisiocene

boundary, the foraminifera indieatiny that only

the lower part including the basal shell bed

is of probable Late Phocene age, the rest being

Early Pleistocene (Singleton et al. 1976).

Problems of making direct faunal correlation

hetween the Point Ellen Formation and (the

Werrikoo Limestone are twofold: first, no

modern deseriptions or differentiated lists of

Wernkooian molluscs from the Glenelg River

sequente ure published and, secondly, deposi-

tional environments were sufficiently dilferoul

to be reflected in the assemblages,

The western side of the Point Fillen outcrop

was illustrated by Daily e@ al, (197%), whe

ennsidered the presence of Artudontia te indi-

cate a possible Pliocene age, This is not sup-

purted hy the strutigraphical range of dne-

dowtia yphericuia. Other Roe Calcarenite

species occurring in the Point Ellen Forme-

lion include Timeclea (Verenrolpa) kendricki,

Monilea euclenyis and Hartinyta dennant

chavani. Foraminifera are poorly representec,

hur tnelude = Armemoria leecarl, £iplidinee

rotatum and Epistemareides polvstorretlaides,

all Of which afte species sull living,

2, “Tahle Rack"

Caleareous sandstones containing abundant

moulds and custs of molluses. including

Monilea eticlensis and Nerita sp, nov. of the

Point Ellen Formation, are fyterbedded with

thin caleareniles ahive Fale Pliocene beds an

the cliff seetion at “Table Rock". The beds

are mennfied as die laggy unit in Figure LO

immediately below cross-bedded e¢alearenites

identified with the Aragewater Formation,

CAINOZOIC KANGARO® ISLAND 2

3, Cape Willoughby

A careful search ai Cape Willoughby iWen-

ified the outerop deserihed by Howcehin

C1903) as “sparingly fossiliferous” to consist

ol in facet, calvareous sandstones containing

abundant fossils including molluses, bryozoans

antl cirripodes. The outcrop oecurs on the

southwestern side of Cannon Hill where the

Sundstones overlie ao highly irregular surface

of \veathered granite and contain much granitic

dchris; inelading large boulders thal appear

to have ralled down from the adjacent ridge

during sedimentation. There is a section about

34 m high and short 10 m above sea level

comprising well-hedded Cossiliferous sands al

the base, with Gourse bioclastic eraingstones af

possible hack-heneh origin interbedded with

finely luminaled green-brown micritic lime

stones above, Large solution pipes partly in-

Alled with red prottled soil material oceur in

the sevnon, which is capped by the calercte

orust that forms a conspicuous carapace over

much of the headland.

The fossililerous sandstones at Cape Wil-

louehby contain the Nerira sp. nov, of ‘the

Voint Ellen Formation. Tinwelea (Weremolpa)

hendrick!, and Diavtamea nvtelanivides. The

microfauna meludes abundant Afargliopera

vertehralis, together with Flintina triquetra,

Animonia becearii, Elphidium retatum, Cribro-

bralimina pelystoma avd Peneropliy sp, Condi-

tions of deposition must have been similar to

Those ou the ecantinental shelf along southern

Australia at the present day, as described by

Conolly & von der Boreh (1967) and Wass

eval, (1970). Lake the modern sediments, the

fossiliferous sandstones at Cape Willoughby

doubtless include a good deal of reworked

miner

4. Cape ferviy (section 318 hundred of

Yankalilla)

A thin exposure of Point Ellen Formation

S70) m northeast of Cape Jervis Lighthouse

on Fleurieu Peninsula is faclided here because

of its proximity to Kanewroo Island and be-

cause the faunal content is very similar to that

of the type secuion at Point Ellen.

The aiicrop was first recorded by Howehin

(1978) as one of the mised sea beaches seen

in the sea cliffs in’ many places along the

southern eoust of Australia. These are mostly

eqnivalen) to the Glanville Pormation, The

renihant was not observed by Wilson & Tud-

brook (In Tadhrook 1967), who recorded the

Permian Cape Jervis Beds us overlam by

kunkar.

In 1982, uw field party from the Geological

Survey of South Australia calleeted malluses

from a thin limestone remnant at the base af

the calcrete overlying the Cape Jervis Beds

at their type section on section 318 hundred of

Yankalilla, These included the new species al

Nerita in abundance, together with Hurtungia

dennantt chayani and about seventeen other

species, Like the fauna at Point Fllen, the

assemblage indicates an open sea, high energy

coast environment. The presence of a cobble

bed containing mainly rounded clasts of Kan-

mantoo Group metascdiments at the base of

the limestone jeflects such an environment.

S Remarks

Despite ihe difficulties expressed ubove in

makine direct fatinal correlations, the Point

Ellen Formation is stratigraphically equivalent

to the Roe Calearenite of the Buch Basin, Tt

is probably equivalent also to the Coomandaok

Formation of the Lower South-East of South

Australia, the Burnham Limestone of the ‘St

Vincent Basin, and the Wertikoo Limestone of

western Victoria, but these formations and

their faunas are inadequately known, The mol-

luses of the Point Ellen Formation and Burn-

ham Limestone are described by Ludbroak

(1983).

fii) Late Pleistocene

Rejuvenation of faulting after deposition of

the Early Pleistocene Point Ellen Formation

heralded a return bo Llerresirial environments

until a major owrine transgression in the Late

Pleistocene and the widespread deposition of

sediments assigned to the Glanville Formation,

Correlations of shell heds of this age are

usually possible on the hasis of palacontological

data, but further field work and (he application

of amino-acid racemisation studies presently

in progress in the CSIRO Division of Sails

laborarories may assist in verifying that only

one transgression occurred on Kangaroo Island

in the Late Pleistocene.

Sediments containing righ molluscan faunas

exicily similar to those of the widespread

Glanville Formation were colleeted from

several localities on Kangaroo sland, mastly

tram shallow quarries and roadside scrapes,

They inelude the basalt conglomerate overlyitg

the Kinuscote Limestone at Kingseoie, shallow

roadside quarries near Vivonne Bay, Rocky

Point and nearby shallow quarries adjacent

30 A. R. MILNES, N, FE LUDBROOK, J. M. LINDSAY & 8, J, COOPER

to the Penneshaw road, the gypsum workings

iu New Lake, and the Rocky River water bore

mentioned previously,

1, Kingscole

A basalt conglomerate onconformably over-

lies the karst surface on the Kingscote Lime-

stone in many places (Fig, 23). Il is a typical

heach shingle deposit, comprising rounded

discoidal pebbles and cobbles of Wisanger

Basalt, and less commonly other rock types

inclading limestones and quartz, lying roughly

parallel to the base of the deposit and set in a

very fine-grained carbonate matrix containing

yome sand-size quartz clasts and an abundant

molluscan fauna, The conglomerate is usuully

at the base of a calcrete profile which ts well

exposed in the coastal cliffs, In many places

beneath the conglomerate there are pockets

and fissures in the limestone filled with brown

clay.

Howehin (1899) regarded the conglomerate

as a stranded Recent coastline deposit; Bauer

(1959) suggested a Pleistocene age based on

identification of the molluscs by Cotton.

The conglomerate contains Murginopera

vertehraliy and twenty species of Mollusea in-

cluding Evplica bidentata, The Fauny is 0 thana-

locvenbse, most of the specimens having bee

transported from more than one environment

and considerably worn, but with the few ex-

ceptions of those which lived on rocks, they

were inhabitants of sand or sandy oud in the

littoral zone, The most common species are

Kalelysia peronil, K. phytiphora, Antesodesme

augusta, A, ouneata, and Cominella lineolata

The assemblage is considered to he of Late

Pleistocene ace and the conglomerate equiva-

lent to the Glanville Formation.

2 Wivenne Bay road

This roadside quarry is the locality af Wade

(1915) at the “mouth of the Eleanor River,

Vivonne Bay", from which Chapman identified

five species of molluscs. The same fauina was

recollected, The assemblage is a biococnose,

almost all of Lhe six speeies collected in ubun-

dance being intertidal inhabitants of estuaries,

sandflats or mudflats. The most abundant are

Anapella eyeladlea, Tellina (Maconeona) del

foidaliy and Niatha pauperatas Aniedara (ret-

Pezla is present.

3, Rack) Paint and shallaw quarrles adjacent

to Penneshaw road (section 289 hundred of

Duvtlew)

Like the basalt conglomerate at Kingseote,

Ihe powdery Limestone plastered against the

clits at Rocky Point contains some species

such as Nerita (Melanerita) airamentosa whieh

prefer # rocky environment, hit most of the

twenty-three species identified are inhabitants

of sand or sandy mud ia the hiiloral zone. The

faunas in the carbonates wf the shallow quarries

on either side of the road near Rocky Point are

mostly biocoenoses dominated by Marginepiure

vertthralis, Amesodesma angusti, und Diala

lauta,

4, New Lake (south of seetion 288 hundred

of Dudley)

Carbonate sediment with abundant molluses

helow gypsum in New Lake ts also possibly

to he correlated with the Glanville Formation,

althouch none of the diagnostic forms was

recovered. The mioiluscan [aun is a bio-

coenose of filteen species, dominated by Fulvia

téerinicostata which lives gregariowsly in sand

and mud at water depths from 20 ms Diala

leniag and Bittium (Semibittium) eranariume are

common,

5. Section tl) flundred of Haines

Material recovered from a shallow well on

the praperty of BD. A, Lovering eontaine

ihundant molluses including Karelvsiq rhvel-

phova, K. sealarina, Sanguinovlaria (Psanme-

Jellina) hiradiata, Penernpis galuctitey, Rrachi-

dentes erasuy and Sarillarta (Zeacnmeantus)

diemenensix, AS none Of the usual cliagiostie

forms appear to be present, like New Lake, it

can only cloubiFitly he refcrred to the Glan-

ville Formation,

Holocene

Holovene equivalents of the St Kilda Porma-

tion have been found on the eastern iargin

of the Tsland adjacent to ihe Bay of Shoals

und Antechamber Ray.

1. Bay 6) Shoaly (seetion S hundred ot

Menzies)

Stranded beach deposits comprising Hattened

beach shingle acranged tn imbricate patlern

with abundant motluse cenains overlie Per-

mitn glicivene sediments along The Bluff

road N, of Kingscote, From samples taken at

the base and Cop of the deposit, twenty-three

species OF Mollusca dominated by gastropods

were identified. Mhe assemblage is very similar

te that of the St Kilda Formation at St Kilda,

Batillatia (Zedcndntis) diemenensiy ix the

most abundant species; Nintha pyrehis, N,

Heuperare and Medeve paivae are enmenuit.

Rurelysia peronii, &. chvtiphora, K, sealirina,

CAINOZOIC KANGAROO ISLAND 3

and Amesodesina eunhedta are the most ubi-

quitous bivalves. Neither Anadara trapezta.

Huplica bidentatd, wor Marginopora verrebralis

is present,

2. Amechaniher Bay read (section 58

hundred of Dudley)

The shell sand obtained frorn auger holes

at 0.3 m aud immediately below the surface

vontains. abundant Niotha pauperata, Tellina

(Macomona) delividatty and Muniditia fedleye

with Barillaria (Zeacwmanms) dtemenensis and

Evymarcia fumigata. (1s ennsidered equivalent

to the St Kalda Formation.

4. Remarky

Examination of contemporary beaches on

the cousts jridicates that the Holocene sedi-

Taents were deposited under similar conditions

fo those existing pt the present time. There ts a

restricted fauna, with individuals of tittoral

and marginal lagoon species of Armesodesma,

Katelysia, and Niotha, as well as Setillaria

(Zeacumantis) diertenensisy and Eubirtlum

lawlevanun,

Quaternary deposits af uncertain age

lo Point Purline (section A hundred of

Haines)

The carbonate sediment near Point Tinline

contains abundant Coxiella striaia with Batil-

laria (2eaevmuntus) dienvenensis, Phastanella

ane’ and Bedevi paivae. This is a marginal

lagoon deposit, dificult to correlate with either

the Glanville or the St Kilda Formation. It

ean nly he described as Quaternary.

2 Eb & WS, Pumphouse bore (section 2001

hundred of Menzies)

Retween 7.6-11,3 mand between |52-15.8

m in this bore, 27 km from the mouth of

Ihe Cypnet River, fragments of Diala lata and

other gastropods, and of Karelysia sealarina,

indicule deposition in a tidal inlet,

3, Remarks

Bauer ised the distribinian of all these

sediments, together with geomorphic observa-

liens of contiguous erosional surfaces or

benches, 10 deduce a 3—5 m sea-level of “Plets-

locene to mid-Recent” uge,

Relationships between Caisoxoic murine

sediments and present landscape

As part of his extensive field investigations.

Bauer (1959) prepared a broad-scale lopo-

graphic map of Kangaroo Islaud and soupht

to explain the origins of the landscape.

doing so, he postulated six surfaces of marine

origin fram Late Pleistocene to Recent age,

ranging in elevation from 122 m to 3 m above

sea-level. His evidence was discussed by Daily

et al. (1979). who concluded that definite

marine terraces occurred only at 3-5 m and

6-8 m shove present sea-level, and were of

Pleistocene age; platforms at higher elevations

may. for example, be relict fragments of

ancient coastal plains.

Bauer's topographic map ts m general agree-

ment with a map outlining the soil landscapes

ot the Island (Northcote 1979), based on

earlier soil survey data (Norlheote & Tucker

1948; Northcote 1949, 1950), and the geo-

logical map of Sprige (1954). The plateau

province af Bauer, extended by Northcate into

the Seddon and Gosse plateaux and the Mae-

Dannell Hills landscapes, comprises mainly

duplex soils with ferrugmous gravels and acid

duplex soils. The same soils occur in the

eastern part of the Island on Dudley Peninsula,

which Northcote described as “Hilly uplands

with laterite remnants” and assigned to his

Penneshaw hills and ridges landscape. To-

gether these regions encompass the ancient

upland deeply-weathered landscapes with can-

spicuous local development of ferruginous

materials, The southern and western margins

of the Island are dominated by the caleareous

coastal province of Bauer, which corresponds

to Northcote's Linois province, Suils in these

areas are mainly shallow red-brown sandy

soils, The main plains and lowlands occur

north and south of the Cygnet Scarp, and

exhibit predominantly alkaliwe duplex soils

which reflect the influence pf intraduced

ealetum carbonate

Eocene limestones oecur at comparatively

low levels in the landscape and subsurface in

the Nepean lowland (encompassing Bauer's

Nepean Embayment and the Cygnel plains and

Menzies hills landscapes of Northcote), adja-

cent to Flour Cask Bay, and on the coast near

Point Reynolds, In Freestone Creek, the

Eoecne outerop is about 60 m above sea-level.

Clearly, the Eocene sediments are remnants

of a wider distribution on the Island, though

the Rocene seas may nol have extended far be-

yond the modern coasts. Clasts of basalt Found

in pebble beds tn the Eocene limestones at

Kingscote attest to erosion of the Wisanger

Basalt. exposed at that. lime in adjacent lands,

The tandseape inundated by the Eocene seas ts

lu some extenr still preserved beneath Eocene

32 A. R, MILNES, N. H. LUDBROOK, J. M. LINDSAY & B. J. COOPER

limestones in parts of the coastal and lowlands

provinces on the Island, and it is likely that

further sediments will be found stbsarface by

drilling in these areas, There is no evidence for

encfoachment of the seas ontg the present

plateau provinees, and no apparent relationship

between landscape clements in these provinces

and u possible base-level of erosion dictated

hy the Rueene seas. In any case, there has

been considerable disruption of the landscape

by mavement along the Cygnet and Snelling

Faults in post-Eocene times. One effect of this

movement has been to create the fiull-angle

depression represented hy the Nepean lowland

in which 4 sequence of Eocene limestones has

becn preserved above Late Palacozoic glacigene

sediments. It has been generally considered

that sedimentation occurred preferentially in

this fault-controlled depression is in (hase of

the exstern St Vincent Basin, However, (his

cannot yet be regurded as proven. The Kings-

cote Limestone docs thicken southwestwards

from Kingscote to a koown maximum of

about 50 m at the Pumphouse bore, bot no

thicker section has yet been confirmed; and

unfortunately, the limestone has not been

penetrated in any bares nearer the Cyguet

Fault in what might be presumed to be the

deeper part of the Tertiary basin, An incom:

plete 45 m-thick section of the limestone was

iitersected iv this area in the Willis & Bishop

No. 2 bore (section | hindred of Maggil-

livray), but deeper drilling is needed in the

fault-angle depression to determine the thick-

ness und succession of the limestone there,

hy way of contrast with che distribution of

Late Focene limestones, marine sedimeiits of

probable Miocene age from “Willandea”

and Mounts Taylor and Stockdale respectively

necur Within the plateau province at elevations

in excess of 100 m above sea-level, Rocks of

similar age at Kelly Hill Caves and In the

Porky Flat area occur in the Linois province

of “reugh, broken calearenite lowlarids”

(Northcote 1979), and are about SO m above

sea-level, Geologically, the Lingis province is

complex: in addition to a possible base ot

Eocene limestones and outcrops of Mincene

limestones, reworked clasts of Miocene--Plic,

eene sediments are contained within calercte

Veneers over benches and surlwces al Cape St

Albans and Cape Willomehhy. und in sequences

of cukearenite dunes with forerbedded patiea-

sols at Kirkpatrick Port aod Cape du Couedte.

In addition, the province contains conspicuons

culeareniles af Pleistacene uge which, for

example near Point Reynolds, overlie Early

and Late Pliocene and Early Pleistocene sedi-

ments, It is clear that Miocene sediments were

formerly wilely deposited on Kangaroo Island

(including parts of the Plateau province) in

response to one or more major transgressions,

and that significant modification of the land-

scape Would have been achieved by the en

croaching Miocene seas with uecompanying

changes of biselevel of cresion, Removal of

al] but teninants of the Miocene marine depo-

sils from the interior of the Island makes

dificult any judgement of the extent of the

transgressions aid Weir detailed geomorphic

effeer Hlsewhete in the St Vincent Basin, seas

regressed in the Middle Miocene in response to

Witespread \iplift of continental margins, On

Kangeron stand at this time, movement along

the Cyenet and Snelling Faults further effected

changes in ihe landscape anct itis Hkely that

the cmergowee of much of the Island's land-

scape during this regression initiated terrestrial

reworking of The Miocene deposits and the

cxlensive formation of secondary carbonates

and caleretes. There are calerete-covered

henehes 80-100 m above sea-level nround the

margins ol the Wisanyver Basall forming the

Gap Hills within the Nepean lowland, Based

ne position with the landscupe, these benches

and possibly the calcium carbonate in the

caleretes covering {hem may be related to the

distribution of the Mincene marime sediments,

theugh no outcrops of such are known north

“Ff the Cygnet Scarp. Much caleium calbonate

ilso impregnates the surface zones of the

trasalt in plates.

Early Pliocene clastic limestones accor mm

sequence aver the Bourne linmestrnes mi coastal

outcrops about 100m above sea-level near Point

Reynolds. Bivclastic grainstanes with Early

FMlinvene foraminifera from Ravine des Casoars

wil the Rocky River water bore are up to

50m above sea-level within the Tinois pro-

viniee, bul appear to bave been deposited dur-

ing a phase of reworking of Eprly Pliocene

sediments. In addition to the coastal sequence

near Pint Reynolds, remnants of Tate Plio-

eche shelly Uimestoues and valcarcous satil-

stones decur in the present plains ancl lowlands

Wp to 30 a) above sea-level at "Kent Lagoon"

wml “York Farm” in Nertheote’s Macvillivray

phiins proving, and al oa similar elevation

along Gum Creck wear the edge of the Nepean

lowland, The sediments all appear to have

CAINOZOIC KANGAROO ISLAND 33

been deposited in near-shore environments with

significant contributions of terreginous material.

The location of the shorelines cannot be

deduced from the known distribution of the

sediments, nor is it clear whether the entire

area was inundated or whether deposition

occurred only in embayments, estuaries or

inlets, In a general sense, however, it is likely

that the shores flanked the margins of the

current plateau provinces. The plains and low-

land landscapes with which the Pliocene sedi-

ments are associated comprise riverine or

swamp and lagoonal lowlands, and are charac-

terised by alkaline duplex soils (Fig. 24)

which do not occur at higher levels in the

landscape. The soils record the influence of

calcium carbonate that may have derived from

either the local reworking of Pliocene marine

sediments, or from downwasting of Miocene

marine sediments from the higher level plateau

provinces,

Pleistocene marine sediments are confined

to the lowland areas immediately adjacent to

the present coastline, consistent with deposition

in shallow waters during periods of high sea-

level. Early Pleistocene sediments at Point

Ellen, “Table Rock” and Cape Willoughby

Fig. 24. Alkaline duplex soil with thick carbonate

accumulation zone (white) developed on hill-

tops in Penneshaw Hills landscape along Kings-

cote-Penneshaw road near “York Farm”.

Fig. 25. View of deposits forming the Red Banks,

comprising lower unit of mottled reddish clays

and gravels, and overlying light-coloured car-

bonate-rich alluvial sediments. Height of cliffs

approx. 8 m.

were deposited on rocky coasts by seas still

significantly above present levels, and are

probably related to the 6-8 m sea-level stand

postulated by Bauer (1959), for which there

is extensive geological evidence. Based on

studies in the Adelaide region, major uplift

along the faults bounding the Mount Lofty

Ranges occurred in the Middle Pleistocene and

initiated deposition of thick wedges of alluvial

outwash which covered the Tertiary and Early

Pleistocene marine sediments, The remnants of

such deposits form a narrow coastal plain

(the Red Banks) flanking the Cygnet Scarp

along the southern margin of Nepean Bay. The

lower beds in this sequence are red alluvial

clays and gravels which are extensively mottled

and leached. The upper beds, in sharp contact

with the lower beds, comprise white, car-

bonate-rich alluvial deposits (Fig. 25). Similar

sequences of sediments are well known in the

St Vincent and Murray Basins, though none

have been studied in detail. The upper car-

bonate-rich interval appears to represent an

abrupt change in the nature of the source

material in landscapes that were eroding at

this time. However, it is also possible that the

junction between the upper and lower intervals

records a significant time break, sufficient for

carbonate originally present in the lower beds

to have been leached before renewed activity

along the Cygnet Fault led to deposition of the

upper carbonate-rich sediments. Whatever the

explanation, the sequence as a whole points

to uplift of the southern part of the Island

relative to the Nepean lowland during at least

the Middle Pleistocene, and thus disruption

and erosional modification of the earliest

Pleistocene landscapes which incorporated the

emergent Palaeogene and older Neogene

marine deposits.

Late Pleistocene marine sediments of beach

and estuarine origin occur at low levels near

the coasts, corresponding to Bauer’s 3—5 m

sea-level. Lowland areas, for example west of

the Bay of Shoals and in the regions of

Eastern Cove, Pelican Lagoon and Flour Cask

Bay, were inundated at this time.

Acknowledgments

Diagrams were prepared by CSIRO Division

of Soils and SADME, and the photographic

prints by John Coppi. R. P. Bourman

kindly collected the sample from section 11

hundred of Haines. N.H.L., J.M.L. and B.J.C.

publish with permission of the Director-

General, S.A. Department of Mines & Energy.

34 A, R. MILNBS, 8, H, LUDBROOK, }. M. LINDSAY & B, F. COOPER

References

Bauer, F. H, (1959) The regional geography of

Kangaroo Island, Soulh Australi. Ph.D, thesis,

Aust. Natl Univ, Canberra Cunpubl.).

Blow, W, H, (1979) The Cainozoie Globigerinidae

3 vols. (CE, J. Brill: Leiden.)

Hreys. C, (1962) Groundwater prospecis—por

tians of the bundreds of Haines and Dudley

Final report, Min, Rev, Adelaide 114, 13-18.

Bounnan, R, P. & Lindsay, J, M, (1973) Implicit

tians of fossiliferous Hocene marine sediments

underlying part of the Waitpinga Drainage

Basin, Fleurico Peninsula, S.A, dvareh 4, 77

CWAEMAN, F, (1915) Report on a collectlon of

fossils made by Dr A, Wade from the Cainozoic

sericy of South Australia. Appendix H, Wade,

A, The stipposed oil-hearing areas of South Aus

tralia, Bull. geol. Surv. 8. Aust, 4, 44-50.

Conoury. J. R. & Vow Der Boren, C, C. (1467)

Sedimentation and physiography of the sea floor

south of Australia, Sediment. Geol, 1, 181-220,

Cook. P. T,, Covwsrt, J, B, Firman, J. B., Lano-

say. J. M., Scoweser, D. A. & Von Der Borcu,

©, C, (1977) The late Cainazoic sequence of

southeast South Australia and Pleistocene sea-

dee Sree BMR I Aust. Geal, Geophys, 2,

81-88,

Cooper, B. 7. (1979) Eocene to Miocene strati-

graphy of the Willunga Embayment. §. Ansr,

Dept Mines Reps tavest, 50,

<< (1981) Curboniferous und Permian sedi-

roents in South Australia and their correlation.

@, geal, Notes, geal, Surv, 8S. Auxi, 79, 2-6,

—— & Linpsay, J. M. (1978) Marine entrance to

the Cainozole St Vincent Basin, hid. #7, 4-6.

Dairy, B.. Firman, }. B.. Fokars, B, G. & lanu-

say. J. M. (1976) Geology. fn Twidale, C. RE

Tyler. M. J. & Webb, BP. (Eds) “Natural His-

tory of (he Adelaide Region", Ch, |, 5-42. (R.

Soc. 8. Aust, Adelaide.)

—, Micres. A. R. Twipare, C. R, & Bourne,

1, A. (1979) Geology and seamorpholosy. Ih

Tyler, M. J., Twidale, C. R. & Ling, I. K.

(fide | “Natural History of Kangaroo Island"

Ch. |, 1-38. (R. Soc. S. Aust: Adelside.}

Gerpes, R, A. (1982) The interpreted depths to

magnelic bosement map of South Austrahn. @.

geal. Notes, geal. Surv. §, Aust, 83, 2-14,

Giaessenr, M, FP, (1953) Conditions of Vertiury

sedimeniation in southern Ausrealia Tears. a.

Sac. S. Aux. 76. 141-161.

& Wane, M. (1958) St Vincent Basin,

Glaessner. M, Fb, & Parkin, L. W, (Eds) “The

geology of South Australia’, J. geol, Sec. tins,

4, 115-126.

Howenin. W. (1899) Notes on the geology of

Kangaroo Tshind with special reference to evi-

denee of extinct ghiclal action. Pranis. A. See 8

Aust. 23, 198-207,

—— (1903) Further notes on the geology of Kan-

parvo Islund, fbi. 27. 75-90,

—— ((9/8) “The geology of South Australia”,

First Edition, (Govt, Printer: Adelaide.)

Lynosay, I, M. (1969) Cainozole foramumfera aod

stratigraphy of the Adelaide Plains Sub-Basin,

South Australia, Mull, geol, Surv. XS. Ansr, 42,

— (170) Melon Limestone: peultiple Mid-

Tertiiry transgressions. southenstern Gawler

<r apie OQ. geol, Nartes. weol. Surv. 8. Aus 33,

-tth

—— (1983) Lute Eocene to Lute Olivocene age

of the Kingsente Limestone, Trans. R. Soc. 8,

Ast. WT. this volume.

& Cares, S. OD (19731 Notes on the Lepido-

cyelina Zone in Morgan Limestone along the

Murray River, South Australia, O. geal Nates,

veol. Surv, So Ange. aS. 1-7-

Luterook, No H, (198%) A widespread Pliocene

Mollascin tadna with Avedeniia in South Aus-

tralia, Tiras. RL See. § Aust, &2, 219-233, pls

—— (19H!) Stratigraphy of the Mureay Basia to

South Australia, Mil, weal, Surv S. Aust. 36,

—— (1863) Correlation of the ‘Tertiary rocks of

Sonth Australia. Yranr KR, Foo, § use BP.

5-15.

—— (1967) Permian deposits of South Australin

wod their fauna. (hie. 99, 65-87, pls 1-5.

em (1969) Tertiary Period, 4 Parkin, Lo W-

(Ed.) “Handbook of South Australian Geology.”

(Geal, Surv. S& Aust: Adelaide

—— (1970) limestones from the Nullarbor Flain-

Appendix to Hiern, M, N. Limestone for rail-

way ballast on the Nullarbor Plain, Mineral Re-

sour, Rev S Aust 128, 172-174

~~ (1978) Quaternary molluscs of the western

part of the Fuicla Basin, Bull, geol Sure He

Awl. 125.

CH980) “ON guide to the geoloey and mineral

rexauirees of South Australia.’ (Dept Mines &

Fnergy. South Australia: Adelaide, |

(1983) Mallnsewn faunas of the Early Pleisti-

vene Point Ellen Formation and Burnham Lime-

stone. South Australia. Trans. R. Soe, S. Ans,

L07, 37-44,

McGrwean, By 11978) Barly ‘Pertiney foramini-

feral biestrauigraphy in southern Australias ao

progress report, Jn “The Crespin Volume: essays

in bengur ef frene Crespin.” Aull, Mur, Miner

Resour, Geral. Geapliys, Aust. 192, 83-95.

MeNamata, KT. & Purr, GML (1980) Tertiary

species of HKelinelampas CEchinoideay fram

Dakine Ft Austnilia. Stem. Narl Atua, Piet, 41,

Mayon, R. BO & Verors, ¥. (197389 The veology

of the Vennachar and Borda SD 000 Map

frens, Kangaroo Tshind, Mineral Resour Rev.

&. Aust 134_ 3851.

Muowes, A, RB,, Cooper, & F, & Cooper, J, A.

(1982) The Jurassic Wisunger Basalt of Kan-

guroe Island, South Australia. Trans. Ro Soe, a,

Aust We. 1-13.

—— & Hutton. J. 'T_ (1983) Calcretes in Austro-

fio, 14 Soller an Australian viewpoint,” Ch. 10,

119-162. (CSIRO: Melbourhe’Acadenuc Press,

London.)

Norrnveare, Ko H, (1949) Soil survey ane lard

vse potential hwidred of Duncan, Ranparoo

Island. Div. Suife CSPRO Auyt. Soils and Land

Use Series No.2,

~~ (1950) Soil survey of portion of the tiindred

of Newland, Kangaroo Island, S.A, CSTRO

dase, Dive Sally, Div. Rep. Na. 1/50,

CAINOZOIC KANGAROO ISLAND 35

—— (1979) Soils. Jn Tyler, M. J., Twidale, C. R.

& Ling, J. K. (Eds) “Natural History of Kan-

garoo Island,” Ch. 2, 39-46. (R. Soc. S, Aust.:

Adelaide.)

& Tucker, B. M. (1948) A soil survey of the

hundred of Seddon and part of the hundred of

MacGillivray, Kangaroo Island. Bull. Coun, Sci

Indust. Res. Aust, 233.

Parr, W. J. (1939) Foraminifera of the Pliocene

of South-Eastern Australia, Min. geol. J, 1, 65-

71.

Peron, F. (1816) Historical perspective: Kangaroo

Island—1803, “Voyage de Decouvertes aux

Terres Australes,” Vol, II, Ch. XXIV (Trans-

lated by J. Fornasiere). Jn Tyler, M. J., Twidale,

Cc. R. & Ling, J, K. (Eds) “Natural History of

Kangaroo Island.” Ch. 15, 177-184. (R. Soc, S.

Aust.: Adelaide. )

SINGLETON, O. P., McDouGaui, I. & MALLett,

C, W. (1976) The Pliocene-Pleistocene boun-

dary in southeastern Australia. J. geol, Soc, Ausi.

23, 299-311.

SpricG. R. C. (1954) Geology of Kangaroo Island.

in Sprigg, R. C., Campana, B, & King, D.

KINGSCOTE map sheet, Geological Atlas of

South Australia 4-mile series. (Geol. Surv. S.

Aust.: Adelaide.)

Sruarr, W, J, (1970) The Cainozoic stratigraphy

of the eastern coastal area of Yorke Peninsula,

wauit Australia. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 94, 151-

178.

Tate, R. (1883) The botany of Kangaroo Island,

prefaced by a historical sketch of its discovery

and settlement and by notes on its geology. /bid.,

6, 116-171.

(1891) A bibliography and revised list of the

described echinoids of the Australian Eocene,

with descriptions of new species. Jhid. 14, 270-

282.

VAIL, P. R. & MircHum, R. M. Jnr (1979) Global

cycles of relative changes of sea level from seis-

mic stratigraphy. Jn Watkins, J. S., Montadert,

L. & Dickerson, P. W. (Eds) “Geological and

geophysical investigations of continental mar-

gins.” Mem, Am. Assoc. Petrol. Geol. 29, 469-

472.

& HaArpensot, J. (1979) Sea level changes

during the Tertiary. Oceanus 22, 71-79

Waoe, M, (1955) A new genus of the Chapmani-

ninae from southern Australia. Contr. Cushman

Found, foram. Res. 6, 45-49, pl. 8.

—— (1964) Application of the lineage concept to

biostratigraphic zoning based on planktonic fora-

minifera, Micropaleontology 10, 273-290, pls

1-2.

& Carter, A. N. (1957) The foraminiferal

genus Sherbornina in southeastern Australia.

Ibid. 3, 155-164, pls 1-3.

Wave, A. (1915) The supposed oil-bearing areas

of South Australia. Bull, geol, Surv. S. Aust. 4.

Wass, R. E., Conoiiy, J. R. & Macintyre, R. J.

(1970) Bryozoan carbonate sand continuous

along southern Australia. Murine Geol., 9, 63-

73.

MOLLUSCAN FAUNAS OF THE EARLY PLEISTOCENE POINT ELLEN

FORMATION AND BURNHAM LIMESTONE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY N. H. LUDBROOK

Summary

Mollusca of the Point Ellen Formation and Burnham Limestone are recorded and two new species,

Nerita milnesi and Linga (Bellucina) praetermissa are described from the Point Ellen Formation.

Both formations overlie the Hallett Cove Sandstone or its equivalents. An Early Pleistocene age is

indicated from the presence of several species described from the Roe Calcarenite, including the

pelagic janthinid Hartungia dennanti chavani. The Burnham Limestone is considered to be a lateral

equivalent of the Point Ellen Formation. Its impoverished fauna contains Monilea euclensis,

otherwise known only from the Point Ellen Formation and the Roe Calcarenite. The relevance of

the age of the faunas to the age of tectonic warping on Fleurieu Peninsula and Kangaroo Island is

discussed.

MOLLUSCAN FAUNAS OF THE EARLY PLEISTOCENE POINT ELLEN

FORMATION AND KRURNHAM LIMESTONE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

hy N. EI. LuUpbRooK*

Summary

Luoprook, N, Ho (1983) Mofluscan faunas of the Eurly Pleistocene Polot Ellen Formation

aid Burnham Limestone, South Anustralin. Urany. &. Sve. §. Aust. 1O7(1 ), 37-49, 31 May,

1983,

Mollusca of the Poin) fllen Formation and Burnham Limestone are recorded and two

new species, Nevita milnesi and Linga (Bellucina) praeiermissa, are described from the Point

Ellen Formition. Both formations overlie the Hallett Cove Sandstone or ity equivulents, An

Early Pleistocene age is indicated from the presence of several species deseribed from the

Roe Culcareniie, inchiding the pelagic janthinid Aurrureia dennanti chavani. The Burnham

Limestone is considered to be a lnleral equivalent of the Point Ellen Formution, fs impo-

verished fauna contains Modileg euclensis, otherwise known only from the Pomt Ellen

Formation and the Roe Calcurenite, The yelevance of the age of the faunas to the age of

iectonic warping on Fleurieu Peninsula and Kangaroo Island is discussed,

Kiiy Worps: Mallusca, Eyrly Pleistocene, Point Ellen Formation, Burnham Lilnestone,

new species, Kangaroo Island, Flevrien Peniiisula, fectonism,

Introduction

The Point Ellen Formation aud its lateral

equivalent the Burnham Limestone are thin

remnants of carbonate sediments laid down

in the Early Pleistocene during a repressive

phase which followed a more extensive marine

transgression during the Late Pliocene (Lud-

brook 1954, 1959), Roth formations are of

limited extent, at presen! known to crop out

only mi the south coast of Kangaroo Island,

the eastern side of Gulf St Vineent south of

Adelaide and possibly on the Murray Rivei

at Tailem Bend. They were deposited on

irregular surfaces and vary in thickness from

a few centimetres te two metres, At Point

Reynolds, Port Willunga and Maslin Bay they

oeeur in sequence above the Hallett Cove

Sandstone of its equivalents Their relative

heights whove sea level have an important

hearing on refining the age of fhe gentle ¢ec-

tonic folding in the Kangurvu Island-Fleurieu

Peninsula elevated zone (Glaessner & Wade

1958),

The richly fossitiferous limestone at Point

Ellen on Kangaroo Island has been known

since 1914 when, as part of a survey of sup-

posed wil-hearing areas of South Avstralig.

Arthnr Wade made the first collection of

fossils trom the outcrop. Wade's material was

seot lo Chapman at the National Museum of

Victoria for identification und an annotated

list of species of foraminifera and Motluses

eva Department of Mines and Energy, Box |S4,

Eastwood, South Atestyalia S063.

was published by Chapman in an Appendix

to Wade (1915),

Small collections were made by H. Wopfner

in 1964 and A. R. Milnes and B, J. Cooper in

1980, ‘The full significance of the fauna was

nol recognised until the molluscs were more

selectively collected by Milnes, Cooper and

Ludbrook in 1981 and by Milnes and Lud-

hronk in 1982.

Chapman recorded, under the following

names aml with brief annotations, twelve

species; Glyeimeris svbardians Tate (in Base-

dow), G@. australis Quoy & Gaimard sp. var.

gigantea var, nov., Dosinea cf. victoriae Gatlift

& Crbriel Telling bavedowi Tate, Maetra ova-

lina Tate, Turbo stamineus Marlyn, Natica

comica Lamarck, Diastoma sp. Letorium verru-

cosum Reeve sp., Voaluta (Amorla) undulata

Lamarck sp., Ancilla cf, petterdi Tate sp. and

Caycellaria granava Sowerby.

From recent collecting the fauna has now

been increased to 51 species, In the much

abndged synonymies of the species accounts

Chapman's nomenclature has been included

and most of the specimens figured.

‘the Burnham Limestone was named and

described by Firman (1976), Little attention

has so fur been paid to its small fauna and it

is likely that, prior to Brian Daily's sampling

of the formation al Maslin Bay in 1966, any

specimen collected from the Burnham Lime-

slime was included in the fauna of the Hallett

Cove Sandstone. Daily’s bulk sample was

examined as such by Ludbrook without re-

38 N. HW, LUDBROOK

covering or naming any of the contained

species, Tt was suggested thar the unit might

be correlated with sands containing small

molluses occurring at depth at Lockleys ani

shown on a correlation chart qs equivalent to

ihe Pleistocene Calabrian Stage (Ludbrook

1963; Twidele ev al. 1967), The Hallett Cove

Sandstone and Dry Creck Sands were Tater

stated to puss vertically into poorly lossili-

ferous Lower Pleistocene calearcous or quartz

sinds in places (ludbrook 1969), The units

were net included in the Cenozoic correlation

chart (Ludbrook 1973).

Daily’s samples from Maslin Bay and

O'Sullivan Beach have now been critically

examined, together with material collected by

J. M. Lindsay and by Firman ond Ludbrook

from Firman’s supplementary sectiou at Port

Willunga. Nine molluseaia species are recog-

nised, of which the most important for pur-

poses af correlation is Monilea enelensiy Lud-

brook, described from the Roe Calcarenite and

occurring also in the Point Ellen Formation.

Whether they overlic the Mallett Cove

San stone or hot, bath the Point Ellen Forma-

fon and the Burnham Limestone can be dis-

tinguished lithologically from the Late Plin-

cene Hallett Cove Sandstone by their relative

riahility and by being less affected hy di

genesis, On Kanguroo Island in particular, the

Hallett Cove Sandstone js either hard and

dense or considerably leached and ferruginised:

except at Point Reynolds, the Point Ellen

Formation is more porous, less leached and

much original shell material is preserved, The

matrix may be a soft carbonale rock from

which the molluses weather out readily. as at

Cape Jervis, The Burnham Limestone is mostly

a soft, powdery, rubhly carbonate rock, Both

formations are often alfeeted by surfuce cal-

crete,

The extent and tectonic implications of the

Point Filen Formation and Buruhan Limestone

The Point Ellen Formation was defined by

Milnes ef al. (1983). AE present itis known

from lour exposures only: the type section at

Point Ellen at the sourhwestern entrance to

Vivonne Bay, at “Table Rack", Point Rey-

nels, at the soulhwesiern end of Pennington

Hay and Cape Willoughby at the southeastern

extremity of Kangaroo tshind, and. wortherly

from) Cape Willoughby, at Cape Jervis on

Fleurieu Peninsula on the eastern side of

Backstairs Passage (Fig, 1),

Pont Ellen Forration — «

Burmitam Linestons —«

c= Pau ~ ee

y Myyrtiatttey

Pe Vii ee

Res

Fig, 1, Locality map.

At “Table Rock”, Point Reynulds, the Point

llen Formution is interbedded with cross-

bedded aeolianites near the base of the Bridge-

water Formution overlying Late Pliocene

Jimestone, Like the underlying Late Pliocene,

the Point Bllen Formation is considerably

Ieached, but it contains Nerita milnest, The

boulder from Point Reynolds (GSSA F20/55)

formerly thought to have come fram the

Pliocene is now known to have been derived

from the Point Ellen Formation at that

lovality. Wt contains Afanilea euclensis.

Subsequent to ils deposition. the Point Ellen

Formation has been gently displaced by warp-

ing and possibly also by faulting, At Cape

Jervis, the base is 50 m above sea level, at

Cape Willoughby and Table Rock 10 m above,

and at Point Ellen Jess than 10 i. This gentle

warping of less thon 1° is considered to be

due to reactivatlon during the Pleistocene of

carly Palaeozoic tectonic movements in the

area, shown by Thomson & Horwitz (1962),

and forms part of the broad structural trend

from Fleurieu Peninsula ro Kangaroo Island

(Glaessner 1953),

The Burnham Limestone o¢curs as thin dis-

erete remnants cropping out south of Adelaiule

in the sea cliffs or near the coast between

Kingston Park and Port Willunga. ‘The most

accessible exposure of (he Burnham Limestone

is in the old boat ramp at Port Willunga, the

supplementary section of Firman (1976). Is

height above sea level decreases from 30 in al

Hallett Cove to 20 m at Maslin Bay. In

Aldinga and Maslin Boys the Burnham Line-

stone confornably overtics the Halletl Cove

PARLY PLEISTOCENE MOLLUSCS a9

Sandstane, and in the southern part of Maslin

Bay, where both formations thin out in a

hortherly direction, the Burnham Limestone

persists heyond the northern limit of the

Hallett Cove Sandstone. Both formations have

a gente southerly dip of ahout 1°.

The Burnham Limestone fas also been mter-

preted in bores iy the Adelaide Plains Sub-

basin us thin patches or lenses of marly time-

stone overlying a karst surface of the Hallett

Cove Sandstone and below the Hindmarsh

Clay (Lindsay 1969, Firman 1976, Selby &

Lindsay 1982) from Port Gawler southwards,

some 52-62 mo below sea level on the down-

throw side of the Para Poult.

A carbonate sediment containing seattered

small gastropods at Jervois punt landing.

‘Lailem Bend, on the Murray River, may pos-

sibly he correlated with the Burnham Lime-

stune, but fossil evidence is insufficient.

An outerop of Hallett Cove Sandstone was

formerly exposed at an elevation of 100 m

ahove sea level about 0.5 km east of the type

section of the Hallett Cove Sandstone,

Althoush this was mopped (Sprigg 1942) as

“Pleistocene ruised beach’. the only material

collected from the outcrop by Ludbraok and

Steel in 1960 belongs to the Hallett Cove

Sandstone. No Burnhant Limestone was seen,

although a remant occurs about 30 m above

sea level near the amphitheatre at Hallett Cove.

The difference in elevation of some 60° of the

Hallet! Cove Sandstone east of Hallett Cove

uppeurs to he due to warping rather than fault-

ing at this locality.

The fauna of the Point Elle Formation

The malluscan fauna is essentially that of a

bay with rocky beadlands on an exposed coust,

A new species, here deserlbed as Nerita imilnesi.

is apparently restricted to the formation and

is present in considerable numbers. Most

nenles live gregariously on rocks in the inter-

tidal zone, allhough some are adapted ta

estuarine or even freshwater habitats. Shells

af the assuciated pelagic janthinid gastropod

Hartunela dennanti chavani fave been con-

centrated with the ferites by on-shure winds

in a similar manner io those found in the

Roe Culearenite. The rest of the fauna is an

assemblage of both rock-cdwelling species and

intertidal species of a sandy bay. OF the 5!

species; six are restricted to the Early Pleis-

joceny, nite do not pecur above the Parly

Pleistocene and 36 are still fiving,

Associated with the molluses is a small

assemblage of foraminifera consisting mostly

of Marginvopora vertebraliy and Ammonia

hecearil with Flintina triquetra, Cribrobu-

limina polystoma, Elphidiun retatum and

Peneropliy sp. ef. Po pertusus.

BIVALVIA

GLYCY MERIDIDAE

Glycymeris (Tucerilla) radians (Lamarck)

Cape Willoughby (1)

Pectuncitus radians Lamarck, (819: 34

A living species recorded from the Lale

Pliovene and Early Pleistocene,

Glyeymeriy (Tucetona) convexa (Tale) FIG.

De. Cape Jervis (1)

Pectunenlus converiy Tale, I886! 198, pl 11,

figs 7a,b

Type locality: Muddy Creek, Victoria,

Grange Burn Coquina, Early Pliocene, Tate's

type series includes specimens from Norwest

Bend Formation and Hallett Cove Sandstone.

The species is common it the Dry Creek

Sands.

Glycymeris (Weletucera) pseudaustralis Single

ton FIG. 2c.d. Cape Jervis (1)

Glyeymeris (Veleruceta) psendausiralis Singleton.

1941: 425, pl. 20, figs 4,5

Type locality: Werrikoo Limestone, Glenelg

River yt Roscoe's, Parish of Killara, Victoria

PECTINIDAE

Chlamys (Chlamys) — asperrima

(Lamarck) Cape Jervis (fragment)

Prefen asperrimus Lamarck, 1819: 174

A common living species present in the Roe

Calcarenite.

Chlamys (Chlamys) asperrima (?) dennantt

Galli? & Singleton Cape Willoughby (3

fragments)

Chlamys aspervimns dennanti Galil! & Single-

ton, 1930: 74, pl TH, figs 8.9; pl. TV, figs ab

Type locality: Glenela River above Lime-

stone Creek, Vietoria. Werrikootan,

The material is fragmentary and the identi-

fication of the sub-species open to doubt. If

confirmed, it provides a useful correlation with

the Werrikoo Limestone.

OSTREIDAE

Osirea sp. ef, Ostrea angasi glenelvensiy Sin-

vleton Cape Willoughby (1 fragment), Cape

Jervis (L fragment)

Ostrca anvasi Sowerby; Tate, 1R87a: 110

Osirea siniata glenelgensis Sinpleton,

426, pl. 20, fig. 6

asperrima

1941;

40 N. H. LUDBROOK

Two fragments of valves of a rounded

species with a straight dorsal margin, long

hinge and large muscle scar appear to belong

to the subspecies, described from the basal

shell bed of the Werrikoo Limestone and re-

corded as occurring at a higher level with

Pecten meridionalis, i.e. Late Pliocene to Early

Pleistocene.

LUCINIDAE

Anodontia sphericula

Point Ellen (5)

(Basedow) FIG. 2a

EARLY PLEISTOCENE MOLLUSCS 4|

Mereirix wphericula Basedow, 1902: 131, pl. 2,

fiz. 2

Glyevenerié anstralis Quay & Caimard sp. yar.

eivantey Chapman, 1915: 49, Chapa & Sin-

gleton. 1925; 47, pl, II, fig, 32; pl. IV. fig. 22

Anadontia spherk ila (Basedow) Ludhrook,

1959: 227, pl. 3, figs 1-3, pl. 5, figs 1-42 1973;

pl. 26, fig. 65; 1978) 52. pl 5. fig. |

Singleton (1941, 426) nated thal the holo-

type of Glyeymeris anstralis var. gigantea

(here refigured) was, in his opinion, not a

glycymerid but a lueinid.

The species has a long range from Miocene

to Early Pleistacene,

Miltha hamptanernsis Ludbrook FIG. 2b Point

Ellen (6), Cape Jervis (1)

Dosinia of. victorias Chapman, 1915S: 49. nen

Gartliff & Gabriel

Miltha Aamprmensis Ludbraak, 1969; 60, ph 3,

figs 1-3; pl. 4, figs 1,2

Otherwise known only from the Roe Cal-

carenite,

2Callucina lacleolkt (Tate)

Lucina lacteola Tate, 1897) 48 nem, nav. for

Lucinda lactea Adams non Lamarck.

A mould in limestone fram Point Reynolds

may be referred to this living species which

occurs also in the Roe Calearenite,

Genus Linva de Gregorio, 1884

Subgenus Bellacina Dall, 1901

Linga (Bellucina) praetermissa sp. noy,

BIG. 3a-d

Bellucina crassiliraia Macpherson a& Gabriel,

1962: 327, fig. 372, non Tate, 1887

Material; Holotype GSSA 10020 and two

paratypes GSSA 10021 Point Ellen Formation,

Point Ellen: numerous valves SAM labelled

“Lucina crassilirata Tate, Kenyon Collection.

probably Victoria’, The uncertainty of the

locality precludes selection of types from the

Victorian material,

Shell small, solid but only moderately thick,

globose, subequilateral, rounded anteriorly.

posteriorly truncated, with an umbanal-veniral

fiexure, margin sinuated at flexure, sculpture

variable, predominantly of fine concentric

lirac, interrupted by deep growth channels;

radial sculpture variable or absent, consisting

of fine threads crossing interspaces between ihe

conceniric liraey inner margin finely crenulate.

Hinge of moderate width, cardinals oblique

with triangular pit between them, LY with 4h

narrow, high, 2 triangular, short, PI, PIV,

AT, ALV all short; RV with small 3a, tri-

angular somewhat bifid 3b, short AT, ATU,

PI, and PIL. Holotype height 7, width 7 mm;

paratype (locality “Vietoria’) height 10,

width 10 1.

The spevies figured by Macpherson &

Gabriel as Bellweina eraysilirata was stated to

be seen frequently at Western Port.

CARDITIDAE

Cardita subdeceptiva

Cape Jervis (3)

Cardita subdecepliva Ludbroak, 1955: 40, pl 4,

tig. I4

Kuown also from the Dry Creek Sands and

the Lute Pliocene of Gum Creek, KE.

Pleurameriy stbpecten Ludbrook FIG. 2p.q

Cape Jervis (2)

Pleuromerix sibpecten

pl. 2. fig, 3

Described from the Dry Creck Sands

MACTRIBDAE

Mactra sp. cf. Mactra pura Deshayes

Muetrs purd Deshayes, 0853; 15

An internal cast of a Macrre, similar in

shape to M. pura, recorded (Ludbrook 1978)

from Barly Pleistocene to Holocene.

Ludbrook FIG. 2f,g

Ludbrook, [9S5S: 42,

MESODESMATLDAE

Aimesodesma anyusta (Reeve) PIGS 2j.k Point

Ellen (3)

Mevsadesmna angusia (Reeve) 1854 pl tf, fig, 4

Occurs rarely in the Point Ellen Formation

and, like A. enneata, has a continuous record

on Kangaroo Island from the Early Pleisto-

cent to the present,

ee $c eororwrm

Fig, 2, a. anodontia sphericula (Basedow). holotype of Glyeinteris ausiralis giganter Chapman NMYV

P19339: bh. Miltha Rampionensiy Lidhraok GSSA 10009; Gul Glyeymeris (Veletuceta) pscudans-

traliy Singleton c. interior, d, exterior GSSA WTO; &. CG. (Tucetona) convexa (Tate) GSSA WONT,

fp. Carita subdeeeptiva Ludbrook RV f, exterior. 2.

cuneate (Lamarck) DM We exterior. 7-

interior GSSA 10012; ha. Amusedesme

interior GSSAI0013; ).K. drtesadesmea angusta (Reeve) RY

j- exterior, k. interior GSSA W014: Lime Telling sp. (Mactra ovaling of Chapman) GSSA_ 10015;

n, AKatelysia seaturina (Lamarck) GSSA 10016: 0. Cafrarian perernadum Woods GSSA TO017: pq.

Plenvameris subpecten. Ludbrook GSSA THOR. &, Tineclea (Verenolpa) kendricki Ladbrook LV

r. interior, s, exterior GSSA 10019, All natural size and all from Point Ellen except myn,rs from

Cape Jervis.

GSSA, Geological Survey of South Australia; NMY, National SAM, South

Australian Museum

Museum of Vielorkc

42 N. H, LUDBROOK

The subgenus Amesodesma is here accorded

full generic status, details of which are dis-

cussed in a paper in preparation.

Amesodesma cuneata (Lamarck) FIG. 2h,i.

Point Ellen (3)

Crassatella cuneata Lamarck 1818: 483

Specimens from Point Ellen are identical

with living specimens from Kingscote and with

those occurring in the St Kilda Formation of

the coast road, Bay of Shoals. The species is

more common on Kangaroo Island than the

smaller, narrower A. angusta.

TELLINIDAE

Tellina sp. FIG. 20,p. Point Ellen (3)

Mactra ovalina Lamarck. Chapman 1915: 49,

non Mactra ovalina Lamarck

EARLY PLEISTOCENE MOLLUSCS 43

The specimens identified as Maetra ovaling

ure in the Palaeontology Collection of the

Geological Survey of South Australia, together

with another specimen collected by H,

Woptner in 1964. With two exceptions, they

are firmly embedded in hard matrix and the

Hinges are obscured, Although in shape und

size they are comparable with the New Zealand

Longinaetra elongety (Quoy & Gaimard), no

suggestion of a muctrid hinge can be secn-

There is a long external ligament pit and a

supporting nymph; such of the pallial line us is

visible appears (6 have a fairly deep sinus, The

species is therefore probably a large Tellina

with tather convex valves..

VUENERIDAE

Katelysia sealarina (Lamarck) FIG. 21 Point

Ellen (7), Point Reynolds (moulds), Cape

Willoughby (mould)

Venus sealarinag Laraarek, TRIS; 599

Not uncommon in the formation, as in the

Roe Calearenite and throughout the Pleisto-

vene to the present.

Timaclea (Vereinvlpa) kendrieki Ludbrook

FIG, 2r6, Point Ellen (1). Cape Willoughby

(1)

Timoelea (Perenialva) kendricki Lidbrook

1978: 80, pl, 9, figs 9-12, 1S, 16,

Descrihed (rom the Roe Calearenite,

Gefrariin perornainm Woods FIG. 2g Point

Ellen (1)

Cafniriium perarnatinn No. Woods 1931, 148.

pl. 7, figs 7, 8

Occurs in the Dry Creck Sands and ts olher-

wise known only from Point Ellen.

SCAPHOPODA

DENTALIIDAE

Dearafium latesiifeatim Tate Cape Jervis (1)

Dentalinmn laresuteariet Tare, 1899: 262, 267,

pl. &. lig. 9

Has a range of Early Pliavene to carly

Pleistocene

GASTROPODA

HALIOTIDAR

Haliatis (Exohaliatis) cyelobates

Lesweur Point Ellen (2 fragments)

fuliotiy cyelobates Peron & Lesueur, 1816: 80

Found also in the Roe Calcarenie but other-

wise known only from the modern fauna.

FISSURELLIDAE

Clypidina (Mantfortula)

Gajmard) PIG, 3! Point

Jervis (1)

Emarginuly cugasa Quoy & Gaimard,

331, pl, 68. ties 17, 18

Previously kKiown only from the modern

fauna,

ACMAEIDAE

Patelloida nigroxuleata (Reeve) Point Ellen

(1)

Patella tigresuledia Reeve, 18552 pl. 30, tig, 84

First appears in the Point Ellen Formation

and continues through the Glanville and St

Kulda Formations to the present day, when il

is vommonly found attached to Patella

(Sevlellasira) laticostata Blainville.

PATELLIDAE

Patella (Seutellasrra) peronti Blainville FIG,

3t, Cape Jervis (2)

Patella peronid Blainville, 1825; 111

Known only from Cape Jervis and the

mwiodern fauna,

FROCHIDAE

Canrharidus (Phasianotrochus) exinias (Perry)

Point Ellen (3)

Balimnus eximiuy Perey, 11bt pl 30, fig, 20

Previously known only from the modern

fauna,

Peron &

rugosa (Quoy &

Ellen (1), Cape

(834:

Fig, 3. wd. Lines (Bellucina) practermissa xp. nov. a.b. holotype LV a. exterior. b. interior GSSA

10020, e.d. Kenyon specimen SAM RV ¢. exterior, d. interior; e-. Nerita milnesi sp. Woy. e.

hololype apertural view GSSA 10022. f.g. paratypes showing variation in ribbing GSSA 10023:

hej. Martungia denhanti chavaii Vudbrook GSSA 10025 a,be; ko Cantharidus (Phasianorroehiis)

apicinus (Menke) GSSA 10026; 1 Clypiding (Montfottula) rugosa (Quoy & Gaimard) GSSA 10027;

mon, Diloma (Practarmillat concamerata (Wood) GSSA 10028; 0. Diloma (Fractarmilla) rudy

(Gray) GSSA 10029: p.qo Monilea euclensis Ludbrook p. apical view GSSA 10030. yg. apertural

view GSSA 1003t; r. Niotha pyrrine (Menke) GSSA 10032; & Cymaticlla verrucosa (Reeve)

Chapman specimen GSSA 10033; . Palella (Neutellastva) perani Blainville GSSA 10034: u. Cenn-

nella ehurnea (Reeve) GSSA 10035: 9. Amalda (Graecilisplra) monilifera (Reeve) GSSA 10036,

we Siphonuria (lMubendickula) baceni Reeve GSSA 10037; x. Ameria (Ameria) gravi Ludbpook

GSSA 100388; y. ?dusrreharpa Kendricki Ludbrook GSSA_ 10039; 2, Svdaphera undulata (Sowerby?

GSSA 10040: Ay Casameda tredaler Finlay GSSA 10041; B. Diastoma adelaidense Ladhyook

GSSA 10117; C.D. mwvlunioides (Reeve) GSSA 10042; D. Batillaria (Zeacumeantus) diemenensis

(Quoy & Gaimard) GSSA WS; Eo Burnhum Limestone with cast of %Brachidoitey sp. ef.

Stherosus (Singleton) GSSA ddd; FE, Burnham Limestone with moulds und casts of Batilfarta

(Hafilleriella) estuarina (Tate) GSSA 10045. All natural size and from Point Ellen except k.qy.

FE oand FP from Burnham Lunestone,

ad N. H, LUDBROOK

Diloma (Fractarmilla) concamerata (Wood)

PIG, 3m.n. Paint Ellen (5). Cape Jervis (29)

Troehus concamerata Wood, 1828: 17, pl. 6,

fiz. 39

The earliest reeord is in the Point Ellen

Formation; it continues through the Glanville

und St Kilda Formations to the present day,

Diloma (Fractarmilla) rudis (Gray) PUG. 3o.

Point Ellen (1)

Monodonta rudis Gray, 1827) 480

Occurs rarely in the Point Alles and Glan-

villy Formations of Kangaroo Island and in

the modern fauna west from Gull St Vincent

to Western Australia where it is common.

Monilea euclensis Ludhrook FIG, 3p,q, Point

Ellen (4), Cape Jervis (2)

Monilea euclensis Ludbrook, 1978: 97, pl. 10,

figs 4-8. 12

Described from the Roe Calcarenite where

it is common! elsewhere known only from the

Point Ellen Formation where it appears to be

nol uncommon, and the Burnham Limestone

TURBINIDAE

Turhe (Ninella) torquatus Gmelin. Point Ellen

(2), Cape Tervis (1)

Tirhe tarquatns Gmelin, 1791: 3597, No, (06

Turbo stomineus Martyn. Chapman, 1915: 49

(Martyn name rejected TOZN 456)

The (three small examples are the earliest

certain. reeord of the species which continues

throuzh uncommon occurrences in the Glan-

ville Formation to the present day.

Asrrava (Micrastraca) aurea (Jonas)

FPllen (1).

Troelhus aurens Jonas, (B4Ss 168

The living species occurs also in the Glan-

ville Formation on Kangaroo Island.

Avytrava (Mierastrava) rtitidalama (Tate) Cape

Jervis (3)

Turha Clsmahin) citidalama Tate. 18939: 199,

pL of, fig. 9

Common in the Roe Calcarenite but mat so

fur recorded from the Late Pleistocene: living.

NERITIDAR

Genus Nerina Linnaeus, 1758

Point

Nerit# milnesi sp. noy.

FIG. 3e-g.

Material: holotype GSSA 10027 and para-

types GSSA 10023, 10024 61 topotypes Point

Ellen, | specinven and 3 fragments Cape Wil-

loughby, 65 specimens Cape Jervis,

Shell rather small, globose, solid, thick,

spire Hat. almost obliquely planispiral, (the

inner walls of Neritidae being resorbed), pro-

tocooch flat, usually eroded, 1-14 adult whorls,

the last whorl almost enveloping the rest of

the shell; surface of shell sculptured with 24—

27 spiral ribs with linear grooves between

them, Ribs generally light coloured and

grooves black, protoconch smooth anu white.

Aperture semicirculir, outer lip crenulated by

spiral ribs, widely thickened with posterior

denticle and anterior denticle set on inner

margin of lip, inner lip septum or “duck” well

developed, smooth and shining with three

denticles in the middle.

Dimensions: holotype height 12. diameters

23 and 18 mm; large paratype height 16, dia-

meters 24 and 20 mm,

The species resembles most closely Nerite

lineata from northwest and northern Australia,

It is only about half the size of lineata, which

is generally more finely ribbed and somewhat

more Variable than N. milresi, specimens from

Exmouth being closer to N. milnest than those

rom the north, Tt is extremely abundant in the

cliff face: at Point Ellen, forming a coquinite mn

places, and was no doubt living gregarionsly

On rocks in the intertidal zone like its modern

counterparts, [fi has gone Unndticed in the

past, with the exception of a ceference to

“Reef shell beds (Turho ete.) at the base of

the agolianite system” in the Pleistocene see-

tion of the legend to the KINGSCOTE 4-mile

geological series map (Sprigg 1954),

The species is named for Dr A. R. Milnes.

PHASIANELLIDAR

Phasianella aneasi Crosse

Plasianelle angusit Crosse, 1864; 344, pl. 13,

fig. 5

A sinwle specimen was found at Point Bilen

and 4a doubtful specimen in the Holocene alt

Point Tipline. Modern distribution of the

species is from Western Australia to South

Australia,

Phasianella australis (Gmelin)

(9)

Bucclmimn australe Gmelin, 1791; 3490, No. 173

Appears to he common in the Point Ellen

Formation a it is in the Roe Calcarenite. Tts

first known occurrence is in the Late Pliocene

at Gum Creck and tt persists through the

Glanville Formation te the present day,

LITTORINIDAE

Bembicinn) melanoytame (Gmelin) Point Ellen

(2)

Prochus melanosiomus Gmelin.

Point Ellen

I79L; SSSI

PARLY PLEISTOCENE MOLLUSCS 45

Has «4 continuous record from the Fatly

Pleistocene to the present day, wheo it lives

inostly in sheltered rocky bays or on mud flats,

Bemibicium nanum (Lamarck) Cape Jervis (9)

Trochus nanum Lamarck, 1822b: 30

Has an irregular record in the Quaternary,

Nt occurs in the Roe Calearenite and in the

Glanville and St Kilda Pormations on Kan-

garoo Island, It is a modern inhabitant of

rocks on mpen coast.

POTAMIDIDAE

Batillaria (Zeacumuantas) diemenensis (Quoy &

Guimard) FIG, 3D, Point Ellen (21)

Cerithinm diemenense Quoy & Goimard, 1839:

Atlas pl. 545, figs 11-13, 1834: 128,

Ovcurs more ur less abundantly from the

Lute Pliocene of the Dry Creek Sands to the

present day,

TURRITELLIDAR,

Gazaneda irvedalet Finlay FIG. 3A. Point

Ellen (3)

Gazanwida iredaled Finlay. 1927) 496.

First appears in the Dry Creek Sands, very

vommon in the Roe Calearenite and con-

linuing through the Glanville Pormation and

St Kilda Formation to the present day,

DIASTOMATIBAR

Diastema acdelaidenye

Point Ellen (6)

Diastonia ddeluidense Ludbrook, 1971: 32, pl. 1,

figs 3-7. pl. 6, figs 9, 10,

Diastoma melanioides (Reeve) FIG. 30. Point

Mien (13), Point Reynolds, Cape Willoughby

(moulds)

Mesalia. melaniaides Reeve, 1849: plot, fie, L.

Diastoma sp, Chapman Yrs. 49

Chapnian noted that the Diaveme in Wade's

material wus elosely related to D, provist Tate

from Hallett Cove and the Dry Creek Bore:

both 2. adelaidense and D. melaniaides are

present, however, as they are also in the Roe

Culcarenite.

Ludbrook FIG, 3B,

CERITHITDAR

Piala laura A. Adams Point Ellen (2)

Diala lauta A. Adams, 1862: 298

This is a ubiquitous small species through-

out the Quaternary, although uneommon «at

Point Ellen where the environment would

have been rather unfavourable, Tt lives today

on algae in sheltered inlets and bays.

Campanile symholicum Iredale Point Ellen (1)

Campanile svmboalicunm Iedale, 917) 326 ies.

nov, for Cerithitum leve Quoy & Guimard. 1833

now Cevithium laevis Perry, 1810

Represented in the Point Ellen Formation

hy § single specimen embedded in hard matrix

With coral. This is us far cast asx the species

has been found. [t is common in the Roe

Calearenite and in the modern Western Aus-

tralian fauna,

JANTHINIDAE

Hertiivia dennann chavant FIG. ah-j, Point

Ellen (17), Cape Jervis (4)

Hartangia denna vhavant Ludbreok,

119, pl. 12, figs 1-14

From aw stratigraphre point of view, this is

the most diagnostic und important species in

the Point Ellen Formation, It is a pelagic

Bastropod with a limited range, Tound abun-

dantly in the Rue Calearenite, In the Point

Ellen Formation it was probably brought in

by on-shore winds and deposited in some

abundance with Nerita al (he type section.

HIPPONICIDAE

Hipponix (Sabie) caniens (Schumacher), Point

Reynolds (moulds), Cape Jervis (1)

Amialihea coniea Schumacher, 817) 181, pl. 21

Represented by o single specimen only from

Cape Jervis. Wo has a range of Late Pliocene

to Ihe present.

Hipponix (Antisahia) erma (Cotton), Point

Filen (1), Pomt Reynolds (mould). Cape

Jervis (1)

Subiy (dlotisuliia) ernie Cotton, 1939: 171. pl. 7.

fig, 8

Described from Reeveshy Island. The speci-

men from Point Ellen is small with somewhat

granulose concentric laminae approaching. the

sculpture ol HA, (A.) foliaceny. However, in

hoth this specimen gnd the more typical

example of Mf, (A.) erma from Cape Jervis, as

well as the mowuld from Point Reynolds, the

per nearly overhangs the margin. Also oceurs

in the Glanville Formation.

NATICIDAE

Polinices (Conuber) coniens (Lamarek) Point

Elfen (1)

Natlea conica Lamarek, [R22u: 198

Nalica conicu Lamarek. Chapman Lots; 49

The species has an almost continuous re

cord from the Late Pliacene lo the present,

CYMATIIDAR

Cymartiela verrucam (Reeve) PIG

Ellen 11)

OTK:

3s. Point

46 N, H, LUDBROOK

Triton verrucosus Reeve, 1844: pl. 17, sp. 71

Letorium verricosum Reeve sp, Chapman,

1915: 49

The record is limited to the single specimen

identified by Chapman; it is a living species

occurring also in the Glanville and St Kilda

Formations.

BUCCINIDAE

Caminella ehurnea (Reeve) FIG, 3u, Point

Ellen (5)

Buccinum costatum Quoy & Gaimard, 1833:

417, pl 30, figs 17-26 (non Linnaeus, 1758. ver

Da Costa 1778, vee Meuschen, 1787) Axecinum

vburneum Reeve, 1846: sp, 31, pl. 12, fig. 93

Represented continuously from the Point

Ellen Formation and Roe Calcarenite to the

present day,

NASSARIIDAE

Niatha pyrrhus (Menke) FIG. 3r, Point Ellen

(3)

Buceinum pyrrhus Menke, 1843: 21

Has a continuous record from the Roe Cal-

carenite and Point Ellen Formation to the

present

OLIVIDAE

Amulda (Gracilispira) monilifera

PIG, 3v. Point Ellen (24)

Ancillarta lineata Kiener, 1844: 16, pl. 3, fig, 2

non Anelila lineata Perry, 1811

Ancilluria monilifera Reeve,

VWa,b

Ancilla cf. peltlerd’ Tate sp. Chapman 19155

S50)

This living species is common jn both the

Roe Calcavenite and Point Ellen Formation

hut 1s not known soa far from the Late Pleisto-

cence.

(Reeve)

1864: v.10, fizs

VOLUTIDAE

Amoaria (Amoria) grayi Ludbrook FIG, 3x.

Poimt Ellen (1)

Voluta pallida Gray, (834: pl. 30, fie. 4,

Index p. 601 (non Voluta pallidus Linnaeus,

(767)

Voluta (Amaria) undulata Chapman, 1915: 50

(nen Poluta undulata Lamarck )

Amarig (Amoria) erayi Ludbrook, 1953) norm,

ney, for Poluta pallida Gray non Linnaeus not

Amoria erayé Daily et al, 1976

Chapman recorded two species of WVolute

(Amoria) undulata having considerable varia-

ton in the height of the spires. Only the speci-

men figured here is in the GSSA collection and

although it is incomplete it can be fairly Te-

liably compared with Aporia (Amoria) gravi-

li has no trace of the indulose linear surface

ornament of wndulata noted by Chapman, 'The

specimen figured hy Daily et af (1976, fig.

21h) as Ameria grayi is not that species but a

specimen in the Tate Museum, University of

Adelaide, identified as 4moria masoni (Tate),

A, (A,) wrayi was tecorded also from the

Dry Creek Sands and the Roe Calcarenite. tt

is a common variable species with a modern

range [rom Geographe Bay to Cambridge Gulf,

W.A,

CANCELLARIIDAE

Sydaphera undulata (Sowerby) FIG, 32. Pornt

Ellen (1)

Cancellaria granasa Sowerby,

fig. 16 (not pl, 10, fig, 17)

Caneelluria undulata Sewerby, 1848: 136

Cancellaria granesa Sowerby, Chapmim, 1915:

Only one of the two specimens recorded by

Chapman is in the GSSA Collection, Rare in

the Point Ellen Formation and the Roc Cal-

carenite and is not known again before its

present occurrence from southwestern Aus-

(ralia to Victoria,

CONIDAE

Cynuy sp, Cape Willoughby (1)

An internal east of an unidentified Corer

embedded [nh matrix occurs at Cape Wil-

loughby.

SIPHONARIIDAF.

Siphonaria (Hubendickula) haconi Reeve FIG.

3w., Point Ellen (1)

Niphonaria bacani Reeve, 1RS56: pl. 6, sp. 30

A single specimen was found among the

material examined by Chapman.

Has u continueus range in South Australia

from the Point Ellen Formation to the present.

1832; pl 10,

The fauna of the Burnham Limestone

The Burnham Limestone contains molluscan

species most of which are intertidal inhabitants

of estuaries, tidal inlets, or the sandy or

muddy flats of sheltered bays. The smull

assemblage is dominated by Sarillaria (Batil-

lariella) estuarina and Anapella vuriabilix, with

Chlamys (Equichtamys) bifrons subbifrens,

Brachidontes sp, cf, B. suberosus, Limatula sp,

cf L. ludbrookae, Cantharidus (Phasiana-

rrechus) apicinus, Meonilea eneclensis, Miero-

colus duukert and Austreharpa kendricki.

EARLY PLEISTOCENE MOLLUSCS 47

Three species are restricted to Early Pleisto-

vene deposits, one occurs also in the Late

Pliocene and the rest re still living.

Murginopera vertebralis is also present.

BIVALVIA

PECTINIDAE

Chlamnvs (Iquichlamys)

(Tate) Maslin Bay (1)

Pecten subbifrons Tate, 1BB2) 44, TRG: 104,

pl. 3, fig, 2,

The specinien is poorly preserved but

appears to belong to the subspecies.

MYTILIDAR

Brachidontes sp. ef, B. xuberasns (Singleton)

FIG. 30. Maslin Bay (1)

Aulacomya suheroxa Singleton, 1941: 427, pl.

XX, fig. 7

Represented by an internal east only. but

the straight anterior margin, sharp ridge and

acute heaks ate clearly seen, The only other

recorded oecurrence is in the Werrikoo Lime-

stone of Limestone Creek, Glenelg River,

Western Victoria,

LIMIDAE

Limatnla lvdbrockae Buonaiuto Maslin Bay

(1)

Limatnla ludbrookae Buondiuto, 1977: 28, fies

1, 1-11, 27-35

The only specimen found so Tar is an

internal mould which has the distinctive high,

narrow shupe of the species. Tt has been known

previously only from the Hallett Cove Sand-

slime and Dery Creek Sands,

MESODESMATIDAL

Anapella variahifis (Tate) Maslin Bay (com-

mon), Port Willunga (8)

napa variabilis Tate, 1887b) 172, pl, 17, figs

Sa-b

Modern relatives of this species inhabit

estuaries and shallow water, The species is

abindant in patches in the Burnham Lime-

stove. mainly in the form of internal casts. Tt

has a range of Late Pliocene to Early Pleisto-

cene,

bifrons sunbbifrany

GASTROPODA

TROCHIDAE

Cantharidny (Phasianotrachus)

(Menke) O'Sullivan Beach (1)

Monodouta apicina Menke, 1843: 15

Rare in the Burnham Limestone, hut occurs

abundantly in the Roe Calcarenite and in the

Holocene,

apicinus

Monilea euclensis Ludbrook Hallett Cove (1),

O'Sullivan Beach (1)

Monilea euclensis Ludbrook, 1978: 97, pl. 10,

figs 4-8, 12

Known only from the Roe Calcarenite,

Point Ellen Formation and the Burnham Lime-

stone,

POTAMIDIDAR

Barillavia (Batillariella) exinarina (Tate) FIG.

3F Maslin Bay (abundant)

Bintium estiarimun Tate, 1893+ 190, pl. 1, fig. 12

As the fame implies, the species occurs in

estuaries and tidal inlets. It ig abundant in the

Burnham Limestone at Maslin Bay. Tt has a

continuous record from the Barly Pleistocene

to the present.

FASCTOLARITDAE

Microcolux dunkeri (Jonas) Maslin Bay (1)

Fusuy dunkeri Jonas, 1846; 129

Has a continuous record from the Early

Pleistocene to the present, but is rare in the

Burnham Limestone.

HARPIDAE

Austroharpa kendricki: Ludbrook FIG. Ay.

Hallett Cove (1)

Anstroharpa kendricki Ludbrook,

pl. IR. figs 4-6

An internal cast from Hallett Cove appears

to belong to the variety of the species with a

denticulate outer lip (Ludbrook 1978, pl. 18,

fig. 6) and a very low spire. The species is

otherwise known only from the Roe Cal-

carenite. Austroharpa is well represented in the

Tertiary of southern Australia and is still

surviving off the coast today in relatively

shallow water.

1978: 162,

Acknowledgments

I am greatly indebted to my colleagues

whose assistance in collecting material made

this study possible: Drs A. R. Milnes, B. J.

Cooper and B. Daily; the fleld party from the

Cicological Survey of South Australia, particu-

larly A. Crooks; J. B, Firman. 1 wish also to

thank the National Museum of Victoria for

the loan of the type of Glyclmeris australir

gigantea Chapman, the Drafting Branch of the

Department of Mines and Energy for drawing

the locality map, and the Director-General of

Mines and Rnergy for permission to publish.

48 N. H. LUDBROOK

References

ApAMs, A. (1862) On the animal and _ affinities

of the genus Alaba with a review of known

species, and description of some new species.

Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist. ser, 3, 10, 293-299.

Basepow, H. (1902) Descriptions of new species

of fossil Mollusca from the Miocene limestone

near Edithburg. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 26(2),

130-132, pl. 2,

Beu, A. G, (1971) Genera of the bivalve family

Mesodesmatidae, with comments on some Aus-

tralasian species. J. malac. Soc. Aust. 2(2),

113-131.

BLAINVILLE, H. M. D.. pe (1825) Manuel de

Malacologie et de Conchyliologie. Paris, Stras-

bourg.

Buonatuto, M. F. (1977) Revision of the Aus-

tralian Tertiary species ascribed to Limatula

Wood (Mollusca, Bivalvia). Trans. R. Soc. S.

Aust. 101(1), 21-33.

CHAPMAN, F. (1915) Report on a collection of

fossils made by Dr A. Wade from the Cainozoic

series of South Australia. Appendix II Jn Wade,

A. The supposed oil-bearing areas of South

Australia. Bull. geol. Surv, S. Aust, 4, 44-50.

& SINGLETON, F, A. (1925) A revision of

the Cainozoic species of Glycymeris in southern

Australia. Proc. R. Soc. Vict. 37(1) n.s., 18-60,

pls 1-4.

Corton, B. C. (1939) Sir Joseph Banks Islands.

Part 2, Mollusca. /bid. 51(1), 159-176, pl. 7.

Crosse, H. (1864) Description d’espéces nouvelles

provenant de I’Australie méridionale. J. Conchy!.

12, 339-346, pl. 13.

Desuayes, G,. P. (1853) Descriptions of fourteen

new species of Mactra in the collection of Mr

Cuming. Proc. zool. Soc. XX¥, 14-17.

FrrMan, J. B. (1976) Limestone at the base of

the Pleistocene sequence in South Australia.

Quart. Geol. Notes, Geol. Surv. S. Aust. 58.

1-5,

Gaturr, J. H. & SINGLETON, F. A. (1930) On

the relationship between “Pecten” asperrimus

Lamarck and “Pecten” antiaustralis Tate, with

a description of an allied fossil form. Proc. R.

Soc, Vict. 42(2) (n.s.), 71-77.

GLAESSNER, M. F, (1953) Some problems of Ter-

tiary geology in southern Australia. Clarke

Memorial Lecture. J. Proc. R. Soc. N.S.W. 87

(2), 31-45.

—— & Wane, M. (1958). St Vincent Basin. Jn

Glaesener, M. F. & Parkin, L. W. (eds) The

geology of South Australia. J. geol. Soc. Aust.

5(2), 115-126,

GMELIN, J. F. (1791) Linnaeus Systema naturae

ed XII aucta reformata, 3021-3910.

Lipsiae.

Gray, J. E. (1827) Jn King, P. P. Narrative of a

survey of the intertropical and western coasts

of Australia, Appendix B. Mollusca. vol, 2,

474-496, (J. Murray: London.).

INTERNATLONAL COMMISSION ON ZOOLOGICAL

NOMENCLATURE (1958) Official Index of re-

jected and invalid works in Zoological Nomen-

clature. Opinion 456.

Jonas, J. H. (1845) Neue Trochoideen. Zeits.

fiir Malakozoologie for the year 1844, 167-172

(Noy. 1844).

—— (1846) Molluskologische Beitrage. Abh.

Naturw, Ver. Hamburg. 1, 101-130, pls 7-11.

KIENER, L. C, (1843-1844) Ancillaria. Species

général et Iconographie des coquilles vivantes

-+. 1, Paris 1834-1880.

LAMARCK, J. B. P. A. pr M. (1818) Histoire

naturelle des animaux sans vertébres (Paris). 5.

(1819) Ibid. 6(1).

—— (1822a) /bid. 6(2).

(1822b) Ibid. 7.

Linpsay, J. M. (1969) Cainozoic foraminifera

and stratigraphy of the Adelaide Plains Sub-

basin, South Australia. Bull. geol. Surv. S.

Aust. 42,

Lupprook, N. H. (1953) Systematic review of the

volutid genus Amoria. Proc, malac. Soc. Lond.

30, 131-153.

(1954) The molluscan fauna of the Pliocene

Strata underlying the Adelaide Plains. Part 1.

Trans. R. Soc. S, Aust. 77, 42-64,

(1955) Ibid. Part 2. Ibid. 78, 18-87, pls. 1-6.

— (1959) A widespread Pliocene molluscan

fauna with Anodontia in South Australia. [bid.

82, 219-233, pls 1-5.

—— (1963) Correlation of the Tertiary rocks of

South Australia. Ibid. 87, 5-15.

(1969a) Tertiary Period. Jn Parkin, L. W.

(ed.) “Handbook of South Australian geology”.

(Geol. Surv. S. Aust.: Adelaide.)

(1969b) The genus Miltha (Mollusca: Bi-

valvia) in the Australian Cainozoic. Trans. R.

Soc. S. Aust. 93, 55-63, pls. 1-5.

(1971) Large gastropods of the families

Diastomatidae and Cerithiidae (Mollusca:

Gastropoda) in southern Australia. Jhid. 95(1),

29-42. pls 1-6.

—— (1973) Distribution and stratigraphic utility

of Cenozoic molluscan faunas in southern Aus-

tralia. Sci. Rep. Tohoku Univ, 2 ser. Spec. vol.

6, 241-261, pls. 24-28.

(1978) Quaternary molluscs of the western

part of the Eucla Basin. Bull. geol. Surv. W.

Aust. 125.

MAcPHERSON, J. H. & Gapriet, C. J. (1962)

“Marine molluscs of Victoria”. (Melbourne

University Press & National Museum of Vic-

toria: Melbourne).

MENKE, C, T. (1843) Molluscorum Novae Hol-

landiae (Hannoverae in libraria aulica

Hahniana Hannoverae),

MILNEs, A. R., LupBroox, N. H., Linpsay, J. M.,

& Cooper, B. J. (1983) The succession of

Cainozoic marine sediments on Kangaroo

Island, South Australia. Trans. R. Soc. S, Aust.

107, 1-35.

PERON, F. & Lesugur, C. A. (1816) Voyage de

decouvertes aux terres australes. 2 vols +

Atlas (Paris).

PERRY, G. (1811). “Conchology or the Natural

History of Shells: containing a new arrange-

ment of the genera and species, etc.” Illust,

London.

Quoy, J. R. C. & Garmarp, J. P. (1832-1835) Jn

Dumont Durville, J. S, C. “Voyage de décou-

verts de la Corvette l’Astrolabe ...” Zoologie,

3, (1833) Atlas 2 vols.

EARLY PLEISTOCENE MOLLUSCS 49

Reeve, L. A.

Triton,

(1849) Ibid. 5. Mesalia.

—— (1854) Ihid. 8 Mesodexma.

—— (1855) hid. 8. Patella.

—— (1856) Ihid. 9. Siphonaria.

—~— (1864) Shid. 15, Ancillaria.

ScHumMACcHER, C, F. (1817) “Essai d'un nouveau

Systéme des Habitationes des Vers Testaccs.”

(Copenhague).

Secpy, J. & Linpsay, J. M. (1982) Engineering

geology of the Adelaide City area, Bull. geol.

Surv. S. Aust. 51.

SINGLETON, F, A. (1941) Studies in Australian

Tertiary Mollusca Part Il. Proc, R. Soc, Vict.

53(2) n.s.. 423-428, pl. 20.

Sowersy, G. B. (2) (1832) “The conchological

illustrations”. (London).

(2) (1848) Descriptions of some new species

of Cancellaria in the collection of Mr H.

Cuming. Proc. zool. Soc. 136-137,

Spriac, R. C. (1942) The geology of the Eden-

Moana fault block. Trans. R, Soc. S. Aust. 66

(2), 185-214, 2 maps.

Spricc. R. C. (1954) Geology of Kangaroo Island.

In Sprigg, R, C., Campana, B, & King, D.

KINGSCOTE map sheet, Geological Atlas of

South Australia 4-mile series. (Geol. Surv. S.

Aust,: Adelaide.)

Tare, R. (1882) Diagnoses of new species of

Miocene fassils from South Australia, Ibid. 5,

44-46,

(1844) Conchologia Iconica 2.

(1886) The lamellibranchs of the Older

Tertiary of Australia Part 1. Thid. 8, 96-158,

pls 2.12.

—— (1887a) A revision of the Recent lamelli-

branch and palliobranch Mollusca of South Aus-

tralia. Jbid. 9, 76-111.

(1887b) The lamellibranchs of the Older

Tertiary of Australia Part 2. /bid. 9, 142-200,

pls 14-20.

(1893) On some new species of Australian

marine Gastropoda. /hid. 17(1), 189-197.

—— (1899) A revision of the Older Tertiary

Mollusca of Australia. Part 1. Thid. 23(2),

249-277.

Tuomson, B. P. & Horwirz, R. C. (1962)

BARKER map sheet, Geological Atlas of South

Australia 1:250 000 series, Geol. Surv, S. Aust.

TwipaLe, C. R.. Damy, B. and FirMan, J. B.

(1967) Eustatic and climatic history of the

Adelaide areat A Discussion. J. Geol. 75(2),

237-242.

Wane, A. (1915) The supposed oil-bearing areas

oe South Australia, Bull. geol, Surv. S. Aust.

Woop, W. (1828) Index Testaceologicus; or a

catalogue of shells, British and foreign, arranged

according to the Linnean system; ete. Illlust,

London 2nd. ed. (W. Wood; London)

Woops, N. H. (1931) Pelecypoda from the

Abattoirs Bore, including 12 new species. Trans.

R. Soc. S, Aust. 55, 147-151, pls 7-8.

NOTES ON THE AUSTRALASIAN SPECIES OF CYMATIA FLOR S.L.

(INSECTA, HETEROPTERA: CORIXIDAE)

BY IVOR LANSBURY

Summary

The validity of generically distinguishing the Australasian Cymatia from the rest of this primarily

holartic genus is discussed. Cnethocymatia Jansson, 1982 proposed for Cy. nigra is relegated to

subgeneric status within Cymatia. Cymatia nigra and the anomalous Asian species Cy. Apparens

are both compared with the remainder of the known species.

NOTES ON THE AUSTRALASIAN SPECIES OF CYMATIA FLOR S.L.

(INSECTA, HETEROPTERA: CORIXIDAE)

by Ivor LaNsBuRY*

Summary

LAnsnury, £, (1983) Notes on the Australasian species of Cymutia Flor s.l. (trsecta, Heterop-

tera: Corixidae). Trans. R. Sac. §. Aust. W7(1L). 31-57, 31 May, 1983.

The validity of genencally distinguishing the Australasian Cymatia from the rest of this

primarily holarctic genus js discussed. Crethoceymatia Jansson, 1982 proposed for Cy. nigra

is relegated co subgeneric status within Cyiiatia, Cymatia nigra and the anomalous Asian

species Cy. appareny are both compared with the remainder of Ihe known species.

Key Woros: Corikidae, Cymatia aigra, Australasia, Cnefhoacymatia, Cymatia apparens,

holaretic,

Introduction

Five genera of Corrxidae occur in Austra-

lta, Diaprepocoris, Micronecta, Agraptocorixa,

Sigara and Cymatia (Cnethocvmatia). Hunger-

ford) (1947) added Cymatia, the least known,

when he deseribed Cy. nigra based on a single

female specimen from Prince of Wales Island.

The type is in the Snow Entomological Col-

lections, Lawrence, Kansas, The presence of the

genus remained an enigma in Australia until

1979 when 1 collected a small serics from

pools jn the Julatten area of North Queens-

land. Subsequently a male specimen from Tron

Range, Cape York Peninsula was located in

the Dept. of Entomology, University of

Queensland. Jansson (1982) studying Cy,

nivra from New Guinea erected a new genus

Creihovymaiia for Hunverford's species,

Generic concepts

Jansson’s reinterpretation of Cynwitia and

its division draws attention to the problems of

sublamily/tribal classification in the Corixidae

(Corixinae), Cymatiq has at various times been

uccorded subfamily or tribal status, Walton in

Hutchinson (1940) placed the genus in the

Corixinge -—Cymatiini trib. noy, Walton

($943) expanded his comments on the classi-

cation of the Corixidae but these observations

were criticised by Hungerford (1948). China

(1943) placed Cymatia in the Cymatinae

without comment. Hungerford’s (1948) re-

view of the Cortxidae increased the number

of subfamilies to six describing the Cymatiinae

ag a new subfamily without reference to

China’s (1943) usage. Both authors included

*iope Entomological Collections, University

Muisevin, Oxford, UK.

only one genus, Cymetia (type species coleop-

trata (P.)),

Leston (1955) summarised and tabulated

the previous classifications of the Corixinae

and relegated Cymatimae to tribal status,

Popov (1971) gave cogent reasons for m-

cluding Cymatia in the Corixinae in a classi-

fication which included fossil forms. Fansson

(1982) follows Hungerford er al in treating

Cymatia and Cnethacymatia as. belonging to a

separate subfamily. Jaczewski (1964) re-

viewed Cymatia and regarded the genus as the

most archaic (plesiomorphic) of all the Cori-

xinae. Features to which Jaczewski drew atten-

tion included: short claws of middle legs,

ubsence of “pala” pegs, no strigil and the lack

of pronounced asymmetry of the male abdo-

men. Jaczewski arranged the species in two

groups, With the exception of Cy. nigra and

Cy. apparens (Distant) the remaining species

are all remarkably uniform in structural

features,

Definition of Cymatia Flor 1860 5.1,

Rostrum. smooth without transverse sulca-

tions. Front tarsus (pala) elongate, cylindrical

with negligible palms. Male pala with a broad

thickened claw (Fig, 10), female much like

the male but with spine in place of thickened

claw,

In most of the Corixinae there are con-

siderable differences between the male and

female palac. with those of the male having

one or more rows of stout pegs on the face

of the pala (Lansbury, 1970). Features cited

by Hungerford (1948: p, 99) which call for

camment include the presence of a nodal fur-

tow in Cymatia. He states “the median vein

appearing to curve abruptly downwards to

52 IVOR LANSBURY

costal margin without making contact with

cubitus. The location and direction of this

curved portion of media suggests a nodal

furrow. There is however, no indication of a

cleavage plane which is characteristic of a

nodal furrow”. Partial maceration of a hemely-

tron (Fig. 4) seems to show a vestigial nodal

furrow, but it is almost certainly an artifact.

senha”

Cymatia species and their distribution

Cymatia coleoptrata (F.), widely distributed euro-

asian element including North Africa.

Cy. bonsdorffi (C. Sahlberg), Europe and part of

Western Asia,

Cy. rogenhoferi (Fieber), temperate Europe

through to Hindu Kush and North Africa.

Cy. apparens (Distant), temperate China, Tibet,

Kashmir, India and Japan.

Figs 1-9. Cymatia nigra, male. 1, dorsal view of head and pronotum; 2, frontal view of head; 3, lateral

view of head; 4, hemelytra; 5, 6th tergite; 6, 7th tergite; 7, 8th tergite; 8 & 9, detail of 6th and 7th

tergites.

AUSTRALASIAN CYMATIA

front leg; 11, middle femur; 12, middle tibia, tarsi and claws; 13,

male. 10,

hind femur; 14, hind tibia; 15, Ist hind tarsus.

Figs 10-15. Cymatia nigra,

54 WOR LANSBURY

Cy. americana Hussey, Alaska, Canada and the

continental U.S.A

Cy. avigra Hungerford. Prince of Wales tstund

North Queensland, Papua New Guinea and NW,

Trin,

(from Jaczewski and others),

Cymatiq (Crethacymatia) nigra Hungerford

FIGS 1-23

Cymatia nigra Hungerford, 1974. J, Kavisar

Entomol. Soe, 20, 154-157.

Cnethocymatia nigray Jansson, 1982. Pacific

Insects 24, 95-98,

Deseriprion. (based on male, 5

(alcohol specimen) ),

Colour; head orange yellow with posterior

margin between and behind eyes dark brown

to black (Figs | & 2), Pronotum and heme-

lytra uniformly shining dark chocolate brown

other than distal outer margin of corium

which has bright yellow spot, left membrane

pale yellow (Fig, 4), Right membrane same

colour as elyira, Embolium, sternum and Jegs

dark brown,

Structurally Cy, wigra resembles a genera-

lised Cynratia, a number ol characters set Cy.

nigra apart from the rest of the genus: non-

carinate pronotum (Fig. 1); more or less uni-

colorous pronotum and elytra (Fig. 4);

sclerotised ridge an the 4th tergite (Figs 5 &

9); prominent projection on ihe 7th tergite

(Pigs 6, 8 & 9): group of stout setae on Sth

lateral lohe (Fig. 7); left lohe of 8th sternite

infolded (Fig. 7).

Male fovea pot promifent and only mode-

rately pilose (Figs 2 & 3), Tergites 6-8 each

bear specialisations not found on other species

(see above). Front leg typical (Fig. 10)

Middle legs longer than hind legs and have

conspicuous but not dense fringe hairs {Figs

1 & (2), the Function of which is not clear,

possibly grooming and cleaning. Hind tibia

bear several rows of long hairs which probably

have a similar function (Fig. 14), Tarsi have

long dense fringes of swimming hairs (Figs

15 & 16), Conger and denser than shown in

the figures), Metaxyphus and scent gland

osteoles (Fig, 17), Lateral Jobe of prothorax

(pronotum) (Fig. 18). Antennae four seg-

mented (Fig, 23).

Male genitalia: genital capsule asym-

metrical, slightly deeper dorso-ventrally than

long (Fig. 19), Rim of “dorsal” opening

heavily sclerotised. Posterior diverticulum con-

tinuos with and extending into ¢apsule ven-

(rally where attached to selerotised plates aris-

mm long

- \ 4 t

16 wT

18 :

"W = ne

193

Figs 16-23. Cymiutia nigra. mate. 16, 2nd bind lar-

sus} 17, osteole and metaxyphus; 18, lateral lobe

of prothorax; 19, genital capsule; 20, aedenguss

21, left paramere: 22, right paramere; 23, an-

tennuc.

ing from “floor” of capsule, Diverticuhim not

symmetrical with capsule, more broadly

attached jo right margin and narrowly so ta

left margin of capsule, Left paramere (Fig.

21) large, lateral margins infolded; together

with curved lateral margins of diverticulum,

Strongly sclerotised “half-moon” shaped sup-

port provided for aedeagus (Fig. 20), Bias to

right of diverticulum allows sutficient space for

left paramere. At visible base of left paramere

post-capsule, Jurge curved projection over-

lying aedeagus. Right paramere small and

membranous, attached to basal plate and inner

wall of capsule (Figs 20 & 22), When right

paramere in position with diverticulum and

left paramere, forms a “T" junction with pro-

jection on. latter.

The asymmetry of the genital capsule of

Cy, nigra is more pronounced than that of Cy-

apparens (Fig. 24); the capsules of Cy, hons-

dorffi and Cy. coleoptrata are much less sclero-

tised than those of Cy, Alera and Cy, apparens.

Hitineecrford (1948) figures the capsule of Cy.

umveeicane without comment.

Distelbution: Queensland, Julatien, 20,v.1979,

Water-lily lagoon, permanent pool with plenty

of macrophytes, water clear, substrate silty;

| male 2 female and | immature Cy. nigra,

In the same habitat. Sigara tadenyvel, Apgraprte-

corixa enrynome, Enithares loria, Aaiviups

AUSTRALASIAN CYMALTA 35

tahitiensis, Limnogonus fosyarum skuet and

Diplonychus eques,

Queensland, Julatten, 20,v.1979. small

pool shaded by bamboo, bottom covered with

bamhoo leaves; | male Cy. nigra. In the same

habitat, Agratocorixa halei, Anisops elsiont

and = Ranatra diminuta, Queensland, Lron

Ranges, Cape York Peninsula, 16-623.xi,.1965,

G, Monteith; 1 male (University of Queens-

land),

Jansson (1982) records Cy. nigra from

various localilies in New Guinea, most of the

material having been taken at light.

Within Austraha Cy. nigra appears to he

limited {16 Northern Queensland, Present data

give tew clues of habitat preferred other than

ihe immature found at Julatten, Other pools

in the area ie. Farm dams with and without

vegetation and rain forest creeks had fairly

diverse faunas but Cy, nigra was not found.

Discussion

Jansson (1982) concluded after studying

Cy, nigra ftom New Guinea that Hungerford

(1947) had been too conservative in placing

Cy, nigra in Cymatia and erected the genus

Cneihocymalia tor Cy, nigra. In a simple key

Jansson separated Crethoeymatia fram Cy-

matia because the pronotum is not carinate

and the male has a “finger-like” projection on

the 7th tergite. Jansson's broader gencric

description includes face reduced, rostrum

without transverse sulcations, pala elongate

cylindrical ete, .., All these characters apply

equally well to Cymatia, only the smooth pro-

notum and projection on the male 7th tergite

distinguish Cy. nigra from the rest of the

genus, Placing Cy, nigra in a separate genus is

an uitractive proposition as it removes the

Australasian species from what is otherwise

an entirely holarctic genus. Jansson (1982)

states that the finger-like projection on ihe 7th

tergite is analogous with the strigil of many

Corixidae (Corixinac). He contends tt cannat

be homologous with the strigil as il ts an the

7th segment, not the 6th which is where the

strigil invariably is, if present. The two males

of Cy. nigra L examined have a thickened

selerotised area on the Gth tergite where the

strigil would be if it were present (Pigs 5 &

9). The finger-like projection may act as

Jansson suggests as a method of attaching

male to female during pairing, but the fune-

tion of the sclerotised ridge on the 6th segment

is unknown. As the finger-like projection

could overlap the scleratised mdge, the latter

muy also have an epigamie function,

Cymatia nigra differs from the ather species

in a variety of male primary and secondary

sexual characters and some colour features

(Table 1); in females the only obvious distinc-

tion is the smooth pronotum and colouration.

Because of the necessity to use tribal/ family

characters to define Cnethoeymuatia, il is rele

gated subgeneric status within C'ywttia (type

species nigra),

Cymatia apparens (Distant)

FIGS 24-30

Corixa apparens Distant, 1910. Fauna British

India, Heteroptera Appendix Vol, 5:343

fig, 204,

Cymatia apparens is not as well known as

the other holaretic species. Jaczewski (1928)

showed that Cy. apparens belonged to C'ymatia

not Corixa, Besides Calcutta (type locality)

he mentioned its presence in Chikkaballapura,

S. India and Schantung Province, Yenchowful,

Tasre [. Comparison af Cymatia nigra with other species of Cymatia,

eee eee USE SSE ESSE

Right

Clhacus/ posterior Finger-tike ;

corium Vertex marzin of projection Left tobe Right lobe

variously — between d6th oon dth of ft 8h of Pf Bth

Pronotum striped eyes Tergite tergite sternite tergite

variably Pronotum light-dark strongly sclerotised = ( Figs 8 & infolded spindse

varinate unicolorous brown proetuherant (Pig, 9) Q) (Pig. 7) (Fig. 71

Cymatia nigra — a — -- 4 + _ +

Cymatia apparens + — +. = _. — _

Cymatia celeopirata + _ + + =

Cymatia ragenhoferi + -- = + _ —

Cymatia bonsdorffi + - 4 oo _ “= = —

Cymatia americana + + +- + — — _ -

56 VOR LANSBURY

China, Lundblad (1933) gave a short resumé

of previous accounts and recorded Cy.

apparens from Peking. Hungerford (1947 &

1948) included Cy. apparens in keys to

Cymatia species, Although Cy. apparens is the

nearest geographically to Cy. nigra, it differs

not only from the Australasian species but

from the rest of the genus.

- 27

" / i

4 78 ’

fh 2

if | x , ! 30

Figs 24-30. Cymatia upparens, male. 24, genital

capsule; 25, oblique view of diverticulum and

right paramere; 26, left paramere; 27, uedeagus;

28-30, 6th-8th tergites.

The fovea in both sexes is practically obso-

lete and the pronotum and elytra are Sigara-

like being arranged in irregular transverse and

longitudinal light and dark bands respectively.

Distant (1910) described the pronotum as uni-

colorous pitchy brown overlooking the faint

transverse bands on the pronotum. Tergites

6-8 (Figs 28-30) do not have any of the

structures found on Cy. nigra, The genital

capsule (Fig. 24) is like that of Cy. nigra. The

diverticulum (Figs 24 & 25) is more robust

with parameres (Figs 25 & 26) similar to

Cy. nigra. The left paramere is figured showing

inner aspect and curved projection near its

base (Fig. 26) and the right paramere shown

altached to the capsule. The 8th abdominal

segment has the more usual over-lap on both

surfaces, the Jelt lobe not being infolded (Fig.

30).

The distribution of Cy. apparens suggests

that it is a ‘plastic’ species occurting as if

does in the tropics (Calcutta) and Tibet-

Japan, being tolerant of extreme conditions

or possibly more than one species is included

under the name,

Discussion

Cymatia sl. is a homogenous group, al-

though not applicable to the Australian Cori-

xinae genera, Sigara, Agraptocorixia and Cy-

matia; the limits of many Corixinae genera

are rather diffuse, few being as well defined

as Cymatia. Excluding Cy. nigra, Cy. appareny

is the most atypical tending to resemble a

generalised Sigara, Of the other Cymatia

species, Cy. bonsdorffi has a prominent lobe

on the 4th tergite (Fig. 33). The general struc»

ture of the male genitalia of Cy. bonsdorffi

and Cy. coleaptrata (Figs 31-33 & 34-35)

respectively are typical Cymatia. All the males

have similar parameres, the left being large

and spinose on the outer margin, variously

blunt or acuminate apically. The left paramere

is a little more variable; that of Cy, honsdorffi

ts fairly large, likewise that of Cy, americana

{see Hungerford, 1948), Those of Cy. niera,

Cy. apparens and Cy. coleoptrata (Figs 22,

24 & 35) respectively are smal! and mem-

branous. According to Hungerford (1947) Cy.

rogenhoferi does not have a right paramere:

Posson (1957) states that it has a vestigial

right pramamere. In most Corixinae generi

the left and right parameres are prominent

sclerotised. structures.

ae 35

Figs 31-35, Cymatia bonsdorffi 3\-33, Cy, colean-

frdta 34-35. 31, diverticulum and right pura-

mere; 32, left paramere; 33, 4th tergite; 34, left

paramere; 35, right paramere (all male speci-

mens).

AUSTRALASIAN CYMATIA 57

Unlike most of the Corixinae, it is known

that some at least of the Cymatia species are

predacious rather than filter feeders. The

elongate cylindrical front legs of both sexes

are used to grasp prey. With the exception of

Cy. nigra and Cy. apparens the remaining

species have very pronounced broad rounded

grooves on the front of the head (fovea). The

prey is held in the groove. The general feeding

behaviour of Cy. bansdorffi and Cy. coleap-

trata has been observed by me. Both species

are found most abundantly in water 1 m or

more deep with dense stands of submerged

macrophytes or rocks presenting vertical faces

over-looking clear water. The Cymatia cling to

the vertical surfaces and actively scek prey

which includes other corixids, water fleas,

chironomids and mayfly larvae.

Acknowledgments

I wish to thank the Levyerhulme Trust,

London and the Australian Biological Re-

source Study for their generous assistance,

Dr D. F. Waterhouse, Mr Murray-Upton and

Mr T. Weir (CSIRO, Canberra) for their

invaluable help whilst in Australia. Mr Wal-

ford-Higgins helped me greatly in the Molloy-

Jullaten region and Dr T. E. Woodward and

Dr G. Montieth were of great help during my

stay in Brisbane.

References

Cuina, W. E. (1943) The generic names of the

British Hemiptera-Heteropleru, wilh a check

list of British species; in The Generic names of

British Insects. R. ent. Soc. Lond. (8). 211-

342,

Huncerrorp, H. B, (1947) A new species of

Cymatia from Australia. J. Kansas Entamal.

Noe, 24), 154-7.

(1948) The Corixidae of the Western Hemi-

sphere. Univ, Kansay Sei, Bull, 32. 1-827.

Hutcurnson, G, FE. (1940) A revision of the

Corixidae of India and adjacent regions, Trans.

Connecticut Acad. Art Sci. 33, 339-476,

Jaczewski, T. (1928) Uber drei Arten aquatiler

Heteropteren aus China. Ann. Mus, Zool. Polon

8(4), 107-14.

—— (1964) On Cymutia jaxurtensis Kiritshenko,

with some general notes on the genus Cyniutia

Flor. (Heteroptera, Corixidae). Bull. Acad. pol.

Sci. CL1I1 Ser. Sci. 11, 545-8,

Jansson, A. (1982) Notes on some Corixidue

(Heteroptera) from New Guinea and New Cale-

donia. Pacific Inseety 24, 95-103.

Lanspury, L. (1970) Revision of the Australian

Sigara (Heteroptera-Corixidue). J. Nav. Hist, 4.

39-54,

Larsen, ©. (1938) Untersuchungen tiber den

veschlechtsapparat der aquatalen wanzen, Opuse,

Ent. Suppl. 1, 1-388.

Lreston, D. (1955) Taxonomy of the British

Corixidae (Hem.). Ent. mon. May. 91, 57-9,

LuNpBLAD, O. (1933) Some new or little known

Rhynchota from China. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist.

(10) 12, 449-64.

Poisson, R. (1957) Hémipterés Hétéroptéres-

aquatiques. Fauna de France 61, 1-263.

Porov, Y. A. (1971) Historical development of

Hemiptera Infraorder Nepomorpha (Heterop-

iera). Trudy Palacantological Institute, Acad.

Sci. USSR 129, 1-228 [in Russian; informal

translation in English by H. Vaitatis].

NEW RECORDS (POSSIBLY INTRODUCTIONS) OF STRIARIA,

STICTYOSIPHON AND ANTHROCLADIA (PHAEOPHYTA) FOR

SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

BY S. SKINNNER & H. B.S. WOMERSLEY

Summary

Three species of Phaeophyta, Striaria attentuata and Stictyosiphon soriferus in the family

Striariaceae of the Dictyosiphonales and Arthrocladia villosa of the Demarestiales, are newly

recorded for southern Australia. Description and illustrations are given of the Australian material,

which agrees well with these species.

NEW RECORDS (POSSIBLY INTRODUCTIONS) OF STRIARIA,

STICTYOSIPHON AND ARTHROCLADIA (PHAEOPHYTA) FOR

SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

by S. Skinner & H. B.S. Womersreny*

Summary

Skinner, S, & Womersvey, H, B.S. (1983) New records (possibly introductions) of Srrtaric,

Stictyosiphen and Arthrocladia (Phacophyta) for southern Australia, Trans. R. See. 8. Aas,

T7( 1), 59-68, 31 May, 1983.

Three species of Phacophylia, Siriaria attenuata and Stictyesiphon soriferus in the family

Stridriaceae of the Dictyosiphonales and 4rtiracladiay villosa of the Desmarestiales, are newly

recorded for southern Australia, Descriptions and illustrations are piven of the Australian

material, which agrees well with these species.

All three species are well known as European and British marine algae. occurting in the

Medilerraunesn und eastern Nocth America. They occur often in harbours and it appears prab-

able wat they Htave been introduced to southern Australian waters, possibly hy shipping, since

the known Austrulian localities are near harbours.

KEY Worns: Siriaria atienuata; Sttetvasiphon soriferus; Arilirocladia villosa; Phasophyta,

southern Australia,

Introduction

Three species of brown algae (Phacophyta)

have been collected recently on southern Aus-

tralian coasts, in most cases associated with

harbours. There are no records in the litera-

ture of their presence previously, ad no

earlier specimens have heen located in Austra-

lian herbaria,

There are only a few species of Dictyo-

siphonales (exeluding the Seytosiphonales)

known in southern Australia, The family

Puncturiaceae is represented by Punciarica

huifolia Greville (Clayton & Ducker 1970)

and by Adenaeyyrly urricularty (Bory) Skotts-

berg in Tasmania and Asperoceceus bullosus

Lumouroux more generally in sheltered waters

along the coast (Womersley 19467). The

family Giraudyaceac is represented by

Girandya sphacelarinides Derhes & Solier and

by two further taxa to be described,

The family Striariaceae is not previously

known on southern Austrian coasts since the

dubious genus Yanthoaviphonia So Agardh (with

X, wartsii J, Agardh from Victoria) was re-

jected hy Womersley (1967, p. 242), and omit-

ling the dubious records of the little known

Cladothele decaisne’i Hooker & Harvey from

Tasmania (Womersley 1967, p. 247), The

presence of the two genera, Sfriaria and

Stictyosiphon, now establishes this family in

southern Australian waters.

*Department of Botany. University of Adeluiile-

South Australia SOOO.

The only member of the Desmarestiales pre-

viously recorded for southern Australia ts

Dexmarestia ligulata (Lightfoot) Lamouraux,

which oceurs very occasionally on the south-

eastern coasts. The discovery of Arthrocladiu

villosa, at Port Stanvac in South Australia,

constitutes a second record tor a genus of this

order.

Order DICTYOSIPHONALES

Family STRIARIACEAER

Thallus (sporophyte) slender, usualiy much

branched, each branch with a uniseriate

terminal row of cells ending in a hair, with

cells below the meristem first dividing once

transversely und later longitudinally to form

a parenchymatous axis which differentiates

into a pigmented cortex one cell thick ard

internal medulla a few cells across: lateral

hairs also present on the branches.

Generations heteromorphic: sporophyte with

tnilocular (meio) sporangia in superficial sori

and plurilocular (mito) sporangia differen-

tivted from cortical cells; gametophyte fila-

mentous, bearing plurilocular gametangia.

The Striariaceae contains twa well known

genera, Siriaria and Stietvosiphon, as well as

Isthmoploea Kjellman, Hunmia Fiore (1975,

1977) and probably Cladothele Hooker &

Harvey (Skottsberg 1921, p, 36). The latter

genus was ascribed to Tasmania by De Toni,

referring to Harvey. bur this appears ta be

incorrect (Womersley 1967, p, 247).

a0) 8, SKINNER & H, B.S. WOMERSLEY

Key to the Taxa of the Striaviaeeae jo southern

Ausiralia

1. Cortication of the axcs commencing wbouwt 2

cells below the apex; tateral ames bavally

allentate; medulla of numerous similar sized

cells yn tWo avers immediately helow cortex

and surrviinding uw hollow asm: uniloculur

sporangia in discrete sori superficial to cortex,

with unicellular paraphyses -

siesta ulna Striaria attenuata

1. Terminal unisertate monitiform filament 1-3 em

long wilh corticalion of axis commencing well

below apex; lateral axex mol constricted ar

base; medulla of four large cardinal cells in

the cetiire and peripheral cells below cortex,

giving a solid axis; plurilocular sporangia

scattered, formed in groups of four to eight

within each cortical cell, without paraphyses

Lewrant . . Stietvesiphan soriferns

STRIARIA Greville 1828: 44

Rosenvinge & Lund 1947; 49.

Thollus polystichous becoming hollaw. much

branched, each branch with a terminal hair

subtended by & short uniseriate filament and

transverse fiers of cortical cells below, sure

founding a medulla of one to two layers of

larger clear cells, Unilocular sporangia stiper-

feral in sar in discontinuous bands around

uxes, with paraphyses, Plurilocular sporangia

unknown on nracrothalliis, but reported on

micrathallus (Caram 1965)-

Type und only species. §, arreduata Greville.

Striaria altenuata Greville 1828: 44: 1830:

35. pl. ix. Kornmann & Sahling 1973; 14,

Figs 3B, 7-% Rosenvinge & Lund 1947

59.

Thallus (Fig. 1A) yellow brown to medium

hrown (banded jn appearance), eI5{- 30)

em tall, polystichous, becoming hollow. ex-

tensively branched more or less in one plane,

hranches terete above, becoming compressed

below, basally attenuate, terminating in a hair

(Fig. 2D) and with a short. uniseriate filo-

mentous region; boldfast small, discoid with

slight rhizoidal development.

Uniseriate apices 10-15(-20) cells long,

12-|7 um in diameter, cells L./B 1/3-1/2

(Fiz, 2D). Cortes in tiers (Pig. 2B.F). some-

times less clear iu older parts of branches,

single Jayered, with (10.)20-S0(-70) cells

per tier, cells rectangular and slightly domed,

15-22 pm broad, wodiametmc and ahout 12

pom deep, phaeoplasts discoid and numerous.

Medulla (Fig. 2C) one or two layered, cells

large and clear with smaller cells outside

larger, essentially in Uers, Hairs (Pig, 2D)

terminal and Jaterul, solitary bul im open

wherls araund the axis, each with a basal eell

narrower than subtendifg cortical cells, a

shor! {2-4 celled) meristem, and oon-pig-

tnented cylindrical cells above, K-10 pm in

diameter, L/H 3-15 (Fig. 2D), Similar hairs

present in sori of unilocular sporangia.

Reproduction, Unilocular sporangia (Fig

2A, 8) oven! to pyritorm, ahout 45 jam at

greatest diameter, 45-55 ym long, opening by

Tuptire, occurring in superficial circular sori

wilh ovoid paraphyses of similar dimensions

iy sporangia, with prominent physodes, and

several hait's; sori im discontinuous bands

around axes; further periclinal divisions oceur

in Cortical cells beneath sori, with each

smaller cortical cell sublending a sporangium

or paraphysis. Plurilocular sporangia unknown

on macrothalli,

Type locality: Isle of Bute, Scotland (Car-

michael),

Type B

Distributions North Atlantic (Europe ani

USA.) and Mediterranean, New Zealand. In

Australi frora West Lakes (Port Adelaide),

S. Aust., ane Southport, Tasmania,

Specimens examined: Bastern loop, West Lakes,

Port Adeliide, Tom deep (Steffensen, 20.%.1978*

ADU. Ad9759)_ Southport. Tasmania, on jetty

piles (Crifh. 7710, 23ox 1450) ADU, 416249),

New Zeuhind: Stewart Island, (Parsons, axtid97 ds

CHR, 219372).

This distinctive species is known from only

one collection in South Australia and the older

Cribb collection from ‘Tasmania, Further

occurrences May well be expected.

The Jife history of French and Danish

material (Caram 1965, 1966; Caram &

Nyeren 1970: Nygren 1975) has a direct

asexun) phase and, under certain temperature

and deylength condilions, am alternation ol

kametophyte (microthalli) and sporophyte

(macrothallial) generations.

STICTYOSIPHON Kuetving 1843) 301

Naylor 1958; 7

Thallus polystichous, usually solid (hecom-

ing hollow im S. adriatiens), branched, with a

Fig. t. A, Sreidriaarteiitinn’ Grev, West takes, Mort Adelaide. S, Aust, (Sreflenser, 204.1978: ADL,

A49T59)_ H, Srietvasinhen suriferns

(Womessley, 30,vij 98); ADL ASS323D) ©

Aust, (Clarke, 28,xi), 1981

(Reinke)

Arthiractudin vilhusa (Hvis > Puiby. Port Stanvie, §

ABUL ASTSI7). AL) to same scale, large Uivistons im centinietres.

Rosenvinge, Kirk Point, Port Phillip, Vie.

NEW PHAEOPHYTA FOR SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

6 8 a 9 S 7 € z L

ion avattinlitedlsnatareToertunslintcderatevilaracteesleusteneeashusl infin

S. SKINNER & H. B, S. WOMERSLEY

NEW PHABOPHYTA FOR SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA i

lerminal hair to the branches subtended by a

long uniseriate filament with corticated tiers

al origin of branches. and transverse ters of

cortival cells well below apices, surrounding

au medulla of four central cardinal cells and

smaller subcortical cells. Unilocular sporangia

formed in individual cortical cells, Plurilocular

sporangia developed from cells of the uni-

seriate filaments, or in groups of one to eight

in cortical cells,

Type spectes: 8. advlaticus Kuetzing.

A genus of four or five species, in the North

Atlantic, Mediterranean, and North Pacific.

Stictvosiphon soviferuy (Reinke) Rosenvinge

1935; 9. figs 9-19, Feldmann 1937; 146, fig.

49, Hamel 19372 205. Naylor 1958; 14, figs

(C,D.2D,F,G3C. Rosenvinge & Lund 1947;

SY. South & Huoper 1976; 24, figs 3.4.

Rielinania sorifera Reinke (889; 59; 1889.

pl. 3.

Thallus (Fig. 1B) light te medium brown,

10-15(-35) cm high, polystichous, much

hrinched, terete, with terminal hairs and

many-celled uniserate ends to branches; hald-

fast of descending multicellular rhizoids arising

from cortical cells at atid fear the base of the

tiatin axis. The whole cuter thallus may have

a mucilaginous coat,

Uniseriate filaments with celly (10—)15-30

wm in diameter, L/B 4-2/3 (Pig. 2G.M)

Erect axes solid and essentially two tayered,

with a single layered cortex and a medulla

of hyaline cells with four (3-5) cardinal cells

(— axial cells in Rosenyinge 1935 and Naylor

1958) with subsidiary subcortical cells cut off

at their periphery, starting at the junctions

of the walls of cardinal cells and forming a

partial second medullary layer in mature axes

(Fig, 2 KOPF): cells of both cortex and

medulla in transverse tiers, Cortex of rec-

tangular cells in surface view, slightly domed,

(12-)$5-30(-357 pm broad, 12-25 jum deep;

L/B 2/3-1 (Fig. 2 HLT). phacoplasls nume-

rous, round to avoid, without pyrenoids.

Medulla with cardinal cells 120-210 jm in

diameter and 120-150 »m long (Fig 2K).

Hairs (Fig. 2G) with @ basal cell, a shore

intercalary meristem of 4-6 cells and eylin-

drieal cells 4bove without phacoplasts, 5.5—8

(—10) jem in diameter, L/B 3-12.

Reproduction. Unilocular sporangia modified

frorm cortical cells (recorded for Danish

material only by Rosenvinge 1935, p. 14, fig.

14). Plurilocular sporangia of two kinds;

Intercalary plurilocular sporangia m uniseriate

filaments recorded in Buropean material

(Rosenvinge 1935, p. 13, fig, 11A), but not

seen in southern Australian material, Cortical

plurilocular speraugia formed by one or a

small group of mature cortical cells (Fig.

27,K,L) in patches, Mother cell cutting off a

basal stalk cell or not, then dividing into four

to eight multiseriate plurilocular sporangia,

15-35 pm tall, Tacuh 2-3 ym in diameter,

cross walls persistent.

Type locality; West Baltic Sea.

Lectotype; in KIEL (Naylor 1958),

Distribution: North Atlantic and Mediter-

ranean. In southern Australia, from Albany,

W, Aust, to Port Phillip, Vic., in harbours.

Specimens examined: Princess Royal Harbour,

Albany, W. Aust. upper sublittoral (Hernersley,

2 .viiit979; ADU, ASI388); Billy Lights Potnt,

Port Lincoln, 8, Aust, 12 m deep on Pinna

(Shepherd, 2INWiA97S: ADU, Ad6s32): Geelong,

Vie. (Clayton, 4.ix. 1970: MELU, 21035): Swan Bay

Queenscliff. Vic. (Clayran, 184%.1969; MEL,

21054); Gellibrand Light, Por) Phillip Bay

View (Leis, 2U.x.1976: MELU, LORDS!) Kark

Point, Port Phillip. Vie. uppermost sublittoral

(Womerstey. 3011981; ADU, AS32300, Eyra-

pean speciniens examined: Roscofl, France,

laboratory aquarium, (Feldmann 8663, 4.v.1953°

ADU, A24276) Stietvosiphon adriaticus KuerZ..

Banyuls-sur-mer, France, 40 m deep (Feldraann

7634, 25.viii, 1950; ABU, A24197),

a UU EEE EE EnNEn Ett

Fig. 2. A-B. Strivria avennaw Grev. (ADU, Ad9759).

B. Soras of unilocular sporangia and surrounding paraphyses, viewed

C. Transverse section of part of mature thallus, with paraphysis: single layered cortex and

DF, Tip and base of very young Jateral,

soriferus (Reinke)

initiation of laterals.

ticated oxix, showing primary and secondary division of cells.

corticated axis, Showing primary, secondary and terGary division of cells.

unjlocudur sporangia.

above.

slouble layered medulls,

ing sitemiution of base. G-L, Stictyostphon

G. Part of amserinte filament showing

A. Margin of mature thallus, with sorus of

from

F. Older lateral show-

Rosenvinge (ADU, 453230).

H. Surface view of young coy-

1. Suiface view of purt of mature

J. Transverse section

of mulure ways fpart!, with cortical cells transformed inte plorilocular sporangia al yarious stages

of maturity

inte several plurilogular sporangia.

M, Terminal hair und uniseriaie filament

menor, u

puruphysess a unilocular sporangium,

K. Transverse section of mature axis.

M-P, lsodiametric reconstruction of Sticivosiphan soriferns,

N, Primary division of cells below uniseriate fila-

Young oxis, showing 4 cardinal cells and peripheral cortes.

L. Surface view of cortical cell transformed

FP. Mature axis p =

S. SKINNER & HB. 5S. WOMERSLEY

TABLE |. Comparison pf Stictyosiphon adriaticus Avizing, S. soriferus (Rhke) Rosenvinee une

southern Australian material, based av Naylor (1958).

S. adriaticus

medullary cells rounded, and cardinal cells

ipvegularly arranged ; indes

uniform in size

axis may soon uxis solid

become hollow

branching whorled

internal walls of

pliriluculur sporangia

disappear before release

hairs always present

retained

or sparse

small elongate

nhacoplusts

(Feldmann 1937)

cortical cells ta

50 4m in diameter

(Feldmann 1937)

in diameter

Branching of the thallus takes place in the

uniserialte region of the axis (Fig. 2G), An

isolated node of one to three tiers each of two

io four cells is formed, and from cach tier

arises one, two or occasionally three hair

initials, cach from a separate cell; one, or

sometimes two, of these hair initials gains

dominance and will grow into a new uniseriale

axis. while the other hair initials will remain

as solitary lateral hairs. Solitary hairs may

also be formed following a single longiiudinal

division of a uniserigte ¢ell, giving a smaller

initial cell, lateral to the main uniseriate cell,

Coniplete cortication and medulla formation

occurs in the axis behind the region of branch

initials, After the initial division into four cells

the tiers of cortical (photosynthetic) cells

rapidly increase in namber to eventually give

tiers of thirty to forty cells. The wall of the

original cortical cell (the middle lamella ot

which takes up aniline blue strongly) is re-

fained and two or more internal divisions of

the cortical cells give the rectangular patch

pattern seen in the cortex (Fig, 2H,1). These

longitudiou! and transverse cell divisions

modify the original single tier (based on a

cell of the uniseriate filament) in forming two

fo four transverse tiers. Each medullary tier

is overlain by two to four corresponding

cortical tiers in the mature thallus (see iso-

Unimetric reconstfuction, Fig 2M—P).

Rosenvinge (1935) placed Stictyosiphon

adriaticus Kuetzing sensd Kuckuck (1929, figs

i. sariferus

lnrge, rounded and

branching alternate

internal walls of

Plurilocular sporangia

hairs generally lacking

rounded phaeoplasts

(Feldmann (1937)

cortical cells 20-30 um

southern Australian

collections

cardinal cells large.

rounded, regularly

arranged but nal

uniform in size

axis solid

branching altemate.

occasionally apposite,

initially whorled

internal walls of plurilocular

sporangia retuned

halts always present, frequency

variable

phagoplasts round to elongate

m same specimen

cortical cells 15-35 am

in diameter

(Feldmann 1937)

121-125) and §. corbiere? Sauvageau (1929)

in §. soriferns because all three taxa agreed

Well with Reinke’s Kjellmania sarifera

Kuckuck's §, adriaticus did not show the hol-

low axes originally described for this species

by Kuelzing, Feldmann (1937) added as

lurther distinctions between 8. sorrferus and

S, adriaticus that the cortical cells of the

former were smaller (usually less than 30 pry

broad) than those of the latter (40-50 jai

broad) and that the phaeoplasts in §. soriferus

are round while those of S, eedriations are ovoid

to elongate, Naylor (1958) used the seven

distinctions given in Table | lo separate

the two species, The two European specimens

fone of each species) determined by

Feldmann confirm (he distinctions made hy

Feldmanti and Naylor,

Levring (1937) distinguished Siictyosiphon

subarticulathis (Areschoug) Hauok (ineclud-

ing & veriferus sensi Rosenvinge 1935) from

Kjellmania sorifera Reinke (1889) by the

cortical sporangia protruding in the former

and immersed in the latter. Rosenvinge & Lame

(1947) consider that (his character is nat

constant und consequently included §, sub.

ariiculates in their concept of §. soriferis

(Reinke) Rosenvinge,

The Australian collections agree most closely

with Stictvosiphon sariferusy (Reinke) Rosen-

vinge, but do not show infercalary plurilocular

sporangia mm uniseriate filaments, and sub-

NEW PHAROPHYIA FOR SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

cortical development is more extensive than

deserihed for European material,

Order DESMARESTIALES

The order is heteromorphic, the conspicuous

sporophyle bewig characterized by the presence

ef a central axial filament developing from a

distincuve interealary meristem, and with

opposite for Vverticillate) branching produc

ing wa complanate thallus. The axial filament

beeomes Surrounded by a medulla and a cortex

formed by rhizoidal filaments arising in the

nmersiemauic zone at the emergent tip of the

axial filament, ‘The gametophyte is microscopic

und oogamous. This order is represented in

southern Australia by the cosmopolitan

Desmarestia ligulata (Lightfoot) Lamotiroux

(Womersiey 1967)-

Both Fritsch (1945) and Sauvageau (1931)

vive detailed descriptions of development of

cortex and medulla and comparison between

members of the Desmarestiales.

Family DESMARESTIACEAE

ARTHROCLADIA Duby 832; 08

Fritsch 1945: 180.

Thallws polystichous, slender and muck

branched, with Jone lateral branches arising

irregularly but often oppositely, and fasci~

culate verticillgie Jaterals which are deter-

minate in growth. The cortex is rhizoidal in

origin, arising at ithe bases of Jaterals, and

branching to increase the cover over the

central axial filament. The medulla, which

arises by the inward periclinal division of the

cells of the cortical rhizoids, js several layers

thick in the mature axes with the largest cells

nearest the axial flament. The lateral fila-

ments do not retain a connection with the

axial filament, The unilocular sporangia are

formed in uniseriate filaments. of 6-30 sub-

spherical sporangia, lateral to the main snd

secondary branches of the fasciculate laterals.

The life history silggested by Sauvageau

(1931) involves the unilocular sporangia te-

lewsmg wooids which settle singly to form a

filamentous thallus. The new sporophyte arises

directly from one of the cells of this supposed

gamectophyte, but SuuVageau’s interpretation of

oogonia and antheridia has been questioned

(Fritseh 19445),

Pip 3. AC. AMtheacladia villosa (Huds.\) Duby,

filament, with jrtiation of laterals and rhizoidal cartex.

Mintle lateral filements with filaments of unilocular sporangin, C,

This. monospecific genus is separated from

Desmarestia on the basis of unilocular spor-

angia formed in filaments on the lateral

branches and not in the cortex a§ in Desmares

ria. and the fasciculate lateral branches which

are determinate in growth, da not become

secondarily corticated and are associated with

the cortex rather than retaining a flamentous

connection through the medulla to the axial

filament. Desmarestia produces two kinds of

gatnetaphytes (Schrether 1931) or bisexual

gametophytes (Nakahara & Nakamura 1971),

Arthrocladia villosa (Hudson) Duby 1832:

18, Fritsch 1945: 180, figs 60D, 61E, 628,

D.F.LM- Resenvinge & Lund 1943: 55,

Sauvageau 1931: 95, figs 17,18 Taylor

1937; 162, Pl, 13, fig, 2. Pl 17, figs 7-8,

Thallus (Fig. 1C) olive brawn. 15-20 cm

tall, polystichous, terete and slender, much

branched, with long lateral opposite branches

and irregular, verticillate fascicles of short

laterals, four fascicles per whorl, without

phaeophytan hairs: holdfast nat knawn trom

southern Australian material.

Erect axis with a large axial filament sur-

rounded by a multicellular medulla derived by

inward development of the cortex, and a peri-

pheral rhizoidal cortex of one layer of photo-

synthetic cells. Growth and development

markedly trichothallic: the meristematic zone af

the axial filament a row of short broad cells at

ihe point of emergence of the axial filament

from the cortical envelope; axial filament emer-

gent Well beyond the meristematic zone, with

whorls of four, narrower Jateral filaments at

intervals: lateral processes. and rhizoidal initials

arising from the axial cells at or below the

meristematic zone. laterals arising, before rhi-

zoida) initials (Fig, 3A)} cells of axial filaments

jnereasing in length and breadth basally, 28—

160 pm in diameter, L/B +3, Cortical eells

irregular in shape, 9-12 ,m in diameter,

2.5-4 L/B, with numerous small diseoid

phacoplasts, filaments retaining a rhizoidal

appearance and occasionally branching.

Medulla of several layers, derived from per-

clinal division of cortical rhizoids, cells

larger towards the centre, without phaeoplasis.

Lateral processes of two kinds; new lateral

branch filaments sparsely branched initially

and remaining dormant; determinate Fascicu-

(ADU, AS52237). AL Meristermutic zone of axial

B. Mature rhizerdal cortex and deter-

Filaments of unilocular

sporangia, including two muture sporangia ond two empty sporangia,

S. SKINNER & H. B. 8S. WOMERSLEY

Ko a

(Olaealcete®=- ae,

XY) OF ry Lae

Co? mee J

CEA eg

NEW PHAEOPHYTA FOR SQUTHERN AUSTRALIA 67

late Jaterals (Fig. 2B) much branched basally

with a basal meristem, developing sceondary

filaments, cells cylindrical, 12-15 ym in dia-

meter, L/B 1-4, with numerous. discoid phaeo-

plasts and a prominant nucleus.

Reproduction. Unilocular sporangia (Fig.

3B,.C) in moniliform, secund filaments on

determinate laterals, with a basal cell and

8-24 sporangia; each mature sporangium sub-

spherical with lateral pore, 10-12 pm in dia-

meter and L/B 4-1, with 16 zooids; matura-

tion irregular and independent.

Type locality; Cornwall, England,

Type: Hudson Cost?) of BM (Dixon 1959,

1963).

Distributions Temperate North Atlantic, Mechi-

terranean,

In southern Australia, known only from

Port Stanvag, S, Aust, 4-5 m deep, nat

attached (Chike. 28.x17.1981; ADU, AS52837).

This occurrence, of free fioating plants, is

the firs! record of 4. villosa for southern Aus-

tralia. Port Stanvae is an oil refinery port

Where tankers dock, including ships which

haye come from European ports. Tt ts nat

known whether Arthracladian has (or will)

become established on this coast, since the

plants observed were not attached and only

collected on the one occasion.

Acknowledgments

Appreciation is expressed to the Marine

Sciences and Technologies committee for their

support. to Dr G. Kraft of the University of

Melbourne and Dr M- Clayton of Motash

University for specimens or the loan thereof,

and to Dr M. J. Parsons, D.S.T.R. New Zea-

land, for loan of specimens and for comments

on the manuscript,

References

CARAM, B. (1965) Recherches sur Ja reprodtic-

tion et Je cycle sexué de quelches Phéo-

phycdes. Me ef Milieu Va, 21-221,

(1966) Sur ti reproduction de deus

Strlariagees des exux danolse. Cr. Acad. Se.

Parix, 262, 2333-5,

——— & Nvyoren. 5. (1970) A propas de In te-

production comparce en France et en Suede

dune Phéophycée-—Pheosporée: Je Siriaria

antenuaty Uelvsel, wis. Meeresuntors. 20, 130-

Cravroy, M WN. & Bucker, 8. C. 11970) The

life history of Purctaria latifolia Greville in

solthern Australia. “ust, J. Bor, 18, 293-300,

Duey, J. EE. (1832) Boranicon eallicinet Vb

( Paris.)

Dixon, PLS. (1959) Noles on two important algal

herbuna. Bro phyeot, Bull. (C7). 35-42.

~ (1963) Further comments un the typitica-

lion OF Hudson's Aigae, hid. 2(4), 265-6.

Firnomann, J. (1937) Les aloues Marines de In

Cate des Albéres. LIL Cyanophycées, Chloro-

ply S17 Phéophyeées. Rev. Alenl. 9 l4i-335,

& BAT.

Foe . (1975) Ao new generic name for Farle-

wh He. onuste (Phacophyta), Tatar 24, 497-8,

(1977) Life fistory and taxonomy of

Sremosiphon subsimples Hollen (Phaeophyta.

Dictyosiphonales) and Farlowiella asta

(Kiltzing) Kornmann in Kickuck (Phaeophyta,

Petowarpales ). Phycolovir 16, 301-11,

Hrivscn, F. BR. C1945) The Sirneivre and Repro-

duction ef the ellgae WW, Cllniversicy Press;

Cambridue. |

GREVILLE, Ro RK. (1828) Seartish

fdera. (edinburgh.)

(1830) Afeee Britenmicae. (Edinburgh. |

HAMEL, G, (1937) Phéophyecey de France WY,

177-240, (Paris.)

Crypagamic

KORNMANN, P. & Sancinc, P.-H. (1974) Soduria

attentiata (Phacophyta, Dictyosiphonales), neu

bei Helgoliind: Enwicklung ond Aufbau, Afeleol.

iss. Meeresunters. 25, 14-28.

Kuckucr, PQ (1999). Fragmente einer Mono-

grape der Phaeosporeen, Wiss, Mmeerosititers.

NLP. L7(4), 1-93.

Kuerzing, F. T. (1843) Phyrologia generelts;

oder Anarmic, Phyyiologie und Systentakunde

der Tange, (oerpzig.)

Levan, Ve. (1937) Zuo Kenatnis der Algenflora

der Norwopischen Westhiiste. Lunds tary,

Arssk. NLP. 2, 33(8), 148 pp.

Nasatara, H. & NakAMURA, Y. (1971) The life

history of Desmarestia tahacoides Okamura, Bat,

Mag. Tokve 84, 69-75.

Naytor, M, (1958) Observations on the taxo-

nomy of the venus Sictyosiphan Kita, Rev.

Alvol. 4. 7-24,

Nycren, 8. (1975) Life history of some Phueo-

phyceae from Sweden, Bot, nur. 18, 131-41.

REINKE. T.. (1889) Algenflora der westlichen Ostsee

deulscher Anthiels. Bericht Karim. wiss Unters:

denivh. Meere Kiel. 6.

(1889-1892) Atlas eursecher Meeresalzen-

Kouinm. wiss Meere. (Berlin. )

Rosexvinor. LL. K, (1938) On some Danish

Phaeophycene, Men, Acad, R, Sei. Lett, Dan.

Copenhague. Sect. Set., Ser. 9, 6(3). 40 pp.

& dunn, 8. (1943) The marine aleac of

Denmark, Vol. TL Phacophycese UH. Coryno-

phiacuceae-Arthoocladiacese, AK, Dan, Vidensk.,

Selvk., Biol. Skr. 200), 59 pp.

— . (1947) The marine wleae of Den-

mick, Vol. M1. Phieophycese W1. Encoeliacene-

Laminariacese, Lhfd. 4(5)_ 99 pp.

Sauivacuau, C, (1929) Sur le dévelaopment de

quelques. Phéoasporces, Bull. Stat. Biol. Ar

cuchon 30, 1-126,

68 S. SKINNER & H..B. S. WOMERSLEY

(1931) Sur quelques Algues phéosporées de

la rade de Villefranche. Jbid. 28, 7-165.

SCHREIBER, E, (1932) Uber die Entwicklungs-

geschichte und die systematische Stellung der

Desmarestiaceen. Zeitschr. Bot. 25, 561-82.

SKOTTSBERG, C. (1921) Botanische Ergebnisse der

Schwedischen Expedition nach Patagonien und

dem Feuerlande 1907-1909. VIII Marine Algae,

I. Phaeophyceae. K. svenska Vetensk-Acad

Handl. 61(11), 1-56.

Soutu, G. R. & Hooper, R. (1976) Stictyosiphon

soriferus (Phaeophyta, Dictyosiphonales) from

eastern North America. J. Phycol. 12(1), 24-

29.

TAYLOR, W. R. (1937) Marine algae of the north

eastern coast of North America. (University of

Michigan Press, Ann Arbor.)

WoMERSLEY, H. B. S. (1967) A critical survey of

the marine algae of southern Australia. II.

Phaeophyta. Aust. J. Bot. 15, 189-270.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

VOL. 107, PART 2

BENTHIC COMMUNITIES OF UPPER SPENCER GULF, SOUTH

AUSTRALIA

BY S. A. SHEPHERD

Summary

Benthic communities in upper Spencer Gulf occupying an area of about 30 km? off Redcliff Point

are described. There are six seagrass communities (Zostera mucronata, Amphibolus antartica,

Heterozostera tasmanica, Halophila ovalis, Posidonia australis and Posidonia sinuosa), two algal

(Caulerpa cactoides and Red Algae) and three animal assemblages (Sponge-Telesto, Polycarpo-

Echinogorgia, and Lanceopora-Sycozoa). The distribution and density of the dominant species

along five transects is described, and the distribution of seagrasses and assemblages near Redcliff

Point mapped.

BENTHIC COMMUNITIES ,OF UPPER SPENCER GULF,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by S. A. SHEPHERD*

Summary ;

SHEPHERD, S. A. (1983) Benthic communities of upper Spencer Gull, South Australia Prany.

R. Soc. 8. Aust. WT(2), 69-85, 31 May, 1983,

Benthic communities in upper Spencer Gulf occupying an area of about 30 km? off

Redcliff Point are described, There are six seagrass communities (Zostera mucronata, Amphi-

bolix antarcticu, Hererazestera fasmanica, Melaphila evalis, Pesidonia australis and Posidonia

sinuosay, two algal (Caulerpa cactoides and Red Algue) and three animal assemblages

(Sponge—Tvlesto, Polycarpa-Echinevorgia, and Lanceapora-Sycazea), The distributtiun and

density of the dominant species along five transects ig described, and the distribution of sea

grasses and assemblages near Redcliff Point mapped.

Although somewhat impoverished in number of species compared with oceanic cousts,

the algal flora has predominantly cool temperate affinities; only four species are of tropical

ur warm temperate origin, The benihic epifauna is. aso impoverished in number of species

but has unique charucterishes. Some apecies appear to be endemic to the region while olhers,

of cosmopolitan or tropical affinities, are known in South Australia only from the region.

Key Wonos: benthic communities, seaerasses, algal flora, animal assemblages. upper

Spencer Gulf,

Introduction

The Upper parts of Spencer Gulf and Gulf

St Vincenl experience high summer tempera-

jures, high evaporation rate and little or no

fresh water inflow. They are characterised by

hypersuline walers and wide sea temperature

extremes, and (loyether with Shark Bay,

Western Australia) have been deseribed as

negative estuarics (Davies 1970, Bayly 1975).

The upper tegions of these gulfs are im-

portant as spawning or hursery areas for the

western king prawn Penaens latisuleaius

Kishinouye as well as for numerous species

of scale fish of commercial micrest (King);

Jones"). and a part of upper Spencer Gulf has

been declared ati aquatic reserve (or their pro-

lection, For these reasons alone they deserve

more utltention. Furthermore. conflicting use

of the regions, especially of upper Spencer

Gulf, as receptacles for industrial and urban

wastes and for thermal discharges adds

urgency 10 the need for further baseline

aludies,

This paper deserjhes the major benthic com-

munities in upper Spencer Gulf near Redcliff

Point, and is a result of surveys in 1973,

1974 and 1980, The only general deseriptians

of the biology of this region are by Shepherd

(1974) for Cray Point and Johnson? for sea-

grass epiphytes. on Posidenia off Redclilf

Point. There is also a hricf study on the

*Depariment of Fisheries, 25 Grenfell Street,

Adelyide, S. Aust. S000

growth of FP. australis near Redcliil Point by

West & Larkum (1979), Mangroves of the

region are described by Butler ef al. (1977)

and those specifically around Redecliff Point by

Chinnock (1980), and Beanland & Woel-

kerling (1982) have described the mangrove

algal flora of upper Spencer Gulf. Hails et el.

(1980) have given a preliminwry account of

the sediments of upper Spencer Gulf.

Methods

In September, 1973. studies were made

along six transects acruss the Golf. The posi-

tions of five are shown in Fig. 1; another, about

| km north of No. 2 transect, gave similar

results to No. 2 transect and is not shown. A

two-man sled (Fig. 2) carrying a driver and

un observer was towed over the bottom at a

speed of about 1.5 knots (80 cm/sec).

Stations were occupied at intervals of about

300-400 m when the towing vessel slopped

and the divers made collections of epibenthic

organisms and took underwater photographs,

1 King, M. G. (1979) The biology of the Western

King Prawn Penaeus latisileatus Kishinouve and

aspects of ihe fishery in Soulh Australia, 147 pp.

M.Sc. Thesis, Dept, of Zoology, University of

Adelaide. unpubl.

“Jones, G, K. (1979) Biolovical investigations on

the manne scale fishery in South Australia. 72

pp. Dept. of Agric, & Fisheries, Adelaide. unpubl.

3Jotnson, J. E. (1981) The seasonality of the

algal cpiphytes of Posidenia sinuesa if Upper

Spencer Gulf, 283 pp. M.Sc. Thesis. Dept, of

Batuny. University of Adelaide, unpubl,

70 S. A. SHEPHERD

’

‘

enlargement

South

Australia

wae east eens

Fig. 1. Upper Spencer Gulf showing transect lines and depth contours (in metres). Beacons are the

solid triangles over a vertical line. LW = Low water mark,

The diver can see below, through a rectan-

gular section of the frame of the sled, an

area of about 1 m? of the bottom. This framed

area was used during sled runs to estimate the

percentage cover of algae and densities of

common epibenthic animals. These density

estimates were verified at stations, where

counts were made over an area of 10 m®#

measured by using the side of the sled (2 m)

and a 1 m stick.

In April 1980, four additional runs were

made longitudinally down the eastern channel

BENTHIC COMMUNITIES OF UPPER SPENCER GULF 71

Fig. 2. Underwater sled showing diver fixing col-

lecting bags at stern. Writing slate is fixed to

right hand diver’s position,

basin (i.e. that on the eastern side of Middle

Bank), and 5-8 stations occupied at about

equal intervals on each run. The positions of

these stations were fixed using “Decca” posi-

tion-fixing equipment,

Data were recorded on a slate and collec-

tions were placed in bags fixed to the sled’s

stern, Depth was recorded by echosounder on

board the towing vessel and later adjusted to

low water datum i.e. Indian Spring Low Water

(LW) of Department of Marine & Harbours

(DMH). Subsequently, further sled runs were

made in the western channel to complete the

mapping and to fill gaps. Sidescan sonar data

(Hails er al. 1980) were used to further define

the distribution of sandwaves.

In January 1974, a transect (No. 6 in Fig.

1) was made across the eastern sublittoral

platform from the shoreward edge of the

Zostera beds (referred to later as ‘shore

datum’ being 700 m from high water mark)

to a depth of 8.4 m. A weighted polypropylene

line was laid along the transect, and the line

intercept procedure was used to record the

distribution and cover of seagrasses. The

diver swam along the line recording for each

5 m interval the species intercepted by the

line and, where mixed stands occurred, the

proportional cover of each species under the

line. Similar data were recorded at distances of

1600 m, 2200 m, 2500 m and 2800 m respec-

tively, from shore datum along additional

cross-transects each of 500 m length laid at

right angles to the principal transect,

On the western side of the Gulf at the

beacon near Two Hummock Point four tran-

sects, each 250 m long, were laid in seagrasses

parallel to the shore at uniform depths of

1.4 m, 2.4 m, 3.4 m and 4.4 m depths respec-

tively, and data on distribution and cover

obtained.

Seagrasses were harvested at the sand-line

at steps along each transect from four 0.25

m= quadrats placed at random on the sea

floor, The material collected was preserved in

5% formalin solution, and later weighed fresh

in the laboratory to give above-sand standing

crop data. The length and width (measured

15 cm from the base) of the blade of Posi-

donia australis and P. sinuosa were measured

from a sub-sample (N = 50) of each col-

lection.

In preparing the maps, aerial colour photo-

graphs (taken in 1980) of the Department of

Lands were used to plot the landward boundary

of seagrasses and other features, and precision

DMH depth charts were used to plot depth

contours,

Epibenthic organisms collected for identifi-

cation included seagrasses and algae, and

animals in the phyla Cnidaria, Annelida,

Bryozoa, Echinodermata, Mollusca, Crustacea

and Chordata (Ascidiacea). No attempt was

made to collect pelagic or vagile species within

these phyla. In addition, observations were

made on the presence and abundance of fish.

Description of region

The upper part of Spencer Gulf (Fig. 1)

has a narrow channel basin, generally 15—20

m deep, divided into eastern and western

channels by Middle Bank and further south

by Douglas Bank. On either side of the

channel basin are shallower sublittoral plat-

forms colonised by seagrasses. The platform

on the western side of the Gulf is very narrow,

seldom more than 200 m wide, whereas that

on the eastern side may exceed 2 km in width.

These features are illustrated by the bottom

profiles in Figs 5-8. Broad intertidal-supra-

tidal platforms (shown in Fig. 1 as sand flats)

flank the channels and are colonised up to

about 1.5 m above LW i.e. to about mean sea

ievel (MSL) by Zostera mucronata.

Tributary channels up to 8 m deep cross

the intertidal platforms on the eastern side of

W a

the Gulf, and connect to the numerous man-

grove crecks north of Redcliff Point, Man-

grove thickets are well developed on the

eastern shore but are less extensive on the

western shore (Butler et «/, 1977).

The annual temperature range off Redeliff

(near Middle Bank Heacon) is fram abour

1L.3°C (winter) to 26°C (summer) and the

wonual salinity range is from about 41.5%)

(wmter) to 45.5% (summer). Monthly

temperature and safinity dat for upper

Spencer Gulf for 1975-1978 are given by

Jotnson (1981).

Water transporency off Redcliff was mea-

sured for 34 years (1975-1978) at monthly

intervals in the channel near Middle Bank by

noting the depth of disappearance of a Nansen

bottle (N) used for water sampling (Johnson

1981). The data were transformed to Dsd

(depth of disappearance of a standard Secchi

disc) nsing the following formula derived fram

comparative data taken at the site:

Dsd = 1.93 N -0.72 (r= = 06.99: N = 10)

The inverse correlation of Dsd with sea

state’ was tested using the Spearman rank

correlation coefficient and was found to be

significant (r = —0.36, PF < 0.05),

According to J. E. Johnson (pers. comm.)

sea state on the previous day, season and tide

each affect water transparency in a complex

way. Dsd data (pivlig water alienuation co-

efficient values obtained from the conversion

formula of Weinberg (1976) are plotted in

Fig, 3 and illustrate the wide variation in water

transparency

J FM A M 4 4 8&8 & O AN OG

Fig. 3. Culculated depth of disappearance of seechi

disc (Dsd) and attenuation coefficient of sen-

water (K) at station near Middle Rank uring

1975-8, Dsd seale 15 im tnetres,

40On the Beaufort scale, sea state is piven a

numerical value according to wave height as lol-

fows: 0 = culm: 1 = 30cm; 2 — 30-90 em; 3

= 90 cm-L,5 m4 = 15-24 m,

A. SHEPHERD

Water movement in upper Spencer Gulf

urises from tidal currents and wind-driven

wave action, The pattern of tides is mixed

semi-diurnal with a tidal period of about 124

hours and a maximum tidal range of about

3 m, Mean sea level changes may vary the

astronomical tidal extremes by up to 2 m

(Provis & Radok 1979. Radok, pers, comm,).

Tidal currents to one m/sec, occur in the

chanwels although actual currents near the

bottom were considerably less than this accord-

ing to divers’ estimates. Prevailing winds are

northerly or southerly and may generate short

period (Le. < 6 see.) waves up to 2 m high

in the channels. Wave action on the shallow

sublittoral platforms is therefore likely to be

considerable especially after the development

of rough loeal seas, but is of Title or no signi.

ficance on the sca fioor in the channels.

Water movement was measured along Tran-

sect 6, and on the transects near No. 1 Beacon

using “Doty” plaster clod cards (Doty 1971,

Shepherd 1974) fixed to stakes driven into the

sediment. The clod cards were placed at a

level just above the tips of the seagrass, The

resulls expressed in DIF units’ give a relative

Measure of water movement arising from the

combined effect of wave action and current,

The experiments were done on 6-7 January

1976 over 24 hours when there were lisht

southerly winds in the morning and a sea-

breeze in the afternoon. The results (incor-

porated in Figs 9, 10) show that while water

movement ix greatest in shallow water and

declines slightly with depth on the western

shore, there is a reverse trend with water

movement increasing slightly with depth an

the castern shore,

Similar experiments by J. BR. Johnson (pers.

comm,) in calm weather in October 1975 gave

the follawing DIF values for the castern shore

near Transect 4,

2 m depth — 20.8: 7 m depth — 22.6 10 m

depth — 233.8, showing a similar trend for

increasing values with increasing depth,

The results contrast with those of open

coasts, (e.g. Shepherd & Womersley 1981)

Where water movement declines sharply with

depth, and demonstrate the importance of tidal

currents in this region.

‘DIF = diffusion increase factar. The unit is the

loss of weight of the clod card relative to the

loss of weight in still water. See Doty (1971)

und Shepherd (1974),

BENTHIC COMMUNITIES OF UPPER SPENCER GULF 73

Distribution and density of benthic organisms

The distribution of density of the common

epibenthic animals, the occurrence of the

sponge—Telesto community (see below) and

of seagrasses, and the percentage cover of

algae ure shown for Transcets 1-5 in Figs

4-8.

Sand waves occurred on most transects and

their location on cach transect is also shown

in the figures. Mean densities of common

animals on three runs in the Eastern Channel

are given in Table 3. Densities varied within

and between runs but no correlation was

evident between species’ densities and depth

or any other measured factor,

The distribution of mean percentage cover

of seagrasses for the eastern and western sides

of the Gulf ts shown in Figs 9, 10. There are

eleven conspicuous community-types. They are

west

DEPTH (m)

Amphibolis antarctica

Halophila ovalis

Heterozostera tasmanica

Posidonia spp.

Red algal community —!

Echinogorgia sp ==

Goniocidaris tubaria <<

Sponge - Telesto community =

Malleus meridianus <>

Pinna bicolor ———————

Distaplia distomoides -

Polycarpa pedunculata

Sycozoa pedunculata

six seagrasses, a Caulerpa, a red algal and three

animal assemblages. The term ‘assemblage’ is

used to mean broad species groupings without

implication of biological inter-relations. The

seagrasses and Caulerpa occur for the most

part as monospecific stands with abrupt

boundaries between species. Since the distri-

butions of epibenthic animals may be more or

less continuous, the recognition of assemblages

is to some extent subjective; following Peter-

son's concepts, the most conspicuous and most

numerous species are chosen to designate an

assemblage (Thorson 1957). The seagrasses

and assemblages for the region adjacent to

Redeliff are described below, and their distri-

butions mapped in Fig. 11.

1. Zostera mucronata

Monospecific stands of this species occur on

both sides of the Gulf. On the eastern side

east

o5 % cover

<—— 204 red algae

18]

ae er Cer ee Fe SS 1j Nos m=

Fig. 4. Cross-section of Spencer Gulf along Transect 1 showing distribution of density of species or

communities and distribution of sandwaves, Continuous line indicates a more or less uniform dis-

tribution; dotted line a patchy distribution. Scale of abundance is logarthmic for animals; percentage

cover is given for algae. Sampling stations are shown by solid triangles.

74 S. A. SHEPHERD

Transect 2

i” ss

sand waves" metres

Amphibolis Pees

antarctica

Halophila ovalis ——— eee

Heterozostera eee

tasmanica

Posidonia spp. —— =2 Pes —

f?) cover

Red algal > My a I red algae

He gal => 20d rt ag

Echinogorgia sp. --- 1 {Nos m2

Goniocidaris ——_— SES — 108

tubaria

Lanceapors <i

obliqua ‘ “

Sponge-Telesto =

community

Malleus orn eH

meridianus

Pecten —_— ———— a

meridianalis

Pinna bicolor [> ——a——— es <—

Polycarpa

pedunculata =

Sycozoa => meeLe ra ~ 45 =

pedunculata 7 a a a “oo

Fig. 5, Cross-section of Spencer Gulf along Transect 2. See caption to Fig. 4 for details,

o West bast

Middle Bank, Beacon

Transect 3

DEPTH (m)

iS)

# 500

20 sand waves > Thetres

Amphibolis a ———

antarctica

Halophila ovalis — a

Heterozostera =

tasmanica

Posidonia spp. a, —— mos

Red algal community = <————-— -- -_---—=>>

10)

Echinogorgia sp. ———— —F ——sT 20 :| ae Sigae

Goniocidaris = > <> —=—=_ > 4

tubaria nies fv

Leaerae a SS 100

oblique

Sponge-Tekesto —

community

Malleus meridianus = <=> <>

Pinna bicolor ———s <>

retioaine a arn a

pedunculata

Sycozoa pedunculata Se Seine oe oh St ees.

Fig. 6. Cross-section of Spencer Gulf along Transect 3. See caption to Fig. 4 for details.

BENTHIC COMMUNITIES OF UPPER SPENCER GULF 75

west east

DEPTH (m)

Amphibolis antarctica = — tet band aes

Halophila ovalis ———_ —

Heterozostera tasmanica = -- -----

Posidonia spp.

Echinogorgia sp. pve eo ont

Goniocidaris tubaria FT

Lanceopora obliqua <> "4 Nos m2

100.

Sponge - Telesto community —>

Malleus meridianus w= = === == --

Pinna bicolor c ran Qs —- >

Sycozoa pedunculata

Fig. 7. Cross-section of Spencer Gulf along Transect 4. See caption to Fig. 4 for details.

east

Douglas Bank Beacon *

t Beacon

Transect 5

——————

20 metres

Amphibolis antarctica

Halophila ovalis 5) 5S = oe wo dete ayes Sere

(e)

Heterozostera tasmanica ~-- =--- eR ET 1 j Nos m

Posidonia spp. , cay Say vale oF a ud

Goniocidaris tubaria a Se

Malleus meridianuS ee ee

Pecten meridianalis pn Ser

Pinna bicolor < ihe er

Fig. 8. Cross-section of Spencer Gulf along Transect 5. See caption to Fig. 4 for details.

76 8S. A. SHEPHERD

WATER MOVEMENT

Pasitonis australis

PERCENTAGE COVER

Zostere

mucronate

{

DEFTH (rm)

Fig, 9. Distribution of mean percentage cover of

seagrasses with depth on the eastern shore of

upper Spencer Gulf along Transect 6.

there is a distinct band at about MSL, with

small patches occurring down to LW (Fig.

9). On the western side only scattered patches

occur above LW. Biomass data were not

obtained.

Stands near the species’ upper limit at MSL

suffered some dieback in the hot summer of

1980-81, but according to fishermen’s reports

completely recovered during the following

winter,

2. Posidonia australis

Monospecific meadows of this species occur

from a little below MSL to about 0.5-0.7 m

deep and below this mixed with Posidonia

sinuosa to about 6 m deep on the eastern

side of the Gulf. On the western side mixtures

of the two species do not ocur, and mono-

specific clumps of P. australis occur to about

5 m deep.

Changes in standing crop, stand height and

blade width with depth are given in Table 1.

Standing crop values (for the eastern shore)

and blade width values (for both shores) differed

significantly between adjacent depth sites, with

t > 4 and P < 0.001 in all cases. Differences

in stand height between sites were tested sta-

tistically using the non-parametric k-spillage

test which places heavy reliance on extreme

values i.e, maximum blade length (Conover

1971), On each shore the low stand height

values (i.e, those 36 cm or less) recorded for

shallow water sites were each significantly less

than the values for deeper sites (P < 0,001).

WATER MOVEMENT

am_DIF

100)

bare sand

——

Posidonia australis

PERCENTAGE COVER

Amphibalis

antarctica

Posidonia sinuosa

“2 "3 4 5

Heterozostera tasmanica_

DEPTH (m)

Fig. 10. Distribution of mean percentage cover of Seagrasses. with depth on the western shore of upper

Spencer Gulf at No. 1 Beacon (near Two Hummock Point),

BENTHIC COMMUNITIES OF UPPER SPENCER GULF 77

Mangrove

Pout

B Beacon

LW Low water mark

iy)

tity

Zostera mucronata

Posidonia australis

| Posidania sinuosa

Heterozostera tasmanioa

| and/or Halophila ovalis

Rod algal cormmunity

Polycarpa - Echinagargia community

Sponge Telestoe communily

Two

Hurrnack fi!

Point at

Sandwaves

Inibutary

channel

Redcliff Point

Fig. 11, Distribution of epibenthic assemblages in upper Spencer Gulf near Redcliff Point. B — Bea-

con. LW = Low water.

Except for samples taken in a lagoon iso-

lated at LW from Gulf waters on the eastern

side, standing crop values decline with depth,

while blade width and stand height increase.

On the western side standing crop is variable

but blade width and stand height both tend to

increase with depth,

3. Poasidania sinuosa

This species occurs as monospecific stands

on the western side of the Gulf to about 3.5

m deep, und on the eastern side in mixed

stands with P, australis from 0-6 m deep, and

as a monospecific community to about 8.3 m

deep. On Middle Bank monospecific stands go

to about 7 m depth and further south at

Douglas Bank to about 10 m depth.

Changes in standing crop, stand height and

blade width with depth are given in Table 2.

Standing crop values differ significantly (t >

3.1; P < 0.02) between shallow (—0.6 and

—1.6 m), medium (—4.7 and —5.7 m) and

deep (—8.3 m) sites, and stand height is

significantly less (P < 0.001) for the —0.6

m and —8.3 m depth sites than the others,

using the k-spillage test referred to above.

Differences in blade width on the eastern

shore between the extremes are significant (t =

4.39; P < 0.001) but not between populations

of neighbouring depth stations, Blade width

78 5,

Tasre 1. Changes in standing crap, in grams fresh

weivht (GFW), staid height and blade width of

Posidonia australis af various depths along tra-

sects on eastern and westera shores.

Standing crop Meat

(GFW per *Stand blade width

Depth 0,25 m* height (mm)

(m) (+18.D.) (cm) (71S D)

Eastern shore:

+ 1,3 550 ( 99.1) 29 7.5 (1.3)

— 1.4 (lagoon) 346 (129.7) 846 WRT (4,1)

—44 (lagoon) 49( 16.8) ie) 11.4 (2.0)

+ 0A 464 (106.0) 26 10,6 (1.4)

— 1,6 366 (1013.7) 42 11.2 (1.5)

—L6 86 ( 23.2) 56 11.9 (0,9)

Western Shore;

+ 0.6 266 27 8.9 (1,1)

— 04 410 3h 98 C11)

2.4 237 TI 9,341.3)

—34 455 67 '14 1.1)

TABLE 2, Changes in standing crop, sland height

and hlade width of Posidonia sinuosa with depth

on eastern and western sides af Spencer Gulf,

Standing crap Mean

(GPW per *Stand blade width

Depih 0.25 m=? height (mm)

(m) (£18.D.) (em) (+£185,D.)

Eastern shore:

— 0.6 692 (201.4) 45 7.2 (1,5)

— 1.6 S30(1362)* 57 6.9 (0.8)

—16 569 (13].8) 54 7.0008)

4.7 274 ( 87.0) 56 7.4 (0.7)

— $7 283 (1011) 5% 7.6 (0.7)

8.3 5) 86) 33 6.9 (04)

Western Shore:

—2.4 424 81 8.5 (0.7)

* Mixed population with P. australis.

of the western shore population is significantly

wider than the nearest (in width) eastern shore

population (t = 6,81; P < 0.001) and stgni-

ficantly narrower than the nearest (in width)

western shore population of P. australis (t =

2,12; P< 0.05). Overall, standing crop values

decline with depth, blade width shows a trend

of increasing blade width with depth (except

for the deepest sample at the species’ lower

depth limit) and stand height tends to de-

crease at the species’ upper and lower limit,

4, Amphiholis antaréetica

Monospeeific stands occur ta a depth of

about 5,5 m. However, standing crop values

on the eastern shore (to 3 kg/m®*) are con-

A. SHEPHERD

siderably higher than those on the western

shore (to 800 g/m),

5. HMeterazastera tasnuttiva

A distinct band is common below P. siinesa

tron) 7-9 m depth. Standing erop values are

600-700 g/ m?.

6 Halophile avaliy

Stands of this species occur only at 8-10

m depth, Standing crop values (neluding be-

low ground parts) of 105 g/m were recorded

at 10 m depth.

7, Catiderpa cactoides

Stans oceur sparsely at depths of »hout

10 m on the edge of the channel pre

dominantly on the western side of the Gulf.

It was not investigated in detail and was of

too limited an extent to be mapped,

8. Red alga) assemblage

A diverse assemblage of red algae occurs

an rocky bottom, attached to shell fragments

or epiphytic on Pinna bicolor or clumps of

Mallens meridians from 8-12. (—16) om

depth, The lower depth limil of attached algae

is about 12 m on rocky bottom, although

algae may rarely be found to 16 m on sandy

bottom, probably due to the increased light

reflected from the sand surface. A full species

list with data on depth range and location js

included in Appendix 1. Changes in percentage

cover on Transects 1—3 are given in Figs 4-4,

Animal assemblaces

A species list of all animals recorded during

the various studies is given in Appendix 2.

9, Sponge—Teleste assemblave

Restricted tu rocky substrate which cither

outerops ev is cavered by a thin layer of sedi-

ment, "Phe reef bise is partly bjotie since agere-

gations af the hammer oyster Malleuy meri-

dianus occur cemented together and increase

the available firm substrate for the artuchment

of sessile fauna.

Detailed studies of the habitat have not

been made, but the following species are con-

spicuous and common.

Ponfera — Many unidentified species

Cofdaria — TVelesta multifiora

Euplexaura sp. Echino-

sorgla sft

Annelida — UChaelopteris vario-

pedatus

Echinodermata — Anthaster valvulatus

Gonlocidaris, tubaria

RENTHIC COMMUNITIES OF UPPER SPENCER GULP 719

Bryozoa — Cellepararia fusca

Amathia broneniartli

Mollusca — Malleus meridianus

Chordata — Hulocynthia hispida

(Ascidacea) Polycarpa pedurculata

This habitat also wtlracts many fish of 1)

speeres for which duta are provided in

Appendix 3,

10. Palvearpa-Echinagergia ussemblaue

Occurs in the channel basin trom (k=)

10-20 m deep on shelly or sandy bottom.) The

principal species are given in Table 3 with

meati densities recorded during sled runs in

(he castern ehanmel basin. Gther rarer specics

cneounlered! are the seapens Seytalivn| sp. and

Virsalaria mirabilis, the hammer oyster Mal-

lens meridianus, and the sea-star Anthaster

valvidlatus.

Tanta 3. Mean densities af arganisms in nanthers’

me (with standard deviations where obtained) in

the easter Channel basin.

Run No. ] 2 3

Gehinogorgia sp. 1.7 40.9) 1.0 <td

Evinlexatira sp, 1 0.05 -

Gontocidaris tubaria (1 a1 —

Lanceopora obliqua = 0.2 1 04

Palycarpa pedanevlaia B.S (2.1) 6.2 (28) 128 (6. 7)

Il. Lanceppora-Sycoreu assemblare

Largely restricted to sandwaves. The prin-

cipal species Lanceopora obliqua, Sycozoa

pedunculata, Palyearpa pediunculara and Vir-

eulata mirabiliy, each have adaptations allow-

ing them to persist in a mobile substrate. ‘The

first three have peduncles or stems up to 20 em

long attaching them deeply in the substrate

While Firevlata bas a long slender stalk,

swollen basally, by which it moves. vertically

in the substrate, £, oblique and §. pedimenlata

occur in aggregations tn densities ta 100/m2

and P, peduneulata to densities of 10/im*2. The

distribution of ihese speeies is crudely related

to the mobility of the substrate, They are

absent or occur in low abundance on the peaks

of sandwayes, but occur in the recorded den-

sities on (he slopes and in troughs. The fauna

of sandwaves are described in more detail else-

where. (Shepherd 1983),

12. Pima bictlor and Malleuy meridianus

agerceeations,

Populations of PL bicolor with densities of

up to 16/m* aceur drom the intertidal to 20 m

deep, tui are most commonly found on the

edges of the channel basin from 8-15 m

(Figs 4-8), Intertidal populations (usually

with the epizoie alga Hormovire banksii) are

common on “promontory” sand-pits jutting

into the Golf between Redcliff Point and

Blanche Harbour but are rare elsewhere in

the region studied (J. E. Sohnson pers,

comm).

Populations of M. nieridianus are even

more iregular in their distribution than P.

bicolor and occur mainly at 8-16 m depth,

Due to the uncertain occurrence of these

species over broad depth ranges and in several

community types, and their probable irregular

recruitment (e.g. Butler & Keough (1981)

for P. hicolar), they probably are best desig-

nated as facies of other assemblages in which

they are found rather than as distinct units.

Discussion

These data represent the first account of

the distribution of benthic communities and

the ubundance of organisms in upper Spen-

cer Gulf. The description is incomplete smee

the infauna was not examined and the rocky

bottom fauna was only studied superficially.

Environmental Fuctors

The underwater light climate js very

variable with ‘average’ conditions low com-

pared with those an open coasts (Shepherd

& Womersley 1970, 1971, 1976, 1981); light

may be an important factor causing strati-

ficution of the various seagrasses and red algal

assemblage within the sublittoral (photic) zone

and separating them from the deeper animal

communities of the circalitoral zone. The role

of water movement is more complex since it

moy affect organisms directly, and indirectly

by influencing sediment characteristics, Thus

differences in water movement beween eastern

and Western shores may be responsible for the

different sediment characteristics and henee

the different distributions of seagrasses (see

below), Differences in current velocities in the

channel appear ta be responsible for the dis-

tribution of sandwaves and their fauna (un-

published data).

Seagrasses

Posidonia arsrraliy and PL sinuosa are

especially vigorous in South Australia (den

Hartog 1970) and form lush beds of high

productivity in upper Spencer Gulf (West &

Larkum 1979, Johnson?). Assuming a blade

80 S. A. SHEPHERD

turnover tate of 3-4 per annum (West &

Larkum 1979) then annual productiviy would

execed 9 ke (Eresh wt)/m* in shallow water,

a value which equals that of many highly

productive terrestrial and aquatic plant com-

munitics (Westlake 1943).

Blade width and blade leneth measurements

were undertaken in order to better define the

Variation in the two Poxsidenia species, and

as a means of distinguishing therm in the field,

Since Made width of both species tends ta m-

crease with increasing depth, the differences

in width belween them are greatest in the

region of overlap, a fact which Facilitates

ficld disctimination of the two species.

It is likely that the differences in blade

width and stand height, noted in emergent

intertidal situations, in the lagoon, afid alone

the depth gradient are each an adaptive re-

sponse (as yet poorly understood) io the par-

ticular environment. Larkum (1976) also

noted a similar tendency for blade length of P.

australis to inerease with depth,

the vertical distribution paltern of sea-

grasses is broadly similar to that described for

them in Gulf St Vincent (Shepherd & Sprige

1976). However. differenees in their distri-

bution between the two sides of Spencer Gulf

are of interest. The abundance of bare sand

patches on the western side suggests a less

suitable habitat for seagrasses than the

opposite shore where seayrass cover is 100%,

and an absence of competition hetween species

for space. This may be why there ore discrete

communities of PF, anstralis and P. simuosa

bounded by discontinuities of exclusion, and

why JZ. tasinanica extends into shallower water

on [he western shore, A similar distribution

pattem to that described Por the western shore

also occurs further south at Crag Point (Shep-

herd 1974),

Alval Flora

Five species of Chlorophyta, 18 species of

Phaeophyta and SS species of Rhodophyta

(Appendix |) are recorded here. Addditional

species are given by Shepherd (1974) for

Crag Pot, and Johnson’ tists the epiphytic

Nora of seagrasses. The nuntber of species for

the revion is much less than that recorded on

rocky bottom on oceanic coasts (Shepherd &

Womessley 1970, 1971, 1976, 1981) and re-

fects the environmental extremes and the

lower habitat diversity in upper Speocer Chui

Nearly all of the species in Appendix |

ale widely distributed throughout the southern

Australian (Flindersian) region and are there

fore considered as having intermediate warm

cool temperate, biogeographic — allinstics

(Womersicy 1959, 1981 a,b). However, two

species (Asparqgopiis taxiformis and Platy-

viphonia mutabilis) occur only westward of the

Seuth Australian Gulfs and appear fo have

warm temperate affinities, and two other

species Sargassum deeurrens and Hormophysa

rriqueira (LL) Kuetzing (the latter recorded

by Womersley (1967) but not tn this study)

are tropical and subtropical in their distribu-

jiens, In addition, Beanland & Woclkerling

(1982) have recorded four more species of

tropical affinities ou mangrove pneumalo-

Phores. Thus there is a small, but distinct

lropical, and possibly reliet, element in the

algal flora,

Fauna

The fauna is dominated by relatively few

species, present in considerable abundance, as

might be expected for a region of environ-

mental extremes (Copeland & Nixon [974),

The presence of same coelenterates has special

inicrest, Echinegergia sp, and Scyraliumn sp.

wppear to be endemic ia upper Spencer Gulf

(Grasshotf 1982), Virgularia mirabilis, a cos

mopolitan species, is known in South Austra-

lia only From this region (Utinomi & Shep-

herd 1989) and Velesie multiflora. a tropical

sptcies, ig recorded jh sauithern Australia only

in mid- and upper Spencer Gulf (Verseveldt

1982). In addition, the ascidian Syeozea ped-

vieulata is known iv southern Australia only

from upper Spencer Gulf and Trvestigator

Strak (Kot 1972, 1975), These last four

species, except for V, pilrabilis, appear to

have tropical wffinities, suggestmy thal isolated

popiWlations are confined fo Gulf waters. In

addition, a number of specics in other phyla,

newly or not yet described are known only

from upper Spencer Gulf. They include a

bryozoan Bugula sp. ua Matworm Anceratheca

wustralleasiy, and aa opisthabranch Discedarix

msp. Further, the ophiuroid Artphiura tri-

sacaitia is apparently rare elsewhere (Baker

& Devaney 1981),

The benthic environment and the fauna of

upper Spencer Gull differ markedly from those

of upper Gulf St Vineent, a region with similar

temperature and salinity extremes. The latter

region is generally shallow with deeper, silty

bottam dominated by a Pinna—holothurian

assemblage, whereas upper Spencer Gulf has

deeper chaniels, sifongser water currents and

BENTHIC COMMUNITIES OF LPPER SPENCER GULF &I

generally well-sorted medium to coarse shelly

sands, Nowhere in upper Spencer Gulf does

Pinna bicdlor support the peh epizoic fauna

deseribed for Upper Gulf St Vincent. OF the

32 species considered to be occasional ta com-

mov in upper Gulf St Vincent by Shepherd

& Sprige (1976). only one echinoderm

(Goniacidaris tubaria), two moalluses. (Pinna

hiealor and Malleus meridianus) and one

ascidian (Polyearpa pedunculara) occur in

comparable abundance in upper Spencer

Gulf; the temainder appear to be rare or

absent,

Thus on the basis of present knowledge of

the fauna of the Gulls, upper Spencer Gulf

is impoverished in terms of overall spevies

richness. but relatively rich in species. which

are either endemic or haye tropical affinities.

Accarding to Copeland & Nixon (1974)

hypersaline cnvironments are stressed bio-

logical systems with fewer species and simpler

food webs than less stressed systems. The addi-

tion of further stresses ¢.g, in the form of

Wastoy and other discharges is therefore likely

to eliminate more species and even whole food

chains, It is critical that such a system should

recuive very detailed studies of its component

parts to determine its capacity to accept addi-

honal stresses.

Ackoowledgments

The 1973 and 1974 studies were funded by

the Petrochemical Consortium af South

Australia and the 1980 study hy the Depari-

ment of Marine & Harbors, South Australia.

Mr Forbes Cuming ably skippered the

charter vessel in 1973. and Mr K- L, Branden

supervised the diving then and on later trips.

Tam especially grateful to them and to Messrs

L. Gray, J. E.Johnson, G, Petersen, G. Ramm,

W. Wickes and G, Wright for help in the field

and laboratory. Mr J. Heppner assisted with

position fixing during 1980. Mr D. Reilly

provided accommodation wnd gave invaluable

assistanee in muny other ways.

Jam especially grateful to those who identi-

fied organisms. They include Prof. H. B. 8.

Wometsley (algae), Dr J, Verseveldt (aleyo-

nacea). Dr P.M. Mather (ascidians),

Mr FP E. Boek (hryozwans), Dr A. N, Baker

(echinaids and ophiuroids), De M. Grasshoff

(gorgonians), Mrs J. EF. Watson (hydroids),

Mr M. G, King (shelled molluscs). Mr R.

Biirn Copisthobranchs), the late Dr H. Utinomi

(pennatulids), Dr S. Prudhoe (platyhel-

ninths), Mr D. Staples (pyenogonids),

Prof, Womersley, Mrs E. Robertson, and

Mr Johnsow made helpful comments on the

manuseript,

References:

Baker, A. N. & Devaney, BD. M, (1981) Notes on

southern Australian ophiurgidea (Echinader-

mata), Trans R. Sac. 8. Aust, 105, 155-78,

Bayiy, ft. A. B. (1975) Australian estuaries. In

H. A. Nix & M. A. Elliott (Eds), “Managine

sana ecosystems”, roe. Eeol. Sac. Aust. &,

1-66,

Beant ann, WOR. & Wor tkesera, W. 4. (1982)

Siudies on Australian mangrove algae; I, Com-

position and geographe distribution of com-

munities in Spencer Gulf, South Australia. Proe-

R, Sac. bier 94, 89-106.

Rurier, A. S., Deeers, A.M. MeKiniup, §. C, &

Tiomas, DO P. (1977) Distribulion and. sedi-

ments of mangrove forests in South Australia,

Trans, Ro Soc. S, Aust. WA, 35-44,

—— & Keough, M, (1981) Distribution of Pinna

bicolor Gmelin (Mallusea: Bivalvia) in South

Australia with observations on recruitment, Pbid

105. 29-30.

CHINNOCK, R. J. (19X0) The vegetalion and flora

of Redelifl Point and surrounding areas. Soh

Australia, 7. Adelaide Bor Gard, 2, 329-51.

Conover, W. J. (1971) Practical non-parametric

statistics. 462: pp. (Wiley, New York).

Corecanp, B. 1. & Nixon, S, W. (1974) Hyper-

saline lagoons, pp. 312-30. fn H. T. Odum, B. 1

Copeland & B. A, McMahon (Fds), “Coustal

ecosystems of the United States” (Conservation

Foundation; Washington).

Davies, G. R. (1970) Carhottate hank sedimenta-

von, eastern Shark Bay, Western Australia.

Mem. Amer, Ass. Petral, Geol. 13, 85-168.

Dory, M.S. (1971) Measurement of water move-

ment in reference to benthic aleal growth.

Batanica mar. 14, 32-5,

Grassvorr, M, (1982) Gorgonians or sexfans

(Order Gorgonucea), pp. 198-206. In S.A.

Shepherd & £. M, Thomas (Eds), “Marine tn-

Vertebrates of Southern Australia’ Part T. Mand-

books. of (he fauna and Alora of South Australia

(Govt Printer; Adelaide).

Hails, J, R.. Gosts. V. A. & Sancenr, G. FP.

(1980) The significurnce of the stibmarine seo-

logy of upper Spencer Gulf, South Australi, ta

environments! decision-making Search 11,

Harroc, ©, ven (1970) “The Seagrasses of the

forld." Vert KR. ned. Akad Wet Afd. Natiurk

ser, 2, 59, 1-275. 41 plates.

Jouwson. J. BE. (1981) Hydrological data tor

upper Spencer Gulf, 1975-1978. Fish. Res. Pap.

Pep. Fish. §. Aust, No. 3. 1-30;

Kory, P. (1972) The ascicians of South Australie

I]. Easter sector of the Great Australian Bight

and Investigator Strait. Trans. R, See, §. Aus,

96, 165-964.

—— (1975) The ascidians of South Australia IT

Norihern sector of the Great Australian Bight

and additional records, hid, 99, 1-20_

82 S$. A, SHEPHERD

LarkuM, A. W, D. (1976) Ecolazy of Botany Bay

I, Growth of Posidonia australis (Brown) Hook,

f. it Botany Bay and other Bays of the Sydney

basin, Aust. J. Mar. Freshw, Res, 27, 117-27,

Provis, D, G. & Ravor, R. (1979) Seatevel oxcil-

Jations along the Australian coast, fhid, 30, 295-

31.

SHEPHERD, 5S, A. (1974) An. underwater survey

near Crag Point in upper Spencer Gulf, Dept,

Fisheries S.A. Tech, Rept (1), 1-29,

(1983) Epifauna of micgaripples: species’

adaptations and population responses to dis-

turbance. Ausr. J. Beal. 8, 3-8.

& Spriag. BR. C. (1976) Substrate, sediments

and subtidal ecology of Gulf St Vincent and

Investigator Strait, pp. 161-74, Jn C. R, Tw

dale, M. J. Tyler & B. P. Webb (Eds), “Natural

History of the Adelaide Region” (Royal Society

of South Australias Adelaide), :

& Womersiey, H, B, §. (1970) The sublit-

toral ecology of West Island. South Australia, I,

Environmental features and the algal ecology.

Trans, R. Soc, S. Aust. 94, 10538. .

—— & —— (1971) Pearson Island Expedition

1969 7. The subtidal ecology of benthic algae,

Phid. WO, 177-91,

& (1976) The sublidal algal and sen-

erass ecology of St Francis Tslond, South Aus-

tralia, Lhid. 98, 155-67.

& -——— (198)) The algal and seagrass eco-

lozy of Waterloo Bay, South Australia, Aquatic

Rat. WW, 305-7).

Troason, G. (1957) Bottom communities (aublit-

toral or shallow shelf). 77 J, W, Hedgpeth (Ed)

Treatise on marine ecology and palaeccecology

Vol. |. Ecolopy, pp. 461-534 (Geol, Soc, Amer.;

New York),

Unnom, H, & Supeierp, 8. A. (1982) Scapens

(Order Pennatulacca) pp, 207-19. Jw 8. A,

Shepherd & J, M, Thomas (Eds) “Marine Inver

lebrates Of Southern Australia”, Part 1. Hand-

books of the fauna and Nora of South Australia,

(Govt Printer: Adelaide).

VERSEVELDT, J, (1982) Soft corals or alcyonariane

(Orders Stolonifera, Telestacea and Alcyona-

ceu), pp. 179-82. Jn S. A, Shepherd & 2. M.

Thomas (Eds), “Marine Invertebrates of

Southern Australia” Part I, Handhooks of the

fauna and flora of South Anstralia (Govt

Printer, Adelaide )-

Weinebero, S. (1976) Submarine daylight and cco-

logy, Mar, Biol, 37, 291-304.

Wrst. R, J, & Larkum. A. W. D, (1979) Leaf

productivity of the seagrass, Posidenia australis

in eustern Australian waters, 4dyvatie Bot. 7.

57-65.

Wesriake, BD, F, (1965) Comparisons of plant

productivity, Biol, Rev. 38, 385-425,

Womerswry, H. B.S. (1959) The marine algae of

Australia, Bor. Rev. 25, 545-A14.

—— (1967) A critical survey of the marine algae

of southern Australia Tf. Phaeophyta, Aust. J.

Bat. 15, 189-270.

(198la) Biogeography of Australasian

marine muacroalgae. pp, 292-307. Jn M, N. Clay-

lon & R.J. King (Eds), “Marine Botany; an

Australian perspective” (Longman: Melbourne )-

—— (J981b) Aspects of the distribution and

biology of Australian marine macroulgse. pp.

294-306, In A. 1. MeComb & J. §. Pate (Rds),

“Biology of Australian Flora” (Universily of

Western Australia; Perth),

Appendix 1: Algal and seagrass species list for upper Spencer Gulf

Mast collections are from deeper water

(>I) m) with little data on the shallow water

algal Nora, ldentitications are by H. B, 5S. Wermer-

sley ond E, M. Wollasiouw (Crouanieae, Callitham-

nieve, Spongoclonieae). Date given ore, the

transect on which the species was recorded. the

depih range (m) und, in brackets, the referenve

niimber to the community (see text) in which

the species was recorded. ‘TC. - trituitory

channel leading to Chinaman Creek,

CHLOROPHYTA

Cladophorales

Cladaphera hainesti Harv. 11m til)

Crnlerpales

Canlerpa cactoides (Turn.) © Agardh Tre 2

&m (7)

Chleradesmis (1 Ag Pucker

iS im (li)

Codiales

Ceeiie harveyi Silva Tr, 5, 12 Mm (10), 18m

PHAEOPHYTA

Ectocarpales

Kuehkuchia spinosa (Kuetz) Kuckuek ‘Tr. 2.

tlm (10)

Sphucelariales

Sphacelaria. furcigera Kuetzing Tr, 2, 0-1 m

(2) epiphytic or Cavlocystis

Iacullfere

Diclyotales

Diciveta dichetama (Hudson) Lameotipoux

Trs 35. We1S m (3) (5) C10)

Diewopteris anstralig (Sand) Askenasy 15 m

(11)

D. muelleri (Sender) Reinbold Tr. 5. 12 ™

(fh)

Disiromiaa flabellatim Womersley Tr. 5.

&m (3)

Chordarinles

Castagnea sp. T.C. 9m

Stitaphara rhizodes (Turner) J, Agardh Tr

2, N-] m, (2)

Nemaeystis sp, Tr. 2. 0-1 m (2)

Sperochnales

Belletia eriophorum Hary. Trs 2,5. 10-15 m

(3) 610) (11)

Neveia australis Hary. Tr. 5. 10 m (3)

Sporoehius comosus C, Agardh Trs 4.5. Lo-

1S m (5) (6) (11)

S. radiciformis (Turner) C. Agardh & m (3)

Dictyosiphonales

Asperococens hullosis Lamouroux Trs 2-5,

-t8 m2) (3) (8) (8) C10)

Fucules

Cauloeystis cephalornithas (Labitl)

schoug Trs 2.5. 0-10 m (2) (5)

Sarsassum deeurrens (KBr in Turner) Cp

Agurdh Tr 5, 10 m (3)

Are-

BENTHIC COMMUNITIES OF UPPER SPENCER GULF bi

S. paradoxum (R.Br. in Turner) Hy, & A.

Tr. 5, 8 m (3)

S. (Eusargassuim) sp, Trs 2-5. 6-18 m (3)

(5) (&) (10)

RHODOPHYTA

Nemilinles—Bonnemaisoniaceae

Ayparagopsis taxiformis (Delile) Trevisan Tr.

3. 10 m (RB)

Bonnemailsonia australis Leyring Trs 4,5 10—

12m (5)

Crypioneminles—Pumontiaceae

Dudresnava australis |, Agardh Trs 2,4. 8-10

m (3)

Corallinuceac

Jimia mierarthvadia Lamx Tr. 4. 6 m (3)

Metagoniolithon stelliferam (Lamarck) Woy.B,

Tr, 2. 0-1 m (2)

Gigartinales—Solieriacene ;

Solierla robusta (Grev.) Kylin Urs 3-5, T.C,

8-18 m (3) (5) CR) (10) C11)

Rhubdoniaceae

Erythraclanium mueller’ Sonder 'Trs 4,5, T-C,

9-15 m (10)

Rhabdonia coccinea Harvey Tres 2-5. 18 m

(3) (5) (8) (10)

Acrotylaceac

Anirocentrus nigrescens (Hooker & Harvey)

Kraft & Min Thein Tr. 5, 10-15 m (11)

Rhodophyllidacese

Craspedocurpus ramentaceus (C.Ag.) Min

Thein & Womersley [5 m (11)

Hypneaceae

Aypuca sp, Tr. 4. 18 m (10)

Oracilariacene

Ciracilaria sp. 1S m C1)

Mychodiaceag

Mychadea aciculere (1. Agardh) Kraft: Tes

35. 12-15 m (10)

M. carnesa Hooker & Harvey Trs 3-5, 12-

wom (8) (10)

Rhodymenules—Rhodymeniaceac

Botryocladia ebovaia (Sonder) Kylin Trs 2-5.

0-18 m (2) (3) (10)

Coelurthrum mueller’ (Sond.) Borg. Trs 2-5,

TC, 6-18 m (3) (5) (8) (10) C11)

Gloiasaccion hrawnii Harvey 8-15 m (3)

(11)

Champiuceac

Champin costericola (Hary.) Reedman &

Womersley Tvs 3-5, T.C, 8-L6 m (3) (5)

(%) (10) (11)

Ceramiules—Cerumiaceae

Warrenicae

Werreniy comiosa (Harvey) Kuetzing Tr, 5,

12 m (10)

Crouaniese

Gartya pinnella Harvey ‘rs 2-4. 11-18 (6)

(8) (10)

Antithamnieae

Antithaumnion divergens (Sonder) De Tom

Tr. 5, 67 m (3) Epiphytic on Postdonia

Macrorhamnaian secundum Wollaston Trs 3—

5. 6-15 m (3) (10) OT)

Callithumnieae

Callithamnion sp, Tr, 5, T.-C. 8-9 m (5)

Fpiphytic an Chondria

Spongocloniese

Halopleema preissit Sonder Trs 3,5, 8-18 m

(3) (10)

Spongocloniam conspicuum Sonder Trs 2,5.

8-15 m (3) (5) (10) (11)

S sp. (possibly there are two species) Trs 2,4.

8-12 m (8) (10)

S. fusciculatum J, Ag?) Trs 2,5, TC, 9-114

m (5) (10)

Spyrdieae

Spyridia filamentosa (Wulfen) Harvey Tr.

5. 8-10 m (3) (10)

S. tusmanion (Kuetz) J.Ag. Trs 3-5. 10-15

m (3) (5) (8) (LO) (11)

Delesseriaceae

Acrosorium uncinaium (SAg.) Kylio Tra

2-4. B-1K m (5) (8) (10)

Dusyaceue

Dasya capillariy A. & H. Tre 4,5. TC, 8-15

m (10)

D. extensa Sonder ex Kuetz T.C. 9-11 m (3)

Heterasiphionia guvniana (Warv,) Reinhold

Trs 2,4,5. 8-10 m (5) (8) (10)

H. maelleri (Sead.) De Tom Tr. 5, 10 m (3)

Heterosiphonia lawrenciana (Harv.) Parsons

Trs 3,5. 10-18 m (10)

Lasiathalia sp. Te. 5, TC. 8-9 m (3)

Rhodomeliceie—Polysiphonieae

Chiracanthia arborea (Harvey) Falkenberg

Tres 3-5, 8-12 m (3) (5) (8) (10)

Echinothammion fysiric CH. & He) Kylin

Tr. 5. (0-12 m (3) (5) (10)

Palysiphonia crassiuscula Harv, Tres 4,5, 12-

em (10) (It)

P, decipiens Mantagne Tr. 5. 8-12 m (3)

(5) (10)

Lophothaligae

Brongniartella australis (C.Ag.)

Trs 3.4. 6-10 m () (8)

Doaxddasvu bolhochaete (Harvey) Falkenberg

Trs 2-5, T.C. 9-18 m (5) (8) (10)

Lophathalia harmoclados (1,Ag.) J.Ag, Tr 2.

lim (10)

Lophothulioid sp. Tr. 4. 18 m (10)

Micropence sp. Tr. 4 T.C, 9-15 m (10) (11)

Prerosiphonicue

Dictymenia harveyaia Sonder Trs 3-5. 10-16

m (3) (5) (8) (10)

Placophoricac

Jeannerettia peiicellata (Harvey) Papenfuss

Trs 3—5. 10, 18 m (3) (5) (8) (10)

Herposiphoniene

Herposiphonia versicolor (H. & H.) Falken-

berg Trs 3-58. 10-12 m (3) (5) (10)

Polyzonieae

Cliftendea pectinata Warvey Tes 3.4, 15-18

m (10)

Amunsieae

Praokuetsingia australasica ( Mont.) Falken-

berg Trs 3,5. 815 m (3) (35) (10)

Chondricae

Chondria harveyana J.Ag. Tres 4,5. 8-15 m

(5) (10) (4)

Laurencia brandenti Saito & Womersley Trs

3-5. 8-12 m (3) (8) (10)

Sarcomenieac

Platysiphonia mutabilis CHarvey) Womersley

& Shepley Trs 2,4,5. 812 m (3) (5) (8)

(10)

Schmitz

84 S. A. SHEPHERD

1RACHEOPHYTA—seugrasses

Poramogetonaceae

Amplibolis antarctica

Aschers 0-6 m (4)

Flelerozestera lasmanica (Mart, ex Aschers)

den Hartog Vrs 1-5, 7-9 m (5)

Zostera mucranata den Hartog Intertidal (1)

(2)

Posidonia australis J. D, Hooker Trs 1-5

ms.J-—6 m (2) (3)

(Labill.) Sonder ex

P. sinuosa Cambridge & Kuo Trs 1-5, 0-6 m

(2) (3)

P. augustifolia Cambridge & Kua Tr. 4.10 m

(3)

Hydrocharitaceae

Aalophila ovalis (R.Br.) 1, D. Hooker ssp,

australis (Doty & Stone) den Hartog Trs

1-5. 8-10 m (6).

Appendix 2: A species list of animals in the region of Redcliff daring the various surveys

Data given are the transects on which the

species was recorded, depth range (m) and, in

brackets, the community reference number (sce

text) in which the species occurs.

? = in Tributary Channel) P = epizoic

on Piste.

CNIDARIA

Hydrozoa

Rimeria australis Blackburn 15 m (11)

Citia hemisphavrica (Linnaeus) 18 m (11)

Enudendrium generalis Lendenfeld 10-15) m

(9) (1M) (bt)

Plamalacia setacea Ellis 18 m C11)

Anthozoa

Actiniarias An unidentified red anemone Tr

4.4) m (10)

Velestucea! Telesto multiflora Laackman Trs

I-5, P. 8149 m (9) (10)

Aleyonucea: Capnella gahoensis Verseveldt

Trs 24. 11-14 m (9) (10)

Gorgonacea: Echinogargia sp. Trs 1—4, 10—

Km (9) (10)

Eniplexaura sp. Trs 2-4. 10-19 m (9)

(10)

Penniatulaceu: Seyvtalivm sp. 14-18 m (10)

(tl)

Virgularia eustaviana Herklots

Wo omirahilis (Miller) 10-19 m (10) (11)

PLATYVHELMINTHES

Ancoratheca australiensis Prudhoe 10 m. (9)

ANNELIDA

Chaetopterus varivopedains (Renier)

T.C, 6-15 m (5) (8) (10) (11)

BRYOZOA (with notes added by Mr P. Rock)

Amathia ef brongniartii Kirkpatrick ‘Trs

2-4. 13-18 m (9) (11)

A. Jertuesa Tennyson Woods 14-18 m (9)

(11)

Buenla sp.

A biserial species, lacking spines or avi-

culama, related to B. meritina (Linnaeus).

Cellepoaravia fusca (Busk) 12-17 m (9)

Cormiticella cornnia (Rusk) 15-18 m (9)

(it)

(Distal ungles are less spinose than is usual

in ©. cornuta, Cy ttueinet and C. perforata.

However, due to great variation in this

fumily colonies may be a variant of C.

Ponta)

Lanceopora ebliqua (MacGillivray) 'Trs 3.4,

10-18 m (10) (11)

Menipea roborata (Hinck)

Friplyiloseon sp. 5-10 m P.

Other epizoic species attached lo some of

Tr 2,

(8 m (9) (11)

above species in sundwaves arée—

Lirhenopeara sp,

Seruparia ambigua (D'Orbigny)

Celluria sp-

Mesonia radians (loamarck)

Crisia acrepora Busk

ECHINQDERMATA

Crinoidea

Antedeon inceommoda Bell Trs 2-5. 'T.C. 4-19

m (8) (9) (10)

Asteroidea

Anthasier valvulatus (Miller & Troschel)

‘tvs 1-5 10-18 m. (9) (10)

Luidia ausiraliae Déderlein Tr 4, 10 m (10)

Paririella exigua (Lamarck) T.C. Osi m (1)

Tosia anstralis Gray Ty 2, 2-4 m (2) (3)

Ophiuroidea

Aamphionplus echrelenca (Brock) Tr 5. 10 1m

(10)

Amphiurd trisacantha WH. L. Clark Tr 4. 10+

15 m (10)

A, poecila WH. L, Clark Tr 2.6 m (5S)

Ophionercix semoni (Déderlein) Trs 3,4,5-

WHIZ m (10)

Ophiacanis opacum H, Ly Clark 'Trs 2,4. LO-

12 m (10)

Ophiothvix (Placophiothrix) spengsieela Siimp-

son Irs 2, 4. 10-14 m (10)

Echmoidea

Gontocldaris tubaria var. impressa Koehler

Trs [-5. 4-20 m (5) (8) (9) (10)

Temnaplearus michaelseni Déderlgin 10-12

m (8)

MOLLUSCA

This list is incomplete. Loneata (chitons) ure

omitted and infaunal species under-represented,

Gustropoda

Bullaria hotaniea (Hedley) ‘Ur 2. 2-6 m (2)

(3) (5)

Hippoanyx conicus (Schimacher) T.C. 8 m

Plevreploce australasia (Perry) T.C. 8 m

Polinices conicuy (Lamarck) Tr. 2, ‘TiC,

fhm (2) (5)

Thuis arbita Gmelin Tr. 5. G6 m (3)

Zoila friendi thersites (Gray) Tv. 4. 3 m (2)

(3)

Bivalvig

Brachidontes Crosus

(2)

B. peneteetus (Verco) Trs 3,4. P. 12-16 m

(Lamarck) ‘TC, 1 om

Chama ruderalis Lamarck Trs 2-4. 2-19 m

(2) (4) (8) 611)

Circe weeding’ Cotton Trs }-4. TC. 1-17 m

2) ¢3) (5) (8) (10)

BENTHIC COMMUNITIES OF UPPER SPENCER GULF 85

Chlamys bifrons Lamarck Trs 3,5, 10-16 m

(5) (10)

Cominella ehaenea (Reeve) Trs 2,4. T.C.

Je13 m (2) (5) (10)

Corbula yereonis binkay 10m (10)

Klectroma georgiana Quoy & Gaimatd Tr, 2.

Il m (10)

Ghyevmeris flabellatus Tennyson Woods Tr 5.

(Xm (10)

Katelysia sealarina Lamarck Tr. 4, T.C. 2-

kom (2)

Lima nimbifer Iredale Trs 4.5. P. 15-18 m

(10)

Malleus meridiaunes Cotton Trs 1-5. T.C, P.

8-20 m (5) (6) (8) (9) (10)

Modiobis inconsiany Dunker 0-2 m (2).

Ostrea angasi Sowerby Tr. 2. 10-14 m (10)

Pareanassa pauperata (Lamarck) T.C. 2-8 m

(2) (3)

Pecten meridioualis (Tate) Trs 2,5. 10-20 m

(10)

Phasianotrochus sp. Tr. 2. T.-C. 5-8 m (3)

Pinna bicolor Gmelin Trs 1-5. T.C. 0-18 m

(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (8) (10) (11)

Flacamen flindersi Cotton & Godfrey Tr. 2.

10m (5) (10)

Prerynotus iriformis (Reeve) Trs 4,5, 10-12

m (10)

Semele exieua A, Adams Tr. 2. T.C. 0-8 m

(2) (3) (5)

Trichomya hirsutus (Lamarck) Trs 2,45. P.

1-10 m (2) (4) OS)

Nudibranchiata

Armina no sp. 12-15 m (11)

Ceratosema hbrevicaidata Abraham Tr. 5,

1B m (10)

Diseadoriy a. sp. 15m (9)

According to R. Burn (pers, comm.) Arntina

sp. is a predator of pennatulids and Disco-

doris sp. of Porifera.

CRUSTACEA

Pycnogonida

Psendopallene cf. ambigua Stock 15 m (11)

CHORDATA

Ascidiacea (See Kott (1975) for further notes

on this fauna)

Ascidig thompsoni Kott Trs 1,2. T,C. 8-17 m

(10)

Family Botryllidae nov. gen. nov. spec, TC.

& m

Didemnum sp. 12-14 m (11)

Distaplia australiensis Brewin Tr, 3. 16 m

(10)

Haloeynthia hispida (Herdman) T,C, P, 8—

15 m (9)

Herdniania momus (Savigny) T.C. 8 m

Microcosmus nichallsi Kott 4 m (3)

M. squamniver (Michaelsen) T.C. 8 m

M. stolonifera Kott 4 m (3)

Moleula mollis (Herdman) ‘T.C. 10-15 m

(11)

Parahotrylins nemorus Kott 14 m (11)

Podoclavella cylindrica (Quoy & Gaimard)

On reef near Douglas Bank 15 m

Polycarpa pedunculaia (Heller) Trs 1-5. P.

5-20 m (3) (5) (9) (10) (11)

P. papillata (Sluiter) Tr. 4. 6m (3)

P. tinctor (Quoy & Gaimard) T.C. & m

Pyura qustralis (Quoy & Gaimard) On reef

near Douglas Bank, 15 m

P. irregularis (Herdman) Trs 2.4. P., 2-6 m

(2) (3)

P. scoresbiensiy Kott Trs 1,3. T.C. 8-17 m

(&) (10)

P. vittate (Stimpson) Tr. 2. P.. 2 m (2)

Sycozea pedunculaia (Quoy & Gaimard)

Trs 1-4. 14-20 m (11)

APPENDIX 3, Fish recorded in the Sponge—Telesto community on rocky bottom, with notes on

abundance.

Scientific and Common Names ‘ Occurrence

Chelmoanoeps truncatus (Xner) Coral Fish Occasional ;

Chrysophryy unicolae Quoy & Gaimard Snapper Very common in large schools

(juvenile) . ‘

Helotey sextineurus (Quoy & Gaimard) Striped Occusional

Perch

Orectolobus ornatus halei (Whitley) Carpet Rare

Shark: Gull Wobbegong

Parapercis haackei (Steindachner) Grub fish—

wavy

Parequula melbournensis (Castelna) Silver helly

low fin

Peitaceropsis recurvirostris (Richardson) Boar

fish—long-snouted

Pyendorhombus jenynsii (Bleeker) Flounder

amitll-Loothed

Trachichthys australis Shaw & Nodder Roughy

Trygonerhina fascidta guanerius Whitley

Southern Fiddler

Usaceranx evorgianus (Cuvier & Valenciennes)

Trevally

A territorial species living in burrows; common

over entire area.

Common—in small groups.

Rare

Rare; in sandy areas.

Rare

Very common. Large schools.

REDEFINITION OF THE LITORIA LATOPALMATA SPECIES GROUP

(ANURA: HYLIDAE)

BY MARGARET DAVIES, ANGUS A. MARTIN & G.F. WATSON

Summary

The Litoria latopalmata species group is composed of four terrestrial species characterized by

unwebbed fingers, moderately webbed toes, poorly expanded finger and toe discs and variously

developed lateral head stripes. The calls of all species are complex and consist of both short and

long notes that are quite distinctive. Larvae of each species are very similar and and of typical

Litoria lentic form with 2/3 tooth rows. Osteology is conservative and differences between species

are slight. Morphological characters separating species include rugosity of the skin, size of finger

and toe discs, development of head and tibial stripes and differential thigh markings. Species

included in the group are Litoria latopalmata Giinther, L. inermis (Peters), L. tornierit (Noeden) and

L. pallida sp. nov. The species group has been redefined in the light of morphological, call, larval

and osteological data presented.

REDEFINITION OF THE LITORIA LATOPALMATA SPECTES GROUP

(ANURA!: HYLIDAE)

by Marcarer Davies,* ANGuUs A. MarTiny & G, F. Warsont

Summary

Davies, M., Marvin, A. A, & Warsow, GF. (1983) Redefinition of the Lisoriu Jatopalmiara

species group (Anura: Hylidae)_ Trans: &. Soo, §, Aust, 107(2), 87-108, 31 May, 1983,

The Literie latopalmaja species group is composed of four terrestrial species characterized

by unwebbed fingers, moderately webbed toes, poorly expanded finger and toe discs and

variously developed lateral head siripes, The calls of all species are complex and consist

of both short and Jong notes that ure quile distinctive. Larvae of each species are very

similar and of typical Lituria Jentic form with 2; tooth rows, Osteology is conservative and

differences between species are slight, Morphological characters separating species include

rugosity of the skin, size of finger and toe discs, development of head and tibial stripes and

differential thigh markings. Species included in the group are Literia latopalmala Giinther,

f. inermis (Peters), LZ. tormer’ (Nieden) und L. pallida sp. nov. The species group has

beew redefined jn the light of morphological, call, larval and osteological data presented,

KEY WORDS: Anura, Hylidae, Liseria, morphology, osteology, larvae, muting calls,

distribution.

Introduction

The Australapapuan hylid frog genus Litoria

Tyebudi is a heterogeneous assemblage of

species jncluding frogs that can be described

as ‘iree frogs’, with greatly expanded finger

und toc discs and extensive webbing, as well

as. terrestrial species with uneXpanded discs,

long limbs and poor webbing. These latter

Species Were called ‘ground hylids’ by Moore

(1961).

Amongst the ground hylids is a homo-

geneaus collection of species referred to as the

Litoria. latopalmata species group by Tyler

and Davies (1978), The group includes LL.

latopalmeta Giinther, L. inermis (Peters) and

L. farmer? (Nieden), The former two species

have been recorded us having an extremely

wide geovraphic range across north and

east Australia (Moore 19617, Tyler 1968b,

Straughan 1969, Cogger 1979. Barker and

Grigg 1977). Tyler (1977) reported the occur-

rence Of L. latopalmata in South Australia.

Many of these authors have suggested that

specimens referred to £. lafopalimata may re-

present more than ane species,

Here we redefine the described species and

describe one few species referrable to the

L, lulopalruia species group, based on our

studies of comparative morphology, osteology

and breeding biology.

“ Department of Zoolagy, Universiy of Adelaide.

Hox 498 CIPO, Adetylde. S. Atist. 5001-

t Department of Zoology. University of Me!-

hourne, Parkville, Vic. 3052.

Materials and Methods

The specimens reported here are deposited

in institutions abbreviated in the text as fol-

lows: AM, Australian Museum, Sydney;

AMNH, American Museum of Natural His-

iory, New York; BMNH, British Museum

(Natural History), London; KU, University

of Kaisas. Museum of Natural History,

Kansas; NTM, Northern Territory Museum,

Darwin, QM. Queensland Museum, Brisbane;

SAM. South Australian Museum, Adelaide:

WAM, Western Australian Museum, Perth;

QPN, Queensland National Parks and Wildlife

Service; RMNH, Rijksmuseum van Natuurlijke

Historie, Leiden; DAZ, University of Adelaide,

Department of Zoology UAZ specimens are

all cleared and stained skeletal preparations.

Methods of measurement follow Tyler

(19684) and. osteological descriptions follow

Trueb (1979). Tadpoles were fixed in Tyler's

(1962) fixative and staged according to Gosner

(1960). Osteological specimens were cleared

and stained for bone after Davis & Gore

(1947). Measurements were made using dial

calipers or an eyepiece micrometer.

Measurements taken of adults were; snout

to vent length (S-V); tibia length (TL);

head lenuth (HL); head width (HW); eye ta

naris distance (E-N); internarial span (IN);

eye diameter (E): tympanum diameter (T),

The following ratios Were calculated: TL/S—V;

HL/ AW; HL/S-V; E-N/IN. Total length (tl)

and body lengths (bi) of larvae also were re-

88 M. DAVIES, A. A. MARTIN & G. F. WATSON

corded, Where appropriate, means + S.D. are

given.

Calls were recorded using a Sony TC 510-2,

Uher 4000 or Sharp 4D492 tape recorder with

dynamic microphones. Wet-bulb air tempera-

tures were measured with a Schultheis quick-

reading thermometer close to the calling sites

of males. Calls were analysed by means of a

sound spectrograph (Kay Model 6061—B Sona-

Graph) with the overall response curve main-

tained in the FL—1 position. Temporal charac-

teristics of calls were determined from wide-

band (300 Hz bandpass) and spectral charac-

teristics from narrow-band (45 Hz bandpass)

spectrograms. Two or three examples of each

kind of call note given by each male were

analysed and mean values were calculated.

Calls of all of the species examined share

the same general structure, Two distinct kinds

of note are produced; these we have designated

‘long calls’ and ‘short calls’. Each male typi-

cally emits call notes in long sequences, usually

commencing with short calls and then switch-

ing to the production of long calls. Occa-

sionally there are also notes which appear

transitional between short and long calls, but

we have not attempted to analyse such transi-

tional notes, For each species we present

analyses of what we consider to be typical

short and long call notes, Most calls are well-

tuned, with harmonic bands across a fairly

wide frequency range. We have taken the

dominant frequency as the band or bands

containing the most energy. Although our call

samples are clearly inadequate, the data are

included because they assist specific diagnoses.

The following abbreviations are used in

locality data: S.F., State Forest, N.P., National

Park, Ck, Creek, Hstd, Homestead.

Litoria latopalmata Giinther

FIGS 1-7

Litoria latopalmata Giinther 1867, Ann. Mag nat,

Hist. ser. 3, 20:55

Hyla latopalmata: Boulenger 1882, p. 414; Nieden

1923, p. 227

Hyla palmata: Slevin 1955 (lapsus pro Hyla lato-

palmata) p. 383

Litoria latopalmata: Tyler 1971 (partim), p. 353

Definition: A moderately small, ground-dwell-

ing species (females 36-42 mm, males 29-39

mm) characterised by unwebbed fingers with

slightly expanded discs, first finger slightly

longer than second, moderately long hind

Fig. 1. Litoria latopalmata, in life (Watagan, S. F., N.S.W.).

LITORIA LATOPALMATA SPECIES GROUP 89

limbs (TL/S-V_ 0.57-0.75), well developed

lateral headstripe with white preocular bar,

grey or brown dorsum, occasionally mottled.

Redescription: based on SAM RI19717, a

mature male collected north of Maryborough,

Qld by K. R. McDonald on 10.xii.1977.

Head broader than long (HL/HW 1.23).

Head length more than 1/3 snout to vent

length (HL/S—-V 0.40). Snout prominent,

a ee iia!

““ ES air 4

oe te

thee a,

projecting in profile (Fig. 1), sharp when

viewed from above and very gently rounded in

profile. Nostrils more lateral than superior,

their distance from end of snout about 2/3

that from eye. Distance between eye and

naris less than internarial span (E-N/IN

0.97). Canthus rostralis well defined and

straight, its nature accentuated by dark rostral

stripe. Eye moderately conspicuous, its dia-

TRUEB 99

Fig. 2. Lateral view of the heads of a, Litoria pallida (SAM R19539), b, L. inermis (from Qld, SAM

R19558), c, L. inermis (from W. Aust.), d, L. tornieri (SAM R19572) and e, L. latopalmata (SAM

R19682).

o0 M. DAVIES. A. A, MARTIN & G, F. WATSON

Fig. 3. A, Palmar vlew of hand and B, plantar

view of foot of Literia latopalmata (SAM

R19539).

meter about 1/3 longer than eye to naris

distance. Tympanum completely visible, its

diameter 4 eye diameter (Fig, 2).

Vomerine teeth on short oval projections

at 45” to choanae. Tongue broadly oval, Fin-

gers long and slender, slightly fringed (Fig.

3A); in order of length 3 > 4 > 1 > 2. No

webbing between fingers. Terminal discs

slightly expanded just extending laterally be-

yond the fringes of the penultimate phalanx.

Subarticular and palmar tubercles prominent.

Small supernumerary tubercles present,

Hind limbs long (TL/S—V 0.65). Toes in

order of length 4 > 3 > 5 > 2 >1 (Fig.

3B), Webbing reaches midpoint of penultimate

phalanx on toe 5 and to subarticular tubercles

at base of antepenultimate phalanx on toe 4.

Subaruicular tubercles prominent. Well

developed supernumerary tubercles on meta-

tarsals 3 and 4. Small oval inner and tiny,

round, outer metatarsal tubercles,

Dorsum smooth, abdomen, pectoral region

ventral and posterior thighs coarsely granular.

Submandibular area smooth. Well developed

tarsal and supratympanic folds.

Dorsum grey; conspicuous lateral headstripe

from nostril to eye, interrupted by cream

preocular bar, extending behind the eye over

and through the tympanum to the insertion

of the forearm. Thin white line extends from

below eye to end of mandibular region. Dis-

rupted dark patches extend to flanks. Man-

dibular margin variegated with dark and light

Fig. 4, Backs of thighs showing pigment reticu-

lations: a, Litoria pallida, b, L. ternieri, ¢, L.

latopalmata, d, L. inermis.

patches which extend around upper jaw. Faint

dark patch present on wrist.

Backs of thighs pale yellow with discrete

patches of brown pigmentation (Fig. 4). Thin

disrupted dark stripe along anterior cdge of

tibia and tarsus, and on plantar surface of

tarsus and foot,

Gular region lightly suffused with pigment,

Brown bilobed nuptial pad present.

Material examined; BMNH_ 1947,2.24 (syntype)

Port Denison (Bowen) Qld. Queensland: SAM

R19711-29 N of Maryborough; SAM R19694-

19710, Conondale Ra., QPN N28404, N28434,

N28454-63, N28472 Ambathala Nature Reserves

SAM R19671-81, Bellthorpe, S. F., Conondale

Ra., SAM R19683-93, Eungella N.P.; QM J31364,

LITORIA LATOPALMATA SPECIES GROUP 9)

J31370. Conendale Ray QM J31374-5. below

Roombana N.P., Mt Nebo Rd; OM 335796, Fer-

gnson, 6 km WN of Maryborough; UAZ Ads,

Eungelli N.Ps UAZ A67-8, A522, Bellthorpe 5,

F., Conondale Ras LAZ A521, Ambathala Nature

Reserve, N.S,W.: SAM R12200-2, Ulong; SAM

£19670, Penshurst; SAM R1966%. Sherwood S, F.,

SAM R12196-9, Camden; SAM R12194-5, Tumbi

Umbi; QM 131376-8, Back Creek Rd off

Tentertield-Bonshuw Rd; S.A SAM RI5840,

Moomba,

Variation

Head broader than long (HL/Y HW {24>

0.05, 110-140); head length greater than 1/3

snout to vent length (AHL/S-V 0,39+0.02,

0.34-0.42), Distance between eye and naris

usttally less than internarial span (0,940, 10,

0,771.38).

tind limbs consistently long (TL/S-V 0.64

+£0.03, 0.56-0,75). Dorsum grey or mottled.

‘Tibial stripe interrupted in many specimens,

but entire in others.

Osteology

Skull moderately well ossified with well

ossificd neurocranium. Sphenethmoid well

assified extending between nasals dorsally

ulmost to their anterior extremities, ventrally

extending anteriorly to dentigerous processes

oF prevomers. Nasals overlying sphenethmoid

along their medial edges (Fig. SA). Prootic

and execcipital fused. Exoccipital entire.

Crista parotica well developed, moderately

lang and stocky, Otie¢ ramus of squamosal

expanded posteriorly, just articulating with

distal edges of crista parotica,

Frontoparictal fontanelle extensive, ex-

fending, anteriorly to Jevel of palatines, pos-

teriorly to suture of frontoparictal and ex-

occipital region, Orbital edges of fronto-

parietals straight, Nasals moderately large,

maxillary processes acuminate, not articulating

with well developed preorbital processes of

pars facialis of maxillary,

Palatines moderalely long, expanded dis-

tally, tapering more medially to overlie

sphenethmoid, Parasphenoid robust, cultr-

form process subacuminate, long, almost

reaching to level of palatines. Alae broad, at

right angles to cultriform process, expanded

distally, and overlapped by medial arm af

pterygoid (Big. SB),

Pterygoids moderately robust, anterior arm

in short contact with palatal shelf of maxillary.

No obyious pterygoid process of palatal shelf,

Medial arm well developed, rounded terminally.

Quadratojugal slender and fully articulated.

Squamosal moderately robust; zygomatic

ramus acuminate, slightly shorter than otic

ramus. Maxillary and premaxillary dentate.

Pars facialis moderately shallow, well

developed preorbital process. Alary processes

of premaxillaries elongate laterally and curved

posterolaterally, Palatine processes of pre-

maxillaries well developed, not abutting

medially, Prevomers slightly reduced medially,

with short dentigerous process slightly angled

to midline. Bony columella present.

Fia, 5, A, Dorsal and B, ventral views of skull pf Literta latapalmata (UAZ A522).

92 M, DAVIES, A, A. MARTIN & G. EF, WATSON

Taste tb: Physical characteristics of cally of males of the L. latopalimaita spevles group, Mean values are given

With ranges in parentheses, PRR = pulse repetition rate. Details of localities wre: L 30 km W Coonabara-

bran, NSW, 20.x.1964; 2, Mitchell Platewu, W. Aust, 274.1978 3, Coen Airpart, Qld, 717.1979; 4, Luke-

felt NSLP, Old, 2S ah098l; 5, Giliingel Ck Crossing, Aenhem Highway, N.T, (i979; 6, Birndu, N.T.,

S020, 1978,

Short Call Long Call

Species. locality N Duration No. of PRR Dorit Duration No. of PRR Dom. Wer

afid dale msec pulses pulses/ freq. msec pulses pulses’ freq. bulb

sec Hz sec Hz temp

L.leropalmaia i 52.5 7 4 7900 88.3 iz 24.3 200 O45

(45-60) (6-8) (LTT-117) (R590) (11-13) (8-133)

LL. inewptity z | 37 715 175.5 3000) (75 M97 2 s300 24.0

(7-8) (162-189) (165-185) (7-41) (216-229)

3 1 27.3 7 2434 425() 66,7 Wt 249.7 aBS0 24k

(27-28) (214-222) (60-75) (16-20) (246-253)

4 ! 36 8 1943 4300 1s 277 254.3 4100 25.4

(35-37) 1189-200) CLOO-110) (27-29) (248-260)

EL. turnieri 5 2. H85 13 150.8 2000 126.3 23.8 1782 1850 25,0-

(65-70) (10-12) | }3#-157) (Ub3-140)) (22-25) (171-183) 24.0

6 i 59 Ww 152.7 1950 1083 35 176 9s) F172

(2700) (150-58) (195-200) (H7I-1T9)

L. pallida 5 i 30 3.5 150 1500) 347,35 635 1K5 Ww00, 25.0

(Sf) = (133-1879 (330-345) (61-66) (LB2-188) 3300,

4000

3 1 22,5 35 110 1450, 455 81.3 176.3 3400 25.8

(0-25) (3-4) (100-120) 4150 (450-460) (78-84) (17L-180) 4150

Pectoral girdle atcileral and robust, Omos-

ternum und Xiphisternum present. Clavicles

moderately slender, slightly shorter than

scapula and closely applied medially, Coracoids

moderately separated. Suprascapula about 2/3

ossified.

Eight proceelous, nonimbricate, presacral

vertebrac, Medial dorsal ossification incom-

plete on vertebrae [, 11, HT and VV, Relative

widths of transverse processes: Il > ['V > V

if > sacrum = VE > VIL > VIL, Sacral

diapophyses poorly to moderately expanded;

ilia extend anteriorly beyoud expansion, Bicon-

dylar sacrocrococeygeal articulation. Well

developed crest extending 7 length of urostyle.

Phalaugeal formula of hand 3,3,4,4; well

developed bony prepollex, Phalangeal formula

of foot 3,3,4,5,4; well developed bony pre-

hatlux. Terminal phalanges claw shaped.

Variation

Prevomerine teeth are sometimes horizon-

tally oriented, rather than slightly angled to

midline, The maxillary processes of the nasals

occasionally articulate with the perorbital pro-

vesses of the pars facialis of the maxillaries.

Breeding Biology

Call: Physical characteristics of the calls of a

New South Wales male are shown in Table 1

and audiospectrograms of sbort and long calls

in Fig. 6, This species shows the least differen-

tiation between short and long calls; both are

well-tuned notes. Caution must be used in com-

paring these calls with those of the other

species Lecuuse of the much lower recording

temperature.

Early development; Unknown.

Distribution

This species is confined to eastern Aus-

tralia (Fig. 7). The type locality is Port Deni-

son (Bowen) Qld und the species extends

south through Queensland to noribern N.S.W,

AA Specimen was collected at Gidgealpa Water-

hole in South Australia in 1976 (Tyler, 1977),

Literia latopalmata is an open forest species

breeding in temporary, summer rain-filled

Fig. 6. Audiospectroyrams of calls of mules of the Litaria latepalrnata species wroup. In euch cause the

lruces are,

bandpass; long call, 300 Hz bandpass, AL 4,

left to right: short call, 45 Hz hindpuss; long cull, 45 Hz bandpass; short call, 300 Mz

latepalmata, 3 km W of Coonabarabran, N.S,W,,

wel bulb ¥.5°C; B, L. inermis, Mitchell Plateau, W.A., wet bulb 240°C; L. tornieri, Birndu, N.T.,

wet bulb 27.2"°C: D, 4. pallida, Coen Airport, N.Q,, wet bulb 258°C,

LITORIA LATOPALMATA SPECIES GROUP 93

kHz

* Spots and diagonal lines on 300 Hz bandpass of C, L. tornieri are trace damage artifacts.

94 M. DAVIES, A. A. MARTIN & G. F. WATSON

ek. So oe ay

Fa si a , \

: » ¢

Sa \

x, ‘ é yw

- rr “te, }

.. er ‘

Ay i —

} :

| *

; | ry

Ar ' ae

\ : | p> ~ ey

y L a fey f on he

s I . |

vv : of oe yt

\ oe -

\ | F ht "

\ pe, i 4 “y

) | t

R A 3

| 1

( —— Le fa L ~ ”

Ky SAI OK y

~_ )2 Sey f

\I —

SK oy Su

Fig. 7, Distribution of Litoria latopalmata and L,

tornieri in Australia. Open symbols indicate

literature records and closed symbols specimens

examined in this study, Stars inciciule type

localities. L. latopalmata records = circles, L.

tornieri records = triangles.

pools. It is sympatric with L. inermiy at many

localities,

Comparison with other species

Literia latopalmata can be distinguished

trom all terrestrial congeners, other than

members of the Liforia aurea, L. freycineti and

L. latopulmata species groups, by its poorly

expanded finger discs, The members of the

L. aurea group differ in gross habitus and size

and the L. freycineti group have relatively

longer hind limbs, L. latepalmata can be de-

lineated from other members of its species

group in the following ways. From L. inermis,

L. latopalmata can be distinguished by its rela-

tively smooth dorsum and well defined canthal

stripe and from L. tornieri, by its longer hind

limbs (TL/S-V_ 0.64+0.03 compared with

0.57+0,04), slightly greater webbing between

toes four and five and by the slight expan-

sion of its finger and toe discs beyond the

edges of the penultimate phalanges, L. lato-

palmata is distinguished from L. pallida by its

larger size (28-37 mm male, 36-42 mm

female, compared with 27-34 mm male, 31-

37 mm female) and slightly expanded discs.

Litoria latopalmata shows the least differentia-

tion between long and short calls, with long

calls being shorter than in all other species.

Litoria inermis (Peters)

FIGS 2, 4, 6, 8-13

Chirvleptes inermis Peters, 1867, Mbre, dt. Akad,

Wiss. Berlin 1867; 30

Phracteps inermis: Nieden 1923, p, 524

Cyclorana inermis; Parkev 1940, p. 17

HYyla latapalmata: Tyler 1968b (partint) p. 719

ffyla inerniis: Straughan 1969, p. 208

Literia inermis; Tyler 1971, p. 353

Definition: A small, ground-dwelling species

(females 30-37 mm; males 24-33 mm)

characterised by unwebbed fingers; poorly

expanded terminal discs, first finger slightly

longer than sceond, moderately long hind

limbs (TL/S-V 0,590.04, 0.52-0.68); in-

distinet headstripe; mottled tubercular dorsum.

Redescription of syntype RMNH 1888. Rock-

hampton, Qld,

Head longer than broad (HL/HW 1,18),

Head Jength more than 1/3 snout to vent

length (HL/S-V 0.37), Snout prominent, pro-

jecting in profile (Fig. 8), slightly rounded

when viewed from above and in profile. Nos-

trils slightly more lateral than superior, their

distance from end of snout less than twice

that to eye, Distance between eye and naris

less than internarial span (E—N/IN_ 0,83),

Canthus rostralis very slightly defined and

straight. Eye relatively small and incon-

Fig. 8. Litoria inermis in life: a, Fossilbrook Ck,

Qld and b, Borooloola, N,T.

LITORIA LATOPALMATA SPECIES GROUP 95

Fig. 9. A, Palmar view of hand and B, plantar

view of foot of Litoria inermis (SAM R19558).

spicuous, its diameter greater than eye to naris

distance. Tympanum completely visible, its

diameter about 2/3 eye diameter (Fig. 2).

Vomerine teeth on short oval elevations at

45° to midline between choanae. Tongue

broadly oval, Fingers long and slender, un-

webbed with well developed fringes. In order

of length 3 > 1 > 4 > 2 (Fig. 9A). Ter-

minal discs poorly developed and not extend-

ing laterally beyond fringes. Subarticular and

palmar tubercles prominent. Supernumerary

tubercles on metacarpals not well developed.

Hind limbs long (TL/S—V 0.62). Toes in

order of length 4 > 3 > 5 > 2 > 1 (Fig.

9B). Webbing not reaching midpoint of penul-

timate phalanx on toe 5 and to subarticular

tubercle of antepenultimate phalanx on toe 4.

Subarticular tubercles prominent. Small oval

inner and rounded outer metatarsal tubercles.

Dorsum weakly tubercular; abdomen and back

of thighs finely granular; submandibular area

smooth. Moderately developed tarsal fold and

weakly developed supratympanic fold.

Colour in preservative: dorsum brownish

with darker brown mottling. Very poorly

developed indistinct lateral headstripe only

visible behind eye through tympanum to level

of forearm. Well developed cream mottled

patch at angle of jaw; edge of mouth sur-

rounded by white variegations with dark pig-

ment granules. Hind portion of thighs reticu-

lated brown on grey, ventral surface dis-

coloured brown,

Material examined: Two syntypes: RMNH 1888,

Rockhampton, Qld; AMNH 23582, Bowen, Qld

and 184 additional specimens.

Queensland: SAM R19562-70, Fossilbrook Ck;

SAM R19559-61, N of Maryborough; SAM

R19557, Cape Hillsborough; SAM _ R19556,

Mourangee Stn; SAM _ R12118-23, Leggitts

Lagoon nr Cooktown; SAM R11033—4, Cooktown:

QPN N32440-1, Coen; QPN N32341, 32347,

Coen Airport; QPN N32494, Silver Plains

Hstd; SAM R19571 (16) Eight Mile Ck flood-

plain, Conjuboy Stn; QM J27188-9, approx. 50

km S Winton; QM J27631, J32522, J32524,

J32526, Alice R., 7 km S, 23 km W Townsville;

QM J27688, J32536-8, J32540-2, Black R., “1 km

D, 3 km E Yabulu; QM J35768, Ferguson Quarry

‘via’ Maryborough; QM _ J35770, Burgowan

Minesite No. 13, E of Howard; QM J35771,

Ferguson, 6 km N Maryborough; UAZ A237,

Mourangee Stn, Eudungalba; UAZ A527

Mcllwraith Ra.; UAZ A528, N of Maryborough;

QM J41012, Lakefield N.P., at Lakefield Hst;

QM J41011, Coen Airport.

Northern Territory: SAM R23285-300, SAM

R23343-52, SAM R23312-25, R23352, R23284,

Jabiru Airstrip; SAM R23303-10, Ja Ja Borrow

Pit at Pan Continental Camp entrance; SAM

R23327-9, McArthur R. on Bridge to McArthur

River Stn; SAM R23302, Cannon Hill; SAM

R23301, Surprise Ck, 40 km N McArthur R. Stn;

SAM R9835, Berry Springs; SAM R9105 145 km

N Mainoru; SAM R23283, 50 m N Retention

Pond No. 2 Djalkmarra Ck; SAM R23338-42,

Katherine R., 7 km W Katherine Gorge N.P.,

SAM R23326, 14 km N Katherine; SAM R23330-

3, 13 km N Katherine; SAM R23311, 6.4 km N

Katherine; SAM R23334-7, 4 km N Katherine;

UAZ A616, 100 m E Jim Jim turnoff, Arnhem

Highway; UAZ A617, Jabiru Airstrip; UAZ A618,

Jabiru East turnoff, Arnhem Highway; NTM

R10093—7, 4 km N Katherine.

Western Australia: UAZ A241-—2, A529, Mitchell

Plateau; UAZ A530, Parry Ck/Kununurra Rd;

WAM R81873-83, Granite Ck, 16 km NE Lake

Argyle Village; WAM R81884-88, Kununurra;

WAM R81890-99, Mitchell Plateau; WAM

R81889, Mitchell Plateau campsite; WAM

R81901-2, Ivanhoe Crossing; WAM R81900,

Hidden Valley, Kununurra; KU192460-4, Mitchell

Plateau; KU192465, Four Mile Creek, 32 km

ESE Kununurra.

Variation

Small frog (males 24-33 mm, females 30-

37 mm S—V). Head longer than broad (HL/

HW 1.26+0.062, 1.11-1.40). Head length

1/3-4 snout to vent length (HL/S—V 0.39+

0.017, 0.34-0.43). Hind limbs long (TL/S—V

0.590.044, 0.51-0.68). E-N/IN highly

variable (0.91+0.098, 0.73-1.21).

96 M. DAVIES, A. A. MARTIN & G. FB. WA'TSON

The syntype is discoloured and soft. Freshly

preserved specimens difter From it in the pre

senes of supernumerary tubercles on all meta-

carpals, and in having coarsely to poorly

tuberculur grey dorsum mottled with black

and brown patches. The lateral headstripe rs

always poorly developed, sometimes evident

anteriorly to the eye and nostrils and through

and above the tympanum posteriorly, The

ventral surfuee is pale cream, Back of thighs

darkly pigmented with small patches of pale

ground colour (Fig, 4).

Osteology

Skull relatively fragile with moderately

ossificd neurocranium. Sphencthmoid mode-

rately ossified extending between nasals for

about 2 of their length dorsally; ventrally

sphenethmoid not extending between pre-

vomers, Nasals not overlying sphenethmoid,

Proolie and exoccipital fused. Exoccipital not

fused dorsomedially or ventromedially, Crista

parotica moderately well developed, short and

stocky, not articulathna laterally with poorly

expanded otic ramus of squamosal (Fig. 1OA).

Frontoparietal fontanelle extensive, rectangular

extending anteriorly for about 2% orbit, Pos-

lerior margin of fontanelle not delineated be-

cause of lack of medial ossification of exocci-

pital, Orbital edges of frontoparietal straight,

Nasals moderately large. Maxillary process

of nasals moderately sharp, not articulating

with well developed preorbital process of pars

faciahs of maxillary, Palatines moderately

long, broad faterally, slender and acuminate

medially, overlying sphenethmoid. Parasphe-

noid robust; broad cultriform process reaching

almost to Jevel of palatines; alae long, mode-

rately broad, just overlapped by medial arm

of pterygoid.

Pterygoid moderately well developed with

anterior arm mating short contact with palatal

shell of maxillary (Pig. 10B), No pterygoid

process. Medial arm of pterygoid moderately

long, not in bony contact with prootic region.

Qusdratojugal slender and fully articulated,

Squamosal moderately robust. Olic ramus

slightly longer than zygomatie ramus. Maxillary

and premaxillary dentate. Preorbital process

of moderately shallow pars facialis of maxillary

well developed. Alary processes of premaxil-

laries clongate laterally and curved posteriorly.

Palatine processes of premaxillarics well

developed, not abutling medially, Prevomers

reduced slightly an(eromedially; not articulat-

ing or overlapping sphenethmoid, Dentigerous

processes short, horizontally oriented, Bony

columella present.

Pectoral girdle arciferal, moderately robust.

Omosternum and xiphisternum present. Clavi-

cles slender and abutting medially. Coracoids

moderately separated. Scapula bicapitate,

slightly shorter than clavicle. Suprascapuls

ahout 2/3 assilied,

Bight pracoeclous nonimbricate presacral

vertebrae. Medial dorsal ossification incom.

Fig. 10, AL Dorsal and B, ventral view of skull at Lyferig mermis (UAZ A528)

LITORIA LATOPALMATA SPECIES

plete on presacrals 1, Wand IT. Relative widths

of transverse processes: IIL > Il > IV =

sacrum = V > VI > VII > VII Sacral

diipophyses moderately expanded, ilia ex-

tending anteriorly beyond expansion. Bicon-

dylar sacrococcygeal articulation. Well de-

veloped crest extending } length of urostyle.

Phalungeal formula of hand 3,3,4,4; well

developed bony prepollex. Phalangeal formula

of foot 3,3,4,5,4; well developed bony pre-

hallux. Terminal phalanges claw shaped,

Variation

Ossitication of the sphenethmoid varies be-

tween specimens—the foregoing description

applies to minimal ossification of the roofing

Mins

SY ARC P-

1. a, Dorsal und b, lateral views of embryo

ut Stage 20, and c, dorsal and d, Interal views

of larva at stage 36 of Literia inermis, ‘Total

length of embryo 4.5 mm, body length 1.9 mm,

total length of larva 30.5 mm, body length 12.5

mm,

Fig. |

GROUP )

pl mn im

chil AS

, wi Aa ie

My) My Cr Ss \

“ Min wine

Fig. 12.

Litoria inermis from Blencoe Falls,

har = | mm,

Mouthparts of a larva, stage 37, of

Qld. Scale

bones. In other specimens, the sphnethmoid

is well ossificd extending between and to the

anterior extremities of the nasals dorsally and

anteriorly to the vomerine teeth ventrally,

Variation also occurs in the degree of crenu-

lation of the medial edges of the fronto-

parictals and in the length of the cultriform

process of the parasphenoid.

Breeding Biology

Call: Litoria inermis usually calls from open

gravelly or sandy areas, offen On steep slop-

ing banks within 1-2 m of water, At Jabiru,

males were heard calling between the middle

of November and the middle of March (Tyler

ef al, 1983),

The short call is a staccato note with little

tuning: the long call ts at least twice the dura-

tion of the short call (Table 1, Fig. 6),

Early development: Described by Tyler et al.

(1983). The morphology of embryos at stage

20 and larvae at stage 36 is shown in Fig, 11.

The ¢yes are more dorsally situated than in

larvae of other members of the complex. The

mouthparts of a larvae at siige 37 are shown

in Fig. 12.

Distribution

Litoria inermis is found across the north

of Australia from Mitchell Plateau in W.A.

to Cape York in Qld and south to Rockhamp-

ton (Fig. 13). Syntypes were collected at

Rackhampton and Bowen in Queensland.

The species is an open forest dweller and

tends to avoid thick grass, preferring open

areas of sparse, low vegetation, In Queensland

L. inermis is sympatric with ZL. latopalmata

82 eS,

«of

wi tog /e

ewe.

ys |

f :

et \

7 |

[a ssrmempmancchinins

aN y

el ' i

s i !

. ee a

\ i i a i

i H

\ sen 4 y

— Vv F a fo

eee rt oa ee Z

| ~

fo} ®

Resa

Fig. 13. Distribution of Litoria inermis in Aus-

tralia. Open symbols are literature records and

closed symbols are specimens examined during

this study. Stars indicate type localities.

and at Jabiru in the Northern Territory with

both L. tornieri and L. pallida.

Comparison with other species

Litoria inermis can be distinguished from all

terrestrial congeners, except for members of

the L. aurea, L. freycineti and L. latopalmata

species groups, by the poorly expanded ter-

minal discs on its fingers and toes. It is dis-

tinguished from members of the L. aurea

species group by gross size and habitus and

from the L. freycineti group by its relatively

shorter hind limbs. From L. tornieri, L. lato-

palmata and L. pallida, L. inermis is distin-

guished by its tubercular dorsum, finely reticu-

lated thigh markings and poorly developed

canthal streak, The pulse repetition rates of

both long and short calls of L. inermis are

higher than those of the other species in this

group.

Litoria tornieri (Neiden)

FIGS 2, 4, 6, 7, 14-17

pea affinjs Gray, 1842, Zool. Misc, London

3:56

Hyla affinis: Boulenger 1882 p. 413

Hyla tornieri: Nieden 1923 (nomen substitutum

pro Pelodytes affinis) p, 228

Hyla latopalmata_ latopalmata:

(partim) p. 94

Litoria latopalmata: Tyler 1971 (partim) p. 353

Litoria tornieri: Cogger & Linder 1974 p. 71

Litoria affinis:; Duellman 1977 p. 114

Definition: A small ground dwelling species

(males 28-36 mm, females 27-34 mm)

characterised by basal webbing between the

fingers, poorly developed terminal discs, first

Copland 1957

M. DAVIES, A. A. MARTIN & G. F, WATSON

finger longer than second, moderately short

hind limbs (TL/S—V 0.57+0.04, 0.49-0.68),

well developed lateral headstripe, continuous

stripe along outside edge of tibia, smooth

brown/grey dorsum, reddish in breeding

season,

Description: Based on SAM R18686 a male

specimen collected in a pool 800 m W of

Gulungul Creek Crossing, Arnhem Highway,

N.T. by G. A. Crook on 1.ii.1979.

Head longer than broad (HL/HW 1.30);

head length more than 1/3 snout to vent length

(HL/S-V 0.4). Snout prominent, projecting

in profile; slightly rounded when viewed from

above and in profile. Nostrils more lateral

than superior, their distance from end of snout

2/3 that from eye. Distance between eye and

naris less than internarial span (E-N/IN

0.84). Canthus rostralis slightly defined and

curved, its nature accentuated by dark rostral

stripe. Eye relatively small and inconspicuous,

diameter about 14 times eye to naris distance.

Tympanum completely visible, diameter 2/3

eye diameter (Fig. 15).

Vomerine teeth on short elevations between

choanae. Tongue broadly oval.

Fingers long and slender lacking lateral

fringes; in order of length 3 > 4 > 1 > 2

(Fig. 14). Basal webbing between fingers 2 and

3 and 3 and 4. Terminal discs poorly developed,

not extending laterally beyond the edges of

penultimate phalanx. Subarticular and palmar

Fig. 14. A. Palmar view of hand and B, plantar

view of foot of Litoria tornieri (SAM R19572).

LITORIA LATOPALMATA SPECIES GROUP 99

Fig. 15, Litoria fornieri, in life (Jabiru, N.T.).

tubercles prominent. Hind limbs moderately

long (TL/S—V 0.59). Toes in order of length

4>3>5 >2 > 1 (Fig. 14). Webbing

reaching subarticular tubercle on penultimate

phalanx of toe 4. Subarticular tubercles pro-

minent. Small oval inner and tiny rounded

outer metatarsal tubercles.

Dorsum smooth, abdomen coarsely granular.

Submandibular area smooth and pigmented,

Moderately well developed tarsal fold on

proximal portion of tarsus. Poorly developed

supratympanic fold.

Colour in preservative, brownish grey with

conspicuous very dark headstripe; anteriorly

to nostril, headstripe extending diffusely to

tip of snout; between eye and nostril head-

stripe sharply delineated and interrupted by

pale preocular bar (Fig. 2) behind eye, stripe

extending above and through tympanum to

insertion of forearm; two dark patches pro-

minent in axillary region, Broad white stripe

from preocular bar to posterior extremity of

mandible.

Backs of thighs heavily pigmented by con-

tinuous dark bands separated by continuous

stripe and occasional patches of pale ground

colour (Fig. 4).

Continuous dark brown stripe along outside

edge of tibia and ventral surface of tarsus.

Prominent dark brown patch on wrist and

edge of forearm,

Well developed glandular nuptial pad on

thumb,

Material examined; Holotype, BMNH _ 1947.2.22.

73, Port Essington, N.T., and 50 other. specimens.

Northern Teritory: SAM R18653-73, Jabiru Air-

strip, SAM R18687, R16779, Katherine R., 7 km

W Katherine Gorge: SAM R9072, 5 km N

Mainoru: SAM R14775E,C, 16 km S Hooker:

SAM R18679, Cannon Hill; SAM R18682,

Birndu; SAM R18685, E Gulungul Ck; SAM

R18683, Arnhem Highway nr Mudginberry

Fence; SAM R18684, Coonjimba Billabong; SAM

R18680-1, Retention Pond No. 2, Djalkmarra

Ck; SAM R19572, Buffalo Billabong, 9 km NW

Jabiru; AM R32071-3, R32114—6, Port Essington;

SAM R18676-7, 16 km S Woolner; SAM R18678,

Berry Ck; UAZ A232, Batchelor, Finnis River;

UAZ A523-4, A610-2, Jabiru Airstrip; Western

Australia: WAM R57194, Pago Mission Ruins,

Mission Cove, Napier-Broome Bay; WAM

R50670-1, Drysdale R. N.P., 14°44’S, 126°56’E,

Variation

Small frog (males 27-34 mm, females 28-

36 mm). Head longer than broad (HL/HW

1.23+0.12, 1.09-1.35). Head length 1/3-4

snout to vent length (HL/S—-V 0,37+0.02,

0.31-0.42), Hind limbs short (TL/S—V 0.57

+0.04, 0.49-0.68). Anterior head region rela-

tively broad with variable E-N/IN (0.75

0.10, 0.61-1.03).

As indicated by these measurements, L.

tornieri exhibits limited variation in body form

and has the shortest hind limbs of all members

of the L. latopalmata species group.

In colouration, L. tornieri is the least

variable member of the species group. Mottling

of the dorsal and dorsolateral surfaces has

not been observed, but in preservative the

colour tends to fade and varies from brownish

to grey. This variation is probably a reflection

of the breeding condition of the specimens as

sexually mature calling males tend to be a

distinct reddish-brown colour,

The uninterrupted, narrow, dark stripe on

the anterior edge of the tibia is consistently

present and is an excellent character distin-

guishing this species from sympatric members

of the L. latopalmata species group. However,

the dark pigment spots in the axilla are some-

times absent.

Osteology

Skull relatively fragile with moderately

ossified neurocranium. Sphenethmoid mode-

rately ossified extending between but not

anteriorly to nasals dorsally and just anteriorly

to dentigerous processes of prevomers ven-

trally. Nasals lying alongside not overlapping

sphenethmoid (Fig. 16A). Prootic and ex-

occipital fused. Exoccipital not ossified dorso-

or ventromedially. Crista parotica well de-

veloped, short and stocky. Otic ramus of

squamosal not articulating with distal extre-

mities. Frontoparietal fontanelle extensive,

100

M, DAVIES, A. A. MARTIN & G. F. WATSON

Fig. 16, A, Dorsal, and B, ventral views of skull of Litoria tornieri (UIAZ A681).

reaching anteriorly to level of palatines; pos-

teriorly undelineated because of lack of medial

ossification of ecxoccipital. Orbital edges of

frontoparietals straight.

Maxillary process of nasals moderately

sharp, not articulatmg with well developed

preorbital process of pars facialis of maxillary.

Palatines expanded distally, slender medially

overlying sphenethmoid, Parasphenoid slender;

cultriform process long, slender reaching he-

tween palatines; alae long, at right angles to

cultriform process and overlapped by medial

arm of pterygoid.

Plerygoid moderately robust, in moderately

long contact with moderately developed

pterygoid process of palatal shelf of maxillary,

Medial arm long, not in hony contact with

prootic region.

Quadratojugal slender, fully articulated.

Sqtamosal slender, otic ramus expanded and

slightly longer than acuminate zygomatic

ramus. Maxillary and premaxillary dentate.

Preorbital process of moderately shallow pars

facialis of maxillary well developed, Alary

processes of premaxillaries clongate laterally.

curved posterolaterally. Palatal processes of

premaaillarics well developed, not abutting

medially, Prevamers slightly reduced medially.

Dentigerous processes short, angled slightly to

midline. Bony columella present.

Pectoral girdle arciferal and moderately

robust, Omosternum and xiphisternum present,

Clavicles slender, equal in length to scapula

and abutting medially. Coracoids moderately

separated, Suprascapular about 2/3 ossified,

Eight prococlous nonimbricate presacral

vertebrae, Media! dorsal ossification incom-

plete on presacrals J, Dl, U1 and IV, Relative

widths of transverse processes 1] > 1V > If

> sacrum > V > VI > VII > VIL. Sacral

diapophyses moderately expanded, ilia extend-

ing anteriorly beyond expansion, Bicondylar

sacrococcyeal articulation, Well developed

crest extending # length of uvostyle.

Phalangeal formula of hand 3,3,4,4; well

developed bony prepollex. Phalangeal formula

of foot 3,3,4,5,4; well developed bony pre-

hallux. Terminal phajanges knobbed.

Variation

Well expanded otic ramus of squamosal lies

alonyside crista parotica in some specimens.

Pterygoid process of palatal shelf of maxillary

absent to variously developed.

Breeding Biology

Call: Males call from cover either under leaves

or at the base of grass tussocks within 3 m

of water. At Jabiru, N.T.. males were heard

calling im e@atly November and early March

(Tyler ef al. 1983). Calls are well tuned, with

most of the energy below 2000 Hz (Table 1,

Fig. 6).

Early development: Tyler et al. (1983)

describe eggs and Jarvae of this species.

Embryos at stage 20 and larvae at stuge 33

are illustrated in Fig. 17.

LITORIA LATOPALMATA SPECIES GROUP 101

Fig, 17. a, Dorsal and b, lateral views of embryo

at stage 20, ¢, dorsal and d, lateral views of

larva at stage 33, Of /jterta torniert, Total

leneth of embryo 4.5 mm, body length 2.3 mm,

total Jength of larva 283 mm, bedy length

11.0 mm.

Distribution

Litorte tarnieri has the most restricted dis-

tribution of the ground hylid species (Fig, 7),

The type locality is Port Essington on the

Coburg Peninsula in the Northern ‘Territory

and the species is confined fo the north of the

Northern Territory and Western Australia. The

southernmost record is 16 km S§ of Hooker,

N.T. The species is an open forest dwelle

and is sympuatri¢ with L, inermis and L.. palliedea

at Jabiru, NvT.

Comparison with other species

Litorla tornier? can be distinguished from all

terrestrial congeners, other than the L. aurea,

L. freyeineti and L. latopalinata species groups,

by the wunexpanded terminal discs on the

fingers and toes. From members of the L.

aurea group it can be distinguished by their

gross size and habitus and from the L. /rey-

cineti group by relatively shorter hind limbs.

From L. pallida, L, inermis and most specimens

of £, latopalmata, L. tornieri can be distin-

guished by the presence of an uninterrupted

brown stripe on the outer side of the tibia,

From those specimens of ZL. latopalimata pos-

sessing such u stripe, L. fornieri can be dis-

tinguished by its less expanded dises (not

extending laterally beyond the fringes of the

penultimate phalanx), its smaller size (males

27-34 mm, females 28-36 mm, compared with

males 29-39 mm, fernales 36-42 mm) and its

relatively chorter hind limbs (TL/S-V 0.57

0.04 in L. fornier?, 0,.6440,03 in L. latepal-

mata), L. tornierd has longer short calls than

any other member of the group.

Litoria pallida sp. nov.

FIGS 2, 4, 6, 18-22

Litaria latopalmmatas Vyler 1968 (parity) p, 719

Flolatype: SAM 19555, a male collected at

Gulungul Creck Crossing, Arnhem Highway,

N,T.. 12°39 S, 132°52 B, by G. A, Crook on

1O.Xi1.1978,

Definition: A soll highly variable ground

dwelling species (female 31-37 mm, male 27-

34 mm) characterised by unwebbed fingers,

poorly expanded fingers dises, first finger von-

siderably longer than second; long hind linybs

(TL/S-V 0.62+0.04); well developed stripe

on side of head; smooth or mottled dorsum.

sometimes faintly tubercular.

Description of holotype: Head longer than

hroad (HL/HW 1.18); head length more than

one third snout to vent length (HL. SV 0.38).

Snout prominent, projecting in profile (Tig.

2) and slightly rounded when viewed from

above and in profile. Nostrils more lateral

than superior, distance from end of snout

+ that from eye. Distance between cye

und nucis equal to internarial span (E—-N/1IN

1.00). Canthus rostralis moderately well de-

fined und straight, its nature accentuated by

dark rostral stripe, Bye relatively small and

inconspicuous, diameter slightly greater than

eye to narls distance. Tympanum completely

Visible, diatnerer abour + eye diameter (Fig,

18),

102 M. DAVIES, A. A. MARTIN & G. F, WATSON

Fig. 18. Litoria pallida, in life (Jabiru, N.T.).

Vomerine teeth on short oval elevations

between anterior edges of choanae. Tongue

broadly oval.

Fingers moderately long and slender lack-

ing lateral fringes (Fig. 19A); in order of

length 3 > 1 > 4 > 2. Fingers unwebbed.

Terminal discs poorly developed, not ex-

tending beyond lateral extremities of penul-

timate phalanx. Subarticular and palmar

tubercles prominent. Many supernumerary

tubercles present.

Hind limbs long (TL/S—V 0.62). Toes in

order of length 4 > 3 > 5 >2 > 1 (Fig.

19B). Webbing reaches midpoint of penul-

timate phalanx on toe 5 and to level of sub-

articular tubercle at base of antepenultimate

phalanx of toe 4. Subarticular tubercles pro-

minent. Small oval inner and smaller rounded

outer metatarsal tubercles.

Dorsum smooth; abdomen, pectoral region

and undersurface of thighs coarsely granular;

submandibular area smooth. Well developed

proximal tarsal fold; moderately developed

supratympanic fold.

Colour in preservative: dorsum grey and

hind limbs brown with conspicuous very dark

stripe extending from nostril to eye, interrupted

Fig. 19. A, Palmar and B, plantar view of hand

and foot of Litoria pallida (SAM R19539).

by a white preocular bar. Posteriorly stripe

extends through and above tympanum, ter-

minating above insertion of forearm. Dis-

rupted dark spots extend halfway along flank.

White stripe extends from lower margin of

eye to insertion of forearm.

LITORIA LATOPALMATA SPECIES GROLIP

Thigh markings dark, separated from ground

colour by pale yellow patch contiguous wilh

inegular dorsal mare; dark markings com-

romly clistupled and extensively marked by

lighter markings (ef. Fig, 4). Disrupted brown

patches extend along edge of tibia, plantar

surface of larsus and foot uniformly brown,

frown. glandular bilobed nuptial pad;

throat moderately suffused with pigment,

Pinensions ef holorype; S-V 31,7 mm; TI.

197 mons TH 12.0 mm, HW 10.2 mm, E-N

3.4 mm IN 3.1 pom; EB 3,7 mm; T 2.9 mm

Enmelogy: The specific name is derived fram

the Latin pallidus meaning pale, ashen, an

jelerence to the predominant colour of the

dersum.

Variation

There are 1?) paratypes;

Northern Territory: S4M RI9S39, 4 km W

Raralil Ck, aaL 1978, G. A, Crook. M, Davies,

M. J, Tyler (illostruted): SAM RL9S49, 40 kin N

EWioll, T6.0i.1980, M. Davies, A. A. Martin,

M 4 Tyler) SAM RI945)—4, Subir Airstrip.

TANAITO. G A Crook: SAM R19485 7, Jubiru

Avestript, 4.8L 1978 G. A. Crook, SAM RI9458,

Ris491-504, 40 m N Retention Pond No. 2,

Diwtkmarna Ck, Raneer Uranium Lease, 5.x),

1974, GOA, Crook: SAM R19459-62, small pools,

1) or upstream Coonjimba Billuhone. s.91h.1979.

OG. A. Crookes SAM B10463. 81947490, Cannon

Wil Lyi t97a, Mo Kings SAM R19464, soak

from ore body, Jitipu, 29%0,0978, M, Davies,

MF ‘Ivers SAM &1V465, 4 kit W RBaralil Ch,

JO.KT1978, M, Davies, M, J Tylers SAM R19Od6b-

% MeArthur River bridge on row! to MeArchur

KR. Stn. 24. F978, GAL Crook; SAM RIGA4TO-1,

Gulinaal Swamp, (50 m SE Gulungal CR Crass

ie, Arntiem ehway, M1974, Go A, Crook;

SAM R199727-3, SHO m W Culunesul Ch Cross

ing, Armihem Pfighwav Diet GG. AL Crooks

SAM B10406. Connjimha HKillabong, 23,%,1978,

G A. Cronk: SAM. RISSU7, Jabiru Airstrip,

29.47.1978, M, Davies, M, J. Tyler: SAM &1951}-

4. Collyer Lagoon. Carpentaria Highway. 26.ix.

(977, G A, Crook, W. Zeidler, SAM R1I9514-33,

Lake Woods, or Eliot, $.8.1977, G. A. Crook,

W. Yeidlers SAM BR19840-48. Bullman Hest.

S.vili MHA RO Bulwaeds; SAM R9062—3, 133 km

N Mainora, 23.vii.i967, Ro Edwards, Fleming:

SAM K14775, RIS50K-—4, 16 km 8 Hooker, S-vi.

1975. A. Rahinson; AMNII 108333-4. Coonjimba

Rillahong, 23.%.1978. i, A, Cronk: WAM R73573.

fa Ja boprowpil at ecoraince to Pan. Continental

Campsite, 28.51.1977, M- Bavies, M. J. Tyler:

KO 1884534, Canton Hill, 28.81.1977. M, Davies,

M, I, Tylery AM R97183-4, Ju Ta borrowpil or Pan

Continental Camp, 29.%1,1977, M, Davies, M,

Tyler; NUM RIOO8 8 Cannon Mill, 28 -st.1977,

M.. Duviex, M. J. Tyler; QM J$39256-4. Ja Ja

horrowpi at entrance ta Pan Continental Camp-

sile, 2B.xi,1977, M, Duvics M, J, Tyler, SAM

R19550-1, Jabiru Aintip, 101981, M, Cappo,

M. TDavies, M, 1, Tyler (cleared and stained);

SAM R19552, 100 m E Jim Jim turnoff. Arnhem

Highway, 97.1981. M. Cappo, M. Davies. MJ.

Tyler, G. FP, Watson (cleared and stained}; SAM

R1I9SS3-4, poudside pool, 800 m W, Gulungul

Crossing, Arnhem Highway, 11.1979, G. A,

Crook (cleured and stained).

Quvensland: SAM RdIA774, RI9SIO, 19 km N

Laura, 23.4,1974. A. R. Robinson; OM J41019-6,

T4018, Coen Airport, 6.i17,1979, R, G, Atherton,

Kk. R, McDonald; OM 141019, Lakefield N. P.. nr

Tukefield Hstd, 25,j-1981, B,J) Lyon, KR,

MeDonuld (recorded); QM 41017, Coen Air-

port, 64.1979, Ro G. Atherton, K, R. McDonald

(recorded),

Western Australia; SAM R19534, Camballin.

ISj7, 1980, M. Davies, A.A, Martin, My J. Tyler;

SAM R19536-8 175 kin E Broome, 17.47.1980,

M. Davies, A. A. Martins M, J. Tyler; WAM

R73574. 30-35 km S Dunean Highway/N High-

Way Jen, 547.1978, A, A. Martin, M. J. Tylees

WAM R73577. Hidden Valley, Kununurra,

1ii-1978, M2 Davies, A, A, Martin, My 7. Tyler;

WAM R7357S. Camballin, 18171980, M, Davies,

A. A. Martin, Mo J. ‘Tyleres WAM R735746, 175

km E Broome. 177-1980, M. Duvies, A. A.

Martin, M. J. Tyler,

Adult males measure 27-34 mm aud fe-

males 31-37 mm. Hind limb length is variable,

but usually moderately long 0,62+0,04, 0,53-

0.72); head length js always longer than

head width (1.290,06, 117-142) and the

head length is always greater than one third

of the snout to vent length (HL/S-V 0,39

0.02, 0,36-0.42). Eye to naris distance to inter:

narlal span ratio highly variable (B-N/TN

1.89 50.10, 0.68-1.12) but usually less than 1.

Variation occurs in dorsal colouration and

texture, Tn some specimens dorsum grey/

brown with brown mottlings (Pig, 18), an

others, dorsum and dorsal surface of thighs

grey, Disrupted dark markings along edge of

tibi not always present. nor are markings on

anterior surfaces of thighs, Motiling on back

cun be conspicuaus or patchy. In some speci-

mens dorsum weakly tubercular with tubercles

uhgned longitudinally along back, While stripe

below cye appears eream in some specimens

und well-developed variegutions can be found

around lips,

Osteatogy

Skull moderately well ossified; spheneth-

moid well ossifled extending to anterior ex-

104

M, DAVIES, A. A. MARTIN & GF. WATSON

Fig. 20. A, Dorsal and B, ventral view of skull of Liforia pallida (SAM R19553),

tremities of nasalg dorsally and just anteriorly

lo dentigerous processes of prevomers Ven-

trally. Nasals overlying sphenethmoid along

their medial edges. Prootic and exoccipital

fused bul medial fusion absent in exoccipital,

Crista parotica moderately well developed,

short and stocky, barely overlapped laterally

by moderately expanded otic ramus of the

squamosal. Frontoparietal fontanelle exten-

sive, Teaching anterior extremity of orbit (Fig.

20A), Posterior margin wndelmeated due to

lack of medial fusion of exoccipital. Orbital

edges of frontoparictals straight,

Nasals moderately large, widely separated

medially. Maxillary processes acuminate and

articulate with well developed preorhital pro-

cess of pars facialis of niaXillary. Palatines

expanded distally, very slender and acuminate

medially overlying sphencthmoid.

Purasphenoid robust, Cultriform process

moderately broad, irregularly truncate and

reaching almost to level of palatines (Fig.

20B), Alae moderately long, at right angles to

cultriform process and barely overlapped by

medial arm of pterygoid. Pterygoid moderately

robust, Anterior arm in moderately long con-

tact with poorly developed pterygoid process

ot palatal shelf of maxillary. Medial arm

slightly expanded distally.

Quadratojugal slender and fully articulated,

Squamosal moderately robust. Zygomatic

ramus slender and slightly shorter than

moderately expanded otic ramus of squamosal.

Maxillary and premaxillary dentate. Palatine

processes of premaxillaries well developed, noi

abutling medially. Alary processes of pre-

maxillaries elongate laterally, curved postero-

laterally. Prevomers reduced slightly medially,

Dentigerous processes short, horizontally

oriented. Bony columella present,

Pectoral girdle arciferal and moderately

robust, Omesternum and xiphisternum present.

Clavicles slender and abutting medially, Cora-

coids moderately separated. Scupula slightly

shorter than clavicles. Supraseapula about

2/3 ossified

Eight procoe|ous, nonimbricate, presacral

vertebrac, Medial. dorsal ossification incom-

plete on vertebrae I, UW, II and 1V, Relative

widths of transverse processes! 11] > TV >

I] > sacrum > V > VI > VII > VIII. Sacral

diapophyses moderately expanded, ilia extend

anteriorly beyond the expansion, Sacracoc-

cygeal articulation bicondylar, Weil-deyeloped

crest extending for about 4 length of urostyle.

Phalangeal formula of hand 3,3.4.4. Well-

developed bony prepollex. Phalangeal formula

of foot 3,3,4,5,4, Well-developed bony pre-

hallux, Terminal phalatiges claw shaped,

Variation

Well-developed preorbital process of pars

facialis of maxillary not always articulating

wilh maxillary process of nasal, Distal expan-

sion of medial arm of pterygoid not occurring

to same extent in all specimens, Degree of ossi-

fication of sphenethmoid varies and hence its

relationship with nasal and prevomers.

LITORTA LATOPALMATA

Breeding Biology

Call: Males call in open areas within | m of

water, At Jabiru, N.T., males were first. heard

calling in early November, and \ast heard in

eurly Mareh (Tyler er al. 1983).

This species shows the greatest differentiation

beiween long and short calls, with the former

having at least 10 times the duration of the

latter (Table 1, Fig. 6). There are complex

frequency shifts and multiple harmonic bands

in both calls, and a considerably more ex-

haustive analysis is required to fully elucidate

the cull structure.

Early development: Tyler et al. (1983) have

described development in

this species (as

hie. 21, 4, Lateral ané bh, dorsal view of embryo

al stage 20, and c, lateral and a, dorsal view

of Jarva at stage 34, of Literia pallida, Total

lenvth ef embryo 4.4 mm, body length 2.3 mm,

fotal length of larva 30 mm, hody length 10.5

min,

SPECIES GROUP 105

iat ral

ae ~e f \

. f { .

Pe re a Tc

x oe! . ane bh } I {

ae f ‘ Pts ts

an i bee

| ae Ph)

i = a

Distribution of Literia pallida in Auy-

Fig. 22.

tralia. Star indicates type localily,

“Litoria sp. ur latepalmata’), An embryo at

stage 20 and a larva at stage 34 are illustrated

in Fig. 21.

Distribution

Litoria pallida is confined to the north of

Austraha from Broome in W,A, to Cape York

in Qld, above latitude 20" (Fig. 22), Like the

other ground hylid species it is an open forest

dweller and is sympatric with L. inermis on

Cape York and L. tornieri and L, inermiy at

Jabiru, N.T.

Comparison with other species

Litoria pallida can be distinguished from all

terrestrial congeners except the L. aurea. L

freycineti and L. latopalmata species groups by

the unexpanded discs on the fingers and toes.

It can be distinguished from members of the

L. aurea group by its size and habitus and

from the L. freyeineri group by its relatively

shorter hind limbs.

From L, terniéri, L. pallida can be distin-

guished by the absence of a continuous stripe

along the outside edge of the tibia, and by its

relatively longer legs (TL/S-V 0,620.04 in

L.. pallida, 0.57+0.04 in L. tornieri), Th can be

distinguished from L. latopalmata, the species

with which it has been confused, by its smaller

size (mules 27-34 mm, females 31-37 mm

compared with 38-37 mm males and 36-42

mm females in £. latepalmata) and poorly ex-

panded dises which do not project beyond the

lateral edges of the penultimate phalanges of

lingers and toes. Liroria pallida can be dis-

tinguished from L. inermis by its well-

developed lateral headstripe, strongly marked

thighs and relatively smooth dorsum. As men-

tioned above, the call structure of L. pallida is

particularly distinctive.

Other material examined: QM J27228, 12 mile

Creek on Normuanton—-Karumba Rd, Qld: QM

J28916, Norman Creek Rd to Normans QM

131369, along Glen Esk Rd near Esk, Qld; SAM

RO710, Strathgordan Hstd Qld, SAM R9720,

Edward River Hstd Old: SAM R9660. Edward

106

River, Qld; SAM R4935 Mornington tsland;

SAM R8174, R19534, Mulliman Hstd, N.T.;

WAM R62889-62898, Upper reacties McKinley

River, N,T.; SAM Ri9632—47, McArthur River

Bridge on road to McArihur River Sin; SAM

Rt9622-31, Lake Woods, ny Blliott, Mf... SAM

RIV6I4-21, Collyer Lagoon (just off Carpentutia

Highway), NT. SAM R19655-68, Coomiuatlie

Creek, 25 km N Adelaide River, NT, SAM

RY417, Mitchell River Mission, Old; SAM R9G6SI},

R9699, Hann River, N. Old; SAM ROBRS, RORTh.

R841, Stralhgordon Hstd, Old; SAM R9714.

Fdward River Stn, Old; SAM R9718. Lavra

River, Qld; SAM R9868, R9852, Hann River/

Kennedy Rd, Old,

Discussion

Many cryptic species have been deseribed

umongst those (rogs exhibiting wide geagraphic

ranges across the north of Australia and down

the eastern seaboard. Since Moore’s (1961)

definitive work on the frogs of New South

Wales, Litorla bicolor (Qray), Cyclorana aus-

tralis (Gray) and C. brevipes (Peters) have

been shown to consist of such cryptic species

pairs resulting in the resurrection or deserip-

tion of L. fallax (Peters), C. nevaehollandiae

Steindachner and C. langipes Tyler & Martin.

Ground hylids of the Litoria [atepalmata

species group have for a long time been a

taxonomic enigma, particularly because most

Truscum material is poorly preserved and con-

sists Of subadult specimens. This latter situa-

tion is the result of collections being made in

the dry season, when many northern arcas are

accessible, Far this reason, we have not in-

cluded some of the material examined by us

in the type serics but have indicated its

existence in the text.

The members of the L. Jatapalmara species

group are extremely homogeneous in their

morphology, osteology. calls and develop-

mental history, Intraspecific variation is

common. in characters that are usually mor-

phologically reliable such as rugosity of the

dorsum, delineation of canthal stripes, tibial

markings, back pattern, toe webbing (Moore

1961, Fry 1913, Copland 1955, Tyler 1968h)

and development of supernumeriry sub-

ariicular tubercles, Osteologically the four

Species are very conservative. Interspecific uit.

ferences are slight and often ontogenetically

controlled, therefore being of ite Valne.

The gall structure is unusually complex

among Australian frogs, Neither a typical call

sequence nor a typical call duration can he

M, DAVIES, A, A. MARTIN & G. Fb WATSON

dofinud, since calls are produced in very line

series of heterogeneous notes. Our cuteyoriza-

tion of call notes as long and short represents

only 4 first step in deseribing the acoustic

repertoire, Wi is probable that different he-

havioural coles ave served by che different cull

elements; i) may be, for instance, that short

calls have a terntonal nnd long calls a court.

ship funetion. However the severe limitations

of our data preclude further specutation,

From what is Known of other tylid sig

nalling systems, If is probable thut pulse repe-

tition rate is a key component indicating

Species entity (Litthejolin. 1971). ‘The sym-

patric easter fix, 2. ltrapalmata and 2.

inermis show clear differences in pulse repe-

litien rate of both long and short ealls. though

the temperature variation in our samples makes

definitive comparisons impossible. £, imeenis

also shows consistent differences fn pulse re.

petition rate Trom L, fornieri and ZL. pallida,

but the pulse repetition rate of the latter twa

is more similar. However they are markedly

different in both number of pulses per note

and note duration.

Larvae are very sitnilar and typical of Aus-

tralian Liroria (Martin & Watson i977),

Hfrerla inermit larvae can be distinguished

from those of L. pallida and L. faraien? by the

dorsal rather than lateral position of the eyes,

Literia pallida and f. ternier larvae are in-

distinguishable until metamorphosis,

Failure to recognize the taxonomic com.

plexity of this group has led to mary anomalies

in the literature. Andersson (1913) for in-

stanec, reported Chiroleptes (nepiiis and Hyla

affinis from the Kimberley Division of Westero

Austraia The former specimen is readily

referrable to LL. inerenis os the description and

Wlusiration provided ure Wearly recounisable

The latler specimen cannot be identified trom

the written description and may represent

either £, lornieri or Gb. pallida. both of whiel

occur in the aren.

Tyler's (1968h) study of frogs of the 4,

fesueure complex in northWestern Australia

inclided representatives oF all three northern

species, as O. larepalmiaa. tHowever, Tyler

delineated = specimens from scuthern and

ventral Queensland and horthern N.S.W. from

all other specimens by the degree uf dilsdun

of dises, the more extensive webliiwe anv

developmence of supernumerary whereles ot

the palinar and plantar surface of the hanes

and feet exhibited by these specimens, These

ENMORIA LATOPALMATA SPECIES GROUP 107

afe the only non-fugilive characters thit we

have fuund ecliable in our owt analysis.

Straughan (1969) referred to Anderssan’s

speciinens in his redefinition of L. inermiy (as

Hela tnermis) and commented on the relatively

shorter tibia length compared with Queensland

Specunens. He considered this difference to he

trivial in view of the wide geographic range

of the species. Our studies have shown ibis

Wriferenoe toe he exceedingly constant within

the worthwestern Abstraliun specimens

Of the 120 specimens measured from the

Norhern Territory and northern Western

Australia only 13 had a TL/S-V > 0.59 The

mean was OS7=0.07 with a range of 151-

(0.67, The Queensland specimens showed con-

sisterntly longer hind limbs (TT/S-V 0.634

OO (0,56-0.68 range) ) (see Fig 8). Adams

eral! could nol separate the populations ¢lec-

irophoretically and we cannot separate the

cally of the two popnlations: Henee all speci-

mens are referred to L. tnerenis

Copuecr & Lindner (1974) remarked thal

the types of Literia latopalmata and L-. inermis

were indistinguishable. These specimens are in

poor condition and distinguishing characteris-

ics have become blurred, although the synlype

of 4. dnermiy housed at the American Museum

of Natural History and collected al Bowen is

Clearly iMentifiable as that species.

Since both species ure sympatric at their

ype locylittes and since modern usage of the

names i, latapalmate and Lo inermis in re-

ferenee to species found in NSW, southern

Queensland and South Australia causes no

confusion (Moore 1961, Cogger 1979, Barker

& Grigg 1978, Tyler 1977, 1978), it would

inviie nomenclaturial Chaos to question the

validity of the curren! application of the names

Lh. latepalmara and £. inermis,

The ©. latepolmara species group definitton

of ‘Tyler & Davies (1978) should he madified

in the Follow wavs:

Dorsum brown, grey or reddish, usually

bearing extensive irrewular markings of Tittle

any recognisable pattern,

Nasals well developed and separated widely

medially. Frontoparivtal fantunelle extensive:

ctista purntica well developed. short and

stocky: Hee ramus of squamosal slightly ex-

panded, Usually Ning alongside crista parotica:

‘Adams, M., Haverstovk. POOR Tyler, Mot, &

King, M. Genetic differentiation yong Anns

tration fremgs of the family Hylidae, Linpitl is

pulatines expanded laterally, slender distally;

prevomers reduced slightly medially, denti-

gerous processes Short; preorbital processes of

moderately shallow pars facials of maxillary

well developed; palatine processes of premaxil-

laries well developed, not abutting medially;

alary processes of premaxillaries exlended

laterally and inclined posterolaterally; quadra-

tojugal fully articulated; otic ramus of squa-

mosal generally slightly longer than zygomatic

ramus; purasphenoid large, alae lung and at

right angles to cultriform process: maxillary

und premaxillary dentate; bony columella

presen,

Pectoral girdle arcifetal and moderately

robust; slender clavicles abutting medially:

phalangeal formula of hand 3.3,4,4; well de-

veloped bony prepollex; phalungeal formula

of foot 3,3,4,5,4 well developed bony pre-

hallux:; eight procoelous nonimbricate pre-

sacral vertebrae; dorsal ossification on anterior

three vertebrae always incomplete, transverse

processes of presacral vertebrac long! sacral

diapophyses moderately expanded; ilia extend-

mg anteriorly to expansion: well developed

urostyle crest extending 2/3 ta 2 length of

urostyle, sacrococcygeal articulation bicon-

dylar,

Composition: Four species are included m

the group: Literia latepalmata Giinther, L.

inermis (Peters), £. tornierti (Nieden) and

L. pallida sp. nov,

Key to spectes fp Litoria latopalmata species

group

1. Dorsum tubercular, lateral headstripe

poorly defined. thigh markings finely

reticulated ' I. inermis

Dorsunt usually smooth, lateral headstripe

well defined, panicularly before the eye.

high markings strongly reticulated 2

2. Finger dives not extending laterally

heyond edge of penultimate phalanx 3

Finger discs extending, beyond edge of

penultimate Phalanx L. lhateapeateniita

3. Stripe along edge of tarsus interrupted

i CL. pallida

Stripe along edge of tarstis uninternipted

bh tarnieri

Acknowledgments

We wish to acknowledge the following

Museums ane their respective curators for the

loan of materials American Museum of

Nataral History for a syatype of L. inersmiis,

Australian Museum for topotypic L. rornieri,

ius M_RAVIES, A. A. MARTIN &G TF WATSON

British Musetim (Natural History) for type

of L. ltepalmata snd L, terniterr, Queensland

Museum for Queensland ground hylid repre-

Sentabives. Rykamuseum van Nalurrlijke His-

toric, Leiden for a syntype of LL. inermis, and

the South Australian Musetim for access to

iis extensive collection of ground — bylid

uialerial, We are grateful to Graeme Crook,

Max King, Gree Miles, Mictiavel Mahony and

Keith McDonald for the provision of fresh

material and to Graeme Crook and Keith

MeDonald for calls and field noles of some

Northern Territory and Queensland species

respectively, Chris Miller is thanked for hours

al painstaking tadpole rearing, Linda Trueb

is responsible for the superb illustrations. in

Figures 2.3,9,14 and 19, Tadpole illustrations

are tbe work of Peier Preuss. Audiospectro-

eruphre analyses were carried out by Peter

Harrison, We ure gratetul ta Michael Tyler for

hours of consultation and encouragement,

Fielil work Was supported by an Australian

Research Grant Committee award to M. J.

Tyler, Amax Exploration, Utah Foundation,

fan Potter Poujdation and the Office of the

Supervising Scientist East Alligator Raver

Region, We are grateful to Michael Tyler,

John Bishop, Bill Duellman and Simon Fisher

for assistance in the field. Ansett Airlines of

Australia Iransparted live material safely to

Adelaide and We particularly thank Mr G.

Mewett and Mr B. Pennington. Jean Russell-

Price typed drafts of the manuscript and the

final copy.

References

(1913) Resulis of Dr.

Mjébere’s Swedish scientific expeditions lo

Australia 1410-1903. TV. Batrachians, Kang.

Svenska Vetenskap, Hund), 32(4). 3-26.

Barker, J. & Grice, G, (1977) “A field guide

to Australian frogs.” (Rigby: Adelaide,

RoununGcerR, G, A, (1882) Catalogue of the

Batrachia Sallentia 4. Beaudata in the Collee-

tion of the British Museum. 2nd Edition.

London, 1-503.

Cooonk, H. G. (1979) “Reptiles and amphibians

of Australia.” 2nd Edition, (Reed) Sydney.)

& Linpyer, DA. (197+) Frogs and Reptiles.

in Ho J, Poth & J, H. Calaby (Eds) “Puna

Survey of the Port Essington District, Cobure

Peninsila, Northern Territory of Australia,

CSIRO, Pivision of Wikidlife Research Tech.

Pap. ( 28.)

Coriano, 8, J, (1957) Presidential address. Aus-

tralian tree frogs of the venus Ayla. Pree, Blan

Sou, NSW. 82, 9-108-

Davis, D, D. & Gore, V- R, (1947) Clearing and

staining specimens of small invertebrates.

Fieldiana: Teehniques 4, 1-16.

DueLEMAN, W, EF (1977) Liste der reventen

Amphibicn und Replilien Hytidae, Centro-

lenidae, Pseudidae, Des Tierreicl 95, 1-225

Fry, D2 B. (19135) On a Varantiy and «a frog from

Bumett River. Queensland and a revision of

the vartadons in Linvodynastey dursalis Gray.

Rev. Aust Mus. UW, 17-34.

Gosnern, K. b. (1460! A simplified table for

staging anuran embryos and larvae with notes

on identification, fferperclogica 16, 183-190,

Lrovnooun, M.d, (1971) A reappraisal ef mating

call differentiation in Ayla cadaverinag (= Ayla

talifermiac) and Hyla regilla, Evelittan, 28,

YR-1 072,

Martin, A, A. & Warson. G. FL (1971) Life

history as an ald to generic delimitation in the

farntly Hylidae, Capeia (1971), 78-79,

ANDERSSON. T_ ty.

Moore, J, A, (1961) Frogs of eastern New South

wale. Bull. Am, Mus. Nat, Hist, V2103), 149-

Nrepen, FR. (1923) Anura J in C. Apstein, (ed)

Das Tlerreich. 46, 1-584.

PARKER, H. W. (1940) The Australasian frogs. of

ibe family Leptoductylidac. Neovitares Zvol. 42,

106.

Stevin, f, R, (1955) Notes on Australian amphi-

dians. Proc, Culifarnia Acad. Sei 28. 355-392.

STRAUGHAN, 1. Ro (1969) Afyle inermis (Peters) a

species hitherto etroneously referred ta the

leptodactylid gents Cyclorana (Anura, Hylidae/

ae enetytida) Zool, Meded. 43(17). 107-

12,

Trues, L. (1979) Leptodactylid frogs of the

genus Velmaqrobius in Ecuador, with the deserip-

ue of a new species, Ceapeia 1979 (4), 714-

Trier, M, J, (1962) Om the preservation of’

Anurin tadpoles. Aust. J. Sem 25, 222.

—, (19681) Papuan hylid frogs of the genus

flylu, Zool. Perk. Rijksmus, Nat. Hiyt. Leiden

96, 1-203,

—-, (1968b) A taxonomic study of hylid frogs

of the fyla lesueuri complex oceurrine in

North-Wesiern Australia. Ree, 3. Aust Mus:

1S(4), 711-727.

(1971) The phylogenetic significance of

vocal sae structure in hylid frogs. Univ. Kansas

Mux Nat. Hist, Publ, 1904), 319-360,

wwe=, (1977) “Frogs of South Australia.” 2nd

Edition (Souch Ansiralian Museum: Adelside).

(1978) “Amphibians of South Australia,”

(Govt Printers Adeluide.)

», Crook, G, A, & Davins, M. (1983) Repro-

ductive biology of the Frogs of the Magela

Creek System, Northern Territory. Ree. 8.

dns, Aus, TRUK), 415-440,

——- & Davies, M, (1978) Species groups in the

Mistralopapusn hylid frog genus Liforia

Tschndi, Aust, f, Zovl, Suppl. Ser, (63), 1-47.

MORPHOLOGY, SYSTEMATICS AND ECOLOGY OF NEW

MONOGONONT ROTIFERA (ROTATORIA) FROM THE ALLIGATOR

RIVERS REGION, NORTHERN TERRITORY

BY W. KOSTE & R. J. SHIEL

Summary

Seventy-six rotifer taxa were recorded from eight billabongs of the Magela creek, a tributary of the

East Alligator River, at the end of a six month dry season. Three new taxa are described and

figured: Brachionus falcatus Zacharias f. reductus n.f., B. urceolaris sericus n.f. and Macrochaetus

danneeli n.sp., with two new records for the continent. The species assemblage is compared to that

of the same biotopes in the wet season, in which 174 taxa, including four new species and 25 new

records, were identified. Differences in rotifer species assemblages are related to biotope

heterogeneity; shallow floodplain billabongs are extreme biotopes with low species diversity,

whereas deeper perennial channel billabongs are refuges for a diverse assemblage of periphytic taxa

and resting eggs of monogonont and encysted eggs of bdelloid rotifers of ephemeral waters of the

area.

MORPHOLOGY, SYSTEMATICS AND ECOLOGY OF NEW

MONOGONONT ROTIFERA (ROTATORIA) FROM THE ALLIGATOR

RIVERS REGION, NORTHERN TERRITORY

by W. Kaste* & R. J. SHIRLT

Summary

Koster, Wo & Site. R. J. (1983) Marphology, systematics and ecology of new monoponont

Rotifera (Rotatoria) from the Alligutor Rivers region, Northern ‘Tereitory, Trans. Ro See,

S. Aust VWOT(2), 109-121, 31 May, 1983

Seventy-six rotifer taxa were recorded from eight hillabongs of the Magela creek, i

tributary of the Easr Alligator River, at the end of a six month dry season. Three new taxu

are described and figured; Brachionus faleains Zacharias f, reducers nf., 8. uvocealaris servis

ot. and Macrochuclus danneel? asp. wilh bwo new records for the continent. The species

assemblage is compsred to that of the same biotopes in the wet season, in which 174 taxa,

including four new species and 25 new records, were identified. Differences in rotifer species

assemblages are related to hiotope heterogeneity; shallow floodplain billabongs are extreme

biotopes with low species diversity, whereas deeper perennial channel billabongs pre reluges

for a diverse assemblage of periphytic taxa and resting eggs of monogonont and encysted eggs

ol bdelloid rotifers af ephemerul waters of the area.

Key Worps: New Rotiferd, billabongs, extreme hiolapes, northern Australia,

Introduction

The Magela Creek, approximately 260 km

east of Darwin (Fig, 1), is an ephemeral tri-

butary of the Bast Alligator River. It rises on

the northern escarpment of the Arnhem Land

sandstone plateau and fiows northward to join

the East Alligator some 90 km from its mouth

mio Van Diemen Gull, On ils course it passes

two uranium ore deposits, Ranger and

Jabilulea.

Intensive limnological monitoring prior to

commencement of mining operations included

studies of billabongs along the Magela Creek

downstream af these deposits (e.g, Tait 19791.

Walker & ‘Tyler 19798, Bishop 1980, Hart &

McGregor 1980, Ling & Tyler 19805, Bishop

etal [981 Tait 1981, Marchant 1982.

Rurgman & Tait in press)-

In the six month period when most of the

Magela Creck floodplain and the channel of

the Creck (with the exception of deeper billa-

W. Germany

+ Department of Botany University of Adelaide.

Present address: Department of Biology, Uni-

versity of Waterloa, Witerloo, Ontario, Canada,

N20 401,

'Vail, RK, DB. (1979) Distribution and chemical

composition of aguatie macraphytes of the

Muecla Creck floodplain, Northern Territary.

Report presented 16 Aust. Sov. Limnol, Annunl

Conference, Tallangatta,

“Walker, T, D. & Tyler, Po A, (979) of Tintnes

logical survey of the Magela system, Alligator

Rivers region, Northern Tertitary. Interim repart

to the Office of the Supervising Scientist. Sydney-

bongs) dries out, aquatic life is crowded inta a

Tew perennial waters. These concentrations of

organisms are accompanied by stresses on the

system praduced by accumulation of organic

matter resulting fram decomposition. Both

vary the water quality so much that individual

billaborgs can be considered extreme hiotopes.

The patential exists for further stresses to be

placed on these habitats by the development of

iianium tiring and milling, and associated

industrial and domestic wastes entering the

Magela Creek system.

A preliminary report on the nmicrocrustacean

zooplankton of one of these naturally stressed

systems was given hy Tait (1981). The only

information on the Rotifera (Aschelminthes;

Rotatoria) of the Northern Territory are brief

notes (Shiel & RKoste 1979, Koste & Shiel

1980b) and a more comprehensive paper by

Koste (1981). The last publication involved a

sample series collected fram billabongs of the

Maugela Creek by R. D. Tait at the end of the

wet season (April 1980), This paper gives the

results of further studies of samples from the

sume biotopes collected by Tuit at the end of

the dry season (Nov.-Dec. 1980), when an

TLing, HU. & Tyler, PLA, (1980) Freshwarer

algae af the Alligatar Rivers region. Northern

Territory of Austrnlia. Report ta the Office of

the Supervising Scientist. Sydney.

‘Hishop, K, A. Alan, S, A, Pollard, D. A, &

Cook, M. G, (1981). Evalesical snilies an fresh-

water fish of the Alligater Rivers region.

Northern Territary. Report to the Office of the

Supervising Scientist. Sydney.

110

impoverished rotifer species assemblage was

expected, More detailed seasonal data, includ-

ing systematics and ecology of the micro-

crustacean plankton, will be published else-

where (Tait. Shiel & Koste in press.).

Nankeen

Mine Valley

Fipon @ YASILUKA

= PLAINS & DEPOSITS

Winmurns

Fig. 1. The Magela Creek Noodplain showing billa-

hongs sampled.

Species recorded from each habitat are

listed, and seasonal differences in the species

assemblages related to environmental fluctua-

tions. Three previously unknown rotifera taxa

are described.

W, ROSTE & R,

!, SHIELD,

Methods and materials

Thirteen plankion samples (25 ml filtrate)

were collected from eight billabongs (Table 1)

by net tow on IO0.11 and 8.12.1980 by R, D.

Fail (then of Pancontinental Mining Ltd) and

preserved in formalin, Collections were taken

from the same billabong series as deseribed

by Koste (1981) and included all three types

distinguished by Hart & McGregor (1980),

iv. backNow (Winmurra), channel (Buffalo

and Island) and floodplain (Ja Ja, dabiluka,

Nankcen, Leichhardt and Mine Valley), Com-

parative physio-chemical features are tabulated

by Koste (1981).

Several samples contained larste numbers of

microcrustacea, These were removed with a

300 “m bronze mesh. Microcrustacean assem-

hlages of the billabongs are considered by Tait

eral, (in press), Rotifera recorded are listed

systematically (following Koste 1978). Several

Uloricate rotifers, mostly bdelloids, were

strongly contracted in response to the preser-

valive, and could not be identified (shown as

“indet." in Table 2, For the treatment of

samples and individuals, also preparation ol

trophi, see Koste 1978;42-43 and Koste 1981:

1OL.

Rotifera new to Awsiralia

Previously unknown rotifers were recorded

from Winmurra billabong (Brachionus fal-

catus Zacharias nt.) Mine Valley billabong

(B. urceolaris sericus (Rousselet) wt.) and

Ruffalo billabong = (Macrochaetis danneeli

nsp.), described below, Three species, (Beau-

champlella eundactylota (Gosse), Eosphora cf.

theides Wulfert and Octotrocha speciosa

Thorpe were recorded for the first time from

TaBLe 1: omparalive physico-chemical features wt the time of plankton sanipling in & hillahones

of the Magela Creek, at the beginning of the wet season,

Sample No, Cc onductivity Walter temp. Dissolved Oy

and date Billabong pH eS c= °C pam ch Apnl i980

10.1 1.80

Ja 80111001 Nankeen 4,47 281 29.1 3.75 pH 5.47

2a 80111002 Jabiluka 4.77 sl 31.3 4.15 pH 3.26

3a 80111003 Mine Valley 3.45 931 29.6 3.90) pH 3.37

4a 8011 1004 Jada 4.24 172 35.0 3.29 pH 5.44

Sa 80111005 Island 4.93 | 3 §.55

7a 80111007 Buffalo 538 24 uy 4.15

8a 80111008 Leichhardt 5,74 218 30.4 4.30

08.12.80

tb 80120801 Nankeen 4.45 283 291 443

2h 80120802 Jabiluka 4.14 199 JL3 5.4 28 eS

3b 80120803 Mine Valley 3.25 1233 29,3 7.30 27 KS

db 80120804 JaJa 4.08 715 32.6 5.67 2S 4S

6b 80120806 Winmurra 5.76 103 29.9 3.72

7b 80120807 Buffalo 5.30) 30 31.4 4.48

MONOGONONT ROTIFERA FROM NORTHERN TERRITORY lil

Taste 2. Rotifera frem Magela Creek samples, with comments on presence and biogeography.

cosm. — cosmopolitan; ptr. = pantropical; end. = endemic; 1 = first record from the con-

tinent; per. = perennial; n, not recorded in April sample series. Sample numbers are as

in Table 1, (Abundance: not recorded; r = individual specimens or rare; f = fre-

quent, more than 5% of recorded rotifers; m = more than 20% of rotifers recorded.)

Sample number

Taxon la Ib 2a 2b 3a 3b 4a 4b Sa 6b 7a 7b 8a 8b

Superorder Bdelloida

|. Dissotrocha aculeata (Ehrb. 1832) cosm..n. = — — — — — — — — f— — — — —

2. D. macrostyla (Ehrb. 1838) cosm.; n. — tr— rr—

3. Bdelloida (indet.) (Genera: Philo-

dina, Rotaria, Macrotrachela,

Hahratrocha)

Superorder Monogononta

Order Ploimidae

Family Epiphanidae

4. Epiphanes clavilata (Ehrb, 1832) pt. per8 Ss — £ — + TH

Family Brachionidae

§. Platyias quadricornis (Ehrb 1832) GOs per —9—5 4 SS ee r——

6. Brachionus angularis Gosse 1851

7. B. bidentata testudinarius (Jakubski

1912)

8. B. hudapestinensis (Daday 1885) cos. Ss f— m r £——

9. B. dichatomus dichotomus Shephard = end.; per, ££ — — — — — — — — ff — — — — —.

191]

10, B, dichetomus reductus Koste & end;.per, = — — — — —. —- —- —— — — — r——)

Shiel 1980

11. B. faleatus falcatus Zacharias 1898 cosm.; per. —-— r— r— rr f— £f m— —

12. R. falcatus Zach. f. reductus nf. adn ——_——_—— — — — ——

13. B, lyraius Shephard 1911 aq: Soe SS aS a SS —

14. B. quadridentatus melheni (Barrois pir; per, = — — — — — — — — r— — r——

& Daday 1894)

1S. B, nreeolaris sericus (Rousselet end.?; n. ee

1907) nf.

16. Beauchampiella eudactylota (Gosse = cosm. 1;n. = — — — — — — — — — ~— — ——

1886)

17. Anuraeapsis coelata coelata ptr.; per — — — — — — rmm— f f——

(Beauchamp 1932)

18. 4 navicula Rousselet 1910 ptr: per: — — SS — f— rm rr——

19. Keratella trapica tropica (Apstein ptr.; per. ror f— r—~m fm— r r——

1907)

Fam. Collurellidae

20. Colurella chtusa (Gasse 1886) cosm.:.per, —= = SS —

21. Lepadella latusinus latusinus ptr.; per. - — — — — — — — — T= 2 =

(Hilgendorf 1889)

22. L. patella patella (O.F.M. 1786) cdsm.; per, —— bp —

23. L. patella (O.F.M.) nf. SNe h me ee i C= —

24. L. rhomboides (5.1.) (Gosse 1886) COspL per, —<— —— —

Fam, Lecanidae

25. Lecane bulla bulla (Gosse 1851) cosm.; per, — — — f—_$ = ot —

26. L. closterecerca closterocerca cosm.; per, — — — — —— — — + — — — : a

(Schmarda 1895)

27. sear curvicornis (Murray ptr. per, — — — — — — — — — ror f——

1913

28. L. hamata hamuta (Stokes 1896) cosm.; per, — — — — — — — ror——>— r=+—

29. L.. deryssa (Harring 1914) ptr.per. Ss C— —

30. L. Indwigi (s.1.) (Eckstein 1893) cosm.; per, — — — — — — — — r—— r——

31. L. papuana (Murray 1913) pirper, = —— — — — — — — — r—— r— —

32. L, pyriformis (Daday 1905) cosm.; per, — — — — — — — — — — — r— —

33. L. quadridentata (Bhrb. 1832) cosmé pers ._—— — — — —— — -— =

34. L. scutata (Harring & Myers 1926) cosm.; per, — — — — — — — — r—— 1—«r— —

35. L. signifera signifera (Jennings eS ee

1896)

36. UL. signifera ploenensis (Voigt 1902) cosm.; per. — — — — — — — — — — Fer —

37. L. tenuiseta Harring 1914 coke per — —$ — f= 2

38. L.. inopinata (Harring & Myers ptr.:per, 4 — — — — — — — — — — rr—

1926)

Fam. Euchlanidae

W. KOSTE & R. J. SHIEL

Sample number

Taxon la |b 2a 2b 3a 3b 4a 4b Sa 6b 7a 7b Ba &b

39, Diplenchlanis propatula macre- ptr.; per. £3— — — — — — — — r— — r——

dactyla (Hauer 1965)

Fam. Trichotridae

40. Macrochaetus collinsi (Gosse 1867) = ptr; per. == — — — — — — — — a

41. M. danneeli n. sp. end.?, I;n. — — — — — — — — — — — r—_—

Fam, Notommatidae

42. Scaridium longicaudum (O.F.M. cosm.; per. r— r—

1786)

43. Monommata grandis Tessin 1890 cosm.; per. ——— r——

44. M, indet. (diff. sp.?) r

45. Taphrocampa selenura (Gosse 1887) cosm.; per, os rT r—— r——

46. Norommata copeus Ebrb. 1834 cosm.; per. ne

47. N.indet. (diff.sp.?)000 0 ee ee a

48. Resticula melandocus (Gosse 1887) cosm.;n. © — — — — — — — — — — PY

49. Easphora cf. thoides Wulfert 1935 cosm. 1; n. — — a

50. Cephalodella gibba gibba (Ehrb, cosm.; per. ~— — — — — — — — tr or—— — —

1832)

51. C. tinca Wulfert 1937 cosm.; 0. — a es o——

52. C. indet. (diff. sp.?)

Fam. Trichocercidae

53. Trichocerca chattoni De Beauchamp __ptr.; per. — f — Tr

1907

54. T. longiseta (Schrank 1802) cosm.; per, —— r——

55. T. pusilla (Lauterborn 1898) cosm.; per, — r — rrr——

56, T. similis stmilis (Wierzejski 1893) cosm.; per. — mem m— —

57. T. stylata (Gosse 1851) cosm.; per, — crr—

Fam, Gastropodidae

58. susceaniriahs saltans saltans Bartsch cosm,;n. © — — — — — — — — — — tf ——

187

Fam. Synchaetidae

59. Synchaeta cf. longipes Gosse 1887 cosm.; per, — — — — — — — — — — f r——

60. Polyarthra cf. vulgaris Carlin 1943 cosm.;per,. ———— f f r r f€f f €f f r—

Fam. Asplanchnidae

41. Asplanchna sieholdi (Leydig 1854) cosm.} per. r a ee a a

Fam. Dicranophoridae

62. Dicranophorus claviger australiensis end.; per. §=£©§ — — — — — — — — — ae a

Koste & Shiel 1980

63. D. grandis (Ehrb. 1832) cosm.; n. — Tr —

Order Gnesiotrocha

Fam. Testudinellidue

64, Testudinella patina patina cosm.; per. — — — os T a

(Hermann 1783)

65. T. tridentata tridentata Smirnov 1931 ptr. per, £©§. — — — — — — — — r— Tor =

Fam. Floscularidae

66. Lacinularia flosculosa (O.F.M. cosm.; per, §9 — — — — — — — — — Pe Pepe

1758)

67. Octotrocha speciosa Thorpe 1893 plr., 1; n. — — —_—— — — ro —

Fam. Conachilidae

68. aid dossuarius (Hudson ptr.; per. — f £ fii «i

1895

69. C. unicornis Rousselet 1892 cosm.;n. — gf £ —

Fam. Hexarthridac

70. Hexarthra intermedia Wiszniewski cosm.; per,§ = — — — — — = — — — — rf +

1929

71. H. mira (Hudson 1871) cosm.; per. — = r

Fam. Filiniidae

72, Filinia australiensis Koste 1980 end.; per. f —

73. F. longiseta linmetica (Zacharias cosm.; n. r

1893)

74. F. opoliensis (Zacharias 1898) pir; per, — — — — — — rm f f-———— fr

75. F. passa (O.F.M. 1786) cosm.;n — = £

76. F. pejleri Hutchinson 1964 ptr.: per. r—

Totalspecies 1 1 3 O 4 2 9 11 33 16 29 56 3 5

MONOGONONT ROTIFERA FROM NORTHERN TERRITORY 113

Australia. These six, with four new species and

25 new records listed by Koste (1981), bring

the Rotifera recorded from the continent to

477 (Koste 1978, 1979, 1980, 1981; Shiel &

Koste 1979; Koste & Shiel 1980a,b; Green

1981).

Systematic descriptions

Brachionus falcatus Zacharias 1898 f.

reductus n.f.

FIGS 2a,b; 3e

Material: More than 100 contracted females,

some with subitaneous eggs; single population

of uniform lorica form, sample 80120406.

Type locality: Winmurra billabong on the

eastern margin of the Magela Creek Valley,

N.T. (Fig. 1), 132°53’20", 12°31’41’S.

Holotype: Loricate female coll. R. D. Tait

8.12.1980, in type collection Zoological

Museum, Christian Albrechts University,

Kiel D-2300 FRG. Reg. no. 84.

Paratype: In W. Koste collection, Brachionus.

Date and locality as holotype. See photomicro-

graph Fig. 2a-b.

Description: Very robust lorica of barrel-

shaped outline. Anterior-, marginal- and

medial spines as in type form. Submedial

spines shortened in proportion to Jorica.

Caudal spines shortened but strongly de-

veloped. Surface of dorsal lorica (Fig. 2a)

with pearl-like structures. Pair of ridges begin

at basis of submedian spines, run to height of

lateral antennae. Ventral lorica (Fig. 2b) flat

and strong, detailed with a granulated pattern.

Male not recorded.

Fig. 2. a. Brachionus falcatus Zach. f. reductus showing large granules on the dorsal lorica. b. B.

falcatus f. reductus, lorica, ventral view.

14 W. KOSTE & R. J, SHIEL

Measurements; Lorica length 100-280 ym,

including anterior and posterior spines; lorica

width 80-164 ,.m; subitaneous egg 80 * 60

pam to 100 * 72. pm.

Discussion: This pantropical and pansub-

tropical species (Ahlstrom 1940) shows little

variability in its habit (Weber 1906, Chenga-

lath et al. 1973, Pejler 1977, Koste 1978). It

ft!

is occasionally encountered in summer warmed

eutrophic biotopes in Europe, particularly in

Romania and the Caucasus. In Australia, B.

falcatus £, typ. was reported from Queensland

by Colledge (1909). Koste & Shiel (1980),

after a study of rotifer taxocenes in southern

Australia, determined positive regional types

with regard to lorica surface morphology (see

also Figs. 3a-f).

Fig. 3. Brachionus faleatus Zacharias 1898: various lorica forms. at—cl: from Ja Ja billabong, lorica

length 330-400 em. a®: subitaneous egg 100 % 70 “m; b?: male egg 72 % 52 um; c*: subitaneous

egg 100 % 72 um; d: from Buffalo billabong, Jorica length 260 “m, juvenile form; e!: f. reductas

nf. from Winmurra billabong, lorica length 280 um, lorica width 164 em; e*: subilaneous egg

80 * 60 4m; f: slender form from Malacca, §8.E. Asia. Lorica length 335 m, lorica width 160 «m.

fl; large form from River Murray, S. Aust. Lorica length 492 #m, lorica width 280 »m, f*: suhi-

taneous egg, 108 X 90 em.

In populations studied earlier, juveniles

occasionally were observed with shortened

caudal spines (Fig. 3d). This apparently is

due to allometric growth, Adult animals en-

countered in billabongs of the Magela Creck,

however, mostly had curved postero-lateral

spines exceeding body length. Only in Win-

murra billabong was there a spatse population

of individuals with uniformly robust, strongly

shortened posterior spines. This morph is pre-

viously unknown. (Ahlstrom 1940: Fig. 10:

1-2; Voigt 1957: Fig. 21:10a-11; Sudzuki

1964: Fig. 9;:1—7; Chengalath ef al. 1973,

Figs 24-26; Koste 1978: Fig. 14.2).

The reason for the reduction in terminal

spines could not be established. Low oxygen

MONOGONONT ROTIFERA FROM NORTHERN TERRITORY 115

levels in the biotope are noteworthy (3.72 mg

O» 1-1).

Brachionus urceolaris sericus (Rousselet 1907)

n.f,

FIGS 4-6

Material: Two samples (80120803, 80111003)

of 25 ml from the same locality with many

females, all age classes with uniform loricas,

many subitaneous eggs, large population.

Type locality: Mine Valley Billabong, Magela

Creek near Jabiluka, N.T. 132°53'06"E/

12°29'54"§ (Fig. 1), Extreme biotope. Figs

4a, b.

Holotype: Lorica, single adult female from

sample 80120803 coll. R. D. Tait 8.12.1980.

Trophi preparation deposited in type collec-

tion, Zoological Museum, Christian Albrechts

University, Kiel, D-2300 F.R.G., Reg. no. 85.

Paratype: Data as for holotype, Reg. no. 86.

Description: Lorica of heraldic outline without

lateral posterior spines and with short anterior

spines, median of which is a little longer,

Dorsal lorica short, ventral lorica caudally

tapering. Foot opening without protruding

tube, ventral arch egg shaped, caudal tra-

pezoid. Ventral anterior lorica margin plain,

bead

af "

Pian OE

a .,

upper dorsal lorica with two stout ribs be-

ginning between median and submedian spines

and running in direction of periphery. Sub-

median spines reinforced with short cuticular

outer borders. Lorica surface and foot open-

ing reinforced dorsally, weaker ventrally and

covered with granular structures. In lateral

view, caudal lorica margin occasionally appears

two-stage, elevated by sharp edge from narrow

platelike base of foot tube opening. In dorsal

view, two convex lines appear over foot tube,

define boundary beneath dorsal lorica.

Measurements: Lorica length 120-220 pm,

lorica width 80-172 »m. Foot opening ven-

tral 52 ~m high X 40 »m wide, dorsal 12 pm

high X 15 ym wide.

Discussion: The lorica outline of the new

B. urceolaris sericus form, with an elevated

caudal section, resembles that of B. quadri-

dentatus forms from the literature. In par-

ticular, B. quadridentatus var. ancylognathus

(Schmarda 1859) and B. quadridentatus var.

cluniorbicularis Skorikow 1884. The lorica

surface of this distinctive polymorph, as in the

quadridentatus species group, is granulated

and dimpled, with tiny ridges present. Never-

theless, urceolaris and quadridentatus taxa are

Fig. 4. Brachionus. urceolaris sericus (Rousselet 1907) n.f. a: lorica, dorsal; b: lorica, ventral,

116 W. KOSTE & R. J. SHIEL,

readily distinguished; the latter always has a

projecting foot tube, whereas the former

(Figs 5-6) has only a flat foot opening incised

at the end of the ventral plate, Therefore, this

taxon from northern Australia is considered a

Brachionus urceolariy form of the subspecies

serious (Fig, 6a) after Hauer (1963) from B,

ueceolariy f, sericus (Rousselet 1907). This

was previously described, however, with a

more or Jess strongly pleated lorica surface,

as in the type, Sce also Sladecek (1955) and

Koste (1968), Hauer (1963) records morphs

from Egypt, Sweden and Germany. We con-

eluded that these forms of the species B.

urceolaris (O.F. Muller 1776) (Fig. 6b) are

produced in response to the chemistry of the

respective habitats. A lorica surface as present

in the new form of B. urceolaris sericus has

not heen described previously, Tt is charac-

terized through a densely granulated and

dimpled, striated surface, particularly pro-

nounced in the caudal section of the lorica

(Fig, 4a.b), Similar lorica patterns are seen

on animals from small standing waters of the

Sahara (Fig, 5a,b),

As for previous records of B. ureeolaris

sericus, the new form occurs in strongly acidi-

fied biotopes (pH 3.25-3.45), with greatly

compacted and uniform loricas. Whereas B.

urceolaris urceolaris (O.F.M,) is observed

only in habitats with pH ranges of approxi-

mately 5.0-11.0, the ssp. serleus by com-

parison, is adapted to extreme biotopes, e.g.

sulphate Jakes, which are more strongly

acidified (pH 2.8-4.0), Tt is commonly the

only rotifer species in these habitats, apart

from isolated incursion species of other taxa,

to develop and maintain large populations,

Both the type and ssp. are cosmopolitan.

Machrochaetus danneeli n.sp.

FIGS 7, 9

Material: Two contracted females from sample

8011107,

Type locality: Buffalo billabong, Magela Creek

valley, 132°52'40"E; 12°34°55", south of

Jabiluka, N.T. (Fig. 1).

Hololype; Female with contracted head (Fig,

7a-b); trophi preparation in glycerine with

Caedex inclusion, deposited in type collection

Zoological Muscum, Christian Albrechts Uni-

versity, Kiel, FRG. Reg. no. 87.

Paratype: Lost in preparation. See Tconopara-

type Fig. 7.

Fig. 5, Brachionus urceolaris sericus f. africana.

at lorica, dorsal; by lorica lateral.

Description; Lorica covered with pustules and

granules. Body with usual cross section (Fig.

9b), egg with elliptical outline. Anal segment

spineless. Dorsal lorica with terraced sides to

blunt keel, Margin of keel base with longer

spinules, terraced rim wider at start, tapering

caudally; uppermost keel dorsum covered with

large cuticular ledges and beading. Shoulder

spines, posterolateral-, postermedian- and

only one pair of rudimentary anterosubmedian

MONOGONONT ROTIPFERA FROM NORTHERN TERRITORY 117

Fic. 6. at Brachionus urceolaris sericus (Rousselet

1907). b: f typica from N.W. Germany.

spines present (3a-b, Fig. 94), Lateral an-

{ennae project from strong three stepped

cylindrical pyramid. Ventral lorica with blunt

keel and shallow curved, wide foot opening,

Foot bi-articulated; toes short, spindle-formed.

Measurements; Lorica length 125-130 pm,

lorica Width 130-137 jm, Foot segment 20

jem, toe length 16-18 p.m.

Discussion; The important taxonomic morpho-

logical characteristic of Macrochaetus Perty is

Ihe number of spines and longer spinules (see

Wulfert 1964 end Koste 1978). Their total

number (Fig. 9a) ranges from 8 (without

shoulder spines, Fig, Ra-h, cf. Fig. 8, M4, sericus

(Thorpe 1893)) to 16 (ef. for example Fig.

10, M, multixpinasus Myers 1934). Of the

possible insertion points of the dorsal spines in

the taxon described here, only 2a-h and Ga-h

are occupied. Shoulder hooks and short pos-

teroventral spines are present, The deeply

extended spine-lree anal segment (Fig, 7b) is,

moreover, noteworthy. A Macrechaetny with

this morphological characteristic is hitherto

unknown,

Etymology: 'This new species is dedicated to

Prof, Dr Ilse Dannecl, University of Duisburg.

General ecological features

As shown in Table 3, only 76 taxa were

recorded from the 13 Noy.-Dec. samples,

whereas 174 were identified from samples col-

lected in April (ef, Koste 1981). OF the 76

recorded taxa, 40 are cosmopolitan, 15 pan-

tropical or pansubtropical, seven probably

endemic, 53 perennial, There were 16 new

records for the biotope, four new records for

Australia, and 12 indeterminate taxa,

Table 3 shows also that the deep billabongs

of the Mudginberri corridor (Buffalo, Island)

supported a species rich totifer taxocene in

spite of the onset of the dry, with inercased

conductivity and acidity, The floodplain billa-

bongs (Nankeen, Mine Vallev, Leichhardt)

had » depauperate fauna or were free of roti-

fers (Jabiluka). Some of the latter biotopes,

us a result of strongly acid conditions (Mine

Valley pH 3,25-3.45, Ja-Ja pH 4.08-4,24,

Jabiluka pH 4.14-4.77), ean he considered

extreme hiotopes: In addition to incursion

species with low abundance, very dense popu-

lntiong of fugitive species developed in some

of these, e.g, B. urceolarix sericus in Mine

Valley. Overall, mass populations (over 20%

of the respective species present) were re-

corded for the following taxa: Rrachionns

dneularis (Winmurral, 8, budapestinensis

118

W. KOSTE & R. J. SHIEL

_* ;

oi.

Fig. 7. a: Macrochaetus danneeli n. sp., contracted female. Lorica length 130 um, lorica width 136

um. b: M. danneeli n. sp., contracted female, ventral. c: M. danneeli, n. sp., dorsal. d: M. danneeli,

n. sp., ventral (cf. Fig. 7c).

MONOGONONT ROTIFERA FROM NORTHERN TERRITORY 119

ve " A

®o

—— =F Ne >

“Sg oe ones

my = mn S59 ~\ bs

' t

Fiz. 8, Macrocheetus sericus (Thorpe 1893) dorsal,

(Winmurra), B. falcatus (Buflalo), Epiphanes

clavulata (Leichhardt), Filinia opoliensis (Ja

Ja), Kerateila trapica (Ja Ja, Jabiluka, Island)

and Trichoeerca similis (Island, Buffalo).

These observations are in accord with those

on billabong plankton populations in south

eastern Australia, where different species

dominants occur even in adjacent billabongs,

often in bloom proportions, in both rotiferan

and microcrustacean components of the

plankton (Shie! 1980, 1981+).

Acknowledgments

For collecting material while based at

Jabiluka, and for comments on a draft MS,

we thunk Russell Tait, Rundle Project, Esso

Australia Ltd Gladstone, Qld. For identifi-

cation of copepods, thanks are also due to

Prof. W. Kiefer, Institut fur Seenforschung

und Fischereiwesen (Max-Auerbach-Institut) .

Assistance provided to WK by the Deutschen

Forschungsgemeinschaft is gratefully acknow-

ledged. We thank also Ruth Altmann for Fig.

1, Phil Kempster for photography, Prof. W.

D, Williams for word-processing facilities, and

Mike Tyler for editorial corrections.

{Shiel, R. J. (1981) Plankton of the Murray-Dar-

ling River system, with particular reference to

the zooplankton. Ph.D. Thesis, University of

Adelaide (unpublished).

3a 3b

Fig. 9. a. Points of insertion of spines and setules

in the genus Macrechaerus Perty 1850, la—b

Anterolateral spines; 2a-b Anterosubmedian

spines; 3a—b Anteromedian spines; 4a—b central

dorsal spine pair; Sab Posterolateral spines;

6a—b Posteromedian spines; 7a—-b shoulder

hooks; 8a—-b Anal segment spines. b. Lorica

transverse section of a Macrochaetus,

Fig, 10. Macrochaetus multispinosus Myers 1934,

dorsal (from S. America).

(20 W. KOSTE & R. 1. SHIEBL.

Taste 3. Comparison ef species present in samples from each billabong at the end of wet and end wv}

dry seasons.

Billubong End of wet season End of dry season

Nankeen 15.06.79 15,04,80 10.11.80 08.12.80

0) 29 28 1 i

Jabiluka 13,116,749 15.04 80 HOT BO 08.12.80

2 24 36 3 i]

Mine Valley 13.06.79 15.04.80 10,1 1,.80 08.12.80

ik) 67 36 4 2

Java 15.016,79 15.04.80 (0,11, 80 8.12.80

(4 35 28 q ll

Island 14.06.79 15.04.80 10.11.80 O8, 12.40

05 2! 40 33 na.

Winmurra 14,06,79 15.04.80 LO 1.80 O8,12,80

(6 36 6) Ma. 16

Buffalo 14.06.79 15.04.80 Lid L.80 08.12.80

07 26 Al 29 56

Leichhardt 13.06.79 135,04.80 1-11.80 08 12.80

OR 19 55 3 5

References

AnLsTROM. FE. H. (1940) A revision of the rola-

torign genera Arachionus and Plaryias with de-

scriplions of one new species and two new

varieties, Am. Mus. Nat. Hist. 77(31, 148-84,

BisHop, K. A, (1980) Fish kills in relation to

physical und chemical chanyes in Mugela Creek

(East Alligator River system, Northern Terri-

lory) at the beginning of the tropleal wet sea-

son. Aust, Zool, 2003), 485-500,

Buraman, M. A. & Tarp, R. D. (in press) Phyto-

plankton of the Magela Creek, Northern Terri-

tory, Aust. J. Mar. Freshwat, Res,

& —— {in press) Ecology of the phytoplunk-

bas the Magelu Creek. Northern Territory

/ ble -

Crpnoanaily, R., FERNANDO, C. A. & Kosre, W

(1973) Rotifera from Sri Lanka (Ceylon) 2,

Turther studies on the Eurotatoria including

new records, Bull, Fish. Res. Stn, Sr Lanka 24.

29-62.

Cottepor W. R, (1909) Lecture on Brisbane

pond life.. Prac. R. Soe. Qld 22(1), 35.

CGiREEN, J. (1981) Associations of rotifers in Aus-

tralian crater lakes, J. Zoel, 193. 469-86,

Harr. B. T. & MoCirecor, R. J, (1980) Limno-

logical survey of eight billabongs in the Magela

Creek culchment, Northern Territory. Ans 7

Mar. Preshwat, Res 1. 611-26.

HAver, 1. 11963) Zur Kenntnis der Raderticre

(Rotatoria) von Agypten, Avely Hydrohial, 59

(2), 162-95,

Kosth, W. (1968) Uber die Rotatorienfauna des

Naturschulzgebletes "Achmer Grasmoor’, Kreis

Bersenbruck. Merof? Narurw. Ver Osnehbruck,

32 106-60,

(1978) Retatorta. Die Radertiére Mitrcleura-

pos, Uberordnung Manoganoita, 2 Vols. Revi-

sion of M, Voigt, Borntrueter, Berlin.

~— (1979) New Rotifera from the River Mur-

ray, south-eastern Australia, with a review of

whe Australian speeies of Brachionus and Keri

tella. Aust. J. Mar. Freshwat, Res. WW. 237-57.

—— (1980) Uber zwei Plankton-Radertierelaxu

Filinia austealtensis tsp. Und Filinta heffntianni

masp.. mit Bemerkungen zur Tuxonomle der

longiseta/terminalis Gruppe, Genus Filinia Bory

De St Vincent, 1824, Familie Filiniidae Bartos

1959 (Uberordnung Monogononta). Arel,

Fivdroinal, 90(2), 230-56.

—— (1981) Zur Morphologic, Systematik und

Okologic von neuen monogonoten Radertieren

(Rotatorin) aus dem Uberschwemmungsgebiet

des Magela Creek in der Alligator River region,

Australiens, N,T, Teil 1, Osnahrucher Naturwiss.

Afitt, 8, 97-126.

—— & Srirn, RoI. (19808) On Brichiaius dieho-

lomns Shephard, 1911 (Rotatoria: Brachionidac)

from the Australian region, with a description

of 4 new subspecies. Prac. R. Soc. Vier, 9112).

(27-34,

-— & — — (1980b) New Rotifera from Aus:

tralia, Trams. Ro Soc 8. Aust, 405), 133-44,

Marcnant, R. (1982) Seasonal variation in the

mactoinvertebrate fauna of billahongs alone

Mageli Creek, Northern Territory. Aust, J,

Mar, Freshwar Res. a3, 329-42,

Pest eR, B, (1977) On the global distribution of

the family Brachiomdae (Rotaloriu), Arc.

Hydrobiel, Suppl. $3(2), 255-306,

Rousstury, C.F, (0907) On Brachionus sericus.

Inap., a new varicty of Brachionus quadratus and

remarks on Brachionns rubens of Ehrenberg. f,

Oneckett Mier. Club. London ser, 2 1, 147-54.

Suet, R, J. (1980) Billabongs of the Murray-Dar

ling system. /y W, D. Williams (Bd.) An eco-

logical basis for water resource management

A.N,U. Press, Canberra,

—— & Kosre, W-. (1979) Rotifera recorded from

Australia. Ura. Ro Soe. 8S. Aust, 103(3), 57-

ak.

Sranecek, V. (1455) The zooplankton of the

reservoir Sous with a contribution to (he method

of is quuntilutive determinations. Casapis

Naraduilie masew odd. pedaved, 12442), 150-

40.

Supvuki, M. (1964) New systematical upproach

to the Japanese plinktonic Rotatoria. Ayvdre-

higlagia 23(1/2), 1-t24.

MONOGONONT ROTIFERA FROM NORTHERN TERRITORY 121

Tait, R. D. (1981) Natural seasonal changes in

the zooplankton population in a billabong of the

Magela Creek, Northern Territory, Australia,

prior to development in the area. pp. 29-35 Jn

M. Sudzuki (Ed.) Some approaches to saprobio-

logical problems. Sanseido, Tokyo.

, SHTEL, R. J. & KosTe, W. (in press) Struc-

ture and dynamics of zooplankton communities,

Alligator Rivers region, N.T.. Australia. Hydro-

biologia.

VoicT, M. (1957) Rotatoria. Die Radertiere Mit-

teleuropas. 2 vols. Berlin-Nikolasee.

WesBeR, E. F. (1906) Rotateurs (Voyage du Dr

Walter Volz). Zool. Jahrb. Abt. Sytem. 24(3),

207-26,

WULFERT, K. (1964) Unsere gegenwartige Kennt-

nis der Rotatoriengattung Macrochaetus. Limno-

logica, Berlin 2(3), 347-66.

ZACHARIAS, O. (1898) Untersuchungen uber das

Plankton der Teichgewasser. Forsch. Ber. Biol.

Stn zu Plon, Stuttgart 6, 89-139.

A LARGER BIVALVE ARTHROPOD FROM SADME EDEOWIE-1 WELL

OF PROBABLE CAMBRIAN AGE

BY P. A. JELL

Summary

A large bivalve arthropod carapace from 494.92 m down SADME Edeowie-1 well situated 7 km

northeast of Brachina Siding just west of the Flinders Ranges is described as Papiliocaris arrugia

gen. et sp. nov. Its age and rock formation are indeterminate but an Early or Middle Cambrian Age

is most probable. The distinctive carapace ornament, interpreted as probably having a second

respiratory function, may have developed from or into the ornament of Tuzoia Walcott but no

phylogeny can be established.

A LARGER BIVALVE ARTHROPOD FROM SADME EDEOWIE-1 WELL

OF PROBARLE CAMBRIAN AGE

by P. A. JeLL*

Sumimury

Jini, P) A. (1983) A lurger bivalve arthropod from SADME EBdeowie-! well of probable

Cambrian Age. Tears. &. Soc. 8. Aust. 107(2), 123-125, 31 May, 1983.

A huge bivalve arthropod carapace from 494,92 m down SADME Edeowie-1 well situated

7 km northeast of Brachina Siding just west of the Flinders Ranges is described as Papiliocaris

arrugia wen. el sp. poy. Us age and frock formation are indeterminate but an Early or Middle

Cambrian Age is most probable, The distinctive carapace ornament, interpreted as probably

having a secondary respiratory function, may have developed from or into the ornament of

Tazata Walcott bul no phylogeny con be established,

Key Worps: Biyalve, arthropod, Flinders Runges, Early, Mid Cambrian, new species,

Introduction

Knowledge of large bivalve arthropods from

Australian sediments is not extensive (Chap-

man 1903; Glacssner 1979; Jell 1980; Rolfe

1966) so any new information is significant,

The South Australian Department af Mines &

Energy (SADME) Edeowie-1 Well, situated 7

km northeast of Brachina Siding at 31°16.7'S.

138°96.6E on the Parachina |:250 000 geo-

lomcal map (Dalgamo & Tohnson 1866), in

the Pirie-Torrens Basin on the western edge

of the Flinders Ranges, produced the single

specimen described below,

It was split (rom the 60 mm core recavered

from a depth of 494,92 m below the surface

ind is contained in a grey-green mudstone, A

palynological determination on carbonaceous

shale from 333.4—333,5 m down the same

well indicated a Late Eocene age so providing

un upper limit to the possible age of this fossil,

Determination of the rock unit and age of

this fossil is inconclusive but may be inferred

with some confidence from circumstantial

evidence, ‘The sequence in which the fossil-

hearing core occurs in Edeowre-1 well has a

pross lithology consparable with the Cambrian

Billy Creek Formation, Baleoracana Forma-

thin, or Pantapinna Sandstone (lower part of

“uppermost outerapping part), and it is con-

sidered that the sequence is most likely upper

Baleorancana Formation or possibly lower

(red) Pantapinna Sandstane. Although Pre

cambria) Adelaidean sedinrents have been

reported from drifl-holtes in the Pirle-Torrens

Basin (eg. in SANTOS Motpens-f, 1% km

northwest of Edeowie-l, Dalgarno and John:

* National Museum of Victoria 285-321 BRouysell

Street, Melbourne, Vic. 3000

son, 1966), the core in Motpena-l well at

least is tow considered to resemble Balcora-

cana Formation more closely’ (D. J, Grave-

stock, in lift,),

Other large bivalve arthropods (/soxys

communis Glassner 1979 and Tuzoia australis

Glaessner 1979) were described from the

Farly Cambrian Emu Bay Shale on the

northern shore of Kangaroo Island (Glacssner

1979) in similar lithology. As the specimen is

teferred to a new genus it provides uo basis for

correlation at this level; as suprageneric classi-

fication of this and similar dissociated cara-

Paces is uncertain no dating is available on a

Strictly taxonomic basis except that such cara-

paces are not known from post-Triassic rocks,

However, as discussed below, this genus is

comparable with several Cambrian genera of

bivalve arthropods and is distinct from post-

Carnbrian forms. Taken togeiher, this bio-

logical evidence and the regional geology make

a Cambrian age very probable,

PHYLUM; ARTHROPODA

CLASS, ORDER AND FAMILY:

UNCERTAIN

GENUS: PAPILIOCARIS nov.

Etymology; From the Latin papilia meaning

a butterfiy and carn meaning a shrimp. The

Name refers to its resemblance to and initial

identification as possibly an Insect wing.

Gender is feminine.

Type species: Papilioeariy arrupia sp, nov-

Diagnasis: Carapace bivalve with straight

hingeline, Valves ovoid, with marked postero-

Ventral expansion; anterior hinge process large

and prominett, projecting farthest some dis-

lance below hingeline, No marginal spines on

124 PA

hiage, anterior or Ventral margins. Surface

with pattern of longitudinal ridges, joined in a

meshwork \icar anterior margin but inde-

peodent for most of their length aud breaking

up into short segments in places,

Discussion: The problems of classification of

phyllocarid-like carapaces tn the absence of

thoracic and abdominal details have been ex-

tensively considered. (Briggs 1976, 1977;

Glaessner 1979 und others), However, isolated

curapaces are not uncommon in Palaeozoic

sediments and the established generic level

taxonomy has proved useful for such fossils

(eg. Robison & Richards 1981). Although a

number of phyllocarids are known with longi-

tudinal to oblique ridges (Rolfe 1969) the

omament of this specimen is unknown in any

similarly shaped arthropod carapace and to-

wether with the nature of the anterodorsal

projection forms the basis for the new genus,

Overall shape is most reminiscent of genera

such as Canadaspis Novozhilov (cf. Briggs

1978, figs 18, 19, 51) whase main distin-

guishing feature is the posteroventral expan-

sion, The ornament may be functionally

similar to the polygonal ornament of Tuzoia

Walcott (see Robison & Richards 1981, pl, 7,

fig. 2) from which it may be derived by

streamlining—possibly suggesting a faster

moving animal. An alternative argument may

be that Tvzeia evelyed from a smooth form

and Papiliecariy appears to be an_ inter-

mediate. A possible functional interpretation

of the ridges is that they house a secondary

respiratory system as suggested by Jell (1978)

for trilobites, The ridges increase the surface

area considerably, were ideally situated in the

water flow past the body, and their absence

posteriorly is understandable also with that

interpretation, Wf this interpretation is correct

then no phylogenetic relationship may be iw-

ferred from the ornament as such ridges

developed in many different trilobite lineages

ab different times, As these genera, with which

some comparison nyay be made but no certain

kinship may be inferred, are all of Early or

Middle Cainbrian age Papilivcariy seems most

likely to he of Cambrian age also but this is

by vo means certain.

Papiliocaris arrugia sp, nov.

Figs 1-2

Erymology: From the Latin arrugia meaning a

shaft or pit in a mine—referring to its dis-

covery in a borehole,

. ELL

Paplliocaris arrugia sp. noy, GSSA Fossil

Collection No. Cr43, A, tuteral view of latex

cust of external mould of Jeft carapace valve,

“3, B, loteral view of internal mould of an-

terior half of tell carupuce valve, x4.

Fig. |.

Material: The holotype carapace registered in

the Geological Survey of South Australia

Fossil Collection as No, Cr43. It is preserved

ag internal and external moulds (ne shell

preserved) with only half the internal mould

still present,

Diagnosis: As for genus,

Yescripitien Left carapace 37 mm long, 10

mm high at anterior and 22 mm high pos-

teriorly, No rostral plate present. Anterior and

ventral profiles broadly conyex but original

convexity must have been somewhat greater as

wrinkles, duc tu Mattening, are visible near

hingeline jp anterior half and near postero-

ventral margin, Outline (Fig. 2) deawn from

latex cast which shows dorsal part of posterior

margin; if is continued posteroventrally in

smooth curve, Anteriorly margin tens down

from straight hinglelme ina little more than

90° angle. curves gently forward for 4 mm,

then turns abropily back parallel to hingeline

for au short distance ta edge af main body of

carapace and from this point again curves

forward to most anterior point on margin,

BIVALVE ARTHROPOD FROM EDEOWIE-! 125

Fig. 2. Papiliocaris atrugia sp. nov, Camera Jucida

sketch and reconstruction of left carapice yalve

showing pattern of ridges.

Ventrally margin straight to very gently con-

vex and slopes down to produce postero-

ventral expansion. Flat narrow border adja-

cent to margiu throughout except anteriorly

where considerably wider, Inside the border js

the convex body of the carapace. Ornament of

prominent longitudinal ridges on body that are

linked together anteriorly by two or three

vertical ridges running parallel to anterior mar-

gin and forming au irregular meshwork en-

closing quadrangular or polygonal shapes, Pos-

teriorly 5 or 6 main ridges wavy, discontinuous

in some places and finishing well before pos-

terior margin, On anterodorsal border a few

less prominent ridges visible with two running

diagonally up and back to hingeline.

Remarks; The sharp break in the anterior

margin may well be a fracture of the cara-

pace with the lower part turned down into

the matrix; the margin would have been

evenly curved if that was the case. However.

the margin just below the break appears to

be a true edge and the question must remain

open, Even if the anterior margin proves not

to be distinctive, the carapace ornament is

ubique so as to warrant erection of the new

taxon,

Acknowledgments

[am grateful to Mark Griffiths, the SADME

well-site geologist who found the fossil, to

Murray Lindsay, David Gravestock and Wolf-

gang Preiss of SADME for information and

comments on a draft of this paper and also

to Murray Lindsay for inviting me to describe

the fossil.

References

BKriacs, D. E, G. (1976) ‘The arthropod Branchio-

caris n. gen., Middle Cambrian, Burgess Shale,

British Columbia, Bull. geal, Surv, Can. 264,

1-29,

(1977) Bivalved arthropods from the Middle

Cambrian Burgess Shale of British Columbia.

Palaeotitalogy 20, 595-621,

(1978) The morphology, mode of life and

affinities of Canadaspis perfecta (Crustacea:

Phyllocarida), Middle Cambrian, Burgess Shale,

British Columbia, Phil. Trans, R. Sec, Lond.

ser. B 281, 439-87.

CuHarpman, FP. (1903) New or little known Vie-

lorian fossils in the National Museum, Mel-

bourne, Part 1, Some Palacozoic species. Prec,

R. Soe. Viet. (rs) 15, 104-22,

Datcarwo, CC. R. & Jonnson, J. FE. (1966)

PARACHILNA up sheet, Geological Atlas of

South Australia, 1:250 000 series. (Geol. Surv.

S. Aust: Adelaide.)

GLAESSNER, M. FP. (1979) Lower Cambrian Crusta-

gey and annelid worms from Katiguroo Island,

South Australia. Aleheringa 3, 21-31

Jet, P. A. (1978) Trilobite respiration and genal

caeca. thid. 2, 251-60,

(1980) Two arthropods from the Tiance-

fieldian (La 1) of central Victoria, bid. 4. 37-

46.

Ronson, R. A. & RicHARDS, B. C. (1981) Larger

bivalve arthropods from the Middle Cambrian

of Utah, Paleont. Contr. Univ. Kans. Pap. 106,

1-19,

Rover, W, D. 1 (1966) Phyllocarid crustacean

fauna of European aspect from the Devonian

of Western Australia. Nature, Lond. 209, 192.

(1969) Phyllocarida. Jn Treative on liverte-

brate Palacentalagy Part R Arithropeda 4, R, C,

Moore, ed.. Geol. Soc Amer. & Univ, Kansas

Press, R296-R331.

LATE EOCENE TO LATE OLIGOCENE AGE OF THE KINGSCOTE

LIMESTONE, KANGAROO ISLAND, S.A.

BY J. MURRAY LINDSAY

Summary

Tertiary fossiliferous limestones with an apparent exposed thickness of only about 10 m crop out

along the coast for about 2 km southwestwards form Kingscote jetty, for the most part dipping

gently southeast (i.e. seawards). Elsewhere in this volume these limestones are described and named

the Kingscote Limestone. It has been long assumed or implied that these limestones are all of much

the same age, whether Miocene, or Eocene, the latter age having been adopted invariably during the

past 30 years. However the Kingscote Limestone comprises three units, and foraminiferal studies by

the writer have dated these Late (but not latest) Eocene, latest Eocene-Middle Oligocene, and early

Late Oligocene. The purpose of this supplementary note is to discuss further some aspects of the

dating of foraminifera.

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

LATE EOCENE TO LATE OLIGOCENE AGE OF THE KINGSCOTE

LIMESTONE, KANGAROO ISLAND, §,A.

Tertiary fossiliferous limestones with an appa.

rene exposed thickness of only about 10 m crop

oul wor: the coust for about 2 km southwest

wards fram Ringscete jetty, for the most part

dipping gently southeast (i.e. seawards). Elsewhere

Mm this volume! these lintestones are deseriled and

named the Kingscote |imestone. It has been long

assumed or implied that these limestones are all

of much the same age, whether Miocene* 4 or

Eocenct:!". the Intter age having been adopted

jnvarially Guiiag the past 30 years. Mowever the

Kingscote Limestone comprises Uyree units, and

foraminiferal sindies by the writer have dated

these Late Chul mol Jatest) Kocene, Iatest Focene-

Middle Qligncene, and early Late Oligocene’ The

purpose of this supplementary note is to discuss

further some aspects of the dating by foraminifera.

‘Two disconformities within the limestone

sequence were recognised «turing field work by

B. I, Cooper in 1976 und B. fF. Cooper and A. R,

Milnes if 1980, Samples collected in 1976!% from

strata helow the lower dixconfurmily, near Kings-

cote jetty (Kingscete 12100000 sheet. map ref.

390 S09) have yielded ws expeeted wn Eocene

assemblage of foranynlferat, including oeca-

sidnal examples af the plinktonic forms Clalit

werinathehka index (Fiday) ound Turherotalia

opine muna (Boll), together with the benthortic

species Avferivering adelnidensis (Blowchin),

Crespinina kinescorensis Wade, Halkvardia ber-

trum? Parr’. Linderina ghaessneri: Quilty4, Mas-

linella chapmant Glaessner & Wade, and Qvasi-

balivinella tavlort Quilty’. The same wot sampled

recently by J, ML Lindsay and B. J. Cooper 1,5

km further to the southwest (Kingsente | 100 000

sheet, map ref. 377501: sample FIO/82) con

lains similar benthonies and the addittonal plank-

tonics Tenuitella gemma (lenkins) and TV, fasolita

(Tenkins) The presence of Turherdafala opima

nine apparendly low in this unit suggests an uge

probably om older than earliest Late Eocene!®, 1",

The first appearance of Ternitella gem aces

fear the top of Zone P.JS, within the Late

Focene!. and this species 1s also found in the

Mittin Bay stratotypes as Low as middle Torta-

chilla Limestone!) Glehigerinatheka indev wnel

‘enatiella insolitt ave no vounger than Late

Pocene!) 1.14) OF the benthonic species listed,

Ayteriverina udelaidensiy has the most restricted

upward range sinee in the eustern St Vincent Basin

in is not Known from above Blanche Point Forma-

ton (Lute, bul not jatest Eocene) whereas the

others ranve Up Further inte latest Eocene basal

Port Willunga Formation? "4 Peevdapaly-

morphing sp. et P. carleri Ouilty'® which in the

castern St Vincent Basin has a ringe restricted

in Tortachilla Limestone and basal Blanche Pot

Formation?) "2h, has not been found yet in

any exposures of Kingscote Limestone but does

occur subsurface, in all bur one instance at the

base of the formution'.

Thus the foraminiferal evidence supports @

correlalion tefween Vhe lowest unit of Kingscote

Limestone and Tortach|ila Limestone plus at least

fart af Blanche Point Formation!2.

The middle unit of Kingscote Linrestone is less

than fom thick. is bounded by disconformities,

and is only known at present from exposures in

the Kingscote cliffs’, Sample Fl/$2, from the lype

section of the formation, 150) m southwest of the

Kingscote swimming pool, contains small Suh.

hatina sp. from the S. finaperta (Finlay )—S. artgi-

peroldey (Hornibrook) group, together with Teor

inlaria sp. cf, T. cusps Finlay, T sp. ch 7,

marsdenl Finlay, Masyilina ferquayensiy (Chap-

man), Rensvelle fintayl Dorreen, and Cyroaldi-

aoides sp. cf. Gallant (Finlay). Sample F5/82

from 400 tm further southwest, neat Rolls Point.

coniains Subhoring aaeiparoides, Massilinu tor

quayensis, and Gyreidinoider sp. cf, G. allani,

together with specimens of <Asterigveina (nat

A. adelaidensis). most of them A. sp. ef. A.

walureku Finlay, but a few 4. sp. cf. 4. evelops

Dorreen, The presence of §. nagiporeides suggests

an age no younger than Zone P, 21, since the

species is reported ta continue anly ‘into horizons

as young as Zone P. 21 .-. in cooler water en-

vironments’ Massilina rorquayensis is a charac-

teristically Janjukian and Oligocene species tm

southern Australia, bot first appeared [a South

Australia in the Jatest Eocene!7, %. 2!. Published

New Zealand ranges of Texrularia cuspix ( Bor-

lonian-Whaingaroan), 7 siaesden? (?Rugangan,

Whaingaroun-Waiauan), Reusyella finlayi (Kasia

tan-Duntroonian), 4Asrerigerina walareka (Kaintan-

Runangan, 7Whainguroan). and A. cyclops (Kaia-

lan-hasal Buntroonian)2 sugeest a Runangan-

Whaingaroon age for this part of the microfauna.

A recent asscasment of N.%, stages in international

ferms correlates this inlervul with Zone P. 16-

lower Zone P, 212% Yaken together, the fora-

miniferal evidence dates the middle unit of Kings-

vote Limestone within the limits of latest Kocene

to lawer Zone Po 21 (Middle Oligocene). How-

ever in the ohsence of any species restricted te

the Eocene. and because the unit is bounded by

disconformities, the age is cansidered more likely

fo be Barly fo Middle Oligocene, correlating with

the Ruwartine Member of Port Willunga For.

mation in the eastern Si Vineent Bagint?, 19-22.

2,28) and representing deposition during riginy

Qlobal sea level eyele TO | of Vail et ale4. 27,98,

128

The upper unit of Kingscote Limestone is a

few metres thick between the Kingscole swimming

pool und Rolls Point, 600 nm ta the southwest!.

Five samples have yielded useful planktonic micro-

faunas. All contain Guermbelitria samivelli Jenkins,

and all but the stratigraphically highest sample (2 m

above the upper disconformily) contain rare to

frequent Chiloguembelina cubensiy (Palmer), sug-

gesting that this unit straddles the C, ewhensis last

appearance datum which is probably within Zone

P. 21 in southern Australia’t) 6") Sabhotina

angiporvides occurs frequently in three of the

five samples (but not in the uppermost), and as

noted earlicr indicates an age probably no younger

than Zone P. 2)'%, Tenwitella genima, present in

1Milnes, A. R., Cudbrook, N, H,, Lindsay, J, M.

& Cooper, B,J, (1983). Trans, R, Soc, S, Aust,

107, 1-35.

“Tate, R. (1883), Lhd. 6, 116-171,

‘Chapman, F, (1915). Appendix Il in Wade,

Arthur. Bull. geol, Surv. S. Aust. +4, 44-50,

‘Howchin, W. (1899). Trans. R. Soc. 8. Aust.

23, 198-207.

(1903), /hid, 27, 75-90.

"Glaessner, M. Fy (1953). [bid. 76, 141-146,

TWade, Mary (1955). Contrib, Cushman Fdn

foramin. Res. 6, 45-49,

& Carter, A, N. (1957), Micropaleontology

3, 155-164.

‘Glacssner, M, BF. & Wade, Mary (1958). Ji

Gluessner, M, F. & Parkin, L. W. (Rds). J.

geal, Soe, Aust. 5. 115-126.

MLudbrook, N. H. (1963). Trans, R. Soc. S, Aust.

87, 5-15.

Wade, Mary Micropaleontology 10,

273-290.

\2Daily, B., Milnes, A, R., Twidale, C. R, &

Bourne, 3, A. (1979). Jn Tyler, M. J, Twidale,

Cc. R. & Ling, J. KR. (Bds), “Natural History of

Kangaroo Island” (Roy. Soc. S. Aust.: Adelaide),

pp. 1-38,

eee Biostraligraphy Section samples FI3-

15/76.

Quilty, P. G. (1981). J. R. Soc. W. Aust. 64,

79-100,

Blow, W. H. (1979). “The Cainozoie Globi-

gerinida”’, 3 vols (FR, I. Brith) Leiden),

\MeGowran, B. (1978). Jn Bull. Bur.

Resour, Geol, Geophys, Aust, 192, 83-95

(1964),

Miner.

two samples including the lopmost, ts reported

fo range up to Zone P, 21 and possibly into the

earlier part of Zone P. 227%. Taking into account

the stratigraphic relationships of this upper unit

of Kingscote Limestone an early Late Oligocene

age is indicated (probably no younger than Zone

P. 21, possibly extending into early Zone P. 22).

It is possible that the disconformily separating

the middle and Upper units is a result of the pro-

nounced drop in glohal sea level that is postulated

to have occurred within Zone P. 21, hetween

global sea level cycles TO 1 and ‘TO 2.1%. 27,28,

This paper is published with the permission of

the Director-General of Mines and Energy.

TLindsay, J. M. (1981). Tertiary stratigraphy und

foraminifera of the Adelaide City area, St. Vin-

cent Basin, South Australia, M.Se, Thesis, Uni

versity of Adelaide. Cunpnblished).

iNJenkins, D. G, (1971), Puleont. Bull.. Welling-

ton 42.

Lindsay, 4. M. (1967) Trans. R. Soc. 5. Aust,

91, 93-110.

(1970). ©. geol, Notes, geol. Surv. §.

Aust. 36, 4-10,

“1——_ (1969). Bull. geol. Surv. S. Aust, 42.

“Cooper, B.A. (1979). Rep. Invest., geol

S. Aust, 50,

“SHornibrook, N. de B. (1961). Paleont, Bull,

Wellington 34 (1).

“Loutit, T. 8. & Kennett, J. P. (1981). Bull. Am.

Ass. Petrol. Gvol. 65, 1586-1601,

“ACooper, B. J. (1977), Q, geol, Noles, geol,

Surv. S. Aust. 64, 2-3

26Lindsay, J. M, /n Daily, B Firman, 1. B.,

Forbes, B, G. & Lindsay, J, M. (1976). Jn

Twidale, GC. R., Tyler, M. J, & Webb, BP.

(Eds), “Natural History of the Adeluide Region"

(Roy, Soc. S, Aust: Adelaide) pp, 5-42.

“Vail, Ph R. & Mitchum, R. M. (1979). fn

Watkins. J. S., Montadert, L. & Dickerson, P W

(East, Mem. Am. Assoc, Pet. Geol, 29, 469-

72.

“SVail, P. BR. & Hardeubol, J. (1979). Oeeanus

22, 71-79.

“McGowran, B., Lindsay, 4. M. & Harris, W. K-.

(1971), fn Wopfner, H, & Douglas, JG. Rds),

Spec. Bull, geol. Survs 5. Aust., Vict, pp, 273-

281, encl: 14-1,

“MeGowran, B. (1979),

tology 4, 235-264,

atl,

Surv,

Matine Micropaleon-

J, MURRAY LINDSAY, Dept of Mines & Energy, Box 151, Eastwood, 8. Aust, 5063.

NEOBACTRACHUS SUTOR MAIN: A FROG NEW TO THE FAUNA OF

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY MICHAEL J. TYLER

Summary

Siince 1966 the number of species of frogs known to occur in South Australia has risen from 16 to

23. Three of these additional species have been discovered in the high rainfall area of the lower

southeast of the State, in an area comprising only 1% of the State’s surface. The other four were

found at isolated localities in the vast and extremely arid north of the State.

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

129

NEOBATRACHUS SUTOR MAIN: A FROG NEW TO THE

FAUNA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

Since 1966 the number of species of frogs

known to occur in South Australia has risen

from 16 to 231-5, Three of these additional species

have been discovered in the high rainfall area of

the lower southeast of the State, in an area com-

prising only 1% of the State’s surface. The other

four were found at isolated localities in the vast

and extremely arid north of the State.

The collection of frogs in northern South Aus-

tralia results commonly from fortuitous events.

For example the discovery in 1970 of Pseudo-

phryne occidentalis Parker resulted from frogs

falling into cardboard containers sunk into the

ground by E, Mathews to trap dung beetles?, The

presence of Litoria latopalmata in South Australia

is based on a single specimen taken by M. Davies

and M. J. Tyler, amongst a very large series of

Limnodynastes tasmaniensis Giinther emerging

from cracks in the ground at the edge of Gid-

gealpa Waterhole?.

Because of the long periods between falls of rain

in the north of the State, fossorial species of frogs

are most suited to survive there. By far the most

commonly encountered fossorial frogs are species

of Neobatrachus Peters, and all specimens col-

lected in northern S.A. and the Northern Territory

hitherto have been reported as N. centralis Parker.

Following the description of N. aquilonius

Tyler, Davies & Martin from the Kimberley Divi-

sion of W.A.*, I re-examined the very large col-

lection of Neobatrachus in the South Australian

Museum (SAM) and located a series of Neoba-

trachus sutor Main from the extreme northwest

of the State. The identification of this series re-

presents evidence of a species formerly not known

to occur in South Australia, so increasing the frog

fauna of the State to 24 species.

On 15.ii.66 the late Peter Aitken collected 49

specimens of Neobatrachus at Mt Lindsay in the

Birksgate Range, S.A., located north of the Great

Victoria Desert within the Northwest Aboriginal

Reserve at 27°02’S, 129°53’E. The specimens

were collected following approximately 250 mm

of rain. Originally all of the specimens were iden-

tified by me as N. centralis, and subsequently two

were exchanged with other museums. Of the re-

mainder seven are still most appropriately referred

to that species, but 39 are N. sutor (SAM R7481—

91, 7496, 7498-7500, 7502-06, 7508-09, 7511,

7513-14, 7516, 7519-25, 7527-29, 23435). The

series of N. sutor includes 24 adult males 33.8—

42.5 mm in snout to vent length, and 15 adult

females (several of which are gravid) ranging

37.6-45.1 mm. In life the species is bronze with

numerous small black markings, each of which is

clearly demarcated (Fig. 1). It is thus distinguish-

Fig. 1. Neobatrachus sutor adult. (Photo: M.

Davies. )

Distribution of Neobatrachus suto

(hatched area). The site of Mt Lindsay is indi-

cated by a star.

Fig. 2. sutor

130

able from Eyrean congeners in its small size and

superficial appearance, whilst the tapping nature

of the male mating call (leading to its colloquial

name of the Shoemaker Frog*) is equally distine-

tive from the trills produced by other species.

Neobatrachns sutor occupies the southwest of

Western Austritlia and Mt Lindsay is only 340 km

ESH of its currently known western limit in the

1Tyler, M. 3, (1966), Frogs of South Australia,

South Australian Museum: Adelaide.

“Woodruff, D. 5. & Tyler, M. J. (1968). Ree. S.

Aust, Mus, 15, 705-709,

STyler, M. J. (1971). Trans, R, Soc, S. Aust. 95,

215-217,

‘Tyler, M. 3. (1977). Frogs of South Australia.

(Second Edition.) South Australian Museum:

Adelaide,

Warburton Range (Fig. 2). Its presence in S.A.

iy therefore of minimal biogeographical signifi-

cance, but tends to emphasise the fact that the

species included in the §,A, frog fauna in part re-

flects the existence of refugia for more widespread

species of western, northern and eastern origin,

rather than the State constituting a major site of

evolution,

[am indebted to Ruth Hughes for Figure 2.

oBrooks, J, A. (1980). S, Aust, Nat, 54, 45-46.

‘Brook, A, J. (1981), Atlas of Frogs of South

Australia. Department of Zoology, University of

Melbourne Publ. (4), Melbourne. (Mimeo.)

Tyler, M, J., Davies, M. & Martin, A, A. (1981).

Rec. W. Aust. Mus, 9, 147-172,

SMain, A, R, (1965). Frogs of southern Western

Australia. Handbook (8), W.A. Naturalists Club,

Perth.

MICHAEL J. TYLER, Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, Box 498, G.P.O,, Adelaide,

§. Aust. 5001.

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

REPLACEMENT NAME FOR LITORIA GLANDULOSA TYLER & ANSTIS,

1975 (ANURA: HYLIDAE)

Litoria glandulosa Tyler & Anstis (1975)? was

erected for a hylid frog of northeastern New South

Wales and southeast Queensland, formerly con-

fused with Luoria citropa (Tschudi). The new spe-

cies was distinguished from L, citropa principally

by its smaller adult size and unique tadpole which

has an unpigmented and reduced horny beak, and

lacks the customary labial tooth rows.

We note that glandulosa Tyler & Anstis is a pri-

mary homonym, being preoccupied in Lifaria by

L. glandulosa Bell (1842)2. Bell erected the name

for a species taken at Concepsion, Chile by

ifyler, M. J. & Anstis, M. (1975). Rec, S, Aust.

Mus. 17(5), 41-50,

“Bell, T, (1842). In Darwin, C. “The Zoology of

H.M.S, Beagle—1832-36", pt 5, Reptiles, 51 pp.

Churles Darwin. The type specimen of L. glandu-

lasa Bell is in poor condition, Gunther (1858, p.

97)" remarking, “The specimen apparently Was in

a state of decay before it was put in spirits”. Its

specific identity remains uncertain, but it has been

referred tentatively to the synonymy of Eupsophus

taeniatatus (Girard)4.

In accordance with the provisions of the Inter-

national Code of Zoological Nomenclature, the

Australian species requires a replacement name.

Accordingly we propose Lisoria subglandulosa for

it.

*Gunther, A. (1858). Catalogue of the Batrachia

Salientia in the collection of the British Museum,

British Museum, London.

iCei, J. M, (1962). Invest. Zool. Chilenas 7, 7-42.

MICHAEL J. TYLER, Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, G.P.O. Box 498, Adeluide,

S. Aust. 5001, and MARION ANSTIS

COMMENT: LATE PRECAMBRIAN-CAMBRIAN STRATIGRAPHIC

NOMENCLATURE IN THE ADELAIDE GEOSYNCLINE

BY J, B. JAGO AND D. B. HILYARD

Summary

Preiss recently proposed that the Late Precambrian and Cambrian rocks of the Adelaide

Geosyncline should be placed into three newly erected supergroups, with Warrina Supergroup

embracing the Callanna and Burra Groups, Heysen Supergroup to include the Umberatana and

Wilpena Groups and Moralana Supergroup to include all the Cambrian rocks. Hence he has added

three more names to a sequence which is already overloaded with stratigraphic nomenclature. As

stated by Preiss, stratigraphic classification in a depositional basin of the size and duration of the

Adelaide Geosyncline is bound to be complicated. However, it is for this very reason that authors

should be very careful before adding yet further stratigraphic names. Additional classification

implies that the present one is inadequate in terms of the presently understood geology of the

Adelaide Geosyncline. However, Preiss makes no attempt either to explain where the present

classification is inadequate, or to explain in any detail the need for a supergroup classification.

Indeed it would seem to us that a controversial suggestion such as that proposed by Preiss should

have been contained in a detailed properly documented paper rather than buried in a “brief

communication”.

BRED COMMUNICATION

13}

COMMENT; LATE PRECAMBRIAN-CAMBRIAN STRATIGRAPHIC

NOMENCLATURE IN THE ADELAIDE GEOSYNCLINE

Preiss! recently proposed that the Late Pre-

cambrian and Cumbrian sacks of the Adelaide

Geosyiicline should be placed into three newly

erecled supergroups, with Warring Supergroup

embracme the Collinna ard Burra Groups,

Heysen Supergroup to include the Umbevatana

and Wilpena Groups and Moralana Supergroup

fa include ull fhe Cambrian rocks. Hence he has

added three more names to a sequence which is

already overloaded with stratigraphic aomen-

clature. As slated by Preiss, straligraphic cliassi-

fication in a depositional basin of the size and

duration of the Adelaide Geosynecline is bound

to he complicated, However, it is For this very

reason that authors should bo very careful before

adding yet further stratigraphic names. Addi-

tiona) classification implies that the present one

is Inadequate in terms of the presently aindersiood

geology of the Adelalde Geosynecline. However,

Preiss makes no attempt either to explain where

the present classificatiou 18 inadequate, or to

expla in any detail the need for a supergroup

clissiivation, Indeed it would seem to us that a

controversial siigeestion such us thal proposed by

Peeiss should have heen contained in a detailed

properly documented paper rather than buried in

a “brief communication’,

Preiss! notes that the ouly supergroap nomen-

clature previously upplied to racks of the Adetaide

Geosynctine was the lerm Adelaide Superzroup?,

the type area of which ts In the Adelaitle region,

This term includes the presently recognized Burra

wud Umberatana Groups and part of the Wilpena

Group, ond as noted by Preiss is not particularly

sausfaclory when applied to the whole of the

Adelaide Geosyncline. Preiss then goes on to

stife that there is still a need for a higher-rank

lithostratigraphic terminology for the Adelaide

Geosyncline that is independent of the throno-

stratigraphic scheme. although what this “need”

is he Uoes not state. However Preiss does state

thot because in his view the sediments of the

Adelaide Geosyneline fall inte three major

sequences, cach will ifs OWn lithologic, tectonic

und palicogeagraphie features, and that each is

separated from the preceding sequence by a re-

gional unconformity, then w supergroup classifi-

eution is justified. This scems 16 ta to be siniply

erecling. new siratigraphic numes for the suke of

‘, In uny case there are more serious problems

us Outlined helow,

The proposed Warrina Supergroup embraces

Khe Callanna amt Burra Gronps, However, as

Preiss admits some workers" huye: suggested

that there was wd wiijer tectonic event hetween the

completion of the deposition of the Callanna

Group und the commencement of deposition of the

Burra Group. Indeed, Preiss er al, (p. 333)7

clearly indicate a considerable break between the

base of the Burra Grotip and the top of the Cal-

lanna Group. Despite this Preiss! finds the evi-

dence for a post-Callanna-pre-Burra tectonic event

“inconclusive” and advances somo evidence to sup-

port his position. However. it would seem that in

the presen! slate af uncertainty aboul the regional

relationship between the Callanna and Burra

Groups it would he better to maintain the status

quo rather than lump them within a single super-

group.

The proposed Heysen Supergroup combines the

Umberatana and Wilpena Groups, If a supergroup

nomenclature is ta be established then this is the

least objectionable of the new names. However,

the present arrangement seems perfectly satis-

factory with the Umberstani Group cocompass-

ing the Late Preeambrian glacial and interglacial

sequences whereas the Wilpena Group comprises

the Late Precantbriun post-glacial sequences. [nq

facl to combine them into «a single supergroup

moy obscttre thie essential difference between the

two groups.

The proposed Moralana Supergroup is the

inmost unsatisfaclory of the new names. Preiss

proposes that jt should “include all Cambrian

racks in the Adelaide Geosyneline’, This is in-

correctly introducing a time element into a litha-

stratigraphic classification. In any case we would

sugeest that the srouping of such quile different

rock groups as the Normanyille and Kanmuntoo

Groups into a single supergroup is meorrect. The

rocks within a supergroup should have significant

unifying featores® and apart fram a Cambrian

1Preiss, W, ¥, (1982). Trans, R. Soc, S. Aust.

106, 81-83.

“Daily, KB (19631— Ree S, Aust. Mus. id, 579-

601.

*Kiteh, R, B. (1975). Profenayoic Geology, Geol.

Soc. Ausf Ist. Aust. Geol, Cony. Abst, 6-7.

4AMurvell, B. (1975). Thiel. 8-9

SRowlkainds, Nv J, Blight, P. G.. Sarvis, D. M-

& von der Gore, C. C. (1980) SF geal. Soc.

Aust, 27, 55-68.

"Murrell, B. (1977), Ph.D. thesis, Univ. Adelaide

unpublished),

TPreiss, W. V.. Rutland, BR. W. R, & Murrell, B,

(1981). sa Hunter, DB. (Ed.) “Precambrian of

the Southern Hemisphere", 327-354. (Elsevier:

Amsterdam )- ; ;

Hedberg, He DL (Fd) (1976). “International

Stratigraphic Guide". (Wiley-Inlerscience:

New York),

132

age it is difficult to see what the rocks of the

Normanville Group (essentially shallow water car-

bonates overlain by low energy shales and car-

bonates) have in common with the very thick,

rapidly deposited, sandstones and siitstones, in-

cluding probable turbidites, of the Kanmantoo

Group. Indeed the contact between the Norman-

ville and the Kanmantoo Group at Carrickalinga

Head is very sharp and reflects the Early Cambrian

Kangarooian Movements of Yorke Peninsula and

Investigator Strait? which resulted in a _con-

siderable local unconformity within the Cambrian

succession on Yorke Peninsula, It would seem to

us that the combining of all the Adelaide Geosyn-

cline Cambrian rocks into a single supergroup is

going to obscure, or at the very least oversimplify,

the quite complex relationships indicated by

Daily! between the different Cambrian rocks of

the Adelaide Geosyncline.

Hence we would suggest that the nomenclature

proposed by Preiss is unnecessary and tends to

gloss over significant sedimentary and_ tectonic

differences within the sequences drawn together

in his three new supergroups.

Daily, B. & Milnes, A. R. (1971). Trans. R.

Soc. S. Aust. 95, 199-214.

10Daily, B. (1976). 25th Int. Geol,

Sydney. Excursion Guide 33A, 15-19.

Congr.,

J. B. JAGO and D. B. HILYARD, School of Applied Geology, South Australian Institute of

Technology, P.O. Box 1, Ingle Farm, S. Aust. 5098.

REPLY: LATE PRECAMBRIAN-CAMBRIAN STRATIGRAPHIC

NOMENCLATURE IN THE ADELAIDE GEOSYNCLINE

BY WOLFGANG V. PREISS

Summary

The objections of Jago & Hilyard to my proposed supergroup classification appear not to derive

support form currently recognised stratigraphic codes. The International Stratigraphic Guide (p. 34)

sates: “The term supergroup may be used for several associated groups, or for associated formations

and groups with significant features in common”. The desirability of such a classification became

evident as a result of a compilation of data by the Geographical Survey for a regional synthesis on

the Adelaide Geosyncline. The existing nomenclature of the Adelaide Geosyncline may appear

“overloaded”, but this complication merely reflects the complexity of vertical and horizontal facies

variations in such a large and long-lived basin. I know of no stratigraphic guide that stipulates a

limit to the number of lithostratigraphic names permitted for a basin.

GRIPE COMMUNICATION

REPLY: LATE PRECAMBRIAN-CAMBRIAN STRATIGRAPHIC

NOMENCLATURE IN THE ADELAIDE GEOSYNCLINE

The objections of Jago & Milyard to my pro-

posed suipergroup chissification appear not to

derive support from currently recognised striiti-

pruphic codes: ‘Uhe tnternutional Stratigraphic

Guide! (p. 34) states: “The term sipergronp may

be used for several assoctaed groups, or for

associated formations and groups with sigarficant

feuldres in common’, The desirability of such a

classification became cvident as a resol of

vompilation of data by the Geological Survey

fur a repionul synthesis on the Adelaide Geo-

syneline. The exisiing stratigraphic nomenclature

of ihe Adelnide Geosynchne may appear “over-

loaded", but this complication merely reflects the

complexity of Vertical and horizontal facies varia-

tions in Such & large and long-lived basin. 1 know

of io stratipraphie guide that stipulates a limit to

the number of lithosirutigraphic names permitted

for a basin,

The addition of the new names does noi imply

that the existing nomenclature is inadequate; il

only assembles existing groups and formations

ina lager packages. Jago & Hilyard dispute the

need for such groupings, yet the need has clearly

heen felt by the many authors who have either

adopted Daily term Adelaide Siipergroup, or

have used chranastratieraplie terms such as “upper

Adelaideun” and “lower <Adelaidean” instaad, even

where a lilhosiraugruphic sense was intended, If

Ingo & Hilyard do not find my new terms wseful,

then they wre at liberty to ignore them.

‘The thore specific objections also require come-

men, The most serious pertains to the relationship

between the Callanna snd Burra Groups, which is

admittedly poarly understood Nevertheless, these

groups fave so many clastic and curbonate lacies

if connen thal the differences between them are

mire Of degree than kind, Sedimentation in. both

Was substantially limited t a trough that was

lirgely co-extensrve with the present Flinders

and Mount bofly Ranges, Unconformity between

(hese groups, Where proven, was due to differential

uplift in fosrginal areas. which cun be explamed

by continued tifting and need not invelve a re

giunal deformitional event, nor indeed any inter-

rupuun of depasigon at this time in the depo-

centres. But even if regional disconformity is de-

monstraled by future work, the close facies

ulTinity of the we groups will still permit placing

{hem tote ou single supergroup.

There cum surely be no objection ta grouping

the Umberatuna and Wilpena Graups since the

conticl between them ts a perfeetly conformable

transition, Afthough the Umberalana Group ine

cludes both major glacial sequences, it also con-

tains evidence of a mayor interglacial transpres-

sive-regressive cycle’ which is entirely analogous

to the post-glacial (ransyressive-reeressive cycle af

the lower Wilpena Group.

Thete bus previously not been a term analogous

to Daily’s “Adelaide Supergroup” la cover the

Cumbrian rocks of the Adelaide Geosyrel/ne-

However, the fact that all the units of the Moru-

lana Supergroup are of Cambrian age is in a

sense irrelevant. The same atguments would apply

had deposition ranged continuously into the Ordo-

vician ar younger. T have not, therefore, intro-

Juced a time element into lithostratigraphic classi-

fication, a5 Jago & Hilyard claim. 1} concede that

there may be some argument against placing the

shelf curbonates of the Hawker and Normanville

Groups with the deeper water clastics of the

Kanmantoo Group into the Moralinu Supergroup,

Bul even if the Kunmanioo Grotip were entirely

of turbidile ofigin, i was depositect without sib-

stantial interruption, as a trough developed by

differential subsidence upon the former carbone

shelf. The combinuton of the Hawker Norman-

ville, Kanmantoo and Luke Frome Groups inta a

single supergroup doex nol deny the differences

of depositional sivie belween (these groups, but

implies only that they are more closely pssociated

with éach other than they are with the Heysen and

Warrina Supergroups.

The chissification of rock sequences inlo super-

groups is thus larvely wu matter of judgement us

to the degree of association between (hase se-

quenees, und differences of opinion may be

expected,

This paper is published with the permissiond of

the Director-General of Mines & Fuergy,

Hedberg, WH, D. (1976). “Inlernanonal strah-

eraphic giude’. (J, Wiley and Sons: N.Y.),

“Daily, B. DBD, (1963). Rec. S. Aust, Mus, 4,

S79-00 1.

‘Rothand, RO W. R., Parker, A. 1, Pitt, G2 ML,

Preiss, W. V, & Morretl, 8, (198)) In Hunter,

D. R. “Precambrian of the Southern Hemisphere”

CEseviersAmsterdam b

‘Plummer, POS. (1978). Trans. R. Sec. S&S. Aust.

(02, 25-38.

WOLPOANG Vo PREISS, Deparment of Mines and Energy. Box 191, Baspvoad, SA) Sdea

ADDITIONS TO THE MARINE FISH FAUNA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY C. J. M. GLOVER AND K. L. BRANDEN

Summary

Four fishes are new records for South Australian coastal waters. Three species (Gymnothorax

prasinus, Saurida undosquamis, Tetrapterus angustirostris) are also first records for their respective

families (Muraenidae, Synodontidae, Istiophoridae). All species have been recorded elsewhere off

the Australian coast: two are endemic to Australian waters (G. prasinus, Neatypus obliquus), one is

recorded in northern and southern Indo-Pacific waters (S. undoquamis) and another in waters

around the world (T. angustirostris).

134

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

ADDITIONS TO THE MARINE FISH FAUNA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

Four fishes are new records for South Aus-

tralian coastal waters. Three species (Gymno-

therax prasinus, Saurida undosquamis, Tetrap-

terus angustirostris) are also first recards for

their respective families (Muraenidae, Synodon-

tidae, Istiophoridae). All species have been re-

corded elsewhere off the Australian coast: two

are endemic to Australian waters (G. prasinus,

Neatypus obliquits), one is recorded in northern

und southern Indo-Pacific waters (S. undoquamis)

and qnother in waters around the world (T.

angustirostriy) .

All represent substantial extensions of the

species ranges in the Australian region. For N.

obliqgnus supplementary sightings suggest that its

occurrence reflects a sustained extension of dis-

tribution. Lack of further sightings for the other

species imply strayed individuals from outside

the South Australian region. It is significant thal

all species appeur to be inhabitants of waters

warmer than those which predominate off mosl

of the South Australian coast,

The specimens are deposited in the South Aus-

tralian Museum (SAM).

Family Muraenidae. Gymnothorax prasinus

Muraéna preasina Richardson. 1848, Zool.

Erebus & Terror. 2, Fish, 93.

A single specimen (Fig. 1) was captured in a

craypot at Cape Radstock, far west S. Aust,

(approx. 33°12°S, 134°20’E), during the period

December 1979—February 1980, by Mr R. A.

Grocke.

Voy.

G. prasinus has been recorded previously in

Waters of western and south-western Western

Australia, Victoria, New South Wales, Queensland

and (?) Northern Territory!, unpubl. recs.

Fig. |. Gymnothorax prasinis. SAM F4642. TL

(total Jeneth) 933 mim (Seale in ems),

Family Synodontidae. Saurida wndoquamis

Saurus tndoaquamis Richardson, 1848, Zool. Voy.

Erebus & Terror, 2, Fish, 138-139, pl. 51 figs

1-6,

A single specimen (Fig. 2) was captured in a

prawn trawl net about 12 km south of Venus

Bay, far west S. Aust. (approx, 33°21'S,

134°41'E), early in September 1972, by Mr J,

Zemke.

S. undosquamis has been recorded in waters of

north-western and western Western Australia,

Fig. 2. Saurida undosquamis. SAM F3667. TL 340 min

New South Wales, Queensland and the Northern

Territory2-3:6,

Family Scorpididae. Neatypus obliquus

Neatypus obliquus Waite, 1905, Rec. Aust. Mus.

6(2), 65-66, pl. 10.

Two specimens (Fig. 3) were captured by S.

Aust, Dept. of Fisheries divers at 21.3 m depth

off Smooth Island, near St Francis Island, far

west S. Aust. (approx. 32°29’S, 133°18’E), in

March 1982. Dept. of Fisheries divers also report

having sighted the species off Pearson Islands

(approx. 33°57’S, 134°16’E), Cape Adieu (approx.

32°00’S, 132°09’E), and at 15 m depth at ‘The

Hot Spot’, between Flinders and Ward Islands

(approx. 33°41’S, 134°23’E), far west S. Aust.,

in March 1982.

N, obliquus has been recorded only in waters

of western and south-western Western Australia,

Fig. 3. Neatypus obliquus. SAM F4567. TL

91 mm (largest specimen).

135

between the Houtman Abrolhos islands (off

Geraldton) and the Recherche Archipelago (near

the western extremity of the Great Australian

Bight) 1:3:5-6,

Family Istiophoridae. Tetrapterus angustirostris

Tetrapterus angustirostris Tanaka, 1914-15, Figs

and Descrs. Fishes of Japan, 1914, 18, pl. 88

fig. 285; Ibid. 1915, 19, 324-326.

A single specimen (Fig. 4) was captured by

hand in very shallow water at Hallett Cove, south

of Adelaide, S. Aust. (35°05’S, 138°30’E), on

23 May 1979, by Messrs G. Thomas, B. Rako-

cevic, V. Decasta and J. Centrone. The head

bones were later retained as SAM F4683.

T. angustirostris has been recorded in Australia

only at North Cottesloe and Safety Bay, near

Perth, Western Australia (approx. 31°39’S, 115°

45°E & 32°18’S, 115°43’E respectively), and at

Port Stephens, northern New South Wales

(32°42’S, 152°06’E)78, unpubl. recs.

The latitude of this new record (35°05’S) cor-

responds to the southernmost world distributional

limit reported for T. angustirostris®, This is also

one of the very rare records of the species from

shallow coastal waters: Merrett!® stated that no

specimen had been caught from less than 500

fathoms (911.4 m), although McKay" pointed

out that the Cottesloe specimen appeared to be

the first taken in shallow coastal waters anywhere

in the world.

We thank those persons mentioned for col-

lecting and donating the specimens to the S. Aust.

Museum; Mr K. Jury (Advertiser) and Mr E.

Palmer (S. Aust. Game Fishing Association) for

assistance in connection with the T. angustirostris

record.

“s

Fig. 4. Tetrapterus angustirostris. First specimen caught in S. Aust, TL approx, 1524 mm.

136

IMcCulloch, A. R. (1929-30). Mem. Aust. Mus.

5 (1-4), i-x and 1-534,

2Munro, I. S. R. (1957). Fish. Newsl.

15-18.

8Whitley, G. P. (1948) Fisheries Bulletin No. 2,

1-35. Western Australia Fisheries Department,

Perth.

4Marshall, T. C. (1964). Fishes of the Great

Barrier Reef and coastal waters of Queensland.

Angus & Robertson, Sydney.

*Steene, R. C. (1978). Butterfly and Angelfishes

of the World, Vol. 1 Australia. A. H. & A. W.

Reed, Sydney.

16(6),

SHutchins, B. (1979). The Fishes of Rottnest

Island, Creative Research, Perth,

™McKay, R. J. (1966). W.A. Nat. 10(3), 75-76.

SGoadby, I. P. (1972). Big Fish and Blue Water.

Gamefishing in the Pacific (second revised

edition). Angus & Robertson, Sydney.

*Nakamura, I. (1974). NOAA Tech. Rpt. NMFS

SSRF-675, 45-53.

10Merrett, N. R. (1971). J. Zool., Lond. 163,

351-395,

C, J. M. GLOVER, South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S. Aust. 5000 and K. L.

BRANDEN, Department of Fisheries, 25 Grenfell Street, Adelaide.

ESTIMATION OF SHEEP STOCKING INTENSITY AT ANY LOCATION IN

ARID ZONE PADDOCKS

BY R.T. LANGE

Summary

In the South Australian arid zone, over 60 species of endangered native flora are exposed to sheep

grazing within the wire-fenced large enclosures called paddocks, which the pastoral industry has

superimposed on approximately 220 000 km? of landscape. A problem for botanists who wish to

evaluate the consequences to these endangered species, is how to estimate the sheep stocking

intensities in each of those parts of the paddocks where endangered species occur (Fig. 1). This note

explains an approximate solution.

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

\37

ESTIMATION OF SHELP STOCKING INTENSITY AT ANY LOCATION

IN ARID ZONE PADDOCKS

In the South Australian arid zone, over 60

species of endangered ative Horat are exposed

to sheep grazing within the wire-feneed large en-

closures called paddocks, which the pastorul

industry hus superimposed on approximately

220000 kins of landscape. A problem for botanists

who wish to evaluate the consequences to these

endangered species, is how to estimate the sheep

slocking intensities in each of those parts of

paddocks where endangered species occur (Fig.

1). This note explains un approximate solution.

Fig. 1, Hypothetical large sheep paddock in the

urid vone with endangered plants at R and the

paddock considéred to consist of n equal parts

A, B,C see,

Experiments in that region showed that 145-20)

sheep rouming free jn experimental paddocks of

2-4 ha exhibited the samé behavioural cycle# us

did flocks in adjoining large paddocks. The experi-

mental sheep also tended to deposit egesta wn-

equally on the various party of their paddocks

(divided into [44-30 parts) in propertion to ihe

flocktime which they spent on them, provided

accumulation periods exceeded 2 days.

In 3 experiments each in different years. regres-

sions between egesta recovered from the parts (y

Ke oven dey) versus sheeptime spent on the

parts (y sheep minutes) were very highly signi-

ficun|. Lines of best fit in the 3 experiments were

vo O19 + 0.00054 r2 = 092, n = 30, p <=

0,001 N.S.

y = 019 + 0.00034, re = 0.96, n = Id, p<

0.001 p< (05.

y= 0,08 + 0.00084, re = 0,98, n =

O01 N.S,

The data-set for the first of these equations is

already published": but that for the second 5

7, p<

y LOSQ 1.323) .575 .644 (799 1.191 622

x 1654 3695 649 843 |284d 4132 858

y .682 610 2.004 1.126 1.000 1300 3,826

x» 952 (728 659) 2782 1471 4429 12230

and that for the third is

¥ (135 258 249 669 176 .184 2416 457 354

* 115 547 192 Sot 76 158 S586 422

y 235 406 504 2.935 2.058 9125 O O

» 436 965 980 3105 4427 19552 0 216

The murginally-significant intercept in one ex-

periment (as if some egesta for no sheeptime) is

considered to be an artifact; the two variables are

in weneral directly proportional, Slope differences

reflect differences in pasture condition between

yeurs. There is no impediment to the following

argument, Which requires only proportionality in

the given case, regardless of slope.

In any part of adjoining large industrial pad-

docks, where endangered species occur, stocking

intensity in that part (SIP) over & Biven period

would be

370

area of the part (ha)

paddock flocksize % fraction of total flocktime

Spent in the part (F)

— SIP (ha sheep-!)

Substituting the relevant fraction of paddock

total egesta deposition for F allows an approxi-

mafe soliton of the equation, The egesta fraction

has to be obtained by sampling since industrial

paddocks are too large (2000-20 000 ha} to permit

total recoveries,

Applications indicate that ul typical paddock

stocking rates in the Whyalla region (6-7 hu

sheep-'), yearly SIP may vary from U5 ha

sheep-! or heavier, through all intermediate levels

to 300-sheep-! or lighter. The sheep grazing stress

imposed upon endangered species varies accord:

ingly. Detailed cases and their implications will

be described Jaler.

I Leigh, i, Briggs, J. & Hartley, W, (1981) W.

Anh Nat, Parks and Wildlife Serv. Spec. Pub.

“Moore, P, D, (1976) Nature 262, 6-7,

‘Lange, R. ‘T. & Willeacks, M. C. (1979) Auer,

J. Exp. Agric. An, Husb. 18, 764-767,

KT. LANGE, Dept. of Botany, University of Adelaide, Box 498, CPO, Adelaide, S, Aust. 5001.

SOLUBLE IONS IN RAINWATER COLLECTED NEAR ALICE SPRINGS,

N.T., AND THEIR RELATION TO LOCALLY DERIVED ATMOSPHERIC

DUST

BY J. T. HUTTON

Summary

During the period October 1957 to january 1962, twenty-two samples of rainwater were collected at

Conner’s Well, 100 km north of Alice Springs and analysed in Adelaide using established methods.

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

SOLUBLE IONS IN RAINWATER COLLECTED NEAR ALICE SPRINGS,

N.T., AND THEIR RELATION TO LOCALLY DERTVED ATMOSPHERIC

DUST

During the period Octoher 1957 to January

1%62, twenty-two samples of rulnwuler Were col-

lected ul Connet’s Well, 100 km north of Alice

Springs and analysed in Adelaide using established

methods?,

The composition of the soluble material in the

rain varied greatly as shown by the detailed

results". ‘Table I gives data for three typical

suMples and the weighted average (sum of con-

centration % amount of rain / total rain sampled)

for all samples.

The wvernge unnual rainfall just north of Alice

Springs is about 250 mm, the vegetation is sparse

and the nearest part of the southern Indian Ocean

is 1000 km away. Thus there should be little

oceanic salt suspended in the atmosphere and most

of the ions are likely to be of local origin, The

data i Table 1 confirm this for they show the

ratio of the cations, sodium, calcium, magnesium

and potassium in the rainwater to those in the

Todd River Water is fairly constant and the ratlo

of calcium and potasslum to chloride ti the rain-

water is at least twenty times the ratios of these

ions in seawater.

Three other studies of ruin collected in inland

areas also show the strong influence of the sur-

rounding environment, For cxample, it was con-

cluded from the correlation between nitrate and

chloride and the presence of burnt pasture debris

that the jons in the fain at Katherine, N.T. had

come from plant residues und surface soils! At

Merbein in the Mildura district it has beon shown®

over i period of six summers, 1956 to 1961, the

weight of calcium deposited per hectare in sum-

mer was inversely related to the rainfall recorded

in the disiriet during the two previous springs and

winters—

calcium (ke/ha/3mth) —- 17.9 - 0.080 (av

2yr Jne/Noy rain, mm) 12 = 0,805

In the third case, data show that al Wiluna, in

the arid Murchison District of Western Australia,

the amount of dissolved salts In the rain is about

twenty times that found in the rain at nearby

Meekatharra, Mt Newman and Three Rivers and

this is due to o large salt lake, Lake Way, being

only 10 km south of the town of Wiluna.

Thus inland in semi-arid und arid regions, the

material in the rain ig related to the surrounding

surface—a salt lake near Wiluna, calcareous sur-

face soils surrounding, Mildura, the vegetation and

soils near Katherine and the soils in the Alice

Springs urea with soluble sults represented by those

dissolyed in the Todd River, The soluble material

in the rain is derived from the material suspended

in the atmosphere through which the rain drops

have fallen, Rain, however, falls only occasionally

in these semi-arid regions and so the amount of

moterial in it can represent only a small fraction

of the amount of material of local origin in the

atmosphere throughout » year,

Accessions calculated from the analysis of rain-

woter “re not un absolute uccession to an area but

a small return of a much larger loss of material

suspended in the atmosphere as aerosolic dust.

TABLE L. Soluble ions ie mtin and Vadd iver water, Alice Springs.

Sample Rainfall, Na Ca

15/5/58 6 56 Tay

13/11/58 30 8 20

5/12/60 1s 31 20

Avy. of 22 \4 28 32

Todd River! 23/1051 2A0 450

Todd water g {4

Ratio

AV. rain

Me K cl HCO, SO,

wequiv, litre

50) 25 100 70 BU

i 2 a 24 an

20 8 ia 5)

23 9 24 39 <30

450 100. 40 7 <4

14 ini 6 20 -

'‘Hutton, J, T. & Leslie, To (1958). Aust |

varie. Res. 9. 492

“Hatton, J.T. (£962). CSLRO Diy, Soils, Ade-

laide, Div, Rpt 7/62,

“Williams, W. BD. & Siebert, BD. (1963). Aust

J. Mar. Freshw. Res. 14. 166.

IWetselaar, KR. & Hutton, LT. (1963). Aust. |

agric, Res, 14, 319,

J.T, HUTTON, CSIRO Division of Soils, Glen. Osmond, Present Address

Park, 8S, Aust, 5041.

Wuatton, J. 1) (1980). 7a Storrier, R. R. & Stan-

nmurd, M. &. (eds) “Aeolian landscapes in the

semi-arid zone of south-eastern Australia.” Aust.

Soc. Soil Selence, Riverina Branch. Wagga

Wagga.

Hingston, F. J, & Gailitis, VY. (1977). CSIRO

Diy. Land Resources Management, Perth, ‘Tech.

Mom. 77/1.

17 Bellevue Place, Unley

VOL. 107, PARTS 3 & 4

30 NOVEMBER, 1983

Transactions of the

Royal Society of South

Australia

Incorporated

Contents

Barker, S. New synonyms and new species of Stigmodera (Castiarina)

(Coleoptera: Buprestidae) - = ~ - : 4 27 SSS

Plummer, P.S. Correlation of the uppermost Late Precambrian Succession

across the Torrens Hinge Zone in the Port Augusta region of

South Australia - - - = c . 2 5 > eel

Slansky, E. Halloysite in a weathered profile at Port Macquarie, New

South Wales - - = ‘s i = E - 2 MAT

Kailola, Patricia J. Arius graeffei and Arius armiger: valid names for two com-

mon species of Australo-Papuan fork-tailed catfishes (Pisces,

Ariidae) = - - - - - - - - - - 187

Banks, C. B., Birkett, J. R., Dunn, R. W. & Martin, A. A. Development of

Litoria infrafrenata (Anura: Hylidae) - - - - - 197

Shepley, E. Ann & Womersley, H. B. S. The Dumontiaceae REE SDENEMn Rie,

Rhodophyta) of southern Australia - - 201

Dulhunty, J. A. Lunettes of Lake Eyre North, South Australia - - =. 219

Skinner, S. Some freshwater Chlorophyta from the Bool Lagoon system

in south-eastern South Australia - - - - - a 225

Harvey, C. A new species of Nephrurus (Reptilia: Gekkonidae) from South

Australia. - - - - - - - - - + | o235t

Tyler, M. J., Davies, M. & Martin, A. A. The frog fauna of the Barkly Table-

land, Northern Territory - - - - - - 237

Tyler, M. J., Watson, G. F. & Davies, M. Additions to the frog fauna of the

Northern Territory - - - - - - - - 243

Brief communications:

Mawson, Patricia M. On the status of some nematode species from Australian

birds -- - - - - = 2 : - - =) 247

Riley, G. G., Milnes, A. R. & Bourman, R. P. Landscape models for earth

science research - - - - - - - - = — 249

Wright, M. J. Red-brown hardpans and associated soils in Australia - eae

PUBLISHED. AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS

STATE LIBRARY BUILDING. NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE, S.A. 5000

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

VOL. 107, PART 3

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECIES OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA)

(COLEOPTERA: BUPRESTIDAE)

BY §. BARKER

Summary

Nine new synonyms of Stigmodera (Castiarina): danesi Obenberger 1933 = castelnaudi Saunders

1869; sancta Carter 1913 = cupricollis Saunders 1868; acuta Deuquet 1956 = delicatula Kerremans

1902; georgiana Barker 1979 = domina Carter 1931; canaliculata Blackburn 1892 = erythroptera

(Boisduval) 1835; cognata Kerremans 1898 = insularis Blackburn 1897; equina Blackburn 1892 =

simulata L. & G. 1837; garrawillae Carter 1931 = subgrata Blackburn 1900; opacipennis

Obenberger 1922 = undulata (Donovan) 1805, are recognised. Ten species (S. broomensis, S.

decemguttata, S. hostilis, S. marginicollis, S. sieboldi, S. parvula, S. timida, S. vegeta, S. triramosa,

S. leai) are resurrected from synonymy. Thirty-one new species of the subgenus Castiarina

(alpestris, armstrongi, boldensis, chinnocki, cornishi, dingoensis, eneabba, euclae, forresti,

frauciana, furtiva, goldingi, goodingi, hanloni, hypocrita, jeanae, kalbarri, marginata, powelli,

pseudasilida, pseuderythroptera, scintillata, storeyi, subtestacea, subvicina, supergrata, thurmerae,

tigris, turneri, variegata, yellowdinensis) are described and illustrated in colour. Male genitalia of all

but one are illustrated together with related species. One species given varietal status by Blackburn

is elevated to full species status, Stigmodera (Castiarina) deserti Blackburn 1892, and redescribed.

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECIES OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA)

(COLEOPTERA; BUPRESTIDAE)

by S. BARKER*

Summary

Banker, S. (1983)New synonyms and new species of Stigmodera (Custiarina) (Coleoptera:

Buprestidae). Trans. R. Sov, §. Aust. 107(3), 139-169, 30 November, 1983.

Nine new synonyms of Stigmadera (Castiarina): danesi Obenberger 1933 = ecastelnandi

Saunders 1869: suneter Carter 1913 — eupricalliy Saunders 1868; acura Deuquet 1956 = deli-

catula Kerremans 1902; georgiana Barker $979 = doming Carter 1931; canaliculaia Blackburn

1892 —- eryilroptere (Boisduval) 1835; cegnata Kerremans 1898 = inaulariy Blackburn 1897;

equiva Blackburn 1892 = sinialata L, & G. 1837; garrqwillae Carter 1931 = subgrara Black-

hurn 1900; @pucipenniy Obenberger 1922 — undulata (Donovan) 1805, are recognised, Ten

species (S$. broomernsis, 8. decementiatu, 8, hostilis, So marginicollis, 8. sieboldi, &. parvula,

S. timida, 8. vegeta, S. triramesa, S. leat) are resurrecled from synonymy. Thirly-one new

species of the subgenus Castlarina (alpestris, armisttangi, baldensis, chinnocki, cornishi. dingo-

ensis. eneabha, euclae, forresti, Jrauctana, Jurtiva, goldingi, goodingi, hanloni, lypacrtia,

jeanae, kalbare], marginatu, powelli, pseudasilida, pseudervthroptera, scintillata, storeyi, sub-

testacea, Ssubvicina, supergrata, thurmerae, ligris, turneri, variegata yellowdinensis) are

described and illustrated in colaur Male genitalia of all byt one are illustuated together with

related species. One species given varietal status by Blackburn js elevated to full specific status,

Stiymadera (CCastiarina) desert: Blackburn 1892, and redescribed.

Kry Worps: Coleoptera, Buprestidae, Srizmodera (Castiarina), new species, synonyms,

Introduction

More than 300 species of Stigmodera (Cas-

tiarina) have been described representing about

1/3 of the known Buprestid fauna of Aus-

tralia, They are a difficult group because many

of the early descriptions are inadequate, A

number of mimiery complexes occur and

members resemble each other so closely that

they are frequently confused, and misidenti-

fied. A revision of the sub-genus was cam-

meneed in 1969 and although much has. been

accomplished, completion is unlikely before

L986 when it is anticipated the work will be

published in the South Australian Handbook

series as brief descriptions, illustrations and

keys. Interest in the group is growing and in-

ureased collecting bas produced many new

species. In this paper, 31 mew species are

deseribed and ilustrated together with rede-

scripuions and/or illustrations of 10 species

that are poorly known, A number of types

have been re-examined and some of the

ayhonyms of earlier workers and some of my

own synonyms have been found to incorrect

(Barker, 1979, 1980), These errors are recti-

fed below,

An almost complete collection is available

in the South Australian Museum fer com-

parison,

¥ Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide,

Box 498, G.P.O.. Adelaide, S. Aust. 3001.

New synonyms of Siiemeadera (Castarina)

cdstelnaud? Saundérs 1869, insect. Saund. 3, p. 9.

dunes) Obenberger 1933, Cas ésl, Spal. entom.

30, p73.

cupricollis Saunders 1868, J. Linn, Soc. 8, p, 470.

sancta Carter 1913, Proc. Linn, Suc. N.S.W 437,

p. SO,

delicanida Kerremans 1902, Genera tnsect. 12, Pp.

209,

acuta Deuguet 1956, Proc, Linn. Soe. NSW,

Rl. p. P54.

damind Curter 1931, Aust. Zool. 6, p, 344.

georeiana Barker 1979, Trans. R. Sec, So Aust:

103, p. 7.

erythveptera (Boisduyal) 1835, Voyage de I'Astro-

lobe, p. BB,

canalieulita Blackhumn (892. Trany. Ro Soe. 8,

Aust. 15, p, 51

insularis Blackburn 1897, Trans. &. Soc. 8S. Atsr.

2. p.30.

vornuta Kerremans 1898, Annis. Soc. ent. Bele.

42, p. 136,

simulate L & Ge 1837, Man. Bupr. 2. p. 26,

cyuina Blackburn 1892, Trans, R. Sac, §. Austr,

15, p, 48,

suberata Blackburn 1900. Trevis, R. Sov. 8. atust.

26, p. 41.

varrawillae Carter 1931, Aust. Zool, 6, p, 348.

undulata (Banovan) 1808. Epitome Natural His-

iory Insects New Holland pl. 7, fig, 5,

opacipeaniy Obenberger 1922, Arch. Naturgesch,

1922, 88, p, LTA.

140 5S. BARKER

Species resurrected from synonymy

Barker (1979, p, 15) wrongly synonymised

S$. broomensis Carter 1934 with &. Digutfaret

Macleay 1863, The two species occur on oppo-

sile sides of the continent. 8. froomensis in

north western Australia and 8, Alyurteare in

Queensland, They have a recognisable dif-

ference In their elytra! patterns, §. browersts

is lightly marked while $, bigntrata is more

heavily marked. Male genitalia (Figs 1A, 1B)

differ, the parameres in §. Araamensis being

rounded abruptly to the apex while those of

S. bigittata are gradually rounded to the apex.

1 therefore consider §, broomensis Carter it

valid species.

§, decemputtata Gory 1841 (Pig. 40) was

synonymised with §, verieolor L. & G. L837

{Fig 4D) by Saunders (1871). He was [ol-

lowed by Kerremans (1902), Carter (1916,

1931) and Barker (1979), Obentuirger (1934)

resurrected S$. decemeutiata and listed &. purwa

Saunders as a synonym, Carter (1940) said §.

parva Was nota synonym of 9. decermputtara

bul did not discuss their status, having pev-

viously listed hoth as synonyms of S, versicolar

(Curter, 1931), [T have examined coloured

photographs of the original plates in the

Laporte & Gory monograph and have iwen-

lified specimens of the species depicted, Their

male genitalia (Figs 1C, 1). external mor-

phology, colour and pattern are quite distinet

and indicate that the two species belong to

different species groups. The types of §, parve

Saunders and 4S, subversicolor are conspeerfie

with specimens of §, decemguttata. 1 conclude

that §, decemgurtata Gory is a valid species,

S. parva Saunders ix its senior synonym and

§. subversicalor Carter its junior sywanyr-

Barker (1979, p. 20) stated that &, /eerilis

Blackburn 1892 was & synonym of S, saelttaria

L,& G, (837, L have examined a further series

of specimens attributable to both forms. Male

genitalia (Figs 14, 1H) are slightly different

The apices of the pargmeres and mediai lobe

are more pointed in 8. hostiliy than in S. segil-

fariaq and the apophysis of the basal pico

narrower in &. hostilis than in §. sagitterta. S

hostiliy is senaller chan S. sapitrarfa with red

margins to the elytra which §, saerrraria does

not have, 8, sagitrarla is found only On the

coastal plain W.A., while 8, Jostiliv is found

inland in lower rainfall areas in W.A. Because

of these differenves 1 conclude that S. doxtilis

is @ Bood species

Barker (1979, p. 16) listed 8. marginicollis

Saunders 1868 as a synonym of JS. evanipes

Saunders 1868, §, snarginivellis ts the eastern

member of a species pale ant &. cyanipey

1868 is the western member. In 8. ereryini-

collis the undersurface and femora are red:

brown, the thia and tarsl are blues ia Ss.

cyadipes the wndersucface is dark blac with

the edges of the abdominal segments vanably

red, The lags are blag. Male genitalia differ:

the parameres of 8. marginicalliy (Fig. 41)

are broader than those of §. cyanipes (Fig

13), the apophysis of the basal picce of 8

Nareinicollis i broader and the median lobe is

thicker. Beeause the species are geographivally

separate, hive colour and pattern differences

and the male genitalia are different 1 consider

S&S. marginicollis Saunders to be a valid species.

§. siebold{ L, & G, |837 (Fig. 4F) was first

syhonymised by Kerremans (1902) with §

amphicroa (Hoisdoval) 1835. Carice (1916)

decided Mit S$, aaiphicraa was a synonym of

§, crendia (Donov¥on) 1805 and also &

sieboldi (Carter 1924, 1929). Obenberger

(1928) and Carter (193) synonymised §

stebeld! with §, amphicroa and Carter (19391)

listed S, cremaia as a separate specics. Oben-

ferger (1933, 1934) then resurreetod S. sie-

hold’ as a valid species. Carter (1940) In an

article castigaling Obenberger, stated dwice

that ¥. siebeldi was a synonym of 8. ome

phicroa, “The type of §, weboldi L. & G. is

located ji) the lope Museum, Oxford (Barker,

1979) und is very déstinctive. Although the

elyteal markings arc similar ta those of 8,

crenata, §. seibolili is a smaller species and

has a bripht blue area in the middle of the

vreen-sided pronotum. The pronetum of A.

erenarg is entirely blue, The male genitalia of

8. wiehaldl (Pig, 1K) and external morphology

are distinct froin those of S$. ereneta (Pig, 1b)

an! tadicate thal the lwo speoies belong in

different species proups. t conclude that S-

Nehelei is a valid specs,

Barker (1979, pp, 15) listed §. parvrla

Deuquet 1956 as a synonym of ¥ canaliculaia

Blackburn 1892. 1 have examined the male

holotype of S. eanaliculane and find that it is

a typieal menber of the §. sexplagiata Gory

species group, with triangular genitalia and loss

of tal'sal pads on tafsomeres of legs 2 und 3,

Tt is most likely a small speermen of S. ery-

(hearers (Hoisduval) 1835. 8. parvila Qeuquet

1956 (Pig, IM) has clongate male genitalia

distinct from the triaheular wenitalia of the &.

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECIES OP STIGMODERA 14]

weiplegiata specs wroup (Pigs TP-ES) and in

the male type has tarsal pads present on all

tarsomeres of leas 7 and 3. | conclude &, par-

Vila Deuquet to be a valid species. Th is a

small lycid mimic and is found in central

N.S.W, and in southern Queensland,

Carter (1916, 1929) synonymised S rientida

Kerremans 1898 (Fig. 4G) with §, flavovaria

Saunders 1871. the fatter heing a replacement

name for &. flavagicra L, & G. 1837. Carter

(1931) was able to decide whether 5, rimnia

was n synonym of 8, assieniliy Hope t846 oF ol

S. pueriiiy Keecemans 1898, despite the fact

that &, timida his priority over §, puerilis,

Obenberger (1934) tisted §. Hyde as a

synonym of 8. puerilis, Barker (1979) p, b+)

listed! both species as synonyrns. of SS gsecmailey

Hope, Subsequently Barker (1980, p, 7) estab-

lished §. assimiliy as a synonyor of &. waster

faviae L, & G, AIT and then bisted 8. cence

and 5, puerilis as junior ayionyme af S. gaits

tradavive Ly & G. 1 have re-examines! the

appropriate types wed Gnd that 8. cede and

&, prerilic are synovymous and are a separate

speotes from 8) austrafasiae. The male genitalia

of S_ tenida (Fig. IN) are quite difference from

that ol 5, anstealasiqe (Fig. 10) and place it

in the SS. ehvenfara CRirby} species graup,

These genitalia are slender with a broad

median lohe and nartow paramercs which arc

indented sf the sides pear the apex. Male

genitalia of §. erventata are slightly more

indented at the sides forming a ledge, the

aediin lobe is browder and blunter, §. tienide

oceure In the Blue Mts, N.SW. and in the

Stinthorpe urea, Qld. & crven/are oceurs from

Gippstund, Vie. to sourh-eastern Old. Or is a

slightly smaller species than §. timidn, his

red elytra and very deep blue markings. 8.

verde is dark green with yellow elytra, 1 con

sider §. rimida Kerremans to be a valid species

and S. prerifig Kerremans to be fis senior

synonym,

Carrer (1916, 1929, 1931) listed 8. evrven-

tata (Kirby) ag a synonym of §. vegera Hope,

As uns did not follow the rules of priority

ans! agreeing thar they were synonymous,

Barker (1979) Jisted §. vegera Mone as a

synonym of &, erventata (Kirby), I have pre-

examined the type of §, yegeta Hope and have

found jt distinet from specimens of 8 erventalu

(Kirby) identified by reference to a coloured

lransparency of the type, §, cevenrata has red

elytra and deep blue ovarkings; the ends of the

pre-medial fascia are expanded anteriorly and

posteriorly to the basal and lateral margins.

S. vegeta has orange elylra with black mark-

ings and green or blue-green pronotum and

undersurface, The ends of the pre-medial

fascia are not expanded anteriorly and pos-

teriorly, but the inferior edge of the fascia

reaches the lateral margin, Male genitalia are

similar except that the median lobe in §.

crventata is broader and blunter than in 8.

vegeta. In 8S. Aust. §. vegeta occurs on Kan-

garao Isd, Yorke and Eyre Peninsulas, and in

Victoria in the Ararat district,

Carter (1916, 1929, 1931) and Barker

(1979) syhonymised S$. tyiraniesa Thomson

with S. simulata L, & G. t have found that the

colour and pattern of a distinct species from

South Australia and Victoria conforms with a

coloured photograph of the type af S. trira-

niova Thomson lodged at the MNHN, Paris.

The male venitglia of both species are illus-

trated in Figs 3Q, 3R, The parameres ot &§.

rriramesa are slender and are abruptly rounded

al the apex conipared with those of 8. sinmulata

Which are slightly wider and gradually rounded

at the apex. On the basis of differences in the

nale genitalia and colour and pattern of the

body £ consider 8, rriramosa Thomson ta be

@ good species, Il is re-described and illustrated

(Fig. 7G).

Carter (1919) and Barker (1979) synony-

mised §. leat Carter with S, dimidiata Carter

(Fiz 61). T have examined types of §. dimi-

diara in NMVA and of 8. leai in SAMA and

compared male genitalia (Figs 3D, 3E), Those

of §, dimidiata are larger than those of &.

leai. tn 8S. dintidivns the parameres are nar-

rower at the upex and the apophysis of the

basal piece broader than in S§. Jeai. 8. dimidiata

(Fig. 61) is a larger broader species than S-

leat, Vhe dorsal surface js a brassy green

colou) and there are two yellaw basal spots.

one on each clytron. S. /eai is a smaller nar-

rower species, the dorsal surface is blue-green

ar blue and there are no yellow basal spots.

S, feat occurs in Tasinania and §, dimidiata

only tom mountains in Vic, and N.S.W, On

the basis of these differences I consider S.

leat Carter to be a valid species,

Variety elevated to specific status

S. deserti Blackbur 1892 was deseribed as

a variety of S afelenlis Saunders 1869, Male

genitalia of a specimen attributable to §.

desert! and those of 8. ofricollis (Figs TE, 1F)

are different, 8, atricollis has narrow, clongate

parameres, gradually widened from ihe base

142 S. BARKER

meres, widened out half way from base to

apex with the sides rounded off just before the

from the apex, The apophysis of the basal apex. The apex of the median lobe is pointed,

the sides round away then straighten, The

piece widens out towards the end and is

apophysis of the basal piece narrows towards

spoon-shaped. S. deserti has short, thick para-

vw y «(CF ) :

and rounded off just before the apex. The

median lobe has sides angling straight away

E F G n

‘

\ J K L M N 12)

imm

P Q

Fig. 1. Photomicrographs of male genitalia of Stigmodera (Castiarina) species: A. S$. broomensis,

B. §. biguttata, C. S$. decemguttata, D. 8. versicolor, BE. S, deserti, F. 8. atricollis, G. S. hostilis, H.

S. sagittaria, 1. S, marginicollis, J. 8. cyanipes, K. S. sieboldi, L. S. crenata, M. S. parvula, N. 8.

timida, O, S. australasiae, P, S. tigris, Q. S. frauciana, R. 8. cornishi, 8. S. vulgaris, T. S. thurmerae,

U. S. powelli, V. S. flavopicta, W. S. alpestris.

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECIES OF STIGMODERA

the end. S. deserti is an elongate species and

each elytron has a wide marginal spine. S.

atricollis is comparatively shorter. It has a

sharp, elongate marginal spine on each elytron.

On the basis of differences in the male geni-

talia and external morphology I consider S.

deserti Blackburn a valid species. It is rede-

scribed and illustrated (Fig. 4E).

Barker (1979) listed S. callubriensis Carter

(1931) as being described on p. 367, but in

reality the description is printed on p. 386 in

the journal. In reprints of the article the de-

scription was printed on p, 367, presumably to

save space,

The abbreviations used in the text for

museum and private collections (Watt, 1979)

are as follows:

AHQA Mr A. Walford-Huggins, Mt Molloy, Qld.

AMSA Australian Museum, Sydney. ANIC Aus-

tralian National Insect Collection, C.S.J.R.O., Can-

berra. EAQA Mr E. E, Adams, Edungalba, Qld.

GWNA Mr G. Williams, Lansdowne, N.S.W.

JHQA Mrs J. Harslett, Amiens, Qld. JTINA Mr

J. R. Turner, Hill End, N.S.W. KCWA Mr and

Mrs K. Carnaby, Wilga, W.A. MNHN Museum

Nationale d'Histoire Naturelles, Paris. MPWA Mr

M. Powell, Mr M. Golding and Mr T. M. S. Han-

lon, Attadale, W.A. PIMA Department of Pri-

mary Industry, Mareeba. QMBA Queensland Mu-

scum, Brisbane. RMBB_ L'Institut Royal des

Sciences Naturelles de Belgique, Brussells. RTVA

Mr R. G. Thompson, Elwood, Vic. SAMA South

Australian Museum, Adelaide. WADA Western

Australian Department of Agriculture, South

Perthh WAMA Western Australian Museum,

Perth. ZMHU Museum of Natural Science, Hum-

boldt University, Berlin.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) tigris sp. nov.

FIGS 1P, 4H

Holotype. 3d, 5 km W Petford, Qld, 28.1.1978,

R. I. Storey, ANIC.

Paratype. 3, Desailly Range, 98.6 km N Mareeba,

Qld, 387 m. 13.ii.1973, J. G. Brooks, ‘Iron Bark’,

ANIC,

Colour, Head and pronotum black with bronze

reflections. Antennae, scutellum, undersurface

and legs black. Elytra yellow with following

black markings: basal margin; post-medial

fascia concave forwards; mark covering pre-

apex and apex. Undersurface hairs silver,

collar hairs yellow.

Shape and sculpture, Head closely punctured,

median sulcus, muzzle short. Antennae: seg-

ments 1—4 obconic, 5-11 toothed. Pronotum

closely punctured, small basal fovea extend-

ing forwards as glabrous impressed line almost

to apex, basal notches represented by glabrous

area on each side, closer to margin than to

143

middle, area between each and lateral margin

slightly depressed; apical margin straight, basal

margin bisinuate; laterally parallel-sided at

base, rounded out to widest point before

middle, rounded and narrowed to apex. Scu-

tellum scutiform, faintly punctured, excavate.

Elytra punctate-striate, intervals convex, more

so at apex than base, intervals 1-5 from suture

moderately punctured, smooth, the rest heavily

punctured and rough; laterally angled out from

base, rounded at humeral callus, concave until

after middle, rounded to bispinose apex; both

spines small, margin indented between, apices

diverging slightly.

Undersurface closely punctured, moderately

hairy, hairs short. S$; (Sternite 7) truncate in

male. Male tarsal pads: on legs 2 & 3 absent

on tarsomeres 1-3, each replaced by double

median spine.

Size. Male, 13.3 X 4.8 mm (2).

Male genitalia, Fig. 1P. Largest in S. sexpla-

giata Gory group, typically triangular-shaped.

The apices of the parameres are slightly con-

cave and the median lobe broad and sharp.

Remarks. Largest member of S. sexplagiata

Gory group (Fig. 41). The elytral markings

differ from all other species. The specific name

is derived from tigris L, tiger, alluding to the

colour.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) frauciana sp. noy.

FIGS 1Q, 4J.

Holotype. 3, Pine Creek, Bundaberg, Qld,

14.xii.1975, H. Frauca, ANIC.

Allotype. 2, same data as holotype, ANIC.

Colour, Head, antennae, pronotum black with

blue-green reflections, Scutellum green. Elytra

yellow with red margins and following black

markings: narrow basal margin; pre-medial

fascia expanded anteriorly over humeral callus

and posteriorly obliquely to lateral margin;

broad post-medial fascia expanded anteriorly

at end, touching margin and enclosing yellow

spot between two fascia; small pre-apical

spade-shaped mark extending down suture and

covering apex and spines, all marks connected

down suture, Undersurface blue-green. Legs

blue. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured,

median sulcus, muzzle short. Antennae: seg-

ments 1-4 obconic, 5-11 toothed. Pronotum

closely punctured, basal fovea extending for-

wards to anterior margin as deep impressed

line, basal notch on each side closer to margin

than to middle; apical margin projecting for-

Id4 S, BARKER

wards in middle, basal margin bisinuate;

laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded at

middle ta apex. Sculellum seutiform, few

punctures. excavate in midline, Elytra pune-

tale-striate, seutellary and 3fd interval from

suture faised, convey and glabrous, other

intervals flat in middle, convex at base. inter-

vals 1 and 2 punctured and wrinkled, sub-

glabrous, rest deeply punctured and rough;

laterally sharply augled out trom base,

raunded at humeral callus (widest part), con-

cuve until after middle then rounded and

tapered to bispinose apex; marginal spine

larger ihan sutural spine, margin rounded and

indented between, apices diverging, Under-

surface closely punctured, moderately hairy,

hairs medium length. S; truncate in male,

rounded in fenvale, Male tarsal pads: on legs

2 and 3 absent of tarsomeres |~3, each re-

placed by double median spine.

Size. Male, 98 *% 3.7 mm (1)

Female, 10.5 & 4.0 mm (1)

Male genitalia, Fig, 1Q. Typical triangular-

shape of the §. sexpligiata Gory group, The

apices of the parameres are almost Straight

and the median lobe is narrow and pointed,

The apophysis of the basal piece is broad.

Remarks. A very distinct member of the sex-

Plagiate group. The apical spines ace small and

the ends of the two faseia coalesce forming

two yellow spals in the middle of the clytra,

the only species in the group where this occurs,

Named after Mr H. Fravica, Bundaberg, Qld.

Stiginoders (Castiarina) cornishi sp nov,

FIGS iR, 4K.

Halowpe. dg, Callering Station. Pindar, W.A,

4X 1976. RL PL MoMillan, WAMA,

Aflotype, 2 same data as holotype, WAMA.

Paraiypes, 7 3 & 4 OL same data as hototype,

SAMA, WAMA. 9, 146 km E Neavseman, W,A,.

4x,1977. B. Bruker, SAMAY 4 Balladanin Sin,

W.A. on Myoeporiin platycarmum, 25.198), 8,

Rarkey & PL G. Kempster, SAMY 9, 25 km W

Ballidonia, W.A, Ereniaphila paislevi, (7x1982,

S. Barker, P. G. Kempster & Ny Vanderwonde,

SAMA; 2 3 & ® 18 km SAW Dersllnya ruin, Bal-

ladonia district, W.A. EBremaplitla — scaparia,

22.x.1982. § Barker, P. G, Kenipster & Ay Pane

derwonde, SAMA & WAMA,

Colour, Head, pronotum and undersurface dull

bronze. Antennae, legs, seutellum dark blue.

Elytra red with following black markings with

blue reflections: basal margin; pre-nedial

faseia Which may be broken into central spot

and (va lateral broad spots. one in middle of

each elytran; post-medial fascia reaching

margin, projecting forwards on suture} spade-

shaped mark covering apex, all tmarks con-

nected down suture. Hairs silver,

Shape and sculpture, Head closely punetured

median suleus, muzzle short. Antennae; seg-

ments |—4 obcunic, 5-1! toothed. Pronotum

closely punctured, basal Jovea extending for-

wards as median impressed line; apical margin

straight with well defined collar, basal margin

barely bisinuate; lulerally rounded fram hase,

widest before middle, rounded to apex. Scu-

tellum sculiform, without punctures, excuvale

Elytra, punctate-striale, intervals convex, more

soul apes than base, punctured and wrinkled

more so at sides than in middle: laterally

ungled out from base, rounded at humeral

callus concave then rounded after middle ta

bispinase apex; marginal spine small, sutural

Spine minute, margin rounded and indented

between, apices diverging. Undersurface with

clase shallow punctures, hairy, hairs mode-

rately lony, S- truncute in male, rounded and

indented in middle in female. Male tarsal

pads; on legs 2 and 3 absent on tarsomeres

1-3, each replaced by double median spine.

Size. Males, 9.2 + 0.22 * 3.5 + 0,07 mm

(11), Females, 9.5 = 0.39 % 3,7 + 0.18 mm

(8).

Male genitalia. Fig 1R. Typical triangular-

shaped of the S. serplagiaia Gory group. The

apices of the parameres are almost sirarght and

the median lobe is narraw and pointed. The

apophysis of the hasal picee is narrowed,

Remarks, This species belongs in the $. vex-

plagiata group. WW is closest to S, vuleariy

Carter (Figs 1S. 4L) but differs in having

larger genitalia, the apices of the elytra are

rounded and the apieal spines small. In S.

Vulgaris the apices are more pointed and the

spines larger. S, cornisht has a bronze prono-

tum and undersurface while &. valgariy tas a

blue pronorunt aid undersurface. Named after

Mr W, Cornish. formerly of Pallering Station,

Pindar, W,A.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) thurmerae sp, nov.

FIGs IT, 7¢,

Holotype, 2, 35 km S Diemals, WA, 4I-ati

YR an Grevilled nenitephvila, 8. Wilver,

WAMA

Allarpe. 7. 40 km S Diemals, WA. 31.xii, 198

M. Powell WAMA-

Fardwpes. SF. sime dati as holotype, MPWA;

Murchison District, Wa. Elder Expedition,

SAMA,

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECIES OF STIGMODERA 144

Celour, Head blue, Antennae bronze. Scu-

tellum and undersurface dark blue. Legs dark

blue except bases of femora bronze, Elytri

pale yellow with the following dark bluc mark-

ings; basal margin; post-medial fascia reaching

murgin, projecting forwards in middle of

anterior cdge, posterior edge Concave, project-

mg forwards and backwards on suture; pre-

apical mark covering whole apex, al) marks

connected down suture, Undersurface hairs

silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closcly punctured,

median sulcus, muzzle short. Antennae com-

pressed; segments 1-3 obconic, 4-11 toothed.

Pronolum wilh clase shallow punetures, no

basal foveu, variable median impressed line!

apicul margin projecting forwards strongly in

middle, basal margin bisinuate: laterally para-

llel-sided at base, rounded tess than halfway

to middle then tapered to apex, Seutellim

cordiforn without punctures, excavate in

middie of anterior margin, Elytra punctate-

striate, intervals convex with shallow pune-

tures; laterally angled outwards from base,

rounded at humeral callus, concave until slter

middle, then rounded to bispinose apex; apical

spine larger than sutural, marein rounded and

indented between, apices slightly diverging.

apical margin sub-serrate. Undersurface shal-

lowly punctured, Hehtly haired, S- indented

in middle in both sexes, Male tarsal pads; on

legs 2 & 3 reduced on tarsomeres |—3, small

single median spine present at base of the

redueed pads.

Size. Males, 15.0 2 0.22 & $.2 = O41 mm

(6). Females, 16.7 © 5.3 mm (1)

Male genitalia. Pig, 17, The parameres are

elongate. broadened out and rounded ab the

apex, The median Jabe is marrow and the

apophysis of the basal plece is broad.

Remarks. The colour and pattern of this

species are samilar to those of SS. lengieallis

Saunders. However, 8. leveicellis has rounded

sides to the pronotum while in 8. thirinerae

the sides of the pronotum ure tapered and the

provatum is rekitively longer than jn other

species. The tarsomeres of males resemble the

shape of those faund in males of S. givers

faxciafa Saunders and S$. upton’ Barker. §,

tirmerac cannot be grouped with these or

iiny other species at this time, Named afler Ms

Jennt Winirmer, artist, South Austealir

Museum,

Stigmodera (Castiarina) powelll sp. nov,

FIGS 1U, 5A,

Holoivpe. F, 33 km S Coolgardie, WA. 14:xi,

1980. Af. Powell, WAMA,.

Allotype. 2, 48 km S Coaoleacdie. W.A. 14,4), L980,

T, MOOS, Hanlon, WAMA,

Paralypes. &, 48 km S§ Coolpardic, WuA. Ld4.xi-

1980, M. Powell, SAMA: 9 same data as allo-

type. MPWA; 2 2, S, Aust, SAMA,

Color, Head green at base, bluc-green muzzle,

Antennae blue-green, Pronoun laterally blue

green, green in middle of each side, black with

bronze miurgit i centre, Scutellum black with

bronze reflections, Elytra pale yellow with fol-

lowing black markings: narrow basal margin;

triangular spot at base on each side with

blunt apex pointing to suture representing an

incomplete basal faseis: post-medial fascia

reaching margin convex forwards. concave

backwards; mark covering pre-apex and apex,

last two marks conneeted down suture. Under-

surlace and legs blue-green. Hairs silver,

Shape and sculpriire, Head closely punctured,

broad shallow median suleus, muzzle short anc

broad, Antennue: segments 1-3 obconic. 4 f-

toothed, 5-11 toothed, Pronotm closely punc-

tured, Very small buyal fovea extending for-

Wards us thin glabrous line until after middle:

apical margin straight, basal margin bisivuale;

laterally parallel-sided at base, round and

broadest before middle, tapered to apex. Seu-

fellim seutiform, punctured, Mat, Elytra pune-

lale-strite, intervals convex with shallow

punctures; laterally angled out from hase,

rounded at humeral callus, concave reaunded

after middle to hispinose apex! marginal spine

short and thick, sutural spine minute. margin

indented between, apiees slivhtly diverging,

Unidersurface with close shallow punctures,

very short sparse hires, S- rounded in both

scXey, Male tarsal pads: on legs 2 & 3. reduced

on tarsomeres | & 2.

Size, Males, 88 = O59 © 3.2 = OF my (2),

Females, Ya 0.5 > 3.5 © 02 tm (4),

Male yeniretia, Fig. 1U. The sides of the para-

Mieres ate wolehed as in § flavepica | Bars-

diival) (Pie TV) but dhere is a greater die

lanee between the noteh and the spex of the

parameres. ‘The median lobe jn S&S. powell’ is

rounded whereas im S. flavepiera it is angled

at the lip,

Remarks. Member of 3. fhitvepict “raup he-

cause of similuctics in male cenitalla and

external morpholoey, Nanied aller Mr M.

Powell, Attadale, WA.

146

Stigmoderg (Castiurinn) alpestris sp. nov,

FIGS 1W, 6D.

Halawpe. ¢, Upper Tumut Gorge, NSW,

Si 1957, 1477 mf, G. Filmer, OMBA.

Allotype. 2, MU Kosciusko, N.SW. 27,11, 1951,

& F Wilson, NMVA,

faratypes. Dd. sutie data as holatype, QMBA; 3.

Lob's Hole, Tumut KR. 1.1955, 523 m, Sedlacek.

ANIQ, 2 of. sume dita as alloltype, NMVA &

SAMA; 9, Mt Kosciusko, N.S.W, 111951, Ag. Ww.

Mules, NMV As 2 do. Mt Buifalo, Vie. 134.1955 &

24,1, 1955, AN, NMVA; ¢. no data, NMVA,

Color, Head, antennae, pronotum, scutellom,

undersurface aml legs boight green with gold

reflections. Elytra deep yellow with following

dark green markings; basal margia; broad pre-

medial fascia reaching lateral margin enclosing

hasal yellow spot and one on margin: broad

post-medial fascia; mark covering pre-apex

and apex: all marks connected down suture.

Hairs silver,

Shape dnd sculprvre, Heal closely punctured,

median sulcus, muzzle short. Antennac: seg-

ments 1-4 ohbconic, 5-11 toothed, Pronotum

closely punctured, very small slit-like basal

fovea projecting to middie as thin glabrous

line, then to margin as inipressed ling; apical

margin projecting forwards in imiddle, basal

margin bisinuate; laterally rounded from base

to apex, widest before middle. Scutellum seus

tiform, punctured, flat, Elytra punctate-striate,

intervals flat m middle, convex at apex, with

shallow punctures; laterally angled out from

base, rounded at humeral callus, concave then

rounded to bispinose apex; marginal spine

thick and blunt, sutural spine minute, margin

indented and rounded between, apices slightly

diverging. Undersurface with shallow pune=

tures, very short hairs. S- truncate in both

sexes, Male tarsal pads; en legs 2 & 3 reduced

ou tarsomeres | & 2.

Size. Males, 9.1 2 0.33 * 32 = 01 mm (8),

Females, 9,0 * 3.4 mm (2).

Male genitalia, Fig, 1, Lateral edges of para-

meres indented near apex. Median lobe with

sharp apex, hroadening further down,

Remarks. Momber of 8, crventata (Kirby)

species group because of similarities in male

genitalia and external morphology, The two

Victorian specimens and one from Mt Kus-

ciusko have a peacock blue pronotum The

specific name is derived from mipesiis L,, of

high mountains,

S. BARKER

Stigmodersy (Castiarina) dinguensis sp. nov.

FIGS 2A, 5B.

Holoiype, 3d. 107 km N Dingo. Qld 104, 1979,

IS Adams & §, Barker, SAMA 1 21 138.

Purutypes, 4 & & 2 F, same data os holotype.

SAMA,

Cofouwr. Head, antennae, scutellum and prono-

ium bright green with yellow or reddish reflec-

tions. Undersurface and legs bright green,

Blytca ivory with thin dark brown basal

margin.

Shape ard sculpture, Head closely punctured,

mechan sulcus, muzzle short. Antennae; see-

ments |—3 obconic, 4 4-toothed, 5-11 toothed.

Pronotum closely punctured, small narrow

basal fovea, basal notches obscures apical

margin projecting in middle, basal margin

hisinuate; laterally rounded fram base, widest

before middle, rounded and narrowed to apex.

Scutellim seutiform, punctured, flat, Elytra

punctate-striate, intervals slightly convex,

lightly punctured; laterally aigled outwards

tram base, rounded at humeral callus, slightly

concave, rounded after middle then narrowed

to bispinose apex; marginal spine larger than

sulural, margin rounded and indented between.

apices diverging. Undersurface closcly punc-

(ured, moderately hairy, hairs short, S; trun-

cate in both sexes. Male tarsal pads: on legs

2 & 3 absent on tarsomeres 1-3, cach replaced

hy single median spine.

Size, Males, 7.3 = 0.26 % 2.7 + 0,09 mm

(4). Females, 7.6 * 3.0 mm (2).

Mate genitalia, Fig, 2A, Same general shape as

in S. dispar Blackburn (Fig. 2B). but the

median lobe is more acutely angled at the

apes than in §. dispar and the apophysis of the

basal piece is narrower.

Remarks. The colour, body shape and genitalia

ure similar to those of 8. dixpary which is a

larger species und males do not have modified

(ursal pads. Beeause of the last feature | am

Unable to plaice this species in a species proup,

The species name is derived from that of the

type locality,

Stigmodera (Castiarina) hypocrita sp. tov.

FIGS 2C, 5C,

Holotype. 4, Mt Spec, Qld 4.11966, BE. E,

Adams, SAMA I 2) 139

Alorype, 9, Kuranda, Old xi.1961, J, G&, Brooks,

ANIC.

Nearatvypes. Olde 2 3, Mt Spec. 6 & 9.1.1964, BL

Adams, PAQA; 3, Mt Spec, i1966, J.. G. Brooky,

AHMA; 9, Mt Spee, 121.1966, J, G, Breaks,

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECIES OF STIGMODERA

P Q R Ss

147

T U Vv Ww

Fig. 2. Photomicrographs of male genitalia of Stigmodera (Castiarina) species: A. S. dingoensis,

B. S. dispar, C. S. hypocrita, D. S. flavosignata, E. S. goldingi, F. S. furtiva, G. S. scalaris, H. S.

eneabba, I. S. subtestacea, J. S. testacea, K. 8. marginata, L. S. kershawi, M. S. yellowdinensis, N.

S. alexandri, O. S. cruenta, P. S. storeyi, Q. S. armstrongi, R. S. supergrata, 8. S. grata, T. S. forresti,

U. S. elderi, V. S. goodingi, W. S. aurolimbata.

AHMA,; 2, 19 & 16 km W Paluma, Ewan Rd, Mt

Spec, 10.1.1968, & 8.1.1969, J. G. Brooks, ANIC;

3, Windsor Rd, via Mt Carbine, 11.11.1978, R. J.

Storey, PIMA; 34, 42 km N Mt Carbine, 7.i.1978,

R. I. Storey, PIMA; 5, 9 km W Mt Molloy, 30.xii.

1981, J. & D. Gardner, SAMA; 3, Kuranda,

French collection, NMVA,

Colour, Head and antennae black. Pronotum

orange-brown with the following black mark-

ings: fascia before middle, ends extended

downwards, connected to mark along basal

margin by thin median line; forward exten-

sion from basal notches on each side, not

148

reaching ends uf pre-medial fascia, Scuteltum

black. Elytea red-brown with following black

markings; basal nyuirgin; clongate vitta on each

hunveral callus; large post-medial mark cover-

ing pre-apical and apical arca, this can be con-

nected to the vitlae, anterior border connected

to this mark down suture, expanded in middle

ta diamond-shaped mark, Undersurface red-

brown with sutures and edges of abdominal

segments black, legs black with ble refiec-

tions, Hairs silver,

Shape and sculprire. Head closely punctured,

with very short sparse hairs, median sulcus,

muzzle short. Antennae: segments I-3

obcomc, 4411 toothed, Pronotum closely

punctured, basal fovea extending forwards to

middie as glabrous line, basal notches closer

to margin than middle; apical margin straight,

basal margin bisiruate; laterally parallel-sided

at base, rounded before middle, then tapered

ly apex. Scutellum sculilorm, punctured, Mal,

Elytra punctate-striate, intervals convex more

so at base and apex than in middie, deeply

punctured and wrinkled: laterally angled out

from hase. rounded at humeral callus. concave

then rounded after middle to spineless apex;

apices rounded and diverging, apical margin

subserrale. Undersurface with shallow puno-

tures. sparse very short hair. S- rounded in

both sexes,

Size. Males, (2.3 = 0.28 © 5,0 + (ht4 mm

(9), Females. 14.5 *~ 6.0 mm [4)-

Mule genitalia, Fig, 2C, Overall size larger

than i §. flavosignata MacLeay (Fie, 2D),

The parameres are paralicl-sided towards the

apices, the median lobe is narrower and blunter

than in flavesiguara and the apophysis of the

basal prece is broaver,

Remarks, This species belongs in the S. flave-

siguara species vroup. It is a Jarger species

with black and brown markings. whereas S-

flavosignata hos red yind blue markings. Both

species appear lo be bug mimics bul the

models fave not been identified. The specific

fname is derived from dAypocrira 1... dissembler-

Stigmodera (Castiarina) goldingi sp. nov.

FIGS 2E, 5D,

Molorype. &, 20 km N Coolpardie, WA. 20.x.

1979, M. Galding, WAMA,

Paratype. 3,20 km N Coolgardie, WA, 20 «1979,

Mt Pawell, MPWA,

Colour, Head blue-green, Antennae: segments

! & 2 blue-green, Test bronze. Peonotum blue.

&. BARKER

green in middle, pale red at Jateral margins,

Seutcllum blue, Elytra pale red with Following

hlick markings with blue reflections; narrow

basal margin; vith at each humeral callus and

an-expanded spot on suture, all remnants of

a premedial {usctay past-medial fascia reach-

ing Margin expanded forwards and backwards

al suture and m middle of cach sides mark

covering whole pre-apex and apes, all marks

connected down suture, Undersurface;

steraum blue; abdomen blue base, rest red;

legs blur with blue-green tarsi. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture, Wead closely punctured,

broad mediati suleus, muzzle short, Antennae:

segments [-3 obeonic, 4-11 toothed. Prono-

tum, close shallow punetures, small basal fovea

extending forwards as thin glabrous line to

middle then as impressed line almost to mar-

gin, upical margin projecting forwards broadly

in middle, basal margin barely bisinuate;

laterally parallel-sided al hase, rounded oui

and bulbous before middle, tapered lo apex.

Seutellum — scutiform, without punctures,

glabrous, excavate in midline, Elytra punctate-

striate, intervals conyex, more so at apex than

jo middle and punctured, those at sides more

heavily than i middle; laterally parallel-sided

al hase angled outwards, rounded at humeral

callus, concave, rounded ulter middle and

tupered to spineless apex} apical-sutural margin

lidented, apices diverging, Undersurtace with

close shallow punctures, moderately hairy,

hairs medium length, S- rounded im mule,

Size, Males, 13.8 ¥ 5.4 mm (2),

Male genitalia. Pig. 2E. The sides of the para-

meres ate nearly parallel before the apex and

at the apex are rounded. The median lobe is

broad und (he apex is wide angled. The apo-

physis of the basal picce is broad,

Remarks. 1 am uuable to place S$. yoledingi in a

species. group, Named after Mr M- Golding,

Sydney.

Stizmodera (Castiarina) furtiva sp, nov,

FIGS 2F, 5B.

Holotype, 3, Tammin, WA, ff, BY Brows,

ANIC.

Allotype. &, Konnongorring, W.A. 1,xt,1956, 9

Barker, SAMA I 21 143,

Paratypes, WAS 29 Red Bluff, WLA, Tei 971.

N. McFarland, ANIC, ¢, Tanimin, A.W. Brawn,

ANIC: ¢@ & 9, Beverly, EF. du Boulay, SAMA:

& ANIC, 4, Bolgart, 19,xi,1978, M, Powell,

MPWA; 2 2, no data, SAMA: 2 ¢ & 9, Mullewa,

WAMA,; 3 of & 39, 36 km N-E Wubin, 18.%.1977,

Rov. Richards, WADA; 4 23 & 9, 60 km N-E

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECIES OF SIIGMODERA

Wubit, 18.4,1977, &. Tt, Riehards, WADA, 4 &

39, 64 km N-B Wubin, 18.4.1977, A. 7, Richards,

WADA: 2 ¢, 72 km N-E Wubin, 22.x1,1977, & 7,

Richards, WADA; ¢, Like Bryde, 23.81.1972,

K. T, Richards, WADA; 3 dt & 9, Lake Grace,

23,xi.1972, K. 7, Richards, WADA; 13 d_& 4 9,

East Hyder, 24.41,1977, K. 1. Richards, WADA;

4,25 km § Lake King, LS.9t.1980, TL A S$. Har

lon, MPWA; 2, 110 km E Southern Cross, 20.2.

1979, D, Kruowles, MPWA, % Lake Ningham,

WAMA,

Colour, Head and antennge bronze. Pronoium

bronze with or without blue reflections at

margins, Scutellum, undersurface and legs

deep blue, Elytra orange with fallowing black

markings with blue reflections! marrow basal

margin; pre-medial fascia nol reaching margin

and pointing forwards at each end: post-medial

fascia reaching margin projecting forwards in

middle from anterior edge on each side; pre-

apical murk connected along suture to post-

medial fascia and spines, Hairs silver,

Shape and sculpture, Head closely punctured,

median suleus. muzzle short Antennae: sep-

ments 1-4 ebeune, 5-11 toothed. Pronatum

closely punctured, small basal fovea, basil

notches on each side closer to margin than to

middle: projecting torwards slightly in middle

of apical margin, basal margin barcly be

sinuiate: laterally angled inwards from base

then rounded hefore middle, rounded and

narrowed to apex. Scutcllum. scutiform, pune-

tured, aliterior margin excavate, Elytra pune-

tale-striale, intervals rounded more so al apex

than base, faint punctures; laterally angled out

slightly from hase, rounded ut humeral callus,

concave then rounded after middle and tapered

jo hispinose apex: spines equal margin

rounded and indented between. Undersurface

clascly punctured, moderately hairy, hairs

short, 8; truncate in tiale, faintly bilebed in

female.

Qire, Males, YO > 0.13 » 345 > 0.06 min

(40). Females, Wa © 0.21 % 3.7 © Ob mm

(20),

Male venitalia Fig, 2P. The genitalia are

curved upwards along the longitucinal axis.

At the sides the parametes are bulbous before

the apex, At the apex the parameres and the

rmicdian lobe are nartowed, The apophysis of

the basal piece is clongate and narrowed, Simr-

lanities with the genitalia of S. sealants | Bois-

duval) (Fiz, 2G) are the shape of the median

lobe and the curve along the long axis, §

soufaris however, has rounded not bulbous

sides to the porameres und the mediau lobe

is broneder,

tay

Remarks, Belongs in ¥. senlaris species group

on the basis of similarities in male genitalia

and external morphology, This species has

heen confused wilh olhers because of similari-

ties in clytral markings The speeific name is

derived from furtiva L;, Conovaled.

Stigmodera (Casytiarina) desetti Blackbary

1892.

FIGS LE, 42,

Stigmadera desert’ Blackburn, 1892, p, 36, Chen-

berger, 1934: p, 699,

Stignindera alricollis Blackburn, 1892, p. 3h.

Carter 1931; p. 364, 1940; p, 387,

Holatype, Not looted,

Colotir, Heal, antennae, pranotuim, scutellum,

undersurfaee and legs dark blue. Elytra yellow

with (ollowing dark blue markings: narrow

basal margin; pre-medial fascia expanded for-

wards in middle of anterior cdge and preyect-

ing lorwards and backwards at end nat reach-

ihe Margin, in some specimens reduced to a

spot on cach humeral callus and one on suture,

post-medial fascia reaching margin, projecting

forwards in middle of anterior edge, coneave

backwards; mark covering apex and spines, oll

marks connected down suture. Plains silver,

Shupe and sevlprure. Head close shallow pune.

tures. shsllow median suleus, eyes bulbous,

muazle shorl, Aniennac compressed; segments

JA obeunie, 4-11) toothed. Pronotuim

shallowly punctured, minute basal fovea; pro-

jectingy forwards broadly in middle of apical

margin, basal margin almost straight; laterally

parullcl-sided at base then broadened and

roulded after middle and narrowed to apex.

Sculellum seuliform, without punctures, flat,

Elyua punetate-steiate, intervals flat in middle

convex at sides and apex: laterally shehtly

angled out fiom base founded at humeral

catlas, straight until after middle, rounded and

tapered to pre-apex then rounded 10 hispinase

{pex) Marginal spine larger than minute sutural

spine, margin angled and indented between,

apices diverging. apieal marein sub-serrate,

Undersirface with shallow punciures, sparse

shore has S- thuneate in male. round in

fernale,

Size, Males, 6.9 ©

“2.0 mm (1),

Specimens enantined WA, 4, Yampie Gorge,

26Ni.1967, F. NL Uther Baker, SAMA A Car-

narvon, 24.vini L978, KR. P. MeMillin, SAMA: & &

chisan, SAMA: of, Willenoom Gorge, 23.vi,1972,

NAL Huile WAMA,

2.4 mim (4), Female, 6.5

150)

Remarks, Belongs in 5. atricollis Saunders

species erouip, bul is a much smaller species

and male genilalia differ (p. 142)-

Stgmodery (Custiarina) eneabba sp, nov,

FIGS 2H, 5F,

fIplolype. dod. Eucabba, WA.

& Carnaky, SAMA,

fllotype, 9, 60 — BK Hyden,

Krowles, WAMA

Pararyyes., W.A.: 2 @, Eneubba, &. & &. Curaahy,

KCWA: @, 98 im F Southern i ross, Boorabbin

Rocks N. ae 3.x,1981, R. Thorpe, MPWA,

Colour. Heal, antennae, pronotum, seutellun.

undersurface and legs bright green, Elytra yel-

low with following black markings: narrow

bisal margint either small spot on ¢ach

humeral callus and larger pair close together

on either side of sulure, or with one of cither

pair missing, remuants of pre-medial taseia;

post-inedial Fascia reaching margin, projecting

forwards on suture; mark covering apex and

spines, Connected along sulure to post-medial

fuscia, Hairs silver.

10.x.1970, K. &

13.x.1981, D.

Shape and seulptere, Head closely punctured,

broad median sulcus, muzzle very short.

Antennac compressed: segments |—3 obconic,

a-1! toothed, Pronotum closely punctured,

minute basal fovea extending forwards as

glabrous line to middle, basal notches repre-

sented by glabrous areas on Gach side: apical

martin projecting forwards i middle, basal

niacin bsinuale; laterally gently angled out

wards until after anidedle then rounded 16 apex,

Seutellum scutiform, glabrous, flat, Elytra

pulictate-striale, mlervals slighily convex at

hase more sa at apex, deeply punctured ot

sides, shallowly in middle; laterally angled out-

wards from base, folinded at humeral callus

concave then rounded atter middle, narrowed

lo bispinose apex; marginal spine sharp, sutural

spine minute, margin rounded and trdented

between, Understirfice hairs very short and

sparse. S» broadly truneate in male, narrowly

truncate in female,

Slee. Males, 10.8 + 0.15 *K 3.5 =

(4), Female, 12.8 * 4,3 mm (1),

Male veniialid. Fig. 2A. The parameres arc

rounded and nanow towards the apex while

those of & afrivalliy Saunders (Fig. 1F)

broaden out before they round off at the apex.

The apex of the median lobe is sharp and

broadly angled while the apophyses of the basal

piece ms slightly broader than that in arricollis,

0.07 tom

5. BARKER

Remarks, This species belongs in the atricallis

species group as the genitalia show similavities

to avricalliy aud the external niorphology is

similar, They are quite distinet as apart fron)

the olytra, the test of the body is green while

in viricallis it is blue. The specific name is

derived from the name of the type locality,

Stigmodera (Castiarina) subtestacea sp, nov.

FIGS 21, 5G.

Helotvpe, oy Piawanning, W.A,.

RP. McMillan, WAMA.

Allatype. 9, same data as holotype, WAMA.

Paratypes. W.AS 2 3, same dats as ljolotype,

SAMA; @ & 9, Perth, xi1.1953, £.8., SAMA; 4,

i6 km 8 Borden, 27.1,1956, J. 4, £, Parson.

SAMA; 3 od. Lake Grace, SAMA, d, Lake Bryde.

16,x11,1974, K.P, Richards, WADA 3, 20 km N

Halters Hill, 23.1975, K, Richards, WADA;

do & & Lake Grace, 20. i930. Ho OW, Brows,

NMVA; ad & 3 2 Lake Grace, Ho WL Brown,

NMVA; 4.0, Luke Grace, H.W, "Rrawn, WAMA,;

3 ¢ & %, Cranbrook, 4.1.1954, 4. Douglas,

WAMA, o&, Dedari, MW. W Brown, WAMA: 2 od &

2, Piawanning, WAMA: 4, Kukerin, WAMA; 3

f & 9 Kojonup, 311978, RK. P, MeMillan,

WAMA; 3 o, Kojonup, 1,),1979. R. P, McMillan,

WAMA, 4 o & 3 Y Kojonup, 3.7.1979, R. P

McMillan, WAMA, S. Aust.c 2, no data, SAMA,

Colour. Head brown, Antennae, pronoturn,

scutellum, undersurface and Teys testaceous

with transparent spotting. Elytra the same,

most specimens with brown apical mark, Hairs

silver,

281.1951,

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured,

shallow median suleus, muzzle short. Anten-

nae: segments 1-4 obconic, 5-11 toothed, Pro-

Hotum closely punctured, small basal fovea,

basal notches on each side, closer to margin

than to middle: apical margin straight, basal

margin bisinuate; laterally rounded from base

tq apex, widest before middle then narrowed

to apex, Sculelhum scutiform, small, without

punctures, flat. Blytra punctate-striute, inter-

vals convex; laterally slightly angled out from

base, rounded at humeral callus (hen straight

unt after middle, round and tapered to bi-

spinase apex; marginal spine larger than

sutural, margin rounded and indented between,

apices diverging. Undersurtace closely and

shallowly punctured, sensory bristles on either

side of midline on meso- and meltasternum in

male, rest virtually hairless except for ventral

collar. S; truncate in male, rounded in female.

Size. Males, 7,6 = 0.09 * 2.7 + 0.03 mm

(36), Femnles, 7.9 © 12t * 2,7 + 0.07 mm

(12),

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECIES OF STIGMODERA 151

Male genitalia, Fig. 21. The sides of the para-

meres are angled outwards near the apex and

then rounded off. The median lobe is sharp

and broadly angled and the apophysis of the

basal piece is slightly elongate compared with

that of S. testacea Saunders (Fig. 2J).

Remarks. In an earlier paper (Barker, 1979)

I erroneously placed 9 of the above specimens in

the new species §. crockerae. This is a smaller

species than §. crockerae and resembles S.

testacea Saunders more closely but is not

costate. S. testacea, S. crockerae, S. subtes-

tacea and S. nigriceps Barker seem to be

members of a ring species complex. They are

all cryptic as they mimic the colour of the

eucalypt flowers on which they are found. The

locality label on the single male in the SAMA

collection designated from S. Aust. may be

incorrect. The specific name is derived from

sub L., under testacea.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) marginata sp. nov.

FIGS 2K, 5H.

Holotype. 3, Sellick’s scrub, Aldinga, S. Aust.

24.x.1978, 8. Barker, SAMA I 21 144.

Allotype. 9, Sellick’s scrub, Aldinga, S. Aust. 31.x.

1978, P. Christy, SAMA T 21 145.

Paratypes. S. Aust.: 15 o, same data as holotype,

SAMA; 6, same data as allotype, SAMA; 3 2,

S-W River, Kangaroo Isd, 23.xi.1967, S. Barker,

SAMA; @, Edillilie, Eyre Peninsula, 7.xii.1968, N.

McFarland, SAMA; @, Upper Torrens Gorge,

4.xi.1967, S. Barker, SAMA; & & 9, Sellick’s scrub,

Aldinga, 27.x.1972, S. Barker, SAMA; & & 9,

Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Isd, 27.xi.1972, §,

Barker, SAMA; 6, Pt Lincoln, 16.xi,1974, §,

Barker, SAMA; o, Uraidla, 26.xii.1974, A. Wells,

SAMA; 4@, Sellick’s scrub, Aldinga, 4,xi.1978, S.

Barker, SAMA; @ & 2 9, Flinders Chase, Kan-

garoo Isd, 29.xi.1978, S. Barker, SAMA; 3 & & &,

Pt Lincoln, Blackburn, SAMA; 2, Murray Bridge,

SAMA; 9, Kangaroo Isd, J. G. O. Tepper, SAMA;

®, Lucindale, SAMA; 9, SAMA, 2 9, Aust. W.

White, SAMA; 3, xi.1901, French, SAMA; ¢& & @,

no data, SAMA,

Colour, Head blue, Antennae green. Pronotum

blue. Scutellum, undersurface and legs deep

blue, Elytra pale yellow with red lateral mar-

gins and the following black markings with

blue reflections: narrow basal margin; pre-

medial fascia expanded forwards to humeral

callus not touching margin: post-medial fascia

touching margin projecting forwards on suture;

mark covering apex and spines, all marks con-

nected down suture. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured,

broad median sulcus, muzzle short. Antennae:

segments 1-4 obconic, 5-11 toothed. Pro-

notum closely punctured, shallow basal fovea;

apical margin straight, basal margin bisinuate;

laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded before

middle, then tapered to apex. Scutellum scuti-

form, punctured, flat. Elytra punctate-striate,

intervals convex, more so at base than apex,

punctured and wrinkled progressively more so

from suture to margin; laterally angled out-

wards from base, rounded at humeral callus,

concave then rounded after middle and

tapered, angled inwards just before bispinose

apex; marginal spine sharp, sutural spine

minute, margin rounded and indented between,

apices diverging, most of margin punctured

and rough. Undersurface closely punctured,

moderately long dense hair. S; truncate in

both sexes.

Size. Males, 10.3 + 0.13 X 3.8 + 0.05 mm

(33). Females, 10.5 + 0.23 X 4.2 + 0.12 mm

(13).

Male genitalia, Fig. 2K. The sides of the para-

meres are angled out more than in S. kershawi

Carter (Fig. 2L) and the apophysis of the

basal piece is shorter. The median lobe is

sharp and the sides angled at the same degree

as in S. kershawi.

Remarks. This species belongs to the S. bella

Saunders species group of which S. kershawi

Carter is also a member. S. kershawi has red

elytra and occurs in high country in Vic. and

N.S.W. S. marginata has yellow elytra with red

margins and occurs at low altitude in South

Australia. The specific name is derived from

marginatus L. enclose with a border and

alludes to the red margin.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) yellowdinensis sp, nov.

FIGS 2M, SI.

Holotype. 3, Yellowdine, W.A. 8.i.1980, M.

Golding, WAMA.

Allotype. 2, 8 km E Yellowdine, W.A. 13.xi.1980,

M. Powell, WAMA.,

Paratype. &, same data as holotype, SAMA.

Colour, Head, antennae, pronotum, scutellum

and legs bronze. Elytra yellow with following

black markings with blue reflections: narrow

basal margin; oblique spot on each humeral

callus and post-medial spot towards margin

but not touching it, elongate spot at same

level on suture; small mark covering apex,

heavy mark from scutellum down suture not

reaching middle. Undersurface: sternum

bronze; abdomen testaceous, Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured,

median sulcus, muzzle short. Antennae: seg-

ments 1-3 obconic, 4-11 toothed, Pronotum

[52 5, BARKER

closely punctured, Small basal fovea extending

forwards ta middle as thin glabrous line, basal

Hoteles represented by small glihrous ares

apical margin projecting forwards in nviddle.

basal margin barely bisinuates laterally parallel-

siled ar base, rounded to widest point before

middle, tapered to apex. Scutellum seutiform,

punctured, flat. Elytra punctate-striale, inter-

vals convex and punetured; laterally parallel

sided at base, angled outwards then rounded

al humeral callus, concave, rounded after

middle to bispinose apex: apical spine targer

than sutural, margin rounded and indented

between apices Slightly diverging, ameal

margin sub-serrate. Undersurlace with shallow

punctures, shart hairs, Sp rounded in. males,

truncate in females.

Size. Mates, (2.0 % 4.4 mm (2). Female. 13.4

~ 34 mm (1),

Male genitalia, Fig. 2M. The sides of the

purameres are parallel towards the apex where

they are rounded. There i a small point in

the apex of the median lobe and the sides sre

then angled outwards, In §. alexandri Carier

(Fig, 2N) the sides of the parameres sare

rounded hefore the apex and there is a small

point at the apex of the median lobe but the

sides have a grealer oulward angle. The upo-

physis of the basal picee of S. vellawelinessiy

is compuratively wider than that of S. alevan-

dri, Both species belong in the ¥, erwenta Lo &

G, species group (Fig. 20)-

Remarks, Belongs in erventa species group on

basis of similarities in male geditala, external

morphology and testaceous abdomen, Closest

to &. alexande? Carter. The specific name os

derived from the name of the type locality.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) storeyi sp. nov.

FIGS 2P. SJ).

Holotype S, Desaiily Ra, 10) km N Mareeba,

Old 25,11973, A. & MM. Wallord-Huueins,

OMBA,

Allatvpy, & Mt Carbine, Qld TII981, YS. Barker,

SAMA,

Culour, Uead, pronotum and sterqum dull

purple with blue seflections, Antennae ane

scillelltim blue-green, Legs: fenrora blue-green:

dorsal tibia purple, ventral tibia bluegreens

tarsi blue-green. Abdomen testaceuus. Flytra

pale yellow with following marklyies: harrow

blue-green basal margin; clongate black mark

on each humeral callus angled oulwards to-

wards margin, uarrow elongate pre-mecdial

black mark on sutures narrow black post-

medial fascia hot reaching margin, black mark

covering uper, last bwe connected down sultre,

Hairs silver.

Supe did seulptire. Head closely punctured,

Weep median sulous, muzzle short. Antennae:

sexments 1-3 obecomc, 4-11 toothed. Pro-

notum closely punetired, small deep basal

fovea surrounded by glabrous area without

punctures, basal notches closer to margin thau

middie, glabrous pateh without punctures

aboye basal angle; projecting forwards in

middle of apioal marginy basal margin barely

bisinuate; laterally pyrallel-sided at hase, then

rounded to widest part before middle, rounded

and narrowed to apex. Seutellum scutiform,

few punctures, flat Elytra punctate-striate,

intervals convex, more sa at apex thin base,

punctured und progressively more wrinkled

from suture to macginy 3 pairs of striae closer

together than others so that intervals 4, 6 & 8

are narrower than rest; laterally slightly angled

oul from hase, rounded al humeral callus,

eoneave then rounded afler middle to bispinose

apex; murv¢inal spine Jarger than sutural,

margin rounded and indented between, apices

diverging, apieal margin subserrate, S; trun-

eate in male, rounded and indented in middle

in female,

Size, Male, 1.8 “ 3.9 mm (1). Female, 118

* AS mm fl).

Male genitalia, Fig, 2P. The sides of the para-

meres are rounded and expanded outwards

towards the apex. The apex of the median lobe

is sharp and the sides are angled outwards.

The apophysis of the basal piece is thick and

the whole aedaegus is short and thick,

Remarks. This species belongs in S. cruvente

L, & G, species group on the basis of male

senitalia, lestaceous abdomen and external

morphology, Distinguished from other mem-

bers by alternately normal and narrow strive

on elyira, Named afier Mr R, TF Storey,

Mareeba, Qld,

Stigmodera (Castiarina) armstrongi sp. nov.

FIGS 2Q, 6A.

Holaryee, 2, Rogan R., NSW. JL Arnisireng.

OMBA,

Allaipe. 2, Minnic Duwns Stn. 8. Aust £.c..

SAMA T UI 146.

Poratypes. & same data as holotype, HHOQA; &,

sure dota as holotype, ANIO; dt & 7, Nockatunga,

Old 13.41,1949, &. FL Riek, ANIC, SAMA: &y 19

km ™ Tennant Creek, N.T. C, Rache, MHQA,

Calour, Head, antennae, pronotum, scutellum,

sternum ond legs green, blue-green or blue,

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECTES OF STVGWODERA 183

Abdomen testaccous except at sides of base

which usually has an elongate mark of blue or

bluc-ureen, Elytra pale yellow with the follow-

ing Markings: narrow basal margin green or

blue-green in some specimens, extending short

Uistance down suture; single dark blue post-

medial spot in middle af each elytron; broad

dark blue semi-circular mark concave for-

wards covering apical region, the sides reduced

in some specimens, Hairs silver,

Shape and sculpiure, Head with close shallow

Punclures, broad median sulcus, muzzle short.

Auenmag: segments 1-3 obconic. 4-L!

toothed, Pronoium with shallow punctures,

Spirse und smaller in middle than at sides,

very small basal fovea extending forwards as

glabrous line of variable length, basal notches

closer to margin than to middle; projecting

forwards in middle of apical margin, basal

margin almost straight; laterally paraliel-sided

at base, founded and bulbous before middle,

rounded and narrowed ta apex. Seurellum

seutiform, narrow and wlabrous, Elytra punc-

Tale-strite, intervals conVex, more so at base

and apex than middle, lightly punctured and

wrinkled: laterully angled owt slightly from

base, rounded at humeral callus, concave then

rounded after middle, rounded and narrowed

to bispinose apex; marginal spine small and

blunt but larger thin sutural spine, margin

rounded and indemted between, apices diverg-

ing, upical margin sub-serrate. Undersurfuce

with close shallow punctures, very sparse short

hairs. NS truncate in male, rounded in female.

Slee. Males, 13.2 % 4.9 mm (3). Females,

14.3 © 5.3 mm (4).

Male genitalia Pie 2Q. The sides of the para-

meres are parallel after the middle, then

rounded towards the apex. The median Jobe

has a pointed apex and the sides are angled

outwards. The apophysis of the basal piece is

broad.

Remarks. Belonys ta 8. erenva 1, & G, species

group on the basis af similarities in mate

venitulia, external morphology and testaceous

abdomen. Named after Mr J. Armsirong,

formerly of Callubri Statian. Nyngan, N.S.W,

Sligmodera (Casiiarina) supergrata sp, mov.

FIGS 2R, 6B.

Holaryye. &. Moe, Vie 20xL.1944, 0. GT

Goaling, ANIC

Allatype. 2, Mac. Vic. 5,xib.1955, C. GL. Goal-

ing, ANIC,

Puratypes. Viet & & 5 2, Moe, 1S.xi.1947, 15.x.

1944, I8NLL9S4. S.xi1945, C, GL. Gaadiny,

ANIC; 3, Rokeby, 21.xi.1958. GC. G. L. Goading,

FAQA; cy Mooraoduc, 13.x1.1920, SAMA! &,

Healesville, x1.1922, 1 2, Dixon, ANIC: & & &

Drovin Sth, 6.4/,1958, C, G, 1. Gooding, ANIC-

21 km Shady Crk, Willow Grove Rd, 5.47, 1963.

C. G. Lb, Gavding, ANIC: 2 4, 3.2 km 8, Willow

Grove. 26.xi. L966, C. G, £, Goering, ANIC; 7,

Rokeby, xi,1975, C, Elfen, ANIC; G, Hall's Gap,

14.x), 1950, LeSouef, SAMA; ®. Oakleigh, SAMAL

A & 29, 12 km N Hall's Gap, 721.1979, G & T

Willams, GWNA: 3 & & 9, Brishane Hills,

22.%.1972, R. 1G. Thampson, RIVA, 2 3, Brisbane

Hills, 29.% 1972, R. G. Thompson, RIVA; Fd & 2

Ven Tree Crk. 9.x7,1949, B. Given, NMVA: & & 9,

Mi Dandenong, 12.xii.1948, F. E, Wilsou, NMVA;

?, Belurave. 19,x11.1923, L, Bo Thorn, NMVA; 2

& P, Emerald, 14.41,1903, J.K., NMVA; 2, Grane

pians, 15.xL.1945, NMVA; ¢, Grampians, xi.1942,

NMVA:z 9, Croydan, NMVA> 2 Berwick, NMVA:

9, Warhurton, 1.1902, NMVA: % Dundenone

Ranges, 20.iv.1922, NMVA, NSW. So 1 km W

Mt Wilson, Bell Rd, 4.xii, 1977, G, & T. Willianes,

CWNA,

Colour, Head durk blue, Antennae green. Pro.

notum dark blue, lateral margins red. Seu-

fellum dark blue. Elytra red with following

dark blue markings! broad premedial fascia

extendilig foam basal margin almost to middle

nol touching margin; broad post-medial fascia

touching margin; mark covering pre-apical anc

apical fegion, all marks connceted down

suture, Undersurface blue-green. Huirs silver,

Shape wind sculpture, Head closely and shal

lowly punctured, deep median suleus, muzzle

short. Antennae segments [-3 obconic, 4-11

roothed, Pronotum closely but shallowly pune-

tured; basal Jovea extending forwards to

middle as thin glabrous impressed line, small

basal notch on cach side, closer to margin than

middle; projecting forwards in middle of apival

Margin, basal margin almase stright; laterally

slightly angled outwards from base, rounded

before middle, then founded and narrowed to

Apex. Scutellum sculiform. withour punctures,

excavate, Elytra punetate-striate, intervals con-

vex, more so at apex than base, deeply pune-

tured and wrinkled; laterally angled outwards

fron) base, rounded at humeral callus, eon-

eave then rounded after middle and narrowed

to spineless apex: apices rounded und diverg-

ing. Undersurface with close shallow pune-

tures, moderately hairy, hairs shart. S~ slightly

rounied in male. tounded in Jemale

Sire, Males, 13.) = 0.32 * 48 © 01a mm

(17). Females, 13.6 = 0.16 ~ 5.2 - 0.08 mm

(25),

Male genfralia. Fig, OR. Sides of parameres

straight! from the middle and arygled ouiwurds,

144

abruptly rounded then flattened at the apex,

The apex of the median lobe is pointed and

the sides angled outwards, The apophysis of

Ihe basal piece is broad, They differ from the

genitalia of §. grara Saunders (Fig, 25) which

are smaller, the sides of the parameres are

afgled ihwaeds fram the middle and the apo-

physis of the basal piece is narrow,

Remarks. Thts species belongs in S$. grara

Saunders species group but is larger than

grata, the male genitalia are differedt and the

elyteal colour darker red. The specific name

is derived fram super L, over, grata.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) forresti sp. noy.

FIGS 2T, 6C

Holoiype. dy 10 km W Gaseoyne Junction,

W.A, 22.i¢ 1980, S. Barker & BF, Williams,

WAMA

Allotvpe. 3, same data as halotypo, WAAM A.

Parulypes, 12 do & 14 9, same daty as holotype

(WAMA & SAMA); ¢, 89 Km N Curmarvon,

W.A. 22x.1980. 8S. Barker & Do £, Williams,

SAMA,

Colour. Head beonze with purple reflections

at the base, large yellow frontal spot. muouth-

parts blue-green, Antennae blue-green Prono-

tum bronze with purple reflections and yellow

luteral margins. Seutellum dark Glue with

purple reflections. Elytra pale yellow with dark

orange margins two intervals wide and the

following dark blue markings: nerrow basal

margin; pre-medial fascia, not reaching lateral

margin, ends extending, forwards obliquely over

humeral callus; post-medial fascia reaching

margin; mark coverifig whole of pre-apex and

apex, all marks connected dawn suture, Under

surface yellow. edges of sutures on meso-

sternum blue-green, blue-green spot at sides

of 3 basal abdominal seyments, edges of

abdominal segments blue-green or Lestaceuus,

Legs blue-green, Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture, Head with shallow punc-

tures, no median sulcus, muzzle short

Aftennae: segments 1-4 obeonic, 5-11

toothed, Pronotum closely punctured; small

basal fovea, basal notches on cach side closer

ty margin than middle, projecting forwards

slightly in middle of apical margin, hasal

margin barely bisinuate: laterally parallel-sided

at base, then rounded to apex, widest in

middle, Scutellum scutiform, without pune-

tures. slightly wrinkled, excavated in middle

Elytra punctite-striate, intervals convex more

s0 at apex than base, punctured and wrinkled:

laterally angled out for short distance from

5S. BARKER

base, rounded at humeral callus (wides)

point), concave and rounded after middle.

rounded and nurrowed fo trispinose apex:

middle spine largest, margin roupded between

outer and middle spine, rounded and indented

between middle and sutural spine, Under-

surldee with very shallow puneiures, sparse

short hair, S> truncate in male, faintly bilobed

in female

Size. Males, 11.0 + 0.3 *% 3.9 + 0.07 oom

(14). Females, 12.2 £0.23 * 44 = 01 mm

(15).

Mule venitalia, Pig. 27. The sides of the para-

meres are parallel after the middle then

rounded to the apex, The apex of (he nedian

lobe is pointed and the sides angled outwares,

The apaphysis of the basal piece is af median

width. The genitalia of §. elder{ Blackburn

(Fig, 2U) are of the same length bur with

narrower apices to the paramcres..

Remarks, All specimens were collected on the

flowers of Verticurdia forresr, Belongs in 8,

elder?’ Blackburn species proup because ol

similarities in male genitalia and external

morpholozy, §. forres is a larger species than

S, elileri, The basal elytral colour of 8. elder

is red. Named after the late Lord Forrest,

Stigmodera (Castiarinu) goodingi sp, nov.

PIGS 2¥V, 6k.

Alolotpe. d, Ward's Mistake, N.S.W_ xii, 1952,

4A. Canipton, ANIC,

Allempe. 2, same data as holotype, ANIC.

Paratypes, 4d & 49. same data as holotype (3 2

&32 ANIC, d & 2 SAMA),

Colour. Head, antennac, pranpitm, under.

surface and legs ercen with gold refiections.

Scutellum bright green, Elytra testaceous with

following markings; narrow bright green basal

margin; clangate angled spot at humeral callus.

outer part bright green, inner black: single

post-priedial black spot on each elytvon, closer

fo margin than suluce; thick bright green

border continuous with basal murgin sur

rounding secutellum and running down suture

to apex covering spines, thin outer edge

black. Hairs silver,

Shape and sculprare. Head very closely pune-

tured, deep median sulcus, muyele short.

Antennae: segments 1-3) obhconic, 4-11

toothed, Pronotum very closely punctured,

small basal fovea, basal notches closer to

margin than middle: anterior margin straight,

basal margin bisinuate; laterally parallel-sided

until before middle, then rounded and nar

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECIES OF STIGMODERA 155

Fig. 3. Photomicrographs of male genitalia of Stigmodera (Castiarina) species: A. S. kalbarri, B.

S. trifasciata, C. S. boldensis, D. S. dimidiata, E. S. leai, F. S. variegata, G. S. coerulipes, H. S.

pseuderythroptera, I. S. hanloni, J. S. octomaculata, K. S. subvicina, L. S. distincta, M.S. scintillata,

N. S. variopicta, O. S. semicincta, P. S. jeanae, Q. S. triramosa, R. S. simulata, 8. S. chinnocki, T.

S. cupricauda, U. S. turneri, V. S. euclae, W. S. convexa.

156

rowed to apex. Sculellurm scutitorm, punc-

(ured, excavate in midline. Elyira punctate-

striate, 9th interval from suture raised over

entire length, margin flattened, intervals lightly

punctured and slightly wriekled; laterally

angled out slightly from base, rounded at

humeral callus coneaVe then founded after

middle and tapered. rounded again just before

hispinose apex: marginal spine lurger than

sulural, matgin rounded and indented between,

apices diverging, Undersurface closely pune

tured, sparse short hair, S; truncate in male,

rounded and indented in female,

Size. Males, &4 0.2 % 3.2 > 0.1 mm (5),

Females, 89 £0.2 * 3.5 + 0.) mm (5).

Male gevuralia, Pig 2V, The sides of the pura-

meres are angled outwards from the basal

picce upwards then rounded near ihe apex

with sharp points at the apiees “The median

lobe is thin and pointed at the apex. The apo-

physis of The basal piece as broad, The genitalia

of S. auroltmbara Carter (Pig. 2W) are similar

brit smaller and the mediaty lobe is even more

pointed at the apex and the apophysis of the

basal piece is not as broad at the base but

rounded oulwards jusi before the apex.

Remarks. Superficially like 8, filaris Hape but

larger and male genitalia differs, Groupes

with oS. aurolimbarta Carter on the basis of

male genitalia dnd external morphology.

Namew after the late Mr C. G. Gooding.

Stigmoudera (Castiarina) kalbarri sp. nov,

FIGS 3A, 65F.

Holaivpe. &, 44 km E Kalbarri, W.A, 26.ix.

1980, 8, Barker & DoJ, Williams, WAMA.

Allorype. 2 46 km E Kalbarri, W.A. 26.i4.1980,

S, Barker & B.S Williams, WAMA.

Paratypes. 3 fd, sume data as holotype, SAMA &

WAMA; ¢ & 2 9, same data ne allotype, SAMA

& WAMA; 3, Kalbarri, W.A, 10.X,1979. M, Gold-

ing, MPWA; ¢&. 13 km N Murchison River, W,A,

10.*.1879. M. Powell, MPWA; 2 9, Northampton,

W.A. 18.Vii. 1971 & 31 .vili 1973, KL 7. Richards,

WADA,

Colour, Head, antennae, scutellim, under-

surface and legs green with gold reflections,

Pronotum green with gold reflectiens and in

some specioiens a dull bronze pateh in middle

Elytra orange with following black markings

with blue-green reflections: narrow basal

margin; pre-medial fascia, not reaching lateral

margin and angled forwards over humeral

eallus: post-medial fascia reaching margin

peojeetnig forwards and backwards along

S. BARKER

suture, preapicul spade-shaped mark alse

covering apex and spmes. all marks connected

down sulure. Hairs silver

Slrape and sculpture, Head closely punctured,

broad median sulcus, muzzle very shork, An-

lennuc compressed: segments 1-3 obconie.

4-11 toothed. Pronottim closely punctured,

minute basal fovea extending forwards i

glabrous line to middle, basal notebes on each

side represented by broad glabrous urea; apical

margin projecting forwards in middle, basal

margin barely bisinuates laterally paraliel-sided

at hase, rounded alter middle and narrowed ie

apex. Scutellum scutiforin, without punetures,

excavate along anterior margin, Blyltra punc-

fate-strialt, intervals flat al base, convex at

apex, punctured and writtkled; laterally angled

out from base, rounded at humeral callus, con-

vave then rounded after middle and narrowed

(o bispinose apex; large marginal spine, minute

sutural spine, margin rounded ahd indented

hetween, apices. diverging, apical margin sub

serrate. Undersurface hairs long and sparse.

§; broadly truncate in male, narrowly truncate

and indented in female.

Size. Males, 11.8 = 04 * 4.3 * 0.14 mm (8).

Females, 12.8 = O82 *% 47 = 0,29 mim (4).

Male genitalia, Fig, 3A, The sides of the para-

doeres are rounded after the middle and bulge

outwards before they are rounded off to the

apex, The median lobe is pointed and the

sides are acutely nngled, The apophysis of the

basal piece is of medium width. “Che genitalia

of male 8, avfasciata L, & G. (Fig, 3B) are

longer, the sides of the parameres are parallel

alter the middle then rounded to the apices,

the apex of the median lobe is pointed but the

sides ate not acutely angled, The apophysis of

the basal picee is of medium width and slightly

elongate,

Remarks. Belongs in &. teifayeiata Le & G,

species group because of similarities in male

genitalia and exterpal morphology. All speci-

mens taken on 261X.1980 were captured of

the flowers of Thryptemene denticulata (CF,

Muell.) Benth. The species name is derived

from the name of the type locality.

Stigmodcra (Castiarina) boldensis sp, nov.

FIGS 3C, 6G.

Holotepe, & Wembley, WA A, HW. Brown

SAMA.

Allarype. 9. same data as holotype, SAMA,

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECIES OF STIGMODERA 157

Fig. 4. A. Stigmodera delicatula Kerremans, B. S. subvicina sp. nov., C. S. decemguttata L. & G., D.

S. versicolor L. & G., E. S. deserti Blackburn, F. S. sieboldi L. & G., G. S. timida Kerremans, H.

S. tigris sp. nov., I. S. sexplagiata Gory, J. S. frauciana sp. nov., K. S. cornishi sp. nov., L. S. vul-

garis Carter.

158 S. BARKER

Fig. 5. A. Stigmodera powelli sp. nov., B. S. dingoensis sp. nov., C. S. hypocrita sp. nov., D. S.

goldingi sp. nov., E. S. furtiva sp. nov., F. S. eneabba sp. nov., G. S. subtestacea sp. nov., H. S.

marginata sp. nov., I. S. yellowdinensis sp. nov., J. S. storeyi sp. nov.

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECIES OF STIGMODERA 159

Fig. 6. A. Stigmodera armstrongi sp. nov., B. S. supergrata sp. nov., C. S. forresti sp. nov., D. S.

alpestris sp. nov., E. S. goodingi sp. nov., F. S. kalbarri sp. nov. G. S. boldensis sp. nov., H. S§.

pseudasilida sp. nov., 1. S. dimidiata Carter, J. S. variegata sp. nov.

160 S. BARKER

Fig. 7. A. Stigmodera pseuderythroptera sp. nov., B. S. hanloni sp. nov., C. S. thurmerae sp. nov., D.

S. turneri sp. nov., E. S. scintillata sp. nov., F. S. jeanae sp. nov., G. S. triramosa Thomson, H. S.

chinnocki sp. nov., I. S. euclae sp. nov., J. S. booanyia Carter.

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECIES OF STIGMODERA Mm)

Pouratypes, WAS 4 gy 20%1930, Wembley,

SAMA. AMSA; co & 3 9, same data as holotype,

WAMA? 3 of & 9 20.41.1930, Wembley. Df WW.

#rawn, WAMA; & 1.xi.1969, Wembley. BL 4.

Jefferys & M, Archer, WAMA; @y 28.%.1978,

Wembley, T ML 8. Hanlon, WAMA,

Colour. Head blue-green apex, blue-black base.

Alilennae blue-green. Pronotum blue-bipek,

lateral margin blue-green, Scutellum black

with blue reflections. Blytra red with following

black markings with blue reflections: narrow

basal margin: broad pre-medial fascia concave

forwards, ends not touching margin; broad

post-medial fascia touching margin project-

ing forwards wn suture; mark covering apex,

all marks connected down autre, Undersur-

face ahd legs blue-ersen, Hoirs silver.

Shape anil seulpiure. Head vlosely punctured,

broad median sulcus, muzzle very short,

Antennae: segments 1-3 obconic, 4-1)

toothed, Pronetum closely punctures, small

basal fovea eatending forwards to middle as

glabrous line, basal notches represented by

glabrous area; projecting forwards in middle of

apival margin, basal margin barely bisinuate;

laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded after

Middle and narrowed to apex. Scutellum seuti-

form, punetured, flat. Elytra punctate-striate,

inervals flat in middle, convex at apex, punc-

tured wid wrinkled: laterally angled out fram

sides, rounded at humeral callus, concave then

rounded after middle to bispinose apex; mar-

ginal spines larger than sutural, inside edge of

Malginal spine straight, margin rounded 9 the

base to sulural spine, apites diverging. Under-

surface shallowly punct\ired, sparse moderately

long fairs, Sp truncate in male, hilobed in

female.

Size. Males, 13.0 = O10 * 4.7 = 0.09 mm

{10}. Pemales, 13.0 418 * 4.9 + 0.11 mn

(fi),

Male genitalia, Fig. 3C. Che sides of the

parameres are rounded ufler the middie ane

narrowed to the apices. The median lobe is

pointed at the apex and the sides uculely

angled. The apophysis of the basal picee is of

medium width and slightly elongated, Overall

the length of the genitalin is similar to that of

§. Frifaxciata (Fig. 4B) but the two wre distinet

Renurks, Belongs in the §, mifaseiata tL. & G.

species proup because of suyiliriies mm male

genitalia and external morphology. dt ts the

only known red and blue species in the group

The adulls were collected on Chajiaclauctiuin

flowers, The area of capture Has new heen

declared as Bold Park Reserve anal the specific

name has been derived from this ame.

Stigmodera (Castiaring) pseudasilida sp. nov,

FIG, 64,

Nolotype. 2, Acacia Plateau, NSW. 71948,

ff, Davidson, SAMA 1 2) 447.

Poratypes. 2.9, same data as hololwpe, PHOA: 2,

Cunningham Gap, Old xiL1977, A, Masters,

SAMA; 9, paratype of §, @evta Deuquet, RMER:

9, Dorrigo, N.S.W., J, Carter collection,

NMVA,

Colour. Head, antennae, pronotui, \inder-

surfuce and legs green, Scutellum green with

blue reflections. Elytra basal colour yellow,

margin red with following black markilws:

hroud pre-medial fascia covering basal margin

and reaching faleral margin; broad fascia ut

middie reaching margin and joining Ist fasela,

enclosing large yellow basal spol on each

elytron and small red mark on margin: elo

gate pre-apical mark covering apes und spines.

enclosed beiween 2nd fascia a yellow spot

which merges into a red margin. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculprre. Head with sparse shal-

Jow punctures, glibrous, median sulcus,

muzzle short, Afiteninae; segments {—3 ub-

conic, 4-1! fouthed, Pronotum with sparse

shallow puuctures, glabrous, very small basal

fovea and very small basal (tches 2/3 dis-

tance from middle to murgin. large fovea on

cach side in angles of marvin; projecting for

warus in middks of apical iWargin, basal

margin bisinuate: laterally parallel-sidext,

rounded before middle and narrowed to apex.

Seutellum scutiform, without — piinctures,

Blabrous, flat. Elytra junctate-striate, scutel-

lary, 3rd, Sth and 9th intervals from suture

convex, slightly raised and glabrous, tnargin

fattened, intermediate intervals Mal; laterally

angled out from base, rounded at humeral

callus, concave, then rounded after middle,

tapercd to bispinose apex; marginal spine

larger than sutural, margin rounded and jn-

dented between, apices diverging, Undersur-

face With sparse shallow punctures, very sparse

short hairs. Mesosternal process rvised, S-

truncate in male, rounded in female.

Sire, Male, 13.2 % 48 mm (1), Females.

{4.2 + 0,29 % 5.2 © 0,07 mm (5)-

Male zenilalia. Unknown, as the only male

specimen available has been gutted.

Remarks, This species resembles an Asilid fly

in profile as do many of the species iw the

“producta” mimicry coroplesx. Wb accurs on the

102

edge of high altitude rain forest, It is not

possible to place the species wilhil) a species

group because male genitalia are as yet un-

avilable, The female paratype of 8. weure

Deuquet is clearly unasseciated with males of

that species which is a synonym of §, delicalila

Kerremans, The specific came is derived from

pyetides Gre. false and asilus L, gadfly,

Stigmodera (Castiarina) variegata sp. nov.

FIGS iF, 6],

Halatype, d, Corin Dam Rd, Kangaroo Creek,

ACT. 28.11.1972, RS. Kohout, ANIC.

Allatype, 9, My Bulfalo, Vie. 29.81.1951, FL

Wilsan, NMWVA,

Panitypes. A,C.T.; J, Blindells, 44.0935, WL Ral-

ferry, ANIC; oy Blandells, 26.x11.1960, AY, Mar-

gules, ANIC, oy same duta as holutype. SAMA

Vic.) 9, Gippsland, NMVA; cL Beaconsfield,

1.1924, NMVA; 9. Warburton, C, Oke, NMVAG 'e,

Natbathong, 22.1049, Fo BL Wilson, NMVAz 4,

ny data. NMVA: 9, Acheron Way, 110.1971,

R, G, Thompson, RIVA: 9, ZMH,

Celour, Head green with bronze reflections.

Antefinae green with yellow reflections, Pro-

notum green with bronze reflections at iar

gins. Scutellum green with bronze reflcetions.

Undersurface green with yellow refleetions

Legs blueszreen, Elytra red with following

black markings with green reflections: basal

margin: broad pre-medial fascia; broad post

medial fascia: mark covering pre-ipex and

apex. Hairs silver,

Shape und yeulpuire. Head closely punctured,

deep median sulcus, muzzle short, Antennae:

segments 1-3 obconic, 4-11 toothed. Mroano-

tum elosely punctured, basal lovea, basal

fotehes on cach side closer to margin than bo

middle. broad foyeo al basal margin on each

side: upicul margin straight, basal murgin

barcly bisinuate: Jaferally gradually rounded

out fram base, rounded before middle und

nirrowed {0 apex, margin near base dorse-

ventrally fattened. Scutellum scutiform, pune-

jured, excavate, Elytra costate: scutellary,,

ard. Sth, 7th and Oth intervals convex und

raised. and smooth, those between flat and

wrinkled, lateral margins flattened; laterally

angled ol fram base, rounded at humeral

callus, (hen coneave and rounded after widdle

to bispinose apex; tmuryitwl sping larger than

sutural, margin rounded and indented between,

apices diverging. Undersurface with siall

shallow punctures, moderately dense short

hair, S> trimeate in both sexes,

S, BARKER

Size. Males, (3.2 = O35 44 = 0.13 mm

(6). Females, 12.7 + 04 * 5.0 + 0.17 mm

Male yeniniia. Pig. JF. Sides of parameres

angled outwards rounded just before apex.

Median lobe poited i middle and angled

outwards at sides. The apophysis of basal piece

mediuny width) Very similar to the genitalia

of 8. cvernleines Saunders (hig, 3G) which is

thicker with the apophysis of the basal piece

wider,

Remarks, Belongs in S. ceerdleipes Savnders

species group hecause of simmlarities in male

genitalia and extemal morphology. The specifie

name is derived from verievarny L, of different

sorts (colours),

Stigmodern (Castiarina) pseuderythroptera

SP. Nov,

PIGS 3H, 7A.

Molatype. & Wyberba, Qld E. Suttan, QMBA,

Colour, Would blick with bronze reficetions

Antennae black with blue reflections, Pro-

nolum and sevicllum black with bronze reflee-

tions. Elytea red-brown with narrow black

basal margin and narrow black clongate

SUtural mark from before middle to pre-wpex.

Undersurfave and legs dark bluc. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured,

broad |wedian sulcus, muzzle short, Antennae:

seements 1-3 ohconie, 4 4-toothed, 5-11

toothed. Provetun closely punctured, very

Veep broad fovea extending to apical margin

ws Intpressed tine: apical margin straight, basal

margin bisinuate: laterally rounded from base

fo apex widest before middle; margin dorso-

ventrally compressed near base. Scutellum

cordiform without piunetures, excavate in

mithtle, Blytra costate, 3rd and Sth intervals

from suture praminently so, seutellary, 7th and

Ot less so, upleal margin rurned upwards,

other intervals flat, heavily punctured; laterally

angled oul from base to humeral callus there

nolicably wider than pronetum, rounded then

voneave, bounded widest part uffer middle,

rounded t& bispinose apex: marginal spine

larger than sutival, margin rounded and

slightly indented belween, apices diverping

slivhtly, Undersurface close shallow punctures.

moderately haired, hairs short, S; truncate in

male, Male tarsal pads: of legs 2 and 3, absent

on tarsomeres 1, 2 and 3, teplaced respeetively

by median triple, double. triple spies,

Sice Male. 79 & 3.0 mm (1).

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECIES OF STIGMODERA 163

Male genitalia, Fig, 3H, Sides of the parameres

rounded after the middle and narrewed to the

upes, Median lobe sharp and sides acutely

angled. Apaphysis of basal piece mediuin

width.

Remarks, Not @ member of S$. sexplegiate

Gory group as male genitalia not triangidar-

shaped and differs from the other lycid mimieck-

ings Species. Foam unable to assoeiate this

speeies with any other, The specific name is

derived from jsemdles Gr. false and erythrap-

Hera.

Stigmosera (Castiarina) hantoni sp. nov-

FIGS 31, 7B.

Holotype. ¢, Toolina Rockhule, Balladonia

district, WiA, 34,1979. T. At S. Nanton &

Gi Harold, WAMA.

Allatvpe. 2, same dite as holotype, WAMA,

Paratypes, 12 4 & 2 2 same dala us holotype,

SAMA & WAMA & MPWA,.

Colew. Head, antesnac, scutellum, pronatum

sind tindersurface either green-bronze or blue-

bronze, Legs: femora and tibia either bronze,

dull blue or green-blue; tars} green. Elytra

tesfaccous in ventre surrounded by intense

sulmon-pink with following dark blue mark-

invs- basal margin, clonggte angled spot on

ede humeral callus; pre-medial diamond-

shaped fark on Suture; post-medial fascia

consisting of diamond-shaped mark on suture

connected fo a mare or less diamond-shaped

inirk on each elytrof, not reaching margin;

irregular pre-apical nvark, last two connected

dawn suture ty apex. Apex and spines covered

in heavily myrked apeciinens, the spines only

in lightly marked speciniens, Huirs silver.

Shape and seulpture. Head closely punctured,

broad meiian suleus, muzzle short. Antennae:

segmionts 1-3 obeonig, --T) toothed. Fro-

Nolum closely punctured, basal fovea extend.

ig ta middle as glabrous line: apical margin

projecting forwards in middle, basal margin

barely bisinuiate, Jaterally parallel-sided at

hase, then rounded to widest paint before

iniddle, rounded and narrowed to apex. Seu-

tellum. sculiform, few punetures, excavate,

Flyir) punctate-stnate, intervals flat at base,

convey’ etewhere, punctured on tateral margin

sindolh in centre: laterally angled from base,

rounded at humeral callus, concave until after

middle then rotinded and tapered to bispinose

apex) Marginal spine small and blunt, sutural

spine inimule. margiy indented and rounded

helween. apiees slightly diverging. Under

Surface closely punctured and hairy, hairs

moderately long. S; truneate in males, har-

rowed and rounded in temmales,

Size, Males, 10.7 + 0.2 % 4.0 © 0.1 mm

(13). Females, 12.8 + O11) ® 4.8 = 0.05 mm

(3).

Male venitalia. Fig. al. The sides of the para-

meres are Straight after the middle and slightly

anyled outwards until they round off io the

apex. The median lobe is sharp and the sides

angled outwards. The apophysis of the basal

piece is of medium width, The genitalia

closely resemble thase af 8. oerameculara

Srunders (Pig, 34) which are slightly wider,

Remarks. Placed in 8. oetamaculata Saunders

speeics group on the basis ot similarities in

male genitalia and external morphology. All

specinzens were collected at one locality on the

flowers of Eucalyptus diverst{olia, Named aller

Mr T, M, 8, Hanlon,

Stigmodera (Castiarina) subvicina sp, nov.

FIGS 3k, 48.

Holarnpe. &, Morwell, Vie. 22.81.1958, Mt.

Coulsan. ANIC.

Allotype. 2. Morwell, Vic, 201.1958, Carne, Hel-

nian, Greaves, ANIC.

Paratypus, Vic &, Traralgon. 71.1958, G. T.

Coulson, SAMA; & Traralgon, 74.1959. OL 7

Conlsan, ANDC, FP & 9, Traralgon, “7.1959, G. 7,

Coulsan, ANIC: &, Traralgon, 10.7959, G7.

Coulyon, ANIC; of, Morwell, 30,.x1.953_ ML et Gt.

Coulson, ANIC: 3. Morwell. 30.53, 1958. AN. & GC

Canlson, SAMA; %, Morwell, 9.xii, 1958, At, & G,

Cealyan, (ANIC, 3, Morwell, 20x11, 1958, At. & G.

Caulson, ANIC: &, Morwell, 23.xi7,.1984, G. f,

Conlson, ANIC. N.S.W.: oy Armidale, 14.xii.1958,

hos. Paul, ANIC. of, Grafton, S.xii 54, FL 8.

Paul, ANIC: 3, 32 km N-E Rylstone, Lxii.1 95),

YT, G. Campbell, ANIC, &, Nowra Rd, Corang BR.

Crossing, 9.xii 1972, J. Baulderson, ANIC, f

Durras, 29.47.1964. /. Cameron, ANIC; &, Queen-

beyan, [8.1.1963, 8. Barker, SAMA: & & @, Nat.

Park, 21,1952, 8.0, ANIC, 2 g' & 2, Wahroongy

Hf. Carter, ANIC: 9. Manly, Bo W. Fergusan

Coll, ANIC; 2, Mitragong, E. W. Ferguson Coll.,

ANIC, AOUT,: 2, Cotter Ro 10.xi1,1953, Fuller,

ANIC. of & F Black Mt l4ai.1954. EL OF Resk,

ANIC: of. Black Mt 231.1962. DB, P. Carne, ANIC:

oS. Tidbinbillg Nat, Res. 27-28i7.1972, RJ

Koheur, ANIC: & neo data, ANIC,

Colaur. Head, pronatum, and seutellum black

with bluic and/or bronze reflections, Anteniae:

seaments [-2 blue. 3-11 bronze, Undersur-

face dark purple. Legs: femora und tibia dark

purple: tarsi blue. Elytra yellow with following

Jark blue markings! broad basal fascia reach-

ing margin, enclosing a yellow spot on eueh

elytron al base of lateral margin, absent i

some specimens, eularyed in others; bya

164

fascia at middle reaching margin; broad pre-

apical mark also covering apex, all marks con-

nected down suture. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head shallowly pune-

tured, median sulcus, short muzzle, Antennae!

segments 1-3 obconic, 4-11 toothed. Pro-

notum shallowly punctured, basal fovea ex-

tending forwards to middle as glabrous line,

basal notches closer to margin than to middle;

apical margin straight, basal margin bisinuate;

laterally parallel-sided at base rounded out»

wards before middle, narrowed to apex, Scu-

tellum scutiform, punctured, flat, Rlytea punc-

tale-striate, intervals convex slightly punctured,

lateral margin flat and extended outwards;

laterally angled out from base, rounded at

humeral callus, concave, rounded after middle

and narrowed to bispinese apex; small

marginal spine, smaller sutural spine, margin

rounded and indented between, apices diverg-

ing. Undersurface close shallow punctures,

moderately hairy, hairs short, S; truncate in

males, rounded in females. Mesosternal process

inflated,

Size. Males, 12.8 0.2 * 5.0 + 0.1 mm (20).

Females, 13.3 = 03 ®% 5440.1 mm (ii),

Male genitalia. Fig, 3K, The sides of the

parameres bulge outwards in the middle and

again just before they round off to the apex,

The médian lobe has a long sharp point and

the apophysis of the basal piece is of medium

width. The shape of the male genitalia of this

Species place it in the §, vicina Saunders

species group. The genitalia are close to 5S,

distincta Saunders (Fig. 31.) but the median

lobe in that species has a slightly thicker spine

and the apophysis of the basal piece is thinner.

Remarks. This species has been confused with

S. wieina Saunders. The apices differ ws in 8.

vicina the spines are widely separated and

there is a straight interval between, In 8.

subvicing the margin is indented between the

spines, The specific name is derived from sub

L. under, vicina.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) scintillata sp. nov

FIGS 3M, 7E,

Holotype, 2, Stanthorpe, Qld, x.1968, J. Auars-

lett, SAMA 1 21 148.

Allatype, 2. Pyramids, Old, 13,xii. 1944. &. Sven,

SAMA 1 21 149.

Paratypes. J, Stanthorpe, Old, xii.)954, 2, Gen-

mell, ANIC; 6 fo & 4 2. Pyramids, Wyherba, Old,

12/14.xii- 1944, 17/18 011948, 25.x9).1956, EL Sue

jon, OMBA, SAMA, EAQA; 9, no data, ANIC,

5. RARKER

Colour. Head, antennac, pronetum, scutelium.

undersurface and legs bright green wilh yellow

reflections, Elytra yellow with jarrow dark

green basal margin and narrow dark green

simp along suture except near scutellum,

spines black. Hairs silver,

Shape and senlpture, Head closely punctured.

median sulous, muzzle short, Antentae: seg

ments |-3 obconi¢, 4-11 toothed. Pronotun

closely punclured, glnbrous; basal fovea ane

basal notches on eaxeh side, eloser Uy miorwit

than to middle: projegtina forwards stronyly tn

middle of apical maroln, basal margin barely

bisinuate; laterally parallel-sided nl base,

rounded out befere iniddle, rounded amd mar-

rowed to apex, dorse-veitrally flattened at

base, Sciutellum cordilorm, pumolured-

glabrowy, cxeavale. Elyta punetatesteare,

intervals Convex, more so at ape® than ase,

small punctures, slightly wrinkled: literally

parallel-sided at base, then slightly unuled

outwards, rounded at humeral callus, congave

until after middle, rowed aid narrowed

1o bispinose pea; marginal spine larwer than

sutural, margin rounded and indented between

apices barely diverging. Undersurface with

close shallow punctures, Hairs sherl anu

sparse, 8, rounded in hath seavs.

Size, Mules, 17.0 = 0,26 ™ 6.4 2 0.12 mm

(8), Females, (9.5 © (ht * 7) OAM mm

(5),

Male genirelia, Pip. IM, The sides of the

pirameres arc anpled outwards for most ol

their Téenpth bul are parallel pst hefore they

round off to the apex. The median lobe is

pointed and the siles are gniled outwards

The apophysis of the hasal piece is wise, Male

genitalia of S. variogter Thomsen (Ulin IN)

are very similar exeept that the apaphysis of

the basal piece is net us wide-

Remarks, Close to §, vartiapieta Those but

differs in eolour and male wenitilia The

speerfic name is derived fram «evanifuras |

ghitcen.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) jeatiae sp. nov,

FIGS 3P, 7F,

Helaiype, @&, Wyberba, Old

Sern, QMBA,

Allenype. &, Stanmhorpe. Old, PAL, ANIC

Paruty pes “ Stnthorpe Old 118i, 1926, OM BA:

0) ae st

® Wyberba, Qha 24 xi),1939, &, ee OMIEEA;

a. Wyberbu, and 29.ni7.1950, FE. Auten, 4

Goachel, SAMA; 4 Ty p Samiharne.- Od sn PUSb AL

Grane, ANIC. 2, Stanthorpe, a. E_ Sartan,

NEW SYNONYMS AND) NEW SPECIES OP ST/IGMODERA 165

ANIC: 4 Erterald. Vie. xf, Jarvis, SAMA;

’ Conn Dem Re, Kangaroo Crk, ACT. 2B.ii.

1972, RF, Rebiiat, ANLC,

Colour, Heal, antennae, pronotum, seutellum,

undersurface and logs bright owtallic green.

Plytra reddish-hrown with narrow dark green

basal taruin, backed with black from seu-

lelline to level WU marginal nolehes on scu-

tullumm, lateral omgeuit yolluw on two outer

intervals Iq some Specimens, intervals in

ridille yellow at basal ends merging into red-

hrown at apical vids. Apieal spines dark

areen, Harps silver,

Shane and sealpiare, Head punctured. deep

medi Sulcus, muzzle sirori, Antennae; see-

ments 1.9 ohewne, 4-11 towhed, Protenum

shallowly puretured, median glabrous Tine

Irom base tr apex in some specimens, to

nidile only in others, with glabrous area on

each side in middle towards apex and gnother

on eateh Guile near basal angle in some apecie

meus, husal notch on each side closer to mar-

vin than ta middle; upical margin projecting

Wi) tiidille, basal nicrgi bisinuate: laterally

ingled outwards from hase, angled before

middle, narrowed ta apex, lateral margins

dopo-ventrafly fMittened near buse forming a

lustve enclosiqe two cl detined fovea in the

angles. Scutellum scutiteroy, punctured, flat

Flytra plimetiiesiniate, intervals convex and

sfooth, lehtly punctured, laterally angled our

from base, rounded at fnmeral callus, concave

uno after muddle, rounded tu bispinase apex:

mraveinal spife lone and conical, sutural spine

shor miron rounded and indented between,

uplees Civeruing. Undersurface with shallow

punctures, moderately [ong sparse hair, S;

irunvate in male. rounded and shehtly pointed

iW female. Tursal claws in males broader and

more angled thin in femates-

Size. Males, 20,7 © 0.59 © 8.0 =

(3). Females, 218 “> 0.56 & H.2

(fy

0.45 mm

+ 0.27 mm

Mile genitalia Via, 4P, The sides of the para-

meres bulse outwards after the middle and

beeome paralicl-sided towards (he wpices where

they round off abruptly. The median tobe is

hlintly ported in the middle, the sides are

aijivled away and then forny a ledge before

Ihey drop off verhcally, In 8, senmicineta

1 & G (Pig. 30) the sides of the parameres

ure angled ourwards and are not as abruptly

rolinded te the apices, The median lohe is

blinthy poyjted but the sides are angled away

until they drop off vertically. The apophysis of

the basal piece in both species is wide.

Remarky, Belongs to S, semicineta L, & G.

specics group because of similarities in male

venitalia and external morphology. Stanthorpe

specimens are bright green, the single specimen

from A.C.T. dull green with blue-green under-

surface, §. semicineta has black elytra with

yellow lateral margins and the rest of the

hady is dark blue, whereas §. jeanwe has pale

brown clytra with yellow margins and a green

body. Named after Mrs. J. Harslett, Amiens,

Old.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) triramosa Thomson

1879

FIGS 3Q, 7G.

Stigmodera triramosa Thomson 1879: p, 32, Ker-

remans, 1892: p. 158. 1902: p. 214.

flolotype. &, Adelaide, 8S. Aust. MNHN.

Caleur, Head, antennac, pronotum, under-

surface and legs olive green with bronze refiee-

tions. Scutellum blue-green with bronze reflec-

tions. Elytra yellow with red margins and with

following black markings with blue or blue-

green reflections: narrow basal margin: narrow

pre-medial fascia not reaching margin con-

weeted at the end to a Vvitta running obliquely

ta the humeral callus, projecting forwards at

sulure; narrow post-medial anchor shaped

mark, all marks conneceted down suture, Hairs

silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured,

narrow median sulcus, eyes bulbous, muzzle

short, Antennae compressed: segments 1-4

oabeonic, 5-11 toothed. Proneatum — closely

punctured, small basal fovea extending to

upical margin as glabrous line; apical margin

projecting in middle, basal margin almost

straight; laterally parallel-sided at base,

rounded before middle then tapered to apex.

Sculellum without punctures, glabrous, ex-

cayate. Elytra punetate-siriate, intervals

bonvex more so at apex and sides than in

middle, deeply punctured; laterally parallel-

sided al base angled out then rounded al

humeral callus, concave then rounded after

middle, rounded io bispinose apex; spines

small and equal, margin rounded between,

Undersurface with shallow punetures, densely

haired, hairs long. S; truncate in hoth sexes,

Size. Males, 12.7 © O17 ™ 5.0 4 0.08 mm

(20), Females, 12.9 + 0.47 & 5.1 + 0.23 mm

(1),

Distribution, S. Aust.: Lueindale, Kanguroo

Isd, Eyre Peninsula, View! Little Desert,

Casterton,

Male genitalia. Fig. 3Q, The parameres are

purallel-sided after the middle and are rounded

off abruptly to the apices, The median lobe is

pointed and carrow and the apophysis of the

basal piece is nurraw. In 8. yimulara LL & G.

(Fig. 3R) the sides of the parameres are

angled oulwards after the middle then gently

counded off to 9 narrow apex, The median lobe

is also pointed and narrow but the apophysis

of the basai piece is wide,

Remarks. Member of §. simuluta L. & G-

species group. &, triramiosa has yellow elytra

with green markings and red margin and the

rest of the bedy is green. S&S. sertlara has

yellow elytra with black markings and the

rest of the body is bronze.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) chinnocki sp. nov.

FIGS 38, 7H.

Halatype. d, 81 km S Lake Varley 1.0,

Hyden-Soulherm Cross Rd. W.A, 6.xii.1980,

R. f. Chinnack, WAMA.,

Alloiype. 2, same data us holotype, WAMA,

Paratypes. WAS fy sume dala us holotype,

SAMA: 9, 1.6 km W N-W Balladonia Motel,

Jan1969, K. Key & M, Upton, ANIC; 2 fo & 5 3

18-32 km W. Balladonia, (7.%.1982, 8. Barker,

P. G. Kenipster & Il, Wanderwoude, WAMA &

SAMA, 9, 1% ko SSW Derilinya Ruin, Balladonin

distcl, 22.x, 1982. 9. Barken, PG. Kempster &

4. Vamdlerwaude, SAMA,

Colour. Head, antennae, undersurface and legs

bronze. Pronotum bronze with purple reflec-

Hons. Scutelluo dark blue with purple reflec

tions. Elytra yellow with following black

markings: ‘arrow hasal margin: pre-medial

fascia expanded at both ends, anteriorly touch-

ig basal margin, posteriorly touching Jateral

margin, enclosing a yellow spot in middle at

base und at hurieral callus on niargin: post-

medial fascia reaching margin, prajecting

obliquely forwards from middle and douching

margin enclosing yellow spot in middle

between Ist and 2nd fascia and spot on margin

between oblique projection amd 2nd fascia:

mark covering whole apex, all marks can-

nected down suture, Hairs silver.

Shape and sedprre. Head closely. punetured,

small median suleus, muzzle very short. Anten-

hac compressed) segments 14 obconie, 5-11

toothed. Propotum closely punctured: basal

fovea extending to middle as plabraus tine,

busal nutehes obseure: apicul margin stracehe,

5, BARKER

basal margin bisinuates laterally rounded fron)

base to upex widest before middle. Scutellum

cordiform, without punctures, excavate at

anterior margin. Elytra punctate-striate, inter

Vals convex, More so al sides and upex, heavily

punctured at sides, fess in middle; laterally

angled out from base, rounded at humeral

¢allus, coneaye, pounded after middle and

narrowed jo bispingse apex; spines small,

margin rounded and indented bemween, spices

diverging, apical margin sub-serrate meluding

interval between spmes. Undersirtace with

shallow punctures, moderately hairy. hairs

moderately long S; rounded in both sexes,

Size, Males, 92 + 0.35 % 3.5 + 014 mm

(4), Females, 10.8 = 0.09 * 4.0 + 1.08 mon

(8).

Mule genitalia, Fig. 38. The sides of (he para

Neres are rounded outwards well before the

middle and rounded olf and narrowed to the

upiees. The median lobe is pointed and the

sides angled aculely outwards, The apophysis

of the basal piece is clongate and medium

width. The aedeagus of 8. evpricetida Saunders

(Fig 3T) is stightly larger. The sides of the

paurameres are rounded oulwards gradually and

are more abruptly rounded to the apex, ‘The

median lohe is blunter at the apex and the

upophysis of the basal piece is slightly more

elongate and of medium width.

Remuarky, Closest species on basis of external

morphology and male genitalia is 8) evpri-

canda Saunders which oceurs in N.S-W- and is

a more vlongate species. Three 1980 specimens

were collected on Epemophila miflata wn en-

dangered plant. Balladonia specimens were

colleeted on the Howers of Rremophila paiv-

levi, BE, ionantha & E. scoparia, Named after

Mr R, 3, Chinnock. South Anstralian Her-

barium.

Stigmorters (Castiarina) turmeri sp. noy-

FIGS 30), 7D.

Plolotype. % 10 kn W Buabalang West.

NOSSW. Ui PO8t FR. Trreer, SAMA 4 31

150,

Atarype. 9 10 km W Ruubalong West, N.S IW.

ISOS) LR. Turner, SAMA £21 151

Paratyfes. 23, IN kim W Fuabalone West, NS.W,

IEALVIKI, JOR, Turner, STNA: 9 of? & 5 9, 22-27

km E Kimba, S, Aust, 25...1982. 49, Warker POG

Kempster & TE Varelecitniile, SAMA,

Colour Head bronze with coppery reflections

al base. Antennas, undersurface and fens

bronze, Pronotum bvenge wilh or owilhoul

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECIES OF SYIGMOUERA

coppery reflections, Elyira pole yellow with fol-

flowmg markings: narrow dark brow basal

margin; black pre-medial fascia nor reaching

margins and expanded anteriorly und pos-

tetiorly al ends, represented in most spreimeny

hy a spot towards the margin on each elytron

and one om suture: black post-medial fascia

reaching margin, consisting of an elongate

angled spot. on each elytron and one on siture,

al connected by a thin band on each side,

black spadeshaped mark covering apex. Hairs

silver,

Shape and sculpture, Head with close pune

tures, broad median sulcus, prominent ridge

inside cach antennal cavity, very short muzzle,

eyes bulbous. Antennpe compressed: segments

1-3 obconle, 411 toothed, Pranoturny with

large punctures, basal fovea extending for-

wards as impressed line to near upical margin,

husal notches represented hy glabrous area on

tach side closer fo margin than middle; pro-

jecting forwards slighly in middle of apical

margin, basul margin barely bisinuate: Ipterally

parallel-sided a( base, founded to widest part

before middle, rounded to apex. Scutellum

scutform, without punetures, excavate. Elytra

punctate-striate, Convex with heavy punctures;

laterally parallel-sided at base, angled out-

wards, rounded at humeral callus, concave,

reunded after middle and narrowed te truncate

apes, no marginal spine, minute sulural spine.

apices slightly diverging, apex sub-serrate-

Undersurfuce with shallow punctures, edges of

abdominal — selerites «without — punctures,

glahrous. Sparse short hairs. 8, trumeute in

males, rounded avd slightly pointed in females.

Size. Males, 13.9 2 0,19 * 5.3 = 0,06 mm

(12) Females. 15,1 + 0.4 * 4.8 + 0.18 mm

{),

Male genitalia. Fig. 3U. The parameres are

parallel-sided afler the middle and round off

abruptly to the apices, The median lohe is

hroud und bluntly poibted and the sides

angled outwards, The apophysis of the basal

picee is wide. Ta SL convera Carter (Fin, JW)

the parameres wre parallelsided towards the

apiecs und round off abruptly to the apices.

The micdian lahe is bluntly pointed and the

sides angled outwards. The apophysis of the

hasal piece is medium width,

Remarks This species is closest to S. convexa

Carter. It 8 larger and has yellow elytra while

those of 3, convey are red, Tt tas been found

associated with Advuporune veniiimetim ate

Eremophite lonsifalia in NSW. and with

16?

Kremophila sceparin’ in South Australia,

Named after Mr J. R. ‘Turner, Hill End,

N.S.W,

Stigmodera (Castiarina) cuchie sp, woy,

FIGS 3Y, 71

Alolorype. & 36 km E S.A./W.A. border,

27.81.1980, Af. Golding & M_ Powell. SAMA

Pal $42

Allanpe 9. 35 km EF S.A./W.A. border, Erenio

plitle weldii, 21Xu. 0982, 7, ME, By d& Sod. Barker,

SAMA LC 21 153

Puratypes, 4 osunte data ws holotype, MPWA: 3

@ & 6 ©, sume duta as allatype, SAMA.

Colow. Head, antennae, pronotum, under-

surface and legs bronze. Scutellam bronze with

purple relleeuions. Elytta yellow with follaw-

Ina bronze markings! varrow basal margin,

pre-medial fascia expanded at each end

anteriorly over humeral callus and posteriorly

touching margin and enclosing yellow spot;

posl-medial fascia touching margin expanded

forwards obliquely in middle of anterior edge.

touching Ist fascia and enclosing large yellow

spot in middle and smaller one on margin:

pre-apical spade-shaped mark which expands

laterally enclosing 4 spot on apical margin,

all marks connected down suture, Markings

much heavier in some specimens and in these

there are 7 yellow spots, 4 on the margin and

Jin the middle. Hairs silver,

Shape and xsculpinre, Head with close deep

punctures, median suleus, muzzle very short,

eves bulbous. Antennae compressed: segments

1-4 obconic, 5-11 toothed, Pranotinm with

close deep punctures, hairy at lateral edges;

“longue basal fovea extending to middle as

tlabrous line, basal notches obscure; project-

ing forwards in middle of apical margin, basal

margin almost straight; laterally rounded from

base to apex, widest i middle, Seutellim cor

diform, excavate, glabrous, Elytea punetute-

striate, striae deep ear apex, intervals conver

with deep pumetures; laterully angled outwards

fram base rounded at humeral callus, concave,

rounded after middle and narrowed to hi-

spinose apex; marginal spine larger than

siulucal margin indented between, apices

diverging slighily. Undersurfuce with shallow

punctures, edges of abdominal sclurites glab-

rous; hairy, hairs moderately long. S; truncate

in both sexes.

Size. Males, 10. > 18

(6). Females, 116) Oe

(7).

“AR + 0.09 mm

~ 42 = 0.08 mm

168 5S, BARKER

Male genitalia. Fig. 3V. The parameres are

parallel-sided after the middle und round off

thrupily to the apices, The median lobe is

sharp and the sides are curved away at an

angle. The apophysis of the basal piece is very

hurrew, S. eupricavda (Fig, 3T) has a blunt

median lobe and the apophysis of the basal

plece ts wider,

Remarky, Grouped with $8. cupricauca

Saunders on the basis of male penitalia and

external morphology, Distinguished by being

* brouder species and differences in male

genitalia, All specimens examined were col-

lected on the flowers of Eremophila weldil

The specific name is derived from the name

of the district where it was collected,

Sagmodera (Castiarina) beewanyia Curter 1933

PIG. 7J.

Srgeodera hoounyia Curler, 1932: p, 162.

Burker & Edward, (963; p, 170. Barker, 1979;

p. 15,

Siginedera bodyania Carter, 1933: p, 162.

Obvenberger, 1934; p, 687,

This species was described from a unique

female specimen collected by Mrs Crocker nee

Baesjou on 20.57.1931 on Myoporum platy-

eerpam R. Br. at Booanyia Sto, Norseman

district, W.A, The type is located in’ the

NMYVA, With P. G. Kempster on 20.x1.1980

I collected a series on flowers of M, platy-

carpunt on Balladonia Stn W.A., now lodged

in the SAMA & WAMA collections, ‘The

beetles were common and oevurred with S,

subacutiveps Barker and §. eryihraptera

(Boisdyval), this is the flest record of the latter

species from W.A,

Acknowledgements

I wish to thank the following people for

assistance: Dr G. F, Gross and Dh BE. Oi.

Matthews, South Anstralian Museum: Dr J,

Liwrence and Mr ‘!_ Weir, Division of Ento-

mology, C.S.LR.O.; Dr G, B. Monteith,

Queenslind Muscut, Ms M, Schneider and

Mr G, Daniels, Department of Eatomulipy.

University of Queensland; Dr T, F. Houston,

Western Australian Muscum; Miss ©. M. HL.

von Hayek, British Museum (Natural His-

tory}, London; Dr M. UWhhp, Museum of

Natural Science, Humboldt University, Berlin;

Dr R. Damoiseau, Institut Royal des Sciences

Naiurelles de Beligique, Brussells,; Mr K, ‘T.

Richards, Department of Agriculture, South

Perth; Mr R. L Storey and Dr N. Gough,

Department of Primary Industry, Mareeba;

Dr J. Green and Dr A. S. George. Western

Australian Stale Herbarium, South Perth; Mr

R. Chinnock, South Australian Herbarium,

Adelaide; Mr E, E, Adams, Edungalba; Mr G.

Anderson, Cowell; Mr and Mrs R. W. Ander-

son, Rocky Glen; Mr and Mrs K. Carnaby,

Wilga; Mrs A. E. Crocker and family, Balla-

donia; Mr M. Golding, Sydtey; MrT. M.S

Hanlon, Sydney; Mrs J. Harslett, Amiens:

Mr K, Hateley, Kiata; Mr M_ Powell, Atta-

dale; Mr R, P. MeMillan, Cottesloe: Mr and

Mrs kK, Schwartz, Binnaway; Mr R, G, Thomp-

son, Ellwood; Mr J. R. Turner, Hill End:

Mr G. Williams, Lansdowne; Mr A, Walford

Huggins, Mt Molloy; Miss H. Vanderwoude,

Mrs J. Gardner, Mr P, Kempster and Mr

D. J, Williams, Department of Zoology, Uni-

versity of Adelaide; Ms J. ‘Thurmer, Under-

dale; National Parks Board of Western Aus-

tralia lor permission to collect in PMlora

Reserves: Mr B, Kk. Bowen, Director, Fisheries

and Wildlife Department, Western Australia

for u scientific permit to collect Buprestids;

The Director, National Parks and Wildlife

Service, South Australia for permission to

collect in National Parks; The Director,

National Parks and Wildlife Service of New

South Wales tor permission to collect in

the Warrambungles National Park; The

Research and Publications Committee, Uni-

versity of Adelaide for grants-in-akl of

research, ALRG.S. & ALBARLS. fur yrants-in-uid

of research. Mark Mitchell Trust Fund for

publication costs of the coloured illustrations.

References

Raakie, S. (1979) New species and a catalogue

ol Stigmedera (Castiarina) (Coleoptera: Bup-

restidac). Trans, Ry Sac. &. Anst. 13. 1-23,

—— (1980) New species and synonyms of Sriv-

neatera (Casiiarina) (Coleoptera: Buprestidae ).

thie. Ld, 1-7

~— & Powarn, D, A. (1963) Corrections ta type

localities of (hree species of Western Australian

Sugmodera (Buprestidae, Coleoptera). HA.

Nar, 8, 10-171,

BLacknuen, “L, (1982) Coleoptern, in Scientific

results of the Elder Expedition. Vranys, R. Sve.

S. Aust, 16, 16-61,

Bowpovar, J. A. (1835) Voyage de l'Astrolobe,

(Librairie Eneyelopedique de Rorety Paris, )

Carrer, HW. d, (1916) Revision of the emus Stiy-

Meovderd, add deseriptions of some new species

of Buprestidae (Order Coleopterad, Yrans. &.

Sou, S. dust, 40, 78-144.

NEW SYNONYMS AND NEW SPECIES OF STIGMODERA 169

—— (1919) Notes on Australian coleoptera, with

descriptions of new species. Proc. Linn. Soe.

N.S.W, 44, 137-173.

(1924) Australian Coleoptera: Notes and

new species. No. iv. /bid. 49, 521-544,

(1927) Australian Coleoptera: Notes and

new species. No, v. /hid, 52, 222-234.

(1929) A check list of the Australian Bup-

restidae. Aust. Zool. 5, 265-304,

(1931) Notes on the genus Stigmodera

(Family Buprestidae). Together with descrip-

tions of new species of and a retabulation of

the subgenus Castiarina. Ibid. 6, 337-367.

(1933) Australian Coleoptera. Notes and

new species. No. VIII. Proc. Linn. Soc. NSW.

58, 159-180.

(1934) Australian and New Guinea Coleop-

tera, Notes and new species. No, TI. /bid, 59,

252-269,

—— (1940) Australian Buprestidae and the Junk

catalogue. dunn. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 11, No. 6,

380-389.

Deuguet, C, M, (1956) Notes on Australian Bup-

restidue, with descriptions of three new species

and two sub-species of the genus Stigmodera,

subgenus Castiarina. Prec, Linn. Soc. N.S.W.

81, 153-156.

Donovan, E. (1805) An epitome of the Natural

History of the Insects of New Holland, New

Zealand, Otaheite, and other islands in the In-

dian, Southern, and Pacific Oceans; etc. (The

author and F.C, & J. Rivington: London.)

Gory, H. (1841) Histoire Naturelle et incono-

graphie des Insectes. Coleopteres. (Tome. iv. P.

Dumenil: Paris.)

Hope, P. W, (1846) XXX. Descriptions of various

new species of Buprestidae from Australia,

Trans. ent. Soc. Lond. 4, 208-220.

KerRREMANS, C, (1892) Catalogue synonymique

des Buprestides decrits de 1758 A 1890. Mém,

Soe. r. ent, Bele. 1, 1-304.

(1898) Buprestides nouveaux de l’Australie

et des regions voisines. Ann. Soc. ent, Belg. 42.

113-182.

(1902) Coleoptera Serricornia Fam, Bupresi-

dae. Genera Insect. 12, 1-338 (P. Wytsman:

Brussells).

LaPorre, F. L. & Gory, H. (1837) Histoire

Naturelle et Iconographie des Insectes. Coleop-

teres, Tome ii. Suite aux Buprestides. (P.

Dumenil: Paris.)

MacLeay, W. (1863) Descriptions of twenty new

species of Buprestidae, belonging to the genus

Stigmodera, from the northern parts of Austra-

lia. Trans. ent. Soc. N.S.W. 1, 22-32.

ORENBERGER, J. (1928) Opuscula Buprestologica

I. Archiv. Naturgesch. 1926, 1-350,

—— (1933) Notes on the Australian genus Stiv-

modera Eschsch. (Col, Bupr.). Cas sl. Spol.

entont 30, 65-76.

(1934) Buprestidae I. in Coleoptorum Cata-

logus. Vol. xii. (Junk: Den Haag.)

Saunvers, E, (1868) A revision of the Australian

Buprestidae described by the Rev. F. W. Hope.

Trans. ent. Sac, Lond, 1868, 1-67.

—— (1869) Insecta Saundersiana: or characters

of undescribed species in the collection of Wil-

liam Saunders, Esq.. F.R.S., F.L.S., etc., vol. iii,

Buprestidae pt, 1, 1-27. (John van Voorst:

Paternoster Row, London,)

—— (1871) Catalogus Buprestidarum. Synony-

micus et Systematicus. (EF. W. Janson: 28 Mu-

seum Street, London.)

Tuomson, J, (1879) Jypt Buprestidarum Musaci

Thomsoniani. Appendix 1 a. (E. Deyrolle:

Paris.)

Watt, J. C. (1979) Abbreviations for Entomo-

logical collections. N.Z. Zool. 6, 519-520,

CORRELATION OF THE UPPERMOST LATE PRECAMBRIAN

SUCCESSION ACROSS THE TORRENS HINGE ZONE IN THE PORT

AUGUSTA REGION OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY P. §. PLUMMER

Summary

Palaeoenvironmental data are used with lithologic criteria to correlate the uppermost Late

Precambrian Tent Hill Formation on the Stuart Shelf with the succession in the adjacent Adelaide

Geosyncline. It is found that the Tent Hill Formation (sensu stricto) lies above a previously

unrecognized disconformity and is equivalent to the upper portion of the Wilpena Group within the

geosyncline, and not the lower portion as previously believed.

CORRELATION OF THE UPPERMOST LATE PRECAMBRIAN

SUCCESSION ACROSS THE TORRENS HINGE ZONE

IN THE PORT AUGUSTA REGION OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by P. S. PLUMMER*

Summary

PLUMMER, P. S. (1983) Correlation of the uppermost Late Precambrian Succession across

the Torrens Hinge Zone in the Port Augusta region of South Australia. Trans. R. Soc.

S. Aust. 107(3), 171-175, 30 November, 1983.

Palaeoenvironmental data are used with lithologic criteria to correlate the uppermost

Late Precambrian Tent Hill Formation on the Stuart Shelf with the succession in the adjacent

Adelaide Geosyncline. It is found that the Tent Hill Formation (sensu stricto) lies above a

previously unrecognized disconformity and is equivalent to the upper portion of the Wilpena

Group within the geosyncline, and not the lower portion as previously believed.

KEY WORDS: Late Precambrian, Tent Hill Formation, Torrens Hinge Zone.

Introduction

Numerous lateral facies changes within the

Adelaidean succession of South Australia make

accurate stratigraphic correlation difficult.

Recent analyses of lithofacies distributions and

detailed mapping of areas where lithofacies

intertongue have enabled useful time-signifi-

cant correlations to be made in the Adelaide

Geosyncline. However, correlating the basinal

succession with that on the Stuart Shelf to the

west is further complicated by an almost com-

NEW SOUTH G. WALES —

fe}

ADELAIDEAN

Basinal

Shelf

Tent Hill Formation

fl BASEMENT

VICTORIA

Fig. 1. Locality map showing distribution of Tent

Hill Formation outcrop on Stuart Shelf,

* Department of Geology, University of Adelaide.

Present address: Petroleum Development Oman,

P.O. Box 81, Muscat, Sultanate of Oman.

plete lack of outcrop in the intervening Tor-

rens Hinge Zone (Fig. 1). The only useful in-

formation available in this zone is that from

the Wilkatana Oil Bore Number 1, located

some 45 km north of Port Augusta.

Within the basin numerous transgressions

and regressions produced a thick sedimentary

succession. On the adjacent shelf, however, de-

position occurred only: during times of maxi-

mum transgression, resulting in a condensed

sequence frequently punctuated by discon-

formities. Although the stratigraphies of the

two areas are now well known, several differ-

ing correlations have been made between the

uppermost Precambrian sediments on_ the

Stuart Shelf—i.e. the Tent Hill Formation

(sensu Thomson & Johnson 1968)—and the

basinal succession. These include the equiva-

lence drawn (1) with the Emeroo Quartzite of

the basal Burra Group (Mawson 1947); (2)

with the Brachina Subgroup of the basal Wil-

pena Group (Coats 1965; Thomson & Johnson

1968; Thomson et al. 1975; Thomson 1976);

and (3) with the Pound Subgroup of the upper

Wilpena Group (Segnit 1939; Miles 1954;

Johns 1963). All these correlations, however,

were based purely on lithostratigraphic charac-

teristics which, as Rowlands (1973) states, are

inadequate and can lead to invalid palaeogeo-

graphic reconstructions. Now, however, with

the recent completion of a detailed palaeogeo-

graphic study of the Brachina Subgroup

(Plummer 1978a,b), new and_ chronostrati-

1Plummer, P. S. (1978b) The upper Brachina

Subgroup: a Late Precambrian intertidal deltaic

and sandflat sequence in the Flinders Ranges,

South Australia. Ph.D. thesis, Univ. Adel. (2

vols) (unpublished ),

172

graptically significant criteria can he applied 19

the problem,

The ‘Tent Hill Formation

Originally defined by Brown (1585) as

“purple and greenish shales overlain by sand-

stone, quartzite and quartzose sandstone”, the

Tent Hill Formation bas been the subject of

much revision and redefinition (Table 1).

Miles (1954) limited the formation (which he

called the Lincoln Gap Flagstones) to the

upper arenaceous sediments and defined the

underlying shales as a separate formadlion—the

Tregolana Shales, Ceawfont (1964) then

recognized a lower red Corrabetra Member

and an upper white Simmens Member within

the newly restricted Tent Hill Formation,

Thomson (1965) showed the Tregolana Shales

to be sharply divisible inte a lower unit of

purple shale and siltstone with green shale

laminations, and an upper unit of purple shale

with 10% thin beds of red sandstone. Soon

after, Coats (1965) formally included these

shaly units into the Tent Hill Formation as its

basal member, to be in keeping with Brown's

original concept, Later, Thomson & Johnson

(1968) introduced yet another new member—

the Whyalla Sandstone Member—and defined

it us lying conformably below the Tregolana

Shale Member,

Other units equivalent to members of the

Tent Hill Formation on the Stuart Shelf m-

clude the Woomera Shale Member, equivalent

to the Tregolana Shale Member, and the

Arcoona Quartzite Member, equivalent to the

Simmens Quartzite Member Clohis 1968).

Correlation of the Basal Portion of the

Tent itl Formation with the Basinal

Succession

Coats (1965) produced evidence which he

believed supported the verrelation of the Sim-

mens Quartzite Member with the ARC Range

Quartzile and the Corraberra Sandstone-Tre-

golana Shale Members with the Brachina For-

mation. These correlations were later seem

ingly supported when Thorson & Johnson

(1968) equated their Whyalla Sandstoue

Member with the Seacliff Sandstone Member

of the Brachina Formation —a granule-

bearing sandstone believed then co replace

the distinctive Nuccaleena Pormution toward

the margins of the basin (Thomson 1966).

Lenticular dolomites, however, are present

conformably below the 'Tregolana Shale Mem-

ber in the region near the Currapateem Arm

CORRELATION ACROSS TORRENS HINGE ZONE

of Lake Torrens which Cuats (pers. conn,

(977) maintains are typical of the Nuccaleena

Formation. Further reports of the Nuccalegis

Formation being present on ihe Stuart Shell

ure to be fouiid ii Rowlands (1973) and Preiss

(1979), Also, it was recently shown by Plum-

mer (1978s) that the Nuccaleena Formation

was not equivalent to the Seactif? Sandstone

Member, and that the latter unit was, in fact,

ihe uppermost member of the underlying Ela-

tina Formation (Umberatana Ciroup). Plum-

mer also showed the Brachina Pormation-ABC

Range Quartzite stratigraphy to be more com:

plex than previously believed, and a hitherto

unrecoumized disconformity at the top of the

quarrzite. This led to the suggestion that Coats’

(1965) correlation of the Simmens Quartzite

Member with the ABC Range Quartvite was

incorrect, and that the equivalence he drew

hetween the grouped Corraberra Sundstone-

Tregolana Shale Members with the “Brachina

Formation’ was questionable.

The massive dolomites of the Nuccaleena

Formation reach a maximum thickness of

about 10 am and represent deposition upon an

intertidal to supratidal mudflat (Plummer

1978). The presence of the Nuccaleena dolo-

mites on the Stuart Shelf, and their sirati-

graphic position between the Whyalla Sand-

stone Member and Tregolana Shale Menther.

therefore, strongly suggest that the Whyalla

Sandstone Member-Seacliff Sandstone Member

correlation is correct, as explamed by Horwitz

(1962), Their position below the Nuecaleena

dolomites, however, indicates that these mem-

bers belong to the Elatina Formation and its

equivalents, and not of the *Brachina Formae

tion’ as previously thought, Also, af least the

basal unit of the Tregolana Shale Member

(seusy “Thomson 1965), ving contormably

above the Nuccaleena dolomites, can be con-

fidently correlated with the Moolooloo Forma-

tlon of the Brachipa Subgroup, which lies con-

formably above the Nuccaleena Vormation

within the basin (see Fi. 2),

Brachiua Subgroup Palseogeography ond

Middle Tent Hill Formation Correlation

Although displaying a shart initial trans-

gression from the intertidal and supratidal

Nucealeena carbonate mudilat ta the sub-

merged tidal Mooloolay mudfat, the Brachina

Subgroup jis predominantly a regressive sc-

quence dominated by a delta in the Port

Augusta region—the ARC Range Quartzite—

which steadily prograded onta a surrounding

bP. 5. PLUMMER

ADELAIDE

‘SHOSYNCLINE!

STHANIGHAPHY

myuanr

SHELE

STNATIGRAPHY

PALAEDENVINONME NTS

San Siontengad HanuMt

Borivey:

Sandstone

ee ee -

| Weavlana = Restrictert! Wonoxa

Shite Saninerqed en ay

Memosr = “prmaiary

*Murlflor

lntgttiaal Sandylot

Tan! | Faririochny

Suri

Pow nettean

AGC ange

Denice aaron

Serer

Royley Range

Fornaio

~ ‘

Moorivarr

Parmatian

Sumyoup

rennet

hole Maotpoloo

Sabrangen

Faith

_ . = Formionin

NU Oerite UTE thler fat

i Sypratidal

Movi

argon,

Nugerilweiig

Forman

Weyegilit

2 Oon3ta

Condatore

Sant Senet? j

— Sonits hi ¢ \

Tavall ae Veneer

Fig. 2. Stratigraphie correlation of the Hill For-

mation (seasu stricta) with uppermost Precam-

brian succession in Adelaide “Geosyncline’,

based on pilieoenvironmental criteria.

intertidal mudflat—the Moorillah and Bayley

Ronge Formations. At the time of maximum

regression, islands appeared in the centre of

the basin and a portion of the delta complex

was eroded, These reworked sediments were

redeposited as an intertidal sandflat spreading

meridionally along the western side of the

basin, The disconformity marking this erosive

phitse culs progressively deeper into the Bra-

china Subgroup in a westward direction [see

Phimmer 1978a; 1978b, Vol. 2, Fig. 7-3 & p.

Ad). In fact, some 650 m of sediment was re-

moved within 2 km of the limiting eastern

edge of the disconformity, Although the sub-

group reaches its maximum thickness of about

2200 m in the Port Augusta region, under such

suvere erosive conditions, only the lowermost

transgressive sediments of the subgroup (ie.

those deposited in the submerged tidal mud-

flat and the underlying dolomites) could be

expected to be still preserved on the Stuart

Shelf today. Within this region, however, out-

173

crop of the sandy upper members of the Tent

Hill Formation oceurs (see Fig. 1).

The presence of the Nuccaleena Formation

on the shelf, and its conformable relationship

with the overlying shales of the lower unit of

the Treyolany Shale Member, indicate, there-

fore. that these sediments are correlative with

the Nuccaleena Formation and the basal Moo-

looloo Formation, respectively, within the

basin. However, the disconformity marking the

top of the Brachina Subgroup in the marginal

regions of sedimentation ocgates any further

possibility of ‘Tent Pill Formation-Brachina

Subgroup correlation, It is interesting to note

that the sharp boundary separating the two

shaly units of the Tregolana Shale Member

(sce Thomson 1965) lics in the correct strati-

graphic position to represent the disconformity

on the shelf.

Upper Wilpena Group Palnengeography and

Upper Tent Hill Formation Correlation

Following the erosive climax to the Brachina

Subgroup regression, « significant transgression

oeeurred. ‘Phe influx of coarse detritus inte the

basin had ceased, and this transgression ini-

tlally produced w purple shaly tidal mudflat

dyeposit—the Bunyeroo Formation. As this de-

posit steadily encroached across the Torrens

Hinge Zone and onto the Stuart Shelf it was

replaced by a domimantly carbonate succession

—the Wonoka Formation—deposited initially

under restricted, low energy conditions, Fol-

lowing this, coarse detritus Was Once again de-

bouched into the basin, Initially a vast expanse

of red crossbedded shaly sand was deposited

under intertidal conditions—the Bonney Sand-

stone, With further Ceansgression, a more mas-

sive, cleaner white sand was deposited within

a high energy. shallow submerged environment

—the Rawnsley Quartzite (see Jenkins 1975).

This transgression and coarse detrital influx

was recorded on the Stuart Shelf. The initial

tidal mudflat encroachment produced the

upper ‘purple shale with 10% thin beds of red

sandstone’ unit of the Tregolana Shale Meme-

ber, The gradation from this unit into the red

shaly Corraberra Sandstone Member marks the

inihation of the coarse detrital influx, whilst

the further gradation from, the Corraberra

Sandstone Member into the white Simmens

Quartzite Member records the change in depo-

sition With transgression from an intertidal, to

a shallow submerged environment, The general

thinness of the Simmens Quartzite Member on

the Stuart Shelf is due to later erosion, possibly

174 CORRELATION ACROSS TORRENS HINGE ZONE

TABLE |, Summary of Historie develapment af Tent Hill Formation stratigraphic nomenclature,

HBG

| 1BES)

CRARPORIT

6) 9nd |

Shieh

Memhey

Lined un

VT belgue Feattoes

= Jent Wiel

Torti t lint

Mopr theses

Meme

THUMEO &

JTHINSON L)RAeT

Samuel

Nur chee

hMbin bee

A uti

iMeaet tite

Meili

Si aie

(Tht | te

Momo

—

Lora be mea

tals rine

Mowhey

Corry bien

vohd etony

Maier

voriahurra

Lorde tape

| Shawl ger

Treged ana

Herre ben Sha bien

| ‘ ‘Vrepolana

Shale

Trgul noe Trructada

Mecentixer

‘lobby Shalv

ember fen le |

‘eleramenl Stabe

related to the Precambrian-Cambrian uncon-

formity.

The presence within Wilkatana Oil Bore

Number 1 of maroon and green dolomitic

shales and siltstones lying disconformably be-

neath Cambrian deposits, and equated with the

Bunyeroo and Wonoka Formations (Thomson

1969), supports the correlation of the upper

Tent Hill Formation with the upper portion of

the Wilpena Group. The absence of quartzite

in this bore is readily explained in terms of a

horst and graben basement structure to the

Torrens Hinge Zone and hence erosion to a

deeper stratigraphic level on the horst struc-

ture(s) prior to Cambrian deposition,

Conclusions

li is herein suggested that the sharp boun-

dary separating the two shaly units within the

Tregolana Shale Member represents the dis-

conformity marginally present within the basin

al the top of the ABC Range Quartzite. As

such, a Telatively large lacuna exists within the

Tent Hill Formation as presently defined. To

be in keeping with the Australian Code of

Nucca been

Tormatien

Whyudla

Sumads Gane

Whyalla

Samisrone

Member

Stratigraphic Nomenclature (1973), it is there-

fore deemed necessary that the term ‘Tent Hill

Formation’ be redefined to the restricted se-

quence comprising the upper shaly unit of the

Tregolana Shale Member (for which this name

should be retained), the Corraberra Sandstone

Member and the Simmens Quartzite Member.

Consequently, the lower shaly unit of the Tre-

yolana Shale Member (referred to as the ‘un-

named shale’ in Table | and on Fig. 2), the

Nuccaleena dolomite equivalents and the Why-

alla Sandstone Member should all be disso-

ciated from the Tent Hill Formation and re-

defined separately. This revised stratigraphic

nomenclature for the uppermost Precambrian

sediments on the Stuart Shelf is presented in

Table |. Pigure 2 presents the correlation of

this stratigraphy with the basinal succession,

hused on the palaeoenvironmental criteria out-

lined above,

Acknowledgments

Drs V. A, Gostin, R. J. F. Jenkins and B.

Daily are thanked for their comments and

critical reading of the manuscript.

References

AUSTRALIAN Cope OF STRATIGRAPHIC NoMENCLA-

ture (1973) J. geol. See, Aust, 20, 105-112,

Brown, H. Y. L. (1885) Report on yeological

character of country passed over from Port

Augusta to Eucla, Parl, Paper, SX. Aust, 45,

Coats, R. P. (1965) Tent Hill Formation correla-

tions—Port Augusta and Lake Torrens, Quart.

geol. Notes, geol. Surv. 8, Aust, 16, 9-11.

Crawrorp, A. R. (1964) CULTANA map sheet,

Geological Atlas of South Australia, 1:63 360

series. (Geol. Surv. S. Aust: Adelaide.)

P. S, PLUMMER 175

Horwitz, R. C. (1962) Some features of the

lower part of the Marinoan Scries of the Ade-

laide System, Aust, J. Sci, 24, 355-356.

Jenkins, R. J. F. (1975) An environmental study

of the rocks containing the Ediacara assemblage

in the Flinders Ranges. Abstr. Ist Aust. geol.

Cony., geol. Soc, Aust., 21-22.

Jouns, R. K. (1963) Stratigraphic correlations in

the Lake Torrens region, Quart. geol. Notes,

geol. Surv. S. Aust. 6, 7-8.

(1968) Geology and mineral resources of the

phair eae ae area. Bull. geol. Surv. 8.

ust. 41.

Mawson, D. (1947) The Adelaide Series as deve-

loped along the western margin of the Flinders

Ranges. Trans, R. Soc. S. Aust. 71, 259-280.

Mies. K. R. (1954) The geology and iron ore re-

sources of the Middleback Range area. Bull.

geal. Surv. 8S. Aust. 33,

PLumMMer, P. 8. (1978a) The stratigraphy of the

lower Wilpena Group (Late Precambrian),

Flinders Ranges, South Australia. Trans. R, Soc.

S. Aust. 102, 25-38.

—— (1978c) Note on the palaeoenvironmental

significance of the Nuccaleena Formation (Late

Precambrian), central Flinders Ranges, South

Australia. J. geol. Soc. Aust. 25, 395-402.

Preiss, W. V. (1979) Adelaidean sedimentation:

The Adelaide Geosyncline and Stuart Shelf.

Rep. Dept Mines Energy, S. Aust. 79/24.

Row .anps, N. J, (1973) The Adelaidean System

of South Australia: A review of its sedimenta-

tion, tectonics and copper occurrences. Proc.

Belt Symposium 1, 80-113.

Seanit, R. W. (1939) The Pre-Cambrian-Cam-

brian succession: The general and economic geo-

logy of these systems in portions of South Aus-

tralia, Bull. geol. Surv. S, Aust. 18.

THomson, B. P. (1965) Erosional features of the

Tent Hill Formation. Quart, geol. Notes, geol.

Surv. $8. Aust. 13, 4-5.

(1966) Stratigraphic relationships between

sediments of Marinoan age—Adelaide region.

Ibid, 20, 7-9,

(1969) Precambrian Basement Cover: The

Adelaide System. /n: Parkin, L. W. (Ed.):

“Handbook of South Australian Geology.” pp.

49-83 (Geol. Surv. S. Aust.; Adelaide).

(1976) Precambrian geology and tectonics

of the Stuart Shelf and Torrens Hinge Zone.

Excursion Guide, 25th Int. geol. Congr. 33A:

1-11.

, ForBes, B. G. & Coats, R. P. (1975) Ade-

laide Geosyncline and Stuart Shelf, S.A.—Geo-

logy. In: Knight, C. L. (Ed.): Economic geo-

logy of Australia and Papua New Guinea. Part

I: Metals. Aust. Inst. Min. Metal., Monaer.

Series 5, 537-542,

& JoHNson, J. E. (1968) Marinoan strati-

graphy, Port Augusta region, Quart. geol. Notes,

geol. Surv. S. Aust. 25, 4-7.

HALLOYSITE IN A WEATHERED PROFILE AT PORT MACQUARIE,

NEW SOUTH WALES

BY E.. SLANSKY

Summary

Along the beaches at Port Macquarie on the northern coast of New South Wales outcrops a suite of

ophiolitic rocks which are highly altered. At places, soft argillaceous rocks occur which consist

predominantly of clay materials.

HALLOYSITE IN A WEATHERED PROFILE AT PORT MACQUARIE,

NEW SOUTH WALES

by E. SLANSKY*

Summary

SLANSKY, F, (1983) Malloysite in a weathered profile at Port Macquarie, New South Wales.

Trans. R. Sec. 8. Aust, 17(3), 177-185, 30 November, 1983,

Along the beaches at Port Macquarie on the northern coast of New South Wales avterops

# suile af uphiolitic rocks which are highly altered, Al places, soft urgillaceous rocks occur

Which consist predominantly of clay minerals.

Above Rocky Beach, halloysite gecurs in 4 prominent horizon of blue clay, about 2 m

thick, which is part of i deeply weathered profile, The profile is situated above serpentinite.

Four wlay onoeral assemblages were recounized in the profile [rom the bottom lo the twp:

(i) miinly smectite with some illite and a serpentine mineral, (ii) halloysite, (iii) kaolinite,

and (iv) kaolinite and ifite. Halloysile tubes, ax seen under SEM, are of twa types: well

Ueveloped with a aspect ratio >10)1, afd (ii) atranged in au dense aggregate with an aspect

ralio <10:t. The halloysite was shown to be originally the 10 form, but during storage

and handling, partial to complete dehydration took place. ‘Ube mineral reacts with potassium

aucelate and ethylene glycol, The expansion of its lattice after glycolation is incomplete

and an effect similar to a purtial dehydration ig produced. A partially dehydrated natural

sample Was interpreted with the aid of the calewlated Allegra's mixing fupetion as a 4.6

assemblage of hydrated and dehydrated hilloysite,

The halloysite clay and the smectite underneaih were most probably derived from

serpentinite as is indicateel hy the position and texture of the clay, the mineral composition

of its insoluble residue, the truce element distribution, and the demonstrated thermodynamic

feasibility of the chrysotile-hallaysite transformation,

KEY WORDS: Hulloystte, PE Micquarie, weathered profile, origin, interstratifigatian

(7 & 10 A),

Introduction

Along the beaches al Pt Maequatie on the

noithern coast of N.S.W, there js a outerop-

ping suite of ophiolitic rocks comprising banded

cherts, shules, manganese silicate rocks, pil-

lowed and breeciated extrusive rocks, mafic

and ullramatic dykes, diorilis imtrusive rocks,

and a serpeutivised ultranafie eomplex (Pig,

1). The rocks are highly altered and mineral

assemblages ure characteristic of prehnite-

pumpellyiie, vreensebist and ylaucophane

schist facies of metamorphism, ‘The complex

hus been described by Barron e/ al, (1976).

AL places, solt argillaceous rocks Occur

which are constituled predominantly of clay

ounerals. OF these the majority are associated

with chert, X-ray powder diffraction analysis

showed them to be composed of kaolinite and/

or chlorite together with micaceous mineral.

Originally they were shales and slates. Argil-

lized mafie volcanic rocks outcrop at Shelly

Beach and Vacking Point, Their main, and

sometimes sole, constituent is smectite,

"Geological & Mining Museum, Geological

Survey of New South Wales, 36-64 George St,

Sydney. N.S.W~. 2000.

The most interesting clay mimeral oceur-

rence was found on ia slope above Rocky

Beach, Which is situated about | km SE from

the mouth of the Hastings River (gfid re-

ference 928/219 on Pt Macquarie 1:25 000),

There, halloysite occurs in @ prominent hori-

yon of blue clay ubout 2 nm) thick which is ob-

viously part of a deeply weathered profile, This

occurrence differs from all hitherto recorded

oecurrences in N.S.W. (Loughnan & Craiy

1960; Ruttigan 1967),

Clay mineral composition of the profile

The profile with halloysite clay is situated

above serpentinite which contains nearby two

lenses. of glaucophane-bearing schists, Rare but

significant Jocal concentrations of compact

white magnesite and rare macroscopic chro-

mite were found in the serpentinite. ‘The pro-

file itself! comprises the following lithological

units (Pig. 2):

0-7 m Clay; white or light wrey or

brown occasionally mottled, la-

minated atid sutidy or silty (6).

7-10.3m Clay: white, red-brown mottled

(5).

Blue clay: ferruginous, purple at

the top (4),

10.3-12.4 m

178 E. SLANSKY

PORT

MACQUARIE

Kilometres

‘ f [| Sand, sill, mud, gravel (Quaternary)

[*. ‘t| Unditferentiated Permian and Tertiary dolerites

= Metasedimentary sequence

(Palaeozoic)

Dismembered ophiolite suite rocks

meee §=Fault position approximate

Fig, |, Sketch map showing generalized geology of Pt Macquarie area and location of weathered pro-

file (modified from Burron ef al. 1976),

12.4-12.9m Clay; mottled, light brown, dark

brown and red, white (3),

12.9-13 m Clay: dark grey and brown, al-

most black (2).

13-14.1m Serpentinite: disintegrated, frag-

mentary, and cavernous (1).

14.) m Serpentinite: fresh,

X-ray powder diffraction data were obtained

by examining oriented as well as unoriented

specimens taken from all members of the pro-

file, Clay fractions less than 2 xm and less than

0.2 pm (es.d.) were studied, The estimation

of the quantity of clay minerals was based on

the comparison of diffraction intensities of

diagnostic basal reflections. Although the

results are semiquantitative, the relative dif-

ferences between samples are reasonably re-

liable.

The clay mineral distribution throughout the

section as revealed by the examination of the

less-than-2 jm fraction of 24 samples is shown

in Fig. 2. The interpretation of X-ray diagrams

was aided by the study of the less-than-0.2 jum

fraction, Thus, the micaceous mineral is con-

sidered to be illite, as its abundance in the finer

fraction is much higher, [t seems also that for

the less-than-0.2 pm fraction the boundary be-

tween zone 4 and 5 is slightly higher.

Four clay mineral assemblages can be clearly

distinguished in the section, Their typical X-ray

diagrams are represented in Fig, 2. From the

bottom to the top they are:

(i) Mainly smectite with some illite and ser-

penting mineral. The last increases to-

wards fresh serpentinite and is absent im

the clay fraction. Lithological units 1, 2

and partly 3,

(ii) Halloysite, predominantly us a sole clay

mineral, at the bottom sometimes with a

small quantity of smectite. Part of litho-

logical unit 3 and lithological unit 4,

(iii) Kaolinite, mainly as the only clay mineral,

oveasionally with a small quantity of

smectite and more frequently with a small

quantity of illite, Lithological unit 5,

(iv) Kaolinite-illite, with the former slightly

dominating over the latter. In the very top

part there is a minule admixture of smec-

tile. Lithologieal unit 6.

HALLOYSITE AT PORT MACQUARIE 179

Fig, 2. Lithological sequence, clay mineral distri-

bution and X-ray diffraction traces of the four

clay mineral assemblages (CuKe radiation), s

= serpentine mineral, m — smectite, i — illite,

h = halloysite, k = kaolinite. Clay mineral dis-

tribution is normalized plot of diffraction inten-

sities of first basal reflections, Numbers on right

refer to lithological units established in profile.

The clay mineral composition of the profile

is also well illustrated by differential thermal

analysis (Fig. 3) which included a specimen

of fresh serpentinite (Fig. 3, curve 1). The

smectite clay of unit | produced a fairly atypi-

cal curve without a clearly defined dehydroxy-

lation maximum (Fig. 3, curve 2) despite its

well-defined diffractometer trace. The three re-

maining curves of Fig. 3 are in good agree-

ment with the results of X-ray diffraction ana-

lysis.

Mineral characteristics of the halloysite

The halloysite clay can be cut by a knife

when wet and readily disintegrates in water.

When left in the laboratory for some time it

develops desiccation cracks. It has a prominent

planar structure which is caused by alternation

of thin and rather irregular dark and light

parallel layers. The overall colour impression

is grey with bluish and purple tints. No distinct

mineral grains are visible to the naked eye.

Under a binocular stereomicroscope it can be

seen that the parallel structure is due to dark,

very small, red brown or dark grey grains

arranged in thin bands and embedded in a light

1000°C

Fig. 3. Differential thermal curves for natural

samples of individual lithological units. Num-

bers refer to those of Fig. 2.

° 200 400 too #00

coloured, white and grey massive matrix. The

white parts of the matrix appear to form tiny

elongated lenses within the grey matrix. In a

thin section cut across the banding the matrix

is a colourless scarcely birefringent aggregate

with fairly uniform extinction between crossed

nicols. The colourless matrix is stained yellow-

ish brown in elongated, generally parallel, thin

patches. There are many fine almost opaque

grains either disseminated throughout the rock,

or arranged in parallel clusters and patches.

Some of these grains are red-brown translucent

and anisotropic in polarized light. The clay is

highly magnetic. A powder made of it by

grinding is wholly attracted to a permanent

magnet.

The form of the halloysite particles could

be clearly seen under the scanning electron

microscope (Fig. 4). Fresh fragments of

natural clay were used as specimens. The hal-

loysite clay had a different tubular structure

in each of the two types of clayey matrix. Hal-

loysite in the tiny white lenses within the grey

180 E. SLANSKY

massive matrix is well developed in elongated

tubes with aspect ratios mostly higher than

10:1 and reaching 30:1 in several cases. The

diameter of the tubes is about 0.2 ~m. Some

Fig. 4. Scanning electron micrographs of natural

surfaces of halloysite clay: (a) halloysite in grey

matrix, (b) halloysite in small white lenses. In

(a), bar equals 1 um; in (b) bar equals 5 um.

TABLE 1. Halloysite, Rocky Beach, Pt Macquarie.

Chemical analysis Number of ions per

% 18 0 (OH)

SiO» 44.1 Si 3.807

TiO» 0.01 Ti 0.001

AlbOz 37.0 Al 3.766

Fe,Oz 0.58 Felll 0.038

FeO 0.02 Fell 0.001

MnO 0.01 Mn 0.001

MgO 0.036 Mg 0.006

CaO 0.03 Ca 0.003

SrO 0.001

BaO 0.003

Na»2O 0.04 Na 0.007

K,O 0.01 K 0.001

P2O; 0.29

H20+ 16.2 OH 9,322 (8.00)

H2O- 2.28 HO 0.657 (1.3)

COz 0.01

S 0.03

100.6

T. D. Rice, Analyst, Chemical Laboratory, N.S.W.

Department of Mineral Resources.

wii

raaw

5 10 15°

Fig. 5. Diffractometer traces of oriented aggregates

of halloysite. (a) natural specimen, (b) bench

dry, (c) glycolated. CuKa radiation.

HALLOYSITE AT PORT MACQUARIE 161

suitably oriented particles show the hollow in

the tubes. The form and arrangement of the

tubes is indicative of unrestricted crystalliza-

lion in an open space. In the grey matrix, hal-

loysite particles are arranged in a much denser

aggregate, The individual tubes are adjacent

and less well developed, The aspect ratio is

much smaller, less than 10:1, The diameter of

the tubes is the same as in the first type, viz,

0.2. pm. The tubes are markedly aligned and

appear to be somewhat flattened, Scanning

electron micrographs of specimens from above

the halloysite clay were also taken, Typical

kaolinite flaky morphology of particles was

revealed with occasional halloysite tubes occur-

ring immediately above the halloysite horizon,

The chemical composition of the halloysite

is given in Table 1, A conspicuous feature of

the analysis. is the high content of H.O+, As

there is no indication of the presence of any

other crystalline component in this fraction,

the exeess water which amounts to about 0.7

molecules belongs must probably to halloysite,

This is not an uncommon situation: high tem-

perature water values are larger in all but two

of the nineteen chemical analyses of halloy-

sites compiled by Weaver & Pollard (1973),

who attribute the excess to water trapped be-

tween layers during dehydration, In Table 1

the excess of water ubove (OH), Was com-

bined with the amount of water corresponding

to H,.O-. The value of 1,3 HO thus obtained

is intermediate between the hydrated and de-

hydrated form of halloysite,

X-ray powder dilfraction traces of halloysite

mainly indicate a dehydrated form (metahal-

loysite) (Fig. 5); it is however very likely

that the halloysite in natural samples was ori-

ginally hydrated and later lost water in the

process of storage and handling, Some oriented

diigrams, ev. that in Fig. 5a, show a strongly

asymmetrical OOL peak with a distinct tail to-

wards lower @ ungles. Sometimes there is even

a subsidiary peak in the “tail” at about 9.5 A.

Despite a reaction with ethylene glycol the

expansion of the halloysite lattice is incom-

plete. Instead of a single 7.7 A reflection of

the air-dry specimen, glycolation produces a

broad band with two maxima at 10.0 and 7.7

A (Vig, 5c). Intercalation with potassium ace-

tate (Wada 1961; Miller & Keller 1963) pro-

duced a strong peak at 14.2 A (Pig, 6d), After

washing and keeping the specimen wet this

spacing changed to 10.2 A (Rig. 6¢), When

ethylene glycol was upplied ou the wet speci-

men (the specimen slurry was on a membrane

filter and ethylene glycol was filtered through

it) immediate recording showed a peak at 11.2

A (Fig. 6f). Washed and air-dried specimens

displayed a broad peak with a tail towards

lower diffraction angles and with maximum at

7.9 A, The same specimens when glycolated

in the usual manner (left overnight above

ethylene glycol in a desiccator) yielded some-

5 10 15°

SS Ls — I

Fig. 6. Diffractometer traces of oriented aggregates

of halloysite; Lreated with (d) potassium ace-

tate. (¢) washed and kept wet, (f) glycolated

and X-rayed immediately, (g) washed, air-dried

and Jater glycolated (thin specimen), (h) same,

but thick specimen. CuKa radiation.

182 E, SLANSKY

what erratic results related to the thickness of

the oriented specimens: extremely thin speci-

mens expanded to about 11 A (Fig. 6g), thick

specimens showed minimal expansion with a

peak at 7.6 A (Fig. 6h) and specimens of

intermediate thickness exhibited a broad flat

peak around 8 A and an indistinct broad peak

at 11 A. The obvious inference is that ethylene

glycol vapour was able to penetrate only a thin

surface layer of halloysite spread on a glass

slide. Even in the case of the very thin speci-

men there is a tail of increased intensity to-

wards higher diffraction angles with a convex

appearance suggesting the presence of a peak

of non-expanded dehydrated halloysite.

Thus incomplete glycolation with or without

previous potassium acetate intercalation pro-

duced an effect similar to that taking place

during dehydration of hydrated halloysite.

Brindley & Goodyear (1948) first noted that

the 001 reflections of halloysite which loses

water, appear in two narrow regions of spac-

ings within a band of increased intensity.

Churchman ef al, (1972) concluded that de-

hydration of halloysite takes place through an

interstratification in which there is a partial

segregation of the two basic layer types, 7.2

and 10.1 A, respectively.

The interstratification of 7 and 10 A layers

was studied in detail and the results were sum-

marized elsewhere (Slansky 1980). Here, suf-

fice it to say that by calculating Allegra’s mix-

ing function (Allegra 1961; Cesari et al. 1965)

for different types of interstratification, viz.,

with maximum degree of randomness, with a

Fig, 7. Peak migration of Allegra’s mixing func-

tion with composition for 10 and 7 layers.

D = degree of randomness defined as Pa,/

Ps, S = degree of segregation defined as 1 —

1 — Pas/(1 — Ps), where Pas is probability

that 10 A spacing succeeds another and P, is

frequency of same spacing,

low degree of randomness, with moderate de-

grees of segregation, and with a high degree

of segregation, it was possible to simulate the

diffraction effects produced by assemblages of

the two layers mixed in various manners and

proportions, Fig. 7 summarizes the results in

terms of 001 peak movement with composition

expressed as the fractional proportion of the

10 A layer. The diagram shows that even in

the case of a moderate degree of segregation

(such as 0.2) there is a tendency for the reflec-

tions to be grouped near the values of the two

layers and the peak position corresponding to

the prevailing (hydrated or dehydrated) form

is Only slightly influenced by the presence of

the other one. In a rather narrow interval, both

peaks are present on the diffraction pattern

together. This interval increases with the

degree of segregation. The multiple peaks a,

c, and g of Figs. 5 and 6 belong to this inter-

val, and the peak a of natural halloysite can

be interpreted as 4:6 assemblage of hydrated

and dehydrated halloysite with some segrega-

tion.

Origin of the halloysite

Harrison (1955) reported an_ extensive

lateritic profile over serpentinite near Pt

Macquarie in connection with an examination

of a secondary enrichment of nickel and co-

balt. The laterite was formed, according to this

author, by in situ weathering of serpentinite

involving almost complete removal of mag-

nesia and a substantial reduction in SiO. along

with an increase in the Al.,O. and Fe.,O. con-

tents. Near the base of the lateritic profile

there is a noticeable concentration of cobalt,

nickel and chromite. Cobalt was found in such

a profile occurring a short distance south of

Nobby’s Point about 1886 (Jaquet 1898;

Carne 1896) bound in wad. Some mining took

place around the turn of the century, however

the main ore utilized was iron (cf. MacNevin

1975). The main ore-producing deposits were

in the town of Pt Macquarie,

Although all deposits mentioned above were

found at more or less different spots than was

the halloysite clay examined, its occurrence

within the same weathering crust can be taken

for granted. The considerable extension of the

weathering crust coupled with the diversity of

rocks along the coastline as documented by

Barron et al. (1976), however, results in the

problem of determining the parent rocks in-

volved in the weathering at the halloysite

occurrence.

HALLOYSITR AT PORT MACQUARIE 183

The position of the halloysite clay, and in

particule its accurrenee immediately above

serpentinite, and the proximity of two lenses

of glancophane schists suggests that halloysite

could have been formed cither from serpen-

tinite or from u glaucophane schist. The latter

possibility was fayoured in the past (ef, Barron

et al. 1976); however the present more de-

tailed study has indicated that serpentinite is

(he mare probable parent rock, ‘This conelusion

is based on several points;

1. ‘the texture of the halloysite elay re-

sembles that of a schistose serpentinite. ay cun

he seen when compariog thin sections of ihe

two foeks. The distribution of opaque grains

of iran oxides i significant iit this context, Tt

is « well known fact thal in the course of

serpentinization only a sinall part of the tron

from silicates of the serpentinite precursor

viters the serpentine minerals, The rest forms

a Maghetite network the form of which is i-

Hlueneecd by the structire of the rock. In the

case of sehistose serpentinile the grains or gar-

lands of wrains of magnetite are arranged in

parallel bands, as ure the iron oxide grains in

the hallaysile clay. The magnetite Jater can be

altered (mainly oxidized) to other iron oxides

or hydroxides.

2. The non-silicate fraction of the rocks

separated as insoluble residue by HF treat-

ment according lo Norrish (1968) and os

heavy puttion by panning, was examined by

X-ray powder diffraction, Hematite, some

maighemile, magnetite, and a spinel (whose

4 value within the range given by Hutchison

(1972) for chromite), were identified in the

fraction extracted from the halloysite clay. As

wis mentioned vurtier, the halloysite clay ts

hivhly magnetic and this property is eaused

by magnetile and possibly maghemite, The

asyociution of hematite and spinels ends at the

boundary between the halloysitic and kaalini-

lic clays.

3. A somi-quantilaltive analysis of mor and

trace elements in the profile by optical emis-

sion spectrography, in particular the distribu

fion ot Ni, Co, Cr and Ti (Fig. 8) supports

the idea thal the kaolinite and halloysite as.

s¢mblages were formed from different parent

rocks, The base of the profile and the halloy-

site chay showed jnereased concentration of Ni

and Cr. and lo some extent also of Co, It is

gommion knowledge that these elements haye

an inereased abunilunce in ultrabasic rocks.

——

ow ~- or we wen on ae

Fie. 8. Plot of distribution of four trace elemems

in weathered profile, Data are semi-quantibitive

based on optical emission spectrography (D.

Karaolis, Chemical Laboratory, Department of

Mineral Resources, N.S.W., Sydney). Envelopes

were drawn arbitrarily around Ni, Co, Cr, and

Ti to show voncentration of three elements in-

creasing with depth and tilanium following an

opposite patiern,

Nickel as well as cobalt may even be enriched

during weathering of these racks. Above the

halloysite clay, Ti is the dominant trace cle-

ment, Co is absent, Ni is very low until even-

tually disappearing in the upper part of the

profile, and Cr becomes much lower,

4, Several instances of halloysite formed

(rom ultramaltic cocks by weathering or hydro-

thermal alteration were reported in the Jitera-

ture, Noluble are the occurrences in Yugo-

slavia (Maksimovie & Crnkovie 1968, Maksi-

movie & Brindley 1980), and in the USSR.

(Ginzburg & Rukavishnikova 1951), When

weuthering is involved, an increase in iron and

aluminium takes place. The level of the in-

crease Of the last is controlled by ithe condi-

tions of weathering processes according 10

Maksimovic & Crnkovic (1968). Weathering

products formed in a tropical climate with a

high rainfall have u higher content of alumina,

With respect to the evidence so fur adduced

the proposition that the parent rock of the

hulloysite clay was serpentinite appears very

probable, In order to examine further the vali-

dity of this proposition the mutual stability of

a serpentine mineral (chrysotile) and halloysite

at normal temperature ard pressure was

assessed. Considering Alt and some Al-

hydrated specs as mobile reactive compon-

enis a series of reactions may be written:

164 E, SLANSKY

MgySi20;(OH),4 + 2A13+ = AlsSisO;(OH); + 3Mg?!

Mg2Sis0;(OH)4 + 2AI(OH)2* + 2H* = AlsSixO5(OH), + 3Mg2> + 2HsO

Mg3Siz0;(OH); + 2AN(OH)2 + 4H+ = AlsSivOj(OH)4 + 3Mg#* ++ 4HLO

MexSivO3,(OH)y + 2ANOHYa + 6H+ = AlSisO;(OH), + 3Mg2* + 6HLO

Mz3Si,0;(OH), + 2AN(OH); + 8H! = ALSi.O;(OH),; + 3Mg!* -+ 8HLO

The equilibrium constants (in log) of these reactions calculated with Gibbs free energies given

in Table 2 are:

3 tn aMge=+ — 2 iv @Al- = +23.18

3 ine @Mg* — 2 tog AAL(OH)2+ = —2pH + 32.25

3 iw aMg2> ~ 2 io, aAl(OH)S == —4pH + 42,90

3 iy, aMge+ = —6pH + 54.64

3 ing aMg?+ — 2 ie @AI(OH)S == —8pH + 69.62

where a is activity.

TABLE 2. Gibbs Free Energies at 25°.

Species AGr, ans(kJ/mol) Source

chrysotile ~4034.024

halloysite —3780.713 f

kaolinite —3799.364 Rabie al. (1979)

Mes ~ 454.800 J

Alt ~ 489.40 —

AL(OH)Z, = =— 700.65

AM OH) a. 1111.06

AI(OH)§ a = 1305.4

HO — 237.141 ~~ Robie etal. (1979)

Halloysite

a ee

~ ®

Fig, 9, Stability diagram of halloysite-chrysotile ut

25°C temperature and | utm pressure. Star cor-

responds to composition of water from a ser-

pentinile as reported by White ef al. (1963), p

is degalive logarithm of activity,

Fig, 9 is a three-dimensional plot of the

mutual stability of the two minerals based on

these Values. The plot shows that the formation

of halloysite from chrysotile (and passibly

from other serpentine minerals) is feasible at

low concentrations of Al such as encountered

in natural conditions in fluids at normal tem-

perature and pressure, and at realistic pH

values, For example the chemical composition

of groundwater from serpentinite which was

recorded by White ez al. (1963) as having pH

8.3 and Al and Mg molalites 7.4 * 10, and

2.1 *% 10°, respectively, A point correspond-

ing to these values falls within the field of hal-

loysite indicating that in respect to this water,

halloysite is a more stable mineral than chry-

sotile.

Regarding the mechanism of the alteration

of a serpentine mineral to halloysite, the dis-

solution experiments done on a series of sheet

Mg minerals (including antigorite) by Lin &

Clemency (1981) are of consequence, ‘They

found that the dissolution of these minerals is

incongruent, Le. Mg is released more rapidly

from the octahedral sheets than is Si from the

lelrahedral sheets. Thus it cun be argued that

the transformation to halloysite might involve

only the exchange of Mg for Al in the octa-

hedral sheet while the tetrahedral sheet is left

intact. Moreover, if the original serpentine

mineral was chrysotile, its tubular structure

could be imberited by halleysite. Volume

changes resulting from the alteration are small

as the molar volumes of halloysite and serpen-

Une minerals are very similar.

Above the halloysite clay the clay mineral

assemblage which is dominated by kaolinite in-

dicates a different parentage. Anutuse and

quartz were idenuficd in the insoluble residue

of unit 5 and the lower part of unit 6. In the

upper part of the profile anatase is absent, Ti

HALLOYSITE AT PORT MACQUARIE 185

is the dominant trace element (sce Fig. 8) ob-.

viously related to anatase and possibly further

up to illite. The kaolinite clays were formed

probably from metagraywacke, such as_ is

found unaltered in an adjacent small gully. A

detailed sketch of the lithologies exposed in

this gully can be found in the paper by Barron

etal. (1976).

Acknowledgments

I am indebted to E. Scheibner (Geological

Survey of N.S.W.) who drew attention to the

occurrence of the blue clay and to R. C,

Kuhnel (Department of Mineral Technology.

Delft University of Technology, Holland) for

the SEM photographs. My thanks are also due

to T. D. Rice (Chemical Laboratory, N.S.W.

Department of Mineral Resources) for the

chemical analysis of the halloysite, and to D.

Karaolis from the same laboratory for specto-

graphic analyses. The manuscript benefited

from discussions with G, Hladky (CSIRO In-

stitute of Earth Resources, Sydney) and from

a constructive criticism provided by L. M.

Barron (Geological Survey of N.S.W,), A Fer-

guson helped with editing the manuscript. Two

referees proposed some emendations of the

text which were gratefully accepted, Published

with permission of the Secretary, NSW Dept of

Mineral Resources.

References

ALLEGRA, G, (1961) A simplified formula for the

calculation of X-ray intensity diffracted by a

monodimensionally disordered structure. Acta

Crystallogr. 14, 535,

Barron, B. J., SCHEIBNER, E. & SLANSKY, E, (1976)

A dismembered ophiolite suite at Port Mac-

quarie, New South Wales. Rec. geol. Surv.

N.S.W, 18, 69-102.

BrinpLey, G, W. & Goopygar, J. (1948) X-ray

studies of halloysite and metahalloysite II]. The

transition of halloysite in relation to relative

humidity. Mineralog. Mag. 27, 407-422

CARNE, J. E. (1897) Appendix 7. Report on the

geology and mineral resources of the coast be-

tween Port Macquarie and Cape Hawke. A.

Rep. Dep. Mines N.SW, for 1896, 102-107.

Cesarit, M., Moreiii, G. L. & Favretto, L.

(1965) The determination of the type of stack-

ing in mixed-layer clay minerals. Acta Crvystal-

logr. 18, 189-196.

CHURCHMAN, G. J., ALprinGe, L. P. & Carr, R.M.

(1972) The relationship between the hydrated

and dehydrated states of halloysite. Clays Clay

Min, 20, 241-246,

GinzpurG, |, TI, & RUKAVISHNIKOVA, T. A. (1951)

Mineraly drevney kory vyvetriveniya Urala. (Ac.

Sci.: Moscow. )

Harrison, E. J. (1955) Port Macquarie iron oxide

deposits. A. Rep. Dep. Mines N.S.W. for 1951,

71-73.

Hutcuison, C. 8. (1972) Alpine-type chromite in

north Borneo, with special reference to Darvel

Bay. Am. Miner. 57, 835-856,

Jaguer, J. B. (1898) Appendix 17, Report on co-

balt deposits at Port Macquarie. A. Rep. Dep.

Mines N.S.W. for 1897, 117-180.

Lin, F. C. & Cirmency, C, V. (1981) The dis-

solution kinetics of brucite, antigorite, tale, and

phlogopite at room temperature and_ pressure.

Am. Miner, 66, 801-806.

LouGunan, F. C. & Craic, D. C. (1960) An oc-

currence of fully hydrated halloysite at Muswell-

brook, New South Wales. /bid. 45, 738-790,

—— & Roberts, F. Ll, (1981) The natural con-

version of ordered Kaolinite to halloysite (10A)

at Burning Mountain near Wingen, New South

Wales. /bid. 66, 997-1005,

MACNEVIN, A. A. (1975) Wollomin—Texas Block,

Great Serpentinite Belt. /n N. L. Markham, H.

Basden, (Ed.), “The Mineral Deposits of New

South Wales.” (Geol, Survey of N.S.W.: Syd-

ney.)

Maksimovic, Z. & CRNkKOvic, B. (1968) Halloy-

site and kaolinite formed through alteration of

ultramafic rocks. Trans, 23rd Int. geol. Congr.

Prague 14, 95-105.

& BrinpdLEy, G. W. (1980) Hydrothermal

alteration of a serpentinite near Takovo, Yugo-

slavia, to chromium-bearing illite/smectite, kao-

linite, tosudite, and halloysite. Clays Clay Min.

28, 295-302.

Mitier, W. D. & Kecier, W. D. (1963) Differen-

tiation between endellite- -halloysite and kaolinite

by treatment with potassium acetate and ethy-

lene glycol. /hid, 10, 244-253.

Naumov, A. B., RYZHENKO, B. N. & KHODAKov-

skiJ, I. L. (1971) Spravotchnik Termodina-

micheskikh Velitchin. (Atomizdat: Moscow.)

NorrisH, K, (1963) Some phosphate minerals of

soils, Trans. 9th Congr. Soil Sci, 11, 713-723.

RATTIGAN, J. H. (1967) Occurrence and genesis

of halloysite, Upper Hunter Valley, New South

Wales, Australia. Am, Miner. 52, 1795-1805.

Ropie, R. A., Heminoway, B. S. & Fisuer, J. R.

(1979) Thermodynamic properties of minerals

and related substances at 298.15K and 1 bar

(10° Pascals) pressure and at higher tempera-

tures. Bull. U.S, geol. Surv. 1452,

Stansky, E. (1980) The interstratification of 10

and 7A layers; Allegra’s mixing function for

random and partially ordered stacking. Abstr.

ii Natn, Conf. on X-ray Analysis, Canberra,

Wapba, K. (1961) Lattice expansion of kaolin

minerals by treatment with potassium acetate.

Am, Miner, 46, 78-91.

WEAVER, C. E. & PoLLArp, Li D.

chemistry of Clay Minerals.”

dam, London, New York.)

Wuite, D. E., Hem, J. D. & Warinc. G, A

Data of geochemistry, Sixth Ed.

Chemical composition of

Prof, Pap. U.S. geol. Sury.

“The

Amster-

(1973)

(Elsevier:

(1963)

Chap. F.,

subsurface waters.

440 F.

ARIUS GRAEFFEI AND ARIUS ARMIGER: VALID NAMES FOR TWO

COMMON SPECIES OF AUSTRALO-PAPUAN FORK-TAILED CATFISHES

(PISCES, ARITIDAE)

BY PATRICIA J. KAILOLA

Summary

Arius graeffei Kner & Steindachner 1866 is a senior synonym of Arius australis Giinther 1867 and

Arius armiger De Vis 1884 is a senior synonym of Arius stirlingi Ogilby 1898. Diagnostic

descriptions and distributions of A. graeffei and A. armiger are presented. Taylor’s (1964)

conclusions that A. australis, A. stirlingi and A. leptaspis represent one species are not supported.

ARIUS GRAEFFE] AND ARIUS ARMIGER: VALID NAMES FOR TWO

COMMON SPECIES OF AUSTRALO-PAPUAN FORK-TAILED CATFISHES

(PISCES, ARILIDAE)

by PATRICIA J. KATLOLA*

Summary

KAIcoLa, Parris J. (1983) Arius graeffel and Arius armiger: valid names for twa common

Australo-Papuan fork-tailed catfishes (Pisces. Ariidie). Trans. R. Soe. 8. Austr. 10703),

187-196, 30 November. 1983.

Arius gracijei Kner & Steindachner L866 is a senior synonym of Arius australis Gunther

1867 and Arius armiger De Vis 1884 is a senior synonym of Arius stirlingi Ogilby (898.

Diagnostic descriptions and distributions of 4. graeffei and A. armiger are presented, Taylor's

(1964) conclusions that A. australis, A. stirlingi and A. leptaspis represent one species ate

nol supported.

KEY Woxps: Northern Australia, Papua, fork-tailed catfishes, Ariidae,

Introduction

Although fork-tailed catfishes are abundant

in the rivers, estuaries and muddy coastal

waters of northern Australia and New Guinea,

the laxonomy of this fauna is poorly under-

stood, The need for u serious study of the

family is reflected in the history of the species

listings for Australia; only & species are

common to the listings of McCulloch (1929—

toll of 12 species), Munro (1957—11

specics) und Whitley (1964—13 species).

My studies over the past few years have

revealed the existence of eighteen valid species

in Australia: six of them are undescribed,

and the nomenclature of the described species

is. confused, ‘The present paper seeks to unravel

the confusion surrounding two common species

and fo redefine those species by a new ¢com-

bination of characters,

In his study of the fishes of Arnhem Land,

‘Taylor (1964) suggested that Arius australis

Gilnther 1867, A. leptaspis (Bleeker 1862) and

A, stirlingi Ogilby 1898 may represent only

population divergence within one species. Lake

& Midgley (1970), Lake (1971) and Pollard

(1974, 1980) followed ‘Taylor and considered

A. leptaspis (Bleeker) a single widely-dis-

persed = Australa-papuan catfish (although

Lake cautions that a detailed study of large

numbers of varying sizes of catfish over the

whole range of their distribution is needed to

settle the matter).

* Department of Zoolagy, University of Adeloide,

GPO, Box 498, Adelaide, 8. Aust. 5001,

Materials and Methods

In this study, | have endeavoured to

examine specimens. from the recorded range of

each species.

The specimens reported here ate located m

the following collections: American Museum

of Natural History (AMNH); Australian

Muscum, Sydney (AMS); British Museum

(Natural History) (BMNH); CSIRO Division

of Fisheries (CSIRO); Macleay Museum,

University of Sydney (MMUS); Museum

National d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris (MNHN );

Naturhistorisches Museum, Vienna (NMW);

Queensland Museum (QM); Rijksmuseum van

Nutuurlijke Historic, Leider (RMNH); South

Australian Museum) (SAM): Western Aus-

tralian Muscum (WAM).

Measurements were made front the left side

of the body with needle-point calipers to the

nearest 0,1 mm, but in the case of very large

fishes, standard lengths (SL) were obtained

by use of a mifm-graduated ruler, The methods

of measurement and counting follow Hubbs

and Lapler (1958) with the following addi-

tions: width of the maxillary tooth band—

broadest width measured across curve of the

tooth band; length of the maxillary tooth

band—longest distance of hand, usually across

each lateral arm; “interdorsal” fin space—

distance between insertion point of last dorsal

fin ray and anterior of the adipose fin: length

of occipital process—jrom base of the bone

where it meets the dorsomedian head groove

to its most posterior point where it meets the

predorsal plate; breadth of occipital process—

widest distance at base of the proeess where

it meets the main body of the bead shield:

[RS r

Masilary barbel tength—distanee from inser

tion point of the burbel to its tips free verte

bral count—total number of vertebrae fram

the liest unfused vertebra behind the Weberian

Apparatus to the last vertebra at the tat) base

(urostyle inehiuged), made Irom x-miys.

Counts, using a veedle probe, were made of

the dorsal, anal and pectoral fin elentents and

of the gull rakers

Results

IT lind that 4. wraeffei A lepraspis and A

ariniger are all valid Species. Furthermore. the

names Arius quxiralis Gtinther 1867 and 4,

eis Castelouu IB7R are junior subjcetive

synonyms Of 4, praefler Kaer & Steindachner

1866; the nanw tring stirling? Ogilby 1898 1s

ua junior subjective syuonyvin of ot. aeiniyer

De Vis LBd4,

Vaylor (1964) identified 12 arid specimens

from Oenpelli as A. adyiraliv, one from Roper

River and I+ from fast Allivator River as 4,

feptaspix., Ue lacked A. stirling? specimens.

From information | supplied on distinguishing

characters, Junet Gomon (U.S. National

Muscunt) examined Taylors specimens and

reported that the 12 Oenpelli specimens ident

fied as A. ansiraliy are 4. leptaspiv Bleeker,

and that the Roper River and East Alligator

Kiver specimens identified as 4. lepraspiv are

an undescribed Arine (Arins sp. 1) found in

lreshwater from the Roper River westward to

te Ord River (W.A.). Taylor's figures (pp.

74. 80, 82) und species analysis are therefore

nat Of ot, australis (> praeffei) (see Table I

wid Vigure 2 for comparison). What Lake,

Midgley and Pollard have called 4, Jeptaypis

therefore. could have beer either A. gravfjei,

A leptaspis, Arins sp.) or 4. ariniger, Pollard

has reproduced Taylor's figure of 4. Jepiaspis

(1980; 89), Grant (1978) consistently fol

lowed Mine (1957) and ose Neaerinis env:

tralis,

Arius eraciiel Kner & Stemdachner 1866

FIGS 1, 2: Tables 1. 2.

aArins ereeffer Kner & Steindactner R66: 383. lip.

$2 CSamcit hoeulity doubtful, probably

northern Austria)

Artin disiratis Citither TAHT, 103, figs (Ast

Island, Hunter River, NS.W.}

Arius curtiyié Casteloau TR7B: 236 (Maieton Bay,

Quevashind |

Minciial evanined: Woloiype of AL praeffe:

NMW 67 TA2, unknown locality, 282 mm SL,

two syntypes Of 4, anstraffss RM NE 1 866,2,.1354,

Ash Ushind, Thainler Ry NLS.W.. no dale, Seat,

1 KRAPLOLA

275 mm St ink BMNE LX66.6,1927, same data,

340 mm SL. syatype of A. ewrtiniis MNUN

8,693, Moreton Bay. Old, no date, Curtis, 144

mm She and 46 additional specimens from the fol

lowing loeations NAH. 6, Clarence Ry 292336

mo SL: 3, MMUS E.tS4, Richmond R,, 197-207

mm SL: Qld: 4, OM 112001, 1.430, PO835, Ok sh,

Brishune R.. 177-2743 mm SE, 2, OM Lists4.

£16740, Boyne Ry VIF ane 297 mim SEL, 1, OM

L.8606, Dawson RB, V7) mm Shy ot, Chapman R,

736 mm SL: 1, OM 1.12758, filinders R2 meus

Maawelltun, 340 mor Sta Noto 6, Jabinti & Leng

Larrys Billabong, (78-3273 joo Sts 3, Daly R,,

3-310 mm SL: Hats 1, SAM P4242, Ord R.,

92 mm Sl: 3, AMNH unree. King R. 74-118

mm SL: 1, WAM P.25597-002, Fitzroy R., 424

mm SL) 3, AMNEL unrer., Yeeda Creek, 88-112

nue SL; b. WAM P.22876-001, Dumpier 358 mm

Sty 4, AMS E1821 7-006. Miithind Ru 77-88

mm Sk: 1 WAM) P.S807-001, Fortescue R..

376 mm Sb: 2, AMNH wuarep.,, Ashburton R.

SS nnd 292 nim Shs New Grined: t, Thu. Gulf oF

Papua, 289 mm Sky 2, RMNSH_ unres., famoei

bake, 261 and 333 inom SL.

Defitttion: the combinahan ots taker-like pro-

cesses present on the back of all gill arehes;

pulital teeth villiform and in transverse series

ot four oval pateles. palatine patches larger

lhan vomerinbe patches, maxillary barbels never

revching further than opposite base of carsil

fin spine. free vertebrae 45-48,

Description (based on S50 specimens): DLT,

A. TS-19 (mean Pad: PARLO-tl: GR Cirst

arch) {7 22, mean 19 (total) of which 6-8

on upper limb: GR (last arch) |6-22. mean

IY (total); C. primary mys 7 ot By Vibe

number of free vertebrae 45-48,

Bouy robust, clonwate (Pig. tT. Table f. 2):

anterior profile straight, moderately steep. ele-

vated shizbtly helore dorsal fins mouth mode

rately broad and slightly curved, its width 2.1—

2.7 (men 24) in head lengih: snout sharply

routided. moderately Neshy upper ip extending

beyond mouth gape. tecth usually concesled

When mouth closed: shallow groove may be

present On snout between nostrils; hind postrifs

ovate-eclliptical anterior Nap just concealing

opening; eye ovate, dorso-lateral, tree of orbil

and positioned J—) au eye diameter before

Mid-lengih of Head. Jaw teeth in arched curved

hounds, villiform: fine and sharp, depressible

and in many (6-9) irregular series; length of

maxillary tooth band §.2-9,2 (meun 7.1) in its

Yreudth: edentulous space sepurates each side

of mandibulary rooth band. Four patches. of

small, tine, sharp teeth on palate arranged

transversely; vomerine patches ovate ar

folded. separated al midling, noticeably

smaller than outer oval palatine patches; with

ave vemering und palatine patehes aftew fuse

VALID NAMES FOR TWO ARITD CATFISHES 189

into one unit on one or both sides of palate Head shield (Fig. 2) finely and somewhat

or all four may coalesce to form single broad = sharply granulated, granules arranged in series

patch; two narrow smooth-edged longitudinal along each side of dorsomedian head groove,

skin Naps well back on smooth palate. radiating outwards and over oecipital process

Taare 1, Relative body proportions of Arius graeffei and Arius ‘stirlingi.

Arius graeffet Arivs armiger

Taylor's

Character n range mean A, australis n range mean

head in SL 30 3,0-3.8 3.4 3.()-3.5 30 3.2.4.0 3.5

eye 1. in head 1, 50) 3.7-8.4 6.1 7.6-10.1 30 5.9-9,9 7.4

eye Ll. in snout 1, 3) 14-3.2 24 30 1.93.6 2.7

eye in bony inter-

orbital width 48 1.13.0 2.) 28 1.63.3 2.3

occip, process width

in process length 41 1.0-2.1 14 2} 11-14 1.5

D. spine in hd. |. 47 1.1)-2,2 1A 2,024 25 0-14 12

P. spine in hd. 1. 46 1,0-2.0 1.5 1.9-2.2 26 {2-1.7 1.4

adipose fin base in

D. fin base 30 1.0-2.0 13 30 08-19 1.2

adipose fin base in

interdorsal space 50) 24-54 34 2.6-3,35 30 2,0-5.1 3,0

caudal peduncle

depth in its length 50) 1,6-2.6 24) 29 1,.5-2.4 1.9

predorsal in SL 50 2,4-2.8 2.6 2.52.7 30) 2 6-3.0 2,8

interdorsal in SI. s0) 3,1-4.1 3.6 4.3-4.2 30 33-43 3.8

longest barbel in SL 50 2.55.8 3.8 30 1.83.3 2.5

head heightin head

width 48 t.1-1,7 li 30) LL-bL5 1.3

length mx tooth band

in its Width 35 4.2-9,2 7d 26 4.3-10.6 8,3

eye in SL sv) 13,7-26.4 20.2 MM) -20,1-33.3 26.2

mouth width if head 7. 2 2.1~2,7 24 15 2.4)-2,3 21

hony interorb. width

in head length 4h 2.5-3.5 2.9 28 2.9-3.9 3.2

8.L. (mm) 74,.2-380.0 201-435 mm 7TAA)-285.0

TABLE 2, Percentage of standard lengih (SL) far specimens of Arius araeffei and A. armiger.

A. graeffei: A. graétiei A. australis A. curtixii Alarmieer A_armiger

holotype syntypes syntype synlypes

Character n n

SL, range (mm) 74-376 252 275 380 144 74-285 134 148

head length 46 26-34 2 29 32 30) 28 25-31 27) 028

eye diumeter 46 4-7 5 4 4 6 28 «3-5 4 4

P fin spine 1. 42 15-23 20 19 19 22 25 «17-23 - 23

D fin spine 1, 43 14-24 17 17 17 2) 25 20-32 _ ~

adipose fin base 1, 46 5-11 N x 6 ae) 28 = &-13 a 6

anal fin base 1. 46 11-16 12 13 14 3 28 18-22 20-20

dorsal fin base 1. 46 9-13 10 10) 12 12 28 10-13 It I

interdorsul space 46 24-32 31 27 633 27 28 24.30. 27) 30

predorsal 1. 46 35-41 34 37) 39 39 28 34-39 yo 6a.

longest barbel 46 17-39 23 24 23 26 28 27-56 30) 41

length ovcipital process 37) F-11 8 & 8 y 25 7-10 4 i

bony interorbital space 44 8-13 i te 1] 26 7-10 9 10

ciudal peduncle depth 46 6-9 7 8 8 7 27 = 8-9 8 ri

caudal pedunele length 46 13-18 i) iS W4 is 27° 13-19 17 16

snout Lt. 46 9 13 13 10 13 WW 2K «R12 ay 1

head height 45 14-19 14 16 «19 16 28 14-20 is 14

head width 45 19-28 22 22 25 22 28 19-23 210 (20)

inlernostril distunce 25 7-12 9 ] 10 8 17 6-15 —- —

1_ longest anal fin ray 40° 12-28 17 12 17 12 23 «13-19 16 14

190

Fig. 1,

Fig, 2. Head view from above of Arius graeffei,

228 mm SL, SAM 4693, Clarence R.. N.S.W.

from end of groove and laterally on head

shield radiating from centres of small groups;

interorbital flat, granulated head shield begin-

ning above middle of eye; dorsomedian head

groove narrow, straighl-sided and moderately

deep, originating above or slightly behind

posterior margin of eye, terminating at base of

occipital process. Sides of head smooth or

slightly venulose. Median keel of occipital

P. J. KAILOLA

Lateral view of Arius graeffer, 193 mm SL. AMNH field no. DR1969-94, 95; Hann R., W,A.

process not prominent, process roughly tri-

angular with straight sides, 1.0-2.1 (mean 1.4)

longer than wide, its slightly rounded end con-

tiguous with crescentic granular predorsal

plate. In many specimens, noticeably those

obtained from rivers. thick skin obscures head

shield pattern. Humera!l process rugose or with

granulated striae, triangular and acute, hori-

zontal or slightly oblique, extending one-third

of the distance along pectoral fin spine length

and ossified anteroventrally. Axillary pore

present, Barbels thick, slightly flattened: maxil-

lary barbels longest, extending at least to head

edge, usually to above pectoral fin base or

midway along fin spine, in juveniles (less than

130 mm SL) ending below dorsal fin spine:

mandibulary barbels may reach pectoral fin

base; mental barhels reach about halfway

between eye and pectoral fin base,

Rakers of first gill arch half as long as gill

filaments; 12-20 (mean 16.7) short raker-like

processes along back of first gill arch, 15-23

(mean 18.7) along back of second gill arch,

15-21 (mean 17.1) along back of third gill

arch. Pleshy pad present on back of upper

limb of cach gill arch, that of second arch

best developed.

Spines of dorsal and pectoral fins moderately.

thick with pattern of longitudinal striae, tips

with short filaments; anterior margin of each

spine rough with law denticles and 3-4 low

antrorse serrae towards tip: posterior margin

of dorsal spine smooth but low serrae towards

lip in several specimens; posterior margin of

pectoral spine dentate with 12-19 regularly-

spaced stout sharp serrac. Longest dorsal ray

2,5-3.5 times length of last ray. Adipose dorsal

VALID NAMES FOR TWO ARIID CATFISHES 191

fin shove middle of anal fin, its convex margin

smooth: anal fin margin concave posteriorly,

longest ray 2.4-3.3 times length of last ray.

Ventral fin shape variable: in males, base

narrow, fin rays rarely reaching anal fin origin

—usually ending well before: in females, base

broad, fin rays frequently reaching 4th-6th

anal fin ray, inner (Sth + bth) elements of

ventral fin becoming thickened and developing

a pad or hook with sexual maturity. Caudal

fin lobes modcrate, pointed upper lobe slightly

longer than lower lobe.

Caudal peduncle moderately thick, depth

1.6-2.6 (mean 2) in its length, Lateral Jine

almost straight to tail base where it curves

upward,

Fresh colour variable: dark brown, deep blue,

fawn or dark ochre above (sometimes with

irridescence), becoming yellowish, cream or

white on undersides, sometimes brown-stippled

over belly, Maxillary barbels black or dark

brown, chin barbels either dark or pale; speci-

mens from Victoria and Daly Rivers. some-

times “piebald’—blatched black and white,

black patches cven extending into mouth and

over fins (eg. Victoria R. specimen AMS

1,20857-001. 305 mm SL). Fins uniform tan

or bluish, densely and finely stippled dark

fawn to black, undersides. of pectoral and

ventral tins cream, base of snal fin and last

few rays cream. Iris yellow. Peritoneum pule

but faintly stippled dusky. In preservative the

blue and irfidescence ure lost,

Fig3. The distribution of Aria prueffer (bused on

all mtuterial examined )-

Distribition and Habitat (Rig. 3): Bound

from the Hunter River (N.S.W.) on the east

coust, north and westward (Qld, NJP., WA.)

to as far south on the west coast as the Asli-

burton River and the Abrolhos [slands (AMS

1.7035). Not common in New Guinea (Gulf

of Papua coast, south-western New Guinea

coast? Jamoer Lake), Arius praeffei is generally

abundant in coastal draining tivers and streams

trom above tidal limits to estuaries and adja-

cent costal waters.

Arius armiver De Vis 1884

FIGS 4, 3; Tubles {, 2.

Arius armiger De Vis 1884: 454 (New Beitain—

locality doubiful, probably northern Australia)

Arins Stirling’ Ogilby 19K! 261 (estuary of Ade-

tnide R., NLT.)

Material examined: Two syntypes of A, ariiger|

QM 1.3069, unknown loculity, 134 mm SL and

QM 13088, unknown Jocality, 148 mm SE: and

28 udditionul specimens from the following locu-

tions: Qld: 1, QM 1.867, “Queénslpnd const”,

215 mm SL; 1, AMNET (7717. same dati, 178

mm SL; 3, Moonkun R, 259-285 mm SL; 2,

QM 171789, Karumba, 105 and 211 mm SL: 2.

Karumba, 162 and 188 mm SL; 2, QM 1,11632,

Rynoe KR, 79 wnd 8Y mm SL; N.T.: 2, SAM

F,1094 and F,1095, Adelaide R,, 221 and 280 mm

SLs 2. Murgenella Creek, 102 aod 111 mim SL:

1, Hust Alligator Ro mouth, 74 mm SL: 1, AMNH

unreg,, Victoria R., ¥7 min SL) W4.; 5, King R.

near Wyndham, 174-265 mm SL; New Guinea:

1, Moinamu, Papua, 129 mm SL; 1, Kubiri Creek,

Papua, 160 nim SL; 2, Baimuru, Papua, 142 and

257 mm SL: 1, CSIRO A.3043, Kerema Bay,

Papua, 93 mim SL: 1, Kerema, Papua, 145 mm

Definition: distinguished by combination of:

absence of raker-like processes from back of

first and usually second gill urches; palatal

tecth small and sharp and in transverse series

of four oval patches; dorsal fin spine notiee-

ably. longer than pectoral fin spine; masillary

barbels reaching dorsal fin at least; anal fin

with 22-25 elements.

Dexeription (based on 30 specimens): DiL7:

A.22-25 (meaty 24): P.L9-10) GR (first arch)

I6-22, mean 19° Clotal) of which 7-8 on

upper limb, GR (last arch) 16-22, mean 13.6

of free vertebrae 43—45,

Body slender, clgonate (Fig. 4, Table 1, 2):

anterior pralile straight to occipital process

base whenee distinctly convex; mouth mode-

rately broad and slightly curved, its width 2-

2.3) (mean 2.1!) in head length, upper jaw

evenly curved, symphysis of lower jaw slightly

but distinetly elevated: snout rounded, mode-

P. J, KATLOLA

Fig, 4, Lateral view of 4rins aratiger, 161 mm Sl

rately thickened lips extending slightly beyond

mouth gupe such that '—! muaxilhiry tooth

bund exposed when mouth closed no (or

farely) shallow groove on shout; hind nostril

Ovate-clliptical, low frills laterally. anterior flap

barely concealing opening: eye ovate-oblony.

dorso-lateral, orbit noticeably oblique; eye only

free of orbit antero-ventrally and positioned

\<} an eye diameter before mid-length of

head,

Jaw teeth in curved bands, villiform: slendei

and shurp, depressible and in 5-9 series:

breadth of maxillary tooth band 4.3-10.6

(mean 8.3) in its length; narrow edentulous

Space separates each side of mandibulary tooth

band, Four patches of low, sharp and stout

or bluntly-pointed conical teeth on palate

arranged = transversely; vomerine — patches

rounded, always well separated ai midline:

outer palatine patches larger and vlongate-oval.

contiguous or adjacent to vomerine patches,

Short angular skin flap well back on smooth

palate,

Head shield (Fig. 5) smooth anteriorly,

posteriorly and Jaterally feebly granulated:

striate ridges posteriorly each side of dofso-

median head groove; sides of head and snout

smooth and venulose; head shield beginning

before eye: interorbital flat or slightly concave;

dorsomedian head groove nurrowly elliptical

and moderately deep, originating slightly be-

bind posterior eye margin und terminating at

base Of occipital process. Finely granulated

striae radiate in parallel series over oceipital

process from its base, median keel sharp and

strong, process 1.1-1.9 (mean 1.5) longer than

wide, sides slightly coneave, hindborder

emaryinate or indented, contizuous with eres-

Fig. 5. Head view from above of Arius arimnivzer,

[kk mm SI. CSIRO C4378: Norman R.. Qld

cenuie predorsal plate. Humeral process

smooth or rugose, triangular and short. Jower

border concave, heavily ossified antero-ven-

trally: process horizontal or slightly oblique,

extending 4 distance along pectoral firy spiie

length, Axillary pore moderately large. Barbels

Slender, flatiened: maxillary barbels longest.

always reaching dorsal fin and often as far us

ventral fin origins mandibulary barbels reach

opposite occipital process or to below mid-

dorsal fing mental burbels usually extend past

gill opening lo base of pectoral fin.

VALID NAMES FOR TWO ARIID CATFISHES

Rukers of fiest gill arch two-thirds length

of gill filaments; back of first arch smooth;

back of second arch often smooth, otherwise

with [4 small raker-like processes on upper

limb; 16-21 (mean 18.6) moderate processes

along back of third arch. Thickening of upper

limb of cach gill arch developed as fleshy pad

on second limb, Spines of dorsal and pectoral

fins slender, almost smooth, tips with filaments

—that of dorsal spine noticeably long; anterior

margin of dorsal spine roughened, even

granalar, of pectoral spine almost smooth; 5-9

low antrorse sefrac Towards tip of each spine;

posterior margin of dorsal spine with 14-19

low sharp serrav, posterior margin of pectoral

spine with 17-22 regulurly-spaced stout strong

serrac, Longest dorsal fin ray 29-41 times

length ol fast ray, Adipose fin above middle

of atal fin, margin smooth, truncate or slightly

convex; anal fin margin straight or slightly

emirginale posteriorly, longest ray 2,3-3.6

times length of Jast ray. Ventral fin shape

variable: in males, base narrow, fin rays rarely

reaching anal fin origin; in females, base

broad, fin rays reaching opposite 3rd-8th

anal fin ray, inner (Sth -+- 6th) elements be-

coming thickened and developing a fleshy pad

with sexual maturity, Caudal fin lobes slender,

tapered, upper lobe slightly longer than lower.

Caudal peduncle compressed, depth 1.5»

2.4 (mean 1.9) in its length. Lateral ling much

branched, especially anteriorly, line almost

straight to tail base where it curves upward.

Fresh colour. Readily recognisable by its cop-

pery or golden brown or bronze head and

upper sides, shading to creamy yellow below.

Fins coppery-fawn or dusky yellow, pale

orange basally and finely stippled grey, margins

and filaments charcoal, undersides of pecroral

and ventral fins cream: iris coppery; all barhels

dark brown, Peritoneuim pale grey or white.

Carter (in litt, Jan, 1981) noted fresh coloura-

tion of three mature female specimens from

the Moonkan River as very pale greyvish-pink

dorsally, ercamy below; fins slightly pink and.

broadly edged black; ventral fins creamy white,

In preservative, the pink. orange and sheen

are lost.

Distribution and Habitat (Pia, 6): In Aus-

tralia found from Edward River system, Cape

York westward long the Gulf of Carpentaria,

Northern Territory and os far as the King

River (W.A.)) in New Guinea from Yule

Island to the Digoel (Hardenberg, 1941) and

Lorentz (Weber, 1913) Rivers in the west.

Fig, 6, The disiridution. of Arius armiger (based

on all material examined and authentic litera-

lure recards).

Avius armige? is ubundant in shallow coastal

waters and lower estuanhe “ones, not extend-

ing into fresh water.

Discussion

A. Arins praeffei

Arius graeffei was described in a paper by

Kner & Steindachner read before a meeting ol

the Austrian Academy of Sciences on Sth July

{866 and published that year in the Socicty’s

“Sitzungberichte’ (vol. Sd). The specimen,

from “Samoa Inseln”, was subnumbered 2103

in the Godeffroy Museum collection.

On 24th January 1867, Gunther read before

the Zoological Society of London a paper in

which he described Arius australis based on

three specimens sent to the British Muscum

by Krefft fram Ash Island m the Hunter

River, N.S.W. These syntypes ate catalogued

BMNE 1866.2,13;4 (275 mm SL). 1866.6,

19:7 (380 mm. SL) and 1866.6.19:8 (300 mm

SL)

Gimther (1909) presents the figures and an

abbreviated description of Kner & Stein-

dachner’s Ariuy graeffei trom “Samoa”

Gilinther cid not view the specimen and per-

haps the wide geographical discrepancy of

stated type locality led him not to remark

how similar was 4. «eeffei to hig owa species

A, australis,

Jn the Australo-papuan region A. graeffei

was first mentioned by Paradice & Whitley

(1927) who stated “the only species of marine

catfish met with’ in the Sit Edward Pellew

Istund Group (15°40'S, 136°30'R) was Arins

(Tachysurus) graefet Kner & Steindachner,

considered “A new recor for Australia’ (p,

80). They also (p. 97) suggested that Kner &

v4 PJ. KATLOLA

Steindachier meant “Bast Indies” instead of

“Santoa” gs the type locality.

I have eXamined » 245 mm SI. specimen

presented to the Australian Museum by Para-

dice in 1923 from the Pellew Group (and

likely to be the specimen he and Whitley

identified os 4. graeffei), Labelled Arine

(Tachysarus) graeffer (AMS VAAds41 i is

actually an cxample of Arivy proxtinus Ogilby

1898,

Paradice & Whitley's recard of A. graeffet

now Kner & Steindacghner may have led

McCulloch (1929: 59) to include of. ereeffei

Kner & Steindachoer im his cheeklist of Aus-

tralian fishes, stating “Samoa (locality doubt

ful). North Australia, Inda-Pacitie? Whitley

(1940) realised that the Pellew Island speci-

men was A. proxies, listmpe it in the

synonymy of that species. He also questionably

considered AL prexiniuis Ogilby a jurior

synonym of A. grueffed Kner & Steindachner.

hater however (1941) he listed 4. graeffei,

AL proxinuis and AL australiv us Valu Aws

tralian species. Taylor (1964), although

apparently unaware of Whilley’s 1940 vorrec-

tion, arrived at the same conclusion amd ques

tionably referred Paradive & Whilley’s 24.

eractiel ta A. proximus Ouilby, but did not

list A. greeffes as a valid Australian species.

Kner & Steindachner likened Arius yvraeffei

to Aris gagorides (Valenciennes, L840).

Fowler (1928: 61) went even further, stating;

“in its roughly granular head and spines, and

espesitlly the dentition, if approaches Pinte-

lodius sena Buchanan-Humiltow’ |siel and

immediately placed 4, sraeffei as a junior

synonym of Trehlyseruy senna (Buchanan-

Hamilton, 1822) [sick type Jocality estuaries

of Bengal. Weber & de Beaufort (1913) and

Chandy (1953) regarded A. seporides ques-

fronably valid; Misra (1976) appears ta follow

Fowler who again (1941) placed as sytonyms;

A. send (Buchanan-lamillan, §822) |siel AL

gavovides (Val. 1824) [sic], a. trachipeamies

Val. 1839 and A. grveffe? Kner & Steindachner.

McKay (QM) recently examined the type

specimens of 4. gaperides andl A, trachipamius

on omy behalf and found that they are

synonyms of AL sere, and that A. eraeffed is a

distinctly different species.

Macleay (IS881) recorded Ariny capentdes

from Port) Darwin, his deseriprion mostly

copied from Gtinther (1864). Macleay’'s speci-

men became the holotype of Aelux masters

Ogilby T8958 (MMUS F153). Interestingly,

Ogilby (18988) considered A, yagoriiles and

A sond conspecific (ic. predating Fowler).

In Australian literature, the name A. eraeffei

appears only once more: us Pararivy graeffe

(Whiley, 1964).

Kner & Steindachnee's specimen of A-

wraeflei was located in the Naturhistorisches

Museum, Vienna (NMW 67 152) und 1 have

compared it with similar-sized specimens of A.

australis Giinther from Australia, The Ay

graciei holotype ts in reasonably good eondi-

lion, and judged by the length and condition

of the ventral fins, is a female

Ahnelt (NMW) (in lit.) says that large

sections of the Godellroy collection were sold

last. century and further, that it is net un-

common for Godellroy fishes ta have incorrect

focalry dats. Kner & Sicindachner (1866)

described’ fishes not included in the cartier

works by Graffe on material in ibe Godellroy

collection. Although most of the collection

came from Fiji, Samoa and the Phoenix Islands

there is eVery reason to believe that the 252

mm SL specimen of 4. graeffei did not, and

was ont of a miscellancaus group of natural

history specimens presented to the Museurn

by a now untraceable donor, Arius graeffei is

thus a senior synonyen of A. auveraliy CGiinther

(S867,

Arins curtivii Castelnau 1874 is also a juniors

synonym of 4, eraefer TP have examined a syn-

type (MNHUN 8.693, 144 mnv SL) which is

in poor condition. Castelnuu stated (TS78:

237) “T bave several specimens, but all badly

preserved: the largest ws nearly fifteen mehes

long. the others are about six inches.” The

type locality ws Moreton Bay. 1 has not been

possible to locate the remaining Castelnac

specimens,

B. Artus ariniger

The type Jocality of Ariny arntizer De Vis

ISA is stated to be New Britain (Bismarck

Archipelago, New Guitea). Doubts about the

validity of dios type locality arose becnuse;

(1) Arias wemiver has remained Cuntit now)

known only from the types: (2) there are no

subsequent reeords of catfishes from New

Britain despite extensive fishery surveys atound

the istind during the past 12 years by the

Papua New Guinea Fisheries Research &

Survey Diviston! €3) New Britain, a smiinly

muuntumous istind, has short, fast-flowing

rivers Which do fot form extensive estuaries,

(4) vo fishes of the hinily Arndae have been

recorded cast of the main New Guinew island.

VALID NAMES FOR TWO ARIID CATFISHES 195

The lype specimens of Arivy armiger De Vis

at the Queensland Museum (1.3089, 134 wei

SL und L3088, 148 mm SL) on examination

proved to be specimens of the common Papuin

and northern Australian estuarine catfish

Arius stirlingi Ogiby 1898, which therefore

becomes a junior synonym of A. armtiger De

Vis 18d.

De Vis (1884) states: “To Government

dpents and caplains employed in hiring hands

for the plantations, I aim indebted for several

opportunities of examining fish from the

prolific waters around the Istands from which

the Jabour supply is derived. In the collee-

tions thus incidentally made 2 2" (p. 445).

The fshes desenbed in this paper were re-

portedly collected from New Hebrides, South

Seas, “probably South Seas", Duke of York's

Group, Bank's Girroup, Api and New. Treland

Ht is probable that specimen information on

the “incidental colleetions’” made was ocea-

sionally confused, hence the type locality of

New Britain for 4. armiver.

Linsuccessful attempts were made to obtain

records of the voyages from which De Vis

obtained specimens, Even so, 1b seems likely

that the A. armiger types were collected on the

north Queensland coast or the Papuan cosst

on ai outward of return voyage,

A search was made for the single type

specimen ol A. stirlingé Ovilby, although

Roberts ({978) had been unable to trace it in

the Qucenshind and Australiin Museums, The

specimen if not in the Nutional Museum,

Victoria (Gomon, im litt, (981) and IT could

not find it in the collection of the Mucleay

Museum and of the South Australian Museurn.

Oxilby stated (T898h) that his 270 mm Jong

specimen of A. sililingé Was one of a small

callechon af fishes sent to him by the South

Australian) Museum authorities from the

estuary of the Adclaide River, N.T. There are

Iwo specimens of A. arnifger in the S.A,

Museum from the Adelaide River collected in

1928, One (P.1094) is 221 mm SL. 265 mm

TL; the other (1.1095) is 28! mm SL, 359

mm TL.

Tn 1908, Qpilby proposed a new genus

Nemapteryx, to accommodate Arius stirling,

However this allocation js not supported by

my studies, and 1 conchide that A, stirlingi is

a junior synonym of A. erntiger.

Indicative of the disinterest in these fishes

is the fact that 4. evarger fas Nemaptervs

Mirline?) was recorded fram Papua only 19

years agu (Munro, 1964),

Acknowledgments

In my search for information inany people

have generously given their assistanec. 1 am

indebled to Marie-Louise Bauchot (MNHN),

Alwynne Wheeler (BMNH), Rainer Hacker

and H. Ahnelr (NMW), the seeretary of the

Zoologicul Saciely of London. of the Austrian

Academy of Seienee, of the Linnean Society

of New South Wales. John Glover (SAM),

Janet Gomon (USNM), Martin Ciomon

(NMV), Rolly Mckuy (QM), Han Nijssen

(2MA) and MMUS stall. For their assistance

in sending me specimens, both from institue

tions and especially obtained on my behalf.

Pf wish to thank Hamar and Mary Midgley,

Darryl Grey, Rolly McKay, Noel Morrissy,

Alun Haines, Mike Rimmer, Keith Bishop

and Sally Allen, Bill Rooney, Dave Carter, Lee

Turner, ‘Vim Daves, Marinus Boeseman and

M, J. P. van Oijen, John Paxton, lan Munro,

Barry Hutchins, and especially Norma Fein-

berg (AMNH). Rolly MeKay has been par-

ticularly helpful in supplying specimen infor-

mation and constructive menuseript criticism.

Finally thanks ure duc to my husband and

son for their patign¢e and to Michael J. Tyler

(supervisor, University of Adeluide),

References

Casrhunau, P, by (1878) Australian fishes. New

of lithe koown species, Proe. Linn. Soc. NSE

2(3), 225.248,

Cnapby, M. (1953) A key for the identification

of the culfishes of the genus Taeleysnris ia

cépede, wilh a catalogue of the specimens in

the collection of the Indian Masten (Zool.

Surv), Kee, Ledian Mus. SL. 1-18, 3 pls.

Islands, Prac Linn, Soe. NSW. & 445-457,

Fowt ng, Th Wy (1928) The fishes of Oeeunia

Mein, Bernice P Ristioo Mus VW, tit SAQ pp.

(1941) Contribntions to the biology of the

Philippine Archipelago und adjacent regions.

Bill, U.S. natn. Mus. V0, v.13, x, 879 pp,

Grant, FE, M, (1978) Guide ta fishes, Depe

Primary tndusiy, Brisbane, 768 pp. 4th edition.

GUNTHER, A. (1864) Catelorne of the fishes in

the British Masenm. Volume 5, xxti, 454 ppp,

(1867) Descriptions of some new or Title

known species of fishes in the collection of the

Biilish Museum. Prec, Zoal, See, lord, 99-104.

—— (1909) Andrew Garrett's Fische dev Siidsce.

J Mus, Gadeljroy, BC LG). 261-388-

Harcensen J. D. FP ti94t) Fishes of New

Guinea, Trevbla UCL), 217-231,

196

Hupes, C. L, & LacLer, K. G. (1958) Fishes

of the Great Lakes Region. Bull. Cranbrook

Inst, Sci, 26, xi, 213 pp.

Kner, R. & STEINDACHNER, F, (1866) Neue fische

aus dem Museum der Herren Joh C. Gadeffroy

und Sohn in Hamburg. Sitzh. Akad. Wiss. Wien,

54(1), 356-395.

Lake, J. 8. (1971) Freshwater fishes and rivers

of Australia, (Nelson: Melbourne) 61 pp,

& Mipcrey, 8. H. (1970) Reproduction of

freshwater Ariidae in Australia, Aust. J, Sei.

32(11), 441.

MAcLeay, W. (1881) Descriptive catalogue of the

fishes of Australia. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.

6(2), 202-387.

McCu.ttocu, A, R. (1929) A check-list of the

fishes recorded from Australia. Mem. Aust.

Mus, 5(1), 1-144.

Misra, K. S. (1976) The fauna of India and adja-

ceni countries. Pisces (second edition) vol. III,

Teleostomi: Cypriniformes; Siluri. Government

of India, pp. xxi, 367, pls I-XV.

Munro, [. S. R. (1957) Handbook of Australian

ear no. 9, pp. 37-40, Fish. Newsl, 16(3),

(1964) Additions to the fish fauna of New

suuinee: Papua New Guin. agric. J. 16(4), 141-

OaiLey, J. D. (1898a) New genera and species

45 fishes. Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W. 23(1), 32-

——(1898b) New genera and species of fishes.

thid. 23(3), 280-299.

(1908) New or little known fishes in the

Queensland Museum, Ann. Od Mus. 9(1), 1-38.

P, J. KAILOLA

Paravice, W. E. J, & Wairtey, G. P. (1927)

Northern Territory fishes. Mem. Qd Mus. 9(1),

76-106,

Potiarp, D. A. (1974) The freshwater fishes of

the Alligator River, “Uranium Pravinee” area

(Top End, N.T.) with particular reference 10

the Magela Greek catchment (East Alligator

River System). Australian Atomic Energy Com-

mission, 77 pp.

—— (1980) Family Ariidae. Estuarine Salmon or

Fork-tailed Catfishes. Jn R. M, McDowall (ed.),

Freshwater Fishes of South-eastern Australia.

(Reed: Sydney) pp. 89-90.

Ronerts, T, R. (1978) An ichthyological survey

of the Fly River in Papua New Guinea with

descriptions of new species. Smithsonian Cort-

trib, Zoal, 281, vi, 72 pp.

Taytor, W. R. (1964) Fishes of Arnhem Lund.

Rec. Amer. Aust, Sei. Exped. Arnhem Land

4, 45-307.

Weser, M. (1913) Nova Guinea. Résultants de

lExpedition Scientifique Néerlandaise 4 la

Nouvelle-Guingée en 1907 et 1909 sous les

auspices de Dr H. A, Lorentz, Vol. [X Zoologie.

livraison IV, (B. J. Brill: Leiden) pp. 513-613.

& DE BEAUFORT, L. F, (1913) The Fishes of

the Inda-Austrdlian Archipelage, Vol. 2. (E. J.

Brill; Leiden) 404 pp.

Wuititry. G. P. (1940) Illustrations of some

Australian fishes. Aust. Zool. 9(4), 397-428,

(1941) Ichthyological notes and illustrations.

Thid. 10(1), 1-50.

(1964) Presidential address. A survey of

Australian ichthyology. Proc. Linn. Sec. N.S.W.

89(1), 11-127.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

VOL. 107, PART 4

DEVELOPMENT OF LITORIA INFRAFRENATA (ANURA: HYLIDAE)

BY C. B. BANKS, J. R. BIRKETT, R. W. DUNN & A. A. MARTIN

Summary

The developmental pattern and larval morphology of Litoria infrafrenata are typical of

Australopapuan hylid frogs. The larvae have a spectacular colour pattern and the larval life-span is

58 days at 24-28°C. Some data on post-metamorphic growth are provided.

DEVELOPMENT OF LITORIA INFRAFRENATA (ANURA: TYLIDAE)

by C. B, BANks*, J. R. BraketT=, R. W, DUNN= & A, A. Martine’

Summary

Banks, C. B., Biesert, J, R., Dunn, R, W. & Martin, A. A. (1983) Development of Lireria

infrafrenata (Anura: Mylidue). Trans. R. See. 8. Aust. 107(4), 197-200, 30 November, 1983.

The developmental pattern and larval morphology of Litoria infrafrenata are typical of

Australopapiian hylid frogs. The larvae have a spectacular colour pattern und the larval

life-span is 58 days at 24-28°C, Some data on post-metamorphic growth are provided.

Key Worps: Anura, Hylidae, Eiraria, Development, Larvae,

Introduction

Litoria infrafrendta (Giimther), the Giant

Green Tree Frog, is the Jargest Australo-

papuan hylid, and one of the largest tree-froys

in the world, with an adult body length of up

to 135 mm (Tyler & Davies 1978). 11 is widely

distributed in the Papuan region, ranging from

castertr Indonesia through mainland New

Guinea to the Bismarck, Admiralty and Loui

siade Islands; and also occurs in northern

Queensland (Menzies 1976). Two subspecies

are recognized (Tyler & Davies 1978): L. 7.

militaria is restricted to the Bismarck Archi-

pelago; the Queensland population from. which

our data were gathered represents the nomi-

nate subspecies, Geiteral information on the

distribution and biology of L. infrafrenata is

given by Menzies (1976); variytion in cranial

osicology has been described by Davies

(1978); the ubusual karyotype (n — 12: in

all other Australian hylids nm — 13) ts dis-

cussed by Menzics & ‘Tippett (1976); and

larval morphology is briefly described by van

Kampen (1923).

We have taken the opportunity provided by

a captive breeding of L, infrafrenata in the

Melbourne Zoo to make some observations

on the development of this species. As well as

contributing to the presently limited knowledge

of this distinctive frog, our studies also provide

further comparative data on the life histories

of Australian hyhds, recently reviewed by

Watson & Martin (1979),

Materials and Methods

Stocks of adult L. infrafrenata in the Zoo

were acquired fram produce markets, having

* Reptile Department. Royal Melbourne Zoo-

logical Gardens, P.O. Box 74, Parkville, Vic,

3052.

| Department of Zoology, University of Mel-

hourne, Parkville, Vie, 3152,

arrived in Melbourne in erates of fruit from

northern Queensland, ‘Three females of snout-

vent lengths 90, 100) and 113 mm arrived

between 1977 and 1980; a male of 101 mm

snout-vent length arrived in May 1981. He

was untially housed separately from the

females; on 9 September 1981 he was heard

to call and was. placed with the females. The

group Was housed ina 2m “2m X% 18m

display enclosure also containing Serb and

Carpet Pythons, which included living plants

and a pond measuring some | m & 0.8 m, 0.3

m deep, The enclosure was naturally lit, with

lighting supplemented by a 1.2. m “Truv-Lite”

fluorescent tube which was switched on daily

between 0810 and 1650 hours. Air temperature

in the display varicd between about 24 and

30°C, occasionally reaching 35°C ut the top

of the enclosure. The frogs were fed on locusts,

crickels und chopped mice, The male con-

tinued to eall intermittently and amplexus was

ohserved on 6 December 1981. Embryos were

found in the pond on 9 December; water

temperature was 22.5°C,

‘The embryos were removed from the pond

and divided among three 600 “ 300 ™ 300

mm aquaria containing water to a depth of

200 mm. Water temperature varied between

24 and 28°C. Larvae were fed on chopped

endive; a few larvae were preserved in 4%

formalin at intervals for later examination. On

11 January 1982 4a small sample was anacs-

thetized with MS-222 (Sandoz) for miero-

scopic study of the pigmentation pattern in

life. As the tadpoles approached metamor-

phosis shelving rocks were provided lor their

emergence, Froglets were reared in a variety of

terraria under various conditions of lighting

and temperature, and wete fed on housellies.

Measurements of developmental stages were

made using vernier calipers reading to 0.1 mom.

The embryo and larval mouth disc were drawn

198

under a stereoscopie microscope; the lfarval

drawings were traced from projections of 35

mim colour transparencies. Developmental

stages were classified by the system of Gosner

(1960).

Results

Breeding behaviour; The male called at inter-

vals through September and October. Calling

was usually heatd in the mornings, and often

followed disturbance, ¢.g. the introduction of

live food, or spraying the exhibit with water,

We were unable to obtain recordings of the

call; Menzies (1976) describes it as a Joud,

double bark, produced while males are perched

in trees 3-4 m above the ground, or floating

in the water. Preferred breeding sites are deep,

shaded swamps in forested areas.

Amplexus is axillary; on 6 December 1951

the male entered amplexus with the largest

female, and the embrace continued from 0800

to at least 1030 hours. It took place on a

Phyllodendron root at the pond surface.

Eges: Oviposition was not observed; in fact

we did not realize that breeding had occurred

until embryos were found in the pond on 9

December. At this time a number of infertile

eges was also found; these were adhering to

the sides of the pond. The eggs had a heavy

fungus infection but it could he ascertained

that they were pigmented and had a diameter

of about 1.9 mm, Egg capsules were discrete

and had a diameter of about 3.6 mm. Approxi-

mately 180 infertile and 250 fertile eggs were

laid, giving a total clutch size of about 430,

Embryos: Dimensions of embryos and larvae

are shown in Table |. Only onc serics of

embryos, in Stage 22, was preserved on 9

December, just after they had hatched. Their

general colour was dark brown and their

TABLE 1, Dimensions of developmental stages of

Litorm infratrenata. Malvey are means of 2-3

idividtials.

Age Stage Body length Total length

(days) (mm) (mm)

3 22 — 6.2

5 25 3.8 8.7

7 25 4.5 11.

9 26 4.3 13.7

16 28 75 17.8

25 30 a7 25.4

30 31 13.6 37.4

37 37 16.4 44,9

44 42 18.6 53,5

$1 44 22.6 38

58 446 22.4 —

C. B. BANKS, J, R. BIRKETT, R. W. DUNN & A. A, MARTIN

total length about 6.2 mm. The cornea was

clear and the external gills were very pro-

minent (Fig. 1A). There were six long fils

ments in the anterior group on each side, und

three much shorter ones in the posterior group.

Developmental stages of Litoria infra-

jrenata. A, Stage 22 (newly hatched): B and

C, Stage 31. The bar in each case represents I

mm.

Fig. 1,

Larvae; On 11 December the lurvae were tn

Stage 25, and had a total length of 8.6-8,8

mm. The spiracle and mouth dise were fully

formed, and the yentral suckers remained

only as pigmeni-[ree patches. The general

colour was dark brown, For most of the time

the larvae floated in mid-water in a tilted,

head-up attitude,

By 13 December the larvae had begun to

graze on algae on the sides and floors of the

funks and on the chopped endive that was

provided, They were in Stage 25, with a total

length of 10.9-11.2 mm. Lateral stripes had

begun to develop: a creamy-while stripe ran

through the naris and eye, along the body, and

down the dorsal half of the tail musculature.

The ventral edge of the tail musculature was

also creamy-white; elsewhere the colour was

dark brown.

Two larvue preserved on 15 December were

in Stage 26, and had total lengths of 12.3 and

DEVELOPMENT OF LITORIA INFRAFRENATA

15.0 mm. From this time on considerable

Variations in larval growth rate became

apparent, with the largest larvae being up to

50% bigger than the smallest ones, On 22

December the larvae were in Stage 28, with

total lengths of large larvae reaching 17.8

mm; on 29 December the larvae were in

Stage 30, and measured up to 25.4 mm in

total length,

A larva preserved an 5 January [982 is

Hlustrated in Figs. 1B and ICs it is in Stage

31, with a total length of 37,4 mm. The anus

was dextral atid the spiracle low on the Ielt

side of the body. The dorsal fin was well-

arched and the tail tapered to a slender, acu-

minate tip. In life at this stage the general

body colour was dark brown. The lateral

stripes had became brilliant silvery-orange,,

with no melanophores but large numbers of

golden chromatophores, The ventrolateral and

ventral abdominal surfaces were silvery-yellow,

with aw fine dusting of brown pigment, The

dorsal and ventral fins were dusky brown in

the anterior two-thirds. and clear in the

posterior third.

The mouth dise of a larva in Stage 31 is

shown in Fig, 2. There are two upper and

SEQ,

anit UHH,

“an

vw?

PPT LLL

ey,

Ai Rare ea medy

Ad eee it roe wt

See

Lith see quy Tawi

ved

ana anninn

Svuyy

(ee

Fig. 2. Mouth dise of Stage 31 Jarva of Litoriia

infrafrenata, The bar represents 1 mm,

three lower rows of labial teeth, with only the

second upper row having a median gap. A

Harrow band of papillae surrounds the lateral

and posterior margins of the disge.

On 12 January two larvac were in Stage 37,

and had total lengths of 42,7 and 47.1 mm,

The largest larva in the series was preserved

it Staye 42 on 19 January, and had a total

length of 53.5 mm.

Metamorphusix: By 26 January the body

colour of the larvae had become grass-green,

and the latvae were beginning to climb the

sides of the aquaria. Two larvae in Stage 44

had body lengths of 22.4 and 22.8 mm, with

tail stubs of 18.6 and 13.9 mm. By 1 Feb-

ruary all 163 surviving larvae had completed

metamorphosis; two of them had snout-vent

lengths of 21.6 and 23.2 mm. Houseflies were

provided on 28 January and the froglets began

to feed immediately; cannibalism of smaller

by larger froglets was subsequently noted,

Larval life-span: Assuming that the eggs were

laid on 6 December, the larval life-span ¢ex-

tends aver 58 days. at 24—-28°C.

Post-metamorphie growth: Froglets were

weighed and measured at monthly intervals

after the completion of metamorphosis (Table

2). After 7 months the lroglets were divided

into two groups, one of which was reared

in the reptile house (RH) and the other in the

Zoo education aren (KA). For a reason which

is not clear the froglets in the latter group

grew considerably faster than those in the

former.

On 9 March 1983 an BA specimen began

to extrude eggs while being handled. A votal

of about 480 eggs was laid. Hence for this

female sexual maturity was attained at an age

of 402 days (after metamorphosis) and a

snout-vent Jength of 77 mm.

Mortality af Jroglets; In June 1982 some of

the froglets began to show a syndrome which

first presented as oedema in the cloacal region;

later they became lethargic and emaciated,

TAbLe 2, Postonetamerphic growih ef Litoria infrafrenata. Up to 7 months values are preaus

of 3-5 speciniens, After # montis there were two: specimens in the reptile house (RH) and

two tn the educatian area (EA); one of the BA specimens died after the 9th month.

Months after completion of metamorphosis

| 2 3 4

Body weight, ¢

Snout-vent length, mm 26 33 6 4D

16 3.2 4.2 46 S54 7.3

5 6 7 8 ) 10 1] 12

7.6 RH13.5 148 15.1 18.2 22.5

BA 150 239 27.9 2&4 345

44° 47 49 RH 56 57 59 «2 65

EA 66 71 74 73 74

200

and tended to lose coordination of the hind

limbs. In all 29 froglets died between June

and November following the appearance of

these symptoms. Various treatments with

chloramine (Halamid; Cenvet), oxytetra-

cycline hydrochloride (Engemycin; Philips

Dufar) and neomycin sulphate (Neobiotic:

Tuco) were attempted, and adjustments of

temperature and humidity were also made,

but no treatments appeared to be effective.

Autopsy did not reveal either the presence of

pathogens or the likely cause of death.

Discussion

Martin & Watson (1971) noted that the

general patterns of life history of Australian

hylids are remarkably uniform. Most Aus-

tralian species of Litoria lay small, pigmented

eggs in water; egg-clumps are typically

attached to submerged objects. The presence

of two pairs of embryonic external gills is

also typical. Larval morphology is somewhat

more variable, with some species (e.g. L.

lesueuri; Martin & Watson 1971) showing

lotic adaptation of the mouth structure and

general body form. More usually, however,

Australian hylid larvae are of the high-finned,

actively-swimming nektonic type, well exem-

C. B. BANKS, J. R. BIRKETT, R. W. DUNN & A. A. MARTIN

plified by L. infrafrenata, The dorsolateral eye

position, ventrolateral spiracle and acuminate

tail-tip are also typical hylid features. The

mouth dise is unusual in having the first lower

row of labial teeth entire; more usually it has

a median gap.

The lateral stripe of the larva is one of its

most prominent features; we presume that it

may be the fore-runner of the equally con-

spicuous labial stripe of the adult.

The larval life-span of 58 days recorded

here is probably not unusually fast among

tropical species, Watson & Martin (1979)

recorded a larval life-span at 27°C of 41 days

for L. chloris, a northern Australian rainforest

green tree-frog. On the other hand the interval

of approximately 13 months between meta-

morphosis and sexual maturity does seem sur-

prisingly short for such a large frog, but data

on the age at which maturity is attained in

anurans are extremely sparse (e.g. Flower

1936).

Acknowledgments

We thank Helen Madder for help with

rearing froglets, and Graeme Watson for com-

menting on the manuscript.

References

Davies, M. (1978) Variation in the cranial osteo-

logy of the Australo-Papuan hylid frog Litoria

infrafrenata. Rec. S. Aust, Mus, 17, 337-345.

FLower, S. S. (1936) Further notes on the dura-

tion of life in animals—II. Amphibians. Proc.

Zool, Soc., Lond. 1936, 369-394.

Gosner, K. L. (1960) A simplified table for stag-

ing anuran embryos and larvae with notes on

identification. Herpetologica 16, 183-190.

Martin, A, A. & Watson, G. F. (1971) Life

history as an aid to generic delimitation in the

family Hylidae. Copeia (1971) 78-89.

Menzies, J. [. (1976) “Handbook of Common

New Guinea Frogs” (Handbook No. 1, Wau

Ecology Institute: Papua New Guinea).

—— & Tippett, J. (1976) Chromosome numbers

of Papuan hylid frogs and the karyotype of

Litoria infrafrenata (Amphibia, Anura, Hyli-

dae). J. Herpetol. 10, 167-173.

TYLer, M. J. & Davies, M. (1978) Species-groups

within the Australopapuan hylid frog genus

Litoria Tschudi. Aust. J. Zool., Suppl. Ser. No.

63.

VAN KAMPEN, P, N. (1923) “Amphibia of the

Indo-Australian Archipelago” (Brill: Leiden).

Watson, G. F. & Martin, A. A. (1979) Early

development of the Australian green hylid frogs

Litoria chloris, L, fallax and L. gracilenta, Aust.

Zool, 20, 259-268.

THE DUMONTIACEAE (CRYPTONEMIALES: RHODOPHYTA) OF

SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

BY E. ANN SHEPLEY & H. B.S. WOMERSLEY

Summary

Four genera and species of Dumontiaceae are known from southern Australian seas. Dasyphloea

insignis Montagne occurs from Wanna, S. Aust., to Waratah Bay, Vic., and around Tasmania;

Dudresnaya australis J. Agardh from King Georges Sound, W. Aust., to Western Port, Vic., and the

north coast of Tasmania; and a single collection from the Isles of St Francis, S. Aust., is referred to

Acrosymphyton taylorii, previously known from the Hawaiian Islands. The reproduction of these

species is described in detail. A new genus and species, Kraftia dichotoma, epiphytic on stems of

the seagrass Amphibolus, is widespread in southern Australia. It is characterised by the typical

dumontiaceous female reproductive system but is multiaxial, in contrast to most other genera of the

Dumontiaceae; tetrasporangia are unknown. Because of the common occurrence of the very

distinctive female reproductive system throughout the Dumontiaceae sensu lato and_ the

demonstration that certain genera have a juvenile uniaxial thallus which becomes multiaxial when

mature, recognition of the segregate families Weeksiaceae and Dilseaceae is not supported.

THE MUMONTIACEAE (CRYPTONEMIALES: RHODOPHYTA) OF

SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

by E. Ann SHePLey* & H. B.S, WomeRsLEY®

Summary

Swirniy, E. ANN & Womersuvy, H. B. §. (1983) The Dumontiaceac (Cryptonemiales:.

Rhodophyta) of southern Australia. Trans. R, Soc. §. Aust. 107(4), 201-217, 30 November,

1983.

Fouy genera and species of Dumontiaccae are known from southern Australian seas.

Dasyphloca insignis Montagne occurs from Wanna, S. Aust, to Waratah Bay, Vic, and around

Tasmuniay Dadresnaya australis J, Agardh from King Georges Sound, W. Aust., to Western

Port, Vic., und the north coast of Tasmania; and a single collection From the [sles of St

Francis, §, Aust, is referred to Acrosymplyton taylorii, previously known from the Hawatian

Islands. The reproduction of these species is described in detail. A new genus and species,

Kraftia dichotoma, epiphytic on stems of the seagrass Amphiholis, is widespread in southern

Australia. Wt iy characterised by the typival dumontiaceaus female reproductive system but is

multiaxial, in contrast to most other genera of the Dumontiaceae: tetrasporangia are unknown.

Because of the common occurrence of the very distinctive female reproductive ‘system through:

out the Dumontiaccac sens fate and the demonstration that certsin genera have a juvenile

uniaxial thallus which hecomes multivxial when mature, recognition of the segregate families

Weceksiacese and Dilseaceac is not supported.

Kr¥ Worns: Southern Australia, Dumontiaceae, Kraftie.

Introduction

Members of the Dumontiaceae on southern

Australian coasts ate not Well known and

generally not common, apart from o¢casional

abundance in particular localities. They include

Dasyphloea inxigniy Montagne (the com.

motiest) which has been studied previously by

the first vuthor (Mitchell 1966), and a species

of Dudresnaya to Which two names. have been

applied; these are the Eurepean D. coeetned

(GC. Agardh) Crousn & Crouan |~ Dy verii-

cilata (Withering) Le Jolis}| by Harvey

(1855, p. 558) and D, australis J. Agardh. In

addition, a single specimen of Acrosymphylon

is known from the Isles of St Francis, South

Australia and is referred to A. taylarii Abholt,

and a new and distinctive genus, Kraftia. is

described below.

An account of these genera, with further

notes on the distribution and synonymy of

Daxyphloea insignis, is given here.

Family DUMONTIACEAE

Thallus usually erect, branched, often soft

and mucoid. uniaxial with 4(-6) periaxial

cells or multiaxial, with a loose or usually a

*cyo Western Australian Herbarium, Department

of Agriculture, George Street, South Perth, W.

Aust, 6151.

+ Department of Botany, University of Adelaide,

Adelaide. S$. Aust. 5000,

compact cortex und a medulla with filaments

of slender or swollen cetls and usually with

udditional descending rhizoids. Gametophyte

and tetrasporophyte isomorphic, or hetero-

morphic with the tetrasporophyte prostraic

und usually crustose,

Gametophytes usually dioecious, in some

taxa monoecious. Female gametophylté with

varpogonial branches and = auxiliary cell

branches on separate and often distant peri-

axial or medullary cells, both of numerous

cells and unbranched or bearing short laterals.

Carpogonial branches usually reflexed over the

terminal 3~4 cells, with several farger cells

helow: fertilized carpogonium producing a

connection to. a lower nutritive cell in’ the

carpogonial branch, which then develops

connecting filaments to auxiliary cells but in

some genera (with non-functional auxiliary

cells) producing gonimoblast cells directly.

Auxiliary cell branches straight or curved,

with or without short laterals, with the

auxiliary cell terminal or intercalary and

usually smaller than adjacent cells. Carpo-

sporophytes remaining attached to the

auxiliary cell branches, with radiating gonimo-

blast filaments and all cells becoming carpo-

sporangia apart fromm the basal fusion cell,

situated within the inner cortex or outer

medulla with the adjacent cortex swollen or

net, Spermatangia cut off from outer cortical

<ells, scattered or in groups.

202

Tetrasporophytes similar to gametophytes ar

prostrate and usually crustose. Tetrasporangin

Zonute or cruciate, often irregularly divided in

crustose sporophytes, produced from cortical

cells,

Type genus: Dumontia Lamouroux.

A family of some 15 genera (Kylin 1956, p.

148; Mitchell 1966, p, 216), three of which

have been placed in the segregate family

Werksiaceae (Abbott 1968). The largest

number of genera (8) occur on Pacific North

American coasts, and the family 18 apparently

only known in the southern hemishere from

Australia, apart from Leptocladia peruviana

Howe (1914, p. 176) from northern Peru.

Key to southern Australian genera of

Dumontiaceae

1 Thrallus irregularly laterally branched, uniuxial,

with prominent axial cella bearing whorls of

perfaxial cells and ultimately a compact to

Tnose cortex , 2

thimerous slender medullary filaments and a

1) Thallus subdichotomous, multiaxial, with

thin but compact cortex bearing, thick-walled,

tapering hairs aT Krafria

Carpogzonial branches bearing short Inleral

branches, with fusion between the fertilised

carpogonium and cells of these laterals; uuxi-

lary cell terminal on avxiliary cell branch:

heteromorphic with a prosteate, filarnentons

tetrasporophyte (unknown ina, ravlerii)

Acroyyatplytoa

2 Curpovonis) branches generally without ta-

terals, fertilised carpogonium fusing with

cell(s) 3-8 af the branch; auxiliary cell inter-

cilury in quyiliary cell) branch: jsomurphic

gametophytes and tetrasporophytes

3 Cortex compact; persistent, aciculay, unieellu-

lar hairs present on outer cortical cells, carpo-

sperophyles m stall numbers each causing

localised swelling of the thallus Dasyplilova

3) 6 Cortex Joose; acicular unicellilgy hairs not

Present on outer cortical cells; Chl pasporo-

phytes numerous, scattered, not causing swell-

ing of thallus Dudresnaya

Cienus ACROSYMPHYTON Sjostedt 1926:8

Heteromorphic, with erect, branched game-

fophytcs and prostrate, filamentous letra-

sporophyte (known only in lype species).

Gametophytes dioecious or monoecious.

erect, mucoid, irregularly much branched with

axes bearing laterals of several orders, Lni-

axial with whorls of four periaxial cells pro-

E. A. SHEPLEY 2 HM. B.S, WOMERSLEY

ducing lateral filaments of cells with the cuter

forming a Jodse cortex surrounding the

medulla; some distance below the branch

apices, periaxial and inner medullary cells

produce descending rhizoids. Female gameto-

phytes with carpogonial and auxiliary cell

branches scattered throughout the thallus,

borne on periaxial or inner medullary cells.

Carpogonial branches several cells long, with

several of the mid cells bearing short lateral

branches vach 1-4 cells long, with post-

Tertilisation fusions to these cells poor to for

mation of cornmecting filaments, Auxiliary cell

branches 3-9 cells long with a terminal

auxiliary cell, Carposporophytes compuct, with

all cells developing, into carposporangia. Sper-

mMatingia clustered on outer cortical cells.

Tetrasporophyte prostrate, of branched fila-

ments, “Vy preneclontinlike’. producing

tetrahedral telrasporangia, or “seriate tetra-

sporangia” which reproduce the tetrasporo-

phytic.

Type species: A,

Sjostedt,

A genus of four species, the type from the

Mediterranean, At. carihaeum (J, Agardh)

Sjostedt trom Bermuda and Florida, A. taylorii

Abbott from the Uiiwaiian Islands and Aus-

tralia, and 4. firertenm Hawkes (1982) from

New Zeuhind. The tetrasporophyte was

unknown until Cortel-Breemim & van den

Hoek (1970) cultured A. purpuriferum and

showed that this species is heleromorphic with

u prostrate tetrasporophyte.

Acrosynphyton taylorii Abbott 1962:844,

figs 1-9. Wotnersley 198T:303,

TGS 1A,B,3

‘Vhallus (Australian plant) medium red,

ubout 4 om high (Fig. 1A), with a short main

wis about 2 mom broad producmye laterals of

similar diameter bearing slenderer, tapering

branches for 4 or 4 orders, Uniaxial (Fig. 1B)

with cach axial cell bearing 4 periaxial cells

which produce lateral filaments with several

orders of cells, the outer lorming a loose

cortex (Mig, 3A) and with many of the inner

medullary cells producing descending rhizoids.

Gametophytes dioecious. Caurposonial

branches. (Fig, 3B,C) developing from peti-

axial cells or from secand or third order cells

purpuriferune (J, Agardl)

Fig. |. A. dereésyaiphyten tavterii (ADU,

AJBO4S ). Bo A. awlorii. Apex of uniaxial branch with peri-

axial whorls; young auxiiary cell branch on lower right (ADU, AS38045). C, Dasyphiloed insivnis.

lype sheet in PC. D,

sporangial lower lefl (ADL, A43343),

D. insisuiy, Specimens from Robe. cystocurpic on right, male upper felt tetra

203

DUMONTIACEAE OF SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

ppenyqen yeu

Ae aia biea

204

of the lateral filaments, replacing one of the

vegetative filaments on their bearing cell, 9-10

cells long with the carpogoniun sharply

rellexed towards cells 4 and 5 (Fig. 3C.D) and

a long and usually basally coiled Irichogyne.

One to four cells nearest the base of the carpo-

gumal branch produce no laterals bul the next

5—6 celly form disxtichous lateral branches

24 cells long (Fig. 3C), which may further

cut off 1-2 celled side branches towards the

recurved carpogotium: the cell below the eur-

pogonium does not cut off lateral cells, Post-

fertilisation fusion occurs between the catpo-

gonium and terminal cells of these lateral

branches (Piz. 3D,15), usually those from cells

4 and § of the carpogonial branch, while the

cell helow the carpogonium remains densely

cytoplasmic. This fusion produces several con-

necung filaments with basal piteconnections

(Fic. 3B). Auxiliary cell branches (Fig. 3A)

develop in similar positions to the carpogonial

branches, and are S—9 cells long without lateral

cells and with a larger, subspherical, ternviival

auatiicy cell, with which a connecting Hament

fuses (Fig. 3h) and initiates gonimoblast cells

(Pig, 3G); each connecting filament usually

continues lo further auxiliary cells (Fig. 3F).

Carposporophyies (Fiz. 3G.H) globular,

scattered in the outer medulla, 80-100 pm in

diameter, with nearly all cells hecoming sub-

spherical carposporangia 12-20 ym in dia-

meter, Male gametophyles (Hawatlian plants)

smaller than female gametophytes, with small

clusters of spermatangia on ouler cortical cells,

Tetrasporophytes unknown.

Type locality; Mauula, Oahu, Hawaiian Islands.

Holorypes Abbot 1461 (2). in BISH. Isetypes

in UC (912761) and BISH.

Distvhation: Only previously recorded tram

Oahu.

Auvraltian record: Ege 1, Isles of St Francis,

S. Aust, 32-38 m deep (Shepheril, 114.1971;

ADL, A38045).

This is the first published record af A,

taylor? Trom outside the Hawaiian Islands.

bur it has also been collected from deep water

off One Tree Island on the Great Barrier Reel.

Qld and Lord Howe Island (pers, comm. G. T.

Kraft} and from Kyushu 1, Japan (in Herb,

T, Tanaka, pers, comm, FA, Abbati)

This single specimen From southern Aus-

tralia agrees well woh A. daylorif, with only

minor differences, hut if tS clearly desirable

that more plants should be discovered and

PE. A. SHEPLEY & H. B. S, WOMPERSI FY

further compatisans made. The specimen lacks

the hase and may be only part of a larger

plant: tt was also disintegrating when mounted.

Some apparent anomalies from the typical

development of the female reproductive system

have been observed. In one case a terininal

cell of a lateral on a carpogonial branch

appeared to have assumed the role of an

duxiliary cell, showing fusion with a contiver-

ing filament and subsequent initiation of

gonimoblast tissue (Fig, 31). Taylor (1952, p.

34) for A. cartdaeuin mentioned occasional

instances where terminal cells of the carpo-

yonial braneh laterals suggested by (heir isola-

tion and size that they might be potential

woxiliary cells.

Minor differences between the Hawaiian

and = Australian plants are that Abbott

described both carpogonial and auxiliary cell

branches as borne on the third or fourth order

cells of the Jateral filaments, whereas they

frequently oecur on the first Cperinxial) and

second order cclls as well as third order cells

in the Australian specimen. No membrane

around the immature ecarposporephyte was

observed jn the latter plant, but this is probably

ho more than a gelatinous sheath which readily

breaks down.

The differences between A. taylorii and the

other two smaller species have been sum.

marised by Abbott (1962. p, 847). A. purpiei-

/ortun iS monoecious and has 4 shorter (3-6

celled) auxiliary cell branch, while A. cari-

been has a trequently subdivided auxiliary

cell braneh thus with several terminal auxiliary

cells. Other differences in size of vegetative

cells are discussed by Abbott, 4. firmmuns differs

in having regularly distichous branching.

Abbott (1962, p, 847) discuysed the earlier

generic synonym of Acroxvinplyron, viz. ITel-

mittthiopsiy J. Agardh (1899, p. 97), the Lype

of which (4) verticilliferd J, Agardh 1899, p.

98) has been shown to be identical with 4.

caribacnin (1, Agardh 1899, p. 84) Sjdstedt,

Papenfuss (1958, p. 105) restored the older

generic name Helntinithiopsix. but according te

Abbott he later considered this. a homonym

MW Helminthopsiy Heer. a fossil alga described

in T877 and now cansiderecdd to represent

“feeding tracts of animals” (Index Nominum

Genencorum 1979, p. 795). It may he debated

whether these two pames should be cons{dered

homonyms under Articie 77 of the [CBN,

DUMONTIACEAE OF SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 205

Hinge ‘ Dodiesrega aystioly J Na

mm ‘ ‘ By B® inssde Tage Solwal | Sk Vince G Af

iQ he Ses

wr dee

Sarg.

Red Ry

Gy DIN Deyn d

or gd Pape Au a ak ac

‘an

1 2 3 4 5

Fig. 2. A. Dudresnaya australis (ADU, A33469). B. Kraftia dichotoma, Holotype specimen (ADU,

A52844). C. K. dichotoma. An erect multiaxial axis arising from the crustose base of a stem of

Amphibolis antarctica (ADU, A43937).

206

Genus DASYPHLOEA Montagne 1842:8;

1845:102, pl. 8 fig. 3

FIG. 1C,D

Isomorphic. Thallus erect, with one or more

axes radially and irregularly branched to

several orders, branches tapering from base

to apices. Uniaxial, with whorls of 4 peri-

axial cells each producing several orders of

3-4 elongate cells, then 2-3 layers of ovoid

cells and 4—5 layers of small cells forming a

compact cortex with the outermost forming

a tomentum of acicular, thick walled, hyaline

hairs as well as normal floridean hairs; peri-

axial and elongate medullary cells producing

descending rhizoids, with the mature thallus

differentiated into a filamentous medulla and

pseudoparenchymatous cortex.

Gametophytes dioecious, male gametophyte

with fewer acicular hairs. Carpogonial and

auxiliary cell branches scattered throughout

the thallus, borne on the lower side of peri-

axial and inner medullary cells, Carpogonial

branches 5-6 cells long, refiexed with the car-

pogonium lying adjacent to cell 4, and cells 4,

5 and 6 larger than cells 2 and 3. Following

fertilisation, the carpogonium fuses with cell

4 (sometimes with cells 5 and 6) and the

fusion cell produces several connecting fila-

ments each with a_ basal _pit-connection.

Auxiliary cell branches 12-15 cells long,

curved, with the auxiliary cell usually 4(3-5)

from the apex and slightly smaller and less

densely staining than other cells. Carposporo-

phytes prominent, swelling and distorting the

thallus, with radiating gonimoblast filaments

each cell of which becomes a carposporangium,

and developing a comparatively large basal

fusion cell. Spermatangia cut off from the

outermost cortical cells in groups of 2-3,

clongate,

Tetrasporophytes more robust and_ less

branched than gametophytes, producing large,

zonate tetrasporangia from inner cortical cells.

Type and only species: D. insignis Montagne

1842:8; 1845:102, pl. 8 fig. 3. Mitchell 1966:

210, pls 22—26,

Additional synonym. Chylocladia multiramea

Sonder 1853:681, type from Lefevre Pen.,

S. Aust. (F. Mueller, 16.xii.1847; MEL

45196).

Type locality: Probably Tasmania (see below),

Distribution: From Wanna, Eyre Pen., S.

Aust., to Waratah Bay, Vic., and around

Tasmania. Sublittoral, known from depths of

2-17 m,

E. A, SHEPLEY & H,. B. S. WOMERSLEY

Selected specimens: Wanna, S. Aust., drift

(Womersley, 19.11.1959; ADU, A22373). Aldinga,

S. Aust., drift on Amphibolis (Womersley, 23.iv.

1973; ADU, 43343—*“Marine Algae of southern

Australia” No, 154), Stanley Beach, S. coast Kan-

garoo I., S. Aust., drift (Womersley, 27.13.1956;

ADU, A20380). Waratah Bay, Vic., drift (Sin-

kora A2165, 7.iii.1975; ADU, A48554), Dover,

Tas., drift (Wollaston & Mitchell, 27.11.1964;

ADU, A27699).

D. insignis was described in detail by

Mitchell (1966), who commented that the type

locality is probably Tasmania rather than

Akaroa, New Zealand (see also Womersley

1983).

Dasyphloea is characterised by the uniaxial

thallus, compact cortex bearing prominent

acicular hairs, carpogonial and auxiliary cell

branches without lateral cells, and by the

zonate tetrasporangia on isomorphic tetra-

sporophytes,

Genus DUDRESNAYA Crouan & Crouan

1835:98, pl. 2 figs 2,3 (nom. cons.)

Isomorphic, Thallus erect, mucoid, usually

much branched with terete or flattened

branches, sometimes with a slight annular

appearance. Uniaxial, with whorls of 4(-6)

periaxial cells when mature, each producing

2—4 elongate cells for several orders. with the

outermost forming a loose to moderately com-

pact cortex bearing floridean but not acicular

hairs; descending rhizoids usually developed

from medullary cells.

Gametophytes usually dioecious. Carpo-

gonial and auxiliary cell branches scattered

throughout the thallus, borne on periaxial or

inner medullary cells. Carpogonial branches

several cells long, straight or terminally

reflexed, usually with the carpogonium fusing

with cells 4 or 5 of the carpogonial branch,

followed by production of several connecting

filaments from the fusion cell, each with a

basal pit-connection, Auxiliary cell branches of

numerous cells (10-20), with the smaller

auxiliary cell in the middle or lower half of

the branch. Carposporophytes compact, glo-

bular, situated within the outer medulla often

with ones of different ages intermixed, scarcely

swelling the thallus, with all cells becoming

carposporangia. Spermatangia cut off in

clusters from outer cortical cells.

Tetrasporophytes similar to gametophytes,

with large, zonate tetrasporangia cut off ter-

minally from cells of the outer medulla or

inner cortex.

DUMONTIACEAR OF SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

Type species: BD, caccinea UC. Agatdh) Crouan

& Crouan (type cons) [-D. yverticillara

(Withering) Le folis].

A genus of some nine species (Eiseman &

Norris 1981, p. 187), with the lype species

from Europe and the other species from the

tropical American Atlantic or the Pacilic. The

sinvle species (2. anstralis J, Agardh 1899)

from southern Australia is one of the carlicst

described species of the venus, though J.

Agardh expressed doubt on its distinctness in

his original brief description; it was des¢ribed

more fully by Setchell (1912),

Dudreynaya auxirally J. Agardh 1899785,

De Toni 1924: $59, Mitchell 1964: 215.

Setchell 1912; 245, pl 27, fig, 9 Wilson 1892:

181 (nomen nudum).

D, cogeinea sensu Harvey 1855; 958, Sonder

1881: 15.

FICGIS 2A,4

Thallus (Fig. 2A) rose red to dark red-

brown, creel and much branched, spreading,

variable in robustness, 5-16 em high, mucoid,

with & main axis 2-3 mm in diameter bearing

irregularly radially arranged laterals to 3 or 4

orders, terete and tapering and 0,5<1 mm in

diameter in lesser branchlets which ate alter-

nate to opposite. Uniaxial, with an apical cell

dividing transversely and producing cylindrical

axial cells becoming 300-400 jen tong and SO-

200 pm broad, and when muture bearing

4(-6) peraxial cells bearing tufted branches

which are basally divided at cach or most cells

below, then unbranched and when matqare

gently tapering, usually 12-16 cells long with

cells (5-18-14 pm broad and LY B 2-3(—5).

The cuter medulla grades to ie cortex and the

outer certical eclls near branch opices bear

long, slender, Noridean hairs. Young thallus

branehes usually show slight annulations cor-

responding to the penaxial whorls, Rach peri:

axhil cell also produces a descending rhizoid

of clongate cells, each cell of which may

produce a lateral branch system similar to and

ving between the pertwxinl whorls, and result.

ing io a more continuous medulla and cortex,

The descending rhizoids pass dawn over two

or three axial cells and thus cach axial cell

becornes surrounded by 12-18 rhizoids, which

ultimately enlarge to similar diameter to the

axial eelly and tend to abseure the latter. In

the mature thallus, numerous secondary

descending thizoids develop from other cells of

the periaxial laterals, forming an interwoven

flamentuus medulla, Lateral branches develop

usually from periaxial cells.

Gametophytes dioecious. Carpogonial

hranches (Fig. 4A,B) develop usually on peti

axial cells of lateral thallus branches, and are

6-10 cells long with the upper 3 cells refluxed

and cells 2 and 3 somaller; the basal or sub-

basal cell frequently bears a single lateral cell

(Fig. 4C), Following fertilisation, an extension

from the carpogonium fuses: with ecll 4 (Fig.

4C) and frequently extends to cell 5, and the

resiitant large fusion cell produces several

connecting filaments cach with a basal pil-

connection. Bach connecting filanient rows

towards the brately apex and fuses with one

and usually more auxiliary cells as the latter

develop. Auxiliary cell branches (Fig, 4,8)

develop from perjaxial cells and alsa from

basal cells of lateral branch systems developed

from the descending rhizoids, and thus con-

siderably outnumber the carpogonial branches.

However, nearly all auxiliary cells are Gone

lacted by connecting filaments (Fig. JE,F) and

Inany carposporophyles result. Bach auxiliary

cell branch is 11-20 cells long. with 3-3 mid

cells lurger anc the central of these foflen

fifth From the base) the smaller, conypressed

auxiliary cell (Pig. 4D); the terminal 6-8 cells

Often taper and a sterile lateral cell may occur

on the basal cell (Fig. 4F) as in carpogonial

branches. Two gonimablast initials develop

opposite the fusion side of the auxiliary cell

(Piv, 444), Carpoxparophytes (Fig, 4H)

compact (initially two lobed), LOO-175 am

in diameter with most cells lorming rounded

carposporangla about 12 pnt in diameter, Car-

posporophytes of different ages occur scattered

profusely in the outer medulla, but scarcely

swelling the thallus. Male gametophytes with

Spermialinziw formed in dense clusters (Fig.

403) from tl terminal and subterminal cells

of the outer cortex. Setchell (1912, p. 246)

reported Wilson's collections to be monoecious,

bur all sexual specimens in our maternal were

dioecious.

Tetrasporophytes have denser rhizeidal

dovelopment than gametophytes, and this

obscures the basic whorled branch puller to a

greater extent. Large. zonate tetrasporangia

(Fig. 4K), 30-45(-5D) pm long and 15-20

pm in diameter, develop terminally or laterally

on outer medullary cells of both the periuxial

branch systems and those arising from the

descending rhizoids. Burther tetrasporungis

may arise from short branches originating

below the carher telrasporanyia,

Type Jecetityy Port Phillip, Victorian (H's

OR, 23.L1RR)

BE. A. SHEPLEY & H. B. 8. WOMERSLEY

DUMONTIACEAE OF SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

Holotype: Herb. Agardh, LD, 34730.

Diyributions Koown from Kine George's Sound,

W, Aust, (ffurpey, Trev. Ser. 325}, Pearson T,, 5.

Aust, 18 m deep (Shepherd, 81.1969; ADL,

A33940). Pesintt Avail, S. Aust, drift (Chrisapiiet,

7.x1.1976; ADU, A47821%. Tipar reef, Spencer

Gulf, S. Aust, 5 om deep (Sfepherd, 24.1%,19715

ADU, A39743), 6 m deep (Shepherd, 29.1,.1972;

ADU, A41865) und 1) m deep (Shepherd, L3.xit.

1970; ADU, A38264, A3R257, und [3 xi1-1971;

ADU, Ad1222). Investigator Strait, S. Aust. 33

m deep (Matson, 201.1971; ADU, A38582). Arno

Bay, S. Aust. drift (Kraft, J2xi.1971; ADU,

42247), N, Spencer Gulf, S. Aust, 8 m deep

{Sheplterd, 4.ix.1973; ABU, A44148), Off Trou-

bridge L, S. Aust, 4 m deep (Shepherd, 2.1.1969

pnd 411.1969; ADU, A33468 and ADU, A33790)

und 24 m deep (Shepherd, 51,1969; ADU,

A33861, male). Inside Taptey Shoal, & Aust., LO

mcleep Shepherit 27.1969; ADU, A33469), Out-

side Tapley Shoal, S. Aust, 15 m deep (Shepherd,

2111909; ADU, A33508). American R. inlet, Kan

garoo L, 8S. Aust, drift at jetty (Vomersley, 31x.

1966; ABU, A30830). Western Port, Vic, OF iIsav,

Si 1894: MEL $333), Flinders, Vic, drift

(Wamerstey & Mitchell, 181.1967; ADU, A31S01).

Low Head, ‘Tas, (Perrin 325 and Lueas, Jan. 130),

BM),

D. gustralis is u sublittoral specics known

from S to 33 m deep and is commonly ¢pi-

phytic on the seagrass Amphibalix, but also on

the brown alga Cardeeperts.

Since the cornments of Mitchell (1966, p,

216) on tetrasporangial plants, female and

male gametophytes have been found in several

collections.

D. australis is closely related to the type

species, OD. cogeciiea but differs in having

longer medullary-cortical filaments with longer

unbranched terminal parts. Setchell (19L2, p-

246) suugested that D. australis had longer

auxiliary cell branches (11-20 cells) compared

to about 12 in OD. vertieiuta, but Littler (1974,

fiz. 10) illustrates a branch 15 cells long;

sicrile dichotomous terminal parts on the

auxiliary cell branches (Setchell 1912. p, 246)

of D, avistralis. have not been observed in this

study.

Genus KRAFTUA gen. nov.

Kraftia dichotoma sp. Hov,

FIGS 2B,C,5

Thallus (Fre. 2B) erect, 1-3 om high, suh-

dichotomous, developed from a prostrate pad

extending around the lower stems of Aipi-

holis; branches slightly compressed, 2-3 mm

across near the base and tapering to about

| mm in diameter near the rounded apices.

Multiaxial (Fig. 2C), with a filamentous

medulla and a narrow, compact cortex, with

the outer cortical cells bearing hyaline, thick

walled and terminally rounded hairs (Fig. 5A)

bent towards the branch apex.

Gametuphytes monoecious, with carpogonial

and auxiliary cell branches scattered in the

vuter medulla. Carpogonial branches (Pig.

$B) 9-12 cells long with the carpagounium

sharply reflexed, cells 2 and 3 small and celb

$ and 5 larger and densely cytoplasmic, with

post-fertilization fusion (Fig. 5D) hetween the

carpogonium and ¢ell 4, resulting in an cn-

larged fusion cell producing several connecting

filaments with basal pit-connections,; lower

cells of the carpogonial branch may bear single

sterile cells laterally (Fig. 5B). Auxiliary cell

branches (Fig. S5C,\E,F) 9-14 cells long, with

the auxiliary cell usually fourth or fifth from

the apex and slightly laterally displaced, with

all the cells below and often above the

auxiliary cell forming short lateral branches.

Carposporophytes (Fig, 5G) initially with 3-4

groups of gonimoblast cells, becoming globular

with most cells forming caurposporangia, scat-

tered in the outer medulla and not distending

the cortex. Spermatangia (Fig, SH) cut off

From the outer cortical cells.

Tetrasporangia unknown.

Thallus subdichotomus, ex pulving basali

prostrate circum caulem Amphibeliy oricns,

Multiaxialis medulla filamentosa et cortice

ungusta compacta, cellulae corticales exteriores

pilas hyalinos crassiparictosos decrescentes

ad apices ramorum portatae.

Fig. 3. Aerayymplryion taylerit (ADU, A38045), A. Periaxial branch system with a young auxiliary

cell branch. B. Carpogonial branch with young carpogonium (on right) and auxiliary cell branch

{on Jefe). C. Mature carpogonial branch and adjacent auxiliary cell branch. D. Carpogonial branch

just post-fertilisation, with extension ftom carpogonium, E. Carpogonial branch (post-fertilisation)

with connecting filaments from cells of the laterals to the carpogonial branch, . Two anxiliary

cell branches wilh coonecting filaments fused with the auxiliary cells and continuing growth, G.

Youno gonimoblust developing from auxiliary cell. HH. A young carposporophyte surmounting un

auxiliary cell branch, I. A carpogonial branch with a terminal literal cell acting us an auxiliary

cell und fused with a connecting filament from which gonimoblast cells are arising. 3.¢—avxilinry

cell) clr—earpogonial branch: o.£—connecting filament,

210 FE. A. SHEPLEY & H. B. S. WOMERSLEY

Fig. 4, Dudresnaya australis. A-H, K, ADU, A30830. A. Young carpogonial branch. B. Mature

curpogonial branch. C, Post-fertilisation carpogonial branch with developing connecting filaments.

D. Auxiliary cell branch. E. Auxiliary cell branch with connecting filament fused to auxiliary cell,

continuing growth, and with one gonimoblast cell. F. Early gonimoblast development from an

auxiliary cell, G, Later gonimoblast development. H. Mature carposporophyie; auxiliary cell branch

not stippled. 1..J, ADU, A33861. I. Spermatangial branch, surface view. J. Spermatangial branch,

sectional View, K. Tetrusporangia. acmauxiliury cell; c.f.—connecting filament; gon.—gonimoblast,

DUMONTIACEAE OF SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 211

Gametophyta dioecia. Ramuli carpogoniales

9-12 cellularum longitudine, carpogonium

reflexum, carpogonium cellula quarta coales-

cens, celluliconjuncta filamentos plures conjun-

gentes efferens; cellulae inferiores rami carpo-

gonialis ramos breves laterales ferre possint.

Rami auxiliari-cellulae 9-14 cellulae Jongi-

tudine, auxiliari cellula 4-5 cellulae ab apice,

lateraliter plus minusve depulsa, cellulae aliae

ramos breves laterales facientes. Carposporo-

phyta globosa, in medulla exteriori dispersa,

corticem non distendenta, cellulae pro parte

maxima carposporangia facientes. Sperma-

tangia —cellulis ~—sexterioribus —_ corticalibus

abscissa.

Tetrasporangia incognita.

Type locality: Victor Harbor, S, Aust., 6 m

deep (Clarke, 30.x1i.1981).

Holotype: ADU, A52844. Isotypes distributed

to MEL, NSW, PERTH, UC, BM, PC, L, LD

and other herbaria,

Distribution: From Port Denison, W. Aust. to

Westernport Bay, Vic., always on lower stems

of Amphibolis (A. antarctica and A. griffithti).

Known specimens: Port Denison, W. Aust., drift

(Kraft 4136, 14.xii.1971; ADU, A50319). Elliston,

S. Aust., 7 m deep (Shepherd, 25,x.1971; ADU,

A42950). Tiparra reef, S. Aust., 5-6m deep

(Shepherd, 2.iv.1971, 24.ix.1971, 5.xi.1971, 29.1.

1972 and 10.xii.1973; ADU, A39121, A39744,

A38347, A41868 and A44596 resp.) and 1] m

deep (Shepherd, 23.xii.1970, 5.xi.1971, and 13.xii.

1971; ADU, A38252, A38339 and A41216 resp,).

Venus Bay, S. Aust., drift (Womersley, 12.11.1954;

ADU, A19501). Port Victoria, S. Aust., 3-4 m

deep (Kraft, 20.ix.1973; ADU, A44547). Sten-

house Bay, S. Aust., 3-7 m deep (Kraft, 18.ix.

1973; ADU, A44561). Victor Harbor, S. Aust.,

5-7 m deep (Clarke, 23.xii.1981; ADU, A52822).

Robe, S. Aust., 1-2 m deep near jetty (Mitchell,

10.11.1973; ADU, A42983 and 16.11.1974; ADU,

A44664). D’Estree Bay, Kangaroo I., S. Aust.,

drift (Kraft, 161.1974; ADU, A45064). Queens-

cliff, Vic., drift (Norris, 21,1.1963; ADU, A27481).

Cats Bay, Phillip L., Vic. (Norris, 201.1963; ADU,

A27482). Walkerville, Vic., drift (Sinkora A2259,

2.i11.1976; ADU, A48514).

Kraftia dichotoma probably occurs on

Amphibolis anywhere within the distribution

of this seagrass, in areas of moderate water

movement. It is usually confined to the lower

stems in lower light intensity within the leafy

canopy.

Kraftia is named in honour of Dr G. T.

Kraft, who has contributed significantly to our

knowledge of red algae of the orders Crypto-

nemiales and Gigartinales. It had previously

been referred to provisionally as Polynema (a

pre-occupied name) and is so recorded by

Ducker, Foord & Knox (1977, p. 86).

Thallus structure: The purplish-red thallus

varies from a slightly branched plant one cm

or so high to, when well developed, a rounded,

much branched tuft to 3 cm high and 4-5 cm

across, attached to the Amphibolis stem by a

smooth, prostrate pad partly or almost entirely

surrounding the host stem and up to 1 cm

across in large plants. Kra/tia apparently over-

winters as the prostrate thallus, since winter

collections (c.g. June to August) show only

a basal pad or very early development of erect

axes.

The prostrate pad consists of basal, spread-

ing, branched filaments, from each cell of

which arises an erect filament. These closely

packed, vertical chains (Fig. 2C) of up to 20

cells remain largely unbranched, with the

upper cells smaller and more rounded. The

firm, smooth-surfaced pad attains a thickness

of 0.5 mm near its centre.

The development of an erect axis (Fig. 2C)

from this prostrate pad involves the simul-

taneous elongation and continued growth of a

group of the vertical filaments over an area

usually 0.5-1.0 mm in diameter. Thus the

multiaxial erect thallus results directly from

continued development of a group of erect

pad filaments. Several erect axes may arise

from one such pad, with new axes arising

throughout the summer growth period.

An erect axis usually branches close to its

base and continues for 7 or 8 subdichotomies.

Axes near their base are 2-3 mm broad and

slightly compressed; above they are almost

terete and taper to about | mm in diameter. The

thallus is soft in consistency, especially near

the apices before the outer cells are consoli-

dated into a firmer cortex. Colour when fresh

is purplish-red, with a silvery bloom due to the

cover of thick-walled hyaline hairs on the

surface of the cortex; longer floridean hairs are

also plentiful (Fig. SC).

The multiaxial thallus shows apical growth

of the numerous apical filaments, which branch

at most cells and differentiate into a broad,

filamentous medulla of elongate cells laterally

connected by frequent secondary pit-connec-

tions, and a compact cortex of dichotomous

filaments of small cells 5-8 »m in diameter.

The small apical cells of the central, longi-

tudinal medullary filaments are curved in to-

wards the centre and protected by the rapidly

developing cortex from slightly older and more

212 E. A. SHEPLEY & H. B. S. WOMERSLEY

DUMONTIACEAE OF SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

luivial medullary cells, In longitudinal view,

one or oceasionatly two branch systems of cor-

lical cells arise midway along cach cell of the

outer medullary (Warnents. The outermost

vortien! cells (particularly near an actively

erowing apex) each hear a hyaline. thick

walled hair (Fig, SA) similar to (but with

rounded ends} those of Pasyphilaca, These

haits in Kveffia differ in being sharply bent

towards the apex ol the branch and are thus

closely appressed to the thallus surface.

Reproduction; All plants collected have been

seaual and moneccious (apart from some

young, sterile plints), and no tetrasporangia

have been ohserved Sperivatuigia are present

expecially during the carly reproductive period

(Sept, to Dee), while collections in April

hive unmany mature carposporophytes and pro-

bably represent the end of ihe reproductive

scason.

Curpoyonial branches arise laterally on cells

of the outer medullary flaments and are 9-L2

odls fang when mature. The carpogonium is

sharply veflexed along the carpogonial brangeh

(Fig. 5B), with two small cells (2 and 3)

accornmoduting this flexure, Cells 4 and 5 are

larger and densely cytoplasmic, and below

them are ad—7 smaller, lightly staining cells,

sume of Which bear short, 1=2 celled, Jaterals

(Fig. SB) which often are better developed

following lertilisation. The long tnebogyne is

wot markedly coiled and spermatia with con-

nections ta the trichogyne are often present

near its summit (Fig. 5B).

Following = fertilisstion, fusion occurs

belween the carpogonium and cell 4 of the

earpogonial branch (Fig. 5D). fallowing which

the enlarged fusion cell develops several pro-

Inisions which become connecting filaments,

cach with a basal pit-connection. Similar pro-

trusions may develop from ecll $ without

apparent connection of this cell with the carpo-

onium; however, ijt one ease a small cell,

apparently cut off from the carpogenium, was

fusing with cell 5 and complete fusion of such

a small cell may explain later development of

connecting filaments. from cell 5 without

apparent connection to the carpogonium,

113

Auxiliary cell branches form in’ a similar

position to the carpogonial branches and sre

usually more numerous; most, however, remain

juvenile as a row of relatively small cells with

few laterals (Fig. 5C), The mature auxiliary

cell branch is. 9414 cells long (Fig. SE,P) and

the auxillary cell is usually the fifth and 4s

usually laterally displaced, The 3-4 (some

fimes 2) cells distal to the auxiliary cell oxca-

sionally form branches, but all the lowe

(proximal) cells produce 1 or 2 celled laterals

(Vig, SF). A connecting filament fuses with

the outer edge of the auniliary cell (Fig. 5G)

and gonimoblast development fs iniated at 2-3

positions from fearby on the filament. The

connecting filament usually continues growth

(0 further auxiliary cells and pit-connections

exist near the points of fusion and departure

From the auxiliary cell,

Carposporophytes develop from 3—+ groups

of gonimoblast cells, with most cells develop-

ing into globular to oygid carposporangia 8-12

yan iy diameter. "The auxiliary cell remains as

a “stalk” at the hase of the branched gonimo-

blast filaments. The carposporophytes are

aumerous and scattered in mature thalli in

autumn, but do not cause protrusion or dis-

tention of the cortical layer,

Spermatangia are cut off from the outer 3-4

layers of cortical cells (Fig. 3H).

Germination of carporpares; Carpospores. ot

Plants from Robe, S, Aust, collected in Feb-

rusry 1973 (ADU. A¢2983) were germinaled

on slides in sterile seawater and in Provasoli

ES and SWM3 (plus streptomycin) media at

14°C: with a 14cf0 hr regime and light

intensity of 40-50 .B me =, ‘The medium

was changed weekly Later cultures were also

established in 12"C and with short day con-

ditions (8 hr L/ (6 hr D) under different light

intensities, but without producing significantly

different results in the cultures,

The rounder carpospores (Fig. GA}, about

10 ym in diameter. germinated in 2-4 days

with on asymmetric divisiun (Fig. 6B), then

usually developed an elongate, rhizoid-like pro-

trusion as the sporeling became 3-5 cells lone

fFig. 6C) at about 6 days By 13 days, one

Fis. 3. Krajtia dichotoma, ABU, holotvpe. A. Young cortical branches with terminal thick-walled

hyaline, reflexed hairs,

B. Carpogonial branch. GC. Cortical filaments with » young auxiliary cell

hrarch and floridean hairs. 0D. Post-fertilisation carpogonial branch with conwecting filaments from

cells 4 and

5. B. Semiemnuture auxiliary cell branch with young Iateral brimches, FP. Mature auxi-

liary cell branch with fateral branches from most cells except the auxiliary cell (number 5), G.

Young carposporophyte developing from connecting filament fused to the auxiliary cell, a.c—auxi-

thoy cell) of—connecting filament; pon—zonimoblast,

214 FE. A. SHEPLEY & H. B. S. WOMERSLEY

Fig. 6. Kraftia dichoioma, Germination slages of Curpospores. A. Carpospores. B. First division of

carpospores, at 2—4 days old. C. Four at 3-5 celled stage, about 6 days old. DI, D2, Sporelings

with elongate rhizoids. at 13 days old. Ey-Ey. Sporefings with several branches, after loss of rhi-

zoids, at 20 days old; first formed cells stippled. f1, F2. Sporelings with denser branching, some

brinches semi-erect. at 27 days old. G, Sporeling with a long primary Mlament and clusters of

laterals, at 35 days old. H. Sporeling with a compiet. pulyinate mass of cells, ut 50 days old,

DUMONTIACEAE OF SOL THERN AUSTRALIA

ot (Wo long rhizoidal cells were evident and the

filaments were 7-10 cells long (Fig. 6D).

These rhizoids were not always evident or

were lost, and at 20 days several branches

arose from the oldest cells or laterally from a

filament in an irregular manner (Fig 66). By

27 days the branching was denser with semi-

erect laterals and some = sporelings were

pseudoparenchymalous (Fig, 6F). Where a

long primary filament had developed, clusters

of kiterils occurred along the filament hy 35

days (Pig, 6Ci), and some of the chisters

developed into fairly compact pulvinate masses

several cells thick at 35-50 days (Fig, GM).

Unfortunately these cushions did not develop

further though maintained for up to 80 days.

‘The above stages were cultured on three aeeu-

sions, but on no occasion showed any evidence

of fertility.

Discussion

The female reproductive stages of Avnea/tie.

from the form and structure of the carpagonial

and auxiliary cell branches to ther bebaviour

in developing the mature carposporophytes, are

so distinchively those of the Dumontinceac

that there can be little doubt that Kra/de

belongs to this family of the Cryptonemiales.

The family Dymontacese hes included

some 15 genera, all with this charaeteristic

temale reproductive system, OF these, A crespm-

phytont. Crvptoytphonia J. Agardh, Dary-

phloea, Dudresnaya. Duimartia Larnvourous,

Farlowia J. Agardh. Hyalosiphonia Okamura,

Leptocladia J. Agardh, Piked Harvey and

Thuretellopsis Kytin are uniaxial. Coastantinea

Postels & Ruprecht, Dilvea Stackhouse, Neo-

dilvea Tokida (including Abbotifa Perestenke

197Seosee Abbott 1982), HWeeksia Setchell,

Gibsmithta Doty, and now Kra/tia ave multi-

nxial in mature thalli, Norris (1971) has

shawn that the young thallus of MWeekyie

fryeana is uniaxial but the apleal filament later

ceases growth and lateral lilaments continue

developing to give a secondarily multiaxial

thallus. The reverse siltation, where a typical

multiaxial thallus is rechiced to pniaxial can.

struction, occurs in Euthera in the Kallymenie

ceae (Norris 1957, p. 305%. Gabrieison &

Hommersand (1982) advocate removal ol

several uniaxial wenera af the Rhahoniqceac

to the multiaxial Solicriaceac in view of theit

reproductive similarities, and the Acrotylaceae

{Kraft & Min-Thein 1983) also includes both

uniaxii and moltinial genera. However, most

215

families of the Cryptonenitales aud Givartinales

are still characterised by cither uniaxial or

mMultiasial construction, and Bert (1965) segre-

gated the Dilseacewe (lused on Lilsea) fron

the Duniomtiaceae on this. bysis—ie, Dumen-

tiaceae for Uniaxial genera and Dilseacene for

muliiaxial genera.

The distinctiveness of the female repro-

ductive system in the Dumohtiacese Cvensu

lato), which differs clearly from that of all

other members of the C'rypronemiales, saigests

thal whis arose relatively carly a the evolution

of this farmly and the uniaxial—multiaxial

difference arose Juter. Recognition of one or

two families for these genera depends on the

weight wiven to the thallus development com-

pared to the female reproductive system, but

the distinctiveness of the latter, together with

the uniaxial to rouliaxial development within

Weeksia, indicates that they are best kept

within a single famly, Dumontiaceae,

The family Weeksisceae (Meeksie. Can-

ented and Leptactadia) has been separated

front the Dumontiacese by Abbott (1968, p.

[S&) on the basis that while typical ausihary

cell branches oceur, they are non-functional

and the gonimoblast develops directly from

the cell of the carpogonial branch from which

connecting filaments normally develop. This

uppeurs to be a derived state and is not always

so—Abbou (1968, p, 192) comments ina

Foomote that Norris had observed a functional

auxrhary cell in Constantinen, and Abbott &

Hollenberg (1976. p. 363) refer te the

#uxdiary cells in the Weeksiaceae as “same-

tintes functional’. More recently. Lindstren

(1981) has shown that Cunstantines does have

Nunctional auxiliary cells. As Bold & Wynne

(1978, p, 501) note, there is little justification

for recognition of the Weeksiacene.

Mast families of Cryptonemiles and Gigar-

tinales are characterised hy one method of

tetrasporangium civision, ie cither zenate.

tetrahedral or cruciate, though the latter two

ure not always clearly separated. It is ieusiual

to find a femily such as the Dumoitidcene

where genera With Zonale or cruciate tetro-

sporangia occur, though some deseriptions and

figures refer to these sporangin as being

“ineguhirly” divided. Most genera of Dinmon-

liaccuce have cruciate tetrasporangia. bul Con-

siqutinea, Dasypliloed and Dudresmava have

mamate letrasporangia Thus the ertuviate tetra.

sporangia of Milser ave found in several other

veners of Dunvintiaeeay and there is no edr-

216

relation between telrasporangium division and

thallus construction.

Until recently. tetrasporophytes of some

genera were Unknown, bat heleromerphy has

now been established in several genera. Aero-

swnphyron (Cortel-Breeman & van den Hock

1970) has been found to hive a prostrate

tetrasporophyte morphalogically quite diferent

from its crect, much branched gametophytes,

Pikea (Scott & Dixon 1971) and Parlowse

(DeCew & West 1981) have crustose spore-

phytes producing ¢rucnite tetrasporangia, and

the Farlowia crusts resemble thase ot Haerma-

rocelis. Thuretellapsis is also heteromorphic

(Richardson & Dixon 1970, p. 154). Since

lelrasporophytes are presently unknown in

Keafifa. it may also be heteramorphic,

Kraftia differs in morphology fram other

multiaxial genera of the Dumontiaceac. Dilseq,

Neodilsea, and Weeksiv are all foliose genera,

and Consraninea is stipitate with a pelhite

blade: the latter two genera are also unmxial

when juvenile, The production of laterals from

the lower cells of the auxiliary cell branch and

also (tou lesser extent) from the carpoyonial

&. A. SHEPLEY & H. B. 8. WOMERSLEY

branch is not uncommon in gencra of the

Dumontiaeeac, and as probably best shown in

Acrosymphyton, Kraftia shows such laterals

well, bul they are not involved in any fusions

an in Aeroyvetphyton.

Gihsmithia Doty (1963, p. 458, figs 1-17)

was tentatively placed in the Dumontiaceac,

and this is supported by Karam-Kermnan

(1976), Gihbymithia is multiaxial, isomorphic,

forms cruciate telrasporangia, and coantorms in

gcners! with the Dumontiseeae. However, it

differs. in habit, vegetative structure, and

detailed morphology of the carpogonial anid

duxiliary cell branches, anc must be considered

any anomalous member of the Dumontiaceac

as noted by Keatt C98l, p, 229.

Acknowledgments

The second author ts grateful ta the Aus-

iralivn Research Grants Scheme tor provision

of Researeh pssishiace and to Research Officer

Mrs E. L. Robertson for maintenance al

cultures, Dr E, Gordon-Mills kindly provided

the Lat. diagnosis,

References

Amwort, 1. A. (1962) Morphological studies in a

new species of Acraxyaiphyton (Rhodophyceuc).

Anier. J. Bat, 49, 845-849.

(1968) Studies in some foliose red algae of

the Pacific coast. IL Dumontiacene, Weeksia-

ceae, Kallymeniiaceae. J. Phycol, a, 180-198,

—~ (1982) On Abbotia Perestenko, 1975 (Rho-

dophyta). Taven 3b, 300-302-

& Honrenperg, Ce. 1. (1976) “Manne Algac

ol caltsratis® (Stanferd Uniy, Press: Stanford,

Calif.)

Acanm, J, G. (1899) Analecta Algologica, Cont.

Vo Bands Univ, Arvskr. 35041, 1160, ply 1-3.

Reap Foo, (1965) Sur da structure ct le deve-

luppement de Fappareil reproductenr femelle de

Dilton carnosa (Sehusidel) Kuntze et la position

svaematique du genre Dilsea. Comp. Reni,

Aead. Sei. 264, 2702-2704.

Bono, H.C. & Wynne, M.S. (1978) “Tptroduction

to the Algac—Struciure and Reproduction.”

(Prentice-Hall: New Jersey.)

Courk.-Breeman, A. M. & VAN pen HorK, C.

C1970) Life-history studies on Rhodophyceae 1.

Acrosvirphyron prepuriferum (Wo Ag.) Kyl,

Acta Bat. Nevrl. 19, 265-284,

Croan, Py b, & Crovan, AH, M. t18385) Observas

fions microscopignes sur la genre Mesaglolre

Agnirdh, odin. Sei. Nar., Ser 2. 3, 98-99) wl, 2,

Pecrw, T. Cc. & Wosr, FA. CIS EY Trvestion

tions on the life histories of three Farlewh spe

vices (Rhodephynt: Cryptaremtales, Dumentia-

ceac) from Pacifie North Ameriva. Plveologia

2b, 342-495],

De Ton. G. BL 1924) “Sylloge Alarum ono

hucusgne cognilatium.” Vol. 6, Floridene-

(Padua. )

Dory, M.S. (1963) Grbsalihia hawalivnsis gen.

met spn, Pucif. Sei, 17. 458-465,

Ducker. S C., Foorp, N, Io & Keox. R. BL

(1977) Biology of Australian Seayeasses: the

gonus Amplihoaliy C, Agardh (Cymodocenceag )-

Aust, d. Bat. 25, 67-95,

Fiseman. No. & Nore. Jo No C1981) Dielres-

niyva patala sp, fev, an unusual deep-water red

alga trom Blorida. J. Phiveot, 17, 186-190,

GABRILLSON, POW, & Honmunsann, M. (1982)

The Athintic species of Solieria (Gisartinales,

Khodophvia): Their morpholory. distribution

and aftinities. Jha. 18. 13-45.

Harvey, W, H. (1855) Some account of the

mirine botany of the celony of Western Aus

iralia. Trans. R. frist: Acad. 22. 525-566,

Hawkes, M. W. (1982) Acrosyatplyton firminne

sp. nov, (Rhodophyta, Cryptonemiales), a new

subtidal red alga from New Zealind: develop-

niental moypholosy and distribution of the

gamelophyle. J. Piivcal, 18, 447-444,

Howr, M. A, (1914) The marine algae of Peru.

Mein, Tovrey Bot. Clals V8. 1-185, pls 1-66

Katanm Kenan. FT. B. (1976) Structure, repro-

diction et discussion sur la position systemuatique

duo wenpe = Gilviwithia ORbodephycese). Balt.

Mfus. Nate Hist, Mal. 365, 21 32.

krart, Gi. T. (1981) Rhodophyta: Morpholapy

and Classifieation, 7a Lehban, C. S, & Wynne,

M. J. (Eds), “The Biolowy of Seaweeds’) Ch. 1.

pp. G51. Bot. Monagr. Vol. 17. (Blackwell:

Oxford. }

DUMONTIACEAE OF SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

Kraft, G. T. & Min-THein, U. (1983) Claviclo-

nium and Antrocentrum, two new genera of

Acrotylacese (Gigurtinales, Rhodophyta) from

southern Australia. Phycologia 22(2), 171-183.

Kyun, H. (1956) “Die Gattungen der Rhodo-

phyceen™. (Gleerups: Lund.)

Linpstrom, S. (1981) Female reproductive struc-

tures and strategy in wu red alga, Constuntinea

rosa-marina (Gmelin) Postels et Ruprecht (Du-

montiaceae, Cryptonemiales). Jap. J. Phycol. 29,

251-257.

Litr.erR, M. M. (1974) The structure and repro-

duction of Dudresnaya lubrica sp. nov. (Rhodo-

phyta, Dumontiaceue). Br. p/tycol. J. 9, 149-156.

MircHe.t, E, A, (1966) The southern Australian

generu of the Dumontiaceue (Rhodophyta).

Nova Hedwigia 11, 209-220, pls 22-26,

Montacner, C. (1842) “Prodromus generum spe-

cierumque phycearum novarum in itinere Ant-

arclicum”, (Paris.)

(1845) “Voyage au Pole Sud et dans I

Océanie sur les Corvettes I’Astrolabe et la

7élée. 1. Botanique. TI, (Paris,)

Norris, R. EB. (1957) Morphological studies on

the Kallymeniaceae. Univ. Calif. Publ. Bot. 28,

251-333.

(1971) Development of the foliose thallus of

Weeksia fryeana (Rhodophyceae). Phycologia

10, 205-213.

Papenruss, G. F, (1958) Notes on algul nomen-

clature 1V. Taxon 7, 104-109,

217

PeRESTENKO, L. P. (1975). The red algae of the

far-eastern seas of the U.S.S.R. Foliose crypto-

nemiaceun algae (Cryptonemiales, Rhodophyta).

Bot. Zh. 60, 1676-1689.

RicHarpson, N, & Dixon, P. S, (1970) Culture

studies on Thuretellopsis peggiana Kylin. J. Phiy-

cal, 6, 154-159.

Scott, J. L. & Dixon, P. S. (1971) The life history

of Pikea califarnica Hary, Ibid. 7, 295-300.

SETCHELL, W. A. (1912) Algae Novae et minus

Copgnitae [. Univ. Calif. Publ. Bot, 4, 229-269.

Suostept, L. G. (1926) Floridéan Studies. Lunes

Univ, Arsskr., N.F. Avd 2, 22(4), 1-95.

Sonper, O. G. (1853) Plantae Muellerianue,

Algae. Lintraea 25, 657-709,

—— (1981) Algae Austrialianae hactenus cog-

nitae. /n F. Mueller, “Fragmenta Phytographiae

Australiae”, Vol. 11, Suppl. pp. 1-132. (Mel-

bourne. )

TayLor, W. R, (1952) Reproduction of Acrosym-

phyton caribaeum. Pap. Mieh. Acad. Sci. Arts

Lett. 36, 31-37, pls 1-3.

Wiison, J. B. (1982) Catalogue of algae collected

at or near Port Phillip Heads and Western Port.

Prec, R, Soc, Vic. N.S. 4, 157-190.

Womerstey, H. B. S. (1981) Aspects of the dis-

tribution and biology of Australian marine

macro-algae. Jn Pate, J. S. & McComb, A. J.

(Eds), “The Biology of Australian Plants,” Ch.

10, pp. 294-306. (Univ. W. Aust, Press: Perth.)

(1983) “The marine benthic flora of

southern Australia”. Part T. (Govt. Printer: Adc-

laide.)

LUNETTES OF LAKE EYRE NORTH, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY J. A. DULHUNTY

Summary

Large lunettes, from 30 to 48 m high and 1 to 2.5 km wide, occur along the lee shores of Lake Eyre

North, from Koorakarina Creek in the northwest to Cooper Creek in the northeast. They consist of

large, deeply eroded cores or bases of semi-consolidated sand, and small, scattered, active crests of

loose sand. They probably formed during an arid phase which dried up and deflated sediments into

the Simpson and Tirari Deserts, from the bed of Lake Dieri — the late Pleistocene ancestor of Lake

Eyre. Subsequently, in Holocene time, deflation waned and erosion of the lunettes commenced as a

less arid climate initiated ephemeral sedimentation in Lake Eyre limiting source material to river-

flood sediments. Longitudinal sandridges of the Simpson Desert form on the northern downwind

side of the lunettes.

LUNETTES OF LAKE EYRE NORTH, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by J. A. DuULTUNTY*

Summury

DuULHUNTY, Fo A. (1983) Lunetles of Luke Eyre North, South Australia, Trans. R. Soe. 8.

Aust, 107(4), 219-222, 30 Navember, 1985_

Large Tunetles, from 30 to 48 m high and | to 2.5 km wide, occur along the lee shores

of Lake Eyre Narth, from Koorakatina Creek in the northwest to. Cooper Creck im the north-

east. They consist of large, deeply eroded cores or bases of semi-consoliduted sand, and sail,

scattered, active crests of loose sand, They probably fornied during an arid phase which dried

up and deflated sedimenis into the Simpson and Tirari Deserts. from the bed of Lake Dieri—

the late Pleistocene ancestor of Luke Eyre. Subsequently, in Holocene time, deflation waned

und erosion of the lunettes commenced as a less arid climate initiated ephemeral sedimentauion

in Lake Eyre limiting source material to river-flood sediments, Longitudinal sandridges of the

Simpson Desert form on the northern downwind side of the linettes.

Kry Woros: Luke Eyre North, lunettes, sandridges.

Introduction

During 1979 and L980, expeditions to the

northern antl northeastern shores of Luke Eyre

North were undertaken to investivate features

observed during earlier aerial reconnaissance.

In 1979 acess to The northwest corner of the

Jake Was gated by four-wheel-drive vehicles

tram Williant Creck, through Anna Creck

Station to the KoorakarinueAnchor Creck

Estuary. From there to the Warburton Estuary

the shore was investigated using balloon-tyred,

Honda ATC 90 motor trieycles. In 1980

Honda tricyeles were used to travel porth

along the eastern shore of the lake from the

Frome-Clayton Estuary to Cooper Creek, and

then along the northeastern shore to the War-

burton Estuary,

The purpose of this paper is to record the

oecurrenee, clistributian and general nature of

lurge sand mounds at the northern end of Like

ayre) North, ‘They follow closely the Take

shoreline hetwen Keorakarina Creck in the

northwest and Cooper Creck in the northeast.

This is the lee shore in relation to the resultani

direction of prevailing, strong winds which

have determined the directional trend of

parallel longitudinal sandridges of the Simpson

and ‘Tirari Deseris, in areas immediately north

and cast of Lake Eyre North (Bowler 1976,

Brookfield 1970, Kine 1960. ‘Twidale 1972),

The sand mounds are similar in general fea-

tures to those described by ‘Twidale (1972) as

leeside mounds and by Bowler (1976) as trans-

verse, lakeshore dunes in other Australian arid

* Department of Geology und Geophysics, Uni-

versity of Sydney, N.S.W, 2.006,

tegions. They are also equivalent to the clay

und sand dunes or luncttes of semiend rections

(Coffey 1909, Hills 1940, Stephens & Crocker

1946, Boluine 1954, Campbell 1968, Woptner

& Twidale 1967). It is proposed for the pur-

pose oF this paper. ta use the term Jumettes in

teferring to the sand mounds along the Jee

shore of Lake Eyre North,

Large Junettes us described here. occur only

on the lee shores ut the northern end of Lake

Eyre North, and have net been found on any

other shorelines of the north Jake. King

(1956) examined Jongitudinal sandridges near

the southeast corner of Lake Byre North but

did not describe any lunctte-type features.

Twidale (1972) deseribed leeside, debris

mounds along the shores of Lake Eyre South,

immediately north of the estuary of Warriners

Creck and the Marguarite. He also referred in

general ta Jeeside mounds on the northern

sides of many playas in the vicinity of Like

Myre, but did not deseribe any lunettes on

leeside mounds in particular bordering Lake

Eyre North.

Shoreline lunettes

Large Junettes occur along the lee shore-

line at the northern end of Lake Eyre North

(Fig. 1). They follow closely the trends and

irregularities of the lee shoreline, forming a

continuous dine system tor 110 km, broken

only by the Warburton and Kalaweerina

Estuarics which are less than 1 km wide. Along

most of the share there is only one continuous

lunette with a gently sloping apron, up to 1 kin

wide, runuing down to the shoreline of (he

lake, At one place immediately cast of the

220

TRANSVERSE SECTIONS

weetial LUNETTE SANDS 2

eee atthe | PAT ORELINE

J, A, DULMUNTY

FIG. 14

MAP OF THE

LUNETTES

LAKE EYRE NORTH

LEGEND

Bo, [ter TTF

SY AREAS

rc Veneer unital

NAA, Jaan RIOGES

aMAIS CLAY

KS ae Paya Lage

3 # o 7h

MaP SCALE

\ Ne eT «\\

FIG, 1B TiRARI) |

\\ A a

LUNETTES

LEGEND

LIVE SAND CRESTS MOLOCEINE

(Oty LUNETTES SEDIMENTS

LD ARGILLACEOUS SSSResrocemt

= —= SEDIMENTS

S LEVEL

Fig. 1. Lunettes along the northern shores of Lake Eyre North,

Warburton Estuary (Fig, 1, Sect. E-F) there is

a second lunette almost 2 km wide which is

east of but parallel to the main shoreline

Junetic, They are separated by a backwater

playa of the Warburton River, however,

further southeast they unite to form a single

shoreline lunette. Elsewhere, small claypans or

river Hoodout areas close to the main shoreline

luiette, have isolated luncttes on their lee

sides.

The main shoreline funettes are between |.5.

and 3 km wide, rising to an average height of

about 30 m above the lake bed, although some

are 40 m high and the highest measured was

48 m. They ace complex in structure, having

large. pale yellow-brown. semi-consolidated

cores or bases and relatively small, scattered,

active crests of pale yvellow-white sand (Fig.

1B). The crests are quite friable with less than

1.0% clay, hut the cores are firmer with

between 1.0 and 4.0% clay. Both are essen-

hally sand lunettes,

The large cores have been extensively eroded

and the small active crests lie disconformably

upon their eroded surfaces (Fig. 1B). The

bases appear to be erosional residuals of old,

large lunettes formed during an earlier, arid

phase by transport of sand and some clay to

lec shore of Lake Dieri, the late Pleistocene

ancestor of Lake Eyre (Dulhunty 1982. David

& Browne 1950, Loffler & Sullivan 1979,

Bowler 1973, Wopiner & ‘Twidale 1967).

‘The active crests appear to be a second genera-

tion of younger features. Functioning as lunettes

lo the present day lake. At some stage after

maximum development of the first generation

of ftunettes, the rate of supply of source

material decreased and the lunettes were

eroded, reduced in size and modified in shape.

This is illustrated in Figure 1B by broken lines

which are entirely speculative and diagram-

matic, intended only to give some idea of the

amount of erosion and change of shape sug-

gested hy field studies.

Decrease in supply of source materia] and

crosion of the limeites might have been duc to

a weller, climatic phase following the Jate

Pleistocene-early Holocene arid phase: (Bowler

1976) which clevated the watertable and

initiated ephemeral Lake Eyre sedimentation

LUNETTES—LARKE EYRE NORLH

on the eroded surface of the old Dieri take

hed (Duthunty 1982). "This retarded deflation

and held river-sediments as Holocene beds in

Lake Hyre, which has continued to the present

day.

Vicld observations over seven years, during

atid following the major 1974 filling of Lake

Eyre, revealed the formation of extensive, but

very low-protile deltas of fine white sand nea

estuaries of the northern rivers. Silt and clay

were deposited widely over the playa environ-

ment at the northern end of the Jake

(Dulhunty 1982), At places, small shoreline

hanks of sand, silland clay were fovmed along

lec shores by wind-wave transport. The lake

dried up between 1978 and PORT, and the

highly elevated watertable returned slowly

towards its normal, long-term average level,

Sediments commenced deflatiog and were sult

doing so at the end of 1982, Sand from deltas

near ie estuaries of the northern rivers blew

downwind over the vraded surfaces. of the old

lunette bases and up onto the aetive crests.

Silt and slay deposited in the plitva environ:

ment. dricd ut the surface as the watertable

fell, and deflated over the Junettes into the

Simpson Desert. Small amounts of sand from

the wave-built shoreline banks were also blown

onte the Junette crests, while silt and clay were

carricd into the desert.

Along most of the northern (lee) sides ol

the Tuneties, sand meves down from the uctive

crests into u narrow confused area up to 2 km

wide, Where the longitudinal sandridges of the

Simpson Desert commence, At some places

Ihere is no confused area and the lonvitudinal

sandridges commence on the lee slopes of the

Junettes.

As the lake bed is tilted ta the seuth.

relutively shallow-water conditions ovcur along

22)

northern shores during major fillings. This

helps promote wave transpert of sediments to

the lee shore, but reduces wave height and

wave crosions of old) lunetie cores, the pre-

sence of which close to the shore suggests

neither advance nor retreat of the shoreline

since the luneties were formed,

South of the Cooper Estuary along the

caster Shore (Fig. £), well-formed luncttes

are replaced by a different shoreline regime.

The general trends of the shore and longitu-

dinal Sandeidges (ind hence prevailing winds)

are very similar, This means that only limited

amounts of sand, silt and chy are flown

ashore by delition of sediments from the lake

bed afler major fillings. Also water depths,

durmy fillings, are greater than across the

northern anid northeastern shores, and pro-

nounced crosion by wave action has led to

custom migration of the shoreline. Conse-

quently, any small shoreline Tunettes which

might have formed at the same time as the

Jarge bases of the northern shoreline inettes,

have been completely eroded away, Smal

amounts of sand blown in from the present

lake bed, are added directly to the live crests

of the longitudinal sandridges.

Acknowledgments

hos wished to acknowledge (i) valuable

discussion with Drs 1. M, Bowler and R. J.

Wasson of the Australian National University,

Cioberra; (i) valuable assistance of Muloo-

rina and Ania Creek Stations. in conducting

the 1979 and 1980 expeditions and (ili)

research taciilies provided by the Department

of Geology and Geophysies, University of

Sydney.

References

RBoubamn. 1, (1954) La sebkha de Bien Ziane ef

su “hinetre™ on Bourrelet, Rep. de Geom, Dynu-

migue 5, 102-122,

Bowne J, M, (1973) Clay dunes: their oceur-

tenve, formation and environmental significance.

Rarth Sei, Rev. % 345-338,

(1970) Aridity (a Australias age, etigins and

capression ty aeolian hiuddformns and sediments.

Unicel, 12, 279-310,

Brookriniy, M. (1970) Dune trends und wind

regime tn Cental Austrilia. 4. Geamorplial. 0,

12)-153.

CAMPRELL, EL M. (1968) Lunettes in southern

South Australia. Draie KR. Sow 8 Aust, 92, 85-

Hoe

Correy, G. N. (1909) Clay dimes. J. geol, 07.

754-745,

Davin, T. W. 1. & Brown, W, R. (1950) ‘The

geology of the Commanwealth of Australia".

(Amoltd: London.)

Ducyunty, J. A, (1981) Quaternary sedimentary

environments in the Lake Eyre region, South

Australnn Geel. See. Aust, Abstract Yolume

No, 3, 57-58,

—— (1982) Holocene sedimentary environments:

int boke Eyre. South Australia. J. Geol. Soc.

Aust, 29, 437-442.

Hines, FL S, (1940) Phe Junette. a new landform

of aeolin origin. Aus), Geogr. 3, 15-21.

King, D, (1956) The Quaternary stratigraphic

record at Luke Eyre Norh and the evolution of

cxming topographic fortis. Trans. R. Soc. &.

Aust. 79, 93-103.

222 J. A. DULHUNTY

(1960) The sandridge deserts of South Aus-

tralia and related aeolian landforms of the

Quaternary arid cycles. /bid. $3, 99-108.

LorFLer, E. & SuLtivaAn, M. E. (1979) Lake

Dieri resurrected: an interpretation using satel-

lite imagery. Z. Geomorphol. 23, 233-242.

STEPHENS, C. G, & Crocker, R. L. (1946) Com-

position and genesis of lunettes. Trans. R. Soc.

S. Aust, 70, 302-312.

TwIDALE, C. R. (1972) Landform development in

the Lake Eyre region, Australia. Geogr. Rev.

62, 40-70.

— (1976) “Analysis of Landforms”. (John

Wiley & Sons Australia Pty Ltd: Sydney.) pp.

313-314.

Worrner, H. & TwIiDALE, C. R. (1967) Geomor-

phological history of the Lake Eyre Basin. Jn

J. N. Jennings & J. A. Mabbutt (Eds) “Land-

form studies from Australia and New Guinea.”

(A.N.U. Press: Canberra.) pp. 118-143.

SOME FRESHWATER CHLOROPHYTA FROM THE BOOL LAGOON

SYSTEM IN SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY S. SKINNER

Summary

Nine taxa of freshwater benthic and planktonic Chlorophyta are recorded from the alkaline waters

of the Bool Lagoon system, including a form of Enteromorpha clathrata, and five members of the

Zygnemales including a new species of Mougeotia here described as M. sesterisignifera sp. nov.

SOME FRESHWATER CHLOROPHYTA FROM THE BOOL LAGOON

SYSTEM IN SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by S. SKINNER*

Summary

Skinnen, S. (1983) Some freshwiter Chlorophyta from the Bool Lagoon system in south-

eastern South Australia. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 107(4), 223-229, 30 November, 1983,

Nine taxa of freshwater benthic and planktonic Chlorophyta are recorded from the

alkaline waters of the Bool Lagoon system, including @ form of Enreromerpha clathrate, and

five members of the Zygnemales including a new species of Mouseotia here described us M.

sesterisignifera sp. nav.

Key Worps: Chlorophyta, freshwater algac; Bool Lagoon; South Australia.

Introduction

Many of the inland waterways of South

Australia contain hard water with alkaline pH

and high levels of dissolved bicarbonates. The

only taxonomic record of freshwater Chloro-

phyta from this state is that of Prescott &

Scott (1952) an desmid collections of Ivan

Ophel from Kangaroo [sland and Mt Compass,

areas noted for their acid soils and water.

The Bool Ligoon system in the upper south-

cast af South Australia is an important wild-

life refuge and conservation park. [t is a hard

water lagoon system of several permanent and

numerous transient shallow lakes [ed by

Mosquito Creek. The water ts alkaline, having

an average pH of 8.5 and a dissolved bicar-

honate concentration of 7.5 meq.1-? HCO,~

(Walker et al. 1982).!

Methods

Sumples of floating mats of algac were

obtained during a recent flora and fauna sur-

vey of the Bool Lagoon Game Reserve and

Hacks Lagoon Conservation Park, fram each

of cight stations selected to demonstrate the

diversity of habitats in the system, and one

further sample from near the ibis rookery on

Bool Lagoon later in the same vear. The

Chlorophyta from these samples are described

and illustrated here. Other taxa, including

numerous diatoms, a species af Cladophora

(insufficient material for identification) and

charophytes were encountered. Specimens are

held in the alval herbarium at the University

of Adelaide (ADU).

The Zygnemales were verified from Kolk-

wily. and Krieger (1941) and the Oedogoniales

from Gatutier-Li¢vre (1963, 1964). The

* Department of Botany, University of Adelaide,

Gi.P,O. Box 498, Adelaide, 8. Aust. 5001.

ordinal classificution is that of Bold and

Wynne (1978),

CHLOROPHYTA, CHLORELLALES

Scenedesmus quadricaudus (Turp.) Bréb. var,

quadricaudus May 1973: 445.

FIG. 1A

Thallus a coenobium of four cells in slightly

alternate Series, truncated ellipsoid in shape,

6-10 «Mm in diameter, L/B 2.5-3, attached

for at least the middle two thirds of long sides:

both end cells with an outward pointing

curved spine from cell wall of cach short

side, Collected at Station” 1, ibis rookery,

Bool Lagoon {Raberty and Preece, 5.xi, 1982:

ADU, A53988), A common member olf the

phytoplankton in many parts of Australia,

Cosmopolitan.

ULVALES

Enteramorpha clathrate (Roth) Greville.

Bliding, 1963; 107. forma.

FIG. 1, B-E

Thallus a much branched tubular system of

small, more or less isodiametrie cells in

ordered ranks—the ordering becoming less

regular in older and wider parts of thallus—

surrounding a hollow centre, attached or free

floating: thalli (0.1)0.5-4.0(10.0) mm in

diameter, to 50 mm or greater in length,

light greet to green, often cnerusted with

lime, Cells thick walled 10-18 j,m in diameter,

L/B 0.5-1.5, with one lobed laminate chloro-

plast often occupying only part of the cell

iWalker. kK. F.. Balla. &. A. Lilovd, L. Nu. Moller,

invertebrates of Bool Lagoon Game Reserve and

Hacks Lagoon Conservation Park. Report sub-

mitted to South Australian Department of Envi-

ronment and Planning.

CHLOROPHYTA FROM BOOL LAGOON 22

(Fig. 1.E) and numerous 2—6(8) small pyre-

noids, Lateral branches arising irregularly from

the body of the main thallus, at first uni-

seriate but becoming multiseriate and tubular

30 cells or less from tip. No undisputed repro-

ductive areas found.

Collected at Station I, ibis rookery, Bool

Lagoon (Roberts and Preece, 5.xi.1982; ADU

A53986).

Enteromorpha species are not uncommon

in alkaline or brackish inland waters in South

Australia. Older records (Hardy 1906) list

E., intestinalis Link. for inland waters in Vic-

toria. These records should be reviewed in the

light of more recent taxonomic studies of the

genus.

CHAETOPHORALES

Aplanochaete confervicola (Naeg. ex Kuetz.)

Rabenh. Tupa 1974: 83, figs 13, 14.

A. repens A. Braun. Bailey 1898: 7. Prescott

1951: 125, Pl. 17, Figs 2, 3.

FIG. 1, F-J

Small proliferating decumbent epiphyte,

with occasional erect cells, adnate to the cell

wall of various other filamentous chloro-

phytes, and diatoms, 160-200 pm _ between

extremities. Cells cylindrical to subglobose,

with flattened base, 10-18(-20) pm in dia-

meter, L/B 1—2(—2.5), with one large chloro-

plast with one pyrenoid; most if not all

mature cells surmounted by naked seta or hair

cell up to 180 «4m long, usually broken off near

base, with a bulbous base and a septum at the

top of bulb. Sporangial cells inflated globose

and often erect from filament, 30 ym in dia-

meter, opening by rupture.

Collected at Station 1, ibis rookery, Bool

Lagoon (Roberts and Preece, 5.xi.1982;

ADU; 53985), on Zygnema, Spirogyra, Mou-

geotia, loose vegetable fragments and a

diatom. Cosmopolitan.

A species of Coleochaete was also encoun-

tered on cells of Chara at Station 3. east Big

Hill, Bool Lagoon (Lloyd, 15.ix.1982) but

was not fertile.

OEDOGONIALES

Cedogonium infirmum Tiffany 1924:

183, Pl. Uf, figs 6-9; 1930: 101, Pl XXXITI, figs

289-292, Gautier-Liévre 1963: Pl 89, figs 148 a-c.

Gautier-Liévre 1964: 424.

Fig, 1.

Developing lateral branch.

initials,

A. Scenedesmus quadricaudus var. quadricaudus.

C. mature thallus, part, surface view.

E, Vegetative cells with chloroplast and pyrenoids.,

Oedogonium infirmum., K, L. Oospores in oogonia,

FIG. 1, K-M

Filaments narrow, cells 15-18 um _ broad,

L/B 5-8, terminally capitellate, partly or

wholly lime encrusted; basal attachment a

simple bulb; uppermost cells absent in samples.

Macrandrous, dioecious; male segments in

fours to eights (to tens), simple, L/B 1, two

spermatozoa per segment; oogonium sub-

spherical to spherical, without a modified sup-

porting cell, single, 38-42 »~m in diameter,

opening by a wide basal structure; spore

smooth-walled, spherical, orange brown, filling

the oogonium, 38-40 »,m diam.

Collected at Station 1, ibis rookery (Roberts

and Preece, 5,xi.1982); Station 7, north lagoon

(Lloyd, 5.ix.1982; ADU, A53987). U.S.A.

and Algeria.

This taxon agrees very well

description given by Tiffany (1924).

There were one or two further species of

Oedogonium and a species of Bulbochaete

present but these were not fertile and not

able to be further identified.

ZYGNEMALES

Mougeotia sestertisignifera sp. nov.

FIG. 2, A-C

Filaments unbranched, broad: cells 22-26

pm in diameter, 70-200 ym long, cellular

fluid clear, end wall lenticular; single broad

laminar chloroplast with a central isthmus,

crenulate margins and (4)5—10 scattered

prominent pyrenoids; nucleus central to

slightly displaced, in plane of chloroplast.

Conjugation scalariform; zygospore H-

shaped, with a broad conjugation tube and

arms extending to almost fill both gametangial

cells, 60-80 »m in median diameter, outer

wall smooth, mesospore laminate, golden,

Type locality: Bool Lagoon, S. Aust.

Type: Ibis rookery (Station 1), free floating

(Roberts and Preece, 5.xi.1982; ADU,

A53993) also (Lloyd, 15.ix.1982; vegetative

filaments only).

Diagnosis: Cellulae 22-26 pm late atque 70-

200 »zm longae, chloroplastis laminatis cum

multis pyrenoidibus dispulsis; coniugatio

scalariformis, zygospora sestertisigniforma 60—

80 pm late in medio, mesospora laminate,

aurarla.

with the

B-E. Enteromorpha clathrata. forma. B.

D. Young thallus with lateral

F-J. Aplanochaecte confervicola, K-M.

M. male filament.

22 8S. SKINNER

A-C

25pm

Fig, 2. A-C, Motyecatia virescens forma. A.

Veuctulive cells, B, Conjugating cells. C,

ZN LOSPOre.

With ils H-shaped spore this taxon is similar

to members of the venus Temnagamernin: but

does not appear to have specialized smaller

gumetangial cells, nor does its spore show a

sigmoid process described for several species

in that genus. In vegetative form, although the

cells are broader, this taxon comes close to

the group of Mougeolia species which show

quidrate spores. especially M4, virescens

(Hass.) Borge as described by Kolkwitz and

Krieger (1941) and Preseott (1951). The

specific epithet is chosen from the latin sign

for a sestertius, two linked I's.

Zyeneme carteri

Caurdi 1932: Ll4. Kolkwity & Krieger 1941: 223

Zygnema pectinarmin (Vauch.) Ag. var. decusya-

fon (Vaeuch.) Kirchn. sensu) Carter 1924: 62,

figs HL

FIG, 3 A-C

Filaments narrow; cells (10—)12-16(-18)

pm in diameter, L/B 6-10(12). End wall

lenticular: two stellate chloroplasts each with

i large pyrenoid, close to the central nueleus.

Conjugation sclaruform; gametungial tube

incomplete, zygospore held in mucilave

between gametungral cells; zygospore spherical

pale golden. mesospore scorbiculate. 26-30 jm

in diameter.

Colleeted at Station $8, Hacks Lagoon

(Llevd, 15.1x,1982: ADU, AS53989). New

Caledonia.

This taxon keys to 4, carter’ in Kolkwitz

& Krieger (1941), but does not fil the descrip

rion there or in Czurda (1932) perfeetly; no

lateral conjugation was found in the Hacks

Lagoon miuterial, and the incomplete game-

tangial tube and envelope of mucilage ure not

mentioned in the original descriptions,

There was at least one further species ol

4yynema present in the samples, bul not in

a fertile state.

Spirogyra mirabilis (Hass.)

Kuetzing. Kolkwitz & Kriewer 1941: 426, figs 672,

673.

PIGS 3D-T

Filaments moderately browd; cells 28-32

em in-diameter. 1./B 2.5-7. end wall lenticular;

single chloroplast of 4% turns, with numerous

large pyrenoids; nucleus central, stellate.

Aplunospores (parthenospores?) in series,

spherical to ellipsvid, smooth walled, wolden

mesospore 28—34 * 2-45 pm: sporangiul cell

CHLOROPHYTA FROM BOOL LAGOON

228

wall sometimes with an arrested gamctangial

tube,

Collected at Station 8, Hacks Lagoon

(Lloyd, 15.ix.1982; ADU, AS53992). Also

known in South Australia from the Onka-

paringa River, Old Noarlunga, ford (Skinner

and Thamas, 14.x.1977, ADU, A48586). Cos-

mopolitan.

Spirogyra irregulariy Nacgeli.

Kolkwitz & Krieger, 1941: 349, fig. 486,

FIG. 3G, H

Filaments moderately broad; cells 24-30

pam in diameter, L/B 2-8, end wall lenticular,

chloroplasts 2-3, of 3-7 turns, with numerous

pyrenoids; nucleus central stellate.

Conjugation scalariform, gametangial tubes

cup-shaped and of almost equal halves, often

disposed away from the centre of the cells;

neither gametangial cell inflated; zygospore

smooth, slightly compressed ovoid, durk

yellow-brown, 30 * 75-85(90). pm.

Collected at Station 1, ibis rookery, Bool

Lagoon (Lloyd, 15.ix.1982; ADU, A53991)_

Cosmopolitan.

Spirogyra frigida Gay,

Kolkwitz, & Krieger 1941: 448, fig. 719,

FIG, 3 1,1)

Filaments narrow: cells (16) 18-23 am in

diameter, L/B 4-10; end wall replicate; chloro-

plast single, of S—9 turns, with numerous

pyrenoids; nucleus stellate, central,

Conjugate scalarifurm: gamcetangial tube

almost cylindrical, unegual, acceptor cell

inflitted towards the gametangial tube, zygo-

spore elliptical, smooth-walled, pale brown,

35 % JO-75 am.

Collevied at Station |, ibis roakery, Bool

Lagoon (Lloyd, 15ix.1982; ADU, AS53990),

Station, & Hacks Lagoon (Lleve, 154x.1982).

Cosmopolitan.

‘This species ts very close to the even mare

S. SKINNER

from which it differs by not showing lateral

eonjugation (Kolkwity & Krieger 1941),

There were three other species of Spire-

gvyra in the samples but they were not fertile

and could not be identified.

Only one desmid, a very small species of

Euastrum or Cosmariun. was found in the

samples.

Key ta Spirogyra species.

1, Aplanospores formed, uavresied pume-

tungial inbe somelimes present

aA esc cer oon Spirogyra mirabilis

Zygospores formed, Gametangial tube

nol arrested, always present 2

2, Vegetative cells 24-30 «em in dia

meter, end will lenticular: chloro.

plasts 23, of 3-7 lurns; ucceptor

eells cylindrical or nearly so, game

langial tubes equul Spirogyvre frrevularis

Vegelative cells 18-23 em in din

meter, end wall replicate; chloruplusl

single. of 5-9 turns; acceptor cells

inflated gumetangial tubes unequul

Spirogyra frigide

Discussion

This paper records whe presence of a small

number of Chlorophyta from the Bool Lagoott

system. ti is based on only two sets of col-

lections, and indicates that there is much yel

to be learned ubout the aleae of this system.

A more complete list of species and their

distributions must await further collections.

Comparison with other inland aquatic systems

in south-eastern South Australia and adjacent

areas of Victoria is nat possible beeause aa

published lists are available.

Ackoowledgments

Thanks are due to Dr K. FF. Walker ane

his. students, particularly Lance Lloyd, for pro-

viding the initix! collections and information

On water chernistry, and lo Misses F, Roberts

und K. Preece for the later sample fram the

widespread 8. inflata (Vaucher) Kuetzing — ibis rookery.

References

Baivey, F. M. (1898) Contributions to [he BoLb, HO. & Wyyeil M, P, (1978) Dirodnelion

Queensland Flora, Belay Bull. No, 15, 1-34,

tux in Ulvales. Part 1. Capseasiphon, Pervur-

saria, Blidingia, Enteromerpla, Opera Botnniva.

8(h): 1-140.

to the Aluae, Structure and Repradauctian (Pren-

live-Hall, Inc.: New Jersey).

Camrek, N, (1924) Freshwater Algae, da “Phints

prot New Caledon. J. Linn, Soe. Bor. 44

-68.

Fig, 3,

Veuelative cell,

spore.

tive cell.

D-F. Spirogyra mirabilis.

Zyxzuspore and conjugation cells.

F. Filament with ovoid and ellipsoid aplanospores,

H_ Filiments showing scaliriform conjugation and vygospores. IJ,

I, Fragment of flument showing conjugution cells in’ vegetative

AC, Zygnenui carteri. AJC. Filaments showing sculariform conjugation with zygospores. B.

D. VYegetutive cell, E.

Call with spherical aplauno

G-H. Spirceyra irrevilaris, G. Veteta-

Npironyea frigide

slate prior to eamele trunsfer, J.

CHLOROPHYTA FROM BOOL LAGOON

Czurpa, V. (1932) Zygnemales Vol. 9. In A.

Pascher Die Siisswasserflora von mitteleuropas

(Gustav Fisher: Jena).

GAUTIER-LIEVRE, L. (1963) Oedogoniacées Afri-

cains, Nova Hedw. 6, Plates 1-104.

(1964) Ocedogoniacées

Hedw. 7, 151-158.

Harpy, A. D. (1906) Freshwater algae of Vic-

toria, Hl. Viet. Nat., 23, 18-22, 33-42.

Ko.kwirz, R. & Kriecer, H. (1941) Zygnemales,

Vol. 13, Part. 2. fa L. Rabenhorst Krypto-

gamen-Flora von Deutschland und der Schweiz.

(Becker & Erler Kom,-Ges: Leipzig.)

Nova

Africains.

229

May, V. (1973) The algal genus Scenedesmus in

Australia. Contrib. N.S.W. Natl. Herb., 4, 431-

452.

Prescott, G. W. (1951) Algae of the Western

Great Lakes Area. Cranbrook Institute of

Science, Bulletin No. 31 Michigan.

—— & Scort, A. M. (1952) Some South Aus-

tralian desmids. Trans. R. Soc, S. Aust. 175,

55-69,

TirFany, L. H. (1924) Some new forms of Spiro-

gyra and Oedogonium. Ohio J. Sci., 24, 180-190.

TreFANy, L. H. (1930) The Ocdogoniaceae

(Columbus: Ohio).

Tura, D. (1974) An investigation of certain

Chaetophoracean algae. Beith Nova Hedw. 46,

1-155,

A NEW SPECIES OF NEPHRURUS (REPTILIA: GEKKONIDAE) FROM

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY CHRIS HARVEY

Summary

A new species of Knob-tailed Gecko from the mid-north of South Australia is described here as

Nephrurus deleani sp. nov. It is most like N. stellatus Storr, N. laevissimus Mertens and N.

vertebralis Storr, from which it differs mainly in caudal scalation and dorsal patterning. Notes on

habitat and aspects of biology are included.

A NEW SPECIES OF NEPHRURUS (REPTILIA: GEKKONIDAF,)

FROM SOUTEIT AUSTRALIA

by CHRIS HarvEy®

Summary

tralia. Trans. R. Soc. 8. Aust. 107(4), 231-235, 30 November, 1983,

A new species of Knod-tiiled Gecko from the mid-nerth of South Australia is described

here as Nephruruy deleani sp. nov. Wt is most like N. sfellatus Storr, N. laevisyinias Mertens

and N. vertebraliy Storr, from which it differs mainly in caudal scalation and dorsal pattern-

ing. Notes on habitat and aspects of biology ure included,

Kry Worbps; Nephruruy, taxonomy, Pernatly Lagoon, allopatric, Gekkonidae, Reptilia,

new specics.

Introduction

The gekkonid genus Nephruruy is widely

distributed throughout arid Australia and three

specics have been recorded from South Aus-

tralia, Nephrurus levis De Vis, the most wide

spread member of the genus, is found through-

out the State north of Port Augusta. Two

records also exist from the Dangali Conserva-

tion Park, approximately 80 km north of

Renmark.

Nephrurus stellatuy Storr extends westwards

from Eyre Peninsula to southern Western

Australia.

Nephrurus laevisyimuy Mertens oceurs in

the western half of South Australia, north of

the Trans Australia Railway and west of the

Stuart Highway (Fiz. 1).

In 1971 a juvenile specimen of Nephriaris

from Pernatty Liugeon was identified as

Nephrurus vertebralis Storr probably due to

the presence of a pale vertebral stripe which

extended from just behind the head to the

end of the tail.

Additional specimens from Pernatty Lagoon

represent a new species which is desertbed

here,

Materials and Methods

All material examined in this paper is depo-

sited in the following institutions: South Aus-

(tralian Museum Adeluide (SAM), Western

Australian. Museum Porth (WAM) and the

Museums ind Art Galleries of the Northern

Territory Darwin (NTM),

*20 Crozier “‘Verruce, Ouklands Park, S. Aust.

5046,

Distribution of the Genus Nephruras in

South Australi based on the records of the

South Australian Museum, triangles ~~ N,

deleani, closed circles = N. levis, open circles

- ON, laevissinias, stars N,. stellatus.

Fig. 1.

Specimens were measured with dial calipers

to the nearest 0.1 mm, following Storr (1968).

Measurements taken were: snout-vent length

(SVL), tail leneth (TL), head length (HL).

head width (HW), horizontal diameter of eye

(ED), length of ear aperture (EA). inter-

orbital distance (JOD), internostril distance

(1D), hindlimb length (HLL), Scale counts

reeorded Were: longitudinal rows of tubercles

(LRT), caudal annuli (CA), interorbitals (10).

Comparisons hetween some of these characters

ure recorded on Table 1. Standard deviations

are included for cach mean,

Nad

Nephrurus deleani sp. nov.

FIGS 1, 2, 3.

SAM R21868, adult female col-

24,iv.1981 by S. Delean 44 km

of Pimba, S.A, (31°31'S, 137°

Holotype:

lected on

south-east

08’E).

Diagnosis: A relatively large terrestrial gecko

with short, narrow, slightly depressed tail,

terminating in small knob. Dorsal colour

pattern highly variable, pale vertebral stripe

present in some juveniles.

Description of holotype:

Scalation; Head scales small, juxtaposed;

largest in occiput and interorbital region;

smallest in gular and postocular areas. Neck

with scattered, conical tubercles, smaller than

those on occiput. Upper labials 15, lower

labials 20; larger than surrounding scales.

Dorsal surface covered with small, granular

scales, uniformly intermingled with tubercles;

tubercles largest on sacrum, smaller than those

on occiptal and interorbital regions and sur-

rounded by scales of same size and shape as

those on rest of dorsal surface. Forelimbs

covered with small granular scales, inter-

spersed with a few small tubercles. Hindlimbs

covered with small, granular scales, inter-

spersed with large, conical tubercles most pro-

minent on thighs and slightly smaller than

tubercles on dorsal surface, Scales on ventral

surface uniformly small, Nat and juxtaposed.

Upper surface of tail covered with small

scales; 9 regular longitudinal rows of conical,

mucronate tubercles, smaller in diameter than

those on dorsum, pointing backwards and

surrounded by a ring of scales slightly larger

stg

Fig. 2. Nephrurus deleani sp, nov. in life.

‘Unlike other congeners,

C. HARVEY

than those on rest of upper caudal surface.

Caudal annuli 17.

Colouration: Dorsal ground colour light brown,

intermingled with dark brown-black areas,

with alternate fawn and dark brown transverse

bars (Fig. 2). Flanks spotted, sacrum predo-

minantly dark brown. Tubercles are brown

except those occurring on spots and transverse

bars, which are fawn. Ventral surface white.

Head light brown, intermingled with areas of

fawn and dark brown. Labials light brown.

Distinct short, thick fawn coloured bar, which

bends back slightly to form “V” on occiput.

Second bar runs across neck; third pale bar

originating at neck, distinctly “VW” shaped and

extending back diagonally to mid-dorsal line.

Dorsal surface of tail predominantly dark

brown, Tubercles white, except for a few

dark brown ones on proximal annuli. Under-

surface of tail off-white.

Holotype measurements (in mm): SVL 79.3;

TL 27.2; HL 24.5: HW 19.4; HLL 35.4;

ED 5.6; EA 2.4; IOD 3.3; ID 3.5,

Etymology: This species is named for Mr

Steven Delean, who collected the holotype

and most of the paratypes.

Distribution

Specimens of Nephrurus deleani have been

collected only from the Acacia vegetated sand

hills immediately north and west of Pernatty

Lagoon, despite extensive searching to the

north and to the south as far as Uro Bluff

(32°08'S, 137°36'E). N. deleani is allopatric

with the closely related N. stellatus.

Variation

There are 4 paratypes, all are from 44 km

south of Pimba, S.A. (31°31’S, 137°08’E):

WAM R80751, an adult. female, 23.iv.1982,

C. Harvey and §, Delean; SAM R21 865-66,

juvenile females, 24.iv.1981, S. Delean; SAM

R21867, juvenile male, 25.1v.1982, M. Francis,

specimens of N.

deleani show considerable variation in dorsal

colour patterning, not only between adults, but

also between adult and juvenile specimens.

Even the most consistent features of dorsal

patterning—the fawn transverse bars and the

spotted flanks—are absent or highly modified

in some N. deleani.

Juveniles differ from adults in having a

much darker background colour, with more

distinct body markings, Of 32 juvenile N.

NEW NEPHRURUS FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

TABLE 1. Comparison of 6 characteristics between the five species examined,

Character

TL/SVL HL/SVL 10 DT LRT CA

N. deleani 35.8 + 3.3 30.0 + 2.4 §.2£0.7 single 92+ 0.4 15.7 + 0.8

(27.6-40.2) 24.5-33.6) (4-6) (9-10) (15-17)

n= 14 n= 14 n= n=6 n=6

N. stellatus 30.14£3.3 309449 5.1 £0.7 rosette-shaped 5.7 + 0.5 11.2 + 1.2

(23.1-46.0) (23.1-35.2) (4-7) (5-7) (9-14)

n= 22 n= 22 n= 46 n= 31 n= 32

N. vertebralis 350420 29541,2 SL 0.3 single 78+ 0.4 18.3 + 0.8

(32.5-37.8) (28.3-31.2) (5-6) (7-8) (17-19)

n=5 n=5 n=9 n=8 n=8

N. laevissimus 33.4434 330+3.5 6.1 = 0.6 absent 6.7 + 0.4 18.3 + 1.8

(28.8-37.4) (29,.9-43.3) (5-7) (5-7) (13-19)

n== 12 n= 14 n==21 n= 18 n= 14

N. levis 449+49 3294433 47+0.7 single 8.3 + 0.8 17.2 + 1.5

(31.0-60.2) (28.0-40.8) (4-8) (6-10) (12-21)

== 62 n= 94 n= 94 n= 62 n= 62

deleani collected, only 3 have shown an ob-

vious vertebral stripe; in none of these is the

stripe as wide, or as obvious as it is in N.

vertebralis.

Comparisons with other congeners

The dorsal colour pattern of N. deleani dis-

tinguishes it from all congeners.

N. deleani differs from N. levis by having a

much shorter, narrower, less depressed tail

(Table 1). The fore and hind limbs of N.

levis are more heavily tuberculated than in N.

deleani.

N. deleani is distinguished from N. verte-

braliy in having more longitudinal rows of

caudal scales (Table 1), a shorter ear slit,

fewer tubercles on the fore and hind limbs and

complete absence of a vertebral stripe in adult

specimens,

The absence of tubercles on the dorsal sur-

face, a lower number of longitudinal rows of

tubercles on the tail and differences in dorsal

patterning distinguish N. laevissimus from N.

deleani (Table 1).

N, deleani has more caudal annuli and more

longitudinal rows of caudal tubercles (Table

1) than N. stellatus. It further differs from N.

stellatus by having dorsal tubercles surrounded

by a ring of scales similar in size to those

occurring between the tubercles, rather than

larger (Fig. 3).

Habitat

The area occupied by N. deleani is isolated

geographically from other Nephrurus popula-

tions. The high number of salt lakes that

encircle the area, together with the presence

Fig. 3. Dorsal tubercle pattern of left, N. stellatus

and right, N. deleani.

of the Gawler Ranges to the south-west would

effectively prevent interbreeding between N.

deleani and N. laevissimus and N. stellatus. N.

deleani has been collected only on the crests

of sand dunes that are devoid of Triodia and

are dominated by Acacia aneura and A. ligu-

lata. N, deleani habitat is more similar to that

preferred by N. vertebralis (Pianka & Pianka,

1976) than to that of N. stellatus, which

occurs exclusively in Triodia-Eucalyptus asso-

ciations.

Notes on biology

In common with other congeners, N. deleani

will readily feed upon a variety of insects

and arachnids in captivity, with adult speci-

mens primarily consuming small geckos. Rhyn-

choedura ornata, Giinther and Diplodactylus

damaecus (Wermuth), which are sympatric

with N. deleani, probably form a large part

of the diet of adult specimens.

Only limited data are available on repro-

ductive habits. One female (SVL 95 mm,

weight 11.7 g) deposited 2 eggs, measuring

254

22 * (2 mm and 22 % 13 mm, on 3.2198)

Another female (SVL 92 rom, weight 16.5 4)

collected by the author on 24iv1982) won

tuined two cays which had still not been laid

by 18,1982.

Material examines:

South Austitiaz—

Neplirweus leviss SAM RIS2 (Ondtodatta),

SAM R707, RS7TH (Wynbrim RSI: SAM

RIS&4A-B (Tarcnoliat: SAM RIYVA2ZA-B (Smith-

field—toeality doubtful): SAM RI963) (Murn

peowie}: SAM R1968 Thetween Faeracd yin

Barrow Ranges), SAM RIQSS Chelween Oolden

und Fowlers Bay): SAM R3109A—-B i kroubetla)

SAM R3709 (Muloorina Siationt: SAM RAZYR

(16 ki south of Cadeiga WS): SAM R4902 A400

(Lake Coungie); SAM R5443 0 (allots

Springs); SAM RS5503 (Calhibourm Stalion): SAM

R75S56-R7S66 (Musgrave Park)) SAM R7S86

(Itari Rocks): SAM RISSK) ROOTO (Part

August); SAM RISITL (Hesso); SAM RId6a1

(20 km ews of Ammuroodinonn Hil Granite

Downs Stuliun); SAM RIARKU (Glenmuaynie

Bore): SAM R1I4555A-B8 (22 km West-north-west

of Moralana HS): SAM Ri5498, RIB7ZS (10 kim

north-west of Frid: SAM RI727% 9 (Wastell’s

Damn, Billi Kadina Stationd; SAY RIT296

(Paiterson’s Dam, Billa Kalina Stution) SAM

R17807 (Wooliana Station); SAM RtES0A9 LSinip-

son Desert Conservation Park), SAM RI8Z03

(approximately 15 km south-west of Wyata Lake l:

SAM R18204 (approximately 85 km north of

Wyola Lake): SAM R18238 (approximately 20 km

north of Wyola Lake): SAM RL9202 (Kallakoopuh

Creek}: SAM RI9213 C8 km north of Kulla-

koopah Creek); NTM R020 (100 kat toanth of

Renmark)

Neplirarus laevivsinings SAM R66], RBS,

Ri6S3A (Ooldea); SAM R3298 (30 km south of

Emu): SAM RI40S3 (Tarcoolii: SAM Ri4632

(20 km cust of Ammoareadinnn Hill, Granite

Downs Station: SAM RI4987A-D (7 km west of

Immarny RS); SAM RIS497B C10 km north-west

of Baw); SAM RISSA6A-B (103 km west of

Vokes Hill Corner); SAM RIS6O9 (12 kim narth-

west of Wurcdarlie, Parlkulidyo Rockholey SAM

RIS792 (9 kov cast of Murdlinen): SAM R1ATEL

(Wilgena Stitiond; SAM RI7462 (North-Wes!

Conservation Park); SAM RI7490 (45.7 km south

of Vokes Hill): SAM RI8221-2 (approximately

85 km north of Wyola Luke): SAM RES241

(approximately 20 km south-west of Wola Lake)

Nephrarus stetlatus: SAM R6AL (Kiclpa, West

Const): SAM R19464 (Barings locality doubtful):

SAM R3209A.D (Oolden Soak); SAM RAZR

(Ceduna: SAM R146! (Port Niet): SAM

RI24)5A-C ( Buscambe’s Well National Parke:

SAM Ri3438 (Hinck’s Natioaul Purkd: SAM

R1374h (Childara Rockhole): SAM Ridt54A-H

(Tureooluy SAM R1id056A (Oolden); SAM

Rids61A-B (approximately 30 km north-cust of

Cc. HARVEY

Cowell); SAM RISZUSA BOCIK kin’ north-enst of

Wirrtllads SAM RiSttl@A-€ (23 kre nord of

Kuianibhy Mission), SAM R1S384 (30 kim west

of Clnidacs Rockholel: SAM RISTIGA RK.

RIFTS (GS kin west of Meelera Roekhole}:

SAM RI7663 ('Melaleuen’, GU km west of

Kiinkig: SAM RIT9Sd (hake Gites Conserve

Non BParkis SAM RIESSIS—6) (Punev Station.

Gawler Ranges: SAM RIVSO7 YO (60 km south

west ah Whiulla).

Wesiern Australis —

Nepliuris veriebraliss WAM RSSOO (Wadern-

ary) WAAM RI3TT2 (Yuin Stationt;s WAM

KART I2 (Momridge Lakes open): WAM R4o2d2

fupproximaely 40 kan aust of Paynes Find);

WAM RSS023 140 km south of ¥Yianietharrad,

WAM R538a8 (27 hin cast of PL, Sunday, Great

Viclonia Desens WAM R53574 (8 hm east of

ML, Sundiayh WAM R7O120 i prestumubie 7.5 kin

north of Dandunigs HSis WAM R716 CLO km

south of Leanorn)

Northern Territory :—

Nephiruviis leviss NTM R693 (Tansami Siune-

luiry) NEM R76 (6.5 km nornh of Alice

Springs}; NUM RIO CLOT. km west of Yuen

dani; WIM R409 (31 kim west of Mt Doreen),

NIM R410 133.6 kin west of Ml Doreen): NIM

Riddh (224 kin’ west of Yuendumuk NIM

RI¢KR-1500, RISTI, RITAT (between JOR ant

330 km west of Rabbit Plait Rowdhouse); NUM

RIS3S, R566. RIS (Horden Hill, Granites):

NPM RIS9S 97, RIGI9 RISYE (Muryyale),

NIM RI695 (Northern ferciory): NPM R107.

RIS44—I847 (bemween do okins und 20 km east of

Miutyvalod: STM R2052 (west af Yuendumu):

NIM R2466, R3204 (Alice Springs); NEM

R620 (30) km evs) of Three Wavsi NTM RUS4A

(90 kim vast of Three Ways),

Acknowledgments

Dum yratelul to Dr G. M. Storr (Western

Australian Museum, Me CG. FF Gaw

(Museums and Art Gallertes of the Northern

Territory) and Dr TF. DBD. Sehwaner (South

Austealian Museum) far the loan of Neple

ruris Specnmens in their care.

} thank Terry Schwuner and Brian Miller

who «ave consiructive comments snd eri-

vesms of the manuscript and Mark Francis,

Brett Leane and Andrew Mower for their

assistunee in the fieht. | ant particularly graiv-

ful to Steven Delewn lor his assistance in

both the field and laboratory anu for permis.

sian te use bis unpublished data in Table 4.

{ thank Winnie Feijen for typing the muanu-

serpl and Jan Haughton, Sue Hamilion, Kerry

Regat and Keith Richards for their encourage-

ment and assistance throughout the project.

NEW NEPHRURUS FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 235

References

Coacer, H. G. (1979) Reptiles and Amphibians

of Australia. (A. H. & A. W. Reed: Sydney).

KINGHORN, J. R, (1924) Reptiles and batrachians

from south and south-west Australia. Rec. Aust,

Mus. 14(3), 166-167.

PIANKA, E. R. & PIANKA, H. D. (1976) Compara-

tive Ecology of Twelve Species of Nocturnal

Lizards in the Western Australian Desert.

Copeia, 1976 (1), 125-142.

Storr, G. M. (1963) The gekkonid genus Neph-

rurus in Western Australia, including a new

species and three new subspecies. J. Roy. Soc.

West. Aust. 46(3) 85-90.

(1968) Nephrurus stellatus, a new species

of knob-tailed gecko from southern Australia.

West. Aust. Nat. 10(1), 180-182.

waite, E. R. (1929) The Reptiles and Amphibians

of South Australia. (Government Printer:

Adelaide).

THE FROG FAUNA OF THE BARKLY TABLELAND, NORTHERN

TERRITORY

BY MICHAEL J. TYLER, MARGARET DAVIES & ANGUS A. MARTIN

Summary

Ten species of frogs are reported from the Barkly Tableland and an additional species is considered

likely to occur there. All museum voucher specimens and localities are cited.

THE FROG FAUNA OF THE BARKLY TABLELAND, NORTHERN TERRITORY

by Micuacgh. J, TyLer*, Magcaret Davitst & ANGUS A, MARTINT

Summary

‘TyLee, M. J., Davies, M. & Marry, A. A. ()983) ‘Phe frag fauna of the Barkly Tableland,

Northern Territory. Tray. R. Soc, 8. Aust. 107(4), 237-242, 30 November, 1983.

Ten species of frogs are reported from the Barkly Tableland and an alditional species

is considered likely to occur there. All museum voucher specimens and Jocalities ure cited,

Key Worps: Barkly Tableland, frogs, distribution.

Introduction

The Barkly Tableland of the ‘Northern

Territory is poorly defined as a physiographic

entity, For the purposes of groundwater

studies Randal (1967) adopted arbitrary limits

bounding an arca of approximately 102 000

km of various soils including blacksoil plains,

These plains are bisected by major crecks

which drain predominantly towards the south

via the Georgina River, and constitute the

northert! boundary of the Eyrean drainage

system, ‘The original vegetation has been modi-

fled by grazing, and the plains now principally

support low grasses, whereas the watercourses

are flanked hy cucalypts. The region is charac-

terised by very high summer temperatures and

a low annual rainfall which often falls in a

few days. Heavy summer rains result from

depressions following cyclonic activity to the

north of the area.

Knowledge of the vertebrate fauna of the

area depends heavily upon W. H, Stalker who

was employed on Alexahdria Station as a

collector by Sic William Ingram and J, Forrest

in 1905. His callections were deposited in the

British Muscum (Natural History); the mam-

mals were reported by ‘Thomas (1906), and

the birds by theram (1907)

Stalker also assembled a sinall collection of

frogs, but it was not reported as a single nit,

and Subsequently it was dispersed ta various

institutions, However details have appeared in

the literature in a number of publications.

Loveridge (1935) reported Cyelordna ans.

tralis ('Chiraleples australis’) and Literia

albosutraa ("Mitalysiy albognitatny'). Parker

(1940) deseribed C. eultripes and Unpcroleta

orientaliy (“Glauertia orientalis’), and reported

C. aastralis, but questioned the identity of Z,

G.P.O. Bow 498, Adehide, § Aust. S001,

j Depirtment of Zoology, University of

bourne, Parkville, Vie, 3052.

Mel.

dlooguttata. Tyler (1974) reidentified the dis-

puted specimen as a topotypice C. cultripes.

f. L. Troughton and J. J. Fletcher of the

Australian Museum Visited Alexandria Station

in 1934 und obtained turther frogs, but their

collection also was vot reported as a unit,

From their materiul Copland (1957) reparted

Literta roihii (“Ayla peroitit’) aod L. rubella

CVyla ribella’).

Moore (196)) reported L, caerulea (“Hyla

caerulea”) trom amongst specimens collected

by Stalker, whilst Tyler and Martin (1977)

Low and D. F. Gartside at Alroy Downs, west

of Alexandria Station.

‘Tyler, Davies and Marin (1981) suppressed

Glauertid Loveridge and referred G. orientalis

to Uperoleia Gray, They conchided that other

records of the species from the Northern

Territory were based on undescribed species,

and thal orientalis should be restricted to the

Alexandria Downs holotype and paratype and

the single paratype taken at Groote Eylandt

in the Gulf of Carpentaria,

In summary. the currently reported frog

launy of the Barkly ‘Tableland comprises €

austaliy, C. cultripes, Litavia caerulea, 1.

rothii, Lh. rubella and Uperoleia orientalis.

In December 19ST we visited the Barkly

Tableland to collect frogs and, particularly, to

attempt to obtain lopotypre OG. orientalis, Here

we report the species collected, and we also

assembled other data to permil an assessment

ol the nature and diversity of the frog fauna.

Materials and Methods

The specimens reported here are depasited

in Various institutions abbreviated ws follows.

AM (Australiin Museum), AMNH (American

Museum of Natural History), UAZ (Depart-

ment of Zoology, University of Adehude),

BMNH (British Museum, Natural History),

CAWC (Central Australian Wildhite Cal-

lection, Conservation Commission of the

238 M. J. TYLER, M. DAVIES & A, A. MARTIN

135° 136°

7°?

18° BF se

BRUNETTE

MIT TIEBAH

19° 19°

MICROWAVE

REPEATER

STATION

20° VE 20°

ROADHOUSE AVON DOWNS

oO 50

| eee

136° 30' 137° 138°

Fig. 1. Barkly Tableland, Northern Territory, showing localities mentioned in the text.

FROG FAUNA OF BARKLY TABLELAND

N,T., Alice Springs), KU (Museum of Natural

History, University of Kansas), MCZ

{Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard

University), NTM (Northern Territany

Museum), SAM (South Australian Museum),

Letters preceding reyistraion numbers iden-

tify institutional catalogues.

Our collection was assembled during the

period 14-17,xi.81 and our collecting sites

and other localities cited here are shown in

Figure 1. On occasions we heard the male

cally of other species but failed to locate

voucher specimens; in cach of these cases, we

were in agreement about the identity of the

calling individuals.

literature records reporting species from

“Alexandria Station” are too imprecise ta per-

mit the assumption that they oveur on the

Barkly “Tableland. When Stalker obtained his

collection Alexandria Station extended from

what is tow the Barkly Highway in the south

for 500 km to the Gulf of Carpentaria, far

beyond the northern boundary of the Barkly

Vableland (Figure 1). ‘Therefore we have

sought to confirm the existence of such species

within the houndary, In instances: where

Voucher specimens or voice records are not

available, we have extrapolated from our data

on habitat requifenyents elsewhere in the

Northern Territory, in particular on the black-

soil plains at Newcastle Waters,

pH measufements were obtained ‘with a

Jenco Model 609 portable pH meter. Water

temperatures were recorded with a Dipitron

Model 4706 digital thermometer or Schutheiss

0-50°C rapid-reading thermometer.

Species account

Family: HYLIDAE.

Cyclorana australis (Gray)

Locality Reeerds: Alexandria Station—Loveridve

(1935), Parker (1940), Tyler & Murtin (1975);

22 km N of Alexandria Station—AM R11351,

11358; Anthony Lagoon—NTM 3632; Brunette

Downs—NTM R3663, 3675-76; Tableland High-

way, 4 km S of Anthony Lagoon/Brunetie Downs

boundiry—NTM 4797-99.

Camments: We did not locate any specimens

but the Idcality records suggest a widespread

distribution on the Barkly Tableland,

Cyclorana cultripes Parker

Leeality Reeords: Alexindria Station. -Parket

(1940), ‘Tyler (1967); Alroy Downs—Tyler &

Murtin (1977); Avon Downs Police Siption—

NTM R9731-49; 5 km SW af Alroy Downs

Station—NTM -RYRRI-90, SAM R22490-%8;

239

Freweni—NITM

9645-71.

Comments: Qn |5 December we collected 11

recently metamorphosed trogs amongst damp

leaf litter within 0.5 m of the edge of a newly

R5448-62, 8434-36, 9625-26,

constructed dam approximately 5 km SW of

Alroy Downs Stalion. The speciniens range in

snout to vent length 15.4-18.2 mm, and the

existence of the trogs was indicated by activity

in the water where we found 10 dytiscid

beetles: Eretes anstralis CErichson) eating a

apecimen. A daytime water temperature of

35.2°C was recorded ut the site; the pH was

6,98,

Analysis of the stomach contents of nine of

the juvenile frogs showed a large proportion

of Collembota in the dict together with small

beetles, flies, spiders and mites.

We heard a single specimen calling an

14.41.81 from «4 temporary pool approxi-

mately 500 m north of the Barkly Highway,

at.a site 1.5 km south of Microwave Repeater

Station 8502 and 5 km cast of Soudan Out-

station, Alexandria Station,

Cyclerana platycephalus (Giinther)

Locality Records: No, 26 Bore, Alray Downs—

NTM 9711-16; Dimmurra Roadhouse-—-NTM

8609 § km S of Dunmarra—NTM 3598-5604,

9674.

Cammenty: The series consists of 34 adult

specimens. This specics has not been reported

from the Northern Territory since its first

collection by the Horn Expedition at Charlotte

Waters in 1895 (Spencer 1896), However it

was taken at the same locality by M. Gillam

and C. Horner on 22,ii,71 (SAM 16921; 4

specimens), The new localities represent a

northern range extension of the species of

up ta 1500 km.

Tyler (1978, Fiz, 14) plotted the geographic

boundaries of the specimens then available in

all Australian museums, and demonstrated that

the range of the species is Jess extensive than

supposed by Barkey & Grigg (1977) and

Cogser (2979) and that it apparently com-

prises two allopatric populations, One is

centred upon the Pilbara of Western Australia,

and the other occupies u roughly triangular

black, ranging across southwestern Queensland,

northwestern New South Wales and north:

eastern South Australia, and just enters the

Northern Territory at Charlotte Waters.

The location of specimens at Alroy Downs

and Dunmarra so far north of the existing

240

eastern population, suggests that the Barkly

Tableland population is a third isolate.

Literia caerulea (White)

Larality, Records; Alexindria Station—Moore

(1961); Anthony Lagoon—NTM R3632; Brunette

Downs—NTM R3663, 3675-76; Tableland High-

way, 4 km S of Anthony Lagoon/Branette Downs

boundary—NTM 5797-99.

Comments: We did not locate specimens, but

we heard one calling from the conservatory

at Alroy Downs Homestead on 16.xii,81.

Litoria rathii (de Vis)

Locwlity Records, Alexandria Station—Copland

¢19S7).

Comments; Copland (1957) reported a spec

met (as H. peronil) collected by Troughton &

Fletcher in 1930, This represents the southern-

most record of the species in the N.T. On the

Rankine River at Ranken Store we heard a

Sinule call From a distance of several hundred

metres that we attributed to L. rerAti, but it

wis not repeated, and we were unable to con-

firrn the presence of the species in the area.

It could be expected to occur on the northern

partion of the Barkly Tableland.

Litoria rubella (Gray)

Leeality Records: Alexandria Station —AM

Rt1355-57; Copland (1957); 22 km N_ of

Alexandria Station —~AM R11351. 11353; Brunette

Downs—NTM R3664.

Comments; We heard this species On 14,411.81

calling from vegetation beside a temporary

pool approximately S00 m north of the Barkly

Highway, 1.5 km south of microwave Repeater

Station 8502, which is. 5 km east of Soudan

Outstation, Alexandria Station. We also heard

the species calling from trees. in the flooded

cent to the abandoned Ranken Store, approxi-

mately 120 km north of the Barkly Highway

(Pig. 1).

Family: LEPTODACTYLIDAE

Neobatrachus aquilonius Tyler, Davies &

Martino

Locality Records; Frewena Roadhouse,

Hichway—NTM 9628-44,

Camiments: This. recently described species has

hot been teported fram the N.T., but the geo-

graphic gap between the present site and the

records from the Kimberley, W.A. is. bridged

by specimens taken at Tennant Creek by J.

Field (SAM RSORKG-87) and in the Tyanami

Desert hy M, Cullam and 1, Andrews (SAM

Barkly

M.J. TYLER, M. DAVIES & A, A, MARTIN

R23474), The Frewena series was collected

by G. Gow and P. Horner on 6,ii.1981 in a

small puddle on the floor of a drained swim-

ming pool. Every specimen exhibits damage

to hands and feet consistent with the frogs

trying to burrow into the hard surface.

Damage to the fourth toe prevents the use

of foot length as a diagnostic character dis-

tinguishing the species from WN. censralis

(Parker) (Tyler et al. 1981) However the

other external morphological features ate con-

sistent with N. aqudlonins (Table 1),

Taste lt. Morphometric comparisons of Neo-

Batrachns aquilonius from Western Australia ane

Northern Territory,

Frewena, W.A,

NT. (types)

ml 17 18

S-V (dt) 46.3-49.8 mm 47.9-53,9 mm

S-V (22) 46.4-55.6 min 452.2-59.0 mn

TI/S-V 0.30-0,37 0.29_0.35

E-N/IN 1.08-1.31 0.93-1.31

Nataden nichallsi Parker

Locality Record: Barkly Highway between Fre-

wena Roadhouse and Three-Ways—NTM R534:

60.

Conmients: The inelusiol of this species in

the Barkly Tableland fauna is: based on the

assumption that it oceurs further cast than this

record, which may be beyond the customarily

recognised western boundary of the area,

Ranidella deverticola Liem & Ingram

Locality Records: Anthony Lagoon.—Tyler ef al.

(198ta) Avon Downs—NTM R9730,

Comments: The existence of (his species at the

Elliot-Neweastle Waters area (Tyler ef al..

198ta), nt Avon Downs near the Queensland

border, and at the intermediate locality of

Anthony Lagoon indicates that it is probably

assucitted with permanent water throughout

the Barkly Tableland.

Uperaleia orientalis (Parker)

Leeality Record: Alexandria Station—Parker

(1940), ‘Pyler etal (19816),

Comments: The type locality is “Alexandria

Station” which at the date of collection (1905)

extended as far north as the Gull of Carpen-

larin. Two paratypes are topetypie: the third

is from Growie Eylandt in the Gulf of Car

pentiria. We have examined the serics and

consider that all are conspecific, We believe

that it is unlikely that the same Uperoleie

FROG FAUNA OF BARKLY TABLELAND

species would occur on such diverse sites as

Groote Eylandt and the blacksoil plains. and

therefore we conclude that the type locality is

situated in the Gulf country perhaps adjacent

to Groote Eylandt, It is unlikely that the

species occurs on the Barkly Tableland.

Uperoleia traciyderma Tyler, Davies & Martin

Locality Records: AMNH. 114049-50, KU 192133-

4, NTM R9887-8, SAM R22336-48, UAZ A622,

Rankine River at Ranken Store, Alexandria

Stulion, N.T., 16.s11,81; SAM R22325-35, UAZ

A621, Barkly Highway. 500 m N of Microwave

Repeater 8502, Soudan Outstation, Aleariundria

Station, N.T,, L6-xi.k1; CAWC R3676, Brunette

Downs, 23.v.77; CAWC AIB& (2 specimens) 24

km S of Wallhallow Homestead.

Comments: We described this species (Tyler

et al, 1\98la) from material collected at New-

castle Waters on a floodplain approximately

130 km southwest of the northern boundary

of the Barkly Tableland, We encountered the

species at the first two locations described

above, ‘These localitics extend the known peo.

graphic range of the specics approximately 500

km southeastwards; its presence in the Rankine

River indicates that it probably also extends

into western Queensland. We have located

additional representatives (listed) that had

been misidentified previously.

Our series consists of 36 adult males rang-

ing in snout to vent length 19.3-23.8. tm,

Limnodynastes spenceri Parker

Camments: Although this species has not been

reported [rom the Barkly Tableland and was

not heard or seen by us, ity extremely wide

distribution in the arid zone of W.A.. N.T, and

Queensland supports Our assumption thal i

occurs there.

Barkly Tableland frog fauna

Despite the limited variety of habitats

within the Barkly ‘Tableland there is a nur

241

prisiugly rich frog fauna. Opportunities to

locate specimens are rare and generally fol-

low heavy rain,

As a result of our review the frov favoa

known to occur in the area has been increased

from six to 10 or 11 species. UW/peroleia orien-

falis is considered ta occur outside the geo-

graphic area, and is deleted from the former

list. Species marked below with an asterisk

have not been reported previously,

Hylidae

Cyclorana australis

C. cultripes.

€ platyeeplialas®

Litevia caerulea

I, rothit

L. rubella

Leptodactylidae

Neobatrachus aguilanius”

Notaden niclialls!*

Ranidella deserticula*

Uperoleia trachyderina®

?Limnoadynasies spenceri*

Acknowledgments

This investigation was supported m part by

an ARGS grant to M.J.T., and the field

studies were undertaken with the permission

of the N.T. Wildlife Commission. We are

deeply indebied to Bruce McRae (Tennant

Creck Council) for invaluable assistatree in

the preparation of our field studies, John

Ohlsen (Alexandria Station) and Jim Perry-

man (Alroy Downs Station) provided other

assistance,

We thank the Australian National Univer-

sity for aecess 10 a four-wheel drive vehicle.

and Ansen Airlines for generous aid to our

transportation needs, Keith Walker (Depart-

ment of Zoolovy. University of Adelaide)

identified the dytiscids, and Shane Parker

(South Australian Museum) provided valuable

advice on data sources.

References

Corranp, 8, J, (1957) Australian tree-frogs of the

venus Hyla, Proc Linn, Soc. N.S.W, 82, 9-108.

INGRAM, C. (1807) On the birds of the Alexandra

Distrigl, North Territory of South Australia,

this, Series 9, 1, 387-415,

Loverinar, A. (1933) A few gets and three

few species of crinine frogs from Australia,

Oceas, Pup, Boston Soe. Nat, Hist, 8, 89-94,

Moore, J. A. (1961) The frogs of eastern New

South Wales. Bull, Aim, Mus. Nar Mist, 24,

149.386,

Parkor, H.W. (1940) The Australasian frogs of

the aaly Leptodactylidac, Nevwit, Zool 42.

16,

RANDAL, M, A. (1967) Groundwater in the Barkly

Tublelund, N.T. Bull. Bur, Miner. Resour. Geol.

Geophys. 91, WL pm

Australia presented to the National Museum hy

Sir Wm. Ingram. Kt. and the Hon, John Far-

test. Proc, Zovl, Sac, London 47, 536-543.

Trex, M. J. (1974) The systematic position and

geographic «distribution of the Australian frog

Chiroleptes alhopattatus Guother. Proc. RB. Sue.

Old 85, 27-32.

~ Davins, M2 & Martin, A, A. (T98Tn) Ans.

tralian frogs of the leptodactyhd genus Upere-

leja Gray. Aust, J. Zvol., Suppl, Ser. (79), 164,

242 M. J. TYLER, M. DAVIES & A, A. MARTIN

. & (1981b) Frog fauna of the , & (1976) Taxonomic studies of some

Northern Territory: new distributional records Australian leptodactylid frogs of the genus

and the description of a new species. Trans. R. Cyclorana Steindachner. Rec. S. Aust. Mus.

Soc. S. Aust..105, 149-154. 17(15), 261-276.

» & Martin, A. A. (1975) Australian lepto-

dactylid frogs of the Cyclorana australis com-

plex. Ibid. 99, 93-99,

ADDITIONS TO THE FROG FAUNA OF THE NORTHERN TERRITORY

BY MICHAEL J. TYLER. GRAEME F. WATSON & MARGARET DAVIES

Summary

Cyclorana vagitus, Limnodynastes tasmaniensis and Uperoleia borealis are reported from the N.T.

for the first time. All occur in the north of the territory. The structure of the mating call of C.

vagitus is described and figured.

ADDITIONS TO THE FROG FAUNA OF THE NORTHERN TERRITORY

by Micuasn J. TyLer*, GRAeME F, Watson? & MarGsaret DaviEs®

Summary

‘Tytve, M, J. Warson, G. F, & Davis, M. (1983) Additions to the frog fauna of the

Northerty Tertitory, Trans. R. Soe. &. Aust. 107(4), 243-245, 30th November, 1983.

Cyelorana yuvitns, Linmodynastes rasmaniensis and Uperoleia borealis are reporied from

the N-T. for the first time. Alloccur in the northwest of the terrilory, The structure of the

nating call of C. vagitus is described and figured.

Kuy Worps: new records, frogs, Northern Territory, call, audiospectrogram, distribution.

Introduction

Within the last decade the known frog fauna

of the Northern Territory has increased sub-

stantially, Tyler (1976) listed only 25 species

whereas six years later the total had risen to

36 (‘Tyler 1982). Whilst the latter work wus

in press Ranidella deserticofa Liem & Ingram

was reported from the N.T., and a further

species (Uperoleia trachyderma Tyler, Davies

& Martin) was described from near Newcastle

Waters (Tyler ef al. 1981a), In addition,

Tyler, Davies & Martin (1983) reported the

presence, on the Barkly Tableland, N.T,, of

Neohatrachus aquiloniuy Tyler, Davies &

Martin, formerly known only from W.A.

In February 1982 we travelled by road

from Darwin to Halls Creck, W.A., via Kathe-

rinc and Kununurra, and returned by the same

roule. Uhree of the species collected on the

Victoria Highway betwen Katherine and Kun-

uourra represented additions to the fauna of

the N.T, Here we report these collections and

provide additional biological data on them,

Material and Methods

The specimens reported here are lodged in

the collections of the South Australian

Museum (SAM) and Department of Zoology,

University of Adelaide (UAZ).

Methods of measurement follow Tyler

(1968), Osteolopical data were obtained from

cleared and Alizarin Red and Alcian blue

stained preparations using the technique of

Dingerkus and Uhler (1977).

Male mating culls were recorded with a

Sony tape recorder (TC-510-2) and a Beyer

M&& dynamic microphone, at a tape speed of

19 em/sec, Wel-bulb air temperatures, mea-

* Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide,

Ron 498 G.P.O., Adelaide, 8. Aust, 5001,

f* Department of Zoology, University of Mel-

bourne, Parkville, Vic. 34152,

sured close to the calling site of males, and

water temperatures were obtained with 4

Schultheis quick-reading thermometer.

Calls were analysed using a stereo tape

recorder {Revox B 7711), a sound specto-

eraph (Kay Model 6061-B Sona-Graph),. a

digital processing oscilloscope (Norland 3001/

OMX) and a direct tecording oscilloscope

(Visilight).

Family: HYLIDAE

Cyclorana vagitus Tyler, Davies & Martin,

198]

Material SAM R23858-61 Newry Sm, NT,

28 km B of W.A. border, 83.11.1982.

We located a male and amplectant pair in a

shallow pool less than 2 m in diameter sur-

rounded by tall grasses, adjacent to the roud.

The female had a snout-vent length of 44.4

mm and the two males 43.1 and 45,5 mm

respectively, These measurements sre within

the ranges of the type series (Tyler et al,,

1981b),

Before the amplectant pair was formed both

males were calling from sites at the edge of the

water, Analysis of the mating call is based on

TABLE 1. Sitenyity of sennd at each frequency

band within the call of Cyclorana vagitus relative

to the intensity at the apparent carrier frequency

(ce, 2500 Hz) based on the farmulu |. = 20 Log

Vear Where y ~~ peak voltage generated by each

frequency bad determined fram Fourier analysis

using a digital processing escilloscope,

SAM R23860 SAM R2386L

Relative Relative

Frequency Intensity Frequency Intensity

(Hz) (dB) (Hz) (dB)

820 —*| 850 = a

1221 - 20 1279 23

1631 10 1709 —A5

2041 +6 2129 —1l

2451 0 7549 D

2N61 —f 2988 et to

3262 —2 a —

244

detailed examination of one call of each

individual; wet-bulb air temperature at the

calling sites was 26.0°C. Values for call

characteristics of the two males are: duration,

26() and 310 msec; pulse repetition rate, 408-

412 and 419-423 pulses/see; number of pulses,

approximately 107 and 130, In both indivi-

duals there is a number of frequency bands

varying in relative intensity (Table 1), Deter-

mination of the apparent carrier frequency,

based on osciliographic analysis, shows a, shift

in frequency during the call of the first male

from 2041 to 2564 Hz and in the call of the

second male from 2688 Hz to 2564 Hz.

On the basis of these analyses, the complex

call of C. vagituy (Fig. 1) is best described

as ua short, regularly-repeated note (call repeti-

tion rate 1.15 calls/see) having a carrier

frequency of approximately 2500 Hy, with o

number of side bands generated by the modu-

lating frequency of 410-420 Hz (the pulse

repetition rate of the call). Presumably, be-

cuuse of the resonating characteristics ol the

sound-producing structures of the emitter,

some of the side bands (particularly those at

820-850 Hz and 2041-2129 Hz: Table 1),

logether with the carrier frequency, are

emphasised.

Family: LEPTODACTYLIDAE

Linnodynastes lasmaniensis Gunther, 1858

Muterials SAM R23862-64, UAZ B624, Newry

Stn, 33 km B at W.A. border, 8.17, 1982,

KHz 5

0,2 0.4

SEC

Fiz. 1. Auchospeetragram (45 Hz bandpass) of the

call of Cyelorqua vagiiny (SAM R23861 ‘Table

L), Newry Stn, N-T,. 28 km E of W.A. border.

Welt bith sir temperature at the calling site,

264,

M. J. TYLER, G. F. WATSON & M. DAVIES

Small numbers were heard calling from

flooded grassland adjacent to the Victoria

Highway at sites 245-33 km E of W.A,

border. We collected specimens only at the

eastern end of this transect where 2 group

occupicd a flooded depression surrounded by

trees, The frogs were breeding and approxi-

mately ten freshly-laid foam nests were

observed there.

Four calling males were collected. Their

snout-vent Jengths range 39.2-44.1 mm. All

exhibit a bilateral abnormality of the first

finger, consisting of a lateral displacement of

the terminal partion of the digit.

Martin & Tyler (1978) reported the dis-

covery of un isolated population of this south-

eastern Australian species on the northern

boundary of the Kununurra township in W.A.

They proposed that the species had been intro-

duced accidentally from South Australia

beneath transportable homes manufactured xt

the Adelaide suburb of Pooraks, We cannot

propose a similar origin for this N.T, popula-

tion, becuuse there are no transporiable homes

at Or near the site, and there is no direct

contact between Newry Station and South

Australia.

The call has been described by Martin &

Tyler (1978) as “a short, staccato rattle con-

sisting of 5-7 notes”. Vulues of call com-

ponents for the single individusl recorded at

Newry Station generally fall within the range

of variation reported by Martin & Tyler

(1978), The call consisted of 7 notes with ga

call duration of 22 msee, a note duration of

10 msee (values for Kumunurra individuals

ranged from 12-16 msee) and dominant fre-

quency of 1950 Hz; water temperature at the

calling site was 26,7°C,

Uperoleia borealis Tyler, Davies & Martin,

1981

Miuterial: SAM R23834, 5.8 km E. of Victoria

River, 2.ii,1982; SAM R23835, 12.9 km E of

Victoria River, 2.1),1982,

This species previously was known fron’ the

northeastern portion of the Kimberley, ranging

Irom Wyndham to Lake Argyle (Tyler et at

198tc). We found specimens only at the above

localities which are in the N.T. ahout 250 km

due east of Kununurra, W.A, In addition we

heard the species calling at sites 11.2 and 1427

km E of Victoria River,

Acknowledgments

This field! visit was supported in part by an

ARGS grant to M. J, ‘Tyler. and was under-

FROGS OF THE NORTHERN TERRITORY 245

taken under field licence No. 774 issued by

the Northern Territory Wildlife Commission.

We are indebted to Dr M. J. Littlejohn and

Mr P. Harrison for assistance with call analysis

and interpretation, to Mr J. Toner of the

Australian National University for the use of

facilities at the North Australia Research Unit,

and to the CSIRO Wildlife Research Division

for use of a trailer. We thank Mr B. Penning-

ton of Ansett Airlines for assistance with

transportation of freight. Finally we thank

Simon Fisher for valuable field assistance and

companionship.

References

Dincerkus, G, & UHLER, L. D. (1977) Enzyme

clearing of Alcian blue stained whole small

vertebrates for demonstration of cartilage.

Stain Technol. 52, 229-232.

Martin, A. A. & TyLer, M. J. (1978). The intro-

duction into Western Australia of the frog

Limnodynastes tasmaniensis. Aust. Zool. 19,

320-324.

TyLer, M. J. (1968) Papuan hylid frogs of the

genus Hyla. Zool. Verhand. 96, 1-203.

(1976) Frogs. (William Collins: Sydney.)

—— (1982) Frogs, 2nd Edition. (William

Collins: Sydney.)

, Davies, M. & Martin, A. A. (1981a) Frog

fauna of the Northern Territory: new distri-

butional records and the description of a new

species. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 105, 149-154.

' , & (1981b) New and redis-

covered species of frogs from the Derby-Broome

area of Western Australia. Rec. W. Aust. Mus.

9, 147-172.

——, ——, & —— (1981c) Australian frogs of

the leptodactylid genus Uperoleia Gray, Aust.

J. Zool., Suppl. (79), 1-64.

7 & (1983) Frogs of the Barkly

Tableland, Northern Territory. Trans. R. Soc.

S. Aust, 107, 237-242.

ON THE STATUS OF SOME NEMATODE SPECIES FROM AUSTRALIAN

BIRDS

BY PATRICIA M. MAWSON

Summary

Identification of nematodes from Australian birds, now in progress, has shown that the following

nomenclatural changes and comments are necessary.

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

247

ON THE STATUS OF SOME NEMATODE SPECIES FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS

Identification ot tenuttodes from Australian

birds, now in pvogress, hay shown that the follow-

ing nomenclatural changes und comments are

hecessary.

Comment on Anisakis diomedene (Linstow)4

(Ascaridoiden: Anisakidac); A, dlomedede was

collected from Diemedea brachvura in the north

Pacific Ocean by the Challenger Expedition, The

Chullenger material was examined by Buylis* and

identified as belonging to the genus Antisakiv

Dujardin, 1845. Since then this species has been

placed in Contracacéum Railfiet and Henry, 1912,

by seversl authorst.45, in Anisahist., and In Ani-

sakis, syn Stomacheus®.

The most abvious differences between Anisakis

spp. and Contracaccum spp. ure the absence of

Interhibra and of intestinal and oesophageal

appendices in Anisukiv, In A. diomedeae interlabia

and oesophageal and intestinal appendages are

absent. ‘Vhere is however a thick ribbon-like ox-

cretory canal, one of the features noted by Hart-

wich" as characterisic of the Anisakinae. This is

particularly large in A_ diomedeae and may have

been mistaken by some authors (as it wos by

Johnston, pers. comm, c. 1940) for an intestinal

caecum, Johnston and Muwson? give descriplion

and figures of the species.

Anisakiy is said to occur only io marine mam-

mil, This note is ta draw attention to ihe

identity of the species und to the later accounts of

Baylis and Johnstog & Mawson. It is probable that

these ave the only wuthors quoted here who have

examined specimens of A, diomedeae, Further

work may lead to the erection of a new pens

for the Species, but it canool be considered as

belonging to Contracaeen,

A, diomedeue is. very commonly found in alba-

jrosses und petrely from the oteuns siround Aus-

tralia,

'Linstow, O, ven. (1888). Rep. Voyage H.M.S.

Challenger 1874-1876 23, 1-18.

?Baylis, WA. (1923), Parasitology tS. 1-15,

Wohnuston, T, HM. (1938). Rep. Aust. Antaret.

Fxped. (1911-1914) Ser. C, 10, 1-31,

'Varagutl, § (1961), Systema Aelminthum, Vor.

HL Prot New York. 680 pp.

"Davey, 1. (1971), 0, Helminth. 45, 51-72.

‘Yorke, W, & Maplestone, P, A. The nematode

parasites Of vertebrites London, 436 pp.

TJohonston, ‘f.H. & Mawson, P.M. (1945). Rep.

Brit. Aust. NLZ, Antaret Exped Series B

S12), 73-160.

Sibaylis, WAL ( (920), Parasitology 12, 284-2Ad

Propased nomenclatural changes:

In Heterskoiden: Meterakidae:

Heterakis banerafti (Johnston) to Odenterakis

bancrajtt, Odonterakis’ was erected for Hetera-

kinae in which the spicules are equal and non-

wlate and in which labial grooves are present. It

is distinguished from Aeterakis by these features

and by the presence of three small interlabia, All

these features are present in the type material of

WW, bancrofti and in other material from the sume

host species, so the nomenclatural change is neces-

sa'y.

Odonterdkis spp. have up to the present been

recorded only from South American birds, maimly

tinumous. The Australian records ore mostly from

the Brush Turkey, Aleermra larlomi, though there

is one record From a Wonga Pigeon, Levcosarcia

melanaleuea,

In Acuarioidac: Acuariniae:

Acudria curvicala Johnston and Mawson!?, 1a A.

authurs (Rud.)™". The appearance and measure-

menis of the single fermale worm on which the

descriplion of Acnuria cervicola was based are

close to those of the numerous specimens of A.

anthuris now known trom Corvus spp, fram many

parts of Austidiat™ and the species are con-

sidered synonymous,

Eechiauria querquedulae Johnston and Maw-

son! 160 A. aneinata (Rud, EL querquedulae,

described from a single female fram Anas pih-

herifrons, was differentiated from EB. vaeinata

mainly by the size of the body spines. I 16 now

considercd that this falls within the natural

variqhon in size of spines seen in EB. uncinate iden:

tified from the same and related hogts in Aus:

trial, Thas B. querquedulae becomes a synonym

of E. wicinani,

"Hartwich, Go (197d). In CLI, Keys to the

Nemutode parusites of verlebrates. No, 2. R. C.

Anderson, A. G. Chabad, and S&S, Willmatt,

Eds, Commonw. Agric. Bur., Farnham Royal,

Englund, 15 pp,

Wiohnstone, Te He (1912). 7.

NUS.W. 26, 84.122,

USkriabin, K. 1 & Schikhobalova, N. Vo (1947)-

Dokl. Akad. Nauk, SS.S.R, 18, 719-770,

Johnston, T. WL. & Mawson, P.M. (1941), Rec.

Atist, Mus. 21. 9-16.

Rudolphi, C, A, (7819). Eptozvorum synopsis

cut ucecdunt muntissa duplex et indices locnple-

tissimi. Berlin, 811 pp,

und Proc. R. Soc.

248

14Mawson, P. M. (1972). Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 16Johnston, T. H. & Mawson, P. M. (1942).

96, 139-147. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 66, 60-70.

15Mawson, P. M., Angel, L. M. & Edmonds, S. J.

unpublished.

PATRICIA M. MAWSON, South Australian Museum, Adelaide, S. Aust. 5000.

LANDSCAPE MODULES FOR EARTH SCIENCE RESEARCH

BY G. G. RILEY AND A. R. MILNES

Summary

Studies of the surficial geology of terrestial landscapes and the distribution of soils benefit

significantly from accurate visual conceptions of the landscapes and landforms. An appreciation of

landscape is usually acquired by examining topographic maps and stereographic pairs of aerial

photographs in conjunction with observations in the field, but we could only achieve this familiarity

in our recent project areas after protracted periods of field work. Consequently, during investigation

of the Cainzoic geology and geomorphology of Kangaroo Island, and of the distribution of soils on

river terraces flanking the Hindmarsh River on southern Fleurieu Peninsula, South Australia, we

developed a simple adaptation of the “layer method” (see for example Coggins & Helford) to

construct three-dimensional landscape models with different degrees of topographic exaggeration,

based on maps published at various scales.

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

249

LANDSCAPE MODELS FOR EARTH SCIENCE RESEARCH

Studies of the surficial geology of terrestrial

landscapes and the distribution of soils benefit

significantly from accurate visual conceptions of

the landscapes and landforms, An appreciation of

landscape is usually acquired by examining topo-

graphic maps and stereoscopic pairs of aerial

photographs in conjunction with observations in

the field, but we could only achieve this familiarity

in our recent project areas after protracted periods

of field work. Consequently, during investigation

of the Cainozoic geology and geomorphology of

Kangaroo Island, and of the distribution of soils

on river terraces flanking the Hindmarsh River on

southern Fleurieu Peninsula, South Australia, we

developed a simple adaptation of the “layer

method” (see for example Coggins & Helford!)

to construct three-dimensional landscape models

with different degrees of topographic exaggeration,

based on maps published at various scales.

Layer-contour models of landscapes and land-

forms have been widely used!.*, and the method

of construction of block diagrams from contour

maps is well known. There are sophisticated soft-

ware packages for depictions of landscapes

based on computer technology, but these are

not readily accessible nor are they of as much

practical use as models constructed by the method

we propose because of our requirement for details

of locations, geology and other information, The

models provide an immediate visual conception

of the entire landscape and enhance particular

morphological features, depending on the degree

of vertical exaggeration utilized. Moreover,

selected landforms or sections of the landscape of

significance in the particular investigation can

be isolated for more detailed examination and

illustration by photographing the models from

different directions.

Polystyrene foam sheets comprise the basic

construction material, together with the published

map (topographic map, orthophoto contour map,

topographic cadastral orthophotomap, or geo-

logical map with topographic data) selected as

appropriate for the particular project. Particle

board 15 mm thick, cut to the size of the map,

is used as the baseboard for the model.

Depending on the vertical exaggeration of relief

required for a model of the landscape area under

consideration, polystyrene foam sheet of appro-

priate thickness is chosen to represent the topo-

graphic interval on the published map. This choice

involves consideration of both the time available

for construction of the model and the integrity

of the model with respect to the real landscape.

The lowest topographic contour on the map is

carefully cut to shape using a small swivelling-

coping saw frame

(metal)

nmichrome wire.

ceramic insulator

hookup wire leads

to power supply

Fig. 1. Hot-wire cutter.

blade scalpel, and the excised map areas below

this elevation are glued in place on the base-

board. The remaining portion of the map is posi-

tioned on a_ polystyrene foam sheet and

held in place with steel dressmaking pins, and a

hot-wire cutter is used to shape the foam sheet

accurately along the topographic contour. The

cutter (Fig. 1) is constructed from a coping-saw

frame, with the blade replaced by 0.4 mm

nichrome wire insulated from the frame by a

ceramic bead. Two lengths of hook-up wire con-

nect the handle end of the saw frame and the

insulated end of the nichrome wire to a current-

controlled DC power supply. A current of 1A at

3V heats the nichrome wire sufficiently to cut

and seal the foam sheet cleanly and accurately:

the foam decomposes if the wire temperature

is too high, The resulting template, with the map

removed, is glued to the baseboard, A water-

based latex glue is necessary because polystyrene

is dissolved by most glues with an organic solvent

base. Dressmaking pins are used to hold the foam

template in place until the glue sets.

Fig. 2. Relief model in process of construction

with templates representing successively higher

topographic contours glued in position.

250

The next highest topographic contour on the

map remnant is then carefully cut out using the

swivelling-blade scalpel, producing a thin map

strip: this is glued into position on the margins

of the polystyrene foam template. The new map

remnant is pinned in place on a sheet of foam,

and the second template is made and glued in

position. The relief model (Fig. 2) grows as the

steps are repeated. With the map strips glued in

place, the model incorporates all the information

contained within the original map sheet, includ-

ing details of location and other geographic or

geologic features. Alternatively, the final product

may be a simple relief model without the super-

imposed map information,

Fig. 3. Simple relief model of Dudley Peninsula,

Kangaroo Island. Horizontal scale 1:50 000.

Four of the several models constructed during

our research studies are illustrated here. The

model of Dudley Peninsula on Kangaroo Island

(Fig. 3) is one of simple relief at 1:50 000 hori-

zontal scale with a vertical exaggeration of 25

times, It has been used as a guide for determining

the distribution of Cainozoic marine sediments

and associated calcretes in relation to the high-

level, deeply weathered and ferruginised plateau

region in the north.

At 1:2500 scale and with a vertical exaggeration

of about 6 times, the model of the lower reaches

of the Hindmarsh River on southern Fleurieu Penin-

sula (Fig. 4) illustrates well the various alluvial

terraces in relation to the adjacent low hills, The

model is used as a guide for interpreting the evolu-

tion of the terraces and the distribution of various

soil types on them.

Constructed from a geological map with topo-

graphic data, the model of the Encounter Bay

area (Fig. 5) illustrates the distribution of Permo-

Carboniferous glacigene sediments in valleys cut

into Cambrian granites and metasediments.

Quaternary sediments occupy the modern low-

lands, and deep-weathering profiles with associated

zones of ferruginisation mantle the bedrock and

the Late Palaeozoic glacigene sediments in high-

land areas on the western side of the model.

Fig. 4. Relief model of lower reaches of Hind-

marsh River, southern Fleurieu Peninsula, South

Australia, at 1:2500 horizontal scale. Model

has superimposed topographic cadastral ortho-

photomap.

Fig. 5. Relief model of Encounter 1:63 360 geo-

logical map sheet.

Using a cadastral map at 1:10 000 horizontal

scale, a relief model with 10 times vertical ex-

aggeration was constructed of part of the

MacDonnell Ranges and adjacent Todd River

Plain southeast of Alice Springs (Fig. 6). In

order to model the steep ridges of Heavitree

Quartzite constituting the ranges, it was necessary

to use 25 mm thick polystyrene foam sheet to

represent 25 m contour intervals at elevations

above 575 m. The resulting model illustrates

clearly the distribution of mesas with siliceous

duricrust caprock along the southern margin of

the ranges, and provides the basis for interpre-

tation of the mesas as remnants of an ancient

piedmont landscape.

Despite their obvious limitations, we have

found the models to be invaluable, not only in

presenting observations in the manner of the

CSIRO Land Research Series, but as research tools

in gaining rapid appreciation of the morphology

of the areas being examined, in studying the

relationships of pedological and geochemical data

251

with landscape morphology, and in generally faci-

litating discussions of field relationships back in

the laboratory. The method of construction is not

particularly time-consuming, but necessitates cure-

ful inspection of the map being modelled, so that

detailed features may be noted that might other-

wise have been overlooked.

In the light of the availability of improved con-

tour maps, including the large-scale orthophoto-

map, we consider that our method for construct-

ing reasonably accurate landscape models has

much to commend it to research workers in earth

and environmental sciences,

Fig, 6. Relief model at 1:10 000 horizontal scale We thank Richard May for preparing the model

of Emily, Jessie and Undoolya Gaps in Mac- Of the Encounter Bay area, John Coppi for the

Donnell Ranges southeast of Alice Springs. photographic work, and G, Blackburn for con-

Mesas with siliceous duricrust caprock are structive comments on the manuscript. The Publi-

marked “S”. cations Group at CSIRO Division of Soils pre-

pared the diagrams.

Coggins, R, S. & Hefford, R. K. (1966). “The de Laine, R. J. & Clarke, N. (1964). Aust.

Practical Geographer” 2nd Ed. (Longmans: Geogr, 9, 235-236.

Melbourne).

G, G. RILEY and A. R. MILNES, CSIRO Division of Soils, Private Bag No. 2, Glen Osmond, 5.

Aust. 5064. R. P. BOURMAN, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, University of Adelaide,

Private Bag No. 1, Glen Osmond, S. Aust. 5064.

Errata

Trans. R,. Soc. S. Aust. 107(2), 137, 31 May, 1983.

Replace with the following:

Line 8, col. 1: “endangered species”, is how . ..

Lines 3-8, col, 2: y = 0.19 + 0.0005x, r2 = 0.92, n — 30, p < 0.001

y = 0.19 + 0.0003x, r? = 0.96, n = 96,n = 14, p < 0.001

y = 0.08 + 0.0006x, r? = 0.98, n 17, p= <= 0.001

Line 46, col. 2: “to 300 ha sheep-! or lighter...”

cr)

RED-BROWN HARDPANS AND ASSOCIATED SOILS IN AUSTRALIA

BY M. J. WRIGHT

Summary

Here I clarify the position regarding those hardpans in the surficial mantles of the Australian arid

zone that qualify for the preferred informal name “red-brown hardpan”. Descriptions are

remarkably uniform and refer to a typically red to red-brown (2.5YR 4/6-4/8 or 5/6-5/8, moist)

vesicular indurated material, extremely hard both wet and dry. Structure is usually strong but

irregularly platy, or may be blocky. Black manganiferous accumulations are characteristic and

occur on the surfacea and within peds. Irregular vertical partings often occur; secondary carbonate,

where present, coats these and aggregate faces, but may be absent within peds. Fracture and

cleavage faces usually have a dull porous earthly appearance.

252

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

RED-BROWN HARDPANS AND ASSOCIATED SOILS IN AUSTRALIA

Hete I Clarily (he position regardins those hard-

pans in the surficial mantles of the Atiotralian

aiid zone that qualify for the preferred informal

nome “red-brown hardpan’, Descriptiens are

remarkably untform and refer ty a typically reed

to red-brown (2, 5YR 4/6-4/78 or 5/6-5/8, moist}?

vesicular induntted oraterivl, extremely hard bath

wet and dry, Steucwre i usually strongly but

itregularly platy, or may he blocky, Black man-

ganiferous accumulations ace characteristic and

accur on the surfaces and within peds, Irrepular

verlical partings often occur; secondary carbonate,

where present, conts these and aggregate faces, but

may be absent within peds, Fracture and cleavage

fuces usually have a dull porous earthy appearance.

Similar materials are known to occur in arid

ureus elsewhere; in S, Africa* they are known as

“dorbanks", while Soil Tsxonomy! terms them

“duripans’’, In Australia they have been the subject

of pedological studies since 1937° when the Great

Soil Geoup “red and brown hardpan sails’ was

proposed. Despite the fact that.a genetic relation-

ship between soil and hardpan has never been

established adequately, Stace et a/.9 retained this

group in 1968 and included in it all arid zone

hatdpans and associated soils, They did. however.

céntede" that in some occurrences hurdpan may

have formed in older soil stripped before deposi-

tion of younger material, Their Grent Soil Group

approach has a further weakness in that it does

not entertain the possibility of different cementing

agents and ages of formation for similar hurdpans.

Tt will be demonstrated, in support of this

criticism, that as experience has inervased, xu his

the number and variely of soils that occur an red

brown hardpan,

In S. Aust.. at least, geologists nppear to have

ignored hardpans until recently? apart from

recording them as a member of beds op fornsu-

tions" While they have been reported Tfom: many

locslities in the Australian arid zone und yvurtously

numed seldom are enough data presented to allow

even tentative correlation; nor is the cementiny

agent usually established beyond doubt though

stlicn is often implied, These materials lacked uo

formal name until Jessup & Wright! numed dhe

Mieruo = Pedoderm (characteristically containing

a hardpan) in S.A, ond Betlenay & Churehward'!

the Wiluna Hardpan in W.A.

Perhaps the. most definitive studjes sre those o}

Litchfield & Mabbutt!! and Betlensy & Charch-

ward™! in W.A, Betlenay & Churchward formally

named the Wiluna Hardpan and with Brewer!=

suggested that the pritclpal cementing agent is

sitice. althoueh impreenation by iran cexides anel

calelum carbonate Wis apparent al different sites.

Wiluna Uardpan appears the most widespread

ovcurrence of red-brown hardpan but Bettenay &

Churchward were unable to assign it an ubsolute

age! they stated that it may have developed

during the Late Tertiary or Barly Quaternary.

They obsetved that the hardpan osuully occurs in

allivium ond colloviom on surfaces either carved

oul of, or enveloping, the Tower parts of the

“aterite-mantled landscape”, Another bardpan,

known locally as “Murchison cement’, occurs in

younger alluviag from ahis they coneluded that

modern development of hardpan is not precluded

in areas of suitable chmate and wopopraphy.

Litchfield & Mabbutt!! had studied the Wiluna

Hordpan and used chemisity and micromar-

phology to determine that the cement consisted

of lavered argillans/silans, Le. clay deposition

preceding that of siliva, They concluded that soil

drainage Was a significant factor in determining

the depth to hardpan (hardpan was deeper under

sandy soils), and thal fardpan did not occur he-

neath “grumusolic’ (cracking clay) soils in gilgai

depressions. They did not specify an age, presam-

vbly because they accepted bat the hurdpun was

currently forming in the “youngest alluvia”,

Th western NLSSW,, Cawnel studied Occurrences

of hardpan along 100 km of vas pipeline trench,

He accepted that this hardpan had the same basic

construction as the Wiluna Hardpan on the basis

of treattient with HCI and HE. Like Litchfield &

Mubbutt'! he found ahat it was absent bencoth

cracking clay (Up5) soils in gilpai depressions,

amd that depth of formation was controlled by the

texture and nature of the overlying soil.

In nation-wide mapping of Australian soils,

Northcote ef al, drawing on all enrlier soil

studies, recorded 9 principal profile forms (PPP,

Northcote!!) occurring on fed-brown Inudpuns.

Lawriet increased this mumber to 26: current soils

work on 40 study ureas berween Coober Pedy and

Alice Springs (Fig. 1) shows red-brown turdpan

is even more widespread than recorded! and adds

a further 14 PPR. ‘These range from extremely

shallow loum (Um) soils to moderately deep

chicking clay (UgS) soils, This field evidence

Mone strongly suggests that the hirdpuns are nat

directly related to any of the soils occurring

ubove them. In facet, hardpan is found to occur.

not ouly beneath as fitele ug 10 em of loamy soil.

bul also as shallow as 50 em beneath cracking

chiy (Ups) soils in gilgue depressions, in direct

coutllust to the situations quoted tt,

Pic, |. Location of sindy areas and simplified regional peolopy. A puper dealing with rhe yudy areas

is i preparuuort,

Y %Y

s ONO

a , Yj

\AN

254

In recent geological mapping by Benhow? in

the Coober Pedy area,.a hardpan has heen named

“Coober Pedy Paleosol". {1 occurs within Giddinna

Formation, correlated with the upper member of

the previously named Russo Beds‘, Furthermore,

a thin hardpan is described within Bertitos Clay,

overlying Giddinna Formiution, but this description

is inndequate. An early Late Pleistocene ape is

assigned to the Coober Pedy Paleosol, anc a luter

Late Pleistocene age to Benitos Clay’. The

description of the Coober Pedy Paleosol fits that

of red-brown hardpan, which in the present study

areas appears to occur exclusively an, Mesozoic

rocks (Fig. 1) or their detritus Cwhethier alluvial

or colluvial). However, a different hardpan (pre-

sumably younger) that may correlate with the

muterial described as hardpan in Benitos Clay?

Was observed in alluvium Maoking Alberpa Creek.

North of Whyalla, Jessup & Wright" found a

red-brown hardpan (in Ileroo Pedoderm) which

they considered to be an indurated soil. [It was

subsequently traced northwards from Kingoonya

to Coober Pedy'®, Despite extensive chemical and

micromorphological examination, they were unable

to establish any definite cementing agent. Con-

pound joint plane argillan/calcans, in some in-

stances, and zones of strongly oriented clay in

others, may be responsible for induration, Cer-

tainly, none of the samples collected could be

dispersed by normal methods.

ft is apparent from the viewpoints of struti-

eraphy and soil taxonomy that hardpans and their

“related” soils need definitive study. Some uf the

questions currently being studied are:

‘Northcote, K, H., with Beckmunn, G, G,, Bet-

fenay, E., Charchward, H, M., Van Dijk, D. C.,

Dimmock, G. Vi. Hubble, G. D., Isbell, R. F..

McArthur, W. ML, Murtha, G. G., Nicolls,

K. D., Paton, T. R.. Thompson, C. UL, Webb,

A. AY & Wright, MJ. (1960-68), Atlas of

Australian Soils, Sheets 1-50 with explanatory

data. (CSIRO und Melbourne Univ. Press).

“Munsell Sail Color Charts (1974 ed.) (Miinsell

Color; Baltimore, Maryland, U.S.A)

*Mucvicar, C. N.. De Villiers, I. M,. Loxton,

R. F,, Verster, E, Lambrechts, 1. 3. N., Merry-

weather, F, R,, Le Roux, J, Van Rooyen, T. H,

& Von M, Harmese, He, (1977). Soil Claysili-

cetion. A binomial system for “Smith Africa

Sejence Bulletin 390, (Dept. Agric. Tech, Ser

vices).

4US.D.A, Soil Survey Stall (1975). US.D.A.

Aptre, Mundbook No. 436. 745 pp.

STeakle, 1. 3. WH. 61937), 5, Dept, of Agric, WA,

14, 480-494,

Stace, H.C. T., Hubble, G, D., Brewer, R..

Northeote, K. IL, Seeman, 1. R Moaleuhy,

I. Can hardpans be distinguished from, or relates

to, cach other and used confidently as strati-

graphic markers? 2. What is the principal cement-

ing agent in each of the hardpans? 3. Arc there

secondary cementing agents? 4. Wf cementing

agents differ, do sich differences relate to age, to

position in the landscape, or to soil weathering

environments? 5, Are = hardpans — paleosols,

cemented sediments, or both? 6 Are red-brown

hardpans. carrently forming’? (f so, what are the

environmentil conditions necessiry for their

formation?

At present one has to speculate for want of

critical evidence. However. current observations

support the view that formation of red-brown

hardpans has been episedic, commencing perhaps

in the Lite Tertiary. While contemporary forma-

tion cannot he rofed out, it is likely to be extremely

localised, confined to packets where suitable con-

ditions prevail.

The informal nume red-brown hardpan is pre-

ferred because, at least from the pedological views

point, it recopnises the hardpun as an entity dis-

tinct from most soils, While this might be a pross

oversimplificution, it is nevertheless more realistic

at the present state of knowledge than the Great

Soil Group name!, red und brown hardpan soils.

The Factual Key of Northeete!) is also ambiguous

with regard to the definition of soils and soil

associations based on the presence of hardjan as

wu divgnostic horizon. 0) is imperitive that current

research on tandpons clarifies these problems.

M. J., & Wallsworth, FE. G. (1968), A Hand-

buok of Australian Soils. (Rellin),

Thenbow, M, €, (compiler) (1981). COOBER

PEDY snap sheet. Geolovical Atlas of South

Australia, (250,000 series, geol, Sarv. S. Aust.

and explanatory notes Rept, Bh No, 80/153,

‘Barker, 1. C., Barnes, 1. C. & Benbow, M. C.

pioi9). Q. geol. Notes. geol. Surv. S. Aust. 71,

Wessup, RW. & Wright, M. 3, (19711 tieo-

derma 6, 275-308.

"Bettenay, BR. & Churchward, HW. M. (1974), J.

peol, Soc, Aust, 21. 739-80.

M Lifehtietd, Wo WH. & Mabbutf, Do AL 11962). 3

Soil Sci, 134, 148-159,

iBrewer, R., Beltenay, EK. & Chortinvurd, HW. MM,

(1972), CSIRO Aust Div, Sells ‘Vech Pap.

MLawrie, J. W. (1978). Proc. Piret TInt. Ringe

land Congr, pp. 303-306

MNortheote, K. We 1979). A Factual Key for

the Recognition of Aitstratinn Soils. (Rellin}.

MJessup, Ro W. & Norris, Re ML (197100 1. peol,

Soc, Aust, 18, 303-331.

M_T. WRIGHT. CSIKO, Division of Soils, Private Bag 2 P.O. Glen Osmond, S. Aust 964